/ ..^^!" °''% c ^o ■" isn©ii^/ygM ^f^^TES O^ ^ r JUL 1 7 1981 Woods Hole, Mass. ^ Vol. 79, No. 1 January 1981 HOBSON, EDMUND S., WILLIAM N. McFARLAND, and JAMES R. CHESS. Crepuscular and nocturnal activities of Californian nearshore fishes, with con- sideration of their scotopic visual pigments and the photic environment 1 GOODING, REGINALD M., WILLIAM H. NEILL, and ANDREW E. DIZON. Res- piration rates and low-oxygen tolerance limits in skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis 31 BEARDSLEY, GRANT L., and RAMON J. CONSER. An analysis of catch and effort data from the U.S. recreational fishery for billfishes (Istiophoridae) in the western North Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78 49 FERNHOLM, BO, and CARL L. HUBBS. Western Atlantic hagfishes of the genus Eptatretus (Myxinidae) with description of two new species 69 BLACKBURN, MAURICE, and D. L. SERVENTY. Observations on distribution and life history of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, in Australian waters 85 KAPPENMAN, RUSSELL F. A method for growth curve comparisons 95 RICHARDSON, SALLY L. Current knowledge of larvae of sculpins (Pisces: Cottidae and allies) in northeast Pacific genera with notes on intergeneric relationships 103 TOWNSEND, DAVID W, and JOSEPH J. GRAHAM. Growth and age structure of larval Atlantic herring, Clupea harengus harengus, in the Sheepscot River estuary, Maine, as determined by daily growth increments in otoliths 123 KOSLOW, J. ANTHONY. Feeding selectivity of schools of northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, in the Southern California Bight 131 WEBB, P. W, and R. T. COROLLA. Burst swimming performance of northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, larvae 143 UCHIYAMA, JAMES H., and PAUL STRUHSAKER. Age and growth of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, and yellowfin tuna, Thunnus albacares, as indicated by daily growth increments of sagittae 151 RICHARDSON, SALLY L. Pelagic eggs and larve of the deepsea sole, Embas- sichthys bathybius (Pisces: Pleuronectidae), with comments on generic affinities . 163 Notes WEIHS, DANIEL. Effects of swimming path curvature on the energetics of fish motion 171 (Continued on back cover) Seattle, Washington U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Malcolm Baldrlge, Secretary NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION Terry L. Leitzell, Assistant Administrator for Fisheries NATIONAL MARINE FISHERIES SERVICE Fishery Bulletin The Fishery Bulletin carries original research reports and technical notes on investigations in fishery science, engineering, and economics. The Bulletin of the United States Fish Commission was begun in 1881; it became the Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries in 1904 and the Fishery Bulletin of the Fish and Wildlife Service in 1941. Separates were issued as documents through volume 46; the last document was No. 1103. Beginning with volume 47 in 1931 and continuing through volume 62 in 1963, each separate appeared as a numbered bulletin. A new system began in 1963 with volume 63 in which papers are bound together in a single issue of the bulletin instead of being issued individually. Beginning with volume 70, number 1, January 1972, the Fishery Bulletin became a periodical, issued quarterly. In this form, it is available by subscription from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Ofi&ce, Washington, DC 20402. It is also available free in limited numbers to libraries, research institutions, State and Federal agencies, and in exchange for other scientific publications. EDITOR Dr. Jay C. Quast Scientific Editor, Fishery Bulletin Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center Auke Bay Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA P.O. Box 155, Auke Bay, AK 99821 Editorial Committee Dr. Bruce B. Collette Dr. Reuben Lasker National Marine Fisheries Service National Marine Fisheries Service Dr. Edward D. Houde Dr. Jerome J. Pella Chesapeake Biological Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service Dr. Merton C. Ingham Dr. Sally L. Richardson National Marine Fisheries Service Gulf Coast Research Laboratory Kiyoshi G. Fukano, Managing Editor The Fishery Bulletin (USPS 090-870) is published quarterly by Scientific Publications Office, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Room 336, 1 700 Westlake Avenue North, Seattle, WA 98109. Controlled circulation paid to Finance Department, USPS, Washington, DC 20260. Although the contents have not been copyrighted and may be reprinted entirely, reference to source is appreciated. The Secretary of Commerce has determined that the publication of this periodical is necessary in the transaction of the public business required by law of this Department. Use of funds for printing of this periodical has been approved by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget through 31 March 1982. Fishery Bulletin CONTENTS Vol.79, No. 1 January 1981 HOBSON, EDMUND S., WILLIAM N. McFARLAND, and JAMES R. CHESS. Crepuscular and nocturnal activities of Californian nearshore fishes, with con- sideration of their scotopic visual pigments and the photic environment 1 GOODING, REGINALD M., WILLIAM H. NEILL, and ANDREW E. DIZON. Res- piration rates and low-oxygen tolerance limits in skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis 31 BEARDSLEY, GRANT L., and RAMON J. CONSER. An analysis of catch and effort data from the U.S. recreational fishery for billfishes (Istiophoridae) in the western North Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78 49 FERNHOLM, BO, and CARL L. HUBBS. Western Atlantic hagfishes of the genus Eptatretus (Myxinidae) with description of two new species 69 BLACKBURN, MAURICE, and D. L. SERVENTY. Observations on distribution and life history of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, in Australian waters 85 KAPPENMAN, RUSSELL F. A method for growth curve comparisons 95 RICHARDSON, SALLY L. Current knowledge of larvae of sculpins (Pisces: Cottidae and allies) in northeast Pacific genera with notes on intergeneric relationships 103 TOWNSEND, DAVID W, and JOSEPH J. GRAHAM. Growth and age structure of larval Atlantic herring, Clupea harengus harengus, i-n the Sheepscot River estuary, Maine, as determined by daily growth increments in otoliths 123 KOSLOW, J. ANTHONY. Feeding selectivity of schools of northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, in the Southern California Bight 131 WEBB, P. W, and R. T. COROLLA. Burst swimming performance of northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, larvae 143 UCHIYAMA, JAMES H., and PAUL STRUHSAKER. Age and growth of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, and yellowfin tuna, Thunnus albacares, as indicated by daily growth increments of sagittae 151 RICHARDSON, SALLY L. Pelagic eggs and larve of the deepsea sole, Emhas- sichthys bathybius (Pisces: Pleuronectidae), with comments on generic affinities . 163 Notes WEIHS, DANIEL. Effects of swimming path curvature on the energetics of fish motion 171 (Continued on next page) Seattle, Washington 1981 For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402 — Subscription price per year: $14.00 domestic and $17.50 foreign. Cost per single issue; $4.00 domestic and $5.00 foreign. Contents-continued HAYNES, EVAN. Description of Stage II zoeae of snow crab, Chionoecetes bairdi, (Oxyrhyncha, Majidae) from plankton of lower Cook Inlet, Alaska 177 SPOTTE, STEPHEN, and GARY ADAMS. Feeding rate of captive adult female northern fur seals, Callorhinus ursinus 182 KAYA, CALVIN M., ANDREW E. DIZON, and SHARON D. HENDRIX. Induced spawning of a tuna, Euthynnus affinus 185 FROST, KATHRYN J., and LLOYD F LOWRY Trophic importance of some ma- rine gadids in northern Alaska and their body-otolith size relationships 187 WILLIAMS, AUSTIN B., and DAVID McN. WILLIAMS. Carolinian records for American lobster, Homarus americanus, and tropical swimming crab, Callinectes bocourti. Postulated means of dispersal 192 BARKER, SETH L., DAVID W TOWNSEND, and JOHN S. HACUNDA. Mortal- ities of Atlantic herring, Clupea h. harengus, smooth flounder, Liopsetta putnami, and rainbow smelt, Osmerus mordax, larvae exposed to acute thermal shock .... 198 BOWMAN, RAY E. Food of 10 species of northwest Atlantic juvenile groundfish .. 200 LIBBY, DAVID A. Difference in sex ratios of the anadromous alewife, Alosa pseudoharengus , between the top and bottom of a fishway at Damariscotta Lake, Maine 207 AL-JUDAIMI, MANAL M., A. K. JAFRI, and K. A. GEORGE. Proximate compo- sition and nutritive value of some important food fishes from the Arabian Gulf . . 211 Notices NOAA Technical Reports NMFS published during the last 6 months of 1980 213 Vol. 78, No. 4 was published on 28 April 1981. The National Marine Fisheries Service (NMFS) does not approve, rec- ommend or endorse any proprietary product or proprietary material mentioned in this publication. No reference shall be made to NMFS, or to this publication furnished by NMFS, in any advertising or sales pro- motion which would indicate or imply that NMFS approves, recommends or endorses any proprietary product or proprietary material mentioned herein, or which has as its purpose an intent to cause directly or indirectly the advertised product to be used or purchased because of this NMFS publication. CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIAN NEARSHORE FISHES, WITH CONSIDERATION OF THEIR SCOTOPIC VISUAL PIGMENTS AND THE PHOTIC ENVIRONMENT^ Edmund S. Hobson,^ William N. McFarland,^ and James R. Chess^ ABSTRACT Activities in 27 of the major southern Califomian nearshore fish species, with emphasis on trophic relationships, were studied between 1972 and 1975 at Santa Catalina Island. Because these fishes orient primarily by vision, they are strongly influenced by the underwater photic environment, which we define with representative spectra. We center on crepuscular and nocturnal events, but also describe daytime events for comparison. The species that feed mostly by day include Atherinops affinis, Paralabrax clathratus, Girella nigricans, Medialuna califomiensis , Brachyistius frenatus, Cymatogaster aggregata, Damalichthys vacca, Embiotoca Jacksoni, Chromis punctipinnis, Hypsypops rubicunda, Halichoeres semicinctus, Oxyjulis califomica, Semicossyphus pulcher, Alloclinus holderi, Gibbonsia elegans, Heterostichus rostratus, and Coryphopterus nicholsi. Those that feed mostly at night include Scorpaena guttata, Sebastes atrovirens, S. serranoides (subadult), S. serriceps, Xenistius califomiensis, Seriphus politus , Umbrina roncador, and Hyperprosopon argenteum . Those that show no clear diurnal or nocturnal mode include Leiocottus hirundo and Pleuronichthys coenosus. Activity patterns tend to be defined less clearly in the warm-temperate fish communities of Califor- nia than in fish communities of tropical reefs. Included are the twilight patterns of transition between diurnal and nocturnal modes, which are considered to be defined by predation pressures. The lesser definition of twilight patterns in California could mean reduced crepuscular predation there, but we believe that Califomian fishes, too, have evolved under severe threats from crepuscular and nocturnal predators. We suggest this is evidenced in the spectral sensitivities of their scotopic visual pigments, which cluster around 500 nm — the best position for vision during twilight and at night in Califomian coastal waters. Although the scotopic system dominates vision in dim light, the spectral sensitivities of the scotopic pigments are poorly matched to the major forms of incident light at night — moonlight and starlight. Rather, they match twilight and bioluminescence, which favor similar spectral sensitivities. We believe this benefits these fishes most on defense. The match with twilight, when the low levels of incident light shift briefly to shorter wavelengths, enhances vision during the crepuscular periods of intensified threats from predators. And the match with bioluminescence permits fishes to react to threatening moves in nocturnal predators by responding to luminescing plankton that fire in the turbulence generated by these moves. Most fishes that live in southern Califomian coastal waters orient by vision, and so are strongly influenced by the cheiracteristics of underwater light at different times of the diel cycle. Knowing that these variations in light are accompanied by differing behavior patterns in the fishes (Hobson and Chess 1976; Ebeling and Bray 1976), we con- sider here circumstances during twilight and at night, when light is reduced and the fishes' 'Contribution No. 45 from the Catalina Marine Science Center, University of Southern California. ^Southwest Fisheries Center Tiburon Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 3150 Paradise Drive, Tiburon, CA 94920. ^Section of Ecology and Systematics, Division of Biological Sciences, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY 14853. scotopic (dim-light sensitive) visual systems are operating (McFarland and Munz 1975c). A later report will consider circumstances during day- light. We relate the crepuscular and nocturnal ac- tivities of the fishes and their scotopic visual pig- ments to the spectral composition of light in their warm-temperate habitat, and compare these rela- tionships with the similar ties among activities, visual pigments, and light among fishes in tropical waters. We stress trophic relationships, because we con- sider these the major forces shaping activity pat- terns and related sensory systems in these fishes. The species studied are among the more numerous and readily observed in the nearshore warm- temperate eastern Pacific Ocean. Our accounts of Manuscript accepted June 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79, No. 1, 1981. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 their activities cover observations over 15 yr in southern California — from San Diego north to Point Conception — but our more detailed obser- vations, along with the light measurements and analysis of visual pigments, refer to Santa Catalina Island (lat. 33°28 ' N, long. 118°29 ' W), 35 km from the mainland (Figure 1). Here the water is consistently warmer and more transparent than on the adjacent mainland; during our study sur- face temperatures ranged between about 11 ° and 20° C, and underwater visibility generally ex- ceeded 10 m. Thus, when related to comparable data collected earlier in the tropics (Hobson 1968a, 1972, 1974; Munz and McFarland 1973; McFarland and Munz 1975a), these results offer a conserva- tive measure of differences between warm- temperate and tropical habitats. METHODS Determining the Spectral Composition of Submarine Sunlight The spectral distribution of submarine light was measured with a Gtunma 3000R spectroradiome- ter^ mounted in an underwater housing (Munz and McFarland 1973). The instrument, fitted with ■•Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. a cosine receptor head and calibrated in photons per square centimeter per nanometer per second, draws a quantal irradiance spectrum. Radiance of the backlighting along a particular line of sight was measured by restricting the angle of view of the receptor head to a narrow cone (ca. 0.008 steradians). Usually radiance was determined along the zenith, horizontal, and nadir lines of sight. Because we were interested in comparing the spectral distribution of submarine light for differ- ent water conditions and along different lines of sight, results have been normalized and are pre- sented in terms of relative number of photons. The light levels that occur at twilight were beyond the spectroradiometer's sensitivity for measurement of spectral radiance. At twilight, therefore, spec- tral irradiance and not spectral radiance was measured. Irradiance data are reported in terms of absolute numbers of photons. To facilitate comparisons, several of the spectral curves were indexed by calculating their A.P50 val- ues (Munz and McFarland 1973; McFarland and Munz 1975a). The AP50 value represents the wavelength within the visible spectrum (400-700 nm) that halves the total number of photons under a spectral curve. Because underwater light is usu- ally homochromatic and fairly symmetrical in dis- tribution, XP50 provides a useful single index to a spectrum. 34' 33° Figure 1.— The study area in southern California. Santa Catalina Island was the site of detailed observations, includ- ing light measurements and analysis of visual pigments in fishes. 32° I I i^i^^j I J )■ T-IJll"! J It ri 1 tl { 11 t T f I I I ( I I 1 T't* T! r 15 T f J ^.SANTA BARBARA PT CONCEPTION LOS ANGELES 50 100 Ul I— I I— I U-l 1— I J KILOMETERS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 120° 119° 118° HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES Determining Activity Patterns in Fishes Our accounts of activity patterns in the fishes stem from direct underwater observations and from study of gut contents. The underwater obser- vations were made using scuba and by snorkehng during all hours of day and night. The gut contents were from fishes speared at all hours of day and night, but primarily during late afternoon and within 2 h before first morning light — times which best distinguish diurnal and nocturnal habits. To study the gut contents, the digestive tract of each fish specimen was removed im- mediately after collection and preserved in a 10% formaldehyde solution. Analysis under a binocu- lar dissecting scope was performed later in the laboratory. We note in this report only major food items that we believe might add insight to our accounts of diel activity patterns. More detailed accounts of the food habits are given elsewhere (Hobson and Chess 1976; in prep.). All mea- surements offish size are of standard length (SL). Although our accounts center on crepuscular and nocturnal events, we describe enough of what happens in daylight to consider these events in the context of diel patterns. Determining Spectral Photosensitivity of Fishes each retinal extract was homogeneous or con- tained more than one visual pigment. Pigment analysis was assisted by a computer program (Munz and Allen 1968) designed to test for homogeneity and also to characterize each visual pigment by estimation of the wavelength of peak absorbance (Amax)- Generally, the major photo- labile component in a vertebrate retinal extract is the rod visual pigment, and the minor compo- nent(s) is the cone visual pigment(s) (Munz and McFarland 1975; McFarland and Munz 1975b). Thus, in each retinal extract from the Catalina samples the dominant pigment is considered the scotopic (or rod) visual pigment. UNDERWATER PHOTIC ENVIRONMENT Coastal waters characteristically absorb light of shorter wavelengths than do oceanic waters be- cause they contain more dissolved organic matter. They also scatter more light due to higher con- centrations of suspended particulate matter. As a result, they transmit light of longer wavelengths, and, therefore, under a midday sun appear blue- green, rather than blue like the open sea (see Jer- lov 1968 for classification of water tj^es). Starting with these well-established facts, we attempted to characterize the underwater photic environment at Santa Catalina Island. Two techniques were used to obtain both fresh, and dark-adapted retinae from the fishes. Some of the specimens were captured alive and dark- adapted under laboratory conditions, whereas others were speared at night and immediately placed in dark containers before being returned to the laboratory for additional treatment. Spectral absorbance characteristics of the visual pigments from these retinae were determined by standard procedures. After each fish was dark-adapted, its eyes were enucleated, the retinae were removed under deep red light (Wratten #2 filter), and then frozen in 4% alum. Later the retinae were thawed, washed in triplicate, centrifuged, and the pellet extracted in 2% digitonin. Sonication of the pellet at 0° C for 1 min assisted solubilization of the visual pigment. After centrifugation, 10% by vol- ume of saturated sodium borate and 10% by vol- ume of 0.2 M hydroxylamine were added to the supernatant and the spectral absorbance of the extracted visual pigment recorded with a Cary 14 spectrophotometer. The method of partial bleach- ing (Dartnall 1952) was applied to test whether Submarine Daylight Midday Spectra Essentially all submarine daylight meaningful to fishes is produced by the sun. Although photic conditions during midday are not our concern in this paper (they will be considered in a later re- port), midday spectra effectively illustrate some fundamental aspects of the photic environment that are needed to understand scotopic vision in fishes. In particular, midday spectra can be used to define the spectral transmission characteristics of a given water mass, and so provide means to com- pare the photic environment in Californian coast- al waters with the photic conditions elsewhere, including comparisons of crepuscular and noctur- nal circumstances between different habitats. Californian coastal waters vary greatly in the way they transmit light, and while some of this variation is seasonal, much is shorter term and irregular. At times during our study at Santa Catalina very little suspended material was pres- FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 ent, and underwater visibility exceeded 20 m, but at other times heavy phytoplankton blooms re- duced visibility to <3 m. (We define underwater visibility as the horizontal distance over which we could see major environmental features in day- light.) Most of the time, however, conditions were intermediate between these extremes. Although our irregular observations of visibility do not permit a precise figure, we estimate that at least 70% of the time horizontal visibility in daylight was between 8 and 12 m. The images that we saw in these more typical conditions were relatively sharp — more like images seen in clear water than the relatively fuzzy images seen in turbid water. So in characterizing the photic environment in the surface waters, we recognize three sets of con- ditions: 1) clear — when visibility exceeded about 15 m amid relatively small amounts of visible sus- pended or dissolved materials, 2) bloom — when visibility was less than about 5 m owing to dense phytoplankton, and 3) typical — the more usual condition, when circumstances were intermediate to the above. Thus, when visibility was about 20 m in July 1976, the spectral radiance showed the essential blue-greenness of the water (Figure 2: clear curve), whereas when visibility was about 3 m during a phytoplankton bloom in May 1974, the spectra showed a shift toward the yellow-green ^TROPICAL SEA H— 3m 100 ./' » / \ / \^ BLOOM ""/ * \ / \ ^.-^- TYPICAL (f) o / ^ \ / /T ^'^ CLEAR 1- / ^ N. / / \y^^ o / ^ N. / A I ' X ^ Tt /\ a / ^ /v / \ 50 r * / \ / 1 ~ UJ V v/ 1 > A \ \ 1- / \ \ \ < _i / \ \ \ UJ / "S, \ \ a: * / "^ >v \ \ y >v ^^ \. " u/^ ^ ^V^ ^"^'''*''^^ ^-<^:.: t: : :.:•: .......^^ ,-: ....... A...:: \ ^ — H ' -^ ^^. 400 500 600 7C WAVELENGTH (nm) Figure 2. — Horizontal spectral radiance in warm-temperate coastal waters (Santa Catalina Island) under typical, bloom, and clear conditions, and in a tropical sea (Enewetak Atoll) under clear conditions. Cosine detector was 3 m below surface oriented horizontally (90° from the zenith). All values normalized, with typical condition at Santa Catalina stippled for emphasis. wavelengths (with >50% of the photons in the visible spectrum located between 500 and 600 nm; Figure 2: bloom curve). Under bloom conditions, therefore, the radiance was similar to that of lakes rich in plants (McFarland and Munz 1975c). The more usual intermediate condition, however, was closer to the clear than to the bloom condition (Figure 2: typical curve). Nevertheless, even under the clearest conditions encountered at Santa Catalina, the water was greener than it was under similar circumstances in a tropical lagoon (Figure 2: tropical-sea curve). The spectra depicted in Figure 2 represent a horizontal view, which effectively measures the background spacelight (or horizontal backlight- ing) against which the fishes studied here see most objects. At the same time we also measured downwelling and upwelling spectra, but they add nothing to the topics considered in this paper that is not illustrated by the horizontal readings. So they will be included in our later paper on photic conditions during midday. Twilight Spectra The broad spectrum of downwelling light in near-surface waters at Santa Catalina shifted to- ward the blue during twilight (Figures 3,4), even though skylight acquires relatively more red photons at this time. Fading daylight characteris- tically loses photons between 550 and 700 nm more rapidly than it loses photons below 550 nm, so that as twilight progresses the proportion of photons at the shorter wavelengths steadily in- creases (McFarland and Munz 1975c; McFarland et al. 1979). The pattern varies in response to changing local conditions, however. For example, on 21 November 1974, events at day's end pro- ceeded typically under a clear sky until shortly after sunset (Figure 3, top and middle panels). At this time, the sky suddenly was covered by a layer of cirrostratus clouds and immediately acquired a red-orange hue (through refraction of the sun's rays). Although we did not record atmospheric spectra at this time, an underwater spectrum re- corded 10 min after sunset (Figure 3, bottom panel) was essentially flattened across the visible wavelengths. Other variations in the twilight shift to shorter wavelengths occur under differing water conditions, as exemplified by a weakening of the phenomenon during phytoplankton blooms (Figure 4). The extent of the blue shift during underwater twilight can be measured by the HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES 8 o .3 CM E .^ .2 N CO z o I- o X a. .08 .04 PRESUNSET-30min,Z at 3m POSTSUNSET- lOmin M 400 500 600 WAVELENGTH (nm) 700 Figure 3. — Changes in down welling submarine spectral irradiance through sunset near the surface at Santa Catalina Island under typical conditions. The shift toward the shorter wavelengths typical of surface waters at sunset (McFarland and Munz 1975c) is apparent in the upper and center graphs, where those wavelengths that divide the number of visible photons into equal quarters are identified by P25, P50, and P75. The bottom graph represents the underwater spectrum when a thin layer of clouds moved over the sky at about 300 m altitude and demonstrates some of the variability that can stem from meteorological events. changes in APso- Thus, during our observations under typical conditions, A.P5Q shifted from a pre- sunset value of 527 to 509 nm (Figure 3), and during bloom conditions from 540 to 528 nm (Fig- ure 4). Presumably the APgQ would have been closer to 500 nm had we made comparable mea- surements during twilight when the water was exceptionally clear. Submarine Nightlight Moonlight, starlight, and bioluminescence are the major forms of submarine nightlight meaning- ful to fishes. We did not measure these during the present study, but data available in the literature permit a comparison of the spectra each would be expected to produce in water like that typical of Santa Catalina (Figure 5). The influence of moon- light and starlight on activities in fishes and other aquatic predators has been discussed (e.g., Hobson 1965, 1966). This report considers the role of bioluminescent emissions of epipelagic plankton in predator- prey relationships. Epipelagic bioluminescent plankton, especially dinoflagellates, are widespread in most neritic and oceanic seas (Tett and Kelley 1973). Sailing narra- tives and logbooks of open water mariners are replete with descriptions of the "phosphorescent FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 400 500 600 WAVELENGTH (nm) 700 Figure 4. — Changes in downwelling submarine light through sunset near the surface at Santa Catalina Island during a phyto- plankton bloom. Although there is relatively less blue light under these conditions, a blue shift at and following sunset is nonetheless evident when compared with daylight under bloom conditions (Figure 2). P25, Pgf,, and P^j identify those wavelengths that divide the number of visible photons into equal quarters. fire" of the ship's wake, the luminescent shroud about porpoises running before the bow, and the showers of sparks that trail fishes dashing below the hull. At Santa Catalina Island, biolumines- cence from plankton was visible in the water at all times of the year, more so at some times than at others. Most marine bioluminescent plankton emit light in the blue region of the spectrum (Tett and Kelley 1973). For example, light from Gonyaulax polyedra and Noctiluca miliaris (which is repre- sentative of most dinoflagellates) peaks near 475 nm, and more than half of the photons are emitted below 500 nm (Hastings and Sweeney 1957; Nicol 1958). Because of the skewed emission spectra from these organisms (Figure 6), however, fishes close to the luminescent source would absorb more photons with visual pigments that have k^^^ val- ues nearer 490 nm than 475 nm. In any event, the spectral quality of biolumines- cence received by the fishes is modified by two variables — distance the fishes are from the light's source, and clarity of the intervening water. Be- cause the water more effectively absorbs the longer than the shorter wavelengths, a fish farther from a target in clear water will receive relatively more photons at the shorter wavelengths (Figure 6, upper panel). Water clarity, however, has an HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES BIOLUMIN. - MOONLIGHT 00 ~ \ r\ /''^^ \\ ~ \ / \ / / \\ "" ^\j \ / / / \ / / / / / / \ * STARLIGHT 1 / / \ •y 1 \ / / \ I 1 y^ / 1 1 «. 1 -/— J^ \ \ 50 — r "S^ \ \ \ — / 1 / \ / 1/ \ \ N / /f \ \^ \ — / /\ \ \\ / / j \ ^ X / / \ v\. ~ " / 1 \ -/ 1 \ Wv ^ / 1 1 1 \ 1 1 " - 100 400 500 600 WAVELENGTH (nm) 700 Figure 5. — Underwater spectral distributions of moonlight, starlight, and bioluminescence. Values for bioluminescence are for Noctiluca miliaris, as given by Nicol (1958), at zero range. Values for moonlight and starlight, based on measurements in Munz and McFarland (1977), are for down welling light at zero range from a flat spectral reflector at a depth of 3 m in water equivalent to typical conditions at Santa Catalina Island ( Jerlov 1968, Coastal Type 1). even greater effect than distance on the attenua- tion and spectral modification of submarine light. In the typical water we encountered at Santa Catalina, for example, there was a fairly high transmission of light between 425 and 575 nm. As light travels from a source like N. miliaris under these conditions its radiance attenuates slowly and its spectrum shifts only slightly (Figure 6, middle panel). On the other hand, as the same light travels through water heavily loaded with phytoplankton it attenuates rapidly and there is a marked and continuous spectral shift toward the green (Figure 6, lower panel). ACTIVITY PATTERNS AND VISUAL PIGMENTS IN FISHES Because the photic environment contrasts sharply between day and night, those visually orienting fishes that are adapted to diurnal condi- tions should be less suited to feed after dark, while those adapted to nocturnal conditions should be less suited to feed by day. This expectation has been supported in studies of temperate species, both marine (Hobson and Chess 1976; Ebeling and Bray 1976) and freshwater (Emery 1973; Helfman 1979), just as it has in studies of marine fishes in 400 500 600 WAVELENGTH (nm) Figure 6. — Attenuation and spectral distribution of light emit- ted by Noctiluca miliaris over distance in water of differing clarities. The three panels of the figure each represent a different water type (clarity), as defined by Jerlov (1968): Type lA (upper) is equivalent to clear tropical seas; Coastal Type 1 (middle) is equivalent to typical conditions at Santa Catalina Island; and Coastal Type 7 (lower) is equivalent to conditions of heavy phytoplankton bloom at Santa Catalina. The heavy outer curve in each panel represents the light emitted by A'^. miliaris (left axes) at zero range, and so is the same in each water type. The inner curves in each panel represent relative attenuation of light at distances ( in meters ) indicated by the accompanying numbers. The broken line in each panel represents the transmission values/meter (right axes) for that water type, as given by Jerlov (1968). the tropics (Hobson 1965, 1968a, 1972, 1974, 1975; Starck and Davis 1966; Collette and Talbot 1972; Smith and Tyler 1972; Vivien 1973). Thus, in con- sidering the impact of diel variations in the photic environment it is meaningful to distinguish diur- nal and nocturnal species, even though some near- shore fishes feed at all hours — many by changing their food or tactics between day and night, e.g., the serranids Epinephelus labriformis in the Gulf of California (Hobson 1968a) and E. merra in the Indian Ocean (Harmelin- Vivien and Bouchon 1976) and the mullid Parupeneus bifasciatus in Hawaii (Hobson 1974). FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 We consider 27 of the most abundant fish species in the nearshore waters at Santa Catalina Island, describing what each does during twilight and at night, and noting the wavelengths of light to which the scotopic system of each is most sensitive (A^^^). In examining the retinae from the fishes, we noted whether the visual pigments were homogeneous. Significantly, there were no sec- ondary pigments in 12 species and only a trace in 5. Secondary pigments, which presumably are cone pigments (Munz and McFarland 1975), were present in 10 species and abundant in only 3. The data are given below, grouped according to that segment of the diel cycle when the species obtains most of its food. It is important that we observed only slight variation in the A^iax of any one species. Fishes That Feed Primarily by Day Some of the fishes that feed primarily by day are known to be inactive at night, but evidence of nocturnal inactivity remains lacking for others, and still others are known to feed routinely after dark. The predominantly diurnal Californian fishes considered in this paper, along with certain of their visual characteristics, are listed in Table 1. The following accounts of diel activities emphasize crepuscular and nocturnal habits. Table L — Some southern Californian marine fishes that feed primarily by day, with the spectral absorbance maximum (^niax^ of pigments extracted from their retinae. Other Family and species ^max^95%C.I. N pigments' Atherinidae: Atherinops affinis^ 505.8 2 Serranidae: Paralabrax clathratus' 498.8±2.0 4 + Kyphosidae: Girella nigricans 498 .3± 1.0 3 Medialuna californiensis 496.9 2 + Embiotocidae: Brachyistius frenatus 500.9±0.5 3 Cymatogaster aggregata 500.4±4.0 3 + Damalichthys vacca 500.9 2 + Embiotoca jacksoni^ 500.8 2 + Pomacentridae: Chromis punctipinnis^ 496.1 1 + Hypsypops rubicunda 496.3±0.1 3 Labridae: Halichoeres semicinctus^ 513.2±7.4 3 + + Oxyjuiis californica' 511.8 1 + + Semicossyphus pulcher^ 496.7±3.5 3 + + Clinidae: Alloclinus holderi 496.5 2 Gibbonsia elegans 499.7+8.9 3 + Heterostichus rostratus 499.7±2.0 4 T Gobiidae: Coryphopterus nichoisi' 497.9 1 Mean" 499.1 Range" 496.1-505.8 'Other than the primary pigment: = none; T = trace; + = <10%; ++ = >10%. ^Visual pigments for these species were also studied by Munz (1957, 1958b, c, 1964). He reported similar A^iax values for all but £ jacksoni, which he listed (Munz 1958b) as 506 nm. The difference can be attributed to varying amounts of secondary pigments in his extracts, which can bias the \max estimates if not taken into account ^Visual pigments in these species are porphyropsins, which are based on the aldehyde of Vitamin A2. Pigments in all other species are rhodopsins. which are based on the aldehyde of Vitamin At. ^Halichoeres semicinctus and O. californica excluded owing to basic differences in their pigments (see footnote 3, above). Atherinidae: Atherinops affinis The topsmelt aggregates by day in the surface waters close to kelp forests, but at night most larger individuals move away from the kelp and disperse close beneath the water's surface over adjacent deeper water. At first we suspected these larger individuals might feed after dark. Their movements are similar to those of tropical Pacific atherinids of the genus Pranesus, which are known to be nocturnal feeders (Hobson and Chess 1973; Hobson 1974; Major 1977), and nocturnal habits are widespread in other planktivorous atherinids, including A //anei^a harringtonensis in the tropical Atlantic Ocean (Starck and Davis 1966). Furthermore, we have often seen Atherinops affinis feed at night next to illumi- nated piers, although we consider this an artificial situation. Despite the evidence of nocturnal feeding in other atherinids, however, our suspicions concern- ing A. affinis were contradicted by examination of gut contents. Of 22 individuals (129-219 mm SL, x = 168.8) collected at davni as they reassembled in schools along the outer edge of kelp forests, 19 were empty, 2 contained just a few fish scales, and 1 contained calanoids and cyphonautes larvae that appeared recently ingested — probably since sun- rise that morning. At least some of the smaller A. affinis remain close to the kelp at night, but there is little evidence that they feed during that period. Of 10 (82-160 mm SL, jc = 102.4) collected close to kelp during the hour before dawn, 9 were empty. The one with food, however, contained three gam- marids and one isopod that obviously had been taken at night. In contrast, there is ample evi- dence that A. affinis feeds intensively during the day. We routinely observed this species feeding in the surface waters during all daylight hours, and only 1 of 10 (126-190 mm SL, 3c = 158.6) collected from a large aggregation during midafternoon lacked food in its gut; the other 9 contained x = 1,325 prey items, mostly cladocerans and copepods. 8 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES Serranidae: Paralabrax dathratus The kelp bass progresses through three major ontogenetic phases based on trophic relationships. The first phase includes juveniles up to about 65 mm SL that feed primarily on zooplankton during the day and pass the night sheltered amid vegeta- tion. The third phase includes the largest individuals — those exceeding about 165 mm SL — which are increasingly piscivorous with growth and may be primarily crepuscular (al- though limitations in our data leave the feeding chronology at this larger size in question). In this paper we consider individuals represent- ing the second phase — subadult fish between 65 and 165 mm SL. Individuals of this size feed mostly on crustaceans that live on or close to a substrate by day and swim in the water column after dark, including certain gammarid and caprellid am- phipods, isopods, cumaceans, mysids, and cari- deans. The subadult P. dathratus capture these crustaceans mainly by day close to benthic cover. Most subadult P. dathratus do not feed at night. Only 42% (13 of 31, 72-163 mm SL, x = 110.3) of those collected during the hour before sunrise con- tained prey, whereas there was prey in 96% (51 of 53, 68-153 mm SL, x = 107.9) of those collected during the afternoon. Whether or not the subadult P. dathratus feeds at night, however, seems related to their location. Most of them are amid rocks and vegetation at night, just as during the day, and here they seem to feed little, if at all. Of 16 (95-146 mm SL,x = 108.6) collected in these surroundings during the hour before dawn, only 1 (6%) had food in its stomach (a moderately digested caridean). Nocturnal feeding in subadult P. dathratus seems to occur mostly in those individuals that move after dark out over open sand (Figure 7) — a habitat only infrequently occupied by them during the day. Of the 16 (72-148 mm SL, X = 97.4) collected in such places during the hour before dawn 12 (75%) contained food, much of it fresh. Major prey were the cumacean Cyclaspis nuhila (4 mm), the gammarids Am- pelisca cristata (3-4 mm) and Amphideutopus oculatus (2-3 mm), and the caprellid Caprella californica (6-8 mm) — all species that are active on or close above the sand at night. Clearly, the nocturnal move over the sand is a well established feeding pattern in subadult P. dathratus. Nevertheless, even under these special cir- cumstances predatory success after dark seems limited. Among specimens from open sand at night the stomachs containing food averaged only 30% full, compared with 66% full for specimens from a wide range of diurnal circumstances. FIGURE 7. — A subadult Paralabrax clathmtus , about 150 mm SL, alert on open sand at night. Some individuals of this size feed under these circumstances even while larger and smaller conspecifics are inactive close to rocks and algae. Apparently the sand reflects enough moonlight and starlight to permit some predominantly diurnal fishes to feed in these surroundings at night. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Kyphosidae: Girella nigricans The opaleye does not seem to feed extensively at night, although our limited observations on this point are somewhat ambiguous. This rather tenu- ous opinion rests heavily on two points. First, the species feeds largely on algae, and various or- ganisms that live on algae — a diet generally indi- cative of diurnal feeding (Hobson 1965, 1974; Viv- ien 1973). Second, kyphosids generally have been found to feed by day (e.g., Randall 1967). On the other hand, observations of kyphosids at night have indicated a variable condition. Kyphosus in- cisor reportedly rests ". . .in sheltered, though not confined, locations on the reef-top" in the Florida Keys (Starck and Davis 1966), andK. elegans has been noted to behave similarly in the Gulf of California (E. S. Hobson unpubl. obs.). ButK. ele- gans, at least, is alert in these shelters, and K. cinerascens in Hawaii not only swims above the reef at night, but may feed at this time as well (Hobson 1974). The presence of G. nigricans ". . .in holes or on the bottom . . ." at night led Ebeling and Bray (1976) to consider it diurnal. We agree with them even though we frequently saw this species swimming in the water column after dark, espe- cially in the kelp forest. Limited study of gut contents suggest reduced feeding in some G. nigricans at night. One (201 mm) sampled among the rocks during the hour before sunrise had an empty stomach, but the stomach of another (264 mm) that was swimming above the bottom at this time was 20% full. Sixty- seven percent of the gut contents in this second individual consisted of motile animals, including gammarids, caprellids, carideans, and the gas- tropod Tricolia sp., whereas only 10% consisted of algae. This material, much of it fresh, differed sharply from that in gut contents of individuals that had been feeding by day. Benthic algae consti- tuted 81% of the material in all 11 individuals (173-255 mm SL, x = 206) that were collected during the afternoon, and whose stomachs aver- aged 75% full; essentially all other items in these individuals were sessile organisms that encrust, or live attached to, algae — principally bryozoans and hydroids. Kyphosidae: Medialuna calif orniensis We consider the halfmoon primarily diurnal for essentially the same tenuous reasons that led us to this conclusion for G. nigricans: many of its close relatives reportedly are diurnal, as documented above, and it feeds heavily on plants (Limbaugh 1955; Quast 1968), a diet widely associated with diurnal foraging. Furthermore, we saw M. californiensis , like G. nigricans, in the water col- umn in far fewer numbers at night than during the day. But although we saw G. nigricans in larger numbers close to rocky substrata at night, we saw M. californiensis, which was exceptionally numerous in the kelp forests by day, only in sharp- ly reduced numbers there after dark. Reporting a similar situation in a kelp forest at Santa Barbara, Ebeling and Bray (1976) observed about half as many M. californiensis on their transect line at night as during the day. They summarized their nocturnal observations by stating that this species ". . . often appeared to be more sensitive to our pres- ence than were individuals of other species near the bottom, and we cannot deny the possibility that Medialuna feeds at night." Leading to much the same position, our study of gut contents from 14 specimens (146-243 mm SL,x = 196) collected during the afternoon (Hobson and Chess in prep.) shows that this largely herbivorous species un- questionably feeds by day, but leaves unanswered whether or not it also feeds at night. Embiotocidae: Brachyistius frenatus Although the kelp perch is basically diurnal throughout life, this characteristic can be some- what variable. When less than about 100 mm SL it feeds primarily on zooplankters in the water col- umn, and as it grows larger it increasingly turns to tiny prey — mostly crustaceans — that it picks from vegetation (Hobson and Chess 1976). At night it occurs in most of the same places that it occupies by day, but is more numerous in midwater aggre- gations fully exposed along the outer edges of the kelp forests (Hobson and Chess 1976). Describing the nocturnal condition of this species, Bray and Ebeling (1975) noticed that it "...tended to hang motionlessly along the kelp stipes or even in open water" and added that it was "...quiescent at night and easily caught with a small hand net . . . ." They concluded that B. frenatus feeds ". . . mostly, if not exclusively, during the day" — an opinion based on study of gut contents from specimens collected every 2 h throughout the night. But Hob- son and Chess (1976) reported that while B. fre- natus is primarily diurnal, larger individuals also feed to a limited extent at night. In addition to the data presented in that paper, all of which involved 10 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES specimens <100 mm long, 6 of 14 (102-114 mm SL, X = 106.8) collected during the hour before dawn contained prey, many of them fresh. The major nocturnal prey, which included the gammarid Batea transversa (2-4 mm), the caprellid Caprella californica (8-14 mm), and the isopod Paracercies cordata (1-6 mm), were organisms that rise into the water column at night. We believe these prey were captured in the water column because most were in fish that had been aggregated in midwater outside the seaward edge of a kelp forest. Perhaps Bray and Ebeling (1975) found no evidence of noc- turnal feeding because their sample comprised mostly smaller fish. Significantly, the major or- ganisms apparently taken in the water column at night include the same species picked from the surface of algae by day. Embiotocidae: Cymatogaster aggregata The shiner perch, which is even more variable in its diel behavior than Brachyistius frenatus, has two basic feeding modes: it captures zooplankton, mostly crustaceans, in the water column, and it captures organisms, again mostly crustaceans, that are in, on, or close above a sandy bottom. The planktivorous habit predominates among indi- viduals smaller than about 65 mm SL and con- tinues to be important throughout life, whereas feeding on sand-dwelling forms becomes increas- ingly important to individuals >65 mm SL until it predominates among the largest individuals. The planktivorous habit is diurnal, whereas feeding on or close to a sandy bottom occurs during both day and night, but mostly at night. Thus, the small juveniles are primarily day feeders: of 23 (53-64 mm SL, x - 58.2) collected during the afternoon, 12 (53%) contained food, the major items being zooplankters (mostly copepods). Only two (12%) also included prey that may have been taken from the seafloor (gammarid frag- ments). In comparison, only 2 of 17 (37-64 mm SL, X = 46.5) collected during the hour before dawn contained food: one (58 mm) contained just a few cumacean fragments, but the other (54 mm) con- tained a variety of sand-dwelling crustaceans, some fresh, including the cumacean Cyclaspis nubila (2-4 mm), the gammarid Acuminodeutopus heteruropus (1-2 mm), and the tanaid Leptochelia duhia (2-4 mm), along with sand. The changes in food habits that appear among individuals >65 mm SL were similarly defined. Of 34 (67-110 mm SL, x = 91.8) collected during the afternoon, 27 (79%) contained food presumably taken by day: 19 (70%) of these had fed exclusively on zooplankton (primarily calanoid and cyclopoid copepods and cladocerans), 4 (15% ) had taken only sand-dwellers (primarily tanaids and gam- marids), and 4 (15%) had fed on both zooplankton and sand-dwellers in large numbers (combina- tions of the above forms, with the two types sharp- ly separated in the guts). In comparison, of 46 (66-120 mm SL,x = 85.9) collected during the hour before dawn, 37 (80%) contained prey, many fresh, that appeared for the most part to have been taken at night. Significantly, all these prey were sand- dwellers, the major forms being the cumacean Cyclaspis nubila (2-4 mm), the gammarids Acuminodeutopus heteruropus (1-2 mm) and Am- pelisca christata (2-4 mm), the tanaid Leptochelia duhia (3-4 mm), and the ostracod Euphilomedes carcharondonta (1-2 mm), along with sand. Embiotocidae: Damalichthys vacca and Embiotoca jacksoni Damalichthys vacca, the pile perch, and E. jacksoni, the black perch, both appear to be strictly diurnal feeders. During daytime, adults of D. vacca feed primarily on moUusks and other heav- ily shelled prey, whereas adults of E. jacksoni take an exceptionally wide variety of benthic or- ganisms, including polychaetes, mollusks, gam- marids, caprellids, isopods, and mysids (Lim- baugh 1955; Quast 1968). At night we observed both species hovering close to the seafloor, gener- ally in exposed positions. On the other hand, Ebe- ling and Bray (1976) reported D. vacca "... scat- tered in the water column at night." That neither species feeds after dark is evidenced by the ab- sence of fresh food in their guts at that time (Ebe- ling and Bray 1976). Pomacentridae: Hypsypops rubicunda and Chromis punctipinnis Although the Californian pomacentrids — H. rubicunda, the garibaldi, and C . punctipinnis , the blacksmith — are strictly diurnal fishes that re- main relatively inactive in their nocturnal shel- ters, they nevertheless remain alert throughout the night. Hypsypops rubicunda, in fact, often ap- pears restless as it moves in its shelter place. This species is solitary during both day and night, and its nocturnal shelter is a specific hole or crevice in the well-defined territory that also includes its 11 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 diurnal foraging area (Clarke 1970). In contrast, C. punctipinnis is highly gregarious during both day and night, and often individuals crowd noc- turnal shelters among the rocks. When its noctur- nal resting places are far from its diurnal feeding grounds, C punctipinnis migrates between the two locations during twilight in prominent pro- cessions (Hobson and Chess 1976). These migra- tions tend to be better defined in the evening than in the morning. At times evening migrations began up to 30 min or more before sunset, while at other times they were not evident until about sun- set. Generally, however, the migrations peaked from shortly before sunset until about 15 min af- ter, and then continued at greatly reduced levels for another 10 min or so before ending. Chromis punctipinnis is among the most numerous species on many nearshore reefs in southern California (Limbaugh 1955; Quastl968), and in some places apparently there is insufficient rocky shelter to accommodate at night the vast numbers that forage in the water column by day. In such places excess individuals sometimes clus- ter after dark in dense numbers on the sand next to the reef. Occasionally C. punctipinnis is in the water column at night, but does not seem to feed at this time. This is attested by the empty stomachs of all 11 specimens examined from predawn collec- tions by Hobson and Chess (1976). Labridae: Oxyjulis caltfornica, Halichoeres semicinctus, and Semicossyphus pulch&r The Californian labrids are so obviously quies- cent at night that we have no doubt that, like tropical labrids (Hobson 1965, 1974), they do not feed at this time. Also, like their tropical relatives, they follow precise patterns when shifting be- tween diurnal and nocturnal modes (Hobson 1972; Domm and Domm 1973). Oxyjulis californica, the senorita, buries in the sand at nightfall (Herald 1961) , a habit also attributed to H. semicinctus , the rock wrasse, by Limbaugh (1955), who noted that this species "sleeps buried with head protruding." Feder et al. (1974) repeated this statement, as did Fitch and Lavenberg (1975), who reported that it also "burrows between or under rocks to escape predators or to sleep." We found that H. semicinctus consistently took nocturnal shelter amid low benthic algae (from which it often was unintentionally flushed by our nocturnal ac- tivities). Both O. californica and H. semicinctus were consistent in timing their descent to shelter in the evening, and their rise into the water the next morning. Data on the timing of these events were collected during 1973 and 1974 at Fisher- man's Cove, Santa Catalina Island, in a sand- bottomed habitat dominated by the low brown alga Dictyopteris zonaroides. The last O. califor- nica seen entering the sand on four evenings at this site slipped from view 11-22, x = 16.8, min after sunset, which agrees with Bray and Ebeling (1975), who on three occasions observed this species entering sand and rubble "About 15 min after sunset " The first O. californica seen here on 11 mornings appeared 11-22, x = 15.8, min be- fore sunrise. During the same period at this site the last H. semicinctus seen taking cover on six evenings disappeared 20-24, x = 22.0, min after sunset, and the first to appear on 10 mornings emerged 18-25, x = 22.8, min before sunrise. It may be significant that H. semicinctus , which grows to a larger size, tended to be active later in the evening and earlier in the morning. Among diurnal fishes on tropical reefs, the larger individu- als tend to retire later and rise earlier (Hobson 1972). Comparable data are lacking forS. pulcher, the sheephead (the largest of the three Californian labrids), even though this species was numerous at the observation site during the day. Semicos- syphus pulcher shelters among rocks at night (Hobson 1968b), and probably because the obser- vation site lacked rocks, this species left the area sometime before going under cover. On 4 evenings the last S. pulcher departed the observation site 10-21, X = 18.0, min after sunset, and on 11 morn- ings the first to return arrived 11-24, x = 17.0, min before sunrise. On just one evening, in a nearby rocky area where the species found shelter, the last active S. pulcher was seen 30 min after sunset. Because S. pulcher rested in distinctive shelters and was visible throughout the night (Figure 8), it offered the best opportunity to investigate consis- tency in resting places among individuals. Reportedly, at least some tropical wrasses return each evening to specific resting sites (Winn and Bardach 1960; Starck and Davis 1966; Hobson 1972). So the resting places of nine S. pulcher were located at midnight during November 1973, and then revisited at the same hour once each week for 3 wk. On the first return only two of the nine positions were occupied. No. 3 and No. 5 — both by what appeared to be the same individuals that had been there before. On the second return, again only two positions were occupied: No. 5 seemed to 12 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES Figure 8. — a female Semicossyphus pulcher at rest on the seafloor at night, showing the typical pattern of its nocturnal hues. Its exposed position is common in this and many other noctumally resting diurnal fishes in California. harbor the same fish as before, but this time posi- tion No. 1 contained a small individual not seen before. On the final return, position No. 5 once more was occupied by what seemed to be the same fish. Again, just one other position was filled — No. 6, which harbored the fish seen in position No. 9 on the first night (recognized by a notch in its dorsal fin), but which had gone unseen since then. Thus, only one position, No. 5, sheltered a fish each time. And contrary to what one might expect, of the nine positions. No. 5 offered the least cover. It was sim- ply a shallow depression on the reeftop where the resting fish was largely exposed, and certainly would not seem an effective shelter. Clinidae: Alloclinus holderi, Gibbonsia elegans, and Heterostichus rostratus The three Californian clinids studied here — A. holderi, the island kelpfish; G. elegans , the spotted kelpfish; andH. rostratus, the giant kelpfish — are known to feed regularly by day, based on fresh food in specimens collected during the afternoon (Hob- son and Chess in prep.). But it is difficult to deter- mine relative activity in these highly cryptic fishes because they move so infrequently and, therefore, often go unnoticed even when ftilly ex- posed. Both A. holderi, which sits on rocks, and G. elegans, which sits amid benthic algae, retire to shelter at nightfall, as do various tropical clinids (Starck and Davis 1966; Smith and Tyler 1972). Heterostichus rostratus, on the other hand, often hovers among columns of giant kelp during both day and night (Figure 9). Our data comparing relative feeding activity in H. rostratus between day and night are limited, but indicate that day- time feeding predominates. The one individual (184 mm) collected during the hour before sunrise 13 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Figure 9. — While most of its smaller blennioid relatives go under cover at nightfall, the large clinid Heterostichus rostratus, here amid rising kelp stipes at night, shows a similar attitude at all hours, even though it seems to feed primarily by day. was empty, and the two (163 and 207 mm) collected at midnight contained only well digested frag- ments. In comparison, among eight individuals (234-385 mm SL, jc = 280) collected during midaf- ternoon, four contained fresh food, one contained only well digested fragments, and three were empty. Gobiidae: Coryphoptertts nicholsi Large numbers of the blackeye goby rested in exposed positions on sand bottoms in and around rocks throughout the day, when intermittently, they darted forward, or a short distance into the water column, and snapped at tiny prey. Few, how- ever, were visible at night. Presumably most shel- tered in the reef after dark — a pattern reportedly followed by four species of Coryphopterus in the tropical Atlantic Ocean (Smith and Tyler 1972). Gut contents indicate this species feeds little, if at all, after dark. Among the few individuals seen at night, seven (43-83 mm SL, x = 59.3) were col- lected during the hour before the first morning light; the gut of one was empty, and the other six contained only well digested items. In comparison, all 69 specimens (36-90 mm SL,x = 64.1) collected 14 lOBSON ET AL.; CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES luring the afternoon had food in their guts, with 31 of these (88%) containing recently ingested material. Fishes That Feed Primarily at Night The fishes that feed primarily at night clearly are specialized to detect and capture prey in the dark; nevertheless, under appropriate cir- cumstances some also take prey during the day. The predominantly nocturnal species considered in this paper, w^ith certain of their visual charac- teristics, are listed in Table 2. The following ac- counts of diel activities highlights major features of their crepuscular and nocturnal habits. Scorpaenidae: Scorpaena guttata The sculpin rests immobile among rocks during the day (Figure 10) and generally is difficult to discern owing to its cr5^tic features. Although Table 2. — Some southern Califomian fishes that feed primarily at night, with the spectral absorbance maximum 400 m from the nearest point where the species had been seen during the day (Hobson and Chess 1976). On four evenings we noted when the first salema arrived on this feeding ground, and this 17 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 proved to be betv^een 34 and 40, x = 37.3, min after sunset. Once there, its behavior was much like that described above for nocturnally feeding olive rockfish. Its diet, too, proved similar to that of the rockfish. All 13 individuals (163-170 mm SL, x = 173.7) collected more than 3 h after sunset were full of food, much of it fresh. Prey were organisms that are in the nearshore water column only at night, with major forms being the gammarids Batea transversa (2-4 mm) and Ampelisca cristata (3-8 mm), the caprellid Caprella pilidigita (6-12 mm), the cumacean Cyclaspis nubila (2-4 mm), the mysid Siriella pacifica (4-10 mm), and epitok- ous nereid polychaetes (15 mm). Sciaenidae: Seriphus politus The queenfish schools in relatively inactive as- semblages near shore during the day and dis- perses to feed in the water column at night after moving away from its daytime schooling sites (Hobson and Chess 1976). Thus, its diel activity pattern is similar to that of subadult Sebastes ser- ranoides and X. californiensis, described above. The first Seriphus politus appeared at a nocturnal feeding site on four occasions at 38-60, x = 44, min after sunset. Food and feeding behavior of S. politus also are similar to the other two species. All 31 individuals (114-193 mm SL, x = 151) sampled later than 3 h after sunset contained prey, much of it fresh. All were larger zooplankton that are in the water column only at night, wdth major forms being mysids (Siriella pacifica, 3-11 mm, and Acanthomysis sculpta, 6-11 mm), a gammarid (Batea transversa, 2-4 mm), and an isopod (Paracercies sp., 2-7 mm). Sciaenidae: Umbrina roncador The yellowfin croaker schools close to sandy beaches during the day, and at nightfall disperses here and also to the regions immediately offshore. It feeds on organisms in the sediment, often prob- ing with its snout to make the capture. Most of its foraging seems to occur at night. Of 20 individuals (191-255 mm SL, x - 210.8) collected more than 3 h after sunset, all but 1 contained prey, much of it fresh. Major items were sand-dwelling polychaetes, many of them tubicolous, with Onuphis sp. (15-40 mm) and Nothria stigmaeus (10-20 mm) predominating; other important prey were sand-dwelling gammarids, especially Am- pelisca cristata (2-12 mm), Acuminodeutopus heteruropus (2-3 mm), and Paraphoxus heterocus- pidatus (2-3 mm). Only limited feeding occurs by day, as attested by eight individuals (210-239 mm SL, X = 222.5) collected during the afternoon. Of these, only two contained fresh material (sand- dwelling amphipods, most of them Ampelisca cristata). These same two, and two others, also con- tained extensively digested polychaetes that obvi- ously had been in the guts for some time; the other four (50% of the sample) were empty. Embiotocidae: Hyperprosopon argenteum The walleye surfperch is the only predomi- nantly nocturnal species among the five em- biotocids considered in this paper. It schools inac- tively by day, often close to shore, then disperses at nightfall and moves to feeding grounds some dis- tance away (Hobson and Chess 1976; Ebeling and Bray 1976). It forages in the water column, where it takes the larger zooplankton that are numerous there only after dark. Thus, H. argenteum has habits similar to those of the other nocturnal planktivores described above. Although it usually forages lower in the water column than these others, its diet and feeding behavior also are simi- lar: of 29 individuals (100-157 mm SL, x = 126) collected over nocturnal feeding grounds at night, or from recently formed schools before sunrise, 28 (97%) contained food, much of it fresh. Major prey items were the gammarids Batea transversa (2-4 mm), Ampelisca cristata (3-4 mm), and Ampithoe sp. (4-6 mm); the cumacean Cyclaspis nubila (2-4 mm); the isopod Paracercies sp. (2-5 mm); and the caprellid Caprella pilidigita (4-10 mm). Fishes That Feed Day and Night Only two of the species studied resist classifica- tion as being either primarily diurnal or primarily nocturnal in their feeding activities. Both seem equipped to exploit circumstances that permit ef- fective feeding during all hours of day and night. They are listed in Table 3, along with certain of their visual characteristics. The following ac- counts of their diel foraging activities puts their diurnal and nocturnal habits in perspective. Cottidae: Leiocottus hirundo The lavender sculpin rests immobile in exposed locations on sandy substrata, usually near rocks and algae, at all hours of day and night. On the 18 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES Table 3. — Some southern Califomian fishes that feed day and night, with the spectral absorbance maximum (X^jax' o^ P'8" ments extracted from their retinae. Family and species ^max^95%C.I. N Other pigments' Cottidae: Leiocottus hirundo PleuronectJdae: Pleuronichthys coenosus Mean 500.0 500.9^0.5 500.5 2 3 T 'See Table 1, footnote 1. rare occasions that feeding was observed, this fish moved only a few centimeters to snatch an object in the sand. Eight specimens (130-196 mm SL, jc = 177) were collected from a variety of habitats dur- ing the afternoon. Six (75%) contained food in their stomachs, with the predominant prey being the polychaetes Glycera capitata (30-85 mm), Lumberineris sp. (20-90 mm), and terrebellid ten- tacles. One had taken the gammarid Ampelisca cristata (12 mm), and one a holothurian (17 mm). Comparable data on nocturnal feeding was ob- tained from eight specimens (66-194 mm SL, x = 136) collected during the hour before dawn. Again, six (75%) contained food in their stomachs, with polychaetes — Glycera sp. (35 mm), Nothria stig- matis (8 mm), and a terrebellid (30 mm) — the major prey, though less so than during the day. Gammarids, especially Ampelisca cristata (2-6 mm) were important to these nocturnal individu- als, as was the clam Solemya valvus (8-10 mm). But these differences in prey selection between day and night may relate to fish size rather than to time of feeding: two Leiocottus hirundo collected during the night were smaller (66 and 84 mm) than any taken by day, and it was these that had preyed mostly on gammarids. Aside from these minor differences in food composition, feeding habits appear similar day and night: stomachs of the day feeders averaged 75% full, and contained x = 4.2 items, compared with an average of 69% full andic = 4.8 items for the night feeders. Pleuronectidae: Pleuronichthys coenosus The C-0 turbot rests immobile on sandy sub- strata at all hours of day and night — usually ex- posed but sometimes under a thin layer of sedi- ment. Often it occurs in the same habitat as L. hirundo, but more so than the cottid it ranges into regions of open sand, where its highly variable coloration often matches the surroundings. We have observed feeding only in daylight, when typi- cally this species rests motionless, with body somewhat elevated on dorsal and anal fins and head poised above the substratum (Figure 12). Its mobile, closely set eyes are oriented vertically on a bony ridge, and function almost as if set in a tur- ret. This arrangement permits the fish to scan the seafloor close at hand, probably for moving sedi- ments or other signs of prey that aire just below the surface. Occasionally we have seen individuals that had been immobile in one spot for some time move a meter or so across the seafloor, pause for a moment, and then drive their heads into the sedi- ment. Usually we were unable to see what they had taken, but daytime quarry were identified in the 11 specimens that contained food out of 14 (161-212 mm SL, x = 186) collected from sandy substrata during the afternoon (stomachs aver- aged 47% full). The major prey were polychaetes, especially terrebellid tentacles. Although we did not observe feeding at night, prey were identified in all 11 specimens (159-220 mm SL, x = 183.5) collected during the hour before dawn (stomachs averaged 72% full). Again, polychaetes, especially terrebellid tentacles, predominated. Clearly its trophic relationships are similar to those of L. hirundo, except that it may be more able to feed at night. DISCUSSION Events during twilight and at night in Califor- nian marine habitats can be compared with equivalents on tropical reefs. Tropical activity patterns have been described (Hobson 1965, 1968a, 1972, 1974; Starck and Davis 1966; Collette and Talbot 1972; Smith and Tyler 1972; Vivien 1973), as has scotopic vision in tropical fishes (Munz and McFarland 1973). Below we relate our findings with Californian coastal fishes to these and other studies made elsewhere. First we consider crepus- cular and nocturnal activity patterns and then scotopic spectral sensitivity, first in relation to ambient light, and then to bioluminescence. Activity Patterns In relating diel activity patterns of fishes in Californian waters near Santa Barbara to fishes on tropical reefs, Ebeling and Bray (1976) referred to the Californian species as "kelp-bed" fishes. We assume they implied a broad concept of this term that includes fishes sometimes in kelp forests, but more characteristic of other habitats. This is be- cause the tropical side of their comparison (which 19 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Figure 12. — Pleuronichthys coenosus, which feeds day and night, largely on sand-dwelling polychaetes, has eyes on either side of a bony ridge set almost as if in a turret. This arrangement increases its ability to scan the surrounding seafloor for prey and threatening predators. is based on observations by Hobson 1965, 1968a, 1974; Starck and Davis 1966; and others) involves species (often referred to as coral-reef fishes) from a variety of contiguous habitats. A comparison of diurnal and nocturnal behavior requires a mul- tihabitat view because so many fishes move from one habitat to another between day and night. The general scene in Californian nearshore habitats differs dramatically between day and night. A major aspect of this difference is the sharp drop in observed activity among fishes on reefs after dark. Describing an "aura of desolation . . ." in the "notably lackluster night life, . . ." Ebeling and Bray (1976) considered this feature of kelp forests to be in contrast to tropical reefs. But on tropical reefs, too, one notes less activity at night than during the day (e.g., Starck and Schroeder 1965). Nevertheless, there may be an especially pro- nounced difference where Ebeling and Bray studied, because the relative dearth of nocturnal activities there led them to conclude: "...in kelp beds there is no broad replacement for the 'day shift' of fishes at night." In particular, they re- ported an absence of fishes that move from day- time assemblages on reefs to nocturnal feeding grounds on adjacent sand, and also to there being relatively few nocturnal planktivores. But the situation they described is unlike that which pre- vails in the more southerly waters around Santa Catalina, where many species are most active at night. Following a pattern widespread in the tropics, for example, Xenistius californiensis , Umbrina roncador, Seriphus politus, and Hyper- prosopon argenteum (to mention species consid- ered in this report) are relatively inactive in schools near shore, reefs, or kelp forests by day, and disperse over feeding grounds elsewhere at night. It may be significant, however, that with the exception of//, argenteum, these are species with close tropical affinities (Table 4). In contrasting the relative absence of nocturnal planktivores at their Santa Barbara study site, vdth the many such forms at Santa Catalina (as reported by Hob- son and Chess 1976), Ebeling and Bray suggested 20 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES Table 4. — Geographic affinities' of the fishes studied. I. Warm-temperate representatives of basically tropical families or genera; species tfiat do not range into ttie colder waters northward from central California. Twelve species: Scorpaena guttata Girella nigricans Paralabrax clathralus Chromis punctipinnis Xenistius californiensis l-lypsypops rubicunda Seriphus politus Halichoeres semicinctus Umbrina roncador Oxyjulis californica Medialuna californiensis Semicossyphus pulcher II. Temperate representatives of basically tropical families; species tfiat range widely into the colder waters northward from central California. Two species: Atherinops affinis Coryphopterus nichoisi III. Warm-temperate representatives of temperate families or genera; species that do not range northward from central California. Five species: Sebastes atrovirens Alloclinus holderi S. serriceps Gibbonsia eiegans Leiocottus liirundo IV Representatives of temperate families or genera; species that range widely northward from central California. Eight species: Sebastes serranoides Embiotoca jacksoni Bractiytstius frenatus Hyperprosopon argenteum Cymatogaster aggregata IHeterostichus rostratus Damalichthys vacca Pleuronichthys coenosus 'Based on ranges given in Miller and Lea (1972). that the difference may reflect the proximity of Santa Barbara to Point Conception, the northern boundary of the warm-temperate zoogeographic region (Hubbs 1960; Quast 1968; Briggs 1974). Certainly there is a strong tropical influence in many of the more clearly defined crepuscular and nocturnal activity patterns among southern Californian fishes. Species with the most distinc- tive patterns tend to be warm-temperate represen- tatives of what basically are tropical families. The three Californian labrids, for example, seek and leave nocturnal shelter at precise times relative to sunset and sunrise, just as their tropical relatives do. And the two Californian pomacentrids shelter under reef cover at night in the same manner as tropical pomacentrids. Similarly, of the species listed above that school inactively by day and dis- perse to feed at night, most represent the predom- inantly tropical families Haemulidae and Sci- aenidae. Clearly these behavior patterns are rooted deeply in their tropical ancestry, and are as characteristic of their kind as the more generally recognized morphological features that define their families. Ebeling and Bray recognized the strong influence that ancestral relationships exert on activity patterns, and distinguished "temper- ate derivatives" from "tropical derivatives." (Un- accountably, however, they considered Paralabrax clathratus and Coryphopterus nichoisi to be of temperate stock, even though the affinities of both are predominantly tropical.) These relationships, then, are insightful in understanding how activity patterns are integrated in southern Californian nearshore fish communities. The geographical affinities of the various species (Table 4) are help- ful in gaining an overview of these relationships. Because nearshore communities in warm- temperate southern California mix fishes of tem- perate and tropical affinities, it is tempting to interpret behaviors in terms of interactions be- tween these two lineages. Such comparisons are risky. For example, Ebeling and Bray (1976) stated: "It is paradoxical that the 'tropical deriva- tives' . . .persist in their complex . . . shelter-seeking while many primarily temperate fishes remain exposed." We see no paradox here. On tropical reefs, too, many diurnal fishes remain exposed at night, while others seek cover. Size often influ- ences which strategy is used. For example, while smaller acanthurids (surgeonfishes) and chaetodontids (butterflyfishes) generally are shel- tered, larger members of their families often rest exposed (Hobson 1972, 1974). Ebeling and Bray went on to suggest: ". . . the 'tropical derivatives' may . . .compete more successfully against primar- ily temperate species such as surfperches for shel- ter on the reef." This speculation, too, is unsup- ported by our observations. Most of the temperate species involved here are widespread northward (see Table 4, Group IV), well beyond the ranges of the tropical derivatives, and there too they are exposed at night (E. S. Hobson pers. obs.). We doubt that nocturnal shelter sites are in short supply on California reefs except under ex- ceptional circumstances. The places we identified as resting sites of Semicossyphus pulcher were just sporadically occupied, which seems an un- likely circumstance if there is strong competition for these sites. But clearly there is a shortage of shelter sites where the diurnal planktivore Chromis punctipinnis is so numerous that at night resting individuals overflow from the rocks and actually pile up on the adjacent sand. Apparently this exceptional situation exists where the zoo- plankters on which this fish feeds are abundant by day, but appropriate nocturnal shelter is limited. Significantly, however, the competition for this shelter appears to be intraspecific. A casual appraisal of southern Californian fishes agrees with Ebeling and Bray (1976) that activities among fishes of the kelp-bed community are "... more loosely 'programmed'" than among fishes in tropical reef communities. A similar con- dition has been described for temperate lake fishes 21 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 (Helfman 1979). This position is strengthened by the more clearly defined behavior in the Califor- nian representatives of tropical families. But at least two considerations complicate this compari- son. First, activity patterns, no matter how highly structured, will be less evident in temperate fish communities because a greater proportion of the species there are sedentary. As stated for tropical fishes (Hobson 1972), relative activity in sedentary species is difficult to quantify. Second, and perhaps more important, because there are far fewer species in the temperate habitats, community ac- tivity patterns will be less distinct if only because they are defined by fewer forms. It need not follow that activities of each species are less structured. Despite these cautions, however, it is generally accepted that organisms tend to have less specialized habits where species are fewer, and this circumstance should produce more loosely structured activities. Whether or not activities of individual species are less structured in California than in the tropics, certainly the overall community patterns in California are less clearly defined. In examin- ing the changeovers between diurnal and noctur- nal modes, for example, we found little evidence of the detailed community transition-patterns that tj^ically characterize these phenomena on tropi- cal reefs (Hobson 1972; Collette and Talbot 1972; Domm and Domm 1973; McFarland et al. 1979). In particular, we were unable to clearly define a "quiet period," that 15-20 min segment of twilight on many tropical reefs when smaller fishes — both diurnal and nocturnal — have vacated the water column. Based on studies in the tropics (Hobson 1968a, 1972; Munz and McFarland 1973), the quiet periods are considered times of increased danger from predators when smaller fishes find it adap- tive to avoid exposed positions. So if the quiet periods are less evident in California, it could indi- cate reduced crepuscular predation there. When the sequence of twilight events identified at Santa Catalina Island is related to the timing of the quiet period at Kona, Hawaii (Figure 13), there might appear to be more overlap between the diurnal and nocturnal modes in California. For instance, as the nocturnal juveniles of Sebastes serranoides move into exposed locations (Figure 13, event 5), they sometimes pass above active lab- rids (Figure 13, events 2, 3, and 4) and close to the 'I KONA QUIET PERIGD^I Si H^ m m I CIVIL TWILIGHT ' KONA CAT. Jl± ^ 2JI NAUTICAL TWILIGHT KONA CAT. Sunset 10 20 30 40 TIME IN MINUTES 50 60 Figure 13. — Events during the evening changeover between day and night at one southern Califomian site from August to November 1973, relative to timing of the quiet period at Kona, Hawaii ( Hobson 1972) . ( The Califomian site is illustrated in Hobson and Chess 1976: fig. 2, 3.) Circles represent diurnal species, diamonds represent nocturnal species. Event 1 is based on estimates, events 2-7 on counts, with bars encompassing range, and numbers located at mean. 1. Migration of Chromis punctipinnis to nocturnal resting area: progressive disintegration of bar represents decreasing numbers of individuals in migrating groups (n = 6). 2. Time last Oxyjulis californica was seen active (n = 4). 3. Time last Halichoeres semicinctus was seen active (n = 6). 4. Time last Semicossyphus pulcher departed observation site for nocturnal resting places elsewhere (n =4). 5. Time first Sebastes serranoides appeared at open water feeding ground (« = 5). 6. Time first Xenistius californiensis arrived on feeding ground (n = 4). 7. Time first Seriphus politus arrived on feeding ground (n = 4). Times of civil and nautical twalight are from Nautical Almanac (U.S. Naval Observatory, Washington, D.C.) and are means of times on dates observations were made. 22 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES last migrating Chromis punctipinnis (Figure 13, event 1). But this apparent overlap can be ex- plained without evoking a more relaxed regime. Although the three species of Californian labrids retire relatively late (even considering the longer twilight at temperate latitudes), they grow larger than most of their tropical relatives, and it is gen- erally true that among diurnal fishes larger indi- viduals retire later (Hobson 1972). Similarly, there are tropical equivalents to the relatively early shift made by juvenile S. serranoides to its noctur- nal mode. In the western tropical Pacific Ocean, for example, the largely transparent nocturnal juveniles of some apogonids move away from shel- ter long before their larger adults. Some of them — many < 30 mm long — move out as early as 10 min after sunset (E. S. Hobson unpubl. obs.). This entry into exposed locations at a time when many piscivorous predators hunt most effectively might seem in conflict with the quiet-period con- cept. But in the dim twilight we are not surprised that these inconspicuous little fishes seem to go unseen by the visual hunters that so seriously threaten the more visible adults. Certainly these juveniles go unseen by human eyes at this time, except upon close inspection with a diving light, and so fail to detract from the aura of inactivity that characterizes the quiet period. So what might appear to be a more loosely struc- tured sequence of events during twilight in California may instead reflect the lesser number of species that define the transition pattern there. At least some semblance of a quiet period is evi- dent. On the occasions depicted in Figure 13, the numbers of migrating C. punctipinnis declined sharply about 10 min before the juvenile S. ser- ranoides first appeared, and after that only scat- tered small groups passed that way. Considering the tremendous numbers of C punctipinnis in that area (we have never seen a single species so dom- inant on coral reefs), numerous exceptions from the norm should be expected. Furthermore, major species that occupy the water column at night — Xenistius californiensis and Seriphus politus — did not arrive until about 20 min after the vast majority of C punctipinnis had passed through. So although crisp definition is lacking, there is evi- dence of a quiet period in Californian waters from about 15 to 35 min after sunset. It remains uncertain whether the dangers small- er fishes face during twilight in southern Califor- nian coastal waters are as intense as those faced on tropical reefs. Limited data from gut contents indicate that such major predators as Paralabrax clathratus and Sebastes serriceps are primarily crepuscular when capturing smaller fishes. Unfor- tunately, we can no longer directly observe much of the predation that has influenced the evolution of coastal fishes in southern California. This is be- cause during recent decades populations of the larger predators involved — including the giant seabass, Stereolepis gigas, and the white seabass, Cynoscion nobilis — have been decimated by fishermen. Nevertheless, as we discuss next, the possibility that Californian fishes have faced in- tensified selection pressures during twilight is also indicated by the nature of their scotopic visual pigments. Significantly, despite the varied forms and habits of these fishes, the maximum absorp- tions (Amax) of their scotopic pigments cluster about 500 nm, which indicates strong selection for enhanced photosensitivity over this segment of the spectrum. Scotopic Spectral Sensitivity and Ambient Light Tropical reef fishes have scotopic pigments that cluster about wavelengths that spectrally match twilight, which underwater is bluer than the light of day or night (Munz and McFarland 1973). In developing their Twilight Hypothesis, Munz and McFarland pointed out that because dawn and dusk are the most dangerous times for fishes on tropical reefs (Hobson 1972), even slightly in- creased photosensitivity during twilight may be crucial. The Twilight Hypothesis is a variation of the Sensitivity Hypothesis (Lythgoe 1966), which de- clares that visual sensitivity is improved when absorption of photo pigments matches ambient light. The scotopic pigments of both aquatic and terrestrial vertebrates are known to cluster about narrow wave bands, but at different regions of the spectrum (for review, see McFarland and Munz 1975b). Among fishes, the scotopic pigments broadly match the spectral transmission of the water in which the fishes live (Lythgoe 1972). Deep sea fishes, for example, have scotopic pigments that tend to be even more blue sensitive ( Amax from 478 to 490 nm: Denton and Warren 1956; Munz 1957), than tropical marine fishes (X^ax from 489 to 500 nm: Munz and McFarland 1973), and the pig- ments of freshwater fishes are green sensitive (\„„. from 503 to 540 nm: McFarland and Munz 23 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 1975b). The present study shows that fishes as- sociated with Californian kelp forests have pig- ments that are most sensitive to blue-green light (\max from 496 to 506 nm). If the adaptive advantage of matching ambient light lies in heightened photosensitivity, then the match should be to light that prevails when selec- tion for improved vision is most intense. We are not surprised, therefore, that the k^^ values for fishes in a given habitat match not the light of day or night, but rather the bluer twilight, and thus the fishes are equipped to meet an intensified threat from crepuscular predators. In clear tropi- cal waters, for example, the X^ax values of the scotopic pigments in reef fishes cluster about 492 nm, which in that habitat matches twilight, rather than the greener light of day or night (Munz and McFarland 1977). Of course, the spec- tral position of this match is influenced by the light transmission characteristics of water in that par- ticular habitat. For example, in most fresh waters the match is made above 520 nm, but this position nevertheless approximates the XPsq of twilight in these very green waters and is in fact toward the blue from light that prevails there during day and night (McFarland and Munz 1975c). As could have been predicted from the Sensitiv- ity Hypothesis, the scotopic pigments of fishes in the blue-green coastal water of California cluster at wavelengths intermediate between those of fishes on coral reefs and those of fishes in freshwa- ter, at about 500 nm (Tables 1-3). The match with twilight, however, is less clear in Californian waters than in the other two environments be- cause, we believe, photic conditions in Californian waters are more variable. Nevertheless, the tight clustering of scotopic pigments around 500 nm in the Californian fishes better matches ambient light during twilight than at night. Both moon- light and starlight are richer in red light than daylight or twilight (Munz and McFarland 1977), and for all water conditions we encountered at Santa Catalina Island downwelling light at night would have XP^^ values well above 520 nm (Figure 5). Only during twilight does ambient light un- derwater shift far enough toward the blue-green region of the spectrum (Figures 3, 4) to produce a close match with the visual pigment X^ax- In evaluating the impact of crepuscular pred- ators on the spectral position of scotopic pigments, however, we must not forget that other selection pressures are operating. We would expect scotopic pigments in fishes to be particularly responsive to such alternate pressures at night, which is espe- cially "short of light" (Dartnell 1975). Certainly fishes must be sensitive to the emissions of biolum- inescent organisms, because few visual cues could be more apparent than a flash of light in the dark. Scotopic Spectral Sensitivity and Bioluminescence Bioluminescence often signifies underwater movement. According to Hobson (1966), "In many areas of the sea at night, a moving object is readily observed due to the luminescence of many minute planktonic organisms, mostly protozoans, which light up when disturbed. These organisms are often so numerous that while making observa- tions underwater I have been able to identify, to species, fishes that swam actively among them. This was not because the fish itself was illumi- nated, but rather because there were so many minute luminescent organisms about the fish that its form was essentially traced out in tiny flecks of light." If such cues are evident to human eyes, adapted to a diurnal, terrestrial existence, the ca- pacity to sense and to orient by them must be highly refined in animals like fishes that have evolved in this environment. Bioluminescence offers an especially effective way to detect predators or prey because predator- prey interactions generally involve movement, and luminescence by plankton is greatly increased in the turbulent water around moving objects. We believe, as did Burkenroad (1943), that this fact has had enormous impact on the nocturnal tactics of both predators and prey. The motionless at- titude that characterizes nocturnal planktivorous fishes when they hunt probably is enforced by the need to minimize turbulence in the water about them. By minimizing turbulence they minimize the firing of luminescent organisms that would betray their presence, and so hover unseen in the dark, ready to strike when nearby prey advertise their positions by disturbing the plankton. This tactic is in essence an ambush and probably is effective only at short range. Reasons for this limi- tation are two. First, an attack, once launched, is immediately identified by flashing plankton, thus giving prey more than a short distance away time for evasive maneuvers. Second, a long-range at- tack directed at plankton luminescing around a particular prey may be led to the prey's wake, because the targets that elicited the attack are left behind when the prey darts away. Probably pred- 24 HOBSON ET AL.t CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES ators can be led by luminescent plankton to prey over some distance (Nichol 1962), but we suggest the approach must be made with great stealth to avoid turbulence and resulting luminescence. Surely such limitations preclude many kinds of predatory activities after dark, especially when the prey are as agile as most small fishes. In fact, the diminished threat from predators that smaller reef fishes enjoy at night (Hobson 1973, 1975, 1979) may stem largely from the difficulties predators have at this time moving undetected to within striking range. If fishes use luminescent plankton to detect predators and prey, undoubtedly they have experi- enced strong selection pressures to enhance this detection. An obvious adaptive response to such pressures would be a match of the scotopic visual pigments to the emission spectra of the lumines- cent plankton. Certain vertebrates living at great depths, or in the open ocean, reportedly have scotopic pigments that match the luminescent emissions of organisms with which they interact, socially or as predator or prey (Clarke 1936; Munz 1958a; Lythgoe and Dartnall 1970; McFarland 1971; Locket 1977). These animals, however, inter- act directly with the luminescent organisms, whereas we stress indirect interactions. Of course, the principle is the same either way — detection is enhanced by matching visual pigment absorption to a luminescent emission. The emission spectra of most luminescent plankton, as exemplified by Noctiluca miliaris and Gonyaulax polyedra (Figure 5), indicate that fishes would sense the emitted photons best with blue-sensitive visual pigments that have Xmax val- ues near 490 nm. But this holds only before the light has passed through water. As noted above, the spectrum of light changes as it travels through water, with the degree of change sharply affected by the water's clarity. Clearly any such change will favor a different k^^ value in visual pig- ments. The relative effectiveness of visual pigments with differing X^ax values in waters of differing clarities can be estimated with some simple calcu- lations. Given the relative attenuation of light at each wavelength, which is a fiinction of water type, we can compare the relative photoabsorption of different visual pigments at increasing dis- tances from the luminescent source. Let us con- sider, for example, how a series of pigments with ^max values at 10 nm intervals between 450 and 550 nm, each at 0.4 absorbance units, would ab- sorb the light emitted by Noctiluca as this light passes through differing clarities of seawater, as defined by Jerlov (1968). The relative photoabsorp- tion of each pigment at a given distance from the source can be estimated by multiplying that pig- ment's percentage absorption at each wavelength by the relative amount of light available at that wavelength and then integrating the products over all wavelengths (Figure 14). Thus, to see c CO z o I- o I Q. 00 - jf -H r^ ^ / ^.— RANGE • ,-o-l f lA— -"^ ^ -0 / f ^^^ -r- / / ^0"""^ 1 "**-N».^ -S' ^ \ ^"^v.^ - 50 'y \ L "" : — ^^ ""^^ \ 5 ^ '^^ __«__ _\ * •^ r^. *~~^ o 1 1 J L 1 _L. 1 1 1 1 450 500 WAVELENGTH >v 550 max (nmJ FIGURE 14. — Expected relative effectiveness of visual pigments with differing A^iax values (positioned at wavelengths indicated by circles) in sensing luminescent emissions ofNoctiluca miliaris under varying circumstances. Top curve, for reference, repre- sents effectiveness at zero range (no alteration of emission spec- trum by intervening water); dashed curve (with open circles), for comparison, represents effectiveness at distance of 3 m in clear tropical water (water type lA of Jerlov 1968); three lower curves represent relative effectiveness in waters of decreasing clarity (water types 1, 5, and 7 of Jerlov 1968). Vertical line crosses each curve at the optimal >^max position. Method of calculation in text. luminations from an organism like A/", miliaris at a distance of 3 m in coastal waters (as at Santa Catalina), fishes would best have visual pigments with Amax values between 500 and 510 nm. And as range increases, and water clarity decreases, photodetection of this luminant source would be improved by shifting the \^^ position slightly, but continuously, toward the greener wavelengths (Figure 15). In reality, of course, the reduced visibility in turbid water sharply limits the practical extent of such a shift. During heavy ph5rtoplankton blooms, for example, even large objects in full daylight are 25 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 520 - 510 \ max 500 490 - 2 3 4 5 RANGE IN METERS Figure 15. — Calculated optimum K^^^ position for absorption of luminescent emissions of Noctiluca miliaris at increasing range in waters of differing clarity. Water types I, 1, 5, and 7 of Jerlov (1968). Solid lines = coastal waters of increasing turbid- ity; dashed line = clear tropical water. invisible beyond 2-3 m. Obviously under such con- ditions bioluminescence, too, would be invisible at these distances. Probably most meaningful in- teractions involving fishes and the bioluminescent emissions of plankton occur over distances of just a fev^^ meters or less, and to see bioluminescence at these ranges in the waters of varying visibility that surround Santa Catalina fishes probably would best have visual pigments with k^^^ values at a little above 500 nm (Figure 15). One might expect diurnal fishes to be less sensi- tive than nocturnal or crepuscular fishes to selec- tion pressures on scotopic pigments because they are less active under low light. But among species studied at Santa Catalina the X^^ values scarcely differ between the two groups (diurnal feeders: x = 499.1 nm, range = 496.1-505.8— Table 1; noctur- nal feeders: x = 501 nm, range = 496.1-505.1 — Table 2). Perhaps there is little difference here because many of these diurnal feeders are exposed at night and need means to detect threatening predators. In fact, if the fishes are grouped accord- ing to their relative exposure after dark, rather than by how active they are at this time, their X^ax values show a clear pattern (Table 5). Those fishes that are exposed at night, compared with those that are sheltered, tend to have scotopic pigments with spectral sensitivities closer to what we con- sider optimum for detecting bioluminescence in Californian coastal waters. This would mean that, despite their apparent quiescence, at least many diurnal fishes remain visually alert for potential threats during the night. So the similar X^ax values in the diurnally feed- ing A^/iermops afflnis (505.8 nm) and the noctur- nally feeding Hyperprosopon argenteum (505.1 nm) may answer the similar threats both face while exposed in the water column at night. We assume the increased sensitivity to biolumines- cence would also benefit H. argenteum in feeding, but suspect this advantage would be less forceful. The need to evade predators should be sharper than the need to capture prey. Both needs are criti- cal, but there is less tolerance for error on defense than on offense. A fish as prey is likely to be elimi- nated the first time it errs in responding defen- sively to an attack, but the same fish as an at- tacker may err many times without serious con- sequences. Bioluminescence, triggered by movement, rep- resents a well-defined indicator of immediate danger that can effectively focus selection pres- sures on a narrowly defined adaptive response. Moonlight and starlight would seem less suited for this because neither so effectively identifies specific threats and because the impact of both Table 5. — Relative exposure at night, andAj^j,^ position of scotopic visual pigments in certain southern Californian marine fishes.' Relative exposure at night Species '^max "^ean ''max''a"9e I. Fully exposed in water column Fully exposed on or near seafloor, often on open sand Partially or fully sfieltered by rocks or algae Atherinops affinis Sebastes serranoides Xenistius californiensis Seriphus politus Umbrina roncador Damalichthys vacca Embiotoca jacksoni Scorpaena guttata Sebastes atrovirens^ S. serriceps Paralabrax clathratus Girella nigricans Ctiromis punctipinnis Brachyistius frenatus 502.1 Cymatogaster aggregata Hyperprosopon argenteum Leiocottus tiirundo 501.1 Pleuronichtttys coenosus Hypsypops rubicunda 497.3 Semicossyphus pulctier Alloclinus holder! Heterostichus rostratus Coryphopterus nichoisi 500.4-505.8 500.0-503.1 496.1-499.7 'Of species studied, Medialuna californiensis is excluded because its nocturnal fiabits remain uncertain (see text), and Halichoeres semiclnctus and Oxyjulis californica are excluded because tfiey have a different type of visual pigment (see Table 1, footnote 3). ^Even though S. atrovirens feeds in the water column at night, these activities occur close to rising kelp stipes or just beneath the surface canopy 26 HOBSON ET AL.; CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES tends to be diffused over a greater range of visual circumstances. Bioluminescence is more constant: the spectral compositions of moonlight and star- light change with water depth and atmospheric conditions, but the spectral composition of bioluminescence is independent of these vari- ables. And, of course, there is less light from moon or stars with increased water depth, which, again, is untrue of a bioluminescent emission. So it is not surprising that the narrow range of Xrnax positions in visual pigments of Californian fishes more closely matches bioluminescence than it does moonlight or starlight (Figure 16). Undoubtedly moonlight and starlight have strong influences on nocturnal relationships MOONLIGHT BEST x„„ 400 500 600 WAVELENGTH (nm) 70 Figure 16. — Relationships between the spectral distributions of moonlight, starlight, and bioluminescence (as produced by Noc- tiluca miliaris) in seawater typical of southern California and the spectral sensitivities of fishes that live there. The five curves for each type of light represent the spectral distribution expected to reach a fish at the distance (in meters) indicated by the number that accompemies each curve. The curves depict moon- light and starlight off a flat reflector at a depth of 3 m (using values from Munz and McFarland 1977), and the luminescence of N. miliaris (using values from Nicol 1958), in water equivalent to typical conditions at Santa Catalina Island (Coastal Type 1 of Jerlov 1968). The solid circle on each spectral curve identifies the wavelength to best match with a visual pigment for maximum photosensitivity, and the stippled column represents the spectral range of maximum photosensitivity in scotopic pigments of Californian fishes tXmax^- Note that these coincide only with bioluminescence. among predators and prey. But probably both help fishes more on offense than on defense. Predators can position themselves, and time their attacks, to play both types of light to their advantage, and to the prey's disadvantage. By charging at prey from below, for example, predators view their targets against the water's relatively light surface, while their own movements are masked by the sur- rounding gloom {Hobson 1966). Certainly attacks that so often spring from the shadows would greatly dilute a defensive advantage prey might gain with spectral sensitivities that match moon- light or starlight. Under these circumstances prey face a broad range of threats that calls for a more generalized response. So we can understand why many smaller reef fishes that habitually range into the water column at night stay closer to shel- ter under moonlight (Hobson 1968a). Despite the offensive advantage that certain predators likely gain from moonlight (or star- light), their scotopic visual pigments tend to be better matched to bioluminescence (or twilight), probably because this answers a more pressing need on defense. So it would seem that even those species that have special tactics to use moonlight or starlight to better see their prey must com- promise with visual pigments less than optimal for this task. Included are those nocturnal plank- tivores, like subadult Sebastes serranoides, that characteristically hover tail-down in the water column, where apparently prey are visible to them against moonlight or starlight from above. In- cluded, too, are those predominantly diurnal fishes, like Paralabrax clathratus and Cymatogas- ter aggregata , that apparently are able to hunt at night close to sand where light levels are elevated by reflected moonlight and starlight. We suggest not that their visual pigments are unsuited to see prey by moonlight or starlight, but rather that these pigments simply could have better spectral sensitivities for this particular job (Figure 16). These arguments, favoring bioluminescence over moonlight and starlight as a selective force in determining Xj^ax position, would also favor bioluminescence over twilight. But there is an im- portant difference in this last comparison. Moon- light and starlight would select for spectral posi- tions different from that selected for by bioluminescence, and so a conflict would exist. Twilight, on the other hand, would select for essen- tially the same spectral position as biolumines- cence, so that the two would act in concert (see below). 27 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 If scotopic visual pigments with spectral posi- tions slightly above 500 nm are optimally located to detect bioluminescence in Californian coastal waters, one can see why such pigments occur there in fishes exposed to nocturnal predators. But ques- tions remain concerning why fishes apparently less threatened are consistent in having scotopic pigments positioned slightly under 500 nm. Why are these pigments not loosely positioned above, as well as below, the optimum location? The answer to this question might lie in ancestral relation- ships. In grouping the Californian fishes according to whether their geographical affinities are tropi- cal or temperate (Table 4), our concern was with current relationships. In fact, all these fishes be- long to groups that stem from tropical origins (Berg 1940). The radiation of acanthopterygian^ fishes from a relatively few ancestral forms early in the Cenozoic (Patterson 1964; Romer 1966) has been related (by Hobson 1974) to the concurrent development of modern coral reef communities (Newell 1971). And we have seen that conditions under which coral reefs flourish, compared with conditions in temperate Californian waters, favor in fishes' scotopic visual pigments that are more sensitive to slightly shorter wavelengths. The mean k^^^ of 492 nm that Munz and McFarland (1973) found in the scotopic pigments of coral-reef fishes, compared with the values around 500 nm that characterize Californian fishes, is consistent with the fact that water around coral reefs is gen- erally clearer and more transparent to blue light than water around Santa Catalina (Figure 2). The extent that k^^ values of scotopic pigments in Californian coastal fishes have shifted toward the green from what may have been ancestral posi- tions near 490 nm, and, especially, have become located slightly above 500 nm (the optimal posi- tion in California), may roughly measure the rela- tive strength of nocturnal or crepuscular preda- tion pressures on each species in these greener waters. The argument that scotopic pigments may be positioned to detect bioluminescence can be ex- tended to coral reef fishes. Our calculations show that visual pigments with different Amax values would trap percentages of the light from Noctiluca miliaris as follows: P450 nm = 62%, P475 nm = ^All fishes considered in this paper have been included among the acanthopterygians, or spiny-finned teleosts, although one, Atherinops a f finis, would be relegated by some systematists (e.g., Greenwood et al. 1966) to another group. 94%, P490 nm = 100%, P500 nm = 99%, P525 nm = 93.5%, P550 nm = 79%. Although the peak is broad, the central wavelength for maximum ab- sorption at zero range would be near 495 nm (Fig- ure 14), which is close to the k^^^ of 492 nm in the scotopic pigments of coral-reef fishes. And as dis- tance from the source increases the match be- comes even better (Figure 15). Twilight or Bioluminescence? Whether the clustering and spectral position of visual pigments in warm-temperate and tropical reef fishes is the result of natural selection, or is simply fortuitous, is a complex question. If, as we believe, these features have been refined by in- I tense selection pressures from predators, it re- | mains problematical whether the advantage lies in detecting bioluminescence, or in enhancing photoabsorption during twilight — as suggested by the Twilight Hypothesis. Indeed, both may be important. The scotopic pigments have spectral positions that would be effective in both functions, and the benefits of one would complement the other. Unquestionably, there has been ample time to influence evolution. Bioluminescent plankton have existed since before the first fishes (Seliger 1975), and so has twilight's unique spectrum. Be- cause fishes have experienced these features throughout their history, the slightest favorable adjustment could have been adaptive. Although a 5-10 nm shift in k^^^ position would improve photoabsorption by no more than a few percentage units, even this could have been meaningful. And if selection pressures to detect bioluminescence have, in fact, acted in concert with those to en- hance crepuscular vision, which to us seems likely, then their combined impact certainly would have been a powerful evolutionary force. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We thank Russell Zimmer and his staff at the Catalina Marine Science Center, University of California, especially Robert Given and Larry i Loper, for making facilities available and assist- ' ing us in many ways. For constructive criticism of the manuscript we thank Alfred Ebeling, Univer- sity of California, Santa Barbara; Gene Helfman, University of Georgia; and Richard Rosenblatt, Scripps Institution of Oceanography. Dolores Fussy, Southwest Fisheries Center Tiburon Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service 28 HOBSON ET AL.: CREPUSCULAR AND NOCTURNAL ACTIVITIES OF CALIFORNIA FISHES (NMFS), NOAA, typed the manuscript, and Susan Smith, Southwest Fisheries Center Tiburon Laboratory, NMFS, NOAA, drew Figure 1. Por- tions of this study were supported by N.I.H. Re- search Grant EY-00323 from the National Eye In- stitute. LITERATURE CITED BERG, L. S. 1940. Classification of fishes both recent and fossil. Trav. Inst. Zool. Acad. Sci. U.S.S.R. 5:87-517. BRAY, R. N., AND A. W EBELING. 1975. Food, activity, and habitat of three "picker-type" mi- crocamivorous fishes in the kelp forests off Santa Bar- bara, California. Fish. Bull., U.S. 73:815-829. BRIGGS.J. C. 1974. Marine zoogeography. McGraw-Hill, N.Y, 475 p. BURKENROAD, M. D. 1943. A possible function of bioluminescence. J. Mar. Res. 5:161-164. CLARKE, G. L. 1936. On the depth at which fish can see. Ecology 17:452-456. Clarke, T. A. 1970. Territorial behavior and population dynamics of a pomacentrid fish, the garibaldi, Hypsypops rubicun- da. Ecol. Monogr. 40:189-212. COLLETTE, B. B., AND F H. TALBOT. 1972. Activity patterns of coral reef fishes with emphasis on nocturnal-diurnal changeover. In B. B. Collette andS. A. Earle (editors), Results of theTektite Program: ecology of coral reef fishes, p. 98-124. Nat. Hist. Mus. Los Ang. Cty, Sci. Bull. 14. DARTNALL, H. J. A. 1952. Visual pigment 467, a photosensitive pigment pres- ent in tench retinae. J. Physiol. (Lond.) 116:257-289. 1975. Assessing the fitness of visual pigments for their photic environments. In M. A. AH (editor). Vision in fishes, p. 543-563. Plenum Press, N.Y Denton, e. J., and E J. warren. 1956. Visual pigments of deep-sea fish. Nature (Lond.) 178:1059. DOMM, S. B., AND A. J. DOMM. 1973. The sequence of appearance at davm and disap- pearance at dusk of some coral reef fishes. Pac. Sci. 27: 128-135. EBELING, A. W, AND R. N. BRAY. 1976. Day versus night activity of reef fishes in a kelp forest off Santa Barbara, California. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:703-717. Emery, a. r. 1973. Preliminary comparisons of day and night habits of freshwater fish in Ontario lakes. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 30:761-774. Feder, h. m., C. H. Turner, and C. Limbaugh. 1974. Observations on the fishes associated wdth kelp beds in southern California. Calif. Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 160, 144 p. Fitch, j. e., and r. j. Lavenberg. 1975. Tidepool and nearshore fishes of California. Univ. Calif Press, Berkeley, 156 p. Greenwood, p h., d. e. Rosen, S. H. weitzman, and G. S. Myers. 1966. Phyletic studies of teleostean fishes, with a provi- sional classification of living forms. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 131:341-455. Harmelin- Vivien, M. L., and C. Bouchon. 1976. Feeding behavior of some carnivorous fishes (Ser- ranidae and Scorpaenidae) from Tulear (Madagas- car). Mar. Biol. (Berl.) 37:329-340. Hastings, j. W, and B. M. Sweeney. 1957. The luminescent reaction in extracts of the marine dinoflagellate, Gonyaulax polyedra. J. Cell. Comp. Physiol. 49:209-225. HELFMAN, G. S. 1979. Temporal relationships in a freshwater fish com- munity Ph.D. Thesis, Cornell Univ, Ithaca, N.Y, 258 p. Herald, E.S. 1961. Living fishes of the world. Doubleday, Garden City, N.Y, 304 p. HOBSON, E. S. 1965. Diumal-noctumal activity of some inshore fishes in the Gulf of California. Copeia 1965:291-302. 1966. Visual orientation and feeding in seals and sea lions. Nature (Lond.) 210:326-327. 1968a. Predatory behavior of some inshore fishes in the Gulf of California. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Res. Rep. 73, 92 p. 1968b. Coloration and activity of fishes, day and night. Underwater Nat. 5:6-11. 1972. Activity of Hawaiian reef fishes during the evening and morning transitions between daylight and darkness. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:715-740. 1973. Diel feeding migrations in tropical reef fishes. Hel- gol. wiss. Meeresunters. 24:361-370. 1974. Feeding relationships of teleostean fishes on coral reefs in Kona, Hawaii. Fish. Bull., U.S. 72:915-1031. 1975. Feeding patterns among tropical reef fishes. Am. Sci. 63:382-392. 1979. Interactions between piscivorous fishes and their prey. In H. Clepper (editor), Predator-prey systems in fisheries management, p. 231-242. Sport Fish. Inst., Wash.,D.C. HOBSON, E. S., AND J. R. CHESS. 1973. Feeding oriented movements of the atherinid fish Pranesus pinguis at Majuro Atoll, Marshall Islands. Fish. Bull., U.S. 71:777-786. 1976. Trophic interactions among fishes and zooplankters near shore at Santa Catalina Island, California. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:567-598. HUBBS, C. L. 1960. The marine vertebrates of the outer coast. In Sym- posium: The biogeography of Baja California cuid adjacent seas, p. 134-147. Syst. Zool. JERLOV, N. G. 1968. Optical oceanography. Elsevier, N.Y, 194 p. LIMBAUGH, C. 1955. Fish life in the kelp beds and the effects of kelp harvesting. Univ. Calif. Inst. Mar. Res. Ref 55-9, 158 p. LOCKET, N. A. 1977. Adaptations to the deep-sea environment. In F. Crescitelli (editor), The visual system in vertebrates, p. 67-192. Handb. Sens. Physiol. 7(5). lythgoe, j. N. 1966. Visual pigments and underwater vision. In R. 29 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 1 Bainbridge, G. C. Evans, and O. Rackham (editors), Light as an ecological factor, p. 375-391. Blackwell Sci. Publ., Oxf. 1972. The adaptation of visual pigments to the photic envi- ronment. In H.J. A. Dartnall (editor). Photochemistry of vision, p. 566-603. Handb. Sens. Physiol. 7(1). Lythgoe, J. N., AND H. J. A. Dartnall. 1970. A "Deep Sea Rhodopsin" in a mammal. Nature (Lond.) 227:955-956. Major, P f. 1977. Predator-prey interactions in schooling fishes during periods of twilight: A study of the silverside Pranesus insularum in Hawaii. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:415-426. MCFARLAND, W. N. 1971. Cetacean visual pigments. Vision Res. 11:1065- 1076. mcFarland, w. n., and F W. MUNZ. 1975a. The photic environment of clear tropical seas dur- ing the day Vision Res. 15:1063-1070. 1975b. The evolution of photopic visual pigments in fishes. Vision Res. 15:1071-1080. 1975c. The visible spectrum during twilight and its impli- cations to vision. In G. C. Evans, R. Bainbridge, and O. Rackham (editors). Light as an ecological factor H, p. 249-270. Blackwell Sci. Publ., Oxf McFarland, W. N., J. C. Ogden, and J. N. Lythgoe. 1979. The influence of light on the twilight migrations of grunts. Environ. Biol. Fish. 4:9-22. MILLER, D. J., AND R. N. LEA. 1972. Guide to the coastal marine fishes of California. Calif Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 157, 235 p. MUNZ, F W. 1957. The photosensitive retinal pigments of marine and euryhaline teleost fishes. Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. California, Los Ang., 172 p. 1958a. Photosensitive pigments from the retinae of certain deep-sea fishes. J. Physiol. (Lond.) 140:220-235. 1958b. The photosensitive retinal pigments of fishes from relatively turbid coastal waters. J. Gen. Physiol. 42:445-459. 1958c. Retinal pigments of a labrid fish. Nature (Lond.) 181:1012-1013. 1964. The visual pigments of epipelagic and rocky-shore fishes. Vision Res. 4:441-454. MUNZ, F. W, AND D. M. ALLEN. 1968. Computer-assisted analysis of visual pigments. Vi- sion Res. 8:983-996. MUNZ, F. W, AND W. N. MCFARLAND. 1973. The significance of spectral position in the rhodop- sins of tropical marine fishes. Vision Res. 13:1829-1874. 1975. Presumptive cone pigments extracted from tropical marine fishes. Vision Res. 15:1045-1062. 1977. Evolutionary adaptation of fishes to the photic envi- ronment. In F. Crescitelli (editor). The visual system in vertebrates, p. 193-274. Handb. Sens. Physiol. 7(5). NEWELL, N. D. 1971. An outline history of tropical organic reefs. Am. Mus. Novit. 2465, 37 p. NICOL, J. A. C. 1958. Observations on luminescence in Afocri/uca. J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K. 37:535-549. 1962. Animal luminescence. Adv. Comp. Physiol. Biochem. 1:217-273. PATTERSON, C. 1964. A review of Mesozoic acanthopterygian fishes, with special reference to those of the English Chalk. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. Lond., Ser. B, Biol. Sci. 247:213-482. QUAST, J. C. 1968. Observations on the food of the kelp-bed fishes. In W. J. North and C. L. Hubbs (editors), Utilization of kelp- bed resources in southern California, p. 109-142. Calif. Dep, Fish Game, Fish Bull. 139. Randall, J. E. 1967. Food habits of reef fishes of the West Indies. Stud. Trop. Oceanogr. (Miami) 5:665-847. romer, a. S. 1966. Vertebrate paleontology., 3d ed. Univ. Chicago Press, Chicago, 468 p. SELIGER, H. H. 1975. The origin of bioluminescence. Photochem. Photo- biol. 21:355-361. SMITH, C. L., and J. C. Tyler. 1972. Space resource sharing in a coral reef fish communi- ty. In B. B. Collette and S. A. Earle (editors). Results of the Tektite Program: ecology of coral reef fishes, p. 125- 170. Nat. Hist. Mus. Los Ang. Cty., Sci. Bull. STARCK, W a., II, AND W. P DAVIS. 1966. Night habits of fishes of Alligator Reef, Florida. Icthyol. Aquarium J. 38:313-356. STARCK, W. A., AND R,. E. SCHROEDER. 1965. A coral reef at night. Sea Front. 11:66-79. tett, p b., and m. g. kelley. 1973. Marine bioluminescence. Oceanogr. Mar. Biol. Annu. Rev 11:89-173. Vivien, M. L. 1973. Contribution a I'etude de I'ethologie alimentaire de I'ichthyofaune du platier interne dos recifs corralliens de Tulear (Madagascar). Tethys, Suppl. 5:221-308. WINN, H. E., AND J. E. BARDACH. 1960. Some aspects of the comparative biology of parrot fishes at Bermuda. Zoologica (N.Y) 45:29-34. 30 RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE LIMITS IN SKIPJACK TUNA, KATSUWONUS PELAMIS Reginald M. Gooding/ William H. Neill,'^ and Andrew E. Dizon^ ABSTRACT Oxygen-uptake rates and swimming speeds of voluntarily active skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, at 23°-24° C were measured in the laboratory from captivity-habituated fish (0.6-3.8 kg) and at sea from just-caught fish (L8-2.2 kg). In the shipboard tests, skipjack tuna swam 2-5 lengths/s (length = fork length) and consumed 0.9-2.5 (median = 1.3) mg Oa/g per h during their first 2.2 h of captivity. In laboratory tests, skipjack tuna swam at a mean speed of L4 lengths/s and consumed oxygen at a mean rate of 0.52 mg Oa/g per h. For the laboratory fish, routine swimming speed (S, in lengths/ second) was inversely related to fish weight ( W, in grams) — S = 3.12 - 0.53 logio W; oxygen-uptake rate ( Vq^ , in milligrams Oz/gram per hour) was directly related to both weight and speed (i.e., speed independent of weight effects) — logioVOj = -1-20 + 0.19/logioW + 0.21 S. However, laboratory fish swimming at their characteristic (weight dependent) speeds respired at rates independent of weight. Calculations based on the above interrelations among metabolic rate, swimming speed, and body weight indicated that skipjack tuna of all sizes may have an optimum swimming speed (for maximum distance per unit energy expenditure) near 2.1 lengths/s. Captivity-habituated skipjack tuna (0.8-3.4 kg) also were subjected to a step decrease in concen- tration of dissolved oxygen (O2) at 23°-24° C to determine their responses to acute hypoxia. At levels of O2 below 4 mg/1, voluntary swimming speed increased as O2 declined, reaching 3.9 lengths/s at the lowest test value of O2 , 1.4 mg/1. The 4-h median tolerance limit for low O2 proved similar to the O2 level critical for change in swimming speed, about 4 mg/1. Experimental results are analyzed and compared with those from other fishes to arrive at the following conclusions: 1) The skipjack tuna's "standard" metabolic rate is two to five times that of typical fishes of similar size; 2) the weight exponent for "standard" metabolic rate of skipjack tuna is a positive value near 0.2, as opposed to the -0.2 value tjrpical of fishes; 3) but, because the characteristic swdmming speed of routinely active skipjack tuna is inversely related to weight, routine metabolic rate is virtually independent of fish weight; 4) highly active skipjack tuna can consume oxygen from air-saturated sea water at rates exceeding those known from any other fish of similar size; and 5) the skipjack tuna is relatively inefficient in its use of oxygen and food-energy for swdmming (at least at low speeds) and it dies at O2 levels still well above those lethal for other fishes. Until the mid-1960's the environmental require- ments of commercially important tunas (Scom- bridae) were known mainly from correlations between fishery catch rates and oceanographic conditions (see discussions by Robins 1952; Laev- astu and Rosa 1963; Broadhead and Barrett 1964; Blackburn 1965; Williams 1970; Blackburn and Williams 1975; Matsumoto 1975). With the ad- vent of techniques for studying tunas in captivity (Magnuson 1965; Nakamura 1972), many unre- solved issues of tuna biology could be explored such as feeding and gut-evacuation rates (Mag- nuson 1969), auditory perception (Iversen 1967), visual perception (Nakamura 1968; Tamura et al. 'Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2570 Dole St., Honolulu, HI 96812. ^Department of Wildlife and Fisheries Sciences, Texas A&M University, College Station, TX 77843. Manuscript accepted September 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 1972), thermoperception (Dizon et al. 1974, 1976; Steffel et al. 1976), nerve-muscle physiology (Rayner and Keenan 1967), tissue metabolism (Gordon 1968), respiratory physiology (Stevens 1972), body temperature and thermal inertia (Stevens and Fry 1971; Neill et al. 1976), lethal temperatures (Dizon et al. 1977), swimming me- chanics (Magnuson 1970), and swimming speed as a function of water temperature (Stevens and Fry 1971; Dizon et al. 1977), dissolved oxygen (O2 ) concentration, and salinity (Dizon 1977). In addi- tion, several works of a more integrative nature (Magnuson 1973; Barkley et al. 1978; Kitchell et al. 1978; Stevens and Neill 1978) have drawn heavily on these and unpublished laboratory studies. Among the latter are the experiments documented in this paper on oxygen-uptake rates and limits of tolerance to low oxygen in skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis. 31 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Respiration research on tunas is still quite limited. Besides the present work, there are only four published studies — three involving tuna metabolism (Gordon 1968; Stevens 1972; Brill 1979) and one involving tunas' low^er tolerance limits for O2 (Anonymous 1965). Gordon (1968), using volumetric microrespirometers, determined rates of oxygen uptake in minced preparations of muscle from skipjack tuna and bigeye tuna, Thunnus obesus. Stevens (1972) measured the oxygen concentration of water entering and leaving the gills of restrained, perfused skipjack tuna; from these data he computed oxygen-uptake rate and utilization. Brill (1979), using a similar technique, estimated the relation between stan- dard metabolism and body weight of skipjack tuna. Stevens (1972) also measured oxygen utili- zation in free-swimming skipjack tuna by sam- pling exhaled water collected via opercular can- nulation. Experiments conducted with skipjack tuna at the Kewalo Research Facility provided the earliest estimate of the lower lethal-oxygen limit for a tuna (Anonymous 1965). Our purposes in this work were 1) to determine the magnitude of oxygen-uptake rate in routinely active skipjack tuna, 2) to establish the relation among oxygen-uptake rate, swimming speed, and body weight in skipjack tuna, and 3) to estimate the lowest concentration of O2 that skipjack tuna can withstand for 4 h. The results already have contributed importantly to the development of models of skipjack tuna distribution (Barkley et al. 1978) and bioenergetics (Kitchell et al. 1978). MATERIALS AND METHODS Source and Preexperimental Treatment of Fish for Laboratory Experiments Skipjack tuna were caught by angling in Hawaiian waters at sea-surface temperatures be- tween 23° and 24° C. The fish were transported in 2,400 1 shipboard tanks that were supplied with flowing seawater and supplemental oxygen. Upon arrival at the National Marine Fisheries Service's Kewalo Research Facility in Honolulu, the skipjack tuna were transferred into either 40,000 or 700,000 1 outdoor holding tanks. Naka- mura (1972) described in greater detail the tech- niques that have been developed at the Kewalo Research Facility for transporting and maintain- ing live tunas. The seawater in the holding tanks had 23°-24° M C temperatures, pH 7.4-7.6, 32-33%o salinity, and ~ 6.4-6.7 mg/1 O2. The seawater well that supplied water to the holding tanks was also the source of water for the experimental tanks. At night the holding tanks were illuminated at a low level. Experiments were conducted with fish that had been in captivity 7-26 d. Once the skipjack tuna started feeding (usually within 3-5 d after capture), they were fed to satiation on thawed northern anchovies, Engraulis mordax, or smelt, Allosmerus sp., once a day. Prior to experiments, the fish were fasted for periods ranging from 24 to 27 h, which is more than sufficient time for gut evacuation in skipjack tuna (Magnuson 1969). However, our method of moving fish from the holding to the experimental tanks involved some food ingestion. Two to four hours before data collection, the fish were removed from a holding tank by angling with a baited, barbless hook. Although a small piece of food (1-2 g) was usu- ally swallowed, this transfer technique did select healthy and actively feeding fish. Oxygen- Uptake Experiments in Laboratory Apparatus Two unstirred, sealed respirometers of differ- ent sizes were used. Circulation of water during experiments was provided only by movements of the fish. The larger respirometer was used only during the first of the 10 series of experiments (Table 1). The circular chamber was a vinyl-lined plywood tank, 4.57 m in diameter and 1 m deep, with a cover made of transparent vinyl film bonded to 1 an inflatable tube, 18 cm in cross section, that ' encircled the tank's inner perimeter just below the rim. After the tube was in place and any trapped air had been removed with an electric pump, the clear plastic cover lay over the entire water surface, forming an effective seal. We ini- tially had intended to run all of the experiments with this respirometer. However, it proved to be difficult to operate and visibility of fish within the chamber was poor. Most importantly, a tank of its volume (16,000 1) required a large biomass of fish in each experiment to effect oxygen reduc- tion in a reasonably short period of time. Skipjack tuna are difficult and expensive to capture and maintain; so, to use fish as economically as pos- 32 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA sible, we built a smaller respirometer for the nine subsequent series of experiments. The smaller respirometer consisted of a fiber glass tank, elliptical in the horizontal plane; it held 2,400 1 of water and was 2.44 m long by 1.83 m wide by 0.61 m deep (Figure 1). The top edge of the tank had a 5.0 cm wide lip to which was cemented a 0.9 cm thick sponge-neoprene gasket; on this gasketed lip, there was seated, and firmly clamped, a rigid cover made of 0.4 cm thick transparent acrylic plastic strengthened by three 10 cm wide strips of 6.5 cm thick marine plywood cemented to its outer surface. A short length of 5 cm PVC pipe, which served as a vent and access port, was tapped vertically through the plastic and plywood in the center of the cover. Glued flush with the inside surface of the acrylic, the pipe extended about 8 cm above the water level. An inlet and drain allowed fresh sea water to flow through the chamber at rates up to 190 1/min. Both inlet and drain were valved. By slightly overfilling the chamber before closing the inlet valve, we caused the acrylic cover to bulge up- ward 4 cm at the center. The domed conformation permitted the easy removal of bubbles from the chamber through the vent pipe. A sponge rubber ball, fitted snugly into the pipe during experi- ments, completed the seal. Both respirometers were illuminated with overhead fluorescent lights. Indirect natural light coming through windows and doors was not excluded. Visibility of fish in the smaller respirometer was excellent, permitting detailed observation of fish speed and behavior during an experiment. Dissolved oxygen measurements in both res- pirometers were made with a YSI^ model 51A oxygen-temperature meter coupled with a YSI model 5418 oxygen-temperature probe. For mea- surements in the larger respirometer, water was electrically pumped between the tank and a small acrylic chamber in which the probe was mounted. In experiments involving the smaller respirom- eter, the oxygen-temperature probe was placed inside the tank through the vent pipe in the cover. The probe was vigorously jiggled for about 15 s before each reading of the meter; during the intervals between readings, a sponge rubber ball ^Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, or by Texas A&M University. 2 m STICK CLEAR ACRYLIC TOP 7.5 cm DRAIN Figure l. — The small sized respirometer used in oxygen-uptake experiments 2-10 on skipjack tuna. 33 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 was seated tightly against the cable connecting probe and meter. Calibration of the O2 meter was checked against air-saturated seawater at the start, midpoint, and end of each experimental run; and the temperature readings were frequent- ly verified with a mercury thermometer. As an additional check on the O2 meter's accuracy, readings were twice compared with Winkler de- terminations. The instrument gave stable and reliable readings with accuracy ±0.2 mg O2/I. Oxygen was supplied from standard 6,800 1 cylinders through fine (800 grit) 15 cm aluminum oxide grinding stones (Baldwin 1970) to produce minute bubbles. Preliminary and Control Experiments Preliminary experiments conducted in each respirometer and subsequent work by Dizon (1977) indicated that skipjack tuna demonstrate no overt behavioral manifestations of stress as long as O2 levels are maintained above 4.5 mg O2/I. We thus assumed that the fish under our experimental conditions would exhibit respira- tory independence between 7.0 and 5.0 mg O2/I. All subsequent oxygen-uptake experiments were conducted within that range. The preliminary experiments indicated that 1.5-2.0 g of fish per liter of water consumed oxygen at a rate that would limit a run to <3 h, which we rather arbitrarily set as about the maximum time an experiment should last. Experimental Procedure The 10 series of 4 experiments each were made with groups of 2-8 fish (Table 1). The basic procedures for a series of experimental runs were essentially the same for both respirometers. The detailed procedures, herein described, are for experiments with the small respirometer. Each series of experimental runs started be- tween 0900 and 1100 h and continued through the day and night, into the early hours of the follow- TABLE 1. — Respiration rate experiments with laboratory held skipjack tuna. Length measure is fork length. Fish lot Numbef of fish Mean weight and range (g) Mean length and range (cm) Experi- ment Respiration rate (mg 02/g per h) Mean respiration rate of fish lot Swimming speed (Lis) Mean swimming speed 10 8 3,834(3,114-5,222) 58.6(53.2-68.0) 671 (530-844) 632 (475-805) 36.1 (33.3-39.0) 35.5 (31.5-38.1) 1,719 (1,412-2,026) 44.8 (42.4-47.2) 2,539 (2,411-2,667) 52.8 (52.7-52.8) 1,703 (1,496-1,910) 45.1 (43.5-46.7) 2,178 (1,890-2,467) 49.3 (47.1-51.5) 2 2,790(2,523-3,057) 51.6(49.8-53.3) 1,349 (1,161-1,537) 44.6 (42.4-46.7) 2 2,200 (2,132-2,268) 50.2 (48.3-52.1) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 0.499 0.551 0.506 0.522 0.382 0.555 0.577 0.658 0.395 0.575 Overall means 1,962 46.9 0.522 1.1 1.7 1.8 1.4 1.2 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.4 34 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA ing morning. The skipjack tuna were transferred from the holding tank to the respiration tank through which water was flowing at about 130 1/ min. The fish were observed for 30 min and any that showed unusual behavior was replaced with another fish from the holding tank. Then the cover of the respirometer was installed and the water flow, now supplemented with oxygen, was continued. The animals were allowed to habit- uate until they were schooling and swimming slowly around the chamber at about 1.5 fork lengths/s (L/s) with no overt signs of stress. During this period (1-3 h) O2 concentration in the chamber was maintained at air saturation, 6.9-7.0 mg O2/I. The outlet water valve was then closed, the oxygen shut off, and the inflowing water was reduced to about 10 1/min. The cham- ber was slowly filled with water until the acrylic cover domed; then the inflow of water was stopped. When all bubbles were excluded, the sponge rubber ball was positioned to seal the vent pipe and the first experimental run was begun. At the start of a run, O2 concentration in the respirometer was between 6.9 and 7.0 mg O2/I. Oxygen concentration, temperature, swimming speed, and general behavior of the fish were monitored and recorded every 15 min. Swimming speed was estimated by measuring the mean time for three passes by the fish over a straight line distance of 1-2 m. (A comparison of values ob- tained from this technique with mean speeds during complete circuits of fish in the respi- rometer showed that speed was essentially con- stant and that the technique yielded an accurate measure of mean speed during a given circuit.) When the O2 level in the respirometer had been reduced to 5.0±0.1 mg O2/I, final observations were recorded and the run terminated. A water flow of about 130 1/min and oxygena- tion were then resumed, which quickly brought the O2 in the respirometer up to about 7.0 mg O2/I where it was maintained for from 1 to 1.5 h until the start of the next run. Following the same procedure, three more runs were made with each group of fish. In all of the experiments, the fish appeared to be in as good condition at the end of a four-run series as they had been at the beginning. Oxygen Consumption by Just-Caught Skipjack Tuna Rates of oxygen uptake were measured in 11 tank-lots of skipjack tuna while they were in shipboard transit between the fishing grounds and the shoreside research facility in Honolulu. These observations were made during three sepa- rate fishing trips during December 1972 (Charles H. Gilbert cruise 129). Sea-surface temperature was uniformly 24° C. Apparatus The five transport tanks served as respirom- eters. Except for the type of cover and differences in plumbing, these tanks were almost identical to the smaller laboratory respirometer described above. The cover of each transport tank consisted of an elliptical fiber glass plate with an open hatchway in its center (see fig. 15 in Nakamura 1972). The hatchway was an 80 by 48 cm oval in cross section and extended, chimneylike, 20 cm above the plane of the tank cover. Each cover was tightly bolted to the gasketed rim of its tank. Seawater was pumped through each tank at a nearly constant rate between 150 and 250 1/min. Water entered a tank near the bottom at one end and exited at the top through an outlet in the hatchway wall. Oxygenation equipment like that described for the laboratory experiments was used in each tank to supplement O2 , which was mea- sured with the same type of meter used in labora- tory experiments. Experimental Procedures The transport tanks were made ready before fishing began by establishing a flow of sea- water and 200-300% supersaturation of oxygen. Each fish caught was lowered on the fishing line through a tank's hatch and allowed to escape the barbless hook. On each day, the entire comple- ment of fish was taken from a frenzy-feeding school (Strasburg and Yuen 1960) within a period of about 10 min. A tank-lot ranged from 7 to 12 fish, averaging 1.83-2.22 kg; estimated mean weight of captive fish was the actual mean weight of 20 other fish caught from the same school. Such an estimate is quite accurate because the size of individual fish within a skipjack tuna school is remarkably uniform (Brock 1954). Within 2 h of capture, oxygen-uptake rate ( Vbz) was measured for each of the 11 tank-lots of fish. In each tank the flow of oxygen was stopped and the time was measured for O2 to decline from the saturation level (6.9 mg O2/I) to a 35 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 second level between 6.2 and 5.6 mg O2/I. For three tank-lots of fish, a second measurement of Vbz was made after resaturation of the tank with oxygen. Because the flow of water through the tanks was maintained throughout the 3- to 15-min period of O2 measurement, calculation of Vbz accounted for O2 both supplied to and removed from the tank in the flow of water: d[02]c dt C =([02]/- [02]c)Q-N W Vo, which gives, upon integration and solution for Vo^ , Vo, = ([O2]/- [02]c)-Q N W t)) where Vbz [O2]/ (l-exp(-Q • C"' = oxygen-uptake rate (milligrams 02/gram per hour), = concentration of O2 in incurrent water (milligrams 02/liter), = concentration of O2 in tank and in excurrent water (milligrams 02/liter), Q = water exchange rate ( liter s/hoiir), N = number of fish in tank, W = estimated mean weight of fish (grams), C = operating volume of tank (liters), t = time (hours) for oxygen concentra- tion in tank to decline from [ O2 ]/ toLOzlc- Low-Oxygen Tolerance Experiments Apparatus The tank used for the low-oxygen tolerance experiments was identical to the smaller respi- rometer tank but was uncovered and was supplied with unaerated water (0.5 mg O2/I) directly from the seawater well. During the time it took to fill the tank, the water took up atmospheric oxygen and O2 increased to 1.4 mg O2/I. Experimental Procedure Twelve experiments were made, using 21 skip- jack tuna (Table 2). The fish for six of the experi- ments were the same pair that had been used for a preceding series of oxygen-uptake experiments. For the other six experiments, skipjack tuna were taken directly from a holding tank. The fish were Table 2. — Swimming speed and resistance time to low oxygen of skipjaci? tuna at various oxygen concentrations. Those fish which continued swimming for 240 min were considered to have survived. Length measure is fork length Oxygen Weight Resistance Swimming speed level of fish time range Experiment (mg/l) (g) (mIn) {Us) 1 3.0 1.496 1,910 74 115 1.8-2.0 2 2.0 2,467 1,890 10 20 1.8-3.7 3 2.5 3.057 3,523 57 60 1.8-2.7 4 1.4 1,537 1,161 9 10 2.8-5.0 5 3.0 1,545 1,887 55 70 1.5-2.8 6 3.5 3,430 1,616 65 155 1.5-2.0 7 3.5 890 902 91 Survived 1.1-2.0 8 3.5 812 791 53 65 1.2-2.5 9 4.0 830 1.020 Survived Survived 1.0-1.5 10 3.0 2.132 106 1.5-2.6 11 2.0 1,765 7 2.0-4.0 12 2.5 1.353 28 1.7-2.2 rested in the uncovered respiration tank at air- saturated O2 levels (6.8-7.0 mg O2/I) for about 2 h prior to being transferred to an immediately adjacent low-oxygen test tank. Because of a fish shortage, we were forced to use single rather than paired animals for the last three experiments. The experiments were done with O2 ranging from 1.4 to 4.0 mg O2/I and temperatures between 23° and 24° C. When O2 in the low-oxygen tank reached the required levels, the fish were netted from the resting tank into the test tank. Each transfer took < 5 s, and two fish were transferred within 30 s. The O2 and the behavior and swimming speeds of the fish were observed continuously. During an experiment, the water took up atmospheric oxy- gen at a rate dependent on the air- water pressure gradient. However, at all of the experimental O2 levels there would have been a decrease of O2 concentration due to the fish's respiration had we not gradually introduced oxygen as it was depleted by the fish; by so doing we continuously maintained O2 concentration within ± 0.2 mg/l of the nominal experimental level. A fish's resistance time was the period from introduction into the low-oxygen tank until the animal lost equilibrium and settled to the bottom. A fish was considered to have survived if it was still swimming after 240 min, at which time the experiment was terminated. At the conclusion of each experiment, weight and fork length of each fish were measured. 36 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA RESULTS Oxygen-Uptake Experiments in Laboratory Condition Factor It has been our experience that skipjack tuna do not do well in captivity for extended periods. Obviously, valid behavioral and physiological data require that the experimental animals be in good health. As mentioned above, our fish were actively feeding and had been captive for less than a month. Some additional evidence relative to their general condition is provided by com- paring the length-weight relationship of the ex- perimental fish with the relationship obtained by Nakamura and Uchiyama (1966) for freshly caught skipjack tuna. For our captive fish, logW (grams) -= -2.657 + 3.532 /logL (centimeters); for wild skipjack tuna, logW (grams) = -2.317 + 3.368 /logL (centimeters) (log = logio). This com- parison indicates that our experimental fish were, on average, about 14% lighter at a given length than wild fish of the same mean length (ca. 48 cm), the difference in weight-at-length decreased with increasing fork length. Part of the weight dis- crepancy resulted from the near emptiness of the guts of the experimental fish. Raju (1964) reported that pole-and-line caught skipjack tuna weighing about 1.4 kg had stomach contents comprising about 1.5% of body weight on the average and 6.3% of body weight at maximum. General Behavior The behavior of a group or pair of fish over the four experimental runs changed very little, and behavioral VcU"iation among the 10 series of ex- periments was slight. The fish, usually in close company, continuous- ly circled the respirometer 20-30 cm from the sides. Their course in the smaller respirometer was usually elongate but quite frequently shifted to a circle with a radius of 60-70 cm. Direction reversal and figure of eight patterns were not unusual. Rarely one fish would break away and swim separately, sometimes in a direction oppo- site the other fish, but such divergent patterns never persisted for long. Swimming Speed Swimming speed of skipjack tuna, averaged over all experiments, was 1.4 L/s. Speed was independent of O2 over the experimental range (5.0-7.0 mg O2/I), but stepwise multiple regres- sion indicated significant (P^0.05) effects of fish weight, length of time the fish had been in the respirometer, and the time-order of experi- mental series: S = 3.55 - 0.53 nogW - 0.02t - 0.04 • k where S = swimming speed (lengths/second), W = mean fish weight (grams), t = time (hours) the fish had been in the respirometer, k = time-order (1, ... , 10) of the experi- mental series. Thus, length-specific swimming speed decreased with increasing fish size and with increasing values of both time-related variables. Solution of the regression equation at mean values of t (9^8 h) and k (5.5) yielded S = 3.14 - 0.53 /logW (Figure 2). Respiration Rate Mean respiration rate over all experiments was 0.52 mg 02/g per h (Table 1). The data suggested 22 20 1.8 •= 1.6 a. to 1.4 1 12 ? 1.0 MINIMUM SPEED (lengths- sec"') MAGNUS0N(I973) SPEED(length9.sec"') = 3. 14-0.53 log W (C)"' SPEED(cm.sec-') = l2 08ll + l6 0594logW i jq 100 90 UJ a. 80 2 z s 70 60 O (O CD < I I I I I I J L 200 500 1000 WEIGHT (g) 5000 FIGURE 2. — Relation between voluntary swimming speed and body weight in skipjack tuna. Line A connects point-solutions from Magnuson's minimum speed function (Magnuson 1973). Line B is the relation between relative swimming speed and weight observed in the present study. Line C is the relation between absolute speed and weight observed in the present study. Length measure is fork length. 37 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 a slight but statistically nonsignificant decrease in respiration rate with decreasing oxygen con- centration. Thus, our assumption of respiratory independence at oxygen concentrations down to 5.0 mg O2/I seems valid; however, our experi- mental design did not permit proper analysis of the relation between respiration rate and O2 . Of the other variables included in a step- wise regression analysis (fish weight, swimming speed, total time in respirometer, time of day, experimental order), only fish weight and swim- ming speed significantly (P^0.05) affected res- piration rate: log Vo, = -1.20 + 0.19 logW + 0.21s body weight (Figure 2): S = 3.14 - 0.53 /\ogW. When this and the previous equation are com- bined to express the relation between oxygen- uptake rate and body weight for skipjack tuna swimming at their characteristic speeds, we are left with log V02 = -0.54 +^0.08 /logW. Thus, the speed-inclusive effect of W on oxygen-uptake rate actually observed in our experiments was quite small (Figure 3). A multiple regression analysis with speed deleted from the independent- variable list yielded no significant relation be- tween V02 and W (P>0.05). In contrast, the weight-inclusive effect of speed on V02 was readily apparent in a simple plot of log Vbj versus S (means) for all experiments (Figure 4). where V02 = oxygen-uptake rate (milligrams O2/ gram per hour), W = mean fish weight (grams), S= swimming speed (lengths/second). We hasten to point out an irregularity in the relation just presented. While we offer the equa- tion as a best available predictor of independent weight and speed effects on oxygen uptake in skipjack tuna, we recognize that W and S in our fish were not independent. As indicated in the last section, the fish tended to swim at a characteristic speed inversely proportional to the logarithm of 600 800 1000 2000 4000 WEIGHT (g) Figure 3. — Lack of significant relation between oxygen-uptake rate and weight of skipjack tuna swimming at voluntary speeds. Weights are means for the fish in each experimental series. 38 O E < < Q. 3 1.0 09 08 07 06 OSl- 04 03 0.2 log O2 UPTAKE RATE -0.4378 +0.1090 -SPEED r •O.ZB 08 1.0 12 14 16 18 SWIMMING SPEED (lengths^sec-') 20 22 Figure 4. — Relation between oxygen-uptake rate and relative swimming speed of skipjack tuna (ranging from 60 to 4,000 g). Data are means for each experiment. Length measure is fork length. Oxygen Consumption and Activity of Just-Caught Skipjack Tuna Skipjack tuna, during their first 2.2 h of captiv- ity, consumed oxygen at rates between 0.9 and 2.5 mg Oa/g per h, the median for the 14 determina- tions being 1.3 mg 02/g per h at 75 min (Figure 5). Swimming speeds were correspondingly great — between 2 and 5 L/s. Rate of oxygen consumption was not significant- ly correlated with time since capture (Kendall's t = -0.20, P-0.18; Siegel 1956) when all 14 rate determinations were considered as random obser- vations from the same bivariate distribution. However, some features of the experiment sug- gested a decline in the rates of both oxygen con- GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA 40 30 20 O E < < a. 3 10 9 8 7 n 1 r •^^* J I 1 L 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 TIME SINCE CAPTURE (minutes) FIGURE 5.— Relation between the rate of oxygen uptake and the time elapsed after capture of skipjack tuna. Dashed lines connect paired determinations of oxygen-uptake rate for the same tank-lot of fish. sumption and activity during the 2-h interval following capture. An initial period of frantic swimming, lasting 10-15 min, had already ended before we were able to collect our earliest respira- tion data. Still, the first five determinations of oxygen-consumption rate (within about 1 h of fish capture) were 1.5 mg 02/g per h or more. In two cases, a tank-lot of fish respired at a much reduced rate during the second of two sampling intervals separated by about 1 h. (In a third set of such paired observations, oxygen uptake during the second was . 3 mg O2 /g per h more than during the first, but these determinations were separated by only 20 min.) In conclusion, we believe the oxygen- uptake rate of our fish immediately after their capture was underestimated by the overall me- dian value of 1.3 mg 02/g per h and, in fact, may have exceeded 2.0 mg 02/g per h. Low-Oxygen Tolerance Experiments General Behavior Comparative behavioral responses of the fish in low-oxygen («3.5 mg/1) water were quite consis- tent. However, the sequence of behavior was more accelerated and the fish's reactions were often more violent at the lower oxygen concentrations. At the two lowest 02's (1.4 and 2.0 mg/1) the fish showed symptoms of considerable stress within about 30 s of introduction. Stress was manifested as very fast swimming (2.6 L/s), wide mouth-gape. and little or no attempt to school. During the last few minutes before the skipjack tuna died, they assumed a steep angle of attack with their snouts out of the water and swam jerkily, with intermit- tent bursts of speed up to 6 L/s. Complete collapse came abruptly; the fish simply ceased swimming and settled to the bottom. At 2.5 and 3.0 mg O2/I, the initial stress reactions were milder and the fish started schooling within a few minutes after introduction. Swimming speeds were still rela- tively high (1.7-2.8 L/s), and the sequence and types of behavior were similar to those at the lowest O2. At 4.0 mg O2/I, both skipjack tuna swam and otherwise behaved as if they were in oxygen-saturated water. Resistance Time and Swimming Speed There was a marked, direct relation between the logarithms of resistance time and oxygen con- centration at oxygen levels up to 3.5 mg O2/I (Table 2, Figure 6). At 3.5 mg O2/I, four of the experimental fish had resistance times in the same range as the fish exposed to 3.0 mg O2/I, but one fish survived for the 240-min duration of the experiment. The survivor showed few overt signs of stress but did swim faster than the fish in oxygen-saturated water. At 4.0 mg O2/I, both experimental fish survived 240 min. The 21 skipjack tuna used in the 12 experiments ranged in weight from 791 to 3,523 g (Table 2). There was no significant correlation between weight and resistance time to low-oxygen levels. 111 O Z o o o a UJ 21 o a -\ — I — I — I — I I I log RESISTANCE TIME -0.417 + 2.876 log Oa CONG. »• •• 8 10 20 40 60 80 100 RESISTANCE TIME (minutes) 200 Figure 6. — Relation between resistance time to low-oxygen concentration and dissolved oxygen concentration. Resistance time was the period from the fish's introduction into the low- oxygen tank until it stopped swimming and settled to the bottom. Circled points indicate three fish that were still swim- ming after 240 min. The regression line was fitted to the points for fish that died. 39 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Mean swimming speed increased as O2 de- creased (Figure 7), reaching 3.9 L/s at the lowest O2, 1.4 mg O2/I. Mean speed at 4.0 mg O2/I was slightly less than at higher O2 values (oxygen- uptake experiments); therefore, the critical O2 for an increase in swimming speed appeared to lie between 4.0 and 3.5 mg O2/I. a UJ UJ a. z < 1.5 20 2.5 3.0 3.5 40 45 50 5.5 6.0 6.5 DISSOLVED Oz CONCENTRATION (mg-r') FIGURE 7. — Relation between mean swimming speed and dis- solved oxygen concentration. The data for O2 of 6.0 and 5.0 mg 1' are from the oxygen-uptake experiments. Those at lower concentrations are derived from the low-oxygen tolerance experiments. Length measure is fork length. DISCUSSION Terminology Relevant to Tuna Metabolism In this paper we have strived to quantify the activity and respiration levels of our fish. The question of terminology remains. Doudoroff and Shumway (1970) have emphasized that "different meanings have been attached by different authors to the same term or different terms have been used in the same sense " The question of terminology is further complicated in tunas because they, un- like typical fishes, must maintain some minimum forward motion for hydrodynamic lift (Magnuson 1973) and for gill perfusion (Brown and Muir 1970; Stevens 1972); a stationary tuna both sinks and suffocates. Thus, the notion of "resting" metabolic rate ( Doudoroff and Shumway 1970) is not appli- cable to tunas. What we have collected in our laboratory exper- iments were data on "routine" (Fry 1957, 1971) activity and metabolism. Fry (1971) defined rou- tine metabolic rate as "the mean rate observed in fish whose metabolic rate is influenced by random activity under experimental conditions in which movements are presumably somewhat restricted and the fish protected from outside stimuli." Our fish were in a postabsorptive state (except for bits of food they may have eaten during the transfer process) and were as quiescent as tunas are ever likely to be when confined in a small tank. Per- haps, our laboratory data reflect minimum me- tabolism for skipjack tuna in that the fish were swimming at speeds actually below the hydrody- namic minima calculated by Magnuson (1973) for skipjack tuna (Figure 2). On first consideration, it would seem unlikely that tunas — which lack ventilatory pumps and are, therefore, obligate ram-ventilators (Brown and Muir 1970) — could achieve minimum swimming speed without also achieving minimum rate of oxygen uptake. How- ever, Stevens (1972) has shown that skipjack tuna have the capability for doubling the amount of oxygen they extract per unit flow of water irri- gating the gills (utilization efficiency, 0.4-0.8) with only a 17% reduction in ventilation rate (from 3.0 to 2.5 1 H20/kg per min). Thus, it is conceivable that a skipjack tuna could decrease swimming speed and simultaneously increase oxy- gen uptake. We must, therefore, recognize the pos- sibility that "excitement" (Fry 1971) associated with the alien and confining environment of our respirometers resulted in heightened rates of oxy- gen uptake compared with those that might obtain in wild, unexcited skipjack tuna swimming in the sea at the same speeds. However, the data we collected do not permit an objective evaluation of this possibility. For purposes of further dis- cussion, we assume that our laboratory measure- ments of oxygen-uptake rate contained no com- ponent of "excitement" metabolism independent of swimming speed. Lack of change in respiration rate among sequential experiments indicates that any activity-independent excitement component of metabolism that may have been present was habituation-time invariate. This has encouraged us to go so far in the following section as to esti- mate the hypothetical "standard" ( = "basal" — see Fry 1971; Brett 1972) metabolism of skipjack tuna from our respiration data; this we did, as Fry (1971) recommends, by simply extrapolating to zero speed the regression equation relating res- piration rate and swimming speed. Rates of oxygen uptake measured in the "just- caught" fish can scarcely be considered "routine" 40 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA but still may have underestimated the skipjack tuna's maximum or "active" (Fry 1971; Brett 1972) rate of oxygen consumption. Wild skipjack tuna similar in size to our experimental fish can swim at sustained speeds probably exceeding 10 L/s (Yuen 1970); our just-caught fish swam at speeds ^5 L/s during the intervals when oxygen-uptake rates were measured. However, the experimental fish may have been repaying an oxygen debt incurred during the feeding frenzy preceding cap- ture or during the early minutes of captivity; recovery from oxygen debt could have heightened oxygen-uptake rates to levels above those com- mensurate with sustained swimming at the ob- served speeds (Brett 1972). "Standard" Metabolism Even though tunas never lie stationary in the water, it is of interest from the bioenergetic and comparative standpoints to separate the routine metabolic rate into standard and activity-related components. From the equation on p. 38, with swimming speed set equal to 0.0, log Vo, - -1.20 + 0.19 logW, where Vba = oxygen-uptake rate (milligrams O2/ gram per hour), W= mean fish weight (grams). Solutions of this equation at our experimental extremes for W are Vbj = 0-21 mg 02/g per h at W = 632 g and Vo^ = 0.30 mg Oj/g per h at W = 3,834 g. These values are extraordinary for two reasons: 1) They are at the extreme upper limit for nontuna (cf. fig. 4 of Brett 1972), a fact that becomes even more remarkable when one considers that other teleost values are almost all for small (10-100 g) individuals, and 2) the weight exponent is a positive 0.19, not a negative value in the neighborhood of -0.2 characteristic of typical fishes (Fry 1957, 1971; Winberg 1960). While weight exponents for active metabolic rate in salmonids may frequently approach 0.0 (Job 1955; Brett 1965; Rao 1968), we know of no data to suggest weight exponents as large as -1-0.2 for metabolic rate in nonscombrid fishes. The valid- ity of a large, positive value for the weight ex- ponent of "standard" metabolic rate in skipjack tuna is supported by independent data, via direct calorimetry, on heat production rates; the red muscle of sedated skipjack tuna (maintained by gill perfusion) metabolized at a rate proportional to W^3(Neilletal.l976). In marked contrast with our estimate of skip- jack tuna's weight exponent for standard metab- olism is that reported by Brill (1979) — negative 0.44, a value at the other extreme for fishes. Considering that Brill's and our groups of fish were similar in size range and preexperimental history, we must deduce that the large discrep- ancy between estimates relates principally to the difference in experimental methodologies: Brill took, as the standard metabolic rate, the stabilized minimum Vq.^ of perfused skipjack tuna that had been first injected with the neuro- muscular blocking agent gallamine triethiodide, then spinalectomized. Activity-Related Metabolism Our respiration experiments estimated only rates of oxygen uptake, not rates of instantaneous metabolic demand for oxygen. Neill et al. (1976) estimated that the oxygen demand of red muscle in highly active (chased) skipjack tuna can reach 7 mg 02/g per h for periods on the order of 1-2 min. For even shorter periods, involving only true burst swimming, the rate of oxygen demand must be even higher. Brett (1972) has estimated that burst-swimming fishes' instantaneous rate of oxygen demand (on a whole-body basis) exceeds the maximum rate of supply by a factor of 10. Any excess of demand over supply accumulates as an oxygen debt that ultimately must be repaid. Our observations on just-caught fish provided (probably conservative) estimates of the maxi- mum rate at which skipjack tuna can supply oxy- gen to meet their metabolic demands. Like the skipjack tuna's "standard" metabolic rate, its maximum (active) rate of oxygen uptake must be substantially beyond that typical of fishes. Just- caught skipjack tuna respired at a median rate of 1.3 mg 02/g per h; the highest five values (those obtained during the fish's first hour of captivity) were between 1.5 and 2.5 mg 02/g per h. Brett (1972), in reviewing his own and others' work, reported that fishes' maximum rates of oxygen consumption reach a "probable ceiling" near 1.0 ±0.2 mg 02/g per h. The activity-respiration relationship obtained at sea for just-caught skipjack tuna was reason- ably consistent with that extrapolated from the laboratory experiments (Figure 8). However, data of the two kinds may have agreed less well had 41 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 600 400 2.00 ;= 1.00 'p. 80 ° 60 E a. 3 .02 1.8 kg SKIPJACK TUNA AT aA-C (REGRESSION OF LABORATORY DATA ) 1.8 kg SKIPJACK TUNA AT - 24 "C (JUST-CAUGHT FISH) SOCKEYE SALMON AT IS'C AND GLASS 1973) 2 3 4 SWIMMING SPEED (length»sec-i) Figure 8. — Comparison between respiration-speed relations for 1.8 kg skipjack tuna calculated from the present study and for 1.8 kg sockeye salmon computed from equations given by Brett and Glass (1973). Ranges of observed values are indicated by the lines extending from the median value for just-caught skipjack tuna. Length measures are fork length. we been able to accurately measure swimming speeds in just-caught fish. The basis for our cau- tious appraisal of such apparently good "fit" is suspicion that the linear model, log Voj = a + b speed, which seems adequate for many fishes (Brett 1972; Brett and Glass 1973; Webb 1975), cannot hold for skipjack tuna over the en- tire range of swdmming speeds that they can sus- tain. Personal observations on these fish and Yuen's (1970) report of a school of skipjack tuna (ca. 44 cm fish) that traveled 28 km in 107 min (average minimum speed = 4.4 m/s) convince us that 40-50 cm skipjack tuna can swim for at least an hour at speeds near 10 Lis. If that is so, our linear model predicts oxygen uptake in 1.8 kg skipjack tuna (median size of just-caught fish) at a maximum sustained rate of at least 33.0 mg 02/g per h. Active metabolic rate of skipjack tuna may substantially exceed Brett's (1972) predicted maximum for fishes, but we are confident it does not do so by a factor of nearly 30. The most logical interpretation of this conundrum is nonlinearity in the relation between log Vq^ and speed; as skipjack tuna swim faster, they must become more efficient in their use of oxygen and energy. The same is probably true for other fast-swim- ming fishes, such as Peterson's (1976) striped mullet, Mugil cephalus. Even in the relatively sluggish goldfish, Carassius auratus, oxygen- uptake rate actually declines as the fish pass from spontaneous activity at low apparent speeds to induced swimming (against currents) at higher speeds (Smit 1965). There is, of course, an alternative explanation: Our laboratory experiments overestimated the true coefficient for speed. In fact, taking the lower 95% confidence limit on the speed coefficient — 0.11 — yields a comparatively modest 3.31 mg 02/g per h for predicted Vba at 10 Lis. But a true speed coefficient as low as 0.11 is not only inconsistent with the comparable coefficient in other fishes (Fry 1971; Brett 1972) but also with other, inde- pendent data (Chang et al.^) on metabolism-speed relations in skipjack tuna. The speed coefficient estimated from that study was 0.22, a value re- markably similar to our mean estimate. To close our consideration of activity-related metabolism in skipjack tuna, we offer a compari- son between respiration-speed relations of a 1.8 kg skipjack tuna at 24° C and a 1.8 kg sockeye salmon, Oncorhynchus nerka, at 15° C (Figure 8). We chose the sockeye salmon because its active metabolic rate "is one of the highest [for fishes] on record, exceeding that determined for other salmonids by 30% to 40%" (Brett and Glass 1973). The sockeye salmon respiration-speed relation was computed from equations given by Brett and Glass (1973); 15° C-values were used because this is near the sockeye salmon's thermal optimum for fast swimming and several other vital func- tions (Brett 1971). Skipjack tuna seem to swim and metabolize at rates nearly independent of temperature (Dizon et al. 1977; Chang et al. footnote 4). At all speeds common to the two fishes, skip- jack tuna have the higher metabolic rate — 3.7 times higher at 1.1 Lis (the skipjack tuna's mini- mum speed) decreasing to 1.7 times higher at 3.2 Lis (the sockeye salmon's maximum sustained speed). If the basis of comparison is the energy cost of swimming (oxygen-uptake rate associated with any particular speed minus standard up- take), the difference between these fishes is less- ened but the qualitative relation is unchanged: at "Chang, R. K. C, B. M. Ito, and W. H. Neill. Manuscr in prep. Temperature independence of metabolism and activity in skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis. Southwest Fish. Cent., Natl. Mar. Fish. Serv., Honolulu, HI 96812. 42 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA 1.1 and 3.2 Lis,, the cost for skipjack tuna are, respectively, 2.5 and 1.4 times those for sockeye salmon. We can only conclude that 1.8 kg skip- jack tuna swim at intermediate speeds less effi- ciently than 1.8 kg sockeye salmon — this despite the fact that, among fishes, the skipjack tuna represents the apex of evolutionary engineering for speed (Magnuson 1973; Stevens and Neill 1978). Presumably, the evolution of skipjack tuna (like that of fast cars) has involved sacrifice of energetic efficiency at low speeds in favor of in- creased efficiency at high speeds, permitting a dramatic increase in maximum attainable speed. Interrelation of Metabolic Rate, Swimming Speed, and Body Weight Voluntary speeds {S, lengths/second) of skip- jack tuna swimming in our laboratory respirom- eters were inversely related to fish weight by the relation S = 3.14 - 0.53 /logW. Magnuson (1973), working from basic hydrodynamic rela- tions, predicted minimum speed for steady-state swimming in various tunas; his model for skip- jack tuna yielded a speed versus fish-weight rela- tion very similar in slope to that we observed (Figure 2). The difference in means may be attrib- utable to differences in condition factor and/or body-water content (Kitchell et al. 1977) between our captive fish and the wild skipjack tuna on which Magnuson's calculations were based. Oxygen-uptake rates (Vbj. milligrams O2/ grams per hour) of our laboratory fish were influenced not only by swimming speed but also by fish weight independent of speed: log Vo^ - -1.20 + 0.19 logW + 0.21s. We have concluded above that 1) the intercept value ("standard" rate at any weight) is unusually large for fishes; 2) the weight coefficient is opposite in sign from that typical of fishes (and of organisms, generally); and 3) the interdependency of log Vbz and S on weight is compensatory, resulting in no statistically demonstrable difference among oxygen-uptake rates for skipjack tuna of various weights (600- 4,000 g) swimming at their characteristic speeds. Conclusion (3) led us to explore the relation between oxygen-uptake rate per unit distance (V62, milligrams 02/gram per kilometer) and swimming speed for skipjack tuna of different sizes. Exponentiating the linear regression equa- tion relating V02 in milligrams 02/gram per hour to W and S, Vq^ = 0.063 • W"^^ • 10" "S = 0.063 W°i» • e°^«^. Multiplying the last equation by 27.78 km ^ • S -1 gener- ated an equivalent expression for ^62 in milli- grams 02/gram per kilometer: Vo, = 1.75 • L W 0.19 . _0.48S Finally, we used the exponentiated length-weight relationship for experimental fish: logW = -2.657 + 3.532 logL; thus, W = 0.0022L3^='2 to eliminate W: Vo, = 0.55 • L 0.33 1 . _0.48S Solutions of this equation for V62 at various values of L and S are shown graphically in Figure 9. Small fish are less efficient (higher V62) at any particular speed than are larger fish, but fish of all sizes reach their particular minimum V62 at the same relative speed — about 2.1 L/s. The relation between this, the optimum speed (Sopt) for cover- ing distance, and the value of the coefficient, 0.48, for the exponential term in S is simple — each is the reciprocal of the other: dVo. ^^^ _ ,33 0.48Se«^«^-e»''«« 0.55 • L "^^ per ds at ds s- = 0, 0.48S • e" ^«^ = e" '^^; therefore, Sopt = 0.48 2.08. For skipjack tuna between 30 and 60 cm length, the characteristic speeds and Sopt = 2.08 corre- spond with V62 rates that are maximally (for 60 cm fish) different by only 13% of min V02 (Figure 9). The question arises as to whether the observed characteristic speeds, rather than "Sopt," might be the (evolutionary) "design" speeds that minimize VOz- The characteristic speeds agree remarkably well (better than does "Sopt") with the optimum speed predicted by Weihs' (1973b) model; Weihs, reasoning from thrust and drag relations for fishes, argued that speed is optimized (energy expended per unit distance is minimized) when "the rate of energy expenditure required for pro- pulsion [and associated physiological work?] is equal to the standard (resting) metabolic rate." For our skipjack tuna, S at Vb2 equivalent to twice the hypothetical standard rate was 1.43 L/s, a value that falls midway in the range of speeds 43 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 2 3 4 SWIMMING SPEED ( lengths-sec"' ) FIGURE 9.— Relation of rate of oxygen uptake per unit distance (VQj) swam to swimming speed for skipjack tuna of various lengths. The x's indicate characteristic swimming speeds of fish in the present study. Sopt is the optimum speed for covering distance in terms of minimum Vq^. The arrow at 1.43 lengths • sec ' is the optimum speed predicted by Weihs' (1973b) model. characteristic of fish between 30 and 60 cm length (Figure 10). In a subsequent paper, Weihs (1977) showed that fishes' optimum swimming speeds on an absolute basis ought to be proportional to L"^^. The characteristic speeds of our tuna, when com- puted in centimeters per second and treated as a power function of fish length, are proportional to 100,000 100 ;]-3800g 58 cm ;]-2800g 54 cm ;>l800g 48 cm i>-800g 38 cm 3 4 5 6 7 SWIMMING SPEED ( lengths- sec -' ) 10 Figure lO. — Comparison between the measured oxygen uptake relationship extrapolated between and 8.5 lengths sec~* (broken lines) and the theoretically expected power consumption (solid lines) for four skipjack tuna. Triangles (▲) are the theoretical power consumption based on a detailed analysis of drag forces for a 40 cm, 1,003 g skipjack tuna (Magnuson 1978). Points (•) are based upon a detailed analysis of thrust forces (Magnuson 1978). Length measures are fork length. 44 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA ^0 45 ^j^^ thus, fit Weihs' model almost perfectly. We conclude by noting that our discussion of optimum swimming speeds for covering distance relates only to skipjack tuna swimming at con- stant depth (as those in our respirometers were required to do). Weihs (1973a) has calculated that negatively buoyant fishes like the skipjack tuna could achieve an energy savings of 20% (compared with swimming at constant depth) by alternately gliding downward at an angle of about 11° (to the horizontal), then actively swimming upward at an angle near 37°. Resistance to Low Oxygen In areas of the world ocean with surface waters not stressfully warm for skipjack tuna there is always available air-saturated water that over- lies oxygen-depleted strata (Barkley et al. 1978). Therefore, the 4-h exposure period we adopted in this study would seem to include all intervals of low-oxygen exposure that skipjack tuna ever need endure at sea. The data suggest for skipjack tuna a threshold of response to hypoxic stress at about 4.0 mg O2/I (Figure 7); this value is at or below that represen- tative of fishes (Davis 1975). In our experiments, the skipjack tuna's response to low oxygen was an increase in swimming speed; this would seem adaptive in that increased swimming speed initi- ated by hypoxic stress would facilitate return of fish from deep, oxygen-depleted water to air- saturated surface water. The 4-h median tolerance limit to low oxygen was also near 4.0 mg O2/I (Figure 6). This value, in keeping with the skipjack tuna's exceptionally high metabolic rate, is apparently higher than that of any other fish yet investigated (Doudoroff and Shumway 1970). Angular Acceleration and Excess Body Temperature Compared with other studies of fish metabo- lism, our experiments with skipjack tuna involved two unusual elements: 1) The fish were forced, by the relatively small size of the tanks, to swim a curved path, and 2) they probably had core temperatures up to several degrees higher than the temperature of the surrounding water. Weihs (1981) has suggested that our continuous- ly turning fish expended more propulsive energy than they would in swimming a straight path at the same speed. A turning tuna must counter centrifugal forces by "banking" with its pectoral fins to produce a component of lift directed in- wards along the turning radius. Therefore, our results may overestimate the oxygen-uptake rates and perhaps also the lower lethal oxygen concen- tration for skipjack tuna at sea. However, we doubt that the magnitude of the overestimate can be very great, for fish in the large and small respirometers (with radii of typical swimming paths about 2 and 0.8 m) respired at similar rates (Table 1). Furthermore, metabolic rates of fish in our experiments were consistent with those inferred from weight and energy "loss" rates of starved skipjack tuna living in tanks 7.3 m in diameter (Kitchell et al. 1978). Oxygen-uptake rates of our test fish also com- pare well with theoretical estimates of the amount of energy consumed by similarly sized fish swim- ming a straight course at the same speeds (Figure 10). The observed oxygen-uptake relationship (milligrams 02/hour) was extrapolated from to 8.5 L/s for four skipjack tuna ranging in weight from 800 to 3,800 g (dashed lines). (Recall that mean speeds of our fish were between only 0.9 and 2.2 L/s.) Superimposed on the empirical relationship are theoretical projections of energy consumption based on estimates of drag force. Theoretical energy uptake — in keeping with the reasoning of Webb (1975), Sharp and Francis (1976), Sharp and Vlymen (1978), and Dizon and Brill (1979) — was computed according to the fol- lowing rationale: 1. Total power required is the sum of the power required for nonswimming processes (P2) plus power required for thrust (Pi), the latter divided by an estimate of total aerobic efficiency =0.2 (Webb 1975). 2. Power required for nonswimming metabolic processes (the standard metabolic rate of a fasted fish from Brill (1979)), P2 - 1.53 • W^^^ where P2 = power (watts), W = weight (kilograms). Brill's (1979) relation is used despite some doubts about the validity of the exponent because it provides for skipjack tuna the only estimate of P2 independent of our data. 45 3. Thrust power must be equal to drag force multiplied by velocity Cd 10-' iplied by velocity Pi = 0.5 p S U^ where Pi = power (watts), p = water density (1.0234), S = surface area (0.4 L^) where L = length (centimeters), U = velocity (centimeters/second), Cd = drag coefficient. 4. The drag coefficient is estimated using Webb's (1975) formula, as Cd = 10 ( pLuy M / where /j. = water viscosity (0.0096). 5. Assuming an oxycaloric equivalent of 3.4 cal/mg O2 , power in watts can be converted into oxygen uptake in milligrams 02/hour by multi- plying watts by 253. The simple model of energy consumption pre- sented here makes no pretention of precision because no attempt was made to accurately deter- mine either the coefficient of drag or the surface area of the fish. Magnuson and Weininger (1978) and Magnuson (1978) did do that. We have in- cluded their estimates for power consumption of a 40 cm, 1,003 g skipjack tuna in Figure 10. The five triangles are estimates of power consumption based on Magnuson's (1978) determination of drag forces, the points based upon Lighthill's (1969) model of thrust forces (data from Magnuson 1978: table XI). Whether a sophisticated estimate of power consumption or a simple one is employed, the correspondence between the theoretically expected and the empirically derived power con- sumption is good. We take this as additional evidence that our experimental values are rea- sonable estimates of oxygen uptake of skipjack tuna swimming straight courses at sea. Skipjack and other tunas are warm bodied, owing to their high metabolic rates coupled with large thermal inertia (Neill et al. 1976; Stevens and Neill 1978). Thus, our fish undoubtedly were warmer than the water in which they swam. Skipjack tuna used in the laboratory experiments probably had core-temperature excesses on the order of 2°-4° C (cf. Stevens and Fry 1971; Neill et FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 al. 1976); the just-caught fish, being more active, may have had core temperatures as much as 10° C above ambient water temperature (cf. Stevens and Fry 1971). Interpretation of our results has not been complicated by consideration of the difference between tissue and environmental temperatures, because metabolism of skipjack tuna has been shown to be virtually independent of temperature (Gordon 1968; Chang et al. foot- note 4). CONCLUSION Our findings emphasize the unique evolution- ary position of the skipjack tuna (and, by exten- sion, other tunas) among fishes. The skipjack tuna epitomizes what Stevens and Neill (1978) have termed "energy speculators": forms that "operate to maximize energy gain by gambling large energy expenditures ... on the expectation of proportionately large energy returns." The skipjack tuna's "standard" metabolic rate is two to five times that of typical fishes of similar size. Moreover, the skipjack tuna is relatively ineffi- cient in its use of oxygen and food-energy for swimming (at least at low speeds) and it dies at O2 levels still well above those lethal to other fishes. Clearly, the skipjack tuna's ability to sustain high levels of activity has not been achieved without substantial physiological cost. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This study was initiated by Reuben Lasker and John Hunter, both of the Southwest Fisheries Center La JoUa Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. We are grateful for their early involvement and support. We thank J. R. Brett, Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Nanaimo, British Columbia; E. D. Stevens, University of Guelph, Ontario; and D. Weihs, Technion, Haifa, Israel for reviewing the manuscript. LITERATURE CITED Anonymous. 1965. Oxygen studies in relation to catching tuna. Com- mer. Fish. Rev. 27(12):28-29. Baldwin, W. J. 1970. Oxygenating device for live-bait wells. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 27:1172-1174. BARKLEY, R. A., W. H. NEILL, AND R. M. GOODING. 1978. Skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, habitat based 46 GOODING ET AL.: RESPIRATION RATES AND LOW-OXYGEN TOLERANCE IN SKIPJACK TUNA on temperature and oxygen requirements. Fish. Bull., U.S. 76:653-662. BLACKBURN, M. 1965. Oceanography and the ecology of tunas. Oceanogr. Mar. Biol., Annu. Rev. 3:299-322. BLACKBURN, M., AND F. WILLIAMS. 1975. Distribution and ecology of skipjack tuna, Katsu- wonus pelamis, in an offshore area of the eastern tropical Pacific Ocean. Fish. Bull., U.S. 73:382-411. BRETT, J. R. 1965. The relation of size to rate of oxygen consumption and sustained swimming speed of sockeye salmon {Oncorhynchus nerka). J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 22: 1491-1501. 1971. Energetic responses of salmon to temperature. A study of some thermal relations in the physiology and freshwater ecology of sockeye salmon (Oncorhynchus nerka). Am. Zool. 11:99-113. 1972. The metabolic demand for oxygen in fish, particu- larly salmonids, and a comparison with other verte- brates. Respir Physiol. 14:151-170. Brett, J. R., and N. R. Glass. 1973. Metabolic rates and critical swdmming speeds of sockeye salmon (Oncorhynchus nerka) in relation to size and temperature. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 30: 379-387. BRILL, R. W. 1979. The effect of body size on the standard metabolic rate of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis . Fish. Bull., U.S. 77:494-498. Broadhead, G. C, and I. Barrett. 1964. Some factors affecting the distribution and appar- ent abundance of yellowfin and skipjack tuna in the eastern Pacific Ocean. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 8:417-473. BROCK, V. E. 1954. Some aspects of the biology of the aku, Katsuwonus pelamis, in the Hawaiian Islands. Pac. Sci. 8:94-104. Brown, C. E., and B. S. Muir. 1970. Analysis of ram ventilation of fish gills with appli- cation to skipjack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis). J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 27:1637-1652. Davis, J. C. 1975. Minimal dissolved oxygen requirements of aquatic life with emphasis on Canadian species: a review. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 32:2295-2332. DIZON, A. E. 1977. Effect of dissolved oxygen concentration and salin- ity on swimming speed of two species of tunas. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:649-653. DizoN, A. E., AND R. W. Brill. 1979. Thermoregulation in tunas. Am. Zool. 19:249-265. DiZON, A. E., T. C. BYLES, AND E. D. STEVENS. 1976. Perception of abrupt temperature decrease by re- strained skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis. J. Therm. Biol. 1:185-187. DiZON, A. E., W. H. NEILL, and J. J. MAGNUSON. 1977. Rapid temperature compensation of volitional swim- ming speeds and lethal temperatures in tropical tunas (Scombridae). Environ. Biol. Fishes 2:83-92. DIZON, A. E., E. D. Stevens, w. H. Neill, and j. J. MAGNUSON. 1974. Sensitivity of restrained skipjack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis) to abrupt increases in temperature. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 49A:291-299. DOUDOROFF, P, AND D. L. SHUMWAY. 1970. Dissolved oxygen requirements of freshwater fishes. FAO Fish. Tech. Pap. 86, 291 p. Fry, F E. J. 1957. The aquatic respiration of fish. In M. E. Brown (editor). The physiology of fishes. Vol. 1, p. 1-63. Acad. Press, N.Y. 1971. The effect of environmental factors on the physiol- ogy of fish. In W. S. Hoar and D. J. Randall (editors), Fish physiology, Vol. VI, p. 1-98. Acad. Press, N.Y. Gordon, M. S. 1968. Oxygen consumption of red and white muscles from tuna fishes. Science (Wash., D.C.) 159:87-90. IVERSEN, R. T B. 1967. Response of yellowfin tuna ( Thunnus albacares) to underwater sound. In W N. Tavolga (editor). Marine bio-acoustics. Vol. 2, p. 105-121. Pergamon Press, Oxf J0B,S. V 1955. The oxygen consumption of Salvelinus fontinalis. Univ Toronto Biol. Ser. 61, 39 p. KITCHELL, J. F, J. J. MAGNUSON, AND W H. NEILL. 1977. Estimation of caloric content for fish biomass. En- viron. Biol. Fishes 2:185-188. KITCHELL, J. F., W. H. NEILL, A. E. DiZON, AND J. J. MAGNUSON. 1978. Bioenergetic spectra of skipjack and yellowfin tunas. In G. D. Sharp and A. E. Dizon (editors). The physiological ecology of tunas, p. 357-368. Acad. Press, N.Y LAEVASTU, T, AND H. ROSA, JR. 1963. Distribution and relative abundance of tunas in relation to their environment. FAO Fish. Rep. 6: 1835-1851. LIGHTHILL, M. J. 1969. Hydromechanics of aquatic animal propulsion. Annu. Jlev Fluid Mech. 1:413-466. MAGNUSON, J. J. 1965. Tank facilities for tuna behavior studies. Prog. Fish-Cult. 27:230-233. 1969. Digestion and food consumption by skipjack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis). Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 98: 379-392. 1970. Hydrostatic equilibrium of Euthynnus affinis, a pelagic teleost without a gas bladder Copeia 1970: 56-85. 1973. Comparative study of adaptations for continuous swimming and hydrostatic equilibrium of scombroid and xiphoid fishes. Fish. Bull., U.S. 71:337-356. 1978. Locomotion by scombrid fishes: Hydromechanics, morphology, and behavior. In W. S. Hoar and D. J. Randall (editors). Fish physiology. Vol. VII, p. 239-313. Acad. Press, N.Y. MAGNUSON, J. J., AND D. WEININGER. 1978. II. Estimation of minimum sustained speed and associated body drag of scombrids. In G. D. Sharp and A. E. Dizon (editors). The physiological ecology of tunas, p. 293-311. Acad. Press, N.Y. MATSUMOTO, W M. 1975. Distribution, relative abundance, and movement of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, in the Pacific Ocean based on Japanese tuna longline catches, 1964-67. U.S. Dep. Commer, NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-695, 30 p. NAKAMURA, E. L. 1968. Visual acuity of two tunas, Katsuwonus pelamis and Euthynnus affinis. Copeia 1968:41-49. 47 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 1972. Development and uses of facilities for studying tuna behavior. In H. E. Winn and B. L. 011a (editors), Behavior of marine animals. Current perspectives in research, Vol. 2, p. 245-277. Plenum Press, N.Y. Nakamura, E. l., and J. H. UcraVAMA. 1966. Length- weight relations of Pacific tunas. In T. A. Manar (editor). Proceedings, Governor's Conference on Central Pacific Fishery Resources, State of Hawaii, p. 197-201. NEILL, W. H., R. K. C. CHANG, AND A. E. DIZON. 1976. Magnitude and ecological implications of thermal inertia in skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis (Linnaeus). Environ. Biol. Fishes 1:61-80. Peterson, C. H. 1976. Cruising speed during migration of the striped mullet (Mugil cephalus L.): An evolutionary response to predation? Evolution 30:393-396. RAJU, G. 1964. Observations on the food and feeding habits of the oceanic skipjack, Katsuwonus pelamis (Linnaeus) of the Laccadive Sea during the years 1958-59. In Proceed- ings of the Symposium on Scombroid Fishes. Part 2, p. 607-625. Mar. Biol. Assoc. India, Symp. Ser. 1. Rao, G. m. m. 1968. Oxygen consumption of rainbow trout iSalmo gairdneri) in relation to activity and salinity. Can. J. Zool. 46:781-786. RAYNER, M. D., AND M. J. KEENAN. 1967. Role of red and white muscles in the swimming of the skipjack tuna. Nature (Lond.) 214:392-393. Robins, J. R 1952. Further observations on the distribution of striped tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis L., in eastern Australian waters, and its relation to surface temperature. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 3:101-110. SHARP, G. D., AND R. C. FRANCIS. 1976. An energetics model for the exploited yellowfin tuna, Thunnus albacares, population in the eastern Pacific Ocean. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:36-51. SHARP, G. D., AND W. J. VLYMEN III. 1978. The relation between heat generation, conserva- tion, and the swimming energetics of tunas. In G. D. Sharp and A. E. Dizon (editors), The physiological ecol- ogy of tunas, p. 213-232. Acad. Press, N.Y. SlEGEL, S. 1956. Nonparametric statistics for the behavioral statis- tics. McGraw-Hill, N.Y., 312 p. SMIT, H. 1965. Some experiments on the oxygen consumption of goldfish (Carassius auratus L.) in relation to swimming speed. Can. J. Zool. 43:623-633. STEFFEL, S., A. E. DiZON, J. J. MAGNUSON, AND W. H. NEILL. 1976. Temperature discrimination by a captive free- swimming tuna, Euthynnus affinis. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 105:588-591. Stevens, E. D. 1972. Some aspects of gas exchange in tuna. J. Exp. Biol. 56:809-823. Stevens, E. D., and F E. J. Fry. 1971. Brain and muscle temperatures in ocean caught and captive skipjack tuna. Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 38A:203-211. Stevens, E. D., and W. H. Neill. 1978. Body temperature relations of tunas, especially skipjack. In W. S. Hoar and D. J. Randall (editors). Fish physiology, Vol. VII, p. 315-359. Acad. Press, N.Y. Strasburg, D. W., and H. S. H. Yuen. 1960. Preliminary results of underwater observations of tuna schools and practical applications of these results. Indo-Pac. Fish. Counc. Proc, 8th Sess., Sect. 3:84-89. TAMURA, T, I. HANYU, and H. NIWA. 1972. Spectral sensitivity and color vision in skipjack tuna and related species. Bull. Jpn. Soc. Sci. Fish. 38:799-802. WEBB, R W. 1975. Hydrodynamics and energetics of fish propulsion. Fish. Res. Board Can., Bull. 190, 158 p. WEIHS, D. 1973a. Mechanically efficient swimming techniques for fish with negative buoyancy. J. Mar Res. 31:194-209. 1973b. Optimal fish cruising speed. Nature (Lond.) 245: 48-50. 1977. Effects of size on sustained swimming speeds of aquatic organisms. In T J. Pedley (editor). Scale effects in animal locomotion, p. 333-338. Acad. Press, N.Y. 1981. Effects of swimming path curvature on the ener- getics of fish motion. Fish. Bull., U.S. 79:171-176. WILLIAMS, F 1970. Sea surface temperature and the distribution and apparent abundance of skipjack (Katsuwonus pelamis) in the eastern Pacific Ocean, 1951-1968. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 15:231-281. WINBERG, G. G. 1960. Rate of metabolism and food requirements of fishes. Fish. Res. Board Can. Transl. Ser. 194, 202 p. YUEN, H.S. H. 1970. Behavior of skipjack tuna. Katsuwonus pelamis, as determined by tracking with ultrasonic devices. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 27:2071-2079. 48 AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA FROM THE U.S. RECREATIONAL FISHERY FOR BILLFISHES (ISTIOPHORIDAE) IN THE WESTERN NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN AND GULF OF MEXICO, I971-78» Grant L. Beardsley and Ramon J. Conser^ ABSTRACT Catch and effort data from the United States recreational fishery for billfishes in the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico were examined to evaluate their usefulness in determining trends in abundance. In the Gulf of Mexico, data were recorded from both organized fishing tournaments and from non- competitive fishing. A fishing power model was developed and comparisons made between catch per unit effort from tournament data, nontoumament data, and Japanese longline data. The results indicate that catch and effort statistics for white marlin, Tetrapturus albidus, and sailfish, Istiophorus platypterus, in the Gulf of Mexico appear to be reliable and can be aggregated to provide a means of indexing relative abundance of these species. The model did not appear to be appropriate for blue marlin, Makaira nigricans, however The general trend in catch per unit effort from 1972 to 1978 for sailfish and white marlin in the Gulf of Mexico appears to be downward. Based on catch per unit effort from all fishing areas, there appears to be a single stock of white marlin in the western North Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico. In 1971, the National Marine Fisheries Service's Southeast Fisheries Center initiated research on the billfish stocks of the western North Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico. The purpose of this research was to develop and evaluate a method of determining changes in relative abundance of bill- fish stocks using catch and effort data from the recreational fishery. This report has been prepared to present a description of this research, evaluate the reliability of the sampling techniques, and make a preliminary determination of the validity of catch and effort data from the recreational fishery as an indicator of changes in relative abundance of billfish populations. THE RECREATIONAL FISHERY The development of the U.S. recreational fishery for billfishes (families Istiophoridae and Xiphiidae) has been reviewed in detail by de Sylva (1974). The first sailfish caught by rod and reel in the Atlantic was probably taken off Miami, Fla., around the turn of the century. After World War 11, increased leisure time and affluence coupled with newer and better fishing gear, vessels, and angling techniques spurred a dramatic expansion of the 'Southeast Fisheries Center Contribution No. 81-20M. ^Southeast Fisheries Center Miami Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 75 Virginia Beach Drive, Miami, FL 33149. Manuscript accepted August 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. fishery geographically as well as to a broader seg- ment of the population. In the Atlantic, anglers now fish for billfishes from almost every state along the eastern coast of the United States as well as from the U.S. Virgin Islands, Puerto Rico, and numerous foreign ports. Species The billfish species in the Atlantic recreational fishery are the sailfish, Istiophorus platypterus, the white marlin, Tetrapturus albidus, the blue marlin, Makaira nigricans, and to a much lesser extent the swordfish, Xiphias gladius, and the longbill spearfish, Tetrapturus pfluegeri. Sailfish, the most commonly occurring species in the catch, is more coastal in its habitat than any of the other species and consequently is available to a greater number of anglers. It is also the smallest in aver- age size, with the possible exception of the longbill spearfish, and generally requires less expensive and sophisticated fishing tackle than is commonly used in fishing for marlins. The two marlins are most abundant in oceanic waters, generally far from the coast of the United States, and fishing for marlins usually requires relatively large vessels and expensive fishing gear. Prior to 1976, recre- ational fishing for swordfish was a specialized type of fishing where the fish was usually sighted be- fore the fishing lines were placed in the water. 49 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Fishing was done in a fairly restricted area off the northeastern United States. In 1976, however, a new method of fishing for swordfish was developed off the southeast Florida coast. This method in- volved drifting baited lines at various depths at night. Fishing success using this technique has been substantially higher than by the earlier method, and swordfish are now available to fishermen all along the Gulf of Mexico and Atlan- tic coasts of the United States, whereas previously the fishery was confined to a relatively small geo- graphical area. Longbill spearfish are rare in the recreational catch. They are believed to be primarily an open ocean species and generally are not common in the areas where recreational fishing takes place. Because of the nature of the fishery for swordfish and the scarcity of longbill spearfish in the recre- ational catch, our study involves only the sailfish and the two marlins, and the following discussions deal only with these species. Fishing Techniques Fishing, using rod and reel, is conducted primarily by trolling dead or artificial baits at speeds ranging from 3 to 15 kn. The baits are fished mainly at the surface, although sometimes baits are rigged to troll down to a meter or more beneath the surface. Generally, three to four lines are fished simultaneously, although as many as eight are occasionally used. In some areas the use of live bait has become increasingly popular. Our study does not include catch and effort data involving the use of live bait. Once a billfish is hooked, the boat operator usu- ally maneuvers the boat so that the effort required by the angler is reduced. Once the fish is brought to the boat it is either gaffed and brought onboard or released alive. More and more frequently, anglers and crews are tagging their fish before releasing them in cooperation with the National Marine Fisheries Service Cooperative Game Fish Tagging Program (formerly the National Marine Fisheries Service-Woods Hole Oceanographic In- stitution Cooperative Game Fish Tagging Pro- gram). Billfishes are not highly desirable as food in the continental United States, although they are utilized to some extent as a smoked product. How- ever, many fishermen are learning that fresh mar- lin, in particular, is an excellent food fish. In Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands there is a great demand for fresh marlin which commands a high price on the local fresh fish markets. THE LONGLINE FISHERY The high seas longline fishery for tunas was begun in the Atlantic by the Japanese in 1956. Fishing effort increased rapidly, peaking in 1965 when almost 100 million hooks were set and the fishery included almost all waters between lat. 40° N and 40° S. Effort fell off rapidly, however, in response to declining catch rates and increasing costs, and by the early 1970's the Japanese were averaging only about 40 million hooks annually. In the mid-1960's, Taiwan and South Korea en- tered the fishery and by the 1970's theirs were the dominant fleets in the Atlantic. An excellent re- view of the development of the fishery is available in Ueyanagi (1974). The longline fishery in the Atlantic is directed primarily at tunas, and billfishes are incidental catches, although large numbers are caught. From 1956 through 1976, for example, almost 140,000 t of white marlin, blue marlin, and sailfish/ spearfish were caught by longliners in the Atlantic (Table 1). There is some evidence that stocks of white and blue marlin in the North Atlantic and South Atlantic are discrete groups (Mather et al. 1972; Wise and Davis 1973). Longline catch per unit effort (CPUE) values for white and blue mar- lins within these two areas in the 1970's are for the most part considerably below those in the 1960's (Figure 1). Table L — Estimated landings, in metric tons, of blue marlin, white marlin, and sailfish/spearfish by the tuna longline fishery in the Atlantic Ocean, 1956-76. Data from Conser and Beard- sley,' tables 1 and 4, for blue marlin and white marlin, and Conser,^ table 1, for sailfish/spearfish. Blue White Sailfish/ Blue White Sailfish/ Year marlin marlin spearfish Year marim marlin spearfish 1956 6 — 1 1967 2,316 1.421 1.421 1957 92 15 39 1968 3,572 2,458 2.281 1958 722 25 50 1969 3,727 2,538 1.586 1959 847 123 72 1970 4,939 2,916 2,758 1960 1,517 206 160 1971 4,316 2,999 1,710 1961 4.004 713 383 1972 3,047 2,452 1,551 1962 7,414 1,984 602 1973 2,925 2,461 1,298 1963 9.034 2,526 841 1974 2,761 2,958 1,413 1964 7,847 3,634 1,240 1975 3,000 1,987 1,122 1965 6.019 4,847 2,587 1976 1,076 2,062 750 1966 3,713 3,296 2,032 'Conser, R. J. and G. L. Beardsley. 1979. An assessment of the status of stocks of blue marlin, Makaira nigricans, and white marlin, Tetrapturus albidus, in the Atlantic Ocean. Collect. Vol. Sci, Pap. 8(2):461-489. Int. Comm. Conserv. Atl. Tunas, General Mola 17, l^^adrid, Spain, ^Conser, R. 1979. Production model analysis of the sailfish and spear- fish stocks in the Atlantic Ocean. Working paper submitted to the Standing Committee on Research and Statistics. Int. Comm. Conserv Atl. Tunas, General Mola 17. Madrid, Spain. November 1979. 50 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA 70 60 o o He S 30 > P 20 u u Ik u Id 10 - NORTH ATLANTIC WHITE MARLIN -1.5 2.0 1.0 in * o o z o o o K lU a. X bJ 0.5 £ u 56 58 60 62 SA 66 68 YEAR — I 1 1 1 IQ 70 72 74 76 78 60 r ae o o 50 40 P 30 ui > 5 20 I- bl 10 NORTH ATLANTIC ILUE MARLIN EFFORT CPUE 3 <" o o o o o bt a. 1 0. u 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 YEAR 70 72 74 76 78 3.0 2.5 80 r 70 SOUTH ATLANTIC ABLUE MARLIN U) 60 2.0 'Si O o o o z 50 z o S 1.5 § £ 40 at o u Ik a. Ik u 30 1.0 5 u > H 3 u hi 20 & Ik 0.5 U u 10 - 76 78 Figure l. — Effective effort in millions of hooks and catch per unit effort (CPUE) in numbers offish caught per 1,000 hooks for blue marlin and white marlin in the North and South Atlantic Oceans, 1956-77. Data on the Japanese longline fishery are reported by the Fisheries Agency of Japan, Annual report of effort and catch statistics by area on Japanese tuna longline fisheries, 1962-77. THE SAMPLING PROGRAM Prior to 1970 almost no data are available from the U.S. recreational fishery for billfishes on fish- ing effort, although a considerable amount of in- formation exists on catch. Because of the large number of big-game fishing tournaments taking place throughout much of the range of the bill- fishes, and the fairly continuous and often inten- sive fishing effort at various fishing centers along the U.S. coast, it seemed feasible that catch and effort from the recreational fishery could be used to detect changes in relative abundance from year to year as well as short-term changes in availabil- ity. As a consequence, the Oceanic Game Fish In- vestigations Program was organized at the South- east Fisheries Center Miami Laboratory in 1972 to develop an effective system for the collection of billfish catch and effort data in the Gulf of Mexico, Caribbean Sea, and western North Atlantic 51 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Ocean, and to analyze these data to provide infor- mation on temporal and spatial changes in rela- tive abundance. The program is directed primarily at sailfish, white marlin, and blue marlin, although data on recreational catches of yellowfin and bluefin tunas are also recorded. Swordfish and longbill spearfish are rare in the recreational catch, but some data have been obtained. Much preliminary work had already been ac- complished in the Gulf of Mexico by the Southeast Fisheries Center Panama City Laboratory, NMFS, NOA A, in cooperation with various big-game fish- ing clubs and charterboat associations along the coast. Sampling sites were established and cover- age of fishing effort during the fishing season in the gulf was estimated to be as high as 90% (Nakamura and Rivas 1974). Initial contact with big-game fishing clubs, tournament managers, and others associated with big-game fishing tournaments produced a list of about 40-50 tournaments scheduled throughout the Bahamas, Caribbean, Gulf of Mexico, and along the eastern coast of the United States. Con- tact with various state marine research agencies provided cooperative sampling agreements for tournaments within their states. In addition to tournament sampling, port samplers were stationed in the Gulf of Mexico to maintain day- to-day coverage of nontournament fishing activity at major fishing areas along the coast. At present, coverage includes Port Aransas, Tex.; Grand Isle and South Pass, La.; Orange Beach, Ala.; and Pen- sacola, Destin, and Panama City, Fla. The fishing season in the Gulf of Mexico usually runs from April through October. Data Acquisition Sampling procedures at tournaments are reasonably uniform regardless of locality or sea- son. At the end of each fishing day, program samplers interview the angler or a member of the crew of each boat participating in the tournament. Information on environmental conditions, number and species offish hooked, and other ac- tivities are recorded. At most tournaments all of the participating boats aire located at a single marina, and sampling coverage is usually 100%. Tournament sampling is further simplified in that most tournaments have rigidly controlled fishing hours, and all boats in the tournament fish the same amount of time. After the statistical infor- mation is collected, the sampler obtains biological data from each billfish landed. Daily port sampling is more difficult than tour- nament sampling. Fishing frequently takes place from a variety of locations, the boats return to the dock at different times, and fishing effort is fre- quently not as consistent as during tournaments. Much of the success of daily sampling is attribut- able to the samplers' knowledge of the area and their persistence and resourcefulness in obtaining the data. Sampling Problems There are numerous sampling problems that appear to be unique to the recreational fishery for billfishes. The first is the determination of what constitutes the catch portion of the CPUE ratio. When trolling for billfishes there are three distinct levels of activity that feasibly could be associated with effort and provide an estimate of relative abundance. The first is commonly knov^Ti as a fish "raised." This term refers to the visual observation of a billfish behind the trolling baits whether it ultimately strikes the baits or not. The inherent problem in using this measure is species identifi- cation. In addition, it is apparently not uncommon for a single billfish to be raised more than once during a given day's fishing, occasionally by the same boat. There is also the possibility that two or more billfishes are raised in rapid succession, but the observer may interpret this as a single fish. The second level of activity, and the one used in this study, is fish "hooked." Disadvantages of this criterion are differences in the skills of anglers in hooking fish, and the fewer data obtained since many fish that are raised are not hooked. Its ad- vantages are that identification reliability is con- siderably increased since billfishes almost always jump when hooked and positive identification is usually possible. The third level of activity is a billfish "boated" (or caught and released). The biggest difficulty with this measure of catch is that different tournaments use different categories of line-test; comparing CPUE on 9 kg test line with CPUE on 36 kg test line is not reasonable. Another drawback is that the number of data points avail- able from "boated" fish decreases significantly. The value of this measure is that species identification is no longer a problem. We decided to use fish hooked as our measure of catch, and all sub- sequent references to CPUE in the recreational 52 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA fishery refer to number of billfishes hooked per hour of trolling. Another problem was the determination of which tournaments were suitable for use in the analysis of any given species. Billfish tournaments may be classified as "all billfish" or restricted to a single species or combination of species. In exam- ining CPUE of white marlin in the Bahamas, for example, it is unreasonable to include data from tournaments that are exclusively blue marlin tournaments, because when fishing for blue mar- lin many boats troll large baits, and white marlin, considerably smaller in average size than blue marlin, either refuse to strike at such baits or are unusually difficult to hook. Accordingly, any anal- ysis of a given species used only data from tourna- ments that were specifically directed at that species or that were designated as "all billfish." An additional sampling problem, encountered in almost any kind of fisheries survey, is reliability of recall. We believe that, in general, the respon- dents are able to recall accurately their fishing activity during the day; however, it may occasion- ally be difficult for the angler or crew to recall each species of billfish hooked if fishing was good and several billfishes were hooked during the day. When possible, more than one member of the fish- ing party was consulted if there was some doubt expressed in the original interview. Tournament and port samplers have received excellent cooper- ation at every level, and most of the anglers and crew members make every effort to assist our data collection activities. Consequently, we do not be- lieve that errors in recall significantly affect the results of our analyses. Sampling Coverage Tournament sampling extends along the east and gulf coasts of the United States from Long Island, N.Y., to Port Isabel, Tex. (Figure 2). Addi- tional tournament sampling has been or is being conducted in the Bahamas, Jamaica, Mexico, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands. Tournaments are scheduled throughout the year to coincide with the presence of seasonal concentrations of bill- fishes. In the Bahamas, for example, the tourna- ment season extends from March through July. In southeast Florida, most tournaments are scheduled from November through January. Most of the tournaments sampled are annual events and occur at approximately the same time each year. Tournament scheduling is also arranged so that Figure 2. — Areas in the western North Atlantic Ocean, Carib- bean Sea, and Gulf of Mexico where the recreational fishery for billfishes is sampled. Primary species available by area are: A — blue marlin, sailfish; B — blue marlin, white marlin, sailfish; C — sailfish; D — sailfish; E — blue marlin; F — blue marlin; G — blue marlin, white marlin, sailfish; H — blue mar- lin; I — white marlin. there are few instances where two or more tour- naments are held at the same time in the same area. Seasonal port sampling on a daily basis is con- ducted in the gulf beginning in April and extend- ing through October. The amount of effort mea- sured and the recorded number offish hooked from daily dock sampling from 1971 through 1978 and from tournament sampling, 1972 through 1978, are shown in Table 2. DATA ANALYSIS— GULF OF MEXICO Methodology There are several areas along the Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico coasts of the United States where recreational and commercial fishermen compete for billfishes. This interaction occurs most fre- quently in the northern Gulf of Mexico where in- tensive recreational fishing for billfishes takes place from a number of ports from Florida to Texas during April through October. During the same 53 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 TABLE 2.— Data on effort and catch for billfishes recorded by tournament and dock sampling, 1971-78, in the western North Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico. Hours fished No. fish hooked Year Blue marlir White marlin Sailfish Tournaments 1972 23,090.4 365 170 399 1973 17,864.0 512 233 684 1974 18,473.6 537 368 768 1975 26,858.4 684 1,088 1,664 1976 27,368.4 655 750 1,062 1977 35,333.9 772 781 1,989 1978 40,601.0 801 992 1,752 Dock sampling 1971 11,609.9 266 491 482 1972 13,298.2 306 517 528 1973 7,859.5 176 414 140 1974 10,462.8 290 487 197 1975 8,852.5 196 684 434 1976 8,174.5 177 434 577 1977 8,575.0 225 398 232 1978 12,522.7 251 402 200 period of the year, Japanese longliners fish in the same area for yellowfin and bluefin tunas but fre- quently catch billfishes as well. Detailed and con- sistent catch and effort data are available from both the recreational and longline fisheries in this area over the period 1971-78. These attributes make the northern Gulf of Mexico fishery unique when compared with other billfish fisheries in that more than one type of gear is operating at signifi- cant effort levels in the same time and place, and consistent catch and effort statistics are available from both types of fishing operations for a reason- ably long time series. In this analysis we attempt to: 1) determine the utility and consistency of catch and effort data from the recreational and longline fisheries for indexing changes in abundance of billfish populations, 2) obtain species- and area- specific indices of abundance that incorporate both recreational and longline data, and 3) gain a bet- ter understanding of the dynamics of the fishery by modeling the general characteristics of recre- ational and longline fishing for billfishes. The northern Gulf of Mexico was divided into three areas based on the general distribution of recreational fishing (shaded areas in Figure 3). The easternmost. Panhandle, groups fishing effort from Panama City, Destin, and Pensacola, Fla., and Orange Beach and Mobile, Ala. The center. New Orleans, combines effort from South Pass and Grand Isle, La., and the westernmost, Texas, en- compasses all fishing from Texas. Recreational catch and effort data are acquired in each of these areas by sampling both daily, noncompetitive rec- reational fishing as well as fishing conducted dur- ing organized big-game fishing tournaments. From 1971 through 1978 over 136,000 h of tourna- ment and nontournament fishing for billfishes in these three areas were recorded (Table 3). Tour- nament and dock data were processed and monthly total catch and total effort were compiled by species, area, and type of fishing. CPUE was computed for those months in which 60 h or more of fishing effort had been sampled. The 60-h min- imum effort criterion was chosen by making two series of calculations of the variance of monthly CPUE using various minimum effort criteria, and then subjectively selecting a minimum effort level which provided a balance between the variance and sample size considerations. Using the 60-h minimum effort criterion produced more reliable statistics without causing the sample size to be- come unacceptably small. It represents approxi- 100' 30- 25 Galveston Qi' TEXAS 85" PANHANDLE i< inn -30" «c:i==^ > JSLm 25" Figure 3. — The shaded areas, Panhandle, New Orleans, and Texas, are major recreational fishing areas for billfishes. The larger areas, I, II, III, and IV, are 5° squares from which Japanese longline catch and effort data are available. 54 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA Table 3. — Number of fishing hours recorded from tournament (toum.) and dock sampling at three major fishing areas for bill- fishes in the Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78. See Figure 3 for location of areas. Panhandle New Orleans Texas Table 4. — Japanese catch (in numbers offish) and effort (in numbers of hooks) from the two 5° areas ( longline areas II and IV in Figure 3) in the northern Gulf of Mexico which coincide with recreational fishing areas, 1971-78. BM = blue marlin, WM = white marlin, and SF = sailfish. Year Tourn. Dock Tourn. Dock Tourn. Dock Year Area II Area IV 1971 143.5 8,2877 4,225.2 355.2 3.322.2 3,380.0 462.0 254.3 Effort (hooks) Catch Effort (hooks) Catch 1972 BM WM SF BM WM ,SF 1973 703 6 8 605 2 , 3,730.0 3,395.0 52 7 963 1974 584.2 5,618.1 1,449.7 1971 413,941 220 1,273 853 227,552 114 2,627 1,402 1975 2.020.0 5,587.1 2,441.3 2,034.3 1,767.8 1,230.1 1972 664,295 181 2,280 571 — — — — 1976 4,279.7 4,619.3 3,552.3 1,762.4 2,314.3 1,792.8 1973 237,092 93 998 204 64.787 28 533 797 1977 6.088.3 5,516.2 5,981.0 2,412.6 4,496.0 646.2 1974 53,632 34 213 42 104,298 120 635 505 1978 6,983.4 7,4108 7.576.1 3,966.2 4,999.4 1,145.7 1975 1976 712,659 2,999,552 149 269 546 3,100 313 220,337 140 1,174 878 850 309,1 18 97 622 937 1977 2,206,500 181 993 272 54,407 8 64 87 mately 10 boat-days of fishing and occurs ; in a 1978 1 ,454,447 100 719 62 36,355 6 90 29 region of the effort distribution where moderate changes in the minimum effort criterion would have Httle effect on the number of months used. The resulting CPUE values by area and type of fishing are displayed in Figure 4 for blue marlin, Figure 5 for white marlin, and Figure 6 for sailfish. Monthly catch and effort statistics by 5° area for the Japanese longline fleet are reported by the Fisheries Agency of Japan in the Annual Report of Effort and Catch Statistics by Area on Japanese Tuna Longline Fisheries for the period 1962-77. Japanese longliners fish all four of the 5° areas that compose the northern Gulf of Mexico (Areas I through ly Figure 3). However, 52% of their fish- ing effort in the northern gulf during 1971-77 oc- curred in area II and 39% in area III. Only 1% occurred in area I and 8% in area IV Since nearly all recreational fishing for billfishes in the north- ern gulf occurs in areas II and ly only longline data from these two areas were used in this com- parative analysis. Although no data on the dis- tribution of longline effort within 5° areas are given in the Japanese annual reports, data supplied by Honma^ on the distribution of catch and effort during 1971-75 show that most longline effort in areas II and IV occurred in the more coastal regions which coincides fairly well with the location of recreational fishing grounds as dis- played in Figure 3. Catch and effort statistics by species for areas II and IV were compiled from the Japanese annual reports for 1971-77 (Table 4). Comparable statistics for 1978 were compiled from the quarterly reports submitted to the Southeast Fisheries Center by Japanese longliners fishing in the U.S. Fishery Conservation Zone. CPUE was then computed for those months in which 2,000 hooks or more of fishing effort occurred. As with ^Misao Honma, Far Seas Fisheries Research Laboratory, Shimizu, Japan, pars, commun, July 1977. the recreational data, using a minimum effort criterion produced more reliable statistics and the number of months accepted was not sensitive to moderate changes in the threshold level. The Japanese longline CPUE values by species and comparable recreational fishing area are also shown in Figures 4-6. Murphy (1960), Rothschild (1977), and others have discussed some of the important aspects in- volved in using longline statistics to estimate changes in abundance. One of the demonstrated functional relationships, which may be pertinent in this analysis, is that the average amount of effective effort per hook is a function of the.amount of "soaking time" the gear is in the water. Al- though the Japanese annual reports do not pro- vide time in the water data, NMFS observers aboard Japanese vessels in the northern gulf re- port a consistency in the time the gear is in the water during recent years (Lopez et al. 1979). Al- though no data are available from earlier years of the analysis period, soaking times tend to remain more or less constant in most tuna longline fisheries and consequently, fishing time can be measured by the number of hooks set (Food and Agriculture Organization 1976). The lack of data on time in the water should, therefore, not con- tribute significantly to any bias in the estimates of relative abundance. Another aspect of the longline data which is also pertinent to this analysis is that sailfish and spearfish catches are combined in the Japanese annual reports. This problem may be minimal in coastal areas, however, since Ueyanagi et al. (1970) demonstrated that sailfish are found primarily in coastal areas and spearfish tend to inhabit more oceanic waters. In this analysis all catches from areas II and IV that were reported as sailfish/spearfish in the annual reports were as- sumed to be sailfish. 55 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 FIGURE 4.— Monthly CPUE for blue marlin from the longline fishery and the recreational fishery in the three major fishing areas in the northern Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78. Longline CPUE depicted for Panhandle and New Or- leans were derived from data taken from the 5° square labeled II in Figure 3. CPUE for Texas was taken from the 5° square labeled rV in Figure 3. The first month depicted on the abscissa is March (M) 1971. CPUE is in numbers offish caught per 1,000 hooks in the longline fishery and numbers offish hooked per 100 hours fished in the recreational fishery. The Tournament panel displays CPUE calculated from billfish fishing tour- naments while the panel labeled Dock shows CPUE derived from noncompetitive fishing. PANHANDLE (/> TOURNAMENT . (/) i 111 iiil .i DOtJC M 2.9- ^ 8.8- (/) T LONGLINE TT K l / l ^' lIl M ^ NJSDNJSDHJSDHJSDnJSDnjSDHJSDnJSD NEW ORLEANS TOURNANENT (/> a. o (/) DOCK JL J '■■ U'lr 18 (/» (/> 2.5- e.e- rf LONGLINE h ii ' i 'ln i ' i " ^ NJSDHJSDHJSDnJSDMJSDHJSDNJSONJSD TEXAS (/» TOURNAMENT DOCK lln ltl.1 4.1 ill i OS o • o -18 ^ -8 «/» 10- PANHANDLE TOURNAHENT . ii 1 I ii i 1 i - -20 (/» DOCK Jit Jt^ mil .tTtrl. Jn Jlli M *-nlLe 30 2 LONCLINE wi4i I r " i 1 1 f 'l I I' T 'i ii' V f I 'I T 1 1 n" i I'l T l I r iS njSDHJSDHJSDNJSDHJSDHJSDNJSDNJSD a. (/I a. Figure 5.— Monthly CPUE for white marlin from the longline fishery and the recreational fishery in the three major fishing areas in the northern Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78. Longline CPUE depicted for Panhandle and New Or- leans were derived from data taken from the 5° square labeled II in Figure 3. CPUE for Texas was taken from the 5° labeled IV in Figure 3. The first month depicted on the abscissa is March (M) 1971. CPUE is in num- bers of fish caught per 1,000 hooks in the longline fishery and numbers offish hooked per 100 hours fished in the recreational fishery. The Tournament panel displays CPUE calculated fi-om billfish fishing tour- naments while the panel labeled Dock shows CPUE derived from noncompetitive fishing. NEW ORLEANS (/) TOURNAHENT 1 41 jfl A 10 c/l • DOCK .IIL T .t .1 Ill,t I Ii I T A .rflil' 10 10- (/» LONCLINE I _LJ I r " i 1 1 i " i I \ T \ I i " i'i i r i ' i I rn i'i t i i i t i HJSDHJSDNJSOHJSDNJSDHJSDNJSDNJSD TEXAS o TOURNAHENT i i/t DOCK J d »W*, k -10 (/> 20- I LONCLINE !Tirrl* ii r!! ii l' i I I I I I I I I I n I I 1 n I I I I I I I I I I I I . . MJSDnjSDNJSDHJSDHJSDnjSDHJSDNJSD 1971-1978 (/» 57 FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79, NO. 1 Figure 6.— Monthly CPUE for sailfish from the longline fishery and recreational fishery in the three major fishing areas in the north- em Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78. Longline CPUE depicted for Panhandle and New Orleans were derived from data taken from the 5° square labeled II in Figure 3. CPUE for Texas was taken from the 5° square labeled IV in Figure 3. The first month depicted on the abscissa is March (M) 1971. CPUE is in num- bers of fish caught per 1,000 hooks in the longline fishery. The Tournament panel dis- plays CPUE calculated from billfish fishing tournaments while the panel labeled Dock shows CPUE derived from noncompetitive fishing. PANHANDLE (/) TOURHrtHENT . U» tI T ! In ill Jl jJl le (/I 3- DOCK Jl ttIIIt .t TtT .TTm. .ml. Jk jTIIt ..^tk ■e -2e LONGLINE I TT P i nfM ili l i Tf i rf' i irlij T j HJSDMJSDHJSOMJSONJSDHJSOMJSDMJSO TEXAS TOURHAHENT Jl 1 90 - ««J> and ^',. =(/3.. -/3,s.*) The parameters u^ , a '^^ , and ^ '^^ can be estimated by solving the usual normal equations and esti- mates of relative fishing power and relative popu- lation density can be obtained from [P^^ = expCa.^) andD^ =exp(i3V^)]. To apply the basic catch model to the billfish fishery in the northern gulf, it is necessary to assume that for each type of fishing (i.e., dock, tournament, and longline) catchability is constant throughout the analysis period, there is no in- teraction between catchability and density, and units of effort operate independently. The first two assumptions may be tenuous for this fishery and will be investigated in the analysis. The third as- sumption appears to be reasonable. The basic catch model was used initially to de- termine what relationship existed between catch and effort data from dock and tournament data. Figure 7 presents a flow diagram for the determi- THE BASIC CATCH MODEL DOES NOT ADEQUATELY REPRESENT THE DATA Phase three ^...^'flGN I F I CAN?'***.^^^ Difference in power^^ ^^^^ 5: LEVEL,,,-'"^ YES USE FPOW TO FISHING POWER POOL CATCH AND EFFORT DATA POOL CATCH AND STANDARDIZED EFFORT DATA COMPUTE A SINGLE CPUE WHICH REPRESENTS BOTH TYPES OF FISHING THE MODEL IS APPROPRIATE Figure 7. — Flow diagram for determining the appropriateness of using the basic catch model to represent data from the two different kinds of fishing methods. 59 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 nation of the appropriateness of the basic catch model for a single species-area case. Separate analyses were performed for blue marlin, white marlin, and sailfish in each of the three recre- ational areas. Since the model assumes that the catchability coefficients of dock and tournament fishing are proportional [Equation (3)], correlation analysis was performed on the dock and tournament CPUE values (Phase 1, Figure 7) and the model was con- sidered appropriate for estimating fishing power only when the CPUE's were significantly corre- lated at the 5% level. Data used in the correlation analysis were from all months in which dock and tournament fishing met the minimum effort threshold concurrently. The two factor ANOVA model [Equation (2)] was then used to test for significant differences in fish- ing power and density, and Tukey's (1949) test was used to test for significant interaction. The data used in the ANOVA were from all months in the 1971-78 period for which dock and tournament sampling met the minimum effort threshold con- currently and for which CPUE's were >0 for both types of fishing. The positive CPUE constraint was necessary because of the log transformation used in obtaining Equation (2). Because the model re- quires that there be no interaction between power and density, the model was not considered appro- priate when interaction was significant at the 5% level. For all cases in which the model was deemed appropriate and the ANOVA test for difference in power was not significant at the 5% level, the catch and effort data were pooled and a single recre- ational CPUE was calculated for those species- area combinations. Where the model was appro- priate and the power was significantly different, dock sampling was designated as the standard and the relative fishing power of tournament fishing was estimated from Equation (5). The computer program FPOW (Berude and Abramson 1972) was used to estimate the relative fishing power. FPOW solves the normal equations like Equation (5) and corrects for the logarithmic bias using a Taylor series expansion of the estimate about its true value (Laurent 1963). The FPOW program was modified to perform the usual F-test for the sig- nificance of the overall regression and to compute the coefficient of determination. As in the ANOVA test, the data used in the fishing power estimation were from all months for which dock and tourna- ment fishing met the minimum effort threshold concurrently, and for which both CPUE's were >0. For those species-area combinations in which the model adequately represented the recreational data, the entire procedure was then repeated in an analogous manner to compare the recreational and longline data. Results The results of the correlation, ANOVA, and re- gression analyses for blue marlin, white marlin, and sailfish from the Panhandle, New Orleans, and Texas areas are summarized in Table 5. Blue Marlin In the Panhandle area, dock and tournament CPUE data are fairly consistent and it appears that fishing power is greater for dock data than for tournament data. When the dock and tournament data were pooled and compared with the longline data, no correlation was found and interaction between power and density was apparent. In the New Orleans and Texas areas, no significant dif- ference in the power of dock and tournament data was found, but the CPUE's were not correlated and interaction was significant in the New Or- leans data. The blue marlin results generally indicate that the basic catch model does not adequately repre- sent the blue marlin data in the northern Gulf of Mexico. While it may be possible to obtain adequate indices of abundance from recreational or longline data, the two types of fishing appear to be providing very different indices in the same local areas, and it cannot be determined which, if either, provides a valid measure of relative abun- dance. It appears that until the dynamics of the blue marlin fishery are better understood, the use of nominal catch and effort data to index relative abundance may produce inconsistent and mislead- ing results. White Marlin In the Panhandle and New Orleans areas, the CPUE's were well correlated, no significant differ- ence in the power of dock and tournament data was found, and no interaction was apparent. When dock and tournament data were pooled and com- pared with longline data, the CPUE's were well correlated, and a significant difference in power was found, but significant interaction was found in 60 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA s . 1 ^ — z 6 ^ ^ Qi o^ ^=3 in c cd J= c Bii CO Oh ^^ B 2 CO > E o O a. tu o o E c ^^ o 5) ^= Ifish catc 05 fer g' Cl> o Q •« -^ tr to t« CO "H -S g^ c .5=:^ CO o — o 2 S c 131 ^ c CO S 2 1 :s ,2 ^ ^ c c 2 o :s D, ^ y t8 ca "to .0) CO E 1) h= E 2 ^ ^ bC 5 ^ c o 'c ^ £ t2 ■- CO E 5 £■ cn oj O (0 c Q CO -a z c c ca .5 < o §.§ ts (0 1.^ u. 0) -*-> bo +J 1^ o y cc Q. "3 S c -S cs a, - CO < a> > J2 OcT c .9 Z ° m < ^ a> c =■ S o J? o • M o ^ tii nS -t^ "^ S u -" ._ O) 8 $ > <" E 7 < 3 1 1 Cd CO .J s m o < a. H w 1 o ci t^ in CD "^ 1^ o -^ CO O CD d I I I I CD I '°- I O I i2 CD I " 1 1 1 1 ; I ; 1 1 V I I o • cnmocD-^'ir^cDco ;_C\lcDOr^^'-CDC\l>->-CDO> ococNjooT^cbcbT-d'-dcbci-r^P II II II II II II II II II II II II II II II u> ^ 2 o w s ? t^ tn t S V to : - u.u.u,u.u.u.u.u. u. u. u. u. U- u. u. II II II 11 II II II II II II II eg ^ ^ M II to 9 f^ tn f^ II II into — c>j(0-'~<-coina><-cu fvJCM — ^C«ICNJ'-f->'-(M CD E CO f 9 1= t= S c j^ c CO o CD 0) CJcOOOcOcCJC-'cCJcC-'^ OoooooOo°°oOoOo D-jQQQJjQJjQQ-jQJjQ^ c C c a> CO o CO a CO T3 » B 0) •o a) c CO O u, CD O c O c 5 2 c 5 51= 3 I c Z (2,^ Z c- CO co E E £ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n 1 1 r 1 1 1 T i 1 1 n I HJSDNJSDMJSDMJSDNJSDMJSDHJSDHJSD NEW ORLEANS FIGURE 8.— Monthly CPUE for white marlin from the Panhandle and New Orleans areas, 1971-78. CPUE is derived from standardized recreational (both dock and tournament fish- ing) and longline effort. The first month de- picted on the abscissa is March (M) 1971. ^nrnjTJTJTYTUJJ:, 1971-1978 part of the comparable longline effort probably occurred in the western portion of area II where few sailfish are caught. Recreational and longline data were pooled, and the aggregate indices of abundance are shown in Figure 9. The results indicate that the basic catch model is adequate for representing the sailfish data in the northern Gulf of Mexico. In view of these results, it then seems appropri- ate to examine white marlin and sailfish catch data from the Gulf of Mexico to see if any trends in relative abundance are apparent. Figure 8 pre- sents CPUE for white marlin from the Panhandle and New Orleans areas and suggests that a gen- eral decline in white marlin abundance has taken place since 1973. There was a peak in 1975 in both areas (also seen in the yearly average of CPUE shown below) and two good months in 1978 in the Panhandle area, but the overall trend would ap- pear to be downward. Figure 9 presents similar data for sailfish from all three gulf areas. For this species, too, the gen- eral trend in relative abundance, at least in the Panhandle and New Orleans areas, appears to be 62 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA PANHANDLE 3- ^ 3- ^ 2- ' A H K -dQ o - 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r I ri 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 Ti 1 1 n I HJSDNJS0NJ8DHJ8DNJ8DHJS0NJ8DNJSD (/> < NEW ORLEANS (LL AND DOCK DATA) tDMJtDNJtDNJtDHJt»NJt»NJtONJtO TEXAS %f% M Figure 9.— Monthly CPUE for sailfish from the Panhandle, New Orleans, and Texas areas, 1971-78. CPUE is derived from standardized recreational (both dock and tournament except for New Orleans) and longline effort. The first month depicted on the abscissa is March (M) 1971. (/I \%1\-\%1% 63 nSHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 clearly downward. In the Texas area, 1975 and 1976 were years when CPUE was unusually high, but in 1977 and 1978 CPUE dropped back to levels more consistent with earlier years. DATA ANALYSIS— ALL AREAS Only tournament data are available from the recreational fishery in areas other than the Gulf of Mexico, hence a fishing power analysis similar to the one conducted for the gulf is not presented. It is informative, nevertheless, to examine CPUE data from all sources throughout the western At- lantic and Gulf of Mexico in view of the results of the analysis presented for the gulf. Blue Marlin ■OSn .04- w a. .03- .02- ATLANTIC AND CARIBBEAN GULF OF MEXICO — I . 1 ,1 I I 1 I — 1971 72 73 '74 '75 '76 '77 YEAR '78 FIGURE 10.— CPUE, in number offish hooked per hour of fishing, from the recreational fishery for blue marlin in the two major fishing areas, 1971-78. Data on blue marlin were divided into two areas: the Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic and Caribbean (Figure 10). Both tournament and dock sampling were combined for the gulf. This division does not necessarily mean we support a separate stock theory for these areas, but merely that the geo- graphical separation of fishing effort indicates that this is a logical division for comparative pur- poses. If, however, trends in CPUE from the two areas are similar, one might conclude that there is at least prima facie evidence of a single stock. Figure 10 shows that trends between the two areas are similar only from 1973 to 1976, which is obvi- ously inconclusive. It should also be noted that there is little fluctuation in CPUE over the time series presented, particularly when compared with white marlin (Figure 11) and sailfish (dis- cussed below). Normally one would expect CPUE for a long-lived species with numerous age groups contributing to the fishery to fluctuate much less than that for a species with a relatively short life span where the impact of a large or small incoming year class would be much greater on the fishery. Although no reliable age and growi;h data are available on blue and white marlins, the Atlantic blue marlin grows to a much larger size than either the white marlin or the sailfish, occasion- ally reaching weights of over 580 kg (Interna- tional Game Fish Association 1979) and would therefore appear to be the longest lived of the three species. The trends in CPUE for the three species appear to conform to the general pattern one might expect based on their presumed relative life span and the length of time they would be expected to contribute to the recreational fishery. .14' O. u 0.8' < UJ K 0.6- U bJ ae 0.4- 0.2^ • .208 • ■217 NORTH CAROLINA* TO NEW JERSEY GULF OF MEXICO BAHAMAS — I — 1971 — T— V2 — I— '72 1 '74 YEAR — I— '75 — I — '76 — f— '77 — 1 — '78 Figure U. — CPUE, in number offish hooked per hour of fishing, from the recreational fishery for white marlin in three major fishing areas, 1971-78. White Marlin Data on catch and effort for white marlin were divided into three areas (Figure 11). Mather et al. (1972) hypothesized that the gulf and Atlantic stocks of white marlin were separate based on tag return data and the distribution of CPUE in the Japanese longline fishery. More recent tag return data, however, indicate that there may be consid- erable mixing of white marlin between the Gulf of Mexico and the Atlantic Ocean. "• There is rather ■■Che-ster C. Buchanan, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, An- chorage, AK 99503, pers. commun. June 1977. 64 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA clear evidence (Mather et al. 1972) that the group of white marlin available to the recreational fishery in the Florida Straits and Bahamas in late winter and early spring (labeled Bahamas in Fig- ure 11) is the same group that concentrates off the northeastern coast of the United States in late summer and early fall (labeled North Carolina to New Jersey in Figure 11). If CPUE from the recre- ational fishery is adequately measuring the rela- tive abundance of white marlin stocks, one would expect a high degree of correlation between CPUE from a single stock from three widely separated areas assuming a constant percentage of the total stock was available in each area, each year. By inspection, it is clear that for the time series avail- 170n 160- U ^ 150- »- O z bi -I ae e o lb I < 180-1 O 170- 160- GULF OF,'-' MEXICO BAHAMAS • -•-^^_-. NORTH CAROLINA TO NEW JERSEY . --• 2 FISH BAHAMAS I——- •-„,___^ GULF 0F» • *~"'^V.|i^ "*^'"*=° NORTH CAROLINA* TO NEW JERSEY —I 1971 — I— '72 — I— '73 1 I '74 '75 YEAR — r- '76 77 FIGURE 12.- -Length frequencies of white marUn from three major fishing areas, 1971-77. able a close relationship appears to exist between CPUE from the three areas sampled. It is also interesting to note that 1975 was a good year in all three areas. Although availability obviously plays an important role in affecting CPUE, it seems unlikely that it is the dominant factor in this case since the three fishing areas are widely separated geographically, and conditions affecting availabil- ity would not likely be optimal in all three areas in the same year Correlation coefficients were calcu- lated for all three areas (5 yr) and for the Gulf of Mexico and the Bahamas (7 yr). The multiple cor- relation coefficient for all three areas was signifi- cant at the 95% level {R = 0.925) and the simple correlation coefficient for the Bahamas and the Gulf of Mexico was significant at the 99% level ( r = 0.865). If we are indeed measuring relative abun- dance, then the similarities in all three sets of data support the hypothesis that the three general fish- ing areas harbor a single stock of white marlin. Size data from 1971 through 1977 separated by sex do not reveal any substantial differences among fish in the three areas (Figure 12). Average size has remained fairly stable over the period with females averaging larger than males for all areas. Earlier size data from the recreational fishery, not differentiated by sex, and with the Atlantic and gulf areas combined, suggest that a moderate reduction in average size has occurred since the late 1950's and early 1960's (Figure 13), but that size may have stabilized since 1970. Sailfish CPUE data for sailfish were separated into three areas (Figure 14). These are the major fish- 190' a 180- z w 5 170- o I ui o 160- 150- • BOTH SEXES COMBINED \ ,.„., . 07) \ '^°*-H74) , (464) y' *^*' (438) ^.^ (542) FEMALE - ' (210) J271>^* (128) (3,,_(.00)_,84)_(122)„3„ ,,34)^. Air ^» • MALE — I r 1955 — I r 1960 1965 YEAR 1970 1975 1977 Figure 13. — Length frequencies of white marlin from the recreational fishery in the western North Atlantic and Gulf of Mexico. The number of specimens measured is shown in parentheses. 65 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 •SOn .40' .30' .20' 111 3 a. u J .i2n < < .10- w K U w « .08 .06- .04- .02' PALM BEACH* STUART I —I 1~" 1 1 "*. 1973-74 ■74-75 '75-76 76-77 77-7g 78-79 FLORIDA KEYS* — I 1971 72 — r- '73 — r- '74 75 '76 — I '78 YEAR Figure 14. — CPUE, in number offish hooked per hour of fishing, from the recreational fishery for sailfish, 1971-78. The panel labeled Palm Beach-Stuart is an area along the southeast Florida coast about 40 nautical miles long and fishing is concen- trated at the end of one year and the beginning of the next. sharp decline in the northern gulf in 1978 when CPUE fell to the lowest level of the 8-yr time series. By inspection of Figure 14, it can be seen that there is an inverse relationship between CPUE in the Florida Keys and the Palm Beach-Stuart area except for the 1978 Keys point and the 1978-79 Palm Beach-Stuart point. It is also interesting to note that if we shift the CPUE data from the Florida Keys forward by 1 yr, we obtain a strong positive correlation, significant at the 99% level, between the two areas. Our sampling in the Keys occurred in November and early December and much of the catch consists of very small sailfish, often averaging only 4-7 kg. Our sampling in the Palm Beach-Stuart area was in late December and January and the average size of sailfish in this area during those months was about 14-18 kg. Jolley (1977) concluded as a result of his studies of growth by analysis of dorsal spines that age-2 sailfish averaged about 7 kg and age- 3 sailfish about 14 kg. This approximates the difference in size of sailfish caught at the two areas. We believe that tournament sampling in the Keys is provid- ing a measure of the strength of the incoming year class (age 2) and that this strength is reflected in CPUE from the Palm Beach-Stuart area (mostly age-3 fish) some 12-14 mo later. ing areas for sailfish in the continental United States. Although fishing effort for sailfish is fairly intensive all year long along the southeast Florida coast, we divided the area into two specific loca- tions: the Florida Keys and the Palm Beach-Stuart area. Our sampling at these two areas was concen- trated into two separate time periods and we be- lieve that different groups of fish are exploited in each area. CPUE fluctuates widely in all three areas. One might expect this from a relatively short-lived species where the effect of year-class strength on the fishery is pronounced. In addition, the sailfish is more coastal in its habitat than the marlins and availability may be more strongly influenced by environmental conditions (Jolley 1979). CPUE fell sharply in the gulf in 1977 and again in 1978. This overall decline was strongly influenced by a large decline off the coast of Texas where fishing for sailfish is usually better than in any other area of the gulf (Figure 15). CPUE in 1977 and 1978 was the lowest since we began sampling and 8(F/c below the average of the previous 3 yr. There was also a DISCUSSION Catch and effort statistics for white marlin and sailfish from the northern Gulf of Mexico appear to be reliable. With the exception of cases where sample size was inadequate, the data from three nearly independent sources, i.e., dock, tourna- ment, and longline fishing, were consistent over an 8-yr period. It seems likely that if significant biases were present in the data sources, they would have behaved differently over the time series and inconsistencies would have resulted. This consistency over time provides greater confi- dence in each of the individual data sources and enables the pooling of data to form reliable indices of abundance. Although only tournament data are available from areas outside the gulf, a compari- son of these data for white marlin indicates a con- sistency in trends among areas and suggests that catch and effort statistics are providing a reliable means of indexing abundance. We also believe that they provide some evidence that a single stock of white marlin exists throughout the sampling area. 66 BEARDSLEY and CONSER: AN ANALYSIS OF CATCH AND EFFORT DATA 05- .04- 03- .02- .01- 3 a. o 5 'H u u tt .10- OB- 06- .04- .02- NORTHERN GULF OF MEXICO I I WESTERN GULF OF MEXICO — T— 1971 -r- '72 I '74 YEAR T '75 -r- '76 — P- '77 '78 FIGURE 15. — CPUE, in number offish hooked per hour of fishing, from the recreational fishery for sailfish in the northern and western Gulf of Mexico, 1971-78. Although trends in CPUE for blue marlin in the Gulf of Mexico and in the Atlantic are similar for some years, the detailed analysis of data from the gulf indicates that caution should be exercised in interpreting catch and effort statistics for blue marlin. In the gulf, little agreement or consistency could be found among the three data sources, and it appears that the basic catch model is not appro- priate. Some of the competition effect models dis- cussed by Rothschild (1977), in which catchability decreases as effort increases, may be more appro- priate for these data. Rothschild et al. (1970) also demonstrated that the fishing power of various gear types, relative to one another, can change as a function of stock abundance. Declining blue mar- lin abundance during the analysis period (Conser and Beardsley^; Kikawa and Honma^) may have caused this situation to occur in the northern gulf It must be pointed out, however, that white marlin abundance was declining during the same period, but this change in relative fishing power did not occur. ^Conser, R. J., and G. L. Beardsley. 1979. An assessment of the status of stocks of blue marlin, Makaira nigricans, and white marlin, Tetrapturus albidus, in the Atlantic Ocean. Collect. Vol. Sci. Pap. 8(2):461-489. Int. Comm. Conserv. Atl. Tunas, Gen- eral Mola 17, Madrid, Spain. •^Kikawa, S., and M.Honma. 1979. Status ofwhite and blue marlins caught by the longline fisheries in the North Atlantic Ocean. Collect. Vol. Sci. Pap. 8(2):513-515. Int. Comm. Conserv. Atl. Ttmas, General Mola 17, Madrid, Spain. In the analysis of Gulf of Mexico data, the pro- portionality of catchability over time for the vari- ous data sets was examined using correlation analysis of the CPUE's, but the available data did not allow testing the constancy of catchability over time. The results show that the catchability was proportional for all data sets with white marlin and sailfish. Therefore, if any change in catchabil- ity occurred, it would have been in the same direc- tion for all data sets. This appears unlikely, how- ever, since any change in catchability for the recreational fishery would probably have been an increase due to improvements in gear and equip- ment, but an increase in catchability for the longline fishery is unlikely because the fishery has been targeting more on bluefin tuna in recent years, and joint occurrences of billfishes and the tropical tunas tend to be more frequent than joint occurrences of billfishes and the temperate tunas, i.e., bluefin (Fox''). It appears reasonable, there- fore, to assume that catchability has been constant for white marlin and sailfish, but this assumption would be tenuous for blue marlin in the northern Gulf of Mexico. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We express our sincere appreciation to all.of the anglers, captains, and crew members that partici- pate in the recreational fishery for billfishes for their patience and courtesy in providing the data that form the basis for this report. We also ac- knowledge with gratitude the support of the many charterboat associations, big-game fishing clubs, and tournament committees throughout our sam- pling area. Many of these groups made special arrangements for our samplers so that they could conduct their interviews. We also acknowledge the cooperation of the Government of the Bahamas and the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico and ex- press our thanks for allowing us to sample in their areas. We particularly thank the Florida Depart- ment of Natural Resources, the Georgia Depart- ment of Natural Resources, and the South Carolina Marine Resources Department for sam- pling tournaments in their respective states and providing us with the data. We thank Dade Thornton for his continuing support and assis- tance through the years. This research was sup- ^Fox, W. W. 1971. Temporal-spatial relationships among tunas and billfishes based on the Japanese longline fishery in the Atlantic Ocean, 1956-65. Univ. Miami Sea Grant Program, Sea Grant Tech. Bull. 12, 78 p. 67 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 ported by a number of staff members over the years. We particularly acknowledge Paul Pristas of the Southeast Fisheries Center Panama City Laboratory; Chester Buchanan, presently with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service in Anchorage, Alaska; Perry Thompson with the Southeast Fisheries Center Pascagoula Laboratory; and Allyn Lopez, Luis Rivas, and Edwin Scott of the Southeast Fisheries Center Miami Laboratory. Edward Houde, William Lenarz, Eugene Naka- mura, and Gary Sakagawa reviewed the manu- script and we are grateful for their careful and thoughtful comments. Grady Reinert prepared all the charts and graphs. LITERATURE CITED BERUDE, C. L., AND N. J. ABRAMSON. 1972. Relative fishing power, CDC 6600, FORTRAN IV Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 101:133. BEVERTON, R. J. H., AND S. J. HOLT. 1957. On the dynamics of exploited fish populations. Fish. Invest. Minist. Agric, Fish. Food (G.B.), Ser. 2, 19, 533 p. DE SYLVA, D. R 1974. A review of the world sport fishery for billfishes (Is- tiophoridae and Xiphiidae). In R. S. Shomura and F. Williams (editors), Proceedings of the International Bill- fish Symposium, Part 2, p. 12-33. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-675. FOOD AND AGRICULTURE ORGANIZATION. 1976. Monitoring offish stock abundance; the use of catch and effort data. FAO Fish. Tech. Pap. 155, 101 p. GULLAND, J. A. 1956. On the fishing effort in English demersal fisheries. Fish. Invest. Minist. Agric, Fish. Food (G.B.), Ser. 2, 20(5), 41 p. INTERNATIONAL GAME FiSH ASSOCIATION. 1979. World record marine fishes. 1979 ed. Int. Game Fish. As.soc., Ft. Lauderdale, Fla., 272 p. JOLLEY, J. W, JR. 1977. The biology and fishery of Atlantic sailfish Is- tiophorus platypterus, from southeast Florida. Fla. Mar. Res. Publ. 28, 31 p. 1979. Fishermen help scientists. Underwater Nat. 11(4):15-18. LAURENT, A. G. 1963. The lognormal distribution and the translation method: description and estimation problems. J. Am. Stat. Assoc. 58:231-235. LOPEZ, A. M.. D. B. MCCLELLAN, A. R. BERTOLINO, AND M. D. LANGE. 1979. The Japanese longline fishery in the Gulf of Mexico, 1978. Mar. Fish. Rev 41(10):23-28. MATHER, F J., Ill, A. C. JONES, AND G. L. BEARDSLEY, jR. 1972. Migration and distribution of white marlin and blue marlin in the Atlantic Ocean. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:283- 298. MURPHY, G. I. 1960. Estimating abundance from longline catches. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 17:33-40. NAKAMURA, E. L., AND L. R. RiVAS. 1974. An analysis of the sportfishery for billfishes in the northeastern Gulf of Mexico during 1971. In R. S. Sho- mura and F. Williams (editors), Proceedings of the Inter- national Billfish Symposium, Part 2, p. 269-289. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-675. ROBSON, D. S. 1966. Estimation ofthe relative fishing power of individual ships. Int. Comm. Northwest Atl. Fish. Res. Bull. 3:5-14. ROTHSCHILD, B. J. 1977. Fishing effort, /n J. A. Gulland (editor). Fish popu- lation djTiamics, p. 96-115. Wiley, N.Y. ROTHSCHILD, B. J., G. C. POWELL, J. JOSEPH, N. J. ABRAMSON, J. A. BUSS, AND R ELDRIDGE. 1970. A survey of the population dynamics of king crab in Alaska with particular reference to the Kodiak area. Alaska Dep. Fish Game Inf Leafl. 147, 149 p. TUKEY, J. W. 1949. One degree of freedom for non-additivity Biome- trics 5:232-242. UEYANAGI, S. 1974. A review of the world commercial fisheries for bill- fishes. In R. S. Shomura and F Williams (editors). Pro- ceedings ofthe International Billfish Symposium, Part 2, p. 1-11. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-675. UEYANAGI, S., S. KIKAWA, M. UTO, AND Y. NISHIKAWA. 1970. Distribution, spawning, and relative abundance of billfishes in the Atlantic Ocean. [In Jpn., Engl, synop.] Bull. Far Seas Fish. Res. Lab. (Shimizu) 3:15-55. WISE, J. R, AND C. W. DAVIS. 1973. Seasonal distribution of tunas and billfishes in the Atlantic. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-662, 24 p. 68 WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS (MYXINIDAE) WITH DESCRIPTION OF TWO NEW SPECIES Bo Fernholm^ and Carl L. Hubbs^ ABSTRACT Recent trawl collections from the continental slopes of the western North Atlantic have yielded three species of the hagfish genus Eptatretus (treated herein) as well as two or three undescribed species of Myxine. Eptatretus is accepted as the generic name for most of the multibranchiate myxinids including all the Atlantic species; Paramyxine Dean 1904, is restricted to western Pacific species. The documentary material of Paramyxine springeri Bigelow and Schroeder 1952, contains two species, one of which is here described and named Eptatretus minor, new species. The two species are sympatric on the continental slope of the northeastern Gulf of Mexico, but appear to occupy relatively narrow, nonoverlapping depth ranges. Eptatretus multidens, new species, is described from the Carib- bean Sea and Atlantic Ocean off French Guiana. The value of tooth counts and the numbers of slime pores is stressed in systematic studies within Eptatretus. Bigelow and Schroeder (1952) described Paramyxine springeri from three specimens caught in 1951 in the Gulf of Mexico. The only recognized species o^ Paramyxine at that time was P. atami Dean 1904 (now known to be a composite of two Japanese species, Fernholm unpubl. data). Other species oi Paramyxine , later described from Taiwan (Teng 1958; Shen and Tao 1975) have strengthened the distinctiveness of that genus by having the generic character of crowded gill (or branchial) apertures even more pronounced than in the type-species. We redescribe P. springeri and refer it to the genus Eptatretus . We also describe two new species o{ Eptatretus and point out the likely occurrence of at least two additional species of this genus from the midwestern Atlantic. We use the name Epta- tretus for the Atlantic hagfishes with several gill apertures to stress that we believe they represent a phyletic line which is independent of, although similar to, that of the Asian hagfishes of the genus Paramyxine. It is more likely that Eptatretus from the Atlantic represents an offshoot from the west- ern American Eptatretus group than that they are directly related to the Asian Paramyxine. That the 'Roskilde University, Department of Biology and Chemistry, Box 260, DK-4000 Roskilde, Denmark. ^Scripps Institution of Oceanography, University of California, San Diego, La Jolla, CA 92093. Carl L. Hubbs died on 30 June 1979. Manuscnpt accepted July 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. western Atlantic species of Eptatretus seem to be restricted to Central American and adjacent waters indicates that they may have crossed be- tween the American continents from the Pacific prior to the appearance of the isthmus. In the western Atlantic there are no records oi Eptatretus outside those shown in Figure 1. On the European and African side of the ocean the only reported captures are those of .B. profundus, E. hexatrema, and E. octatrema, all from South African waters (Barnard 1923, 1950). All specimens treated herein were taken by bot- tom trawl, a method which usually produces few hagfishes. No doubt an expedition with baited traps would provide vastly more material that could fill in some of the gaps in the material we have at our disposal. However, the U.S. govern- ment research vessels (Springer and BuUis 1956; Bullis and Thompson 1965; Bayer 1969) that have secured most of our material give us data which are relatively homogeneous and complete, and thus yield some information on the hagfish habitats. We show that P. springeri Bigelow and Schroeder includes two species, and describe some new forms of Eptatretus. We also mention here that hagfishes of the genus Myxine have been found in the western Atlantic (Hubbs unpubl. data). They are not yet systematically analyzed, but it is expected that they compose two new species. It thus seems likely that the hagfish fauna 69 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 45° 30° 0° — FIGURE 1.- -Distribution oiEptatretus species in the western Atlantic Ocean. Numbers indicate more than one specimen taken. Two inferential records are indicated with question marks. Isobaths in meters. of the western Atlantic is about as rich as it is in Japanese waters (cf. Dean 1904). Anticipating more material of Eptatretus from this area, we have chosen to name only those forms that are represented by four or more specimens in the available material. Many hagfish species have been described from one or a very few specimens and this has caused much confusion, especially since subsequent investigators have not been aware of what may be regarded as normal intra- specific variation of characters in different genera of hagfishes. MATERIALS AND METHODS We have examined material from the following repositories: FMNH — Field Museum of Natural History, Chicago; MCZ — Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard University, Cambridge; SIO — Scripps Institution of Oceanography, La Jolla, Calif.; UMML— Rosenstiel School of Marine and Atmospheric Sciences, Miami; USNM — National Museum of Natural History, Washington, D.C. De- tails of the studied material are given under each species. Weight for each preserved specimen was re- corded in grams. The following measurements have been taken on the left side of the specimen: Total length (TL): from extreme tip of snout at midpoint, excluding barbels, to rear margin of fin around tip of tail; moderate stretching may be needed to approximate normal form. This process has been used for other measurements. Trunk length: from front of pharyngocutane- ous aperture to front of cloacal slit. Tail length: from front of cloacal slit to tip of tail fin. 70 FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS Prebranchial length: from tip of snout to front of anteriormost gill aperture. Branchial length: from front of anteriormost gill aperture to front of pharyngo-cutaneous aper- ture. Preocular length: from tip of snout to center of clear area marking ocular region. Body width: maximum, with body molded into seemingly natural conformation. Body depth: maximum overall, near middle of body, including ventral fin fold (if applicable). Body depth excluding fin fold: same region as in body depth, but excluding fin fold. Body depth over cloaca: over front of cloacal slit. Tail depth: maximum, taken at right angle to local axis, including fins. Length of each of the three barbels: from crease at outer-anterior base. The following counts have been taken: Cusps on multicuspids (Figure 2): outer/inner row of teeth on both sides. Usually the head is cut open ventrally to count the teeth. Unicuspids, outer row (including smaller cusps). Unicuspids, inner row (including smaller cusps). Total sum of all cusps. Prebranchial (tip of snout to front of anterior- most gill aperture) slime pores (left side). Branchial slime pores (left side). Trunk slime pores (left side). Tail slime pores (left side). 7 ^ 11 m •*i •^m^ I^HH^I rswH ^^1 ([ ■i f J ■m ^ ^m ^m Figure 2.— Multicusps of Eptatretus springeri by scanning electron microscopy. A— right outer tooth row, B— right inner tooth row to show pattern of fused teeth 3/2 ( see text) . Multicusps ofE. minor. C —right outer tooth row, D— right inner tooth row to show pattern of fused teeth 3/3. Scale indicated in B is 2 mm for all figures. 71 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Total sum of slime pores on left side. Total sum of gill apertures (not counting the pharyngo-cutaneous aperture if the left pos- teriormost gill aperture opens separately). Many specimens were cut open to determine the number of gill pouches and their position relative to the tongue muscle and branching of aorta. Sex was determined by examining the gonad through a cut in the lateral right side body wall anterior to the cloaca. The usefulness of different counts and mea- surements for systematic studies in Paramyxine and Eptatretus have been discussed (Dean 1904; Bigelow and Schroeder 1952; Strahan 1975). We agree with Dean's (1904) statement that ". . . in the case of myxinoids it is peculiarly necessary to base specific determinations upon the average charac- ters of as great a number of individuals as practica- ble." Dean (1904) and Strahan (1975) stressed the importance of the relative position of the gill aper- tures and body proportions, which we also find useful. Dean (1904) tended to disregard the number of slime pores as a systematic character, but we stress the value of that count and point out that both Bigelow and Schroeder (1952) and Stra- han (1975) arrived at ranges for this character which are far too broad because they include two composite species (P. springeri Bigelow and Schroeder andP atami Dean). This inclusion of an undescribed species {E. minor, see below) in P. springeri also led to the erroneous conclusion (Bigelow and Schroeder 1952) that the number of slime pores increased with length of the animal. As indicated earlier (Dean 1904; Strahan 1975), the gill aperture counts vary slightly within the five- to seven-gilled species of Eptatretus , hut when a larger sample is available, the character is, of course, quite valuable and is easily examined. Tooth counts were considered of little value by Dean (1904) and Strahan (1975). We find, however, as had Regan (1912) in his admirable yet terse synopsis of the multibranchiate myxinids, that this is a very useful character. Especially we find the pattern of fused cusps (Figure 2) in the inner and outer row of teeth to be constant within species in all of the hundreds of specimens of Epta- tretus and Paramyxine we have studied (unpubl. data). The movements of the rasping lingual tooth plates are rather elaborate in hagfishes and com- plicate the terminology used to express positional relationships. In agreement with some previous authors (Dean 1904; Strahan 1975), we have cho- sen to call the row of teeth with larger teeth the outer row and the other row the inner. The fused tooth or multicusp we regard as the anterior in each row, and to designate the pattern of fused cusps or teeth in the multicusps of the outer/ inner row we write 3/2 or 3/3, which are the two patterns found in the Atlantic species of Eptatretus. The shape of the gill apertures, as well as exten- sion and shape of the relatively low ventral fin fold, have been used as systematic characters, but we find it difficult to assess these characters in pre- served specimens. The pattern of fused teeth (3/2 or 3/3), supplemented with counts of gill apertures and slime pores, appears to suffice to distinguish the western Atlantic species of Eptatretus. GENERIC ALLOCATION The generic allocation of the polybranchiate species of hagfishes has been considerably dis- cussed (for summary, see Holly 1933 and Strahan 1975). To us it is obvious that the name with prior- ity, Eptatretus Cloquet, 1819, should be used. As stressed earlier (Bigelow and Schroeder 1948; Adam and Strahan 1963; Hubbs 1963; Strahan 1975), there is no obvious advantage in dividing the genus into subgenera. It has been argued that Paramyxine as a genus should be treated as a junior synonym of Eptatre- tus (Strahan 1975). It is true that tendencies to shortening of the gill aperture area can be found in E. springeri (Bigelow and Schroeder 1952) and in E. burgeri (Strahan 1975), but we believe this rep- resents a convergent trend of development in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. We retain the generic name Paramyxine for the western Pacific species. Dean (1904) defined the genus Paramyxine on the basis of a single specimen of P. atami. Now that much more material is available, it is somewhat a matter of choice whether one wants to retain Paramyxine for the Asian species. We choose to do so for the following reasons: 1) Dean's concept of crowdedness of gill apertures has been strengthened by the description of Taiwanese species of Paramyxine (Teng 1958; Shen and Tao 1975), which are more extreme in this character than is the type-species; 2) as a further charac- teristic of the many Asian Paramyxine species, we point to the absence of slime pores in the branchial area (with the exception that in P. atami Dean and P cheni Shen and Tao, there may be a single pair of 72 FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS slime pores in the branchial area); 3) Paramyxine defined in this way is a geographically, and we believe phylogenetically, distinct group limited to the waters of southeastern Asia. Key to the Western Atlantic Species of Eptatretus la. Three anterior teeth in outer row and two anterior teeth in inner row fused at bases 2 lb. Three anterior teeth in each row fused at bases 4 2a. Gill apertures 6 or 7. Body and head stout (Figures 3,4) 3 2b. Gill apertures 5. Body thin. Head narrow. One specimen, 308 mm (Figure 5). South of Bahama Islands sp. B 3a. Slime pores 84-92. Maximum known length 590 mm. Northeastern Gulf of Mexico .. E. springeri 3b. Slime pores 78. One specimen, 433 mm. North of Bahama Islands sp. A 4a. Gill apertures 7 E. multidens? 4b. Gill apertures 6 (rarely 5) 5 5a. A thin whitish middorsal stripe. Total cusp count of teeth 46-54. Maximum known size 395 mm. Northeastern Gulf of Mexico E. minor 5b. No whitish middorsal stripe. Total cusp count of teeth 52-58. Caribbean Sea and Atlantic Ocean off French Guiana and Haiti 6 6a. Slime pores 75. Total cusp count of teeth 58. One specimen 380 mm. North of Haiti sp. C 6b. Slime pores 87-91. Total cusp count of teeth 52-57. Maximum known length 655 mm. Caribbean Sea and Atlantic Ocean off French Guiana E. multidens CM I ' ' I ' I ' I ' I I I I I I I I I I 1 CM 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 FIGURE 3. —Eptatretus springeri (MCZ 39939). 73 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 DESCRIPTION OF SPECIES Eptatretus springeri (Bigelow and Schroeder) Figure 3, Table I Paramyxine springeri Bigelow and Schroeder 1952:1-10 (in part; original description; holo- type, 590 mm, and an additional specimen, 505 mm; comparison with P. atami; includes, as do the following references, one 338 mm specimen of E. minor). Teng 1958:5-6 (comparison with other species referred to Paramyxine) . Lindberg and Legeza 1959:23-24 (gill apertures). Stra- han and Honma 1961:323-341 (comparison with P. atami and P. yangi). Adam and Strahan 1963:7 (characters; size; Gulf of Mexico). Lindberg and Legeza 1959:19, 21 (gill apertures). Rass 1971:18 (Gulf of Mexico). Material.— MCZ 37399,^ 1 (505 mm), 29 Sep- 3" Additional material" of Bigelow and Schroeder (1952). La- belled as coming from Oregon station 321; 29''27' N, 87°19' W, 400 m, 28 April 1951. In the original description stated to have come from the same trawl haul as the holotype and so regarded here. tember 1951, 1340-1540 h, Oregon station 489, 27°44 ' N, 85°09 ' W, depth 465 m, bottom tempera- ture 10.3° C, bottom type blue mud; MCZ 39939, 3 (500, 509, 576 mm), 13 March 1955, 0835-1305 h, Oregon station 1282, 29°10 ' N, 88°03 ' W, depth 475 m, bottom temperature 10° C, bottom type gray mud; MCZ 42423, 3 (410, 433, 450 mm), 12 March 1962, Oregon station 4076, 28°33' N, 86°27' W, depth 460 m; SIO 76-248 (formerly UMML 4405), I (542 mm), 18 February 1956, 0805-0835 h, Ore- gon station 1450, 29°17 ' N, 87°41 ' W, depth 440 m; USNM 161512 (holotype), 1 (590 mm), 29 Sep- tember 1951, 1340-1540 h, Oregon station 489, 27°44' N, 85°09' W, depth 465 m, bottom temper- ature 10.3° C, bottom type blue mud; USNM 188210, 1 (522 mm), 23 October 1962, Oregon sta- tion 4005, 29°07.5' N, 88°09' W, depth 550 m; USNM 218396, 2 (513, 526 mm), 4 February 1970, Oregon II station 10899, depth 550 m; USNM 218397, 2 (500, 540 mm), 5 February 1970, Oregon II station 10900, 28°50.2' N, 86°59' W, depth 730 m; USNM 218394, 1 (417 mm), 29 August 1970, Oregon II station 11192, 29°19 ' N, 86°45 ' W, depth 420-460 m; USNM 218395, 1 (418 mm), 1 Sep- tember 1970, Oregon II station 11204, 29°12' N, 87°55'W, depth 550 m. Table l. — Characters of western Atlantic species of Eptatretus with 3/2 cusps (see text) on multicuspids of outer/inner row of teeth. Mean ± SD and range given for multiple specimens. E. springeri 16 specimens E. sp. A E. sp. B Item including holotype Holotype 1 specimen 1 specimen Depth of capture (m) 420-730 465 950 590 Total length, TL (mm) 496±53.9 410-590 590 433 308 Weight (g) 231 ±97.3 102-479 479 182 40 Measurements in thousandths of TL: Preocular length 53±5.6 47-64 61 53 — Prebranchial length 243±13.3 215-268 243 215 250 Branchial length 37±7.9 25-56 39 79 39 Trunk length 568 ±17.5 529-61 1 563 550 568 Tail length 156 ±9.8 134-168 155 157 146 Body width 52±6.8 42-70 70 55 37 Body depth: Including fin fold 81 ±8.1 66-99 99 88 67 Excluding fin fold 77±9.4 62-97 97 85 62 Over cloaca 67±7.5 51-77 69 74 48 Tail depth 81 ±10.3 64-93 85 81 67 Barbel length: First 9 + 1.4 7-11 11 15 10 Second 10±1.8 7-14 7 16 12 Third 15±2.8 10-20 10 16 15 Counts: Teeth: Cusps on multicuspids 3/2 3/2 3/2 3/2 Unicuspids, outer row' 10-11 11 -1- 11 10 + 11 10 + 10 Unicuspids, inner row' 9-11 10-1- 10 10 -1- 10 10 -1- 11 Total sum of cusps 50+1.4 48-52 52 51 51 Slime pores, leftside: Prebranchial 18±1.1 16-19 19 14 18 Branchial 3.2±0.9 2-5 4 4 4 Trunk 54±1.8 52-57 55 48 48 Tail 11±1.1 9-13 13 13 11 Total sum 87±2.6 84-92 91 79 81 Gill apertures' 12±0.4 12-13 6-1-6 7 4-7 54-5 'Left -I- right count for single specimen. 74 FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENVS EPTATRETUS Diagnosis. — An Eptatretus with six (rarely seven) gill apertures. Total cusp count 48-52, with three teeth fused in outer and two in inner row of teeth (Figure 2). Slime pores 84-92. Description. — E. springeri is a large hagfish; the 16 available specimens range from 410 to 590 mm with the mean about 500 mm. The five sexually mature females were 500 mm or longer. Eggs in the most mature female, 526 mm, are about 10 x 36 mm. Only 1 of our 16 specimens had the sixth left gill aperture opening separately in front of the pharyngo-cutaneous aperture (cf. E. burgeri with 10% of the animals showing this condition accord- ing to Dean 1904). Two animals had an extra gill aperture on the right side and one an extra on the left side. Of these three, two had an extra seventh gill pouch on the right side and one had an extra seventh pouch on each side; the extra pouches were all more or less reduced in size. The tongue muscle typically overlies gill pouches 1-3, and the aorta divides between gill pouches 4 and 5. The color of our specimens is dark brownish purplish to very light brown; the eyespots are not plainly visible. Distribution. — Eptatretus springeri has been found only in the northeastern part of the Gulf of Mexico (Figure 1) at depths between 410 and 576 m, but it must be realized, of course, that inciden- tal capture (by trawling) is hardly adequate for our distributional map. The southernmost record is that of the holotype (USNM 161512). Habitat and biology. — Specimens were collected by bottom trawl in March (475 m) and September (465 m) where the habitat temperature was about 10° C. It could not be determined whether the animals were in or above the substrate, which seemed to be composed of blue or gray mud. At least six of the specimens were caught during day- time. Some females contained ripe eggs (21-41 FIGURE 4.— Eptatretus sp. A (MCZ 40370). Scale in centimeters. 75 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 mm) in February, March, and September; thus the population presumably spawned throughout the year. Eptatretus species A and B Figures 4 and 5, Table 1 Matena/.— Species A, MCZ 40370, 1 (433 mm), 9 June 1958, 1925-2225 h. Silver Bay station 445, 28°03 ' N, 78°44 ' W, depth 910-950 m, bottom type coral and sand; Species A (inferential; the speci- men cannot be located), 21 June 1958, 0730-1030 h. Silver Bay station 490, 29°49 ' N, 80°11 ' W, 330 m, bottom type green mud. Species B, SIO 76-252 (formerly UMML 31521), 1 (308 mm), 27 Sep- tember 1973, RV Columbus Iselin station 137, 26°07' N, 78°34.1-36.6' W, depth 590-560 m. Two specimens oi Eptatretus (herein provision- ally designated A and B) have been taken at depths of 950 and 590 m, respectively, in the vicin- ity of Grand Bahama Island (Figure 1). The pat- tern of fused teeth is 3/2 in these specimens and the total number of cusps is essentially the same. They exhibit differences large enough that they cannot be convincingly included in E. springeri. There are differences in the numbers of gill pouches and apertures, the relative branchial length, and number of prebranchial, trunk, and total slime pores (Table 1). Although there is vari- ability in the number of gill pouches, and speci- mens having one more or less pouch are found among the six-gilled species oi Eptatretus , it seems unlikely that our five- and seven-gilled specimens from south and north of Grand Bahama Island represent a single species with normally six gill pouches. The body width, the relative depth over the cloaca, and counts of prebranchial slime pores (Table 1) also indicate specific distinction for these two Atlantic Eptatretus specimens. Species A, a mature male, is considerably stout- er than the thin specimen designated as species B and is about as stout as E. springeri. The tail is less flaring and more pointed than that ofE. springeri. The skin is light brown overall wdth the ventral fin fold whitish. Patches of transparent skin overlie the eyes. Trunk and total slime pore counts are outside the range of E. springeri in this seven- gilled specimen (Table 1), but the internal miiiim= ■-•--■*'• --!*> 4 5 Figure 5.— Eptatretus sp. B (SIO 76-252). Object dependent from slit is an egg. Scale in centimeters. 76 FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS anatomy is similar: the tongue muscle overlies gill pouches 1-3, and the aorta divides between gill pouches 5 and 6. Species B is represented by a five-gilled female having a slender body and narrow head. The skin is light pinkish tan, with the ventral side only slightly lighter; no eyespots are visible. The thin ventral fin fold is white, and extends forward from the cloaca, reaching its maximum height at about the middle of the body, and gradually tapers off toward the posterior part of the branchial region. Several small depressions in the skin, about 0.4 mm in diameter, located mostly in the head region, may be traces of ectoparasitic trematodes. Species B differs from E. springeri in internal anatomy, having a tongue muscle overlying only the first gill pouch and an aorta bifurcating between the second and third gill pouch. Eptatretus profundus (Barnard 1923) is the only described species of Eptatretus having five gill apertures. Unfortu- nately, only the holotj^ie is extant. It was mea- sured by Hubbs (figures in parentheses, below) in the South African Museum (no. 13035) and was found not to differ much in length proportions from species B, but it was clearly stouter: body width (thousandths of total length), 37 (63); body depth including fin fold, 67 (94); body depth excluding fin fold, 62 (91); body depth over cloaca, 48 (68). The South African species yielded a lower total tooth count, 51 (42), but a similar number of slime pores, 81 (84). The difference in tooth count and stoutness indicate that the two specimens probably are not conspecific. Eptatretus species C Figure 6, Table 2 Material.— \5S^M 218400, 1 (380 mm), 13 October 1963, Silver Bay station 5146, 19°55.5' N, 72°00' W, depth 860-910 m. This six-gilled specimen, from off Haiti, is a female with eggs 2-3 mm long, apparently in quite early stages of development. The pattern of fused cusps, 3/3, and several other characters indicate relationship to E. minor (described below). It dif- fers from that species, however, in having a longer tail, shorter branchial length, greater body depth, slightly higher tooth count, and a lower prebran- chial slime-pore count. It is similar toE. multidens (described below), but differs particularly in hav- CM I M ' I M ' I ' 1 23456789 10 II CM 12 13 14 15 FIGURE 6.— Eptatretus sp. C (USNM 218400). 77 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table 2.— Characters of western Atlantic species of Eptatretus with 3/3 cusps (see text) of multicuspids of outer/inner row of teeth. Mean ± SD and range given for multiple specimens. E. minor n. SD. E. multldens n. sp. E. multldens? 17 specimens Holo- 4 specimens Holo- MCZ USNM Item including holotype type including holotype type 40409 218405 E. sp. Depth of capture (m) 300-400 370 510-770 510 500 365 910 Total length, TL (mm) 330±47.8 223-395 359 526± 125.3 377-655 600 331 364 380 Weight (g) 85±33.5 22-138 107 494 ±302.1 164-757 561 84 128 154 Measurements in thousandths of TL: Preocular length 55±8.8 31-62 59 46±3.1 43-49 43 — 61 59 Prebranchial length 243±14.3 201-259 245 200±8.4 188-207 202 214 236. 237 Branchial length 59±7.6 51-72 71 65±4.0 61-69 62 73 78 47 Trunk length 529±15.1 506-559 522 560±8.0 552-571 560 517 504 526 Tail length 165±14.1 139-183 162 179±8.0 169-188 182 196 181 190 Body width 61 ±10.6 48-78 62 45±5.7 39-50 39 48 77 57 Body depth Including fin fold 94±12.3 71-114 92 104±16.0 80-115 109 97 114 100 Excluding fin fold 89+10.5 71-108 88 102±16.0 78-113 107 — 105 99 Over cloaca 69±9.1 52-79 74 72±8.8 60-81 81 69 82 84 Tail depth 82 + 14.8 53-116 84 76±8.7 66-86 79 97 107 79 Barbel length: First 17±2.8 13-23 16 12+3.4 8-15 15 14 16 13 Second 18±3.3 13-25 22 14+0.6 13-14 13 19 17 14 Third 25+4.7 14-32 30 18 + 2.3 15-20 18 21 24 21 Counts: Teeth: Cusps on multicuspids 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 Unicuspids, outer row' 8-11 9-F8 11-12 12+11 11 + 12 12 + 13 12 + 12 Unicuspids, inner row' 8-10 9 + 9 9-11 11 + 11 10 + 11 10+11 11 + 11 Total sum of cusps 50±2.7 46-54 47 55±2.4 52-57 57 56 58 58 Slime pores, leftside: Prebranchial 16±1.0 15-18 15 15±1.0 14-16 16 13 15 13 Branchial 5.0±0.4 4-6 5 5.5±0.6 5-6 5 6 6 4 Trunk 45±2.1 41-48 48 54±1.5 52-55 55 50 47 44 Tail 12.4±0.7 11-14 12 15±0.0 15 15 12 11 14 Total sum 78±2.6 74-82 80 89±1.8 87-91 91 81 79 75 Gill apertures' 11.9±0.5 10-12 6-1-6 12±0.0 12 6 + 6 7 + 7 7 + 7 6 + 6 ' Left + right count for single specimen. ing a low total slime-pore count and also in having shorter trunk and branchial lengths, but a longer prebranchial length. Until more material can be examined, it seems desirable to delay the designa- tion of this specimen as a new species. Species C is light brown with plainly visible lighter patches on the skin overlying the eyes. The tongue muscle overlies the three or four anterior- most gill pouches and the aorta divides between gill pouches 5 and 6. Eptatretus minor, new species Figure 7, Table 2 Paramyxine springeri (in part). — Bigelow and Schroeder 1952:1-10 (the 338 mm long specimen in "additional material" stated to have come from Oregon station 321, which was erroneously listed with lat. 27°27' N; correct latitude is 29°27' N). Springer and Bullis 1956:40 (survey records). Bullis and Thompson 1965:17 (survey records). Holotype: USNM 164119, a female 359 mm long, with eggs 9 mm long, from Oregon station 1009, 24°34' N, 83°34' W, 370 m, 14 April 1954, 0450- 78 0730 h; surface temperature 24.4° C, bottom temperature 11.7° C; bottom material white coral and mud; in 12 m (40-ft) shrimp trawl. Paratypes: USNM 218399, two females, 307 and 334 mm, taken with the holotype. Other matenol: FMNH 59959, 1 (340 mm), 13 April 1954, 1815-2110 h, Oregon station 1006, 24°20' N, 83°20' W, depth 350 m, bottom temperature 10.6° C, bottom type coral and mud; FMNH 65817, 2 (355, 370 mm), 14 October 1959, 1805-2150 h, Ore- gon station 2670, 24°26 ' N, 83°24 ' W, depth 390 m, bottom type mud; MCZ 38707, 1 (313 mm), 19 April 1954, 2115-2300 h, Oregon station 1026, 25°08 ' N, 84° 19 ' W, depth 300 m, bottom temperature 10° C, bottom type sand and gravel; MCZ 40679, 1 (306 mm), 7 June 1959, 1940-2140 h, Silver Bay station 1189, 24°20.5' N, 83°25' W, depth 300 m, bottom type mud and sand; MCZ 51084, 1 (355 mm), 23 November 1963, Oregon station 4529, 24°31' N, 83°26' W, depth 390 m, bottom temperature 10.2° C; SIO 76-251, 3 (223, 223, 310 mm), 7-8 June 1959, 2245-0045 h, Silver Bay station 1190, 24°28' N, 83°34 ' W, depth 330 m, bottom type mud and sand; SIO 76-249, 1 (341 mm), 26 July 1963, Oregon FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS Figure 7. — Eptatretus minor, holotype (USNM 164119). 79 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Station 4338, 24°18' N, 83°18' W, depth 380 m, bottom temperature 8.9° C; SIO 76-250 (formerly UMML 15042), 2 (385, 395 mm), 29 July 1963, Oregon station 4346, 24°28' N, 83°29' W, depth 380 m; USNM 161513,^ 1 (332 mm), 28 April 1951, 1630-1817 h, Oregon station 321, 29°27' N, 87°19' W, depth 400 m, bottom temperature 10° C; USNM 218398, 1 (358 mm), 23 June 1969, Oregon II sta- tion 10643, 29°30' N, 87°09' W, depth 400 m. Diagnosis.— An Eptatretus with six (rarely five) gill apertures. Total cusp count 46-54, with three teeth fused in both outer and inner rows of teeth. Slime pores 74-82. A thin whitish middorsal stripe. Description. — This is a relatively short and stout species of Eptatretus, maturing at a small size (none of our 17 specimens exceeds 400 mm). Our shortest specimens are two sexually mature males, 223 mm each, and a ripe female, 310 mm, extremely swollen with 12 eggs, each measuring about 10 X 31 mm. An inconspicuous ventral fin fold begins well behind the last gill aperture and extends backward to the cloaca. The tongue mus- cle overlies the first three or four gill pouches and the aorta branches between pouches 5 and 6. Eptatretus minor and E. springeri are sympatric in the northeastern Gulf of Mexico (Figure 1). There are important differences between them. The pattern of fused teeth is 3/3 inE. minor and 3/2 in E. springeri (Figure 2). There may be a difference in the relative trunk lengths, E. springeri being longer. This difference is reflected in the nonoverlapping counts of trunk and total slime pores. The relative length of the branchial region tends to be greater inE. minor. In preserved material £J. minor is usually pale in color, while £. springeri is darker. From the material available it appears that E. minor lives at shallower depths, 300-400 m, than E. springeri, 420-730 m. The thin, light middorsal stripe, evident on most species ofE. minor, and the conspicuously long, laterally protruding barbels may be good field characters for that species. In contrast with other field species of Eptatretus, neither £. springeri nor E. minor has a conspicuous lighter patch of skin overlying the eye. Distribution. — All but 2 of our 17 specimens are from the Dry Tortugas grounds in the archipelago ••"Additional material" of Bigelow and Schroeder (1952) and labelled paratype of Paramyxine springeri. 80 extending westerly from the Florida Keys (Figure 1). The distributional pattern may be due, at least to some extent, to the massive exploratory trawl- ing activities carried out by federal research ves- sels to monitor the population of the royal red shrimp, Pleoticus robustus, in that area. The two records outside this area are the 338 mm specimen described by Bigelow and Schroeder (1952) and one of 358 mm from Oregon II station 10643. These two northernmost records indicate an overlap in distribution of E. minor and E. springeri in the northeasternmost part of the Gulf of Mexico. The depth ranges, however, do not overlap. Habitat and biology. — The bottom temperature in the area of E. minor is about 8.9°-11.5° C, and although two stations list coral as bottom type, they also include mud, where the hagfish probably were caught. One station lists sand and gravel as bottom type which would be less suitable for the animal ifE. minor usually digs into a muddy bot- tom, as does E. burgeri (Fernholm 1974). The specimen from that station might have been caught when swimming above the substrate, as is likely, since the trawl haul {Oregon 1026) was taken during the night when hagfish tend to be most active (Fernholm 1974). An indication of in- creased night activity may also be found in the fact that the only two hauls that took three or more specimens [Oregon 1009 and Silver Bay 1190) were taken at night or in early morning. Some females contained ripe eggs (25-33 mm) in April, June, July, September, October, and November; thus the population presumably spawned throughout the year. Considering the economic importance of the shrimp fishery in the areas where E. minor and E. springeri occur, and recent suggestions that Myxine glutinosa is an active predator on pandalid shrimps (Shelton 1978), a detailed investigation on occurrence and ecology of these hagfishes might be of value. Etymology. — The name minor, small, refers to the small size of mature specimens in our samples of E. minor, as compared with those ofE. springeri. Eptatretus multtdens, new species Figure 8, Table 2 Holotype: USNM 218401, a male, 600 mm long, from Oregon II station 11299, 12°52 ' N, 70°43 ' W, 510 m depth, 23 November 1970. FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS FIGURE 8.—Eptatretus multidens, holotype (USNM 218401) Paratypes: USNM 218404, 1 (655 mm), 12 May 1969, Oregon II station 10611, 7°13' N, 52°52' W, depth 770 m; USNM 218403, 1 (473 mm), 19 November 1969, Oregon II station 10804, 7°18' N, 52°56 ' W, depth 710-630 m; USNM 218402, 1 (377 mm), 23 November 1970, Oregon II station 11300, depth 550 m. Diagnosis. — A six-gilled Eptatretus with three fused teeth in each row (3/3). Total cusp count 52-57. Slime pores 87-91. No middorsal light stripe. Description. — This is a large, deep-bodied hagfish. The color of the four preserved specimens varies from pale brown to medium brown. The paler specimens may have been bleached during preser- vation, as the wrinkled tail is much darker along the creases. On the paler specimens the eyespots can barely be discerned, while on the darker ani- mals the light skin overlying the eyes is clearly visible. The holotype appears bleached on the right anterior part of the body which renders the eyespot visible only on the left side. A small ven- tral fin fold of noncontrasting brownish color is evident from the middle of the body to the cloaca. The tongue muscle overlies the first two or three gill pouches, and the aorta branches at the level of the sixth posteriormost gill pouch. When E. multidens is compared with E. spring- eri, noticeable differences in addition to the im- portant pattern of fused teeth are the longer tail and branchial area but shorter prebranchial ofE. multidens. These differences in body proportions are reflected in the higher slime-pore counts in tail and branchial areas and the lower prebranchial counts ofE. multidens. If E. multidens is compared with E. minor, to which it may be closely related by having the common pattern of fused teeth, it is found that the differences in body proportions are not pro- nounced. The best definitive characters to sepa- rate these two species seem to be the nonoverlap- ping trunk or total slime-pore count and the more noticeable eyespot in E. multidens. Other than E. springeri and E. minor, the only Atlantic Eptatretus with six gills is the probably endemic E. hexatrema from South Africa. This is a 81 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 large species having fused teeth 3/2 and a high number, 91-105, of sUme pores (Strahan 1975), seemingly above the range of the western Atlantic species. Distribution. — Records of this species along the northern coast of South America indicate it to be widespread in both the Caribbean and the Atlan- tic. Etymology. — The name multidens is derived from the Latin mult(us), many, and dens, tooth, in ref- erence to the high tooth count in this species. Eptatretus multidens? (Figure 9). — Two speci- mens, MCZ 40409 (331 mm, 23 August 1957, Ore- gon station 1886, 16°55 ' N, 81°12 ' W, depth 500 m, bottom type gray clay) and USNM 218405 (for- merly Department of Biology, University of Panama, no. 523, 364 mm, 5 July 1972, chartered commercial trawler Canopus, locality between Nicaragua and the Colombian border, depth 365 m), obviously conspecific, are similar to E. multi- dens in tooth count and pattern of fused teeth (3/3). A third record where the specimen cannot be located (MCZ 40218, 16 September 1957, 2100- 2200 h, Oregon station 1945, depth 460-550 m) is inferred to belong to the same species. There are, however, important differences in counts of gill apertures, 7-1-7, instead of 6 + 6 as in E. multi- dens, and the slime pores seem to be fewer (Table 2). Also, the prebranchial, branchial, and tail pro- portions are longer whereas the trunk appears to be shorter. Each of the two specimens has seven pairs of gill pouches. The tongue muscle overlies three or four gill pouches in the USNM specimen and five in the MCZ specimen. In each the aorta branches at the level of the seventh gill pouch. It is our belief that when more specimens be- come available it may be necessary to establish this form as a separate species. Until then it is convenient merely to indicate its relationship to E. multidens. I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 FIGURE 9.— Eptatretus multidens? (MCZ 40409). Scale in centimeters. 82 FERNHOLM and HUBBS: WESTERN ATLANTIC HAGFISHES OF THE GENUS EPTATRETUS ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We are particularly grateful to Charles E. Daw- son, Gulf Coast Research Laboratory Museum; Richard H. Goodyear, University of Panama; Rolf Juhl, Southeast Fisheries Center, Pascagoula; Luis Howell Rivero, Miami; C. Richard Robins, UMML; and Robert Schoknecht, MCZ, for making the hagfish material available for this study. For help with hagfish measurements and valuable discussions on hagfish taxonomy we are greatly indebted to Charmion B. MacMillan. J0rgen Nielsen, Richard H. Rosenblatt, and Robert L. Wisner critically read the manuscript and offered valuable suggestions. Elizabeth N. Shor typed the final manuscript. The Swedish-American Foundation and the Danish Natural Science Research council made it financially possible for the senior author to con- centrate on this work when visiting Scripps In- stitution of Oceanography. All this help is grate- fully acknowledged. LITERATURE CITED ADAM, H., AND R. STRAHAN. 1963. Systematics and geographical distribution of Myxinoids. In A. Brodal and R. Fange (editors). The bi- ology of Myxine, p. 1-8. Universitetsforlaget. Oslo, Nor- way Barnard, K. H. 1923. Diagnoses of new species of marine fishes from South African waters. Ann. S. Afr. Mus. 13:439-445. 1950. A pictorial guide to South African fishes. Marine and freshwater. Bailey Bros. & SwirfenLtd.,Lond.,p. 1-2. Bayer, F. M. 1969. A review of research and exploration in the Carib- bean Sea and adjacent waters. In Symposium on investi- gations and resources of the Caribbean Sea and adjacent regions. FAO Fish. Rep. 71, 1:41-91. BIGELOW, H. B., and W C. SCHROEDER. 1948. Cyclostomes. /n Fishes of the western North Atlan- tic, Part one, p. 29-58. Mem. Sears Res. Found. Mar. Res., Yale Univ. 1. 1952. A new species of the cyclostome genus Paramyxine from the Gulf of Mexico. Breviora 8:1-10. BULLIS, H. R., JR., AND J. R. THOMPSON. 1965. Collections by the exploratory fishing vessels Ore- gon, Silver Bay, Combat and Pelican made during 1956- 1960 in the southwestern North Atlantic. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Spec. Sci. Rep. Fish. 510, 130 p. CLOQUET, H. 1819. Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles, Paris 15:134- 136. DEAN, B. 1904. Notes on Japanese myxinoids. A new genus Paramy- xine and a new species Howea okinoseana. Reference also to their eggs. J. Coll. Sci., Imp. Univ. Tokyo 19(2), 23 p. FERNHOLM, B. 1974. Diurnal variations in the behaviour of the hagfish Eptatretus burgeri. Mar. Biol. (Berl.) 27:351-356. Holly, M. 1933. Cyclostomata. Das Tierreich 59, 62 p. HUBBS, C. L. 1963. Cyclostome. Encycl. Br. 6:941-944. LINDBERG, G. U., AND M. I. LEGEZA. 1959. Ryby Yaponskogo morya i sopredel'nykh chastei Okhotskogo i Zheltogo morei. (Fishes of the Sea of Japan and the adjacent areas of the Sea of Okhotsk and the Yellow Sea. Part 1. Amphioxi, Petromyzones, Myxini, Elasmbbranchii, Holocephali.) Izd. Acad. Nauk SSSR. Mosk., Leningrad. (Translated by Isr. Program Sci. Transl., 1967, 198 p.; available U.S. Dep. Commer., Natl. Tech. Inf. Serv., Springfield, Va., as TT 67-51392.) RASS, T S. 1971. Animal life. Fishes. [In Russ.] 4:15-18. Moscow. REGAN, C.T 1912. A sjmopsis of the myxinoids of the genus Heptatretus or Bdellostoma. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,Ser. 8, 9:534-536. SHELTON, R. G. J. 1978. On the feeding of the hagfish Myxine glutinosa in the North Sea. J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K. 58:81-86. SHEN, S. C, AND H. J. TAO. 1975. Systematic studies on the hagfish (Eptatretidae) in the adjacent waters around Taiwan with description of two new species. Chin. Biosci. 11:65-78. Springer, S., and h. r. bullis, Jr. 1956. Collections by the Oregon in the Gulf of Mexico. List of crustaceans, mollusks, andfishes identified from collec- tions made by the exploratory fishing vessel Oregon in the Gulf of Mexico and adjacent seas 1950 through 1955. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Spec. Sci. Rep. Fish. 196, 134 p. STRAHAN, R. 1975. Eptatretus longipinnis, n. sp., a new hagfish (family Eptatretidae) from South Australia, with a key to the 5-7 gilled Eptatretidae. Aust. Zool. 18:137-148. STRAHAN, R., AND Y HONMA. 1961. Variation in Paramyxine, with a redescription oi P. atami Dean and P. springeri Bigelow and Schroeder. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool, Harv Univ 125:323-342. TENG, H. L. 1958. A new cyclostome from Taiwan. [In Chin.] China Fish. Mon. 66:3-6. 83 k OBSERVATIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND LIFE HISTORY OF SKIPJACK TUNA, KATSUWONUS PELAMIS, IN AUSTRALIAN WATERS Maurice Blackburn^ and D. L. Serventy^ ABSTRACT Skipjack tuna occur in many areas around Australia, but have been little fished or investigated there because of low commercial demand. Their distribution in Australian coastal waters is not continuous, although suitable temperatures occur in all areas. Abundance in coastal waters is probably highest in the southeast. The southern limit of skipjack tuna range varies seasonally with the 15° C surface isotherm, and that temperature appears to be limiting. Length-frequency polygons for skipjack tuna of southeastern Australia show modes at about 37, 46, 53, and 59 cm fork length in the southern summer. The regression of weight W (grams) upon length L (millimeters) for east coast skipjack tuna is W = 0.000000839 L'^^202 Gonads of coastal skipjack tuna are all immature. The euphausiid Nyctiphanes australis is the principal food in east Australian waters south of latitude 34° S. Small fish such as clupeoids are eaten in some of those areas and are the principal food elsewhere. The skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis (Lin- naeus), occurs in tropical and warm temperate waters of all oceans. It supports large fisheries in many areas and is considered to have much poten- tial for further exploitation (Gulland 1971). The scientific literature on the species is large (Klawe and Miyake 1967) and growing. Australian con- tributions to that literature have been few, al- though the organized collection of data on Austra- lian skipjack tuna began in 1938. One reason is that the Australian tuna industry has shown little interest in skipjack tuna. It operates principally upon southern bluefin tuna, Thunnus maccoyii. The purpose of this paper is to present unpub- lished biological information on skipjack tuna in Australian waters and relate it to what has been published from the region. Many of the observa- tions were made by us. We do not discuss fishing operations or prospects, except to note briefly here that skipjack tuna have been caught in Australian coastal waters by live-bait fishing, purse seining, mesh netting, and trolling. Most of those catches were incidental to fishing for southern bluefin tuna. In the year 1974-75 the Australian tuna catch was 11,288 t, of which 2,375 t was skipjack tuna and the rest southern bluefin tuna (Anony- mous 1975, 1976). It is our opinion, admittedly '741 Washington Way, Friday Harbor, WA 98250. 227 Everett Street, Nedlands, Western Australia, 6009, Aus- tralia. subjective, that the biomass of skipjack tuna in Australian coastal waters is at least as high as that of southern bluefin tuna. It was much higher than the biomass of southern bluefin tuna off east- ern Tasmania in 1965, according to estimates from aerial surveys (Hynd and Robins 1967). One of us originally proposed the name "striped tuna" for this species in Australia, instead of "skip- jack" which is the usual English vernacular elsewhere (Serventy 1941). The intention was to avoid confusion with another pelagic fish which is sometimes called "skipjack" in Australia, namely Pomatomus saltator. "Striped tuna" has not gained acceptance as an English vernacular outside Aus- tralia, however, and both names are now used in Australia. Therefore we now refer to Katsuwonus pelamis as skipjack. METHODS Our summaries of biological data are based on skipjack tuna taken from 1938 to 1965. All were obtained by hook fishing at the sea surface, except for some Victorian samples which may have been caught near the surface in nets. Thus our biologi- cal observations essentially refer to surface fish. The same applies to other specimens mentioned in literature cited, except those noted to be from Japanese longliners. Length was measured from the tip of the snout to the caudal fin fork (FL), sometimes in millime- Manuscript accepted June 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 85 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 1 ters and sometimes to the nearest centimeter. Other authors whom we quote measured in the same way. Weight offish was measured ungutted, usually at sea, in pounds and ounces. These weights were converted to grams and rounded to the nearest 50 g. Gonads were weighed fresh to the nearest gram, usually at sea. Statements about mean positions of isotherms are based on charts by Vaux (1970) and Gorshkov (1974). SPATIAL DISTRIBUTION Skipjack tuna have an extensive distribution in the Australian region (Figure 1), but prior to 1938 they had been recorded only off New South Wales. It is now known that they have a continuous range in east Australian coastal waters from Lady El- liott Island to Storm Bay, although the limits may vary seasonally as discussed later. The RV War- reen and RV Stanley Fowler of the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization (CSIRO) established this distribution from trol- ling surveys between 1938 and 1951. Most speci- mens were taken on the continental shelf, many of them close inshore. East coast inshore waters north of Lady Elliott Island lie within the Great Barrier Reef. Skipjack tuna are unknown there, although most of the area is well fished by sports and commercial fishermen (Marshall 1964; Hynd 1968). The War- reen and Stanley Fowler prospected by trolling in northern Australian waters from July to October 1949, traversing much of the coast from Torres Strait to Broome. Skipjack tuna were found on banks near the edge of the Australian continental shelf to the south of Timor, but nowhere else, and no other records exist from northern coastal waters. Thus the distribution appears to be quite limited in coastal waters around northeast and northern Australia (Figure 1). This is not true of the adjacent oceanic waters, however. Japanese longline vessels began to fish for tuna in the area of Figure 1 about 1950. They did not seek skipjack tuna but took them incidentally. Figure 1 shows the general areas in which those vessels took any skipjack tuna in the years 1964-67, as established by Matsumoto (1975). Evidently skipjack tuna occur to some extent almost everywhere in ocean waters east, north, and west of the Australian mainland and New Guinea. Skipjack tuna were first recorded in Papua New Guinea waters be- tween 1948 and 1950 by the Australian RV Fair- wind, in localities shown in Figure 1 (Munro 1958). Japanese longlining began there at about the same time. About 1969 vessels of the Japanese live-bait fishery began taking skipjack tuna north and northeast of New Guinea, and a similar fishery was later established by nationals of Papua New Guinea within the same area (Kasa- hara 1977; Lewis and Smith 1977). Figure 1 shows the general area of the Japanese live-bait fishery in 1973, as reported by Kasahara (1977). Skipjack tuna were first recorded off the west coast of Australia in 1945. By 1951 an apparently continuous range from Onslow to Albany had been established, mostly by trolling surveys of the War- reen. Later surveys, made by the Department of Fisheries and Wildlife of Western Australia, ex- tended this range to Broome (Robins 1975). Skip- jack tuna in Western Australia appear to be less abundant than in southeastern Australia, at least on the continental shelf. Most were taken on the outer part of the shelf or just beyond the shelf edge. On the southern coast of Australia east of Al- bany, skipjack tuna were first found by the CSIRO RV Derwent Hunter in 1953, near the edge of the shelf in the eastern part of the Great Australian Bight. Soviet workers extended the known range to the western part of the Bight, again in waters near the shelf edge (Shuntov 1969). In 1978 the CSIRO RV Courageous found skipjack tuna be- tween the western end of the Bight and Albany (Maxwell^). East of the Bight, skipjack tuna have been taken by South Australian tuna fishermen almost to Kangaroo Island, from the shelf edge to near the coast (Olsen ; Williams ). Thus there is probably a continuous distribution along the southern coast of Australia to Kangaroo Island (Figure 1). We know of no certain skipjack tuna occurrences between Kangaroo Island and Australian east coast waters. The most westerly of the east coast records are Lakes Entrance in eastern Victoria, the mouth of the Tamar River in northeast Tas- mania (Scott 1975) and Storm Bay in southeast Tasmania (Figure 1). The apparent gap in skipjack tuna distribution to the west of those places is not readily explained. The skipjack tuna food or- ^J. G. Maxwell, Research Scientist, Division of Fisheries and Oceanography, CSIRO, Cronulla, 2230, Aust., pers. commun. May 1978. •'A. M. Olsen, Director of Fisheries Research, Department of Agriculture and Fisheries, Adelaide, 5000, Aust., pers. commun. May 1978. ^K. F. Williams, Experimental Officer, Division of Fisheries and Oceanography, CSIRO, Cronulla, 2230, Aust., pers. com- mun. May 1978. 86 BLACKBURN AND SERVENTY: DISTRIBUTION AND LIFE HISTORY OF SKIPJACK TUNA 110° 120° 130° 140° 150° 160° 110° 120° 130° 140° 150° 160° Figure l. — Australia and vicinity, showing areas of skipjack investigations and fisheries, edge of continental shelf (dotted line), mean February and August positions of the 15° C surface isotherm, and the following localities mentioned in the text: 1 — Lady Elliott Island, 2 — Sydney, 3 — Lakes Entrance, 4 — Fumeaux Group, 5 — Tamar River, 6 — Storm Bay, 7 — Portland, 8 — Kangaroo Island, 9 — Albany, 10 — Cape Leeuwin, 11 — Fremantle, 12 — Shark Bay, 13 — Onslow, 14 — Port Hedland, 15 — Broome. ganism Nyctiphanes australis, mentioned later, is abundant. Skipjack tuna can tolerate tempera- tures down to 15° C as shown below, and all waters in the area of no skipjack records have mean sur- face temperatures over 15° C in some months in most years. Aerial sightings of presumed skipjack tuna have been made near Portland and off west- ern Tasmania (Williams footnote 5). Nevertheless, we think the gap is real, at least in central and western Bass Strait. We and our colleagues have done much trolling in those areas in various sea- sons and years without catching any skipjack tuna. Southern bluefin tuna are likewise absent or very rare in central and western Bass Strait, al- though quite plentiful east and west of that region (Serventy 1956). Hynd and Robins (1967) showed that surface temperatures in the western ap- proaches to Bass Strait are under 15° C in parts of the summer because of upwelling, and perhaps as cold as that all summer in some years. This might restrict the distribution of skipjack tuna in waters east of Kangaroo Island. Hynd and Robins (1967) discussed the possibility of a similar effect upon southern bluefin tuna. Another possibility is that Bass Strait is too turbid for skipjack tuna, since it is shallow, receives several rivers, and is well mixed by waves and tides. Very little is known about effects of turbidity on tunas, however. 87 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 1 SEASONAL DISTRIBUTION The range of skipjack tuna in eastern coastal waters is subject to seasonal variation. Table 1 shows where specimens have been taken in those waters in each month, in investigations made by or in cooperation with CSIRO, vdth data of all years combined. The southern limit of the range is Table l. — Records of captured skipjack tuna (X) and sightings of skipjack tuna (S) in Australian east coast waters by months. Sources are Robins (1952), Hynd (1968), and unpublished data from the Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization for the period 1938-78. Waters between lat. 33° and 24° S were completely covered only in May, July, and September, and not covered at all in November and December. Waters between lat. 33° and 44° S were completely covered in all months. Lat. S Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. 24° -25° X 8 X 25° -26° s 26° -27° 27° -28° X s 28° -29° 29° -30° X X 30° -31° X X X X X 31° -32° X X X X X 32° -33° X X X X X X X X 33° -34° X X X X X X X X X 34° -35° X X X X X X X X X X X X 35° -36° X X X X X X X X X X X 36° -37° X X X X X X X X X 37° -38° X X X X X X X X 38° -39° X X 39° -40° X X X X X X 40° -41° X X X X 41° -42° X X X X 42° -43° X X X X 43° -44° X X farthest south in February-March and farthest north in July-August, and this variation is explic- able. All positions of the limit lie in the well- surveyed waters south of Sydney (approximately lat. 34° S), and they generally agree with positions of limiting sea surface isotherms as was shown by Robins (1952). Figure 1 shows the mean February and August positions of the 15° C surface isotherm, the one closest to the lowest tempera- ture at which any skipjack tuna have been caught (14.7° C, by Robins). The isotherm positions agree fairly well with the observed limits of skipjack tuna range in the same months, considering that no observations were made south of lat. 44° S. The lower limiting temperature for skipjack in abun- dance is about 16° C according to Robins (1952). The mean positions of that surface isotherm (about 2° of latitude north of the 15° C surface isotherm in each month) agree almost exactly with the skipjack tuna range limits in Table 1. From 1938 to 1942 skipjack tuna were hardly ever found south of lat. 43° S and seldom found south of lat. 42° S. They were fairly numerous between lat. 43° and 44° S in 1951, when temperatures were unusually high (Robins 1952). Hynd and Robins (1967) reported aerial sightings of a few schools of presumed skipjack tuna off the southern tip of Tasmania where surface temperatures were prob- ably about 13° C. Neither the species nor the tem- perature was confirmed, however. The occurrence of skipjack tuna at tempera- tures down to 15° C is of special interest, because the species has not been found in such cool waters in other parts of the world. It has been recorded at temperatures dowTi to 17° C in the eastern Pacific (Williams 1970) and 18° C near Japan (Uda 1957). Dizon et al. (1977) exposed four captive Hawaiian skipjack tuna to gradually decreasing water temperatures with the followdng results. Three fish stopped feeding at 17° C and died at 16° C; corresponding temperatures for the fourth fish were 15° and 14° C. It is difficult to recognize or hypothesize any seasonal change in the northern limit of skipjack tuna range in eastern coastal waters, especially in view of the incomplete vessel coverage north of Sydney (Table 1). The northern limit of any occur- rence (excluding offshore data from Japanese longliners) is between lat. 24° and 25° S, and skip- jack tuna were found there in February and June. If data from sightings are accepted there is evi- dence of skipjack tuna between lat. 24° and 26° S in various months from February to October. It would not be surprising if skipjack tuna occurred in those waters to some extent in all months. Mean monthly surface temperatures are maximal be- tween 27° and 28° C, whereas skipjack tuna can tolerate 30° to 32° C (WiUiams 1970; Dizon et al. 1977). On the other hand, the northern limit of the range of skipjack tuna in abundance could be south of the limit of total range and could vary with season, as Robins (1952) claimed. He put the northern limit of the main area of occurrence at about lat. 30° S in August-September and lat. 38° S in February, corresponding to the positions of the 19° C surface isotherm in those months. Robins considered that temperatures about 19° C were limiting for the main occurrence of skipjack tuna, 18° C limiting for occurrence in abundance, and 20.5° C limiting for any occurrence, at the warm end of the distribution along the east coast. The 88 BLACKBURN AND SERVENTY: DISTRIBUTION AND LIFE HISTORY OF SKIPJACK TUNA data in Table 1 are insufficient to support or deny Robins' conclusions as far as the actual skipjack tuna distribution is concerned. We note however that skipjack tuna are often abundant in other parts of the world at temperatures much above those mentioned (Blackburn 1965; Williams 1970). They have been found plentifully at 24° C off New South Wales (Williams footnote 5). Of course, abundance may reflect other conditions, as well as the distributions of temperature most suitable for adults. The occurrence of skipjack tuna in coastal waters north of Sydney, and its possible connec- tions with offshore distributions to the east and northeast, should be further investigated. Our knowledge of seasonal distribution in other coastal waters of Australia is incomplete. Off Western Australia skipjack tuna have been taken as follows, including records by Robins (1975): Broome to Port Hedland, July, August, and Oc- tober; Port Hedland to Shark Bay, January, April-June, August, September, and November; Shark Bay to Cape Leeuwin, February, March, and June-August; off Albany, May-July. Our rec- ords for the area south of Timor are for September and October. Australian and Soviet records be- tween Albany and Kangaroo Island are all for the period December-May. All the areas just men- tioned and others in northern Australia where no skipjack tuna have been found are warm enough for some skipjack tuna to occur all year (i.e., over 15° C at the sea surface. Figure 1). In the Japanese longline fishing area east of Queensland there may be some seasonal change in abundance of skipjack (Matsumoto 1975), but the pattern is not clear. In the similar area west of Western Australia the abundance appears to be low at all seasons. In surface waters of Papua New Guinea, according to Lewis and Smith (1977), there is no obvious seasonal change. LENGTH AND WEIGHT Length measurements of about 4,500 east coast skipjack tuna were made in CSIRO investigations to the end of 1965. The observed range was 30-65 cm FL north of Sydney, 35-66 cm FL in mainland waters south of Sydney, and 35-66 cm FL off Tas- mania. We have no length data for Great Aus- tralian Bight or South Australian fish except those of Shuntov (1969), which were 48-52 cm FL. Larger skipjack tuna to about 80 cm have been taken off New South Wales and South Australia in recent years (Williams footnote 5). Robins (1975) measured about 300 skipjack tuna from Western Australia, which were 29-78 cm FL. Our earlier measurements from the same area fall in that range. For Papua New Guinea a range of 35-62 cm FL was reported by Kearney et al. (1972). All these skipjack tuna were taken very near the sea sur- face. Barkley et al. (1978) hypothesized that large skipjack tuna require lower temperatures than small skipjack tuna and are therefore more abun- dant in the upper thermocline than at the sea surface, in the tropical Pacific. Figure 2 summarizes most of the east coast data in length-frequency polygons for various periods. Most of these sets of measurements are rather small in number, even when combined for certain months and years as in some of the polygons. Data for the Southern Hemisphere winter (polygons A, H, and M) show modes at about 34, 44, and 51 cm. Polygons for the southern summer (C, E, F, G, and J) have modes at about 37, 46, 53, and 59 cm. The first three modes for the summer are close to the three for the winter and are shown as I, II, and III, respectively, for each season. Modes at similar sizes in other polygons are labelled in the same way. This labelling does not imply that the modes represent successive age-groups a year apart, or that the absolute age is knov^n for any mode, be- cause such conclusions could not be drawn with confidence from these scattered data. If the modes do represent successive age-groups, the mean grov^h rate of east coast skipjack tuna must be about 6-10 cm/yr for fish between 35 and 60 cm. Most published estimates of skipjack tuna growth rate in that range of length are higher, as dis- cussed by Shomura (1966), Joseph and Calkins (1969), and Chi and Yang (1973) for Hawaii, Japan, the eastern Pacific, and Taiwan. The range of an- nual growth increment in those studies was 11-27 cm, with many values near 15 cm, and some of those estimates were obtained from tagging. On the other hand, Batts (1972) estimated 8-9 cm/yr for skipjack tuna >40 cm from North Carolina, from annuli in cross sections of dorsal spines. Kearney^ referred to an estimate of 7 cm/yr for Papua New Guinea skipjack tuna, based on tag- ging, but gave no details. Skipjack tuna of modal group I were obtained only from 1938 to 1941 in east coast waters. They may have been particularly abundant then, or there may have been some difference in trolling ^Kearney, R. E. 1978. Some hypotheses on skipjack {Kat- suwonus pelamis) in the Pacific Ocean. South Pac. Comm., Noumea, New Caledonia, Occas. Pap. 7, 23 p. 89 15 - 10 - 5 - 10 - 5 - 10 r 5 10 5 A May-July 1939,1940. N.S.W. 145 I II B Aug-0ct1940 ^ 1941 N.S.W. 130. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 20r H Aug-Sept 1950 a N.S.W. 462. 15- 10- 5 - ol 1 L C Nov- Jan 1939/40 '"A N.S.W. 190. 1940/41,1941/42 " D Mar-May 1941,1942 o) (0 ^* c 0) u o Q. lOr 5 20 n 15 - 10 5 15 r 10 E Dec 1965 F Dec-Jan 1963,1964 G Jan 1954 20 30 40 50 cm 20 " 1 Oct-Nov 1950 III A NSW. 109. 15 - \ 10 - \ 5 n - 1 1 iiy \, , Tas.1865. ""Or j peb-Mar 1951 5- 20 I 15 N.S.W. 107. Vic. 321. 10 5 ■J K Apr-May 1951 _L _L ^^^ L Apr-May 1951 10 5 20r M July-Aug 1951 N.S.W. 201. ""S 10 70 20 30 40 50 cm Tas. 282. Tas. 176. " N.S.W. 152. N.S.W. 201. 60 70 Figure 2. — Percentage fork length (centimeters) frequency polygons of skipjack from New South Wales (mostly south of Sydney), Victoria (Lakes Entrance), and Tasmania (Fumeaux Group to Storm Bay). The data are smoothed by a moving average of three. The number of specimens is given after the locality abbreviation in each polygon. Polygons A to D, E to G, and H to M show data for 1939- 42, 1954-65, and 1950-51, respectively. The order of the polygons in each of those groups is based on the month or months in which the data were taken. Roman numerals are for identification of modes, and do not necessarily indicate ages. 90 BLACKBURN AND SERVENTY: DISTRIBUTION AND LIFE HISTORY OF SKIPJACK TUNA method (e.g., speed, lure type, lure size) between that period and later. Robins (1975) took similar fish in the period April-June off Western Aus- tralia, mostly by purse seining but occasionally by trolling. Weight as well as length was measured for 607 east coast skipjack tuna. The following significant linear regression was found between the common logarithms of the variables: log W = -6.0762 + 3.5202 (logL) where W is weight (grams) and L is fork length (millimeters). The coefficient of determination, i? -, is 0.856. Standard errors of the first and second constants in the equation are 0.1595 and 0.0586, respectively. The equation is equivalent to: W = 0.000000839 L 3.5202 The range of L in the data used is 410-645 mm. The heaviest fish weighed 5.67 kg. The 95% confidence limits of the regression co- efficient are 3.4048 and 3.6356, calculated from the standard error. Other published regressions of skipjack tuna weight on length for large samples ( >200) indicate regression coefficients from 3.2164 to 3.67. Those samples were taken in the eastern, central, and northwestern Pacific (Nakamura and Uchiyama 1966, and references there) and off North Carolina (Batts 1972). Standard errors of the coefficients were not published in most cases. The standard error can be calculated from data of Hennemuth (1959), for a regression coefficient of weight on length for 1,280 skipjack tuna from the eastern Pacific (combined areas). The coefficient was 3.336, with 95% confidence limits 3.296 and 3.376. Thus the east Australian and eastern Pacific regressions are significantly different at the 5% level of probability. The meaning of this difference is not clear. The two groups of skipjack tuna probably belong to different populations (Fujino 1972; Sharp 1978). However, Hennemuth (1959) found regression coefficients from 3.144 to 3.555 in different areas of the eastern Pacific north of the Equator, a region considered to contain only one skipjack tuna population (Fujino 1972; Sharp 1978), and some of those coefficients were signifi- cantly different. SEXUAL CONDITION The gonads of 418 east coast skipjack tuna were weighed. Ovary weights ranged from 4 to 30 g. Most ovaries were white to pink. Discrete small ova were visible to the naked eye in some ovaries, but large yolked ova were not observed. Ovaries of a reddish flaccid appearance, which might have been spent, were seen occasionally from April to August in New South Wales and Tasmanian waters. Testes were small, weighing mostly 1-2 g with a maximum of 13 g. Milt could sometimes be expressed from them by pressing. Similar obser- vations were made on a small number of skipjack tuna from the west and northwest coasts of Aus- tralia, except that no gonads were weighed. A specimen taken off Fremantle in July was possi- bly spent. No gonad data are available from South Australia. Orange (1961) compared ovaries of skipjack and yellowfin tunas by means of a "gonad index" equal to 3 8 (gonad weight) / (fish length ) 10 with gonad weight in grams and fish length (fork length) in millimeters. This is a ratio between gonad weight and an estimate offish weight. The estimate is not accurate for skipjack tuna, since weight increases with fork length to some power slightly higher than 3 in that species, as noted earlier. However Orange also compared gonad in- dices with the appearance of the ovaries and ova, and found that only indices over 30 indicated ap- proaching sexual maturity in skipjack tuna. Naganuma (1979) made similar comparisons which indicated that spawning skipjack tuna have gonad indices of 80 or higher, measured on Orange's scale. Thus calibrated, the index has some utility, and it has been employed by other skipjack tuna investigators. None of the gonad indices in our east Australian material reached 30 (Table 2); only 2, out of 224, were slightly over 20. Thus no females appeared to be mature on the basis of gonad index, confirming the observations on the gonads themselves. Yet virtually all these skipjack tuna were at or over the size at which first sexual maturity has been found in other Pacific waters, i.e., about 45 cm (Kearney et al. 1972; Blackburn and Williams 1975; Naganuma 1979). It is clear from these observations that skipjack tuna do not spawn to any significant extent in east Australian coastal waters, and there is no evi- dence that they spawn in any Australian coastal waters; nevertheless, they do spawn in the 91 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table 2.— Length range, sex ratio, and female gonad indices (see text) for three groups of Australian east coast skipjack tuna. Fork Sex Gonad index length ratio Area Period (cm) (F/M) Range Mean New South Wales, Nov.-Dec. 44-57 47/30 5.6-20.7 12.3 south of Sydney 1941 Tasmania Mar.-May 1942 47-61 166/154 3.4-17.8 10.1 New South Wales, June 51-65 11/10 8.6-21.5 10.7 north of Sydney. 1941, and southern 1942 Queensland offshore tropical waters. Ueyanagi (1970) showed that skipjack tuna larvae occur between November and February in the Coral Sea east of tropical Queensland, north and east of New Guinea, and in ocean waters west of northwest Australia. From May to August the larvae are scarcer in Coral Sea and New Guinea waters than in the preceding period, and possibly so off north- west Australia. Gonad indices are higher in Coral Sea and New Guinea waters in the southern sum- mer than in winter (Naganuma 1979). Thus the skipjack tuna spawning season in waters near Australia is probably the southern summer, and the principal spawning areas seem to be in offshore waters northeast and northwest of the continent. FOOD Observations were made on stomach contents of 660 skipjack tuna from east coast waters and 30 from west and northwest coast waters (Table 3). Euphausiids were mostly Nyctiphanes australis although Thysanoessa gregaria was occasionally observed. Also included with euphausiids were several stomachs which contained a red liquid. This liquid was often found together with euphausiids, never with any other food, and was certainly a product of the digestion of euphausiids. The main point of interest in Table 3 is the proportion of stomachs with euphausiids. Evi- dently euphausiids are almost the sole food of skip- jack tuna in Tasmania and the principal food in southern New South Wales, but a small component of diet in the other sampled areas. Small pelagic fish are a large food item in all areas except Tas- mania. Cephalopods are a minor item in all areas. Table 3 does not include data on east coast skipjack tuna from Robins (1952) because they are non quantitative, but his findings were similar, as follows. Euphausiids were the principal food in Tks- mania and New South Wales waters south of Syd- ney. North of Sydney the principal food was fish, especially the young of pilchard, Sardinops neopilchardus , and anchovy, Engraulis australis. Park and Williams^ found the following in stomachs of skipjack tuna taken near Sydney: fish larvae, mainly pilchard; A^. australis; brachyuran and decapod larvae; copepods; and squid. These changes in diet by area appear to reflect the kinds of small nekton and large zooplankton that are available to skipjack tuna in coastal waters. Nyctiphanes australis is the principal coastal euphausiid in the southeast Australian region. Its range along the east coast is from lat. 31° S to the southern end of Tasmania (Sheard 1953). It is abundant off Victoria and Tasmania (including all of Bass Strait) and also off southern New South Wales, but not common in waters north of Sydney (Blackburn 1980). The species is un- recorded off Western Australia, although it occurs in South Australian waters. Off eastern Tas- 'Park, J. S., and K. Williams. 1977. A study of the relation- ship between the composition of food organisms of skipjack tuna Katsuwonus pelamis and the abundance and species composition of the plankton in the waters adjacent to Cronulla, New South Wales, Australia. Unpubl. manuscr Commonwealth Scien- tific and Industrial Research Organization, Division of Fisheries and Oceanography, Cronulla, 2230, Aust. Table 3.— Foods of skipjack tuna collected in Australian coastal waters, by numbers of stomachs in which they occurred. Nil means empty stomachs. Fish Other Area Nil Euphausiids remains Pilchard' Mackerel fish Squid lyiixed Other^ Total New South Wales, north of Sydney 16 1 7 12 1 1 6 44 New South Wales, Sydney and south 104 "77 10 2 4 M 1 ^5 204 Tasmania 82 322 1 '1 6 412 Western and northwestern Australia 14 6 83 1 '6 30 ^Sardinops neopilchardus . 'Scomber australasicus . ^Yellow liquid, except for two stomachs from Tasmania which contained salps. 'Including three stomachs which also contained hyperiid amphipods. ^Bellows fish (Macrorhamphosidae). ^Euphausiids plus fish or squid. Fish included Scomberesox forsteri , Trachums sp. and Macrorhamphosidae. 'Euphausiids plus squid. 'Flying fish (Exocoetidae), juvenile Gonorhynchus greyi, Harengula sp. and anchovy (probably Engraulis australis). 'Fish plus crustaceans or cephalopods or pteropods. Fish included Myctophidae. Cephalopods included squid and paper nautilus. 92 BLACKBURN AND SERVENTY: DISTRIBUTION AND LIFE HISTORY OF SKIPJACK TUNA mania, where skipjack tuna occur only in summer and autumn, N. australis is probably the only abundant food organism available to them. Pil- chards are not common in that area (Blackburn 1950b). Mackerel, Scomber australasicus, have been recorded from Tasmania, but were not found there by us and are probably rare. Anchovies are common in Tasmania, but their occurrence in summer and autumn is mostly in inlets which skipjack tuna do not enter (Blackburn 1950a). Jack mackerel, Trachurus declivis, are also abun- dant, but mostly occur closer inshore than skip- jack tuna (Hynd and Robins 1967). DISCUSSION The need for further information of various kinds on Australian skipjack tuna has been shown. It would be particularly interesting to know if the apparent discontinuities in distribu- tion are real, and if so, what causes them. The probable determinants of skipjack tuna distribu- tion in surface waters are temperature, food, and turbidity (Blackburn 1965, 1969). Dissolved oxy- gen concentration can be an additional limiting environmental property in the vertical plane, since skipjack tuna are stressed at concentrations below about 2.8 ml/1 (Dizon 1977; Sharp 1978). Concentrations at 100 m in waters near Australia are higher than 3.0 ml/1, however, except in an area off the west coast of West Irian (Reid et al. 1978). Temperatures required by skipjack tuna larvae may be higher than those preferred by adults, causing spawning adults to seek warmer waters than those not spawning (Blackburn and Williams 1975). It has been shown that all surface waters around Australia are warm enough (>15° C) for adult skipjack tuna in the warm season, and most waters warm enough at all seasons. The ab- sence or rarity of skipjack tuna in some of those areas probably indicates that suitable food or- ganisms are scarce, that the waters are too turbid for the fish to find food, or that the vertical dis- tribution of temperature is not such as to force the fish to the surface. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Many valued colleagues helped with the field work of this study They included J. G. Clark, D. Connolly, R. J. Downie, A. Flett, S. Fowler, and G. E Whitley, all now deceased. We are grateful to others for personal communications mentioned in the text. Kevin Williams provided some of the rec- ords in Table 1. Ian Munro was helpful with nomenclature and records of some food organisms. The regression of weight on length was calculated by Dennis Reid. We received useful comments from J. S. Hynd, G. I. Murphy, K. F Williams, and anonymous reviewers. The first author acknowl- edges support received from CSIRO as a visting scientist in the Division of Fisheries and Oceanog- raphy, which facilitated this work. LITERATURE CITED ANONYMOUS. 1975. Tuna season will be closely watched. Aust. Fish. 34(10):4-8. 1976. Drop in value and quantity of 1974-75 catch. Aust. Fish. 35(8):2. barkley, r. a.,w. h. neill, and r. m. Gooding. 1978. Skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, habitat based on temperature and oxygen requirements. Fish. Bull., U.S. 76:653-662. BATTS, B. S. 1972. Age and growth of the skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis (Linnaeus), in North Carolina waters. Chesapeake Sci. 13:237-244. Blackburn, M. 1950a. A biological study of the anchovy, Engraulis aus- tralis (White), in Australian waters. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 1:3-84. 1950b. Studies on the age, growth, and life history of the pilchard, Sardinops neopilchardus (Steindachner), in southern and western Australia. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwa- ter Res. 1:221-258. 1965. Oceanography and the ecology of tunas. Oceanogr. Mar. Biol., Annu. Rev. 3:299-322. 1969. Conditions related to upwelling which determine distribution of tropical tunas off western Baja California. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv, Fish. Bull. 68:147-176. 1980. Observations on the distribution of Nyctiphanes australis Sars (Crustacea, Euphausiidae) in Australian waters. Aust. CSIRO Div Fish. Oceanogr. Rep. 119, 10 p. BLACKBURN, M., AND F WILLIAMS. 1975. Distribution and ecology of skipjack tuna, Kat- suwonus pelamis , in an offshore area of the eastern tropi- cal Pacific Ocean. Fish. Bull., U.S. 73:382-411. Cm, K.-S., AND R.-T. YANG. 1973. Age and growth of skipjack tuna in the waters around the southern part of Ikiwan. Acta Oceanogr. Taiwan. 3:199-222. DiZON, A. E. 1977. Effect of dissolved oxygen concentration and salinity on swimming speed of two species of tunas. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:649-653. DizoN, A. E., W. H. Neill, and J. J. Magnuson. 1977. Rapid temperature compensation of volitional swimming speeds and lethal temperatures in tropical tunas (Scombridae). Environ. Biol. Fishes 2:83-92. FUJINO, K. 1972. Range of the skipjack tuna subpopulation in the western Pacific Ocean. In K. Sugawara (editor), The 93 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Kuroshio II, proceedings, Second Symposium on the Re- sults of the Cooperative Study of the Kuroshio and Adja- cent Regions, p. 373-384. Saikon PubL Co.. Tokyo. GORSHKOV, S. G. 1974. Atlas okeanov (Atlas of the oceans), Tikhii okean (Pacific Ocean). [In Russ.] Pergamon Press, Oxf , 302 p. 1976. Atlas of the oceans. Pergamon Press, Oxf, 87 p. (Engl, transl. of index and introd. of Atlas okeanov.) GULLAND, J. A. 1971. The fish resources of the ocean. Fishing News (Books) Ltd., West Byfleet, Engl., 255 p. HENNEMUTH, R. C. 1959. Additional information on the length-weight rela- tionship of skipjack tuna from the eastern tropical Pacific Ocean. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter- Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 4:25-37. HYND.J. S. 1968. Report on a survey for yellowfin tuna, Thunnus alba- cares ( Bonnaterre), in Queensland waters. Aust. CSIRO Div Fish. Oceanogr. Tech. Pap. 26, 40 p. HYND, J. S., AND J. R ROBINS. 1967. Tasmanian tuna survey report of first operational period. Aust. CSIRO Div Fish. Oceanogr. Tech. Pap. 22, 55 p. JOSEPH, J., AND T. R Calkins. 1969. Population dynamics of the skipjack tuna (Kat- suwonus pelamis) of the eastern Pacific Ocean. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 13:7-273. KASAHARA, K. 1977. Trends in tropical Pacific skipjack fishery. [In Jpn.] Suisan Sekai 26(3);28-33 (Engl, summ., Aust. Fish. 37(2):6-7, 1978). KEARNEY, R. E., A. D. LEWIS, AND B. R. SMITH. 1972. Cruise report Tagula 71-1. Survey of skipjack tuna and bait resources in Papua New Guinea waters. Papua New Guinea Dep. Agric. Stock Fish. Res. Bull. 8, 145 p. KLAWE, W. L., and M. P MIYAKE. 1967. An annotated bibliography on the biology and fishery of the skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, of the Pacific Ocean. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 12:139-363. LEWIS, A. D., AND B. R. SMITH. 1977. Successful year for PNG's fishery. Aust. Fish. 36(10):11-13. Marshall, T. C. 1964. Fishes of the Great Barrier Reef and coastal waters of Queensland. Angus and Robertson, Sydney, 566 p. ]VlATSUMOTO,W. 1975. Distribution, relative abundance, and movement of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, in the Pacific Ocean based on Japanese tuna longline catches, 1964- 67. NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-695, 30 p. MUNRO, I. S. R. 1958. The fishes ofthe New Guinea region. Territ. Papua New Guinea, Fish. Bull. 1:97-369. (Reprinted from Papua New Guinea Agric. J. 10(4):97-369.) Naganuma, a. 1979. On the spawning activities of skipjack tuna in the western Pacific Ocean. [In Jpn., Engl, summ.] Bull. Tohoku Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 40:1-13. NAKAMURA, E. L., AND J. H. UCHIYAMA. 1966. Length-weight relations of Pacific tunas. In T. A. Manar (editor). Proceedings, Governor's Conference on Central Pacific Fishery Resources, State of Hawaii, p. 197-201. 94 ORANGE, C. J. 1961. Spawning of yellowfin tuna and skipjack in the east- em tropical Pacific, as inferred from studies of gonad development. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 5:459-526. REID, J. L., E. BRINTON, a. FLEMINGER, E. L. VENRICK, AND J. A. MCGOWAN. 1978. Ocean circulation and marine life. In H. Charnock and G. Deacon (editors), Advances in oceanography, p. 65-130. Plenum Publ. Corp., N.Y ROBINS, J. P 1952. Further observations on the distribution of striped tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis L., in eastern Australian waters, and its relation to surface temperature. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 3:101-110. 1975. Tuna survey in waters off the Western Australian coast during the period August 1973 to August 1974. West. Aust. Dep. Fish. Wildl. Rep. 18, 85 p. SCOTT, E. O. g. 1975. Observations on some Tasmanian fishes: Part XXI. Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Tasmania 109:127-173. SERVENTY, D. L. 1941. The Australian tunas. Aust. Counc. Sci. Ind. Res., Pam. 104, 48 p. 1956. The southern bluefin tuna, Thunnus thynnus mac- coy ii (Castelnau), in Australian waters. Aust. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 7:1-43. SHARP, G. D. 1978. Behavioral and physiological properties of tunas and their effects on vulnerability to fishing gear In G. D. Sharp and A. E. Dizon (editors). The physiological ecology of tunas, p. 397-449. Acad. Press, N.Y. SHEARD, K. 1953. Taxonomy, distribution and development of the Euphausiacea (Crustacea). B.A.N.Z. Antarct. Res. Exped. 1929-1931 Rep., Ser. B, 8:1-72. SHOMURA, R. S. 1966. Age and growth studies of four species of tunas in the PacificOcean. In T. A. Manar(editor), Proceedings, Gov- ernor's Conference on Central Pacific Fishery Resources, State of Hawaii, p. 203-219. SHUNTOV, V R 1969. Some features of the ecology of pelagic fishes in the Great Australian Bight. [In Russ.] Vopr. Ikhtiol. 9:995-1005 (Engl, transl., Rrobl. Ichthyol. 9:801-809, 1969). UDA, M. 1957. A consideration on the long years trend of the fisheries fluctuation in relation to sea conditions. Bull. Jpn. Soc. Sci. Fish. 23:368-372. UEYANAGI, S. 1970. Distribution and relative abundance of larval skip- jack tuna {Katsuwonus pelamis) in the western Pacific Ocean. In J. C. Marr (editor). The Kuroshio, a sym- posium on the Japan Current, p. 395-398. East-West Center Press, Honolulu. VAUX, D. 1970. Surface temperature and salinity for Australian waters, 1961-65. Aust. CSIRO Div Fish. Oceanogr. Atlas 1, 198 p. WILLIAMS, F 1970. Sea surface temperature and the distribution and apparent abundance of skipjack (Katsuwonus pelamis) in the eastern Pacific Ocean, 1951-1968. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 15:231-281. A METHOD FOR GROWTH CURVE COMPARISONS Russell F. Kappenman^ ABSTRACT Suppose one has a sample of pairs of age and length measurements from each of two or more populations offish. The mathematical forms of the growth curves associated with the populations are assumed to be specified but each form contains at least one unknown parameter Presented in this paper is a data analytic approach to the problem of deciding which, if any, of the populations have essentially the same growth curve and which have different ones. A common problem in fisheries research is that of comparing two or more growth curves. This prob- lem arises whenever investigators gather data for the purpose of trying to determine whether or not different species or the sexes of a given species of fish grow at different rates, or for the purpose of assessing growth variation of a species from envi- ronment to environment, area to area, or stratum to stratum in which it is found. Since the models generally used for the age- length relationships (e.g., von Bertalanffy, Laird- Gompertz, logistic, etc.) are most often nonlinear in the unknown parameters and cannot be linear- ized by transformations of the variates, the usual techniques for comparing regression equations are not applicable. Up to this point little has been done in the way of development of quantitative methods for determining whether or not unknown growth curves do in fact differ. Thus the investiga- tor can often do little more than visually examine plots of age-length data for samples from the various populations being compared and arrive at some rather subjective conclusions. An exception is a paper by Allen (1976) which treats the special case where each of the growth curves being compared belongs to the von Berta- lanffy family. There are, of course, numerous instances where the von Bertalanffy model is not appropriate and the Allen procedure does not apply if it is not. Further, even if this model is appropriate, some severe assumptions need to be made in order to apply the analysis. These include: 1) the equality of the scale parameters for all curves being compared, 2) the true value of the common scale parameter being exactly equal to its 'Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard East, Seattle, WA 98112. estimated value, and 3) the usual normality, independence, and equality of variance assump- tions for the error term. The first assumption quite clearly biases the procedure in favor of the null hypothesis of equality of the growth curves, while validity of the second seems to be too much to hope for. Gallucci and Quinn (1979) also discuss the growth curve comparison problem for the von Bertalanffy case. They essentially reparameterize the model and test the hypothesis of equality of one of the new parameters for all curves being compared, assuming, apparently, that the other two have the same value for all of the curves. The comments in the preceding paragraph also apply to these authors' work. The purpose of this paper is to point out how some predictive sample reuse techniques, described in a recent paper by Geisser and Eddy (1979), can be adapted and applied to a growth curve compari- son problem where two or more populations are being studied, the growth curves associated with each of the populations are unknown and are to be compared, and a sample of age-length data is available from each population. The problem then is to use the data to decide which, if any, of the population growth curves are the same and which are different. We will assume that the growth curves associ- ated with each of the populations are specified except for the values of unknown parameters. These specifications often would be made by plotting the sets of age-length data, fitting vari- ous possible models suggested by the data plots, and selecting the models which best fit the data. The growth curves can, but need not, belong to the von Bertalanffy family. In fact, they can belong to any family. Thus, in essence, we are Manuscript accepted July 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 198L 95 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 considering a much more general and widely applicable problem than that discussed by Allen (1976) and by Gallucci and Quinn (1979). For the technique presented here, the only assumption that is made is that the forms of the population growth curves can be specified. No parameters are assumed to be known or equal, and no distri- butional assumptions are made. The solution, described in the following sec- tions, of our growth curve comparison problem is not obtained via a classical statistical hypothesis testing approach. That is, we do not formulate an appropriate null hypothesis and derive a crite- rion which dictates when and only when it should be rejected. Instead, in the spirit of Geisser and Eddy (1979), we formulate various possible mod- els and give a data analytic approach to selecting the one model preferred by the data. A difficulty, which plagues classical hypothesis testing, does not exist for the approach described here. It is the necessity of specifying a signifi- cance level. Historically, significance levels such as 0.10, 0.05, and 0.01 have routinely been used for tests without objective justification. Yet the choice of a significance level affects the conclu- sions arrived at. For example, it is quite possible to find that a hypothesis can be rejected at the 0.05 level, but not at the 0.01 level. Further, the choice of a significance level affects the probabil- ity of rejecting a false hypothesis. Lowering the significance level usually lowers the probability of rejecting a false hypothesis. Requiring one to specify a significance level presumes that one has a sound basis for controlling the probability of rejecting one of two possible hypotheses when it is true, that one can objectively assign a signifi- cance level which controls this probability, and that controlling this probability is more crucial than controlling the probability of not rejecting the hypothesis when it is false. The contention here is that for many, if not most, scientific investigations, the consequences of rejecting one hypothesis when it is true are no more serious than rejecting the other when it is true. That is, often an investigator has no reason to favor either hypothesis, but merely wants to know which one is more reasonable, given the data that has been collected. THE TWO POPULATIONS CASE Suppose that two populations of fish are being studied. For example, the first population might 96 consist of all fish of a given species inhabiting one area while the second might consist of all fish of this species inhabiting a different area. Suppose we are interested in comparing the growth curves associated with the two populations. We consider two possible models, say Mi and M2. The model Mi specifies that the growth curves are the same, while under M2 the two growth curves differ. Let X and y represent, respectively, the age and length of a fish. Then we rewrite Mi and M2 as Mi: y=fix;6) + e (1) no matter which of the two popula- tions fish belongs to. M2: y = fiix;di) + e (2) if the fish belongs to the first population. y = f2ix;d2) + e (3) if the fish belongs to the second population. Here fix; 6), fiix; di), and fiix; 62) are each functions of x. 6, di, and 62 are each vectors of unknown parameters and f, fi , and /2 are speci- fied except for the values of elements of 6, 61 , and 02. Essentially, f, fi, and [2 represent three dif- ferent growth curves which are specified except for the values of unknowm parameters present in each. The function f represents the expected length of a fish whose age is x, assuming equal growth curves for the two populations, while /"i and f2 are, respectively, the expected lengths for fish of age x from the first and second populations, assuming the growth curves differ. As usual, e represents the unknown, random error term. We now give a data analytic approach for selecting one of the two possible models Mi or M2 . The data used to make the selection are pairs of age-length measurements for samples of fish from each of the two populations. Let {xii,yu), ixi2,yi2),---,ixin,yin) represent a sample of n pairs of observations of x and y from the first population and (^21, ^21), (^22, y22),--, ix2m, y^m) represent a sample of m pairs of obser- vations of X and y from the second population. These n + m pairs of observations are the data gathered by the investigator and we want to use these data to select either Mi or M2 . Assume, for the moment, that M2 is correct. Forj - 1, 2,...,n, let ^k^) represent the vector of KAPPENMAN: A METHOD FOR GROWTH CURVE COMPARISONS (least squares, say) estimates of the elements of 01 found by taking the relationship between x and y to be given by Equation (2) and using the data (xii, yii), U12, yi2),- --Axiij -d, yuj-i)), ixnj + i),yuj + i)),...,(xin, yin), that is, all of the n pairs of observations of x and y from the first population except for the jth pair. Set n D21 = 1 [yij - fiixij; dt(j))f. Note that the second term inside the brackets is the predicted length for the jth fish in the sample from the first population, assuming M2 is correct. The observed length of this fish is the first term inside the brackets. Thus D21 is the sum of the squares of the differences between the observed and predicted fish lengths for the fish in the first population sample, for model M2 . Similarly, for 7 = 1, 2,...,m, let ^2(J) represent the vector of (least squares, say) estimates of the elements of 62 found by taking the relationship between x and y to be given by Equation (3) and using the data (X21, ^21), (^22, y22),---,ix2ij-i), y2{j-i)), (x2ij +1) , y2ij +1)), ,ix2m, y2m), i.e., all of the m pairs of observations of x and y from the second population except for the Jth pair. Set n ■D22 = 2 {y2j - f2ix2j; d2{j))f 7=1 and D2 = D21 + D 22. The quantity D22 has an interpretation similar to that given to D21. Putting these two together, we see that D2 represents the sum of the squares of the differences between the observed fish lengths and the predicted fish lengths for all n + m fish in the samples, under model M2 . Next, assume that Mi is correct, pool the data, and consider the n + m pairs (jCn, yn), (xi2, yi2),. .-, iXm, yin), iX2i , y2i), (^22 > y22),---, iX2m, y2m)- Let {xj,yj) represent thejth of these n + m pairs, for 7 = l,...,n + m. Further, forj - 1,2,..., n + m, let d^j), represent the vector of (least squares, say) estimates of the elements of 6 obtained by taking the relationship between x and y to be given by Equation (1) and using the data (xiji), (X2,y2),---,ixj-i,yj~i), ixj + i,yj+i),..., ixn +m , yn +m ), that is, all 7z + m pairs of observa- tions of X and y from the first and second popula- tions except for the jth pair. The sum of the squares of the differences between the observed and predicted fish lengths for all n -I- m fish in the samples, under Mi , is n + m ^1 - S [yj - fixj; eij^)?. J =1 Our rule for selecting either of Mi or M2 can be simply stated as follows. Select Mi if Z)i^D2, otherwise select M2. This rule is a very natural and objective one. It is based on whether the data (i.e., the observed fish lengths) are better predicted by one growth curve or two. If the sum of squares of the differences between observed and predicted lengths under Mi does not exceed the sum of squares of the differences between observed and predicted lengths under M2 (i.e., Di^D2), the data are better predicted by one growth curve than by two and Mi should be selected. Otherwise, they are better predicted by two distinct growth curves and M2 should be selected. AN EXAMPLE To illustrate the procedure described in the previous section, we consider an example. The numbers given in the first two columns of Table 1 are the ages and corresponding lengths of 15 fish taken from the first of two populations, while the numbers in the first two columns of Table 2 are the ages and corresponding lengths of 14 fish taken from the second population. These data are hypothetical. In fact they were generated by a computer. We want to use these two sets of data to decide which of two models, Mi or M2, is preferred, where under Mi the growth curves for the two populations are the same, and under M2 the two populations have different growth curves. Among several growth ciirves, including the von Bertalanffy, Laird-Gompertz, and logistic ones, the best fit, for both data sets as well as the combined data set, was provided by the logistic. The average length of a fish whose age is x, for a logistic growth curve, is f{x;a,b,c) = a 1+e ■(6x + c) (4) where a, b, and c are unknown parameters. Thus, we take Mi to specify that the average length of a fish whose age is x is Equation (4) no 97 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 TABLE 1.— Ages, lengths, parameter estimates, and predicted lengths, under models M, and M2, for 15 Population I fish. Least squares estimates Predicted Least squares estimates Predicted Age Length of a,, ti,, c, under M2 length under M2 of a, b, c under M, length under M, 1 4.0 55.27, 0.36, -2.70 4.9 55.67, 0.35, -2.62 5.2 2 8.3 54.76, 0.38, -2.80 6.2 55.44,0.36, -2.66 6.9 3 5.6 55.86, 0.34, -2.56 9.9 55.91,0.34. -2.56 10.0 5 16.0 55.11,0.37, -2.73 15.9 55.57, 0.35, -2.63 16.5 6 20.9 55.13,0.37, -2.74 20.3 55.56, 35, -2.64 20.8 7 27.7 55.40,0.36, -2.77 24.8 55.70,0.35. -2.65 25.4 8 31.9 55.43, 0.36, -2.73 29.9 55.70, 0.35, -2.64 30.4 9 32.9 54.62,0.38, -2.76 35.7 55.28, 0.36, -2.65 35.6 10 40.2 55.24,0.36, -2.71 39.4 55.62, 0.35, -2.63 39.5 11 39.9 54.88.0.38, -2.81 44.0 55.37, 0.36, -2.67 43.7 12 45.6 55.15,0.37, -2.74 46.4 55.56, 0.36, -2.64 46.4 13 49.6 54.96,0.36, -2.72 48.6 55.51,0.35, -2.63 48.7 14 53.0 54.32,0.37, -2.71 50.0 55.26, 0.35. -2.63 50.4 16 54.2 54.23, 0.37, -2.74 52.2 55.27, 0.36, -2.64 52.8 17 51.5 56.97, 0.35, -2.68 54.8 56.25,0.35, -2.62 54.2 TABLE 2.- —Ages, lengths, parameter estimates. and predicted lengths, under models Mi and M2 , for 14 Population II fish. Least squares estimates Predicted Least squares estimates Predicted Age Length of 82, £)2, C2 under M2 length under Mj of a, b, c under M, length under M, 1 6.5 55.65, 0.35, -2.60 5.3 55.43, 0.36, -2.66 5.0 2 6.4 56.09, 0.34, -2.52 7.7 55.62,0.35, -2.62 7.1 3 8.0 56.24, 0.33, -2.48 10.4 55.69. 0.35, -2.60 9.7 4 14.1 55.74, 0.35, -2.60 12.9 55.47, 0.36, -2.66 12.5 5 17.6 55.84, 0.35, -2.59 16.8 55.53,0.36, -2.66 16.3 6 21.8 55.90, 0.35. -2.58 21.1 55.58, 0.36, -2.65 20.7 8 31.4 56.05,0.34, -2.56 30.6 55.65, 0.35, -2.64 30.4 9 34.4 55.48, 0.35, -2.59 35.9 55.46,0.36, -2.64 35.4 11 43.0 55.78, 0.35, -2.57 43.5 55.54,0.36, -2.64 43.3 13 49.1 55.83,0.34, -2.56 48.8 55.54, 0.35. -2.63 48.7 14 50.4 55.92, 0.35, -2.57 50.7 55.58, 0.35, -2.64 50.6 15 52.3 55.78,0.35, -2.56 52.0 55.50, 0.35, -2.64 52.0 16 54.3 55.25,0.35, -2.57 52.7 55.24, 0.36, -2.64 52.8 17 53.0 56.53, 0.34, -2.55 54.4 55.78, 0.35, -2.63 53.9 matter which population it belongs to. On the other hand, we take M2 to specify that the aver- age length of a fish whose age is x is Equation (4) with a, b, and c replaced, respectively, by a/, bi, and a, if the fish belongs to population i, for i = 1, 2. Note that in the notation of the previous section d is the vector whose elements are a, b, and c, while 6i is the vector whose elements are at , bi , and a , for i = 1, 2. Also n -15 and m = 14, for this example. The ith row, or threesome, for i = 1,...,15, of the third column of Table 1 is the set of least squares estimates of ai , 61 , and Ci obtained by assuming M2 to be correct and using all of the age-length data pairs in Table 1, except for the ith pair, to estimate oi , 61 , and Ci . For example, when the data point (8, 31.9) is ignored, the least squares estimates of ai , 61 , and ci are, respec- tively, 55.43, 0.36, and -2.73. The fourth column of Table 1 gives the predicted lengths for each of the first population fish, assuming M2 is correct. That is, the ith element in this column is am) I -I- g-^bi(i)Xi + Ci(i)) (5) where xi is the ith element of the first column and ai(i), biH), and cm) represent the ith three- some of the third column. The ith row, or threesome, for i = 1,...,15, of the fifth column of Table 1 is the set of least squares estimates of a, 6, and c obtained by assuming Mi to be correct and using all of the age-length data pairs in Tables 1 and 2, except for the ith pair in Table 1, to estimate a,b, and c. The last column of Table 1 gives the predicted lengths for each of the first population fish, assuming Mi is correct. The ith element of this column is (5) after dm), hm), and cm) have been replaced by dii), b{i), and cn), where the latter threesome is the ith row of column five. The discussion of columns three, four, five, and six of Table 2 is completely analagous to that given in the preceding two paragraphs for these 98 KAPPENMAN: A METHOD FOR GROWTH CURVE COMPARISONS columns of Table 1. Thus, essentially, the fourth and sixth columns of Table 2 give the predicted lengths of the second population sampled fish for models M2 and Mi , respectively. In the notation of the previous section, D21 is the sum of the squares of the differences between the corresponding elements of columns two and four of Table 1. We find that Dai = 87.31, for this example. Similarly, D22 is the sum of the squares of the differences between the corresponding elements of columns two and four of Table 2 and we find that D22 = 19.39. Further, D2 = D21 + D22 = 106.70. Finally, Di is the sum of the squares of the differences between the correspond- ing elements of columns two and six of Tables 1 and 2. We find that Di = 86.77 and since Di < D2 , the model. Mi , of equal growth curves for the two populations is the one best supported by the data. For this example, the length of the 7th fish from population i was taken to be Yu = a + €, 1+e -ibxij +c) ij for i = 1, 2, where Xij is the age of the 7th fish from population i, a = 55, b = 0.35, c = -2.55 and the e^y's were each normal random variates with mean zero and standard deviation equal to two. The normal variates were generated using the algorithm of Box and Muller (1958). Thus, in essence, we generated both data sets using the same growrth curve and the procedure described in the previous section made the correct selection. MORE THAN TWO POPULATIONS The procedure used to compare the growth curves for two populations is easily extended to the case where the grow^th curves for three or more populations are to be compared. As before, we begin by formulating all possible or plausible models. The number of possible models increases considerably as the number of populations being studied increases. For example, if there are three populations, there are five possible models, say Mi,...,M5. Here Mi specifies that all three growth curves are the same. M2 specifies that the growth curves for the first two populations are the same but they differ from that for the third population. M3 specifies that the first and third populations have the same growth curve but the second population's growth ciirve is different. M4 specifies that the first population's growth curve differs from those for the second and third popu- lations but the latter two are the same. Finally, M5 specifies that all three grov^h curves differ. Once again we assume that the forms of the common and distinct growth curves are specified for each model, but each contains one or more unknown parameters. Once the models have been formulated, the problem is to use data to select one of them as being most plausible. The data consist of samples of pairs of age-length measurements from the populations being studied. For each model, we compute the sum of the squares of the differences between observed and predicted lengths for all of the fish in the samples, where the predicted lengths are computed by assuming the model is correct. The model selected as most appropriate, by the data, is the one that corresponds to the smallest sum of squares. In order to compute the sums of squares, we must calculate a predicted length for each fish in the samples, under each model. For a given fish and a given model, the fish's predicted length is calculated by noting the population from which it came and grouping together all data points from this population and the populations, if any, whose growi;h curves Eire asserted, by the given model, to be equal to the grov^h curve for the fish's popula- tion. The fish's age and length measurements are then eliminated from the group of data points and the remaining data points in the group are used to estimate the unknown parameters in the asserted common grovid;h curve. Once these estimates are obtained, unknown parameters in the asserted common growth curve are replaced by their esti- mates, and the fish's age is substituted into the result to obtain the fish's predicted length. As an example, consider the data given in Table 3. These data represent the ages and corre- sponding lengths of 20 fish taken from each of three populations. Once again, the data have been generated by a computer. Our goal is to use the data to select one of five possible models, Ml , . . . ,M5 , where the M,'s are delineated in the first paragraph of this section. For this example, a growth curve of the form y =a{l 6 0' e ■) + e (6) fits each data set better than the von Bertalanffy, Laird-Gompertz, and logistic growi;h curves. The first term on the right hand side of Equation (6) is 99 essentially a constant times an extreme value for minima distribution function. This growth curve does not appear to have been used in the litera- ture as yet. But it probably should be considered as a possible model whenever the other three are tried, as I have found cases where it fits real data better than the others. Table 3.— Ages and lengths of 20 fish from each of the three populations. Population 1 Population II Population III Age length length length 1 4.7 5.0 5.3 2 5.4 7.5 6.1 3 10.0 14.2 10.8 4 12.6 11.0 13.5 5 19.0 17.8 20.0 6 16.0 17.5 17.2 7 19.0 19.2 20.1 8 22.3 27.9 23.5 9 28.1 27.7 29.2 10 27.2 34.1 28.2 11 38.0 32.7 38.8 12 41.5 40.8 41.8 13 42.1 48.1 41.7 14 49.9 51.5 48.9 15 53.3 53.3 51.4 16 57.0 56.3 54.3 17 56.3 55.9 52.8 18 58.3 57.9 54.1 19 59.6 60.2 55.0 20 59.9 57.9 55.1 Because Equation (6) fits each data set so well, one takes each of the common and distinct growth curves for each model to be in the form of Equa- tion (6). Then for each model one calculates a predicted length for each of the 60 fish in the samples and a sum of squares of the differences between observed and predicted lengths. For the models Mi,...,M5, these sums of squares, are respectively, 334.27, 298.58, 346.45, 331.58, and 312.94. Since the second of these is the smallest, the model, M2, which asserts that the growth curves for the first two populations are the same but that for the third population is different is the selected one. Each of the fish lengths for this example was calculated using Equation (6), where j' represents length and x represents age. Once again, e was taken to be a normal random variate with mean zero and a standard deviation of 2. For each of the fish in the first two of the three samples, a = 60, 6 = 0.10, and c = 0.20. For the 20 fish in the third sample, a = 55, 6 = 0.12, and c = 0.20. Thus the first two data sets were generated using the same growth curve, but the third data set was gener- ated using a different growth curve. Our procedure made the correct selection. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 SOME CONCLUDING REMARKS It is, in general, not feasible to attempt to carry out the calculations required for our growth curve comparison procedure by hand or with a desk calculator. This is because nonlinear regres- sion analyses are usually required and there are many of them. However, the computations are easily programmed for a computer. For many growth studies, rather massive amounts of data are gathered. If the amount of data available is excessively large, computer time and costs may become prohibitive. It is natural to ask whether the number of computa- tions required can be reduced by doing away with the process of eliminating a data point from a data set before estimating parameters. Indeed, if this could be done, the number of least squares analyses needed would be drastically reduced. Unfortunately, however, it cannot be done. For it can be shown that if it is done, the selected model will always be the one which asserts different growth curves for all populations. Often though, when there is a large amount of data, each age in the samples is common to many fish. In this case, a possible procedure is to work with the data points consisting of ages and aver- age lengths, thus reducing the number of data points considerably. However, if the numbers of lengths used to calculate the average lengths vary widely from age to age, then it seems sensi- ble to use weighted sums of squares of differences between observed and predicted lengths, and weighted least squares estimates of parameters, with the weights, in each case, being the numbers of lengths used to calculate the average lengths. The idea is that the larger the number of observa- tions used to calculate an average, the closer the average should be to the true growth curve ordi- nate and, thus, the more weight that should be assigned to it. This modification of the present procedure was used in Boehlert and Kappenman (1980). The dangers of extrapolation, after regression analyses, are well known. Thus, the practice of obtaining a predicted value for the dependent variable for a subject whose independent variable value lies outside the range of independent var- iable values used to carry out the regression analysis, is generally discouraged. There may be instances where extrapolation will bias our com- parison procedure away from one or more models. The easiest way of checking to see if it does, in 100 KAPPENMAN: A METHOD FOR GROWTH CURVE COMPARISONS any given situation, is to examine the observed and predicted length differences for each model. Differences, corresponding to youngest or oldest fish, being excessively large for one or more models might be an indication that extrapolation is biasing the procedure. This difficulty did not appear in the examples used in this paper, but it is possible to imagine rare cases where it could be a problem. If this problem does arise, it is easily remedied. One can always eliminate from a sum of squares of differences between observed and predicted lengths those differences whose predic- ted lengths are obtained by extrapolation. If this is done, the sums of squares in the model selection criterion should be replaced by averages of squares of differences. For each of the examples given in this paper, all of the specified growth curves were taken to be of the same form. This is not necessary. Any growth curve can be given any form. For exam- ple, in the two population case, the common growth curve, for the model of equality of growi;h curves, can have a mathematical form which is different from the forms of the growth curves specified under the model of different growth curves. And, in fact, the latter two forms can be different from each other. Thus it is possible to handle the case where Mi specifies equal growth curves and the common growth curve belongs to, say, the logistic family, while M2 specifies differ- ent growth curves and the curves belong to, say, the Laird-Gompertz family or one belongs to the Laird-Gompertz family and the other belongs to the generalized extreme value for minima family. Finally, it should be pointed out that although this paper has been concerned solely with growth curve comparisons, the procedure described here can be applied to the general problem of compar- ing regression equations. The regression equa- tions of interest can be either linear or nonlinear functions of the unknown parameters. Where they are nonlinear is of particular interest since such comparisons have apparently not been dis- cussed in the literature. LITERATURE CITED ALLEN, R. L. 1976. Method for comparing fish growth curves. N.Z. J. Mar. Freshwater Res. 10:687-692. BOEHLERT, G. W, AND R. F. KAPPENMAN. 1980. Latitudinal growth variation in the genus Sebastes from the Northeast Pacific Ocean. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Sen 3:1-10. Box, G. E. P, AND M. E. MULLER. 1958. A note on the generation of random normal devi- ates. Ann. Math. Stat. 29:610-611. GALLUCCI, V F, AND T. J. QUINN II. 1979. Reparameterizing, fitting, and testing a simple growth model. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 108:14-25. GEISSER, S., and W E EDDY. 1979. A predictive approach to model selection. J. Am. Stat. Assoc. 74:153-160. 101 CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF LARVAE OF SCULPINS (PISCES: COTTIDAE AND ALLIES) IN NORTHEAST PACIFIC GENERA WITH NOTES ON INTERGENERIC RELATIONSHIPS' Sally L. Richardson^ ABSTRACT Current knowledge of cottid larvae in northeast Pacific genera is summarized. Larvae are known for representatives of 25 of the 40 genera reported from Baja California to the Aleutian Islands although two genera, Gymnocanthus and Icelus, are represented only by species which live in other areas as adults. Included are illustrations of larvae of 29 species representing the 25 genera plus one potentially new northeast Pacific genus, identified only as "Cottoid Type A." The larvae exhibit a wide diversity of form. Based on shared larval characters, including spine patterns, body shape, and pigmentation, 6 phenetically derived groups of genera are apparent within the 25 genera for which representatives are considered: 1) Artedius, Clinocottus, Oligocottus, Orthonopias; 2) Paricelinus, Triglops, Icelus, Chitonotus, Icelinus; 3) Dasycottus, Psychrolutes, Gilbertidia, IMalacocottus, "Cottoid Type A"; 4) Scorpaenichthys, Hemilepidotus; 5) Blepsias, Nautichthys; 6) Leptocottus , Cottus. Six genera do not fit with any group: Enophrys, Gymnocanthus , Myoxocephalus, Radulinus. Rhamphocottus, Hemitripterus . If these preliminary larval groupings reflect relationship, as evidence indicates, they tend to support a number of previously implied relationships wdthin the cottids, but there are some important differences. These include the distinctiveness of the Artedius (Group 1) line; the separation of Artedius and Icelus, once considered closely related; the relationship of Paricelinus, generally considered a primitive and rather distinct form, with other members of Group 2; the apparent relationship of Icelus to other genera in Group 2 and its questionable placement in a separate family; the distinctiveness of Radulinus, previously considered to be related to Chitonotus and Icelinus. The Cottidae, which in this paper are considered broadly to include sculpinlike fishes of Cottidae, Icelidae, Cottocomephoridae, Comephoridae, Nor- manichthyidae, Cottunculidae, and Psychrolut- idae of the suborder Cottoidei of Greenwood et al. (1966), comprises a diverse group of temperate and boreal fishes. Nelson (1976) estimated that the group may contain over 350 species, three-fourths marine, in about 86 genera. They are generally coastal fishes inhabiting all oceans but the Indian. Greatest species diversity occurs in the North Pacific. The systematics of the group are not well understood (Quast 1965; Nelson 1976). Until recently, larvae of relatively few cottids had been described. They were a difficult group to identify in ichthyoplankton collections, particu- larly in the northeast Pacific where 40 genera are reported to occur between Baja California and the 'This paper was presented at the Second International Sym- posium on The Early Life History of Fish (sponsored by ICES, lAO, ICNAF, lAOB, SCOR) held at Woods Hole, Mass., 2-5 April 1979. An abstract of the paper appeared in the sjrmposium publication. ^Gulf Coast Research Laboratory, East Beach Drive, Ocean Springs, MS 39564. Aleutian Islands (Table 1). With the recent work by Richardson and Washington (1980), larvae are now known for representatives of 25 of these 40 cottid genera, although two genera, Icelus and Gymnocanthus, are represented only by larvae of species that live in other areas as adults. The purpose of this paper is twofold. It presents for the first time a summary of important cottid larval characters (those characters occurring only during the larval period and most useful in identi- fying and distinguishing species) based on the larvae of these 25 northeast Pacific genera. (Lar- vae of these genera that are known for species inhabiting other areas as adults are also con- sidered.) This knowledge, which is a necessary prerequisite for systematic studies using larvae, is presented to provide a foundation to which future work on cottid larvae can be compared and upon which it can be expanded as more larvae become known. The paper also presents a preliminary examination of generic groupings within these northeast Pacific cottid genera based on shared larval characters, i.e., similarity. These phenetic groupings, even though preliminary, are helpful Manuscript accepted August 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 103 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table l. — List of cottid genera occuring in the northeast Pacific Ocean between Baja California and the Aleutian Islands based on Howe and Richardson (text footnote 3) with a summary of illustrations (accessible to author) of larvae known for those genera world- wide. Lengths (millimetersl of larvae are reported as they appeared in the literature: NL = notochord length; SL = standard length; TL = total length; mm = no length definition was given. Genus and species Reference Sizes illustrated Artediellus — Artedius harringtoni A. lateralis Artedius Type 2 Ascelichthys — Asemichttiys — Blepsias cirrhosus Chitonotus pugetensis Clinocottus acuticeps C. analis C. recalvus Cottus asper Dasycottus setiger Enophrys bison E. bubalis^ E. lilljeborgi^ Eurymen — Gilbertidia sigalutes Gymr)ocanthus lierzensteini^ G. tricuspis^ G. ventralis^ Hemilepidotus gilbert i^ H. hemilepidotus H. jordani H. papilio H. spinosus H. zapus Hemitripterus americanus ' H. villosus Icelinus spp.' Icelus bicornis ' Jordania — Leiocottus — Leptocottus armatus Malacocottus ?M. zonurus Type 1 MyoxocephaJus aenaeus ' M. octodecemspinosus^ M. polyacanthocephalus M. quadricornis^ (marine form) Ricfiardson and Washington 1980 Budd 1940 Marliave 1975 Richardson and Washington 1980 Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 Richardson and Washington 1980 IVIisitano 1980 Richardson and Washington 1980 Eigenmann 1892 Budd 1940 Morris 1951 Stein 1972 Richardson and Washington 1980 Blackburn 1973 Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 Misitano 1978 Richardson and Washington 1980 Cunningham 1891^ Mcintosh and Masterman 1897^ Ehrenbaum 1904^ Ehrenbaum 1905-9 Russell 1976^ Bruun 1925" Rass 1949^ Russell 1976' Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 Kyushin 1970 Koefoed 1907 Rass 1949 Khan 1972 Ehrenbaum 1905-9 Gorbunova 1964 Hattori 1964 Gorbunova 1964 Peden 1978 Richardson and Washington 1980 Gorbunova 1964 Peden 1978 Gorbunova 1964 Follett 1952 Peden 1978 Richardson and Washington 1980 Peden 1978 Warfel and Merriman 1944 Khan 1972 Fuiman 1976 Kyushin 1968 Okiyama and Sando 1976 Richardson and Washington 1980 Ehrenbaum 1905-9'° Rass 1949 Jones 1962 Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 White 1977 Richardson and Washington 1980 Richardson and Bond" Richardson unpubl. data Perlmutter 1939 Khan 1972 Lund and Marcy 1975 Golton and Marak 1969 Khan 1972 Blackburn 1973 Zvjagina 1963 Khan 1972 Khan and Faber 1974 3.0, 4.7, 6.9 mm NL. 7.3, 9.3, 13.6 mm SL 4.1 mmSL 4,8, 11, 14mmTL 3.0. 4.7. 6.0 mm NL, 7.2, 9.9, 1 1 .8 mm SL 12.2 mm SL 10, 14, 19, 15.5 mm TL 3.0, 6.3 mm NL, 8.5, 11.5, 15.4, 16.6 mm SL 3.0,4.8 mm SL 3.7, 3.9, 6.9 mm NL, 7.6, 10.4, 13.8, 16.5 mm SL ca. 4 mm ca. 4 mm 4.6, 5.0, 7.6, 8.3, 9.9, 10.8, 18.0, 24.3 mm TL 5.5,9.0, 10.8 mm TL 5.2 mm NL, 8.2, 9.9 mm SL 7.4 mm SL 7.5 mm SL lOmmTL 5.0, 5.4, 5.8. 6,7, 7.1 , 7.6 mm SL 4.8, 7.0 mm NL, 9.1 mm SL 5.7 mm Larva (size not given) 5.8, 10, 11 mm 5.8, 10, 11 mm 4.5,5.7,6.4,9.5 mm 5.6, 6.8, 8.7 mm TL 6.8 mm 4.08, 4.2, 5.7, 7.0 mm 7.9,9.5 mm SL 7, 13, 15, 25, 34 mm TL 5.79, 6.59, 7.55 mm 10.7, 12.7, 15.5 mm 9 mm 12.2, 13.9, 15.9 mm TL 15, 18 mm 7.5, 11.4, 17.5 mm 7.1, 11.6, 19.2,24.8,32.5 mm 7.25, 10.5 mm ca. 20 mm SL 5.8,5.9,9.1 mmNL, 10.7, 11.5, 19.0 mm SL 6.4, 10.7, 13.0 mm ca. 20 mm SL 10.7, 13.7 mm 12,21 mmSL ca. 20 mm SL 5.0, 6.6, 8.9 mmNL, 11.0, 11.8, 19.0 mm SL ca. 20 mm SL ca. 12 mm 11.7,^4.5, 18.8 mm TL 12.6, 15.5, 20 mm TL 14.78, 15.57, 16.52 mm SL 11.6, 14.4, 17.4,20.0 mm 3.3, 8.6 mm NL, 10.9, 13.8, 15.2, 16.5, 12.5, 16.6 mm SL 25 mm 12.3 mm ca. 4 mm 7.6,8.3, 12.0 mm SL 8, 12, 13mm TL 4.9 mmNL 5.1,8.1 mmNL, 11.1 mm SL 7.0,9.8, 14.2, 24.0 mm SL 6.6, 7.0, 8.8, 9.8, 10.4, 14.2, 24.0 mm SL 6 mm 5.0,7.1, 9.7, 11.8 mm TL 5.4, 6.1,6.8,7.5, 8.5, 9.2 mm TL 6.8,8.5, 10.5, 15.2 mm TL 7.0,9.5, 10.7, 12.5, 14.5 mm TL 7.7, 10.7 mm SL 12.3, 12.8, 13.6, 14.5, 16.2, 32 mm 12.8, 14.5. 17.0 mm TL 12.8, 14.4, 17.0 mm TL 104 RICHARDSON: CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE Table l. — Continued. Genus and species Reference Sizes illustrated M. scorpius ' Nautichthys oculofasciatus Oligocottus maculosus O. snyderi Orthonopias triads Paricelinus hopliticus Phallocottus — Porocottus — Psychrolutes paradoxus Radulinus asprellus R. boleoides Rhamphocottus richardsoni Scorpaenichthys marmoratus Sigmistes — Stelgistrum — Sternias — Sttegicottus — Synchirus — Thyrisicus — Triglops murrayi^ T. pingeli^ Triglops sp. Zesticelus — Mcintosh and Prince 1890 Mcintosh and Masterman 1897'^ Ehrenbaum 1904'^ Ehrenbaum 1905-9 Koefoed 1907 Rass 1949 Bigelow and Schroeder 1953 Khan 1972 Russell 1976 Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 Richardson and Washington 1980 Stein 1972 Stem 1973 Stem 1972 Bolin 1941 Richardson and Washington 1980 Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 Richardson and Washington 1980 Richardson and Washington 1980 Blackburn 1973 Marliave 1975 Richardson and Washington 1980 OGonnell 1953 Richardson and Washington 1980 Khan 1972 Ehrenbaum 1905-9 Koefoed 1907 Rass 1949 Blackburn 1973 Richardson and Washington 1980 Larva (size not given) Larva (size not given) 8.24, 8 16, 10. 18 mm 8.2. 10, 18 mm 9.5 mm 7 9.9.3 mm 8.2. 10, 18 mm 7.6, 8.5, 10 4, 14.0. 17.4 mm TL 7.5.9.5, 10, 14 mm 7.5, 13 mm SL 9.5. 13, 17. 26 mm TL 11 7mmNL. 166mm SL 4.6-5.2.6.0,6.6. 9.2 mm TL 4.5-5.2, 6.0, 6.6, 9.2 mm TL 4.5-4.75, 5.5 mm TL ca. 3-4 mm SL 5.6, 6.2 mm NL, 13.8, 18.6, 25.6 mm SL 10.3 mm SL 10.5. 13. 14. 13mm TL 4.7, 7.9. 9.6, 10.9 mm NL, 12.6, 14.4 mm SL 8.7 mm NL 6 7, 10 mm SL 10, 11.5, 15 mm TL 8.4 mm NL, 10.6, 1 1 .7 mm SL 5.85,6.26, 10, 17,30,48 mm 5.3, 7.5, 8.6 mm NL, 8.7. 10.4, 13.8 mm SL 8.4, 11.6, 18.9, 23.4 mm TL 18 mm 13,16.5,22 mm 10 mm 8.3, 12mmSL 6.9 mm NL, 15.4 mm SL ' Not northeast Pacific species. ^As Cottus bubalis. ^As Taurulus bubalis. *As Cottus lilljeborgi. ^As Acanthocottus lilljeborgi. ^As Taurulus lilljeborgi. 'Probably Myoxocephalus scorpius (Laroche text footnote 6). ^Species occurs in northeast Pacific but larvae described from other areas. ^Not identified below genus level, '°As Centridermichthys hamatus. "Text footnote 5. '^As Cottus scorpius. in reducing taxonomic problems. The potential usefulness of the larval groups in providing in- sights into systematic relationships and evolu- tionary trends within this difficult group of fishes is also discussed. The use of larval forms of fishes to elucidate systematic relationships has been demonstrated in a number of groups, e.g., ceratioids (Bertlesen 1941), myctophids (Moser and Ahlstrom 1970, 1972, 1974), gonostomatids (Ahlstrom 1974), scombroids (Okiyama and Ueyanagi 1978), and serranids (Kendall 1979). LARVAL CHARACTERS OF COTTIDS pigmentation. Although meristic characters may be of prime utility in identifying cottid larvae, they persist in adults and are not considered truly larval. Meristic characters for northeast Pacific cottids have been discussed by Richardson and Washington (1980) and Howe and Richardson.^ The purpose of this summary is to point out the kinds of larval characters that are useful for identification and the spectrum in which those characters may be exhibited since cottid larvae manifest a wide diversity of form. This summary is based on only the representa- tives of northeast Pacific cottid genera listed in This is a summary of important larval charac- ters in cottids, i.e., those characters occurring only during the larval period which can be of most use in distinguishing species. These characters in- clude preopercular spine pattern, body shape, and ^Howe, K. D., and S. L. Richardson. 1978. Taxonomic review and meristic variation in marine sculpins (Osteichthys: Cottidae) of the northeast Pacific Ocean. Final rep., NOAA NMFS Contract No. 03-78-MO2-120, 1 January 1978 to 30 September 1978, 142 p. North vilest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard East, Seattle, WA 98112. 105 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL, 79, NO. 1 Table 1. Species from areas outside the northeast Pacific are included when larvae are know^n be- cause of the taxonomic information their larvae may provide. Generic level designations are used throughout the text for continuity and emphasis although larvae of all species (number of species based on the taxonomic status summary by Howe and Richardson footnote 3) in a genus may not be known. In some cases the genera are monotypic (Chitonotus, Dasycottus, Gilbertidia, Leptocottus, Orthonopias, Paricelinus, Rhamphocottus , Scor- paenichthys) and thus larval characters of the genus may readily be defined. At least some developmental stages are known for all six species of Hemilepidotus, providing good generic level definition. In some cases larvae of a few, but not all species v^dthin a genus are known [Artedius (3 species out of 7); Gymnocanthus (3 of 6); Hemitrip- terus (2 of 2 or 3); Myoxocephalus (5 of 18); Oligocottus (2 of 4); Radulinus (2 of 5); Triglops (3 of 9)]. In those instances, constancy of larval characters among species provides good indica- tions of generic level definition. Larvae oflcelinus spp. have only been described at the generic level as none of the eight species have yet been distin- guished. For some genera, larvae are known for only one of a few species: Blepsias (1 of 2), Cottus (1 of 2 brackish water species), Icelus (1 of 13), Malacocottus (1 of 5), Nautichthys (1 of 3), Psychrolutes (1 of 2). In those, generic level defini- tion may not be as precise; however, larvae of all species appear rather distinctive and thus may be good representatives of their genera. In the follow- ing summary those genera which provide the best examples of patterns are listed in parentheses. Principal preopercular spines typically (18 of 25 genera) number 4 {Scorpaenichthys, Icelinus, Leptocottus, Enophrys) and may vary in degree of development. Modifications of this basic pattern may occur (Myoxocephalus, 1 Malacocottus) in which four main spines are present with one or two auxiliary spines. Another pattern consists of multiple preopercular spines, usually small, num- bering up to ca. 25 {Artedius, Clinocottus). Some- times only one spine is present (Rhamphocottus) or none (Psychrolutes, Gilbertidia). Spines in other regions of the head (particularly parietal- nuchal, postocular, posttemporal-supracleithral, opercular) may also be important. General body shape can range from rather stubby and deep (Artedius, Enophrys) to moder- ately slender and elongate (Icelinus, Triglops) to globose (? Malacocottus) . The snout can be quite rounded (Scorpaenichthys, Hemilepidotus) or pointed (Icelinus, Chitonotus). Snout to anus length can be rather short, <40% SL (standard length) (Dasycottus), to moderately long, >60% SL (Rhamphocottus), although this can change with development. The gut may appear tightly compacted (Dasycottus) or be distinctively coiled (Cottus). The hindgut may trail somewhat below the body (Artedius, Clinocottus). Unusual gut diverticula may be present (Artedius, Clinocot- tus). Pectoral fins may be noticeably elongated (Nautichthys) or fanlike early in development ( Myoxocephalus ) . Melanistic pigment patterns range from rela- tively unpigmented to heavily pigmented. Pig- ment may be variously present or absent over the head, snout, cheek, jaws, cleithral base, throat. Pigment over the dorsolateral surface of the gut may vary in intensity, ventrolateral extent, and pattern (e.g., bars, Leptocottus; distinct round melanophores, Enophrys). In some species the entire gut region is pigmented (Paricelinus). The ventral midline of the gut may have a distinct line of melanophores (Co^^us, some Myoxocephalus) or be unpigmented (Scorpaenichthys). The nape may be distinctively pigmented (Artedius, Enophrys). The lateral body surface above the gut may be unpigmented (Chitonotus), have dorsolateral pig- ment not extending to the gut (Radulinus) or be entirely pigmented (Scorpaenichthys). In the tail region posterior to the anus, pigment may be absent (some Triglops, Dasycottus), present along only the ventral midline (Artedius, Chitonotus), present along only the ventral and dorsal midlines [Gymnocanthus , small (<8 mm) Hemilepidotus], or present on the lateral body surface, sometimes in combination with a ventral midline series (Scorpaenichthys, Radulinus, Blepsias). Num- ber, spacing, position, and shape of ventral mid- line melanophores are important as is the pos- terior extent of lateral pigment. Melanophores may variously appear along the caudal fin base (Paricelinus, Chitonotus). Pectoral fins are gen- erally unpigmented, but some species have heav- ily pigmented fins (Psychrolutes, Gilbertidia) or a pigment band along the fin margin (Nautichthys). LARVAL COTTID GROUPS Within the 25 cottid genera considered, 6 groups of genera are apparent based on shared larval characters, i.e., similarity , and 6 genera do not fit into any group (Table 2). Characters within each 106 RICHARDSON; CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE Table 2. — Groupings of 25 cottid genera reported to occur in the northeast Pacific Ocean between Baja California and the Aleutian Islands based on shared larval characters. Group characteristics were based on representative species for which larvae are known, as listed in Table 1. Also included in the groupings is an unidentified larval type, "Cottoid Type A" of Richardson and Washington (1980) which may represent a new genus. Group General characteristics Genera Ungrouped genera Multiple preopercular spines, rounded snout, stubby shape, slightly trailing gut, sometimes with gut protrusions or diverticula Four preopercular spines, pointed snout, moderately slender, postanal pigment when present usually restricted to ventral midline Four principal preopercular spines or none, rounded snout, often globose shape with loose skin, pigmented pectoral fins Four preopercular spines, rounded snout, relatively deep bodied, ca. 4-5 mm NL at hatching, postanal pigment dorsally, ventrally. and laterally Four preopercular spines not pronounced, rounded snout, relatively slender, post- anal pigment dorsally, ventrally, laterally, probably >7 mm NL at hatching, pectoral fins unpigmented or with pigment band near margin Four preopercular spines, rounded snout, relatively slender, no additional head spines, postanal pigment restricted to ventral midline Enophrys. Gymnocanthus, Myoxocephalus. Radulinus, Rhamphocottus. Hemitripterus Artedius, Clinocottus. Oligocottus. Orthonopias Paricelinus , Triglops , Icelus , Chitonotus , Icelinus Dasycottus. Psychrolutes, Gilbertidia, '7 Malacocottus . Cottoid Type A (new genus?) Scorpaenichthys , Hemilepidotus Blepsias , Nautichthys Leptocottus, Cottus group and of each ungrouped genus are summa- rized to facilitate recognition and minimize tax- onomic and identification problems involving cottid larvae. These groupings are based on com- plete developmental series to the extent available, but only representative figures illustrating one point on a developmental continuum are pre- sented (Figures 1-9). The groupings are necessar- ily preliminary because not all species in all genera are known as larvae. The groups described below are not arranged in any particular order. Generic designations are used as discussed in the previous section. Group 1 This is the tightest group among the 25 genera. Included are Artedius, Clinocottus, Oligocottus , and tentatively Orthonopias (Figures 1, 2). The unique multiple preopercular spine pattern dis- tinguishes it from all other groups or genera. [Although a complete series of Orthonopias has not been described and the spine pattern is un- knov^Ti, small larvae (Figure 2) are very similar to Artedius in form and pigment characteristics and are tentatively included in this group.] The stubby body shape, rounded snout, and somewhat trailing gut Eire remarkably consistent within the group. Presently, identification to genus based on larval characters is still difficult and in need of better definition. Characters used to distinguish species (besides fin ray counts) include: number, spacing, and shape of ventral midline melano- phores; intensity of gut pigmentation; presence of unusual gut diverticula; total number of preoper- cular spines and position of largest spines; num- ber of spines (e.g., none, two, cluster) in the parietal and posttemporal-supracleithral regions; presence or absence of pigment on the nape or head. Although the multiple preopercular spine pat- tern persists through the larval period, adults have four preopercular spines with the lower three reduced and the upper variously modified. Rem- nants of the larval serrations have been observed only in adult A. notospilotus (Howe'*). It is unclear which four spines of the larvae persist in adults. Group 2 This is also a rather cohesive group (Figure 3) consisting of slender forms with pointed snouts and four prominent preopercular spines [Paricel- inus, Triglops, Icelus (tentatively), Chitonotus, Icelinus]. This general body shape is remarkably similar among genera and is not found in any other genera considered. All have a relatively short snout to anus distance. Postanal ventral midline pigment is usually present (absent in one species of Triglops) with some additional melano- phores along the caudal fin base. Dorsal midline pigment is usually absent except for a few spots in some Icelinus and possibly a row in some late stage Triglops. Generic differences include degree of gut pigmentation (e.g., darkest in Paricelinus and some Triglops), number and position of ven- tral midline melanophores, and degree of head spination (e.g., postocular spines in Paricelinus and Triglops). "K. D. Howe, Ph.D. candidate. Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State University, Corvallis, OR 97331, pers. commun. September 1978. 107 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 FIGURE 1.— Larvae of A) Artedius harringtoni (7.3 mm SL), B) Artedius Type 2 (9.9 mm SL), C) Clinocottus acuticeps (7.6 mm SL), D) Oligocottus maculosus (9.2 mm TL) (A-C, Richardson and Washington 1980; D, Stein 1973). 108 RICHARDSON: CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE Figure 2. — Larvae of A) Artedius harringtoni (3.0 mm NL) and B) Orthonopias triads ( = 4 mm) (A, Richardson and Washington 1980; B, Bolin 1941). The tentative placement of Icelus with this group is of interest as it has been considered to constitute a distinct family, the Icelidae (Jordan 1923; Greenwood et al. 1966) based on the presence of scales in adults. Although larvae of Icelus are known to the author only from descriptions in the literature (Table 1), they strongly resemble other members of this group in form and preopercular spine pattern. Inclusion of Paricelinus is also of interest as it has been considered to be a rather distinct and primitive form (Bolin 1947). It pos- sesses five pelvic soft rays, the ancestral condition, whereas the number of soft rays is reduced to three or two in other members of the group. Group 3 Group 3 (Figure 4) consists of the "psychrolutid" cottids [Dasycottus, Psychrolutes, Gilbertidia, ? Malacocottus ^ "Cottoid Type A" (new genus?)] ^Identification of larvae is tentative pending resolution of taxonomic problems of adults at the generic level [see Howe £md Richardson footnote 3 and also Richardson, S. L., and C. E. Bond. 1978. Two unusual cottoid fishes from the northeast Pacific. Unpubl. manuscr., 6 p. + 25 figs. (Available from senior author.) (Paper presented at the American Society of Ichthyolo- gists and Herpetologists, 1978.)] often considered a separate family (Nelson 1976). ["Cottoid Type A" may possibly be Psychrolutes phrictus but positive identification awaits addi- tional specimens — see Discussion by Richardson and Washington (1980). If it is P. phrictus, larval evidence indicates that the species is incorrectly placed and that a new northeast Pacific genus of cottid is in need of description.] This group is not as cohesive as the two previous groups. The most distinctive character of Group 3 is the pattern of pigmentation of the pectoral fin, a pattern not found in any of the other genera considered. In all, at least the basal portion of the fin develops pigment with the entire fin pigmented in Psychro- lutes, Gilbertidia, and small (<9 mm SL) ?Mala- cocottus. Pigment on small (<8 mm SL) Dasycot- tus is restricted to the inside surface of the pectoral fin base but later it develops distally on the outer surface. (The pigment band near the margin of the elongated pectoral fin of Nautichthys is a very different pattern.) Only Dasycottus and IMala- cocottus develop four preopercular spines, the latter genus with an accessory spine at the base of the second spine. All but the more slender Dasy- cottus have relatively rounded snouts and deep bodies. Both ? Malacocottus and "Cottoid Type A" 109 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 >[^-^^:m?^>>^,. Figure 3. — Larvae of A) Paricelinus hopliticus (13.8 mm SL), B) Triglops sp. (15.4 mm SL),C) Icelus bicornis (25 mm), D) Chitonotus pugetensis (11.5 mm SL), E) Icelinus sp. (13.8 mm SL) (A, B, D, E, Richardson and Washington 1980; C, Ehrenbaum 1905-9). 110 RICHARDSON: CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE Figure 4. — Larvae of A) Dasycottus setiger (8 mm NL), B) Psychrolutes paradoxus (transforming, 13 mm SL), O Gilbertidia sigalutes (13 mm SL), D) ? Malacocottus zonurus (10.4 mm SL), E) Cottoid Type A (9.8 mm SL) (A-D, original illustrations; E, Richardson and Washington 1980). Ill FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 develop a pronounced globose appearance with an outer bubble of skin. Small larvae of all forms have head and gut pigment and "Cottoid Type A" also has lateral pigment posterior to the anus. Some lateral pigment develops later in all but Dasycottus. "Cottoid Type A" has unique "thumb- tack" prickles covering the belly region. The pelvic fins of 1 Malacocottus and "Cottoid Type A" often appear to be withdraw^n into pockets of skin. Group 4 Group 4 (Figure 5) includes larvae with four preopercular spines, conspicuously rounded snouts, and relatively deep bodies with rather heavy pigmentation, except at the smallest sizes (Scorpaenichthys, Hemilepidotus) . Differences between genera include the longer gut and the preanal fin fold of Scorpaenichthys and the in- creased head spination oi Hemilepidotus (parietal, nuchal, postocular, posttemporal-supracleithral). Pigmentation is generally heavier in Scorpae- nichthys than in Hemilepidotus of comparable size. It is initially concentrated along the dorsal and ventral midlines, particularly in Hemilepi- dotus, filling in laterally with development. Lar- vae of both are neustonic. The two genera in this group are certainly more A1 H* jf-^? 5K*^ ---.-•'*■* ^^it Q^y "=1^^. f:-{-3^,—^.J..jZf..'JJ-'-~'^- J ^b) Figure 5. — Larvae of A) Scorpaenichthys marmoratus (8.7 mm SL), B) Hemilepidotus spinosus (ILO mm SL), C) H. hemilepidotus (10.7 mm SL) (A-C, Richardson and Washington 1980). 112 RICHARDSON: CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE similar to each other than to any other cottids considered, although Scorpaenichthys was given familial status in the past (Jordan 1923; Tarenets 1941). Group 5 This group consists of two elongated, slender- bodied genera, Blepsias and Nautichthys (Figure 6). Both hatch at a relatively large size, >7 mm NL (notochord length). Both have rounded snouts, relatively heavy pigmentation, and four preoper- cular spines that never become pronounced and sharp. Nautichthys (at least A^. oculofasciatus) develops greatly elongated pectoral fins soon after hatching, each of which develops a pigment band near its distal margin. The genera Blepsias and Nautichthys have been placed in a separate family, Blepsiidae, in the past (Jordan 1923). Group 6 Group 6 (Figure 7) contains Leptocottus and Cottus (as based on the brackish water species C. asper). They share several characters, including the relatively slender body, rounded snout, four preopercular spines, absence of other head spines, ventral midline pigment along gut, and postanal pigment restricted to ventral midline. Both hatch and transform at similar sizes, ca. 3-4 mm NL and ca. 10-12 mm SL, respectively. Leptocottus has a unique gut pigment pattern of bars, and Cottus has a distinctively coiled gut. Ungrouped Genera Enophrys (Figure 8) has four pronounced pre- opercular spines, rounded snout, deep stubby shape, pigmented nape, and postanal pigment only along the ventral midline. It has a postocular spine and opercular spines, and a preanal fin fold. Melanophores over the gut are distinctively round in shape and densely concentrated. This suite of larval characters is not shared by any other genus. Enophrys bears some resemblance to Group 6 (Leptocottus-Cottus) but differs too much to be part of it. The deep body, bulging gut, and pig- mented nape somewhat resemble Group 1 (Ar- tedius et al.) but spine patterns differ drastically. Larvae of E. bubalis and E. lilljeborgi from the North Atlantic (Table 1) are extremely similar to E. bison from the northeast Pacific. Gymnocanthus (Figure 8) apparently never de- velops pronounced preopercular spines, according to the literature (Table 1). Larvae of G. tricuspis ^^*^ Figure 6. — Larvae of A) Blepsias cirrhosus (11 mm NL) and B) Nautichthys oculofasciatus (11.7 mm NL) (A, original illustration; B, Richardson and Washington 1980). 113 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 • --^ -,-^ FIGURE?.— Larvae of A) Lep« FIGURE 9.— Larvae of A) Radulinus asprellus (10.9 mm NL), B) Rhamphocottus richardsoni (8.4 mm NL), C) Hemitripterus villosus (17.4 mm SL) (A, B, Richardson and Washington 1980; C, Okiyama and Sando 1976). unpigmented area on the body above the abdom- inal cavity. Small larvae also resemble Scor- paenichthys except that they have a distinct lateral midline series of melanophores and soon develop a pointed snout and more slender body. Rhamphocottus (Figure 9) is one of the most aberrant cottid forms. It develops only one pre- opercular spine, an unusual snout, a deep body, heavy pigmentation, and a preanal fin fold. At small sizes, ca. 6-7 mm NL, it bears some resem- blance to Scorpaenichthys in pigmentation and shape, but it has a longer gut, more pigment ventrally along the head and gut, and a pigmented preanal fin fold. By 8-9 mm SL, the distinct shape of Rhamphocottus is obvious and spinelike prickles develop over the body. The single species has been considered to represent a separate fam- ily (Jordan and Evermann 1898; Jordan 1923; Taranets 1941). Hemitripterus (Figure 9) is also a heavily pig- mented and distinct form. Based on the literature (Table 1), it has four preopercular spines, a moder- 116 RICHARDSON: CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE ately pointed snout, relatively deep body, and long gut. Larvae are quite large, ca. 12-14 mm NL, at hatching. The larvae of H. americanus from the Atlantic and H. villosus from Japan (Table 1) are very similar. The heavy body pigment is a char- acter shared with a number of apparently un- related cottid genera. The genus was considered to constitute a separate family, Hemitripteridae, by Jordan (1923) and Taranets (1941). DISCUSSION The present state of cottid systematics is con- fused and the group and its allies are in need of intensive study (Nelson 1976; Howe and Richard- son footnote 3). Family limits are not well defined (compare, e.g., Jordan 1923; Berg 1940; Taranets 1941; Greenwood et al. 1966; Bailey et al. 1970; Nelson 1976). Some genera still need revision and potential new species remain to be described (e.g.. Nelson 1977; Richardson and Washington 1980; Howe and Richardson footnote 3). Studies of intergeneric relationships have been few (e.g., Regan 1913; Taranets 1941; Bolin 1947; Watanabe 1960) and these had many disagreements (Table 3). Jordan and Evermann's (1898:1879-1800) com- ment of North American Cottidae still has merit, "The family is an extremely varied one which cannot be readily throvvoi into subordinate groups. Almost every species has an individuality of its own " Because of the confused state of cottid system- atics it seems reasonable to consider whether this preliminary summary of 25 genera of cottid larvae may provide insight into intergeneric relation- ships within the group. Whether these pheneti- cally derived larval groupings are indicative of relationships among cottid genera depends on whether the groups actually possess a set of shared, derived characters. Determination of de- rived states of larval characters is difficult when dealing with such a diverse group as the cottids and their allies because the larvae of many species are still unknown and complete developmental series have not been described for many other species. Such determinations are further hindered by the confused state of adult cottid systematics. Although an in depth analysis of derived charac- ter states is beyond the scope of this study, consideration of several factors allows discussion of the potential significance of, and possible rela- tionships within, at least some of the larval cottid groups described here. Larval characters such as spine patterns, relative body form, and pigmenta- tion have been used to demonstrate or clarify systematic relationships in other groups of fishes, e.g., scorpelarchids (Johnson 1974), gonostomatids (Ahlstrom 1974), myctophids (Moser and Ahl- strom 1974), myctophiforms (Okiyama 1974), ma- rine teleosts in general (Ahlstrom and Moser 1976), bothids (Futch 1977), scombroids (Okiyama and Ueyanagi 1978), serranids (Kendall 1979). In these studies, similarity of larval form has been in remarkable agreement with relationships implied from adult characters. Although larval characters have not been used previously as indicators of relationship (i.e., based on synapomorphies) among cottids, it seems highly probable that at least some of these characters would be as useful in cottids as in other groups of fishes. In addition, if the cottids were derived from an ancestral stock related to the Scorpaenidae, the most generalized group in the Order Scorpaeniformes (Gill 1889; Taranets 1941; Bolin 1947) and if Bolin's (1947) ancestral cottid form is valid and Scorpaenichthys closely resembles the primitive condition, then primitive or derived states of at least some larval characters of cottids can be postulated. Primitive states of larval characters may include four strong preopercular spines, relatively deep but compact body, compact gut, lack of gut diverticula, posses- sion of a preanal fin fold, rounded snout, relatively short pectoral fin. Derived character states may include reduced size and/or numbers of preoper- cular spines or modification of the basic pattern of four, slender or globose body, trailing gut, pres- ence of gut diverticula, no preanal fin fold, semi- pointed or pointed snout, elongated pectoral fin. Pigment patterns are more difficult to evaluate as presumably they may possibly reflect responses to habitat or may be more easily modified genetical- ly than other morphological characters. This idea has been generally discredited in other groups where larval characters have been used to imply relationships (e.g., Ahlstrom 1974; Moser and Ahlstrom 1974; Kendall 1979) as pigment patterns have substantiated findings based on other char- acters. Recent experiments on larvae of the zebra- fish, Brachydanio rerio, (Milos and Dingle 1978) have demonstrated constancy in numerical regu- lation of melanophores which indicates larval pigment patterns may not be as plastic as once thought. Among the cottids, Scorpaenichthys is heavily pigmented but Enophrys, also considered to be a relatively primitive form (Sandercock and Wilimovsky 1968), is not. Heavy pigmentation 117 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 seems to be related to a neustonic habitat in some (e.g., Scorpaenichthys , Hemilepidotus) but not others (e.g., Radulinus). Relative constancy of pigment pattern (such as presence or absence of lateral pigment posterior to the anus) within a group used in conjunction with other characters, however, may provide additional evidence for within-group relationships. If this line of reasoning and these assumptions are valid, then certain trends seem apparent which may be indicative of relationships. Group 1 (Artedius et al.) appears to be a natural group sharing a number of derived characters not pres- ent in any other group or genus (i.e., multiple preopercular spines, somewhat trailing gut, un- usual gut diverticula, or at least bulging guts). A preanal fin fold is apparently absent and pig- ment pattern is relatively constant. The grouping agrees with findings of Taranets (1941), in part, and Bolin (1947), who considered the genera to be closely related (Table 3). It seems to be a rather specialized group as Bolin (1947) implied, and, based on the distinctiveness of larval characters, may warrant consideration at possibly the sub- familial level. Group 2 iParicelinus et al.) shares the derived slender body form with pointed snout, and also possesses relative constancy of pigmentation, i.e., no lateral pigment. Relationships among at least some of the genera in this group have been implied previously (Table 3). The distinctiveness of larval form within this group suggests a separate line- age; this group may warrant possible subfamilial status. In Group 3, all but Dasycottus share a highly modified larval form tending in degrees toward globose. The constancy of the pigmented pectoral fin is unique among all groups or genera con- sidered. With the possible exception of Dasycottus, the genera appear to bear at least some relation- ship to each other. Group 4 is the most generalized in that a num- ber of primitive character states are exhibited and relationships cannot be assessed on given present Table 3. — Intergeneric relationships of cottids as interpreted by A = Regan (1913), B = Taranets (1941), C = Bolin (1947), and D = Watanabe (1960). Included are only those 25 northeast Pacific genera for which larvae are known and discussed in this paper. Parentheses indicate a more distant relationship. 3 <1> Genus a S 3 O C g o o o o c o o o o <.1 2, c ra P 3 € & 1 tn R- O P F •a ^ i^ .£ 7 mm NL) of lar- vae in Group 6 represents another specialization indicative of relationship; such a large size is not known in any of the other genera except Hemitrip- terus whose larvae are ca. 12-14 mm NL at hatching. Group 6 genera share a somewhat elongate form and constancy of pigmentation, i.e., lack of lateral pigment, although these characters alone do not provide strong evidence of relation- ship. That the six ungrouped genera did not share a set of derived characters suggests that they bear no close relationship with one another. In summary, this preliminary examination of larval characters within 25 genera of cottids has provided some new insights into cottid systemat- ics. Larval evidence seems to support current concepts of generic limits in most instances (e.g., Enophrys, Hemitripterus , Hemilepidotus) and has indicated a potentially new northeast Pacific genus represented by "Cottoid Type A." Larval characters offer support for the distinctiveness of some genera (e.g., Rhamphocottus) and strong relationships among others (e.g., the Artedius group). Some of the larval groupings discussed here tend to support previously implied relation- ships within the cottids (compare Tables 2 and 3) but some important differences seem apparent [e.g., the distinctiveness of Group 1 demonstrated herein; the separation o{ Artedius and Icelus, once considered closely related (Jordan 1923); the rela- tionship of Paricelinus , generally considered a primitive and rather distinct form (Bolin 1947; Sandercock and Wilimovsky 1968), with other members of Group 2; the apparent relationship of Icelus to other genera in Group 2 and its question- able placement in a separate family (Jordan 1923; Greenwood et al. 1966); the distinctiveness of Radulinus , previously considered related to Chi- tonotus and Icelinus (Bolin 1947)]. Because of the wide diversity of form among cottid larvae, they offer great potential for helping to clarify relation- ships and evolutionary trends within this difficult group of fishes. However, larvae of many species remain to be described (rearing may be the best approach), generic limits of larval characters must be defined, and developmental sequences including osteology need to be examined before that potential can be fully realized. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Many who helped make this paper possible were acknowledged by Richardson and Washington (1980). In addition, larvae for illustration were provided as follows: Dasycottus setiger, J. R. Dunn (Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, Nation- al Marine Fisheries Service, NCAA); Psychrolutes paradoxus, Gilbertidia sigalutes, J. Blackburn (Alaska Department of Fish and Game); IMala- cocottus zonurus, P. Wagner and G. Mueller (Uni- versity of Alaska); Blepsias cirrhosus, Myoxo- cephalus polyacanthocephalus , A. Lamb (Pacific Environment Institute, British Columbia) and C. Moffett (Bellingham, Wash.). B. Washington illustrated these specimens and provided tech- nical assistance. N. Y. Khan granted permission to reproduce a figure of Gymnocanthus tricuspis from his dissertation. J. L. Laroche (Oregon State University) provided information on preopercular spines and pigmentation on Myoxocephalus . Con- versations on cottid systematics with K. Howe (Oregon State University) were particularly in- formative and stimulating. K. Howe and B. Wash- ington read the manuscript and made helpful comments. LITERATURE CITED AHLSTROM, E. H. 1974. The diverse patterns of metamorphosis in gonosto- matid fishes - an aid to classification. In J. H. S. Blaxter (editor), The early life history offish, p. 659-674. Springer- Verlag,N.Y. AHLSTROM, E. H., AND H. G. MOSER. 1976. Eggs and larvae of fishes and their role in systematic investigations and in fisheries. Rev. Trav Inst. Peches Marit. 40:379-398. BAILEY, R. M., J. E. FITCH, E. S. HERALD, E. A. LACHNER, C. C. LINDSEY, C. R. ROBINS, AND W. B. SCOTT. 1970. A list of common and scientific names of fishes from the United States and Canada. 3d ed. Am. Fish. Soc. Spec. Publ. 6, 149 p. BERG, L. S. 1940. A classification offishes, both recent and fossil. Tr. Zool. Inst. Akad. Nauk SSSR 5(2):87-517. BERTELSEN, E. 1941. The Ceratioid fishes. Ontogeny, taxonomy, distribu- tion and biology Dana-Rep., Carlsberg Found. 39, 276 p. BIGELOW, H. B., AND W. C. SCHROEDER. 1953. Fishes of the Gulf of Maine. First Revision. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Fish. Bull. 53, 577 p. BLACKBURN, J. E. 1973. A survey of the abundance, distribution, and factors affecting distribution of ichthyoplankton in Skagit Bay. M.S. Thesis, Univ Washington, Seattle, 136 p. BOLIN, R. L. 1941. Embryonic and early larval stages of the cottid 119 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 fish Orthonopias triads Starks and Mann. Stanford Ichthyol. Bull. 2:73-82. 1947. The evolution of the marine Cottidae of California with a discussion of the genus as a systematic category. Stanford Ichthyol. Bull. 3:153-168. BRUUN, A. F. 1925. On the development and distribution of the Norway bullhead iCottus lilljeborgi Collett). Cons. Perm. Int. Explor. Mer, Publ. Circonstance 88, 15 p. BUDD, P L. 1940. Development of the eggs and early larvae of six California fishes. Calif. Div Fish Game, Fish Bull. 56, 50 p. COLTON, J. B., JR., AND R. R. MARAK. 1969. Guide for identifying the common planktonic fish eggs and larvae of continental shelf waters, Cape Sable to Block Island. Bur. Commer. Fish., Biol. Lab., Woods Hole, Mass., Lab. Ref 69-9, 43 p. CUNNINGHAM, J. T. 1891. On some larval stages of fishes. J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K., New Ser., 2:68-74. EHRENBAUM, E. 1904. Eier und Larven von Fischen der deutschen Bucht. III. Fische mit festsitzenden Eiem. Wiss. Meeresunters. Komm. wiss. Unters. Dtsch. Meere Kiel Biol. Anst. Helgol. 3:127-200. 1905-9. Eier und Larven von Fischen. Nordisches Plankton, Zool. Teil, 1:1-413. EIGENMANN, C. H. 1892. The fishes of San Diego, California. Proc. U.S. Natl. Mus. 15:123-178. FOLLETT, W. I. 1952. Annotated list of fishes obtained by the California Academy of Sciences during six cruises of the U.S.S. Mulberry conducted by the United States Navy off central California in 1949 and 1950. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., Ser. 4, 27:399-432. FUIMAN, L. A. 1976. Notes on the early development of the sea raven, Hemitripterus americanus. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:467-470. FUTCH, C. R. 1977. Larvae of Trichopsetta ventralis (Pisces: Bothiidae), with comments on intergeneric relationships within the Bothidae. Bull. Mar. Sci. 27:740-757. GILL, T 1889. On the classification of the mail-cheeked fishes. Proc. U.S. Natl. Mus. 11:567-592. GORBUNOVA, N. N. 1964. Razmnozhenie i razvitie polucheshuiykh bychkov (Cottidae, Pisces). (Breeding and development of hemilep- idotine sculpins (Cottidae, Pisces).) Tr. Inst. Okeanol. Akad. Nauk SSSR 73:235-252. [Translated from Russ. In T. S. Rass (editor). Fishes of the Pacific and Indian Oceans, biology and distribution, p. 249-266. Isr. Program Sci. TransL, 1966, 266 p.; avail. U.S. Dep. Commer., Natl. Tech. Inf Serv., Springifield, Va., as TT 65-50120.] GREENWOOD, P H., D. E. ROSEN, S. H. WEITZMAN, AND G. S. Myers. 1966. Phyletic studies of teleostean fishes, with a pro- visional classification of living forms. Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. 131:341-455. HATTORI, S. 1964. Studies on fish larvae in the Kuroshio and adjacent waters. [In Jpn., Engl, synop.] Bull. Tokai Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 40, 158 p. JOHNSON, R. K. 1974. A revision of the alepisauroid family Scopelarchidae (Pisces: Myctophiformes) . Fieldiana, Zool. 66, 249 p. JONES, A. C. 1962. The biology of the euryhaline fish Leptocottus armatus armatus Girard (Cottidae). Univ. Calif Publ. Zool. 67:321-368. JORDAN, D. S. 1923. A classification of fishes including families and genera as far as known. Stanford Univ. Publ., Univ. Ser, Biol. Sci. 3:79-243. JORDAN, D. S., AND B. W. EVERMANN. 1898. The fishes of North and Middle America. Bull. U.S. Natl. Mus. 47:1241-2183. KENDALL, A. W, JR. 1979. Morphological comparisons of North American sea bass larvae (Pisces: Serranidae). U.S. Dep. Commer, NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS CIRC-428, 50 p. KHAN, N. Y. 1972. Comparative morphology and ecology of the pelagic larvae of nine Cottidae (Pisces) of the northwest Atlantic and St. Lawrence drainage. Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. Ottawa, 234 p. KHAN, N. Y, AND D. J. FABER. 1974. A comparison of larvae of the deepwater and fourhom sculpin, Myoxocephalus quadricornis L. from North America. 1. Morphological development. In J. H. S. Blaxter (editor), The early life history of fish, p. 703-712. Spnnger-Verlag, N.Y. KOEFOED, E. 1907. Poissons. In L. P. R. d'Orleans, Croisiere ocean- ographique accomplie a bord de la Belgica dans la Mer du Gronland 1905, p. 485-499. Charles Bulens, Brussels. KYUSHIN, K. 1968. The embryonic development and larval stages of Hemitripterus villosus (Pallas). Bull. Fac. Fish., Hokkaido Univ 18:277-289. 1970. Embryonic development and larvae of Gymno- canthus herzensteini Jordan and Starks. Jpn. J. Ichthyol. 17:74-79. LUND, W. A., JR., AND B. C. MARCY, JR. 1975. Early development of the grubby, Myoxocephalus aenaeus (Mitchill). Biol. Bull. (Woods Hole) 149:373-383. MARLIAVE, J. B. 1975. The behavioral transformation from the planktonic larval stage of some marine fishes reared in the labora- tory. Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. British Columbia, Vancouver, 231 p. MCINTOSH, W C, AND A. T MASTERMAN. 1897. The life-histories of the British marine food-fishes. C. J. Clay, Lond., 516 p. MCINTOSH, W C, AND E. E. PRINCE. 1890. On the development and life-histories of the tele- ostean food- and other fishes. Trans. R. Soc. Edinb. 35:665-946. MILOS, N., AND A. D. DINGLE. 1978. Dynamics of pigment pattern formation in the zebra- fish, Brachydanio rerio. II. Liability of lateral line stripe formation and regulation of pattern defects. J. Exp. Zool. 205:217-224. MISITANO, D. A. 1978. Description of laboratory- reared larvae of the buf- falo sculpin, Enophrys bison Girard (Pisces: Cottidae). Copeia 1978:635-642. 1980. A record of internal fertilization in the roughback 120 RICHARDSON: CURRENT KNOWLEDGE OF SCULPIN LARVAE sculpin Chitinotus pugetensis with descriptive notes of their early larvae. Copeia 1980:162-165. MORRIS, R. W. 1951. Early development of the cottid fish Clinocottus recalvus (Greeley). Calif Fish Game 37:281-300. MOSER, H. G., AND E. H. AHLSTROM. 1970. Development of lantemfishes (family Myctophidae) in the California Current. Part 1. Species with narrow- eyed larvae. Bull. Los Ang. Cty. Mus. Nat. Hist. Sci. 7, 145 p. 1972. Development of the lantemfi.sh, Scopelopsis multi- punctatus Brauer 1906, with a discussion of its phylo- genetic position in the family Myctophidae and its role in a proposed mechanism for the evolution of photophore patterns in lantemfishes. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:541-564. 1974. Role of larval stages in systematic investigations of marine teleosts: The Myctophidae, a case study. Fish. Bull., U.S. 72:391-413. Nelson, J. s. 1976. Fishes of the world. Wiley, N.Y., 416 p. 1977. Fishes of the southern hemisphere genus Neophryn- ichthys (Scorpaeniformes: Cottoidei), with descriptions of two new species from New Zealand and Macquarie Island. J. R. Soc. N.Z. 7:485-511. O'CONNELL, C. P. 1953. The life history of the cabezon Scorpaenichthys marmoratus (Ayres). Calif Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 93, 76 p. OKIYAMA, M. 1974. The larval taxonomy of the primitive myctophiform fishes. In J. H. S. Blaxter (editor), The early life history offish, p. 609-621. Springer- Verlag, N.Y. OKIYAMA, M., AND H. SANDO. 1976. Early life history of the sea raven, Hemitripterus villosus, (Hemitripterinae, Cottidae) in the Japan Sea. [In Jpn., Engl, abstr.] Bull. Jpn. Sea Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 27:1-10. OKIYAMA, M., AND S. UEYANAGI. 1978. Interrelationships of scombroid fishes: an aspect from larval morphology. Bull. Far Seas Fish. Res. Lab. (Shimizu) 16:103-113. PEDEN, A. E. 1978. A systematic revision of the hemilepidotine fishes (Cottidae). Syesis 11:11-49. PERLMUTTER, A. 1939. Section I. An ecological survey of young fish and eggs identified from tow-net collections. In A biological survey of the salt waters of Long Island, 193§, Part 11, p. 11-71. N.Y. Conserv. Dep., Suppl. 28th Anou. Rep., 1938, Salt-water Surv. 15. QUAST.J. C. 1965. Osteological characteristics and affinities of the hexagrammid fishes, with a synopsis. Proc. Calif Acad. Sci., Sen 4, 31:563-600. RASS, T S. 1949. The composition of fish fauna of the Barents Sea and the systematical characters of the fish eggs and larvae. [In Russ.] Tr. Vses. Nauchno-Issled. Inst. Morsk. Rybn. Khoz. Okeanogr. 17:7-65. REGAN, C. T 1913. The osteology and classification of the teleostean fishes of the order Scleroparei. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 8, 11:169-184. RICHARDSON, S. L., AND B. B. WASHINGTON. 1980. Guide to identification of some sculpin (Cottidae) larvae from marine and brackish waters off Oregon and adjacent areas of the northeast Pacific. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS CIRC-430, 56 p. Russell, F S. 1976. The eggs and planktonic stages of British marine fishes. Acad. Press, Lond., 524 p. SANDERCOCK, F K., AND N. J. WILIMOVSKY. 1968. Revision of the cottid genus Enophrys. Copeia 1968:832-853. STEIN, R. 1972. Identification of some larval Pacific cottids. M.S. Thesis, Humboldt State Coll., Areata, Calif, 41 p. 1973. Description of laboratory-reared larvae of Oligocot- tus maculosus Girard (Pisces: Cottidae). Copeia 1973: 373-377. taranets, a. Y 1941. K klassifikatsii i proiskhozhdenifbychkovsemeystva Cottidae. (On the classification and origin of the family Cottidae.) Izvestiya Akad. Nauk SSSR. Otd. Biol. 1941 (3):427-447. [Translated from Russ., Inst. Fish., Univ. B.C., Mus. Contrib. 5, 28 p.] Warfel, h. e., and D. MERRIMAN. 1944. The spawning habits, eggs, and larvae of the sea raven, Hemitripterus americanus, in southern New England. Copeia 1944:197-205. WATANABE, M. 1960. Fauna Japonica Cottidae (Pisces). Tokyo News Service, 218 p. WHITE, W. A. 1977. Taxonomic composition, abundance, distribution and seasonality of fish eggs and larvae in Newport Bay, California. M.S. Thesis, California State Univ., Fuller- ton, 107 p. ZVJAGINA, O. A. 1963. Materialy po razmnozheniyu i razvituju ryb morya Laptevykh 2. Ledovitomorskaya rogatka, i 3. Aziatskaya Koryushka. (Materials on the reproduction and develop- ment of fish of the Laptev Sea 2. Arctic sculpin and 3. Asiatic smelt.) [In Russ., Engl, summ.] Tr. Inst. Okeanol. 62:3-12. [Engl, transl. in Lib. Nat. Mus. Can., Ottawa.] 121 GROWTH AND AGE STRUCTURE OF LARVAL ATLANTIC HERRING, CLUPEA HARENGUS HARENGUS, IN THE SHEEPSCOT RIVER ESTUARY, MAINE, AS DETERMINED BY DAILY GROWTH INCREMENTS IN OTOLITHS^ David W. Townsend^ and Joseph J. Graham'' ABSTRACT Larval Atlantic herring, Clupea harengus harengus, were sampled in the Sheepscot River estuary, Maine, using both towed, and buoyed and anchored plankton nets from October 1978 to March 1979, to determine growth rates and age structure. Larval densities and length-frequency distributions, de- termined from the buoyed and anchored net samples, and the ages of larvae captured in the towed nets, as determined by daily growth increments in the otoliths, showed that there were at least two normally distributed age-groups of larvae which entered the estuary in November and December The two groups hatched during early October and late November, and each appeared in the estuary when about 4 weeks old. Each of the two age-groups of larvae experienced a reduction in growth rate during the latter half of January and early February. The older of the two groups grew approximately 2.1 mm per week from October to early January and from late February to early March. These older larvae grew little if any, during the midwinter period. The younger of the two groups of larvae showed a similar reduction in growth rate during midwinter and grew about 2.0 mm per week before and about 1.5 nmi per week after this period. Research on larval Atlantic herring, Clupea harengus harengus Linnaeus, has been conducted extensively in the western North Atlantic in re- cent years. This has resulted in numerous ac- counts of the abundance and distribution of the larvae, as well as estimates of the generalized growth rates. The growth of Atlantic herring lar- vae in the Gulf of Maine-Bay of Fundy areas has been reported by Tibbo et al. (1958), Tibbo and Legare (1960), Das (1968, 1972), Sameoto (1972), Graham et al. (1972), and Boyar et al. (1973). These workers used the length-frequency method to determine average growth rates of the larvae. Various studies on the seasonal abundance and size distribution of Atlantic herring larvae have shown that in some years there may be more than one mode in the length-frequency distribution for a particular time and geographical area (Tibbo et al. 1958; Tibbo and Legare 1960; Das 1968, 1972; Graham et al. 1972; Boyar et al. 1973; Graham in press), indicating multiple spawnings. These poly- modal length -frequency distributions of Atlantic herring larvae complicate growth rate estimates 'Ira C. Darling Center Contribution No. 149. ^Department of Oceanography, University of Maine at Orono, Ira C. Darling Center, Walpole, ME 04573." ^Department of Marine Resources, Fisheries Research Labo- ratory, West Boothbay Harbor, ME 04575. since an individual sample may not represent a single homogeneous group of larvae. A relatively new technique for studying the growth of larval fishes was introduced by Pan- nella (1971, 1974). He observed daily growth incre- ments in the otoliths of some tropical and low- temperature adult fishes. Brothers et al. (1976) and Struhsaker and Uchiyama (1976) verified the daily nature of these growth increments in several species of larval fishes. Subsequently, others ap- plied this technique to age and growth studies (Ralston 1976; Taubert and Coble 1977; Barkman 1978). Rosenberg and Lough"* used otoliths to age larval Atlantic herring from Georges Bank. The purpose of our study was to use the otolith aging technique to investigate the growth of Atlantic herring larvae in the Sheepscot River estuary of Maine and to examine the age structure of the larvae entering the estuary. METHODS Larval herring were sampled in the Sheepscot River estuary of Maine using both towed, and "Rosenberg, A. S., and R. G. Lough. 1977. A preliminary report on the age and growth of larval herring ( Clupea harengus L.) from daily growth increments in otoliths. 1977/L:26. Manuscript accepted August 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. ICES CM. 123 FISHERY BULLETIN. VOL. 79, NO. 1 buoyed and anchored plankton nets. Shaw^ has shown that when used at night there is a little, if any, difference between these gear with regard to catch rates or larval fish avoidance. Only the sam- ples collected by the towed nets were used for otolith analysis. These towed net samples were collected at night on seven occasions from 24 October 1978 to 6 March 1979 using aim, 0.75 mm mesh plankton net. One daytime sample (10 Jan- uary) was taken with a 61 cm bongo net with 0.505 mm mesh nets on each side. Buoyed and anchored net samples were collected from 5 October 1978 to 27 February 1979 as part of the regular larval Atlantic herring monitoring program conducted by the Maine Department of Marine Resources. The buoyed and anchored nets consisted of six lines of nets fished at four stations in the estuarine channel. Each line had four 0.5 m, 0.75 mm mesh nets, with a digital flowmeter mounted in each net. The nets were set at dusk and retrieved at dawn each sampling date, and fished approxi- mately one semidiurnal tidal cycle. The buoyed and anchored net samples were preserved in 5% Formalin^ and length-frequency distributions and catch rates for larval Atlantic herring deter- mined. The characteristics and performance of the buoyed and anchored nets were reported by Gra- ham and Venno (1968), Graham and Davis (1971), and Graham (1972). The larvae from the towed samples were not preserved, but were sorted within 2 h of collection, placed in plastic Petri dishes, and frozen fresh at -18° C for future otolith analysis. The samples were later thawed and each fish measured to the nearest 0.5 mm. Figure 1 shows that the frozen larvae shrink an average of about 1-2 mm more than Formalin preserved larvae. The sagittae, or largest otoliths, from both sides of the head were teased onto a microscope slide under a binocular microscope. The otoliths were mounted in Per- mount and covered with a glass coverslip. The numbers of daily growth increments in one of each pair of sagittae were counted under a compound microscope at 1,000 x magnification. The incre- ments were counted twice and their mean number computed. Only those otoliths in which there was a difference between counts of 5% or less were used in the analysis. These data were used to esti- LiJ o a: UJ PRESERVED 5% Formalin N = 233 x = 370 FROZEN N=2I9 7 = 35.8 u o UJ Ql '■^Richard F. Shaw, Ph.D. candidate, Department of Ocean- ography, University of Maine at Orono, Ira C. Darling Center, Walpole, ME 04573, pers. commun. May 1980. "Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. 10 8 6 4 2 12 10 8 6 4 2 LENGTH millimeters (TL ) Figure l. — Length-frequency comparison of 5% Formalin pre- served versus frozen Atlantic herring larvae captured with 61 cm bongo nets on 4 April 1980 in the Damariscotta River estuary, Maine. Larvae from the starboard net were preserved in For- malin and larvae from the port net were frozen. Measurements were performed 2 mo later. A modified t-test (Snedecor and Cochran 1967) showed that the two means were significantly different (P< 0.01). mate daily grovv^h rates and age composition of the larvae. The daily grovd;h increments in larval Atlantic herring otoliths show up very clearly, and only 17 of the 317 larvae examined had oto- liths with increments too faint to be counted accurately. RESULTS Larval Age Structure Changes in modal lengths of larvae during autumn and winter indicate that groups of lar- vae entered the estuary and subsequently lost their identities through differential mortality and growth, since the larvae are not known to depart the estuary once established there (Graham et al. 1972). Length-frequency data from the buoyed and anchored net samples (Figure 2) showed a tri- modal length distribution (range 6-30 mm) for larvae present in the Sheepscot River estuary on 19 October. A large group of smaller larvae entered on 2 November when only a trace of the 124 TOWNSEND and GRAHAM: GROWTH AND AGE STRUCTURE OF LARVAL HERRING liJ < UJ O q: LiJ OCT. 5 1 RANGE N = I7 1 1 1 5 10 OCT. 19 20 life 30 h 40 50 N-335 1 1 N=4I2 15 10 JAN. 3 1 , 5 1 M J_^N=n8 ^ N=225 10 20 30 40 50 LARVAL LENGTH mm (S L) Figure 2. — Length-frequencies of Atlantic herring larvae cap- tured at night in the buoyed and anchored nets in the Sheepscot River estuary, Maine, 5 October 1978 to 27 February 1979. larger larvae from the 19 October population remained. By 16 November there was only one major size mode of larvae in the estuary. During December a second size mode of smaller larvae began to appear and in late December and early January at least two modes were present. By 27 February the two modes were no longer distin- guishable. The appearance of the larval group in December was also evidenced by a leveling off of the decline in larval catch rate for that month (Figure 3). The catch rates then increased in Jan- uary as the second group became established in the estuary. Assuming the otolith growth increments are deposited with a daily periodicity, increment counts can be used to estimate larval age and growth rates. Figure 4 shows the age structure of the Atlantic herring larvae captured with the towed net in the estuary. The larger and presum- ably older larvae represented in the 19 October sample of the buoyed and anchored nets (Figure 2) were not detected in the towed net samples; there appeared to be only one major age-group of larvae occupying the estuary through November. The addition of the second age-group of larvae was readily apparent by 10 January and resulted in a shift of the age-frequencies to the reader's right. This second and younger group of larvae was pres- ent until the last sampling date (6 March), when the remnant larvae from the first group were detected as a negative skewness in the age-fre- quency histogram. The bottom panel of Figure 4 shows the bimodal rO e 4 - A o o N=4874 ^ 3 -z. - J \ CATCH J \ \ r-^ LARVAL ill 1 1 1 1 1 1 II 1 5 19 2 16 4 13 21 3 15 29 8 27 OCT NOV. DEC. JAN. FEB. Figure 3. — Catch rates of Atlantic herring larvae for the buoyed and anchored nets in the Sheepscot River estuary, Maine, based on flowmeter readings. 125 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 RANGE OCT. 24 • • N = 4 N=29 RANGE NOV 29 N = 6 o < K ^n Z UJ 2b o ?n a: lij lb Q. 10 5 15 10 5 15 10 5 SEPT. TOTAL OCT. NOV. 5 12 19 26 3 10 17 24; SEPT. OCT 14 21 28 5 NOV. Figure 4. — Age distributions of Atlantic herring larvae caught in the towed nets as determined by daily growth increments in the otoliths. The ages are represented as the times of first daily growth increment formation. The distributions for the individual sample dates and the total for all the sample dates are given. The dates on the abscissa correspond to the time of formation of the first otolith daily growth increment. These dates are determined by subtracting the number of days, represented by the number of otolith increments, from the date of capture. Two modes are apparent in the total histogram. age distribution of larvae from all the towed sam- ples. This bimodal age-frequency distribution was analyzed graphically by the method of Harding (1949) (Figure 5). The total age-frequencies were plotted on probability paper as cumulative per- centages, and were found to fall on a sigmoidal curve having a point of inflection on the 32% vertical. The fitted line EF in Figure 5 is the resul- tant of the two straight lines AB and CD which were found by assuming the data to be bimodally distributed (see Harding 1949 for a more com- plete discussion). Line AB represents those larvae (about 32% of the total) in which the first otolith groMd;h increment was deposited before 30 Octo- ber. This date is approximately the point of inflec- tion of the plotted data. Line CD represents the second, younger group of larvae (about 68% of the total). The two straight lines, AB and CD, indicate that the two groups of Atlantic herring larvae which entered the estuary were normally distrib- uted with respect to age. The mean dates on which the first otolith growth increments were laid down for each age-group were determined by the inter- section of lines AB and CD with the vertical at 50%. The standard deviations of these dates were estimated from the points where the two lines intersect the verticals at 15.87% and 84.13%, the standard deviation being half this distance on the Y-axis. The mean dates on which the first daily grovd;h increments were laid down were approxi- DEC. JAN. X 1- 1 k N L = 300 n — 1 q: I 1- _i 1 1- ^^ IJ- 12 19 26 3 10 Li_ o DEC. JAN. ^ 3 26 O '9 g 12 5 Is > 21 i 1^ 7 24 H O 17 O 10 26 5 GROUP 2 MEAN DATE -^ NOV 23 SO = 19 WEEKS. GROUP I MEAN DATE =^ OCT 10 SD = i8 WEEKS 001 01 I 2 5 10 1 20 30 405060 70 80| 90 95 98 99 998 1587 84 13 CUMULATIVE PERCENTAGE (N =300) Figure 5. — Probability plot of the total bimodal age distribu- tion of Atlantic herring larvae depicted in Figure 4. The dots are the dates on which the first otolith daily growth increment was formed in each larva and are plotted as cumulative percentages. The circles are the cumulative percentages for each of the 2 age- groups using the inflection point of the sigmoidal curve as a dividing point for the two groups. See text for explanation. 126 TOWNSEND and GRAHAM: GROWTH AND AGE STRUCTURE OF LARVAL HERRING mately 10 October for the first group of larvae and 23 November for the second. This analysis indi- cates, along with the length-frequency data (Fig- ure 2) and the larval catch rates (Figure 3), that there were at least two peaks in spawning effort along the Maine coast, separated by about 6 wk, and that the two groups of larvae entered the estuary at separate times. The times of hatching for each group of larvae can be approximated by assuming that the first otolith daily growth incre- ment is formed at the time of yolk-sac absorption (Rosenberg and Lough footnote 4) and allowing about 5 d for yolk-sac absorption at 10° C (Blaxter and Hempel 1966). The two broods of larvae which entered the estuary in November and December were probably hatched, therefore, in early October and mid-November, and were probably spawned in late September and early November. Larval Growth Rates Growth of the larvae was examined separately for each of the two major age-groups which en- tered the estuary. The first group included those in which the first otolith daily growth increment was laid down before 30 October, which is the dividing point between the two age distributions discussed above. The second group of larvae in- cluded those in which the first daily growth incre- ment was laid down on or after 30 October. Both age-groups of larvae experienced approxi- mately a 2-3 wk period of retarded growth. The changes in growi;h rate appeared as breaks in the plotted data in Figures 6 and 7. Figure 2 showed also that modal lengths increased only slightly, if at all, from 29 January to 27 February. The first major group of larvae to enter the estuary showed retarded growth (Figure 6) beginning at a length of about 35 mm and about 80-100 d after 10 Octo- ber, the mean date on which the first otolith daily growth ring was formed (Figure 5). Thus, this period of retarded growrth began during the latter half of January and continued until early Febru- ary. The second major group to enter the estuary showed retarded grovvi;h (Figure 7) beginning at a length of about 26 mm, and 50-60 d after 23 No- vember, the mean date of the first otolith daily growth ring for group 2 (Figure 5). This period of retarded growth also began during the latter half of January and continued until early February. It appears, then, that these two groups of larvae, which differed in age by about 6 wk and in length by about 9 mm, experienced similar reductions in their growth rates during the same period in late January and early February. Apparently the en- vironment at this time was not conducive to their growth. Assuming that growth was interrupted during late January and early February for each of the 2 age-groups of larvae, regression lines were calcu- lated for those larvae caught before the interrup- tion in grovvi:h and for those caught after. The larvae caught 30 January were therefore not in- cluded (Figures 6, 7). The slopes and elevations of the two regression lines for each age-group were compared using the ^-test described by Zar (1974: 228-230). There was no significant difference be- tween slopes for group 1 but the elevations differed significantly (P<0.01). The two regression lines for group 2 differed significantly in slope (P < 0.05) and in elevation (P<0.01). Group 1 larvae, then, grew about 2.1 mm/wk before and after the inter- rupted grovvi;h period. Group 2 larvae grew ap- proximately 2.0 mm/wk before this period and about 1.5 mm/wk after. DISCUSSION Previous workers have reported polymodal length-frequency distributions of Atlantic herring larvae in the Gulf of Maine-Bay of Fundy areas (Tibbo et al. 1958; Das 1968; Graham et al. 1972; Boyar et al. 1973). Graham et al. (1972) detected two broods of Atlantic herring larvae during Sep- tember 1964 in the Boothbay area of the western Gulf of Maine, which includes the Sheepscot River estuary. The two broods were indicated by length- frequency modes of 9 and 13 mm. They reported that in 1965 only a single brood was detected in the area initially and that a second group of smaller larvae appeared in November. They suggested that the variations in lengths of the larvae might be attributed to the location of the Boothbay area within a coastal zone of transition in hatching times. Atlantic herring larvae hatch earlier in the eastern coastal Gulf of Maine than in the west, and may be carried westward and into the Booth- bay area by coastal currents (Graham 1970; Gra- ham et al. 1972). This may explain the variation in modal sizes on 19 October when the buoyed and anchored nets (Figure 2) captured larvae recently hatched (<10 mm) and others obviously older. The two groups of larvae captured in November and December (Figures 2, 4) perhaps also drifted along the coast before entering the estuary, since each group was about 4 wk old when first sampled. 127 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 E E X h- LJ 60 p 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 N = 90 A a X 24 OCT (4) 8 NOV (29) 29 NOV (4) 19 DEC (14) 10 JAN (2) 30 JAN (6) 6 MAR (31) Y« 10.59 + 0.29X Y= -7.42 +0.36 X I I I J L J L -I L I I I I 1 L 45 40 35 30 25 -20 E E LU 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 1 10 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 NUMBER OF OTOLITH GROWTH INCREMENTS 190 Figure 6. — Growth of the first group of Atlantic herring larvae which entered the Sheepscot River estuary, 1978-79. This includes all larvae from the towed net samples in which the first otolith daily growth increment was formed before 30 October. The plotted symbols indicate the collection date and the numbers in parentheses indicate sample size. Regression lines were calculated for the samples collected before and after the winter period of interrupted growth and the 30 January samples were therefore not included. The growth rates of Atlantic herring larvae in the Sheepscot estuary as determined using daily growth increments in the otoliths were about 2 mm/wk, excluding the winter period of retarded growth. The growth rate of group 2 larvae, how- ever, was lower after this period. Our estimates of larval growth rates, excluding the retarded growth period, are comparable with autumn and spring values reported by other workers (Table 1). Rosenberg and Lough (footnote 4) used daily growth increments in the otoliths to study the growth of Georges Bank herring larvae. The lar- vae were from a short sampling period (1-18 Octo- ber 1976), but the authors estimated the growth rate to be about 2.4 mm/wk. This October growth Table L — Published growth rate estimates for fall spawned Atlantic herring larvae in the northwest Atlantic. Growth rate (mm/wk) Method used Period studied Source 1.7 Mean lengths First 150 days Tibtx) et al. 1958 <1 Mean lengths Oct. -June Sameoto 1971, 1972 1-2 Mean lengths Nov.- Mar, Boyar et al. 1973 1.4-1.8 Mean lengths Sept-Dec. Graham et al. 1972 2 Modal lengths Sept. and Oct. Das 1968. 1972 <1 Modal lengths Winter Das 1968, 1972 1.5 Modal lengths April Das 1968. 1972 2 Modal lengths May Das 1968, 1972 2.4 Larval otoliths 1-18 Oct. Rosenberg and Lough 1977 rate estimate is greater than our fall and spring estimates, possibly the result of different water temperatures. The relatively wide range in esti- 128 TOWNSEND and GRAHAM: GROWTH AND AGE STRUCTURE OF LARVAL HERRING N = 210 E E X h- o -z. LU A 29 NOV (2) 45 19 DEC (7) X 10 JAN (43) 40 -h 30 JAN (23) • 6 MAR (135) 35 30 25 20 15 10 Y=I0.I6+0.28X •jfi^**» • Y=II.29+0.2IX ^l^/T'^*- n40 35 -- iG 30 E E X 25 ^ 'Z. UJ _l 20 15 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 NUMBER OF OTOLITH GROWTH INCREMENTS Figure 7. — Growth of the second group of Atlantic herring larvae which entered the Sheepscot River estuary, 1978-79. This includes all larvae from the towed net samples in which the first otolith daily growth increment was formed on or after 30 October. The plotted symbols indicate the collection date and the numbers in parentheses indicate sample size. Regression lines were calculated for the samples collected before and after the winter period of interrupted growth and the 30 January samples were therefore not included. mates reported by others were perhaps developed from samples containing more than 1 age-group. Such combinations are difficult to distinguish in length-frequency data as pointed out by Das (1968, 1972) and Graham et al. (1972). Graham (in press) reported that from one to as many as four broods of larvae entered the Sheepscot estuary annually in recent years. The winter retardation of larval growth rate observed in the Sheepscot estuary (Figures 6, 7) was more brief than the general slowing down of growth throughout the winter reported by others (Tibbo et al. 1958; Das 1968, 1972; Graham et al. 1972; Boyar et al. 1973). The duration of slowed growth lasted only 2 or 3 wk, from the latter half of January to early February, and occurred approxi- mately when the second group of larvae was abun- dant in the estuary, but the exact cause of the retarded growth is not clear. Midwinter in general has been shown to be a period of stress for larval herring. Chenoweth (1970) showed that the rela- tive condition of Atlantic herring larvae was poorest in February 1965, 1966, and 1967 and in January 1968 and that these periods of low condi- tion factors coincided with the high mortalities reported by Graham and Davis (1971). Midwinter is a time when food densities are lowest (Sherman and Honey'), when water temperatures approach the lethal limit (Graham and Davis 1971) and when the feeding activity of the larvae is lowest (Sherman and Honey 1971). Any or all of these factors may have contributed to the period of re- tarded growth of larvae in our study. In conclusion, it appears that the ages of larval herring determined by the otolith growth incre- ^Sherman, K., and K. Honey. 1970. Seasonal succession of the food of larval herring in a coastal nursery area. ICNAF Res. Doc. 70/72. 129 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 ments are in good agreement with the observed progression of length-frequencies M^ith time, and that such precise age determinations hold much potential for further work on the dynamics of larval fishes. However, it would be advisable to investigate further, under controlled laboratory conditions, the factors controlling the grow^th of Atlantic herring larvae and otolith growth incre- ment deposition. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We would like to thank Ron Aho, Mike Dunn, Gilbert Jaeger, David Hodges, and Richard Shaw for sampling assistance. We also thank B. J. McAlice and H. H. DeWitt for their helpful suggestions. LITERATURE CITED Barkman, R. C. 1978. The use of otolith growth rings to age young Atlantic silversides, Menidia menidia. Trans. Am. Fish. See. 107:790-792. BLAXTER, J. H. S., AND G. HEMPEL. 1966. Utilization of yolk by herring larvae. J. Mar Biol. Assoc. U.K. 46:219-234. BOYAR, H. C, R. R. MARAK, F. E. PERKINS, AND R. A. CLIFFORD. 1973. Seasonal distribution and growth of larval herring (Clupea harengus L.) in the Georges Bank-Gulf of Maine area from 1962 to 1970. J. Cons. 35:36-51. BROTHERS, E. B., C. B. MATHEWS, AND R. LASKER. 1976. Daily growth increments in otoliths from larval and adult fishes. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:1-8. CHENOWETH, S. B. 1970. Seasonal variations in condition of larval herring in Boothbay area of the Maine coast. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 27:1875-1879. DAS, N. 1968. Spawning, distribution, survival, and growth of larval herring ( C/upea harengus L.) in relation to hydro- graphic conditions in the Bay of Fundy Fish. Res. Board Can., Tech. Rep. 88, 162 p. 1972. Growth of larval herring iClupea harengus) in the Bay of Fundy and Gulf of Maine area. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 29:573-575. Graham, J. j. 1970. Coastal currents ofthe western Gulf of Maine. Int. Comm. Northwest Atl. Fish., Res. Bull. 7:19-31. 1972. Retention of larval herring within the Sheepscot estuary of Maine. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:299-305. In press. Monitoring winter mortality and spring abun- dance of larval herring, Clupea harengus L., along coastal Maine (1964-1977). Rapp. P.-V. Reun. Cons. Int. Explor Men Graham, J. j., S. B. Chenoweth, and C. W. Davis. 1972. Abundance, distribution, movements, and lengths of larval herring along the western coast of the Gulf of Maine. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:307-321. Graham, J. J., and c. w. Davis. 1971. Estimates of mortality and year-class strength of larval herring in western Maine, 1964-1967. Rapp. P.-V. Reun. Cons. Int. Explor Mer 160:147-152. Graham, j. j., and R m. w. Venno. 1968. Sampling larval herring from tidewaters with buoyed and anchored nets. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 25:1169-1179. Harding, j. P. 1949. The use of probability paper for the graphical anal- ysis of polymodal frequency distributions. J. Mar Biol. Assoc. U.K. 28:141-153. PANNELLA, G. 1971. Fish otoliths: daily growth layers and periodical patterns. Science (Wash., D.C.) 173:1124-1127. 1974. Otolith growth patterns: an aid in age determina- tion in temperate and tropical fishes. In T B. Bagenal (editor). Proceedings of an International Symposium on the Ageing of Fish, p. 28-39. Unwin Brothers, Surrey Engl. Ralston, S. 1976. Age determination of a tropical reef butterflyfish utilizing daily growth rings of otoliths. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:990-994. Sameoto, D. D. 1972. Distribution of herring (Clupea harengus) larvae along the southern coast of Nova Scotia with observa- tions on their growth and condition factor. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 29:507-515. Snedecor, G. W, and W. G. Cochran. 1967. Statistical methods. 6th ed. Iowa State Univ Press, Ames, 593 p. Sherman, K., and K. a. Honey. 1971. Seasonal variations in the food of larval herring in coastal waters of central Maine. Rapp. P.-V. Reun. Cons. Int. Explor Mer 160:121-124. Struhsaker, P, and j. H. UCHIYAMA. 1976. Age and growth of the nehu, Stolephorus purpureas (Pisces: Engraulidae), from the Hawaiian Islands as indicated by daily growth increments of sagittae. Fish. Bull, U.S. 74:9-17. Taubert, B. D., and D. W. Coble. 1977. Daily rings in otoliths of three species of Lepomis and Tilapia mossambica. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 34:332-340. TiBBO, S. N., AND J. E. Henri Legar^. 1960. Further study of larval herring i Clupea harengus L.) in the Bay of Fundy and Gulf of Maine. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 17:933-942. TIBBO, S. N., J. E. Henri legar£, l. W. Scattergood, and R. F Temple. 1958. On the occurrence and distribution of larval herring (Clupea harengus L.) in the Bay of Fundy and the Gulf of Maine. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 15:1451-1469. ZAR.J. H. 1974. Biostatistical analysis. Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 620 p. 130 FEEDING SELECTIVITY OF SCHOOLS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY, ENGRAULIS MORDAX, IN THE SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA BIGHT J. Anthony Koslow^ ABSTRACT Direct field measurements of the feeding of five schools of northern anchovy over four sets of conditions indicate consistent size-selective feeding on the dominant zooplankton taxa. At low-to- moderate prey concentrations (10-40 mg carbon per cubic meter), the schools consumed 35-50% of the total zooplankton biomass and >90% of the largest zooplankters present. The schools' feeding was a positive function of prey size primarily. The density of particular prey items did not significantly affect feeding selectivity. The northern anchovy fed preferentially upon a particular species in only one instance. No significant difference was found in the selectivity of two northern anchovy schools composed primarily of late 0-group and Il-group fish, respectively, that were feeding under similar feeding conditions. At prey concentrations of 10-40 mg carbon per cubic meter, the degree of selectivity was inversely related to the size of the largest prey available. The prey size at which consumption is predicted to be 100% was proportional to the size of the largest prey. Field studies have demonstrated that planktiv- orous fish can control zooplankton community structure in oligotrophic lakes and stocked fish ponds by selectively feeding upon the larger, more visible prey organisms (see Gliwicz and Prejs 1977 and Dodson 1979 for a critical discus- sion of this work). However, while highly produc- tive regions in the world's oceans typically sup- port large populations of schooling, planktivorous fish, the impact of these fish populations upon marine zooplankton communities is not known. Taking as an example the estimated consump- tion of zooplankton by the northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, in the Southern California Bight, it becomes clear that marine fish popula- tions may have considerable impact on the zoo- plankton in the system. The prey consumption of the northern anchovy may be calculated based upon data for the biomass of the population, its annual reproduction and growth, and assump- tions concerning its metabolic efficiency. The results of this calculation can then be compared with estimates of zooplankton production in the region. In the Southern California Bight, the spawning biomass of the northern anchovy in the mid- 1960's to early 1970's averaged between 1.32 and 2.35 X 10^ t over a 40 x 10^ km^ area or 1.34-2.25 g C/m^ (calculated from Smith 1972). Engraulis mordax spawns approximately 20 times annually and produces 389 eggs/g wet weight at each spawning (Hunter and Goldberg 1980). Averaged over the year, this is equivalent to a daily produc- tion rate of 0.43%, based upon a dry weight per egg of 0.030 mg (Hunter and Leong^) or 0.20 mg wet weight (assuming a 15% wet weight:dry weight conversion): [(389 x 20 x 0.2 x 10"^)/ 365] x 100 = 0.43. The growth rate of the northern anchovy past the first year of life is negligible, approximately 0.08% /d from the end of the first year to the end of the third year (calculated from Sakagawa and Kimura 1976). The total daily production of the adult northern anchovy is thus approximately 0.43% + 0.08% = 0.51%. Assuming a 10-30% efficiency of food conversion (Paloheimo and Dickie 1966 and references therein; Jones and Hislop 1978; Lane et al. 1979), mature northern anchovy consmne 1.7-5.1% of body weight daily: 0.51 X 1/0.30 = 1.7; 0.51 x 1/0.10 = 5.1. [The food consumption rate for 0-group northern anchovy is considerably greater since the daily growth rate during the first year is about 6.1% (calcu- lated from Sakagawa and Kimura 1976).] The ma- ture northern anchovy stock therefore consumes 'Scripps Institution of Oceanography A-008, University of California, San Diego, La Jolla, CA 92093; present address: Department of Oceanography, Dalhousie University, Halifax, Nova Scotia B3H 4J1, Canada. ^Hunter, J. R., and R. Leong. The spawning energetics of female northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax. Unpubl. manuscr. Southwest Fisheries Center La Jolla Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, PO. Box 271, La Jolla, CA 92038. Manuscript accepted August 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 131 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 0.02-0.11 g C/m^ per d. Primary production in the Bight averages 0.5-1.0 g C/m^ per d (Eppley et al. 1979). The northern anchovy feeds primarily upon zooplankton. Assuming a 20% conversion of primary to secondary production, the spawning population ofE. mordax consumes 10 to >100% of secondary production in the Southern California Bight. This figure appears to give the right order of magnitude, since >80% of acoustic targets from pelagic surveys in this area are estimated to be northern anchovy schools (Mais 1974). It should be noted that the Southern California Bight appears to be an area of net zooplankton consumption, since zooplankton densities are typically greater in the California Current north of the Bight than in the Bight itself (Reid 1962). Presumably the zooplankton are being consumed as they are carried into the area. The northern anchovy also supplements its diet by filter feed- ing on ph3rtoplankton. If the feeding of the northern anchovy is size selective, its impact on the community of zoo- plankton could be considerable. Furthermore, the northern anchovy population is, relatively speaking, not all that large. The population of the Peruvian anchovetta, which is predominant- ly phytophagous but is a zooplankton feeder in certain areas and at certain stages of its life history (Rojas de Mendiola 1971), is estimated to have been an order of magnitude more densely concentrated (Walsh et al. 1980). Most quantitative studies of the feeding selec- tivity of marine fish have been conducted in the laboratory with small groups of fish (Leong and O'Connell 1969; O'Connell 1972; Durbin and Durbin 1975). This permits only a crude approx- imation of their impact upon marine systems, where these fish populations are predominantly found in massive shoals. For example, approxi- mately 90% of the biomass of the northern anchovy population is found in schools >25 t (calculated from Hewdtt et al. 1976). While Eggers (1976) modelled the energetics of planktivorous fish schools using the extensive literature on the feeding of individual fish, there is no experimen- tal data on the feeding of fish schools to test such models. Without better data on the feeding of schooling fish on the zooplankton, contemporary models of marine zooplankton community d5rnam- ics have perforce concentrated upon interactions among the lower trophic levels (Steele 1974; Steele and Frost 1977). I report here the results of in situ measure- ments of the feeding selectivity of schools of E. mordax in the nearshore waters of the Southern California Bight. These represent the first direct quantitative field measurements of the feeding of schools of planktivorous fish. METHODS A vessel with side-scanning sonar and echo sounder was used to track and determine the dimensions of large (25-200 t), near-surface schools of northern anchovy. A school was consid- ered appropriate for study when 1) the school was near the surface and of sufficient size (>50 m along the axis perpendicular to the school's movement) that plankton samples could unequiv- ocally be taken in its wake, 2) the school did not show signs of being disturbed by the ship's pres- ence, and 3) the school was either directly observed to be feeding (October 1976) or its gen- eral configuration and movement were consistent with feeding behavior. It was assumed that when feeding, a school would either form an amorphous "ball" (Radakov 1973) or that its long axis would be normal to its axis of motion (Weihs 1973), and that the school's velocity would not exceed sever- al body lengths per second. When a school was selected for study, a cruci- form drogue with surface buoy was dropped into its center. The school's movements in relation to the drogue were monitored for 10-25 min, during which time the school usually moved 100 to several hundred meters from the drogue. A weighted buoy was then placed over the school. Thus a transect was established, over which the school had passed while presvunably feeding. The school's physical dimensions and swimming speed relative to the water could be determined using the ship's sonar, echo sounder, and by timing the school's movement between the two buoys. In general, the sampling regimen consisted of taking two replicate samples with zooplankton nets first in the wake of the school between the buoys and then in "control" areas either in front of or several hundred meters to the side of the school. The nets were lowered obliquely from the surface to the average depth of the school (as determined by echo sounder), towed at that depth for 2 min, and then hauled to the surface (total length of tow about 100 m). A 0.5 m diameter plankton net (102 /um mesh) with a TSK^ flow- meter was towed in a harness with a 1.0 m 132 KOSLOW: FEEDING SELECTIVITY OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY SCHOOLS diameter (505 /u.m mesh) net with a digital meter. Zooplankton samples were obtained successfully on four cruises conducted in the spring, summer, and fall of 1975-76. All sampling was conducted in daylight hours. Samples of the northern anchovy from the schools were taken by a com- mercial purse seiner on all but one cruise (April 1976) for positive species identification, analysis of their size composition, and examination of gut contents. The sampling scheme varied slightly on sever- al of the cruises: 1) The data from April 1976 represent the results of four replicate tows taken in the wake of the school and three control tows, rather than the two replicates taken for each set of tows on other cruises. 2) On the last cruise of October 1976, the concentration of plankton was measured before and after a school passed through a single patch of water. The control tows were taken first, directly in front of the school; the second set was obtained after the school had passed through the same area. 3) On the first cruise of August 1975, the 0.5 m diameter net was used alone. However, no large zooplankters were found in the samples from this cruise, and those collected were well within the net's range of maximal efficiency, as determined by comparison of catches from this net and the larger, 1 m net on subsequent cruises. Analysis of the plankton samples consisted primarily of determining the size-frequency compo- sition of the zooplankton in the wake of the school as compared with its composition in control tows. I selected for analysis dominant species from the major taxa of zooplankton occurring in the sam- ples (i.e., copepods, chaetognaths, cladocerans, and larvaceans (Table 1)). Species were also se- lected on the basis of size, so that representatives of the smallest and largest commonly occurring zooplankters in each set of samples were enumer- ated. Following Cassie (1968), aliquot size was determined to count 20-50 organisms/size cate- gory; size categories with actual counts <10 were lumped with the adjacent size category. Copepods were enumerated by life history stages, other organisms by body length. To facilitate compari- son, results were converted whenever possible to micrograms carbon (/xg C) using conversions obtained from the literature for Calanus (Mullin and Brooks 1976), microcopepods (Landry 1976, Table l. — Plankton biomass and genera enumerated from control samples of plankton tows taken around northern anchovy schools in the nearshore zone of the Southern California Bight. Genera enumerated Biomass Cruise (mgC/m^) Microzooplankton Macrozooplankton Aug. 1975 '41 Acartia Paracalanus None Sagitta («3 mm) Oikopleura 8 Mar. 1976 ^663 Evadne None 9 Mar. ^639 Evadne None Apr. '33 Acartia Calanus Sagitta (0-3 mm) Sagitta ( * 1 2 mm) Oct. ^10 Acartia Combined Paracalanus Clausocalanus- Ctenocalanus Harpacticoids and cyclopoids None Moderate. ^High. ^Low. 1978; Bartram et al.^), and Sagitta (Reeve 1970; Sameoto 1971). The total zooplankton biomass in the plankton samples was determined from dis- placement volumes of the samples taken with the 0.5 m diameter net; these values were converted to milligrams carbon per cubic meter (mg C/m^) (Wiebe et al. 1975). RESULTS Characteristics of Northern Anchovy Schools The estimated biomass of the five schools studied ranged from 25 to 200 t (Table 2). The length of the schools (the dimension normal to the school's motion) varied by a factor of 4 (55- 200 m). The breadth of the schools (the dimension parallel to the school's axis of motion) was gen- erally less than their length and varied by less than a factor of 2 (30-55 m). The breadth of a feeding school, as a function of the number offish from front to back, is critical to the degree the school depletes the plankton. The lesser variabil- ity in the breadth of the schools may result from behavioral regulation of this parameter, which determines the relative difference in feeding con- ditions encountered from front to back of the school. However, these data are inadequate to "Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. "Bartram, W. C, D. M. Checkley, and J. F. Heinbokel. 1976. Further use of a deep tank in the study of the planktonic food chain. IMR Rep., IMR Ref 76-7, p. 157-166. Institute of Marine Resources A-018, University of California, San Diego, La Jolla, CA 92093. 133 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table 2. — Characteristics of northern anchovy schools examined for feeding selectivity: overall school biomass, physical dimensions, velocity and prey consumption, number measured, and mean and range of standard lengths oi EngrauUs mordax within the schools. a b c d e f 9 Dimensions (m) Plankton Body wt. Standard length (mm) Biomass (t wet wt.) Velocity (m/s) consumption (mgC/m^) Cruise Length Front-bacl< Vertical (%) n x±95% C.L. Range Aug. 1975 ^42 200 30 6 — 20.5 — 20 115.20: ►5.02 96-139 8 Mar. 1976 ^25 35 35 "26 — — — 55 122,84±29.17 83-148 9 Mar. ^50 55 "55 20 0.29 — — 16 98.25±6.37 84-127 Apr. '125 100 40 40 0.38 14.85 1.0 — - — Oct. ^200 ^200 "40 20 — 3.47 — 54 99.48: t1.52 90-144 'Percentage body-weight consumed/h = [(volume swept clear/h)(food removed/unit volume)/(school biomass)] x 100 = [(7r(0.5b)(0.5d)(e x m^)(f x 10-3)/(a x 10« x 0.05)] x 100. ^Estimated from physical dimensions, density of 1.5 kg/m^ (Hewitt etal. 1976), and assuming actual shape to be cylinder (August 1975) or oblate spheroid (April 1976). ^Fisherman's estimate based on purse seining of school. "Back-calculated from tonnage, physical dimensions, and assumptions of average school density = 1.5 kg/m^ and of a cylindrical (October 1976) or oblate spheroidal (March 1976) school shape. ^Estimate. evaluate relations between feeding conditions and school size and configuration. Samples of the northern anchovy were obtained from four of the schools. Two of the schools were composed of northern anchovies that had com- pleted approximately 1 year's growth (98-99 mm SL); the other schools were composed of predomi- nantly I-group (115 mm SL) and Il-group (123 mm SL) northern anchovies (Table 2; Sakagawa and Kimura 1976). Since the schools composed of the largest and smallest fish were sampled under the same feeding conditions (i.e., the spring diatom bloom dominated by cladocerans of March 1976; Tables 1, 3), the feeding selectivity of large and small northern anchovies can be compared. Table 3. — Ivlev's Electivity Index (E) as computed from the frequency of size classes of Evadne spp. examined in northern anchovy stomach contents and plankton tows taken in vicinity of the two schools sampled on 8 and 9 March 1976. Body Stomach samples (n = 10) Propor- Plankton tows Replicate Propor- E = length Total tion in sample tion in (r-p)l Date (Mm) count ration (r) counts tows (p) (r+p) 8 Mar. 200-299 9 0.036 44; 30 0.10 -0.47 300-399 75 .30 145; 101 .33 -.05 400-499 42 .17 132; 59 .26 -.21 500-599 70 .28 83; 53 .18 .22 600-699 37 .15 57; 33 .12 .11 700-899 15 .060 2; 2 .0054 .83 Total 248 741 9 Mar. 200-299 4 .03 15; 14 .14 -.64 300-399 10 .08 19; 13 .16 -.35 400-499 30 .23 24; 15 .19 .09 500-599 35 .27 42; 24 .32 -.10 600-699 33 .25 23; 11 .17 .20 >700 19 .15 4;0 .02 .76 Total 131 204 Feeding of Northern Anchovy Schools The impact of the schools' feeding could be clearly determined from the plankton samples during all sampling periods except those of March 1976. In all 40 size categories of prey enumerated from August 1975 and April and October 1976 cruises, the median concentration was less in tows taken in the wake of the school than in control tows (Table 4). These data were analyzed as the fraction consumed [= 1 - (density of organisms in wake of school)/(density in controls)] as a function of the prey organisms' body size. In computing regressions to analyze the feeding selectivity of the northern anchovy schools, it was often not clear either by eye, through analysis of residuals, or from the significance level of the regression whether a linear or curvilinear rela- tionship best fit the data (Figure 1). In these instances, two regressions were performed: a lin- ear regression and a regression in which the independent variable (i.e., prey body size) was loge-transformed. In computing the linear regres- sions (Figure 1), data points are excluded past the first size class at which the school has effectively consumed all the plankton (i.e., when consump- tion is >90%). An arcsine transformation was not performed, although it has been recommended for regressions performed on data expressed as frac- tions or percentages (Sokal and Rohlf 1969). The arcsine transformation did not significantly affect the form of the regressions presented below and only slightly enhanced their significance level. The data are therefore presented untransformed (Figure 1). There was consistently a significant positive relationship between the fraction consumed and the size of the anchovy's prey on the cruises (Figure 1), despite the diversity of prey items within each cruise and the considerable differ- ences in the composition and density of the zoo- plankton between cruises (Tables 1, 4). The frac- tion consumed ranged from 10-30% for the smallest organisms enumerated to 95-100% for 134 KOSLOW: FEEDING SELECTIVITY OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY SCHOOLS Table 4. — Sample counts, density (numbers and biomass per cubic meter), and fraction consumed of prey items examined from control plankton tows and tows taken in the wake of northern anchovy schools, August 1975 and April and October 1976. Control tows Behind-school tows Repli- Median Repli- Median Frac- Body weight cate Abundance (no./m^) biomass cate Abundance (no./m^) biomass tion sample (Acg sample (mQ con- Prey organisms Size class (MgC) counts Median Range C/m3) counts Median Range C/m3) sumed August; Euterpina Total 0.10 128:87 13,300 9,830-16,700 1.330 36,45 5.430 5.370-5.500 543 059 acuUfrons Nauplii Acartia tonsa Total 0.21 275: 302 35,000 34,100-35,900 7.360 135: 197 22,100 20,600-23.500 4.630 37 Nauplii Paracalanus CIII-VI 070 34:53 209 1 78-240 165 9: 12 56.1 55.0-57.3 443 .73 parvus A tonsa CIII-VI 1.35 136:209 828 711-944 1.120 16:31 122 97.7-148 166 85 Sagitta spp 500-999 ixm 0.19 33:11 111 49.7-172 21.1 12; 4 46.2 19.1-733 8 88 58 1,000-1.499 Acm 0.62 264: 145 1,020 655-1,380 631 67:31 279 148-409 173 .73 1,500-1,999 /um 1.38 32:20 129 90.4-167 178 2; 1 8.50 4.80-12.2 11.7 93 2,000-2.999 /xm 3.42 14:12 31.9 27.2-36.6 109 0:0 .00-00 1.00 •3,000 fxm 6.08 9:12 50.6 47.0-54.2 308 0:0 .00-00 1 00 Oikopleura spp. <200 fim 64:22 217 99.4-334 27:22 135 105-165 .38 (Trunk length) 200-299 /im 58:51 267 230-303 25: 18 119 85.9-153 .55 300-399 fim 15; 10 61.8 45.2-78.4 3:6 23.5 18.3-28.6 •62 •400 Aim 6: 10 38.3 31.4-45.2 1:0 3.10 .00-6.10 92 April: A. tonsa CI-IV 1.1 42:38: 26 91:34: 20 424: 279: 19.7 19.4-33.6 21.6 21: 15 13.6 13.1-14.1 15.0 .31 cv 2.3 17.6 14.9-72.7 40.5 21:20 15.8 14.1-17.5 36.4 .10 CVIcJ 3.2 144 84.9-339 461 172: 130 115 114-116 368 .20 114 CVI9 4.25 211:294: 134 152 99.8-169 646 204: 85 106 74.5-137 451 30 Calanus CI 1.4 32: 203: 25.6 14.1-105 35.8 20:13 12.4 11.4-13.4 174 .51 pacificus 19 Cll 26 31: 173: 26 44:68: 30 481:466: 24.8 19.4-89.5 64.5 14:5 689 4.38-9.40 17.9 .72 cm 4.9 35.2 22.3-35.2 172 31; 14 16.6 12.3-20.8 81.1 52 CIV 14 30.9 27.8-46.6 433 137: 137 12.1 11.1-14.8 169 .61 297 164; 147 cv 27 222: 136: 114 10.7 9.00-21.5 289 12; 16; 21:34 1.69 .97-2.60 45.6 84 CVId' 35 55:35: 46 4.31 2.32-5.33 151 1;0; 2;1 .08 .00-0.16 2.80 .98 CVI 9 ' 68 45:25: 27 2.53 1.66-4.36 172 1;0; 1;11 .08 .00-0.84 5.44 97 Sagitta spp. 1.0-1.9 mm 0.96 29:19: 54 43: 26: 40 33: 22: 23 16:21: 9 16: 16: 9 21; 19; 23.2 9.8-40.2 22.3 16:35 20.7 10.7-30.7 19.9 .11 2 0-2.9 mm 3.22 29.8 13.4-34.4 96.0 31: 18 18.3 15.8-20.8 58.9 .39 3.0-3.9 mm 7.13 17.1 11.4-26.4 122 7:7 5.42 4.70-6.13 386 68 4.0-4.9 mm 12.9 12.8 6.70-109 165 11:3 5.01 2.63-7.39 64.6 61 5.0-6.9 mm 25.5 8.28 670-12.8 211 9: 10 7.40 6.04-8.76 189 .11 7.0-7.9 mm' 43 1.26 0.94-2.03 54.2 13; 10; .76 .15-1.08 32.7 .40 10 6:2 8.0-8.9 mm' 58 30:23: 10 1.52 0.94-2.91 882 15: 12: 13: 19 1.26 1.02-1.45 73.1 .17 9.0-9.9 mm' 76 34; 47: 20 3.11 1.87-3.29 236 20: 12: 18:34 1.52 1.30-2.60 116 51 10.0-10.9 mm' 95 47: 56: 35 3.71 3.28-4.55 352 25:6: 14:23 1.43 .65-2.03 136 61 a1 1.0 mm' 119 35:45: 21 298 1 .97-3.39 355 9: 1: 3; 7 039 .11-0 73 464 .87 October: Harpacticoids 100-299 Aim 009 46:34 585 476-694 52.6 70:43 523 415-631 47.1 .11 and cyclopoids 300-499 Mm 0.28 12:7 140 98 0-181 39.2 9: 11 93.6 81.1-106 26.2 .33 A. tonsa ^ Cl-ll 0.29 92:71; 62:52 404 286-557 117 12: 16: 12:21 57.4 45.1-81.0 16.6 .86 CIII-VI 1.33 35:23: 22: 12 135 66-211 180 0:5; 0: 1 5.45 .00-18 7.25 96 Paracalanus- Cl-ll 0.14 205: 184 1,190 1,003-1,424 167 262:216 868 764-984 122 .27 Clausocalanus- 182:259 260: 202 Ctenocalanus^ CIII-VI 0.54 48: 64: 92:89 418 286-509 226 15:21: 12; 12 556 45.4-75.7 30.0 87 'Based on CalCOFI net tows. ^Sample counts for A tonsa and combined Paracalanus-Clausocalanus-Ctenocalanus are presented in pairs, representing replicate counts from tfie same tows. 135 FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79. NO. 1 COPEPOD CEPHALOTHORAX LENGTH (>jm) 200 600 800 H-H — I \ Sagitta TOTAL LENGTH (mm) 1.0 15 2.0 2 5 30 H h 0.3 C(/ig) 7 p jg) PER ORGANISM (A) 6.0 I 00 0.90 80 - 0.70 - cn 0.60 h z o o 2 0.50 g H < 0.40 a: 0.30 0.20 0.10 0.00 (B) X y^ / X /y= 0.0017 +0,11 r2= 94 p < 05 1 1 X Oikopleura spp 1 1 100 200 300 400 500 BODY LENGTH (>jm) PER ORGANISM COPEPOD CEPHALOTHORAX LENGTH (pm) 1000 1500 2000 2400 CEPHALOTHORAX LENGTH (pm) 300 400 500 600 Sagitta TOTAL LENGTH (mm) 2 040 6 80 10 11.0 C Ug ) 0.9 1 A 1 A 1 ^ /I 1 1 / / ^ 0.8 - /-y = 034LN(x) +0.97 / r2=0 76 Q LlJ Z) in z 0.7 0.6 / / p < 05 o o / Ay= 0.59X + 30 2 o 0.5 - // r^ = 0.55 1- 0.4 / . P <.I0 0.3 0.2 : i A MICROCOPEPODS - - 0.1 ■I 1 1 .1 1 1 1 1 1 x/ 1,1 1 (D) / ^^•''"'-y = 12 LN(x) + 0.46 09C — / /"^ r^= 0.69 _ / / / < . / p <; .025 / 0.80 - / \y = 00I2X + 053 / / / r2=0 77 ^ y^ / Q 70 4 / / p-= 025 / ^ ^ LJ J / /^ 5 1 / /^ _) in 0.60 4 1. / tr _ 2 O 1 / '^ ^ii^' 0036X + 027 o y / y^ r2=0 35 z 050 y X * P < 05 - o / y^ 1- — ^ 040 • /• _ tr u. . 0.30 0.20 > ^ • Sagitta spp • A Acortio lonso X Calanus pocificus 0.10 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 C (pg) PER ORGANISM 20 40 60 80 100 120 C (>ig) PER ORGANISM 136 KOSLOW; FEEDING SELECTIVITY OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY SCHOOLS l.uvj 1 1 1 1 1 (E) 0.80 - D / 0.60 - / _ 040 / X UJ Q / ^y = 0023X -1 13 z 0.20 _ °/ r2=0 83 > / p< 01 h- / D > / H 0.00 - / — O a / UJ / _J / UJ -020 - / D _ > / UJ / _I / > -040 - /■ - * — ( / UJ D MARCH 8, 1976 -O60 — _ 1 -0.80 MARCH 9, 1976 - -1.00 1 1 1 1 1 250 350 450 550 650 750 BODY LENGTH (pm) Figure L — Fraction consumed of zooplankton prey items by northern anchovy schools as a function of prey body size ( A-D). Linear regressions were performed on all data sets, excluding from the regression data points past the first size class at which the school consumed >90% of prey. A curvilinear fit to the data based on a regression using a loge-transformation of values on the abscissa is shown where a curvilinear relationship provides as good or better fit. The regressions in Panels A-C include the data from each species found in the panel. In Panel D, the linear and curvilinear regressions in the upper left are based on data for Calanus pacificus alone; the solid lower regression is based upon data for Sagitta spp. and Acartia tonsa; the dashed oblique line is based upon the total data set for the sampling period. Dashed horizontal lines represent the fraction consumed of the total available zooplankton biomass. The significance level for each regression (which is also the significance level for each regression coefficient) is indicated. Panels: A and B — August 1975; C— October 1976; D— April 1976; E— March 1976; Ivlev's Electivity Index (E) as a function of the pigmented body length of Evadne spp. the largest zooplankters (Table 4, Figure 1). Over- all, the northern anchovy schools consumed 35- 50% of the total available zooplankton in the areas sampled (Figure 1). On the summer cruise (August 1975), a diverse assemblage of small plankton was present. Prey consumption appeared to be a function primarily of their size (expressed as their weight in micro- grams carbon) (Figure lA). A single regression, whether linear or curvilinear, adequately de- scribes the northern anchovy's feeding selectivity for such morphologically dissimilar organisms as copepod nauplii, Euterpina acutifrons and Para- calanus parvus; small calanoid copepodites, Acar- tia tonsa and P. parvus; and small chaetognaths, Sagitta spp. There is no indication of species preference. Nor is there evidence that prey density significantly influenced the rate at which they were consumed. While the relative concentration of similar-sized prey items varied widely, they were consumed at equivalent rates [Table 4, compare the density and consumption of copepod nauplii and Sagitta spp. (0.5-1.0 mm), P. parvus CIII-VI and Sagitta spp. (1.0-1.5 mm), and A. tonsa CIII-VI and Sagitta spp. (1.5-2.0 mm)]. The data for the northern anchovy's feeding on the larvacean, Oikopleura spp., from the August cruise was not directly comparable to data for the other species sampled at this time because their body length cannot be converted to a carbon value for the whole organism (including "house"). How- ever, the northern anchovy's feeding on Oiko- pleura appeared to be a linear function of prey size (Figure IB). The autumn cruise (October 1976) was charac- terized by a low density of zooplankton — the standing crop was a factor of 3-4 less than that encountered during the April 1976 and August 1975 cruises — entirely dominated by small zoo- plankton as in the August 1975 cruise (Tables 1, 4). Again the northern anchovy's feeding selectiv- ity was positively related to prey size (Figure IC). A curvilinear relationship here provides a better fit to the data. Only on the cruise of April 1976 were both large and small zooplankton present; however, the zoo- plankton density was comparable to that found on the summer cruise (August 1975) (Table 1, com- pare the range of the prey sizes; Table 5, compare Figure ID with Figure lA, C). As in the summer Table 5. — Maximum prey size and its density, prey size at 100% consumption by northern anchovy schools as predicted from linear regressions, and slope of linear regressions of the school's feeding selectivity of prey size. Apri 1976 Sagitta spp. August Calanus and October Item 1975 pacificus Acartia tonsa 1976 Maximum prey size (mqC) 6.08 68.00 119.00 1.33 Concentration of largest prey item (MgC/m^) 300 172 345 180 Predicted prey size (mqC) at 100% consumption 1.68 39.20 203.00 1.19 Slope of regression of feeding selec- tivity 0.31 0.012 0.0036 0.59 137 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 cruise (August 1975), the schoors feeding on both the small copepods, A. tonsa, and the chaetognath, Sagitta spp., increased as a single function of prey weight (Figure ID). However, the school appeared to select the larger copepod, Calanus pacificus, over the other prey examined from this cruise. To test for the differential feeding selectivity for C. pacificus, a single linear regression was per- formed through the pooled data for prey consump- tion from the sampling period (Figure ID) (Quade 1967). All data points for C. pacificus and only 3 of 14 data points for the consumption of Sagitta spp. and A. tonsa lie above this regression line, indicat- ing a significantly heterogeneous distribution of the data (X2 = 11.57; P< 0.01). For the two sets of samples collected from two different schools on consecutive days during the March 1976 cruise, no significant differences were found between the control tows and those taken in the wake of the school either in the displacement volumes or in the plankton's size-frequency com- position. This cruise was undertaken during an intense spring diatom bloom; ambient plankton concentrations were a factor of 20 greater than during any other cruise. At these plankton densi- ties, northern anchovies could fill their stomachs [ca. 5% of body weight (Rojas de Mendiola and Ochoa 1973) for Engraulis ringens or 0.05 g C] in approximately 40 min by simple filtration (fil- tering rate per individual northern anchovy = 2 1/min (Leong and O'Connell 1969)). Thus, the schools, or some part of them, may have ceased feeding. Furthermore, at these high densities of plankton, the schools would have to ingest far more material than on the previous cruises to consume a detectable fraction of the plankton. The fish stomachs examined from both schools were full, but the data on the dimensions and biomass of the schools indicate they were not significantly more densely packed. The schools had thus appar- ently been feeding, at least intermittently, but under these conditions, their feeding selectivity could not be determined from the plankton sam- ples alone. To analyze the northern anchovy's feeding dur- ing this cruise, I compared the size-frequency composition of prey in the stomach contents with that found in the zooplankton tows (Table 3). The data were analyzed using Ivlev's Electivity Index: E = (r - p)l{r +p), where r = the proportion the prey item represents in the diet and p = the proportion the prey represents in the plankton samples (Ivlev 1961). 138 The feeding of the northern anchovy on the cladocerans (predominantly Evadne nordmanni), which dominated the plankton during the spring bloom was a linear function of prey size (Figure IE). No significant difference was found between the electivity of the two schools sampled under similar conditions of food density and composition on this cruise, although northern anchovies from the school of 8 March 1976 were the largest and those sampled on the following day were the smallest encountered during the study. Their difference in mean length {x = 122.84 and 98.25, respectively) indicates the schools were composed predominantly of Il-group and 0-group fish, respectively, with a difference in mean weight of approximately a factor of 2 (calculated from Saka- gawa and Kimura 1976). But this difference in size apparently did not lead to a significant difference in their feeding selectivity under the sampling conditions. Comparison of Feeding Selectivity Between Cruises The three northern anchovy schools studied on the cruises of August 1975 and April and October 1976 each consumed approximately 100% of the largest prey available and a small fraction of the smaller prey. However, because the size distribu- tion of available prey varied greatly between cruises, prey items that were almost entirely removed from the water when only small prey were available (e.g., the later copepodite stages of small copepods, such as A. tonsa or P. parvus, encountered during August 1975 or October 1976) were virtually ignored when larger prey were present (e.g., on the cruise of April 1976, compare Figure lA, C with Figure ID). The prey size at which the northern anchovy school's consumption was approximately 100% on these three cruises (which may be defined as the intersection of the linear regressions with the line y = 1) varied by more than a factor of 100 (Table 5; Figure lA, C, D). Furthermore, while the school's feeding selectivity was consistently a positive function of the prey's size, the slopes of the linear regressions from the cruises of August 1975 and April and October 1976 also varied by more than two orders of magnitude (Table 5). Both factors are related to the size range of prey available to the anchovy on these cruises, which varied to a similar degree. There is a positive relation between the prey KOSLOW: FEEDING SELECTIVITY OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY SCHOOLS size at which the anchovy schoors consumption is about 100%^ and the size of the largest plankters enumerated (Figure 2A). The northern anchovy apparently adjusts its feeding so that it continues to select the largest prey over at least a hundred fold range in prey size. (It should perhaps be noted that the largest commonly occurring zooplankters were counted in all samples, and all were found in median concentrations of 172-345 fxg C/m^ (Table 5).) While less common, larger zooplankters may 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 LARGEST PREY SIZE (XJ (pgC) 200 have occurred in the samples or at the sample sites, relatively rare individual prey items prob- ably would not affect the feeding pattern of a planktivore, such as the northern anchovy.) Similarly, the slope of the northern anchovy schools' feeding selectivity is a positive function of the inverse of the largest prey sizes occurring in the samples (Figure 2B), since m - Ay/ Ax = 1/xl, where m = the slope of the school's feeding selectivity; Ay = the difference between the frac- tion consumed of the largest and smallest prey ( = 1); Ax = the range (w) in size of the prey organisms; and where the size of the largest prey, xl»Xs, the size of the smallest prey. For this limited set of observations, the relation between the slope of the schools' feeding selectivity im), in fact, appears inversely proportional to the size of the largest prey available (xl). the coefficient of the regres- sion between m and 1/xl is about 1 (Figure 2B). Stated another way, the northern anchovy schools' feeding selectivity over a range of conditions was related to the size of the largest prey available in significant quantity. The largest prey may be con- sidered to be entirely consumed, and the consump- tion of smaller prey is approximately proportional to their size in relation to the largest prey. DISCUSSION Evaluation of the Field Method >- > H U UJ _l UJ CO z Q UJ UJ u. U. o Q. Q 050 - 40 10 5 2 1.25 LARGEST PREY SIZE (Xl) (pgC) Figure 2. — (A) Predicted prey size at 100'% prey consumption and (B) slope of feeding selectivity of northern anchovy schools (from Figure 1) as a function of, respectively, the largest prey size and the inverse of the largest prey size available in significant quantity. ( See Table 4 and text for detailed explanation.) There are several possible biasses to the field sampling method: 1) Its accuracy depends upon the choice of control samples. It is clearly prefer- able to sample a patch of water both before and after a school has passed through it. However, bias due to small-scale patchiness in selecting control samples on the sides of the school's path will probably lead to conservative estimates of prey consumption, since the school will presumably swim through the richest plankton patches. 2) The method would be biased to the extent that the disappearance of zooplankters in the wake of the school resulted from escape from the school rather than their consumption by it. However, this does not appear to be a significant problem, considering the large size of the fish schools sampled in this study. The range of swimming speeds of copepods is on the order of 5-50 body lengths/s (ca. 0.5-5.0 cm/s) (Enright 1977). The northern anchovy schools sampled were on the order of 50-200 m in length, 10-40 m in depth, and advanced at about 10-40 cm/s. Unless the zooplankters could detect 139 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 the school from a considerable distance, which seems unlikely, they could not escape it. There are also advantages to the direct field sampling method: 1) It circumvents uncertainties attendant upon extrapolating from laboratory to field conditions. 2) It avoids the bias inherent in the use of fish stomachs, due to the differential digestibility of various prey organisms. This can significantly bias estimation of selective predation (e.g., see Gannon 1976). 3) It permits study of far larger aggregations than can be accommodated in the laboratory In the Southern California Bight, approximately 90% of the biomass of the northern anchovy population is found in schools >25 t (calculated from Hewitt et al. 1976) — the size of the schools sampled in this study. More generally, the feeding of planktivorous fish has hitherto been studied experimentally using individual or small groups of fish (Ivlev 1961; Beukema 1968; Leong and O'Connell 1969; O'Connell 1972; Ware 1972; Werner and Hall 1974; Confer and Blades 1975; O'Brien et al. 1976). Prey selectivity was analyzed as a complex function requiring understanding of the preda- tor's metabolic state and the prey's size, density, and patchiness. It is an awesome, if not impossi- ble, task to extrapolate this analysis to field situations involving 10^-10' predators interact- ing within a school as they feed upon natural prey assemblages. A field-oriented approach permits study of the feeding of fish schools from the perspective of a higher level of organization, as well as permitting a test of laboratory studies. Vievdng the method in this context, it is important to note the close replication of results in the instance in which it was successfully repeated under a similar set of field conditions (March 1976, Figure IE). The median significance level of the regressions (and the regression coefficients) in Figure 1 was also quite high (P< 0.025), despite the relatively few data points on which the regressions are based and the nature of the data, which is derived from field sampling of zooplankton. The feeding of fish within large schools is sufficiently consistent that significant proportions of the variance in plankton distributions in the wake of the schools can be explained in terms of their impact. Comparison with Other Studies The results of the present study appear consis- tent in broad outline with the pattern of size- selective feeding noted in laboratory studies; i.e., prey selectivity proved a function of prey size rather than of their taxonomy (Ware 1972; O'Brien et al. 1976). This was found for a range of prey sizes and taxa (Figure 1, Table 4). Signifi- cantly enhanced consumption of a particular species was observed only once; i.e., for Calanus during the April 1976 cruise (Figure ID). Since Calanus was encountered only on this cruise, it is not clear how much significance should be attached to this finding. This study indicates it may be possible to predict the feeding selectivity of northern anchovy schools on the basis of data on the size of prey available to the school in significant quantity; i.e., both the slope of the northern anchovy's feeding selectivity and the size of the prey that will effectively be removed entirely from the water is a function of the largest available prey (Figure 2). This result is attractive, since data on the size distribution of the zooplankton can now be collected on a routine, continuous basis (Mackas and Boyd 1979; Herman and Dauphinee 1980). However, experimental studies have often found that the concentrations of individual prey items significantly influence the feeding selec- tivity of fish (Ivlev 1961; Beukema 1968; O'Con- nell 1972; Ware 1972). This is presumably medi- ated through the varying degrees of experience the predator will have with prey at different densities. However, prey density did not appear to be a significant factor in determining the northern anchovy's prey selectivity in this study. On both the August 1975 and April 1976 cruises, small copepods and chaetognaths of equivalent body weight were consumed in approximately equal proportions (Figure lA, D), although their rela- tive densities frequently varied by a factor of 5 or greater (Table 4). Nor can prey density be invoked to explain the anchovy's heightened selectivity for Calanus (Figure ID). The density of Calanus (April 1976) did not appear to differ significantly from the density of Acartia and Sagitta of sim- ilar size that were consumed to a lesser degree (Table 4). This apparent difference between experimental and field results may arise from significant differ- ences in the distribution of prey typically avail- able in the two situations. In laboratory studies examining the influence of prey density on feeding selectivity, the fish are typically offered several prey items at varying densities (Ivlev 1961; Beu- kema 1968; O'Connell 1972; Ware 1972). Under 140 KOSLOW; FEEDING SELECTIVITY OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY SCHOOLS such conditions, the predator may form a "search image" for a particular prey item (Tinbergen 1960; also as discussed by Beukema 1968). How- ever, planktivorous fish in marine systems typi- cally have a wide variety of prey items available to them. Furthermore, the relative densities of dif- ferent zooplankters available to the fish will vary constantly due to vertical and horizontal patchi- ness of the plankters' distribution, the movements of the school, and the very differences from front to back of the school created by its feeding. Thus, under most natural conditions, it may not be feasible for planktivorous marine fish to form "search images" and to select particular prey items based upon their relative abundance in the environment. Further quantitative field studies on the feed- ing of marine schooling fish should enhance our understanding of the role of these planktivores in pelagic ecosystems. Particular questions to be addressed include 1) the role their feeding plays in regulating the structure of marine plankton communities, and 2) the degree to which fish populations themselves are regulated by inter- and intra-specific predation upon the early life stages. It should also be possible to study 3) the relation between planktonic conditions and the distribution and schooling behavior of planktiv- orous fish, which is no doubt linked to their availability to commercial fishing operations. ACKOWLEDGMENTS I gratefully acknowledge the cooperation in the field of Roy Everingham and the EBBCO (Ev- eringham Brothers Bait Company) bait fleet and the ship time donated by J. Hunter and E Smith of the National Marine Fisheries Service. I am grate- ful to D. Goodman, J. Hunter, J. Isaacs, D. Lange, and A. Larson for their careful readings of the manuscript and especially to M. Mullin for his continued support of this work. The comments of J. Steele and an anonymous reviewer contributed substantially to this paper. This research was supported by U.S. Depart- ment of Energy Contract DE-AM03-76-SF00010 and NSF Grant OCE76-02035. LITERATURE CITED Beukema, J. J. 1968. Predation by the three-spined stickleback (Gaster- osteus aculeatus L.): the influence of hunger and experi- ence. Behaviour 31:1-126. CASSIE, R. M. 1968. Sample design. In Zooplankton sampling, p. 105- 121. UNESCO, Paris. Monogr. Oceanogr. Methodol. 2. Confer, J. L., and P I. Blades. 1975. Omnivorous zooplankton and planktivorous fish. Limnol. Oceanogr. 20:571-579. DODSON, S. I. 1979. Body size patterns in arctic and temperate zoo- plankton. Limnol. Oceanogr. 24:940-949. DURBIN, A. G., AND E. G. DURBIN. 1975. Grazing rates of the Atlantic menhaden Brevoortia tyrannus as a function of particle size and concentration. Mar. Biol. (Berl.) 33:265-277. EGGERS, D. M. 1976. Theoretical effect of schooling by planktivorous fish predators on rate of prey consumption. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 33:1964-1971. ENRIGHT, J. T. 1977. Copepods in a hurry: Sustained high-speed upward migration. Limnol. Oceanogr. 22:118-125. EPPLEY, R. W, E. H. RENGER, AND W. G. HARRISON. 1979. Nitrate and phytoplankton production in southern California coastal waters. Limnol. Oceanogr. 24: 483-494. GANNON, J. E. 1976. The effects of differential digestion rates of zoo- plankton by alewife, Alosa pseudoharengus , on deter- minations of selective feeding. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 105:89-95. Gliwicz, z. m., and Z. PREJS. 1977. Can planktivorous fish keep in check planktonic crustacean populations? A test of the size-efficiency hy- pothesis in typical Polish lakes. Ekol. Pol. 25:567-591. Herman, a. w, and T. M. dauphinee. 1980. Continuous and rapid profiling of zooplankton with an electronic counter mounted on a 'Batfish' vehicle. Deep-Sea Res. 27:79-96. Hewitt, R. P, R E. smith, and J. C. Brown. 1976. Development and use of sonar mapping for pelagic stock assessment in the California Current area. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:281-300. Hunter, J. R., and S. R. Goldberg. 1980. Spawning incidence and batch fecundity in northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 77:641- 652. IVLEV,V S. 1961. Experimental ecology of the feeding of fishes. Yale Univ. Press, New Haven, 302 p. Jones, R., and J. R. G. Hislop. 1978. Further observations on the relation between food intake and growth of gadoids in captivity. J. Cons. 38:244-251. Landry, M. R. 1976. Population dynamics of the planktonic marine cope- pod, Acartia clausi Giesbrecht, in a small temperate lagoon. Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. Washington, Seattle, 211 p. 1978. The predatory feeding behavior of a marine copepod, Labidocera trispinosa. Limnol. Oceanogr. 23:1103-1113. Lane, E. D., M. C. S. Kingsley, and D. E. Thornton. 1979. Daily feeding and food conversion efficiency of the diamond turbot: an analysis based on field data. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 108:530-535. LEONG, R. J. H., AND C. P O'CONNELL. 1969. A laboratory study of particulate and filter feeding 141 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 of the northern anchovy (EngrauUs mordax). J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 26:557-582. MACKAS, D. L., AND C. M. BOYD. 1979. Spectral analysis of zooplankton spatial hetero- geneity Science (Wash., D.C.) 204:62-64. MAIS, K. 1974. Pelagic fish surveys in the California Current. Calif Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 162, 79 p. MULLIN, M. M., AND E. R. BROOKS. 1976. Some consequences of distributional heterogeneity of phytoplankton and zooplankton. Limnol. Oceanogr. 21:784-796. O'BRIEN, W. J., N. A. SLADE, AND G. L. VINYARD. 1976. Apparent size as the determinant of prey selection by bluegill sunfish {Lepomis macrochirus) . Ecology 57:1304-1310. O'CONNELL, C. E 1972. The interrelation of biting and filtering in the feed- ing activity of the northern anchovy (EngrauUs mordax). J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 29:285-293. PALOHEIMO, J. E., AND L. M. DICKIE. 1966. Food and growth of fishes. III. Relations among food, body size, and growth efficiency J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 23:1209-1248. QUADE, D. 1967. Rank analysis of covariance. J. Am. Stat. Assoc. 62:1187-1200. RADAKOV, D. Y 1973. Schooling in the ecology offish. Wiley, N.Y, 173 p. REEVE, M. R. 1970. The biology of Chaetognatha. I. Quantitative as- pects of growth and egg production in Sagitta hispida. In J. H. Steele (editor), Marine food chains, p. 168-192. Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh. REID.J. L.,JR. 1962. On circulation, phosphate-phosphorus content, and zooplankton volumes in the upper part of the Pacific Ocean. Limnol. Oceanogr. 7:287-306. ROJAS DE MENDIOLA, B. 1971. Some observations on the feeding of the Peruvian anchoveta EngrauUs ringens J. in two regions of the Peruvian coast. In J. D. Costlow, Jr (editor), Fertility of the sea. Vol. 2, p. 417-440. Gordon and Breach, N.Y. ROJAS DE MENDIOLA, B., AND N. OCHOA. 1973. Observations on the food and feeding habits of the anchovy EngrauUs ringens Jenyns made during Cruise 6908-09. In R. Eraser (compiler), Oceanography of the South Pacific 1972, p. 457-461. New Zealand National Commission for UNESCO, Wellington. SAKAGAWA, G. T, AND M. KIMURA. 1976. Growth of laboratory-reared northern anchovy, EngrauUs mordax. from southern California. Fish. Bull, U.S. 74:271-279. SAMEOTO, D. D. 1971. Life history, ecological production, and an empirical mathematical model of the population of Sagitta elegans in St. Margaret's Bay, Nova Scotia. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 28:971-985. Smith, P E. 1972. The increase in spawning biomass of northern anchovy, EngrauUs mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70: 849-874. SOKAL, R. R., AND F J. ROHLF. 1969. Biometry; the principles and practice of statistics in biological research. W H. Freeman, San Franc, 776 p. STEELE, J. H. 1974. The structure of marine ecosystems. Harvard Univ Press, Camb., Mass., 128 p. STEELE, J. H., AND B. W FROST. 1977. The structure of plankton communities. Philos. Trans. R. Soc. Lond., Ser B, 280:485-534. TINBERGEN, L. 1960. The natural control of insects in pinewoods. L Fac- tors influencing the intensity of predation by songbirds. Arch. Neerl. Zool. 13:265-343. WALSH, J. H., T E. WHITLEDGE, W. E. ESAIAS, R. L. SMITH, S. A. HUNTSMAN, H. SANTANDER, AND B. ROJAS DE MEN- DIOLA. 1980. The spawning habitat of the Peruvian anchovy, EngrauUs ringens. Deep-Sea Res. 27:1-27. WARE, D. M. 1972. Predation by rainbow trout iSalmo gairdneri): the influence of hunger, prey density, and prey size. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 29:1193-1201. WEIHS, D. 1973. Hydromechanics of fish schooling. Nature (Lond.) 241:290-291. Werner, E. E., and D. J. Hall. 1974 . Optimal foraging and the size selection of prey by the bluegill sunfish (Lepomis macrochirus). Ecology 55: 1042-1052. WIEBE, P H., S. BOYD, AND J. L. COX. 1975. Relationships between zooplankton displacement volume, wet weight, dry weight, and carbon. Fish. Bull., U.S. 73:777-786. 142 BURST SWIMMING PERFORMANCE OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY, ENGRAULIS MORDAX, LARVAE R W. Webb' and R. T. Corolla^ ABSTRACT Burst swimming performance was measured for northern anchovy larvae from 0.23 to 1.33 cm total length at a temperature of 17° C. Fast starts and burst swimming were initiated using a 3 V/cm direct current electric shock. Performance was measured from movie film recorded at 250 frames/s. Percent- ages of larvae responding to the stimulus increased from 99c 40 hours after eggs were spawned to a maximum of 95 ±4% after 125 hours. Distances traveled in a given time period increased linearly with length so that maximum speed (f/max) and mean speed ({/) similarly increased linearly with total length (L) according to [/max = 20.8 L + 1.95; U = 8.18 L + 4.89. The maximum distance traveled per burst (Smax' was used as a measure of endurance and increased with length according to S max = 3.79 L + 0.08. These swimming speeds and endurance relationships can explain a large portion of size- dependent selectivity of towed plankton nets. Larval swimming performance has been the focus of several studies (Blaxter 1969; Rosenthal and Hempel 1970; Hunter 1972). These have em- phasized sustained swimming speeds which are considered an important factor affecting the vol- ume of water searched by a larva, and hence food density requirements or the encounter frequency with food items. These low levels of activity appar- ently affect ration and at the same time are major contributors to routine energy expenditures (Vlymen 1974). In contrast, very high activity levels (fast starts and steady burst swimming) are rare. While they are unlikely to constitute a large metabolic load, high speeds are essential to the act of capturing food items (Hunter 1972) and in escaping from predators. This aspect of larval performance has not been evaluated. Therefore, the purpose of this work was to determine the effect of size on burst swimming performance (acceleration and sprints) for northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, larvae, and to evaluate the importance of such high levels of activity in prey capture and escape from preda- tors, including nets. 'Southwest Fisheries Center La Jolla Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, La Jolla, Calif.; present ad- dress: University of Michigan, School of Natural Resources, Ann Arbor, MI 48109. ^Southwest Fisheries Center La Jolla Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, La Jolla, Calif.; present ad- dress: Southampton College, Southampton, NY 11968. METHODS Northern anchovy larvae were reared from eggs as described by Hunter (1976). Eggs were spawned from five groups of parents taken from laboratory stocks on five separate occasions during the fall of 1979 (Table 1). Eggs were transferred to noncircu- lated filtered seawater in 400 1 black fiber glass tanks. Food for the larvae was the dinoflagellate Gymnodinium splendens for 2- to 5-d-old larvae, and thereafter the rotifer Brachionus plicatilis. Water temperature was maintained at 17° C. Lar- vae were held under constant illumination from standard room fluorescent lights. Experiments were performed on larvae of 11 dif- ferent total lengths, ranging from 0.23 to 1.33 cm. Observations were concentrated on larvae in the first few days after hatching (Table 1) when greatest larval development occurs (O'Connell in press). Groups of 5-50 larvae were observed using Schlieren optics. Details of this system are given in Holder and North (1963). Briefly, a vertical col- limated light beam was produced by a high inten- sity monochromatic point source at the focus of a concave mirror attached to the ceiling. A second mirror on the floor focused the light on a black spot on a glass plate. The focal length of the mirrors was 140 cm. A cylindrical tank, 17 cm in diameter and 5 cm deep, with parallel plate glass top and bottom, was introduced into the light beam. Discontinuities in Manuscript accepted July 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 143 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table l. — Summary of spawning batches and dates of anchovy larvae of various total lengths used in experiments on burst swimming performance. Data for total length are X±2 SE. Total length (cm) Batch of eggs' Date spawned (1979) Number of larvae sampled 0.23±0.03 E 2 Dec. 10 0.27 + 0.03 B 1 Nov. 10 UJ 0.29±0.02 B 1 Nov. 10 z 0.34±0.05 E 2 Dec. 10 o 0.46±0.03 C 8 Nov 10 0. V) 0.51 ±0.05 C 8 Nov 10 UJ 0.55±0.06 A 31 Oct. 10 (r. 0.65±0.06 A 31 Oct. 10 \- 0.72±0.04 C 8 Nov 5 z iij 1.14±0.08 C 8 Nov 5 o 1.33 ±0.27 A 31 Oct. 5 (T. UJ Batch D was infected by bacteria and therefore rejected. the refractive index (e.g., larvae in water) de- flected the light from the focus spot on the glass plate and were seen as bright spots against a dark background. The stimulus initiating a maximum fast start and swimming burst was a 10 ms, 3 V/cm square wave electric shock delivered via two grids in the water bath. Responses were recorded on Kodak^ Plus-X 16 mm movie film at a framing rate of 250 Hz. Experiments were performed at 17° C. Movie film was analyzed frame by frame. The progression of the head was traced from frame to frame and the mean distance travelled was calcu- lated as described by Hunter (1972) avoiding ar- tifacts due to lateral oscillations of the head as- sociated with propulsive movements. Speeds were calculated from the distances travelled and the elapsed time between measurements. Elapsed time was calculated from the product of number of frames between measurements divided by the framing rate. RESULTS The percentage of larvae responding to the nonspecific electric shock stimulus increased with age to a maximum of 88-100% (mean 95±4%; n = 7) after 125 h measured from the time of spawning (Figure 1). This corresponds to the age at which larvae raised under the same conditions begin in- termittent swimming, i.e., periods of low speed swimming alternating with periods of rest (Hunter 1972). The response to the stimulus was a fast start followed by a period of continuous high speed (sprint) swimming. Fast starts and sprint speeds Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. 144 100 80 60 40 20 % STARTLE RESPONSE E INTERMITTENT MMING % TIME FEEDING _L 50 100 150 200 250 300 AGE FROM TIME EGGS SPAWNED (h) 350 Figure l.— Percentage responses (n = 20-50) to a 3 V/cm d.c. electric shock by northern anchovy larvae as a function of age, calculated from the time the eggs were spawned. The curve was fitted by eye. The curves for the time spent in intermittent swimming and in feeding are from Hunter (1972). are defined as burst activities (see Webb 1975; Hoar and Randall 1978 for definitions). Therefore the response can be described as a burst of swim- ming activity. Kinematics of larval fast starts and sprint swimming have been described in detail for zebra danio, Brachydanio rerio, (Eaton et al. 1977) and for northern anchovy (Hunter 1972). No differ- ences were seen in the present experiments and therefore details are not repeated. The most direct, and hence most accurate, mea- sure of performance during a burst of swimming is the distance traveled in a knovm elapsed time for larvae accelerating from rest. The form of this relationship for the distance traveled by larvae of various total lengths is shovm in Figure 2 for three representative time periods. Data were described by best fit linear regression equations without data transformation (Table 2). Similar linear rela- tionships have been shown for larval cruising per- formance of plaice, Pleuronectes platessa, (Ryland 1963); herring, Clupea harengus, (Rosenthal 1968); walleye, Stizostedion vitreum uitreum, and yellow perch, Perca flauescens (Houde 1969). The total distance traveled per burst of swimming (S) also increased linearly with total length (L) ac- cording to S = 0.08 + 3.79±0.76L {r"" = 0.57; n = 85). WEBB and COROLLA: BURST SWIMMING OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY 61 -? 4 > < t- a 1 - . 240 ms 100 ms :i*' — '-*t-i-i 0.0 Q2 04 0.6 0.8 10 1.2 1.4 TOTAL LENGTH (cm) Figure 2. — Exemplary relationships between the distance traveled and total length of northern anchovy larvae after 20, 100, and 240 ms of burst swimming initiated by am electric shock stimulus. Vertical bars show ± 2 SE. Open squares show indi- vidual data points for individuals of groups of larvae when few swam for 240 ms. Table 2. — Summary of relationships between distance traveled (S in centimeters) in various elapsed times as functions of total length (TL in centimeters) of northern anchovy larvae stimu- lated to maximum performance by an electric shock. 95% con- fidence intervals about the slope are shown. Elapsed time from start of swimming (ms) Best-fit equation relating distance traveled with total lengtfi 20 40 60 80 100 140 180 220 260 S = 0.09 + 0.10±0 04TL S = 0.15 + 0.37±0.08TL S = 0.17 -I- 0.80 + 0.15 TL S = 0.21 -I- 1.17±0.22TL S = 0.28 + 1.46±0.27TL S = 0.54 + 1.75±0.37TL S = 0.82 + 2.06±0.44 TL S = 1.07 -I- 2.25 ±0.60 TL S = 1.26 + 2.52±0.53TL 0.31 95 0.65 95 0.67 87 0.68 83 0.71 81 0.69 65 0.75 48 0.73 36 0.66 23 These distances were traveled by continuous swimming because gliding is limited for or- ganisms the size of the larvae moving at low speeds (see Weihs 1980). Although the relationships between distances traveled and total length were best described by linear regression equations, the coefficients of de- termination indicated that the relationship usu- ally described only 65 to 75% of the variability. A major contributor to the variability was the apparent low performance of larvae with mean total lengths of 0.65 and 0.72 cm. For example, r^ for the relationship between distance traveled in 100 ms and total length increased from 0.71 to 0.83 on deletion of the observations for larvae in these two groups. However, the larvae appeared healthy and there were no apparent reasons to assume these data were anomalous. The reason for their lower performance is unclear. Another factor con- tributing to variability in the data may have been the use of larvae from several spawnings at dif- ferent times from different small sets of only 25-50 parents from laboratory stock. The very low r^ for the distance-total length relationships at small elapsed times can also be attributed in part to greater measurement error. Larvae traveled small distances, of the order of 1 mm in 20 ms for small fish, and even with magnification of 2 x these small distances were obviously subject to greater measurement error than larger distances. Swimming speeds were not constant. Speed in- creased with time to reach the maximum burst speed after 80-100 ms and then speed declined for the remainder of the burst (Figure 3). The time to reach maximum burst speed was not affected by total length, but the decrease in speed from the maximum was greater for larger larvae, and ex- tended over a longer period of time. The maximum burst speed increased linearly with total length (Figure 4), and since time to maximum speed was independent of length, mean acceleration rates will also be proportional to total length. Mean speeds during a burst of swimming (U) also in- creased linearly with length (Figure 5), but at a lower rate than maximum burst speeds [Umax) where U = 4.89 + 8.18±1.1L (r^ = 0.861; n = 85) Umax = 1.95 + 20.8±2.5L (r^ = 0.891; n = 85). The difference between maximum and mean speeds increased with total length because varia- tions in speed in a burst increased with total length (Figure 3). Maximum and mean speeds during a burst were consequently similar for the smallest larvae. Figure 5 also shows other relationships between swimming speed and length reported in the litera- ture for comparison. The mean speeds measured for anchovy larvae were greater than those mea- sured for other larvae, exceeding the ". . . theoreti- cal 10 body lengths/sec ..." (Blaxter 1969) maximum. Intermittent swimming speeds (Hunter 1972), the normal voluntary swimming pattern of larvae, and voluntary bursts were lower than the burst speeds measured here, presumably because of the absence of threatening stimuli. 145 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 1 50 100 150 200 250 300 TIME-ms 350 34 32 30- 28- 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 B \T -}- r -I 33 i ^tSip^^~lj4M 456 8h -r-r 6 / »p-|-j-j-LL{_t -0232 _L J_ 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 TIME-ms Figure 3 . — Relationships between swimming speed and time during a burst for. 11 groups of northern anchovy larvae ranging in mean total length from 0.23 to 1.33 cm. Panel A shows mean curves, separated into two groups for clarity. Panel B indicates the nature of the data from which the curves were constructed. Curves were fitted by eye. Vertical bars show ± 2 SE. DISCUSSION Northern anchovy larvae are important planktonic predators as well as being prey items for other organisms. Burst swimming speeds and burst swimming response ability will be impor- tant in this predator-prey role because the ability to rapidly strike prey and to escape strikes by predators will make major contributions to survi- val. Response ability was assayed following an elec- tric shock stimulus. While this is not a normal stimulus, observations on adult fish suggest re- sponses to electric shock and more typical stimuli are comparable (Eaton et al. 1977; Webb 1978, 1979). For the larval northern anchovy, response 146 patterns to electric shock correlated vdth expecta- tions based on the onset of intermittent swimming and feeding (Figure 1). Similar patterns of mat- uration of the nervous system, especially the eyes (O'Connell in press), and reduced vulnerability to predators (Lillelund and Lasker 1971) suggest the stimulus is a suitable assay for maturation of locomotor coordination systems. Following maturation of response capabilities, the effectiveness of a larva as a predator and in avoiding predation will depend to a large extent on locomotor performance (Lillelund and Lasker 1971). A model by Rowland (1974) showed speed and maneuver were major factors in catch and avoidance behavior that contribute to success in predator- prey encounters. Larvae may be pursued WEBB and COROLLA: BURST SWIMMING OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY 40 I 36 32 _J u> \ Umax =20.8 L+ 1.95 (r^ =0.891) •=Ur J ! I I I I I L J I I I I 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 12 1.4 1.6 TOTAL LENGTH (cm) Figure 4. — Maximum burst speeds ( U max • as a function of total length (L) for northern anchovy larvae. Solid circles are absolute speeds ( cm/s). Crosses show specific speeds in body lengths ( L/s) calculated as Umax/L. Vertical bars show ± 2 SE. by predators so that endurance must be added to these components of predator-prey behavior. Of these three factors the physical ability to turn seems least important. Fish can turn in extremely small radius circles (Webb 1976; Eaton et al. 1977; Kimmel et al. in press) so that the optimal escape strategy of turning inside a predator's turning radius, forcing the predator to stop and reorient (Rowland 1974), is probably impractical. For ar- tificial predators, nets, the scale of the net makes turning ability unimportant. Therefore, speed is expected to be the major performance component of larval behavior contributing to the outcome of encounters with their prey, while both speed and endurance will affect interactions with predators and nets. Hunter (1972) found that northern anchovy lar- vae accelerated over 8-16 ms to reach their prey. He found that a 0.8 cm larva would travel about 0.04 cm in that time, and a 1.3 cm larva about 0.09 cm. In the present experiments, the distance traveled was 0.03 and 0.09 cm in 12 ms for larvae of 0.8 and 1.3 cm TL, respectively. This shows that northern anchovy larvae use their maximum burst perfor- mance in attacking their prey. Northern anchovy larvae are also prey items for 0.4 0.6 0.8 10 L2 TOTAL LENGTH (cm) L4 L6 Figure 5. — Mean burst speeds (U) as a function of total length (L) for northern anchovy larvae. Solid circles are absolute speeds (cm/s) and crosses show specific speeds (U/L). Vertical bars show ± 2 SE. The 10 body length/s relationship is based on Blaxter (1969). The intermittent swimming speed relationship is taken from Hunter (1972). Stars show mean voluntary burst speeds, from Hunter (1972). a variety offish and invertebrates (Hunter 1977, in press) so that the larvae would require a variety of response patterns to attempt to escape from preda- tion. For example, lunging predators typically overshoot the prey location (Hoogland et al. 1956; Hunter 1972) when the rapid acceleration in a fast start would facilitate escape by quickly removing the potential prey from the predator's strike path. The rapid improvement in maximum burst speed with size (Figure 4) should reduce the vulnerability of larger northern anchovy to such predators. Chasing predators, for example, juvenile fish and larvae of more active species such as scombrids, are at the opposite extreme to lunging predators. Northern anchovy larvae should have reduced vulnerability to such predators as they grow be- cause of improved mean swimming speed during a burst (Figure 5). In addition, the distance traveled per burst increases with size, implying improved stamina with increasing total length which should further facilitate escape of larger larvae from chasing predators. The effect of size on the ability of northern an- chovy larvae to escape natural predators and the mechanisms involved in escape behavior have re- ceived little attention. Decreased vulnerability of larger larvae to predation by copepods and 147 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 euphausids has been documented (Lillelund and Lasker 1971; Theilacker and Lasker 1974), but since experiments were performed in the dark, the factors leading to reduced vulnerability are not known. An alternative approach to assessing the importance of changing swimming performance with larval size is to consider an artificial "pred- ator," a net, which simulates some actions of cer- tain natural predators, such as filter feeders. The problem of sampling bias by nets has provided a variety of observations and models suitable to evaluate size-performance effects on vulnerabil- ity. Most studies of net avoidance start with, or par- allel, Barkley's (1964) model on selectivity of towed nets. This model identified three factors de- termining escape (and catch) probabilities: reac- tion distance, speed, and orientation of the escape path. Endurance must be added. In the absence of adequate data on the relevant parameters for fish larvae, results of sensitivity analyses have been fitted to catch data (Barkley 1964, 1972). The pres- ent data can be used to compare scaling relation- ships between escape probability and burst swimming performance to evaluate the impor- tance of the latter in determining vulnerability of northern anchovy larvae to net "predators." Such a scaling approach allows some simplification be- cause it is reasonable to assume that probability distributions for orientation of escape paths do not scale with size. Escape probabilities, as a function of length, can be estimated from a comparison between day and night catches using towed nets. The ratio of night/day catches as a function of larval northern anchovy length is well known to be linear (Ahl- strom 1954; Zweifel and Smith in press) which means that the relationship between escape prob- ability and size is curved, rapidly approaching an asymptote (Figure 6). The data shown in Figure 6 were obtained with aim diameter ring net towed obliquely at about 125 cm/s (Zweifel and Smith in press). Ninety percent avoidance is reached by 1.0 cm larvae, with rather small improvements in escape probability at greater lengths. The decline in escape probability cannot be attributed to the capture of starving or sick larvae (Isaacs 1965) because O'Connell (1980) found no emaciated larvae >1 cm TL in net-caught samples. In order to compare performance data with the catch probabilities, mean speeds and distances traveled in a burst were normalized about the per- formance measured for 1 cm larvae (Figure 6). The 06 0,8 10 12 TOTAL LENGTH (cm) 1,6 1.8 FIGURE 6. — Escape probabilities, estimated from day-night plankton net hauls, and those possible on the basis of burst swimming speed, burst endurance, and their product as a func- tion of total length of northern anchovy larvae. Performance data are normalized with respect to a larval length of 1 cm, where the escape probability reaches 90%. Data for day-night catches were taken from Zweifel and Smith (in press). scaling relationship for mean speeds in a burst, assuming bursts are repeated until a larva es- capes, obviously do not parallel escape prob- abilities (Figure 6). Endurance in a burst shows a greater length effect, which is further accentuated by the interaction (product) of speed and endur- ance. This latter curve has the steepest slope, most closely paralleling escape probability, such that it is apparent that speed and endurance are major determinants of avoidance ability. However, the shape of the curves suggests avoid- ance is underestimated for larger larvae between about 0.4-1.0 cm long. Length dependent matura- tion of sensory systems and motor control (O'Con- nell 1980) may contribute to increased escape probability of larger larvae. A behavioral factor may also contribute. Dill (1974) has shown that experienced juvenile zebra danio respond earlier to a predator than do inexperienced fish. Since the predation rate is high for northern anchovy lar- vae, then larger larvae are likely to be much more experienced with diverse attacks than are smaller larvae. Response thresholds decreased linearly with contacts up to 10 encounters in Dill's experi- ments, but this effect would undoubtedly decline with larger numbers of encounters, when a mini- mum threshold would presumably be obtained. Therefore, an age (experience) dependent decrease in reaction distance may contribute to net avoid- ance and the declining rate of catch probability at larger sizes. 148 WTBE and COROLLA: BURST SWIMMING OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY Finally, it should be noted that improvements in plankton nets and catch techniques would shift the position of the curves in Figure 6. This would require different normalization points in evaluat- ing effects of performance on escape probability, taking into account the new point at which larvae out-swim the net. However, such changes would not alter the nature of the arguments nor the con- clusions concerning the importance of swimming performance in determining escape probability. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This work was completed while P W. Webb was a NRC/NOAA Research Associate on leave from the University of Michigan. The Schlieren system was built by J. H. Taylor with partial support from a grant from the National Science Foundation (Grant No. DES75-04863) to R. Lasker and J. H. Taylor. We thank J. R. Hunter, R. Lasker, R E. Smith, D. Weihs, and R. C. Eaton for their helpful comments on the manuscript, and J. H. Taylor for his assistance and patience as we learned to use the Schlieren apparatus. LITERATURE CITED AHLSTROM, E. H. 1954. Distribution and abundance of egg and larval popu- lations of the Pacific sardine. Fish. Bull., U.S. 56:83-140. BARKLEY, R. A. 1964. The theoretical effectiveness of towed-net samplers as related to sample size and to swimming speed of or- ganisms. J. Cons. 29:146-157. 1972. Selectivity of towed-net samplers. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:799-820. BLAXTER, J. H. S. 1969. Development: eggs and larvae. In W. S. Hoar £ind D. J. Randall (editors), Fish physiology. Vol. 3, p. 177-252. Acad. Press, N.Y. DILL, L. M. 1974. The escape response of the zebra danio (Brachydanio rerio). II. The effect of experience. Anim. Behav. 22:723-730. EATON, R.C.R.D. FARLEY, C.B.KIMMEL, AND E.SCHABTACH. 1977. Functional development in the Mauthner cell system of embryos and larvae of the zebra fish. J. Neurobiol. 8:151-172. HOAR, W. S., AND D. J. Randall (editors). 1978. Fish physiology Vol. 7, 576 p. Acad. Press, N.Y. Holder, D. W, and R. J. North. 1963. Schlieren methods. HMO Stationary Off., Notes Appl. Sci. 48-120-31, 106 p. HooGLAND, R., D. Morris, and N. Tinbergen. 1956. The spines of sticklebacks [Gasterosteus and Pygos- teus) as a means of defense against predators (Perca and Esox). Behaviour 10:205-236. HOUDE, E. D. 1969. Sustained swimming ability of larvae of walleye iStizostedion vitreum vitreum) and yellow perch (Perca flauescens). J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 26:1647-1659. HOWLAND, H. C. 1974. Optimal strategies for predator avoidance: the rela- tive importance of speed and manoeuvrability. J. Theor Biol. 47:333-350. HUNTER, J. R. 1972. Swimming and feeding behavior of larval anchovy, Engraulis mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:821-838. 1976. Culture and growth of northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, larvae. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:81-88. 1977. Behavior and survival of northern anchovy En- graulis mordax larvae. Calif. Coop. Oceanic Fish. In- vest. Rep. 19:138-146. In press. The feeding behavior and ecology of marine fish larvae. In J. E. Bardach (editor). The physiological and behavioral manipulation of food fish as production and management tools. Int. Cent. Living Aquat. Res. Man- age., Manila. ISAACS, J. D. 1965. Larval sardine and anchovy interrelationships. Calif. Coop. Oceanic Fish. Invest. Rep. 10:102-140. KIMMEL, C, R. C. EATON, AND S. L. POWELL. In press. Does the Mauthner cell mediate unique behav- ior? J. Comp. Physiol. A. LILLELUND, K., AND R. LASKER. 1971. Laboratory studies of predation by marine copepods on fish larvae. Fish. Bull., U.S. 69:655-667. O'CONNELL, C. P 1980. Percentage of starving northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, larvae in the sea as estimated by histological methods. Fish. Bull., U.S. 78:475-489. In press. Development of organ systems in the northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, and other teleosts. Am. Zool. Rosenthal, H. 1968. Schwimmverhalten und Schwimmgeschwindigkeit bei den larven des herings Clupea harengus. [In Ger., Engl, abstr.] Helgol. wiss. Meeresunters. 18:453-486. ROSENTHAL, H., AND G. HEMPEL. 1970. Experimental studies in feeding and food require- ments of herring larvae iClupea harengus L.). In J. H. Steele (editor), Marine food chains, p. 344-364. Univ. Calif. Press, Berkeley. RYLAND, J. S. 1963. The swimming speeds of plaice larvae. J. Exp. Biol. 40:285-299. THEILACKER, G. H., and R. LASKER. 1974. Laboratory studies of predation by euphausid shrimps on fish larvae. In J. H. S. Blaxter (editor), The early life history offish, p. 287-299. Springer- Verlag, N.Y VLYMEN, W. J. 1974. Swimming energetics of the larval anchovy, En- graulis mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 72:885-899. WEBB,RW. 1975. Hydrodynamics and energetics of fish propul- sion. Bull. Fish. Res. Board Can. 190, 159 p. 1976. The effect of size on the fast-start performemce of rainbow trout Sal mo gairdneri, and a consideration of piscivorous predator-prey interactions. J. Exp. Biol. 65:157-177. 1978. Temperature effects on acceleration of rainbow trout, Salmo gairdneri. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 35:1417-1422. 149 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 1979, Does schooling reduce fast-start response latencies ZWEIFEL, J, R., AND P E. SMITH. in teleosts? Comp. Biochem. Physiol. 65A:231-234. In press. Estimates of abundance and mortality of larval WEIHS, D. anchovies (1951-1975): Applications of a new method. In 1980. Energetic significance of changes in swimming R. Lasker and K. Sherman (editors), The early life history modes during growth of larval anchovy, Engraulis mor- offish. A symposium held in Woods Hole, 2-5 April 1979. dax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 77:597-604. Rapp. P-V Reun. Cons. Int. Explor. Mer 177. 150 AGE AND GROWTH OF SKIPJACK TUNA, KATSUWONUS PELAMIS, AND YELLOWFIN TUNA, THUNNUS ALBACARES, AS INDICATED BY DAILY GROWTH INCREMENTS OF SAGITTAE James H. Uchiyama* and Paul Struhsaker^ ABSTRACT Counts of the daily growth increments on otoliths provided the means for establishing growth curves for central Pacific skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis , up to 3 years old and for central Pacific yellowfin tuna, Thunnus albacares. up to 2 years old. The data indicated three stanzas of linear growth for 51 skipjack tuna ranging in size from 3 to 80 cm fork length. Estimated daily growth rates were 1.6 mm/day for fish up to a length of about 27.0 cm; 0.8 mm/day for fish between 27.0 and 71.4 cm; and 0.3 mm/day for fish between 71.4 and 80.3 cm. Growth data for 20 eastern Pacific skipjack tuna ranging in size from 38 to 65 cm fork length suggested that skipjack tuna in the eastern Pacific grew at a slower rate than those from the central Pacific. Age determinations of 14 central Pacific yellowfin tuna suggested possibly two stanzas of linear growth. Estimated growth rates are 1.4 mm/day for fish up to a length of 64.2 cm and 0.9 mm/day for fish between 64.2 and 93.0 cm. Growth curves from this study were compared with published growth curves based on other methods. The validity of daily growth increments was tentatively determined by observations on skipjack and yellowfin tunas held in captivity. Agreement of our growth curves with those of previous studies on the same stock of tunas using other growth estimating techniques also suggests that our aging technique is acceptable. However, the day-to-growth increment relation and the effect of various variables on the formation of growth increments of tunas need to be investigated further. The many studies on age and growth of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, have primarily utilized three basic methods. Brock (1954), Schaefer (1961), Kawasaki (1965), Joseph and Calkins (1969), Yoshida (1971), Marcille and Stequert (1976a), and Diaz^ determined growth rate and estimated the age of skipjack tuna by examining modal progression in length-frequency distributions. Yamashita and Waldron (1959), Shaefer et al. (1961), Clemens and Roedel (1964), Rothschild (1967), and Joseph and Calkins (1969) used data from tagged skipjack tuna to determine growth rates. Wild and Foreman (1980) estimated the growth rate of eastern Pacific skipjack tuna from the recapture fork length, the known period of growth, and the linear change in an otolith dimension following a tetracycline injection which was used to estimate length at marking. Marks on 'Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Honolulu, HI 96812. ^Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Honolulu, Hawaii; present address: Easy Rider Corporation, 1050 Koloa Street, Honolulu, HI 96816. ^Diaz, E. L. 1966. Growth of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, in the eastern Pacific Ocean. Unpubl. rep., 18 p. Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm., La Jolla, Calif. hard parts such as vertebrae and dorsal spines were interpreted to determine age and growth of skipjack tuna by Aikawa and Kato (1938), Yokota et al. (1961), Shabotiniets (1968), Batts (1972), and Chi and Yang (1973). Numerous reviews have been written on the subject and the lack of agreement on the aging and growth rate of skipjack tuna has frequently been noted. Likewise, many studies have been conducted on age and growth of yellowfin tuna, Thunnus alba- cares. Moore (1951), Yabuta and Yukinawa (1957), Hennemuth (1961), Davidoff (1963), Diaz (1963), Le Guen et al. (1969), Yang et al. (1969), Le Guen and Sakagawa (1973), and Marcille and Stequert (1976b) have estimated age and growth rate by the analysis of modal progression in either length or weight frequencies. Blunt and Messersmith (1960), Schafer et al. (1961), and Bayliff^ used re- sults of their tagging experiments to determine the growth rate of yellowfin tuna in the eastern Pacific. Wild and Foreman (1980) estimated the growth rate of eastern Pacific yellowfin tuna by " Bayliff, W. H. 1973. Observations on the growth of yellow- fin tuna in the eastern Pacific Ocean derived from tagging exper- iments. Unpubl. rep., 26 p. Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm., La Jolla, Calif Manuscript accepted August 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 151 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 their tetracycline-otolith method. Aikawa and Kato (1938), Nose et al. (1957), Yabuta et al. (1960), Tan et al. (1965), and Shabotiniets (1968) inter- preted marks on scales, dorsal spines, and the cen- trum of vertebrae to estimate age and growth. These studies were performed on commercial- sized fish ( > 2 kg) ; growth during early life (< 2 kg) has yet to be examined. Pannella's reports (1971, 1974) provided cir- cumstantial evidence that the smallest discern- ible growth increments in the sagittae (otoliths) of fish are deposited daily. More recent studies pro- vide direct evidence that these growi;h increments are diel phenomena in sagittae of temperate (Brothers et al. 1976; Taubert and Coble 1977; Barkman 1978) and tropical (Struhsaker and Uchiyama 1976; Wild and Foreman 1980) species of teleosts. In the study of the short-lived en- graulid Stolephorus purpureas, the information gained from the reading of sagittae was utilized in the construction of a growth curve for the first 190 d after yolk-sac absorption (full life cycle) (Struhsaker and Uchiyama 1976). In the present paper, growth curves are presented for central Pacific skipjack tuna to an age of about 3 yr, based on a sample of 51 fish, and for yellowfin tuna to about 2 yr, based on 14 fish. Counts on sagittae from 20 skipjack tuna from the eastern Pacific and 5 skipjack tuna from Papua New Guinea are also given. The results are discussed in relation to ear- lier age and growth studies of these species. METHODS Otolith Preparation and Counting The central Pacific skipjack and yellowfin tunas were caught in the vicinity of the Line Islands and Hawaii. All specimens >20 cm FL (fork length) are samples taken from commercial fisheries or caught by trolling. Specimens <20 cm FL are from stomach contents of troll-caught skipjack tuna and regurgitations of a seabird, Sula sp., after it landed on the deck of a research vessel. Juvenile skipjack tuna from stomach contents were identified by vertebral counts and skeletal characters given by Godsil and Byers (1944) and Gibbs and Collette (1967). In one case, only the anterior portion of a juvenile skipjack tuna was collected; standard length (SL) was estimated from the length of the precaudal vertebrae using the equation given by Yoshida (1971). A small (7.0 cm FL) yellowfin tuna specimen was tentatively identified on the basis of skeletal characters given by Matsumoto et al. (1972) and descriptions of Thunnus livers by Godsil and Byers (1944) and Gibbs and Collette (1967). The caudal rays were missing from most tuna specimens collected from stomachs. Fork lengths were estimated by increasing standard lengths by 3.3% (Matsumoto^). Heads from which the sagittae were not im- mediately removed after collection were frozen or preserved in 75% isopropanol. In tunas <100 cm FL, we obtained the sagittae by splitting or cutting the skull along the sagittal plane and teasing them from the semicircular canals. With experience, the cut could be made without damaging either of the sagittae. We cleaned the sagittae by teasing or brushing off the sacculus and nerve endings. Sagittae that were not mounted immediately were stored in distilled water or 40% isopropanol, but were then mounted within a year. After removal and cleaning, sagittae from tunas >45 cm FL were etched in a 1% solution of HCl for 3-5 min. The otoliths were then rinsed with sev- eral changes of water, mounted in Euparal,^ and, in most cases, permitted to clear for 4 wk or more. Short lengths of monofilament line prevented con- tact of the otolith with the glass cover slip. Increment counts were made from the core,^ the center of the nucleus, to the tips of the rostrum, antirostrum, and postrostrum (terminology of Messieh 1972) for most sagittae. On sagittae from fish >60 cm FL, counts were made only to the rostrum and postrostrum. When the edge of the rostrum and postrostrum was fringed with irregu- lar projections, counts were made on the projec- tions leading to the point. Specimens were examined at magnifications of 200-800 x. A mi- croscope with a zoom feature was found to be use- ful, as the width of daily increments varied. Counting increments in whole mounted otoliths becomes progressively more difficult with increas- ing specimen size. Experience is best obtained by beginning with otoliths from young fish and pro- gressing through older fish. The initial counts en- ^W. M. Matsumoto, Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Hon- olulu, HI 96812, pers. commun. October 1974. ''Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. ''Terminology agreed upon at the Otolith Workshop, Scripps Institution of Oceanography and Southwest Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, La Jolla, Calif , 12-16 July 1976. 152 UCHIYAMA and STRUHSAKER: AGE AND GROWTH OF SKIPJACK AND YELLOWFIN TUNAS able the investigator to determine the best path to follow from the core to the edge of the otolith. Eventually, the counts either converge on a value or repeated identical counts are obtained. The number of counts required to determine age is dependent on the readability of the otolith. An average of about 20 counts was made for fish >1 yr old. We found that yellowfin tuna sagittae were easier to read than those of skipjack tuna. In yel- lowfin tuna, the increments are wider and can be examined at a lower magnification (200 x), which provides a broader view and greater depth of field. The increment counts on 15 skipjack tuna and 3 yellowfin tuna sagittae were verified by a second reader whose counts were within 9% (5.4% aver- age deviation) of the original counts except for one which was 17% off the original count. Statistical Analysis The parameters of linear growth stanzas were determined by the use of LINFIT, a computer pro- gram (Kamer^) which used the ordinary least squares procedure to fit two or three straight lines to bivariate data. Join points, also known as break points, are the places where one regime ends and another begins; these are assumed to exist. The range of the explanatory variable in which the join points are expected to occur must be designated. Given the range for these join points, the program performs the ordinary least squares procedure on each possible combination of regimes. The result- ing output indicates the partitioning scheme, the intercept and slope of each fitted line representing a regime, the residual sum of squares for each regime, the combined residual sum of squares for the model, and the values of the dependent and explanatory variables at the join points. The linear growth stanzas used in this paper were selected under the following conditions: 1) minimized combined residual sum of squaires for the model and 2) each join point associated with a partitioning scheme has a value for the explana- tory variable which lies between the last data value in the regime to the left and the first data value in the regime to its right. On the assumption that the maximum number of increments approximates the age of the fish in *Kamer, G. A computer program for fitting straight lines to regimented data. Manuscr. in prep. Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Honolulu, Hawaii. days, we calculated a growth curve for central Pacific skipjack tuna, eastern Pacific skipjack tuna, and central Pacific yellowfin tuna for com- parison with other studies. The von Bertalanffy growth parameters were estimated on an annual basis using the computer program BGC3 (Abram- son 1971). ESTABLISHING THE GROWTH INCREMENT-DAY RELATION The only direct evidence we have that a number of growth increments equal the same number of days came from the serendipitous opportunity to examine skipjack and yellowfin tunas under known captive conditions. These fishes were not held under strict experimental conditions and their primary use was not for aging studies; how- ever, a detailed record on the amount of food con- sumed by each fish during the experiment was maintained. The experiment was similar to that used for nehu, S. purpureus (Struhsaker and Uchiyama 1976), and was carried out at the Kewalo Research Facility of the Honolulu Laboratory. The stress of being hooked, transported, and confined in the community tanks at the Kewalo Research Facility, as well as the taking of little or no food during the first week of captivity, probably all contributed to the formation of a check mark on the otolith (Figure la, b). When the tuna were sufficiently recovered to feed normally, they re- ceived a daily ration which apparently was adequate to maintain life but inadequate for nor- mal increment formation. Perhaps very thin in- crements were formed during this period, which might have added prominence to the check mark. When these tunas were fed to satiation through- out the day, the widths of the increments increased and became countable. Under low magnification (200 x), growth incre- ments formed on the edge of a sagitta during the experiment were not as well defined as those of a tuna captured in the wild. The increments ap- peared thinner than normal when examined under high magnification (400 x). For this reason, a sagitta was first examined under low power (200 X) to locate the check mark and then examined under high power (400 x) to enumerate the growth increments formed during the experi- mental feeding period. Although growth incre- ments occurred all along the periphery of the sagitta, the full array of increments corresponding 153 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 -**f*JE^ Figure l.— Check mark, indicated by arrow, separates the environmentally marked increments from previous growth increments at a) tip of skipjack tuna sagitta rostrum; b) postrostrum of same skipjack tuna sagitta. i ly- t \ to the feeding period formed primarily on the tips of the rostrum and postrostrum (Figure la, b). The highest count attainable corresponded with the number of days the tuna were fed to satiation, thus confirming the growth increment-day rela- tion (Table 1). The number of increments formed after the check mark usually exceeded the number of feeding days because the tunas continued to live beyond the feeding period. During this latter period, the tunas either received a daily ration or starved. Great care was taken to avoid double counting of an increment where the sagitta was thin. The observations on these specimens were not long term and conditions were not fully con- trolled. Therefore, these data are considered ten- tative and in need of replication by rigorous ex- perimental methods. Wild and Foreman (1980) were able to show a 1:1 (day-to-growth increment) relationship for yel- lowfin tuna, 40-110 cm FL. However, their day-to- growth increment relation for skipjack tuna was significantly <1:1. Although an experiment where the fish lived in its natural environment was highly desirable, there was no control over vari- ables and a record of variables which the fish might have encountered was unavailable. Variables such as the amount of food a fish con- sumes (Struhsaker and Uchiyama 1976; Methot 154 UCHIYAMA and STRUHSAKER: AGE AND GROWTH OF SKIPJACK AND YELLOWFIN TUNAS Table l. — Experimental data on marked daily growth increments in skipjack and yellowfin tunas. Experimental Fork length Date of death Length of feed- No. of marked animals (cm) Feeding period per sampling ing period (d) increments Skipjack tuna 3 48.3 23 Aug.-22 Sept. 6 Oct. 30 33 Skipjack tune 4 45.3 9-14 Oct. 27 Oct. 5 7 Skipjack tuna 5 49.3 15-22 Oct. 27 Oct. 7 8 Skipjack tuna 6 45.0 19-30 Oct. 4 Nov. 11 14 Yellowfin tuna 1 52.2 2-26 Aug. 4 Sept. 24 24 Yellowfin tuna 2 52.0 20Aug.-19Sept. 29 Sept. 30 31 and Kramer 1979), temperature (Taubert and Coble 1977; Methot and Kramer 1979), and age of fish (Pannella 1971; Brothers et al. 1976) have been demonstrated to affect the formation of daily growth rings on the sagitta. In our experiments with nehu, skipjack tuna, and yellowfin tuna, the amount of daily ration appeared to have an influ- ence on otolith growth increments. Fishes fed once daily did not have clear otoliths with countable growth increments. Only when the fishes were fed to satiation throughout the day were countable growth increments formed. In the experiment on the effect of winter conditions on the formation of growth increments by Taubert and Coble (1977), the green sunfish, Lepomis cyanellus, lowered their activity level and fed less when the tempera- ture fell below 10° C. Wild and Foreman (1980) also suggested that the difference in their results be- tween yellowfin and skipjack tunas may have been due to feeding, citing the differences in the occur- rence of full stomachs in the yellowfin and skipjack tunas from the Revillagigedo Islands area examined by Alverson (1963). Thus, it is evident that there is need for further research on the vari- ables affecting day-to-growth increment relation of tuna otoliths. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Skipjack Tuna A plot of fork length versus age for 51 central Pacific tuna indicated three linear stanzas of growth (Figure 2). A least squares procedure was used to compute the lines of best fit for each stanza (Figure 2, Table 2). Von Bertalanffy growth pa- rameters were also calculated (Figure 2). As there are no means available to statistically compare the von Bertalanffy growth curve, which has three parameters, with the three linear growth stanzas, which have a total of six parameters, the com- parison was performed by examining the distri- bution of residuals (Figure 3). The residuals for the linear growth stanzas were distributed ran- TABLE 2. — Length-age regression parameters for the three linear growth stanzas of skipjack tuna: N = number of data and RSS = residual sum of squares. N Intercept Slope RSS Intersections Stanzas Years Fork length (cm) 1 11 2 35 3 5 Total RSS 0.0552 13.6402 51.6918 58.4167 28.9853 9.8838 3.0910 17.6038 0.2761 20.9709 0.4616 1.9921 27.0192 71.3812 domly about the x-axis, signifying a good fit (run's test: Z = 0.39678, P ^ 0.6892). On the other hand, the residuals for the von Bertalanffy curve oscillated about zero and were largest at break- points between linear stanzas and at the midpoint of the stanzas, thus suggesting a deviation from randomness (run's test: Z = -3.32287, P<0.001). Therefore, the linear stanzas appeared to be the preferable growth curve. It was noted earlier that the series of three linear growth lines appeared to provide a better fit to our data than the von Bertalanffy growth curve. However, since many of the earlier growth studies use the von Bertalanffy growth curve, it is of interest to compare the von Bertalanffy growth curve of this study with those of other growth studies on the central Pacific skipjack tuna stock (Figure 4). Growth rate estimates by Rothschild (1967) using corrected data of 35 long-term tag returns, by Joseph and Calkins (1969) using Rothschild's uncorrected data, and by Skillman^ using 356 tag returns obtained during a 2-yr period, were all less than the rate obtained in this study. Brock (1954) analyzed the modal progres- sion in length-frequency distributions obtained over a 5-yr period, and derived a growth curve similar to ours. Both curves show similar growth ^Skillman, R.A. Estimates of von Bertalanffy growth parameters for skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, from capture-recapture experiments in the Hawaiian Islands. Man- user, in prep. Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Labora- tory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Honolulu, Hawaii. 155 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 n 1 r — 50 E u I a: o VON BERTALANFFY CURVE (BGC 3, N' 51, FL 3.7 -80.3cm) 102.0cm 0,55 -0.02 yr LINEAR GROWTH STAGES 12 15 18 21 AGE ( MONTHS ) 24 27 30 33 36 Figure 2. — Growth curve of skipjack tuna in the central Pacific as determined by otolith examination. Linear growth stanzas determined by LINFIT (see text). For parameters of growth stanzas, see Table 2. rates up to 65 cm FL; beyond 65 cm FL, Brock's curve departs from ours and approaches an asymptote more rapidly. The difference in the growth rates above 65 cm may be due to two factors which would affect the modes of large (>6.8 kg) skipjack tuna: differential fishing or total mortal- ity and temperature requirements of skipjack tuna. Barkley et al. (1978) hypothesized that large ( >6.8 kg) skipjack tuna required cooler water than small skipjack tuna and therefore could tolerate the warmer surface water for relatively short periods. If so, the catchability of large skipjack tuna would be altered in the surface fishery and length-frequency modes of large skipjack tuna would be underestimated. Our otolith age deter- minations are not affected by these factors. Otolith readings were also used to examine the age-length relationship of eastern Pacific skipjack tuna (Figure 5). Of the 20 specimens examined, 11 were caught off Baja California, Mexico. The other nine were caught in the eastern Pacific west of the Inter-American Tropical Tuna Commission's Yel- low^n Regulatory Area. Most of these nine speci- mens had age-length relationships similar to those offish caught off Baja California, but several had relationships similar to specimens taken in the central Pacific. Indications are that skipjack tuna in the eastern Pacific Ocean off Baja Califor- nia grew at a slower rate than those in the central Pacific. Our eastern Pacific skipjack tuna growth curve was compared with those of earlier studies from the eastern Pacific (Figure 5). A growth curve based on the progression of modes in length fre- quencies (Joseph and Calkins 1969) is similar to our curve; both show good agreement between 40 156 UCfflYAMA and STRUHSAKER: AGE AND GROWTH OF SKIPJACK AND YELLOWFIN TUNAS -2 -3 - • • • VON BERTALANFFY CURVE • • • • - • • • • • •• • • V • • • • • • •• • • • « • • - -I • • « • LINEAR STANZAS • ; • • • • • ..••.* 1 • . - • • • • • • YEARS Figure 3. — Plot of residuals from von Bertalanffy growth curve and linear growth stanzas of central Pacific skipjack tuna shown in Figure 2. and 65 cm FL. Growth curves determined from tagging data (Schaefer 1961; Joseph and Calkins 1969) showed slower growth. The sagittae of five skipjack tuna from Papua New Guinea waters were examined (Figure 6). These fish grew more slowly than those from the central Pacific area. Central Pacific Yellowfin Tuna Two distinct stanzas of growth are evident for the sample of 14 central Pacific yellowfin tuna (Figure 7). Linear growth is apparent for about the first 14 mo of life, after which time the data suggest either the beginning of another linear growth phase or an asymptotic growth process. A seg- mented model with two linear phases was fitted to the data (Table 3). A von Bertalanffy growth equa- tion was also fitted to the data and the following growth parameters were obtained: L = 170.3 cm; K = 0.3864, and ^o = 0.0366 yn Plots of residuals on age for both the segmental model and the von Bertalanffy growth curve were 90 80 70 X I- o 60 50 40 n r 12 THIS STUDY (51 POINTS) SKILLMAN { MALES ONLY ) ROTHSCHILD ( UNCORRECTED) _ SKILLMAN ( MALES 8 FEMALES ). BROCK ROTHSCHILD ( CORRECTED ) Loo K 102. Ocm 0.55 101. 1 cm 0.39 90.6cm 0.59 92.4cm _0.47 85.5cm 0.92 82.3cm 0.77 '0 -0.02yr 18 24 MONTHS 30 36 Figure 4. — a comparison of von Bertalanffy growth curves determined for central Pacific skipjack tuna (for full references, see text). 157 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 90 80 70 o z q: o 60 50 40 EASTERN PACIFIC ( OTOLITH ) _ CENTRAL PACIFIC (OTOLITH) Loo 1 42 .5 cm 102.0 cm JOSEPH a CALKINS (LENGTH FREQUENCY) 107.5cm JOSEPH a CALKINS (TAGGING , CORRECTED ) 88.1 cm .JOSEPH a CALKINS ( TAGGING . UNCORRECTED ) 72.9 cm K 0.29 0.55 0.41 0.43 0.82 -O.I6yr -0.02 yr 12 18 24 MONTHS 30 36 Figure 5. — The von Bertalanffy growth curve of skipjack tuna in the eastern Pacific as determined by otolith examina- tion and its comparison with von Bertalanffy growth curves of previous studies from that area and the central Pacific (for full reference, see text). Table 3. — Length-age regression parameters for the two linear growth stanzas of central Pacific yellowfin tuna: N = number of data and RSS = residual sum of squares. N Intercept Slope RSS Intersections Stanzas Years Fork length (cm) 1 10 2 4 Total RSS 0.8831 25.5653 52.5837 32.0954 5.7430 0.4620 6.2050 1 ,2047 64.2304 compared (Figure 8). As with skipjack tuna, the von Bertalanffy model gives a poorer fit than the linear segmental model. Although the probability for the distribution of residuals to be randomly distributed along the von Bertalanffy curve was significant at P = 0.05 (run's test, table of critical values: r = 7, ni= 7, n2 = 7), clustering of pluses and minuses occurred. The run's test for the linear segmental model also showed randomness (r = 9, «i = 6,n2 = 8; table of critical values, P < 0.05), and was an improvement over the von Bertalanffy curve with the increase in the number of runs from 7 to 9. The results of our study on yellowfin tuna within the size range examined agree with most earlier studies for this species from the eastern and cen- tral Pacific Ocean. The results of aging by scales (Yabuta et al. 1960) and modal progression in length-frequency distributions (Hennemuth 1961) are given for comparison (Figure 6). It has been suggested that growth of yellowfin tuna in the eastern Pacific between the lengths of 50 and 100 cm is linear and that growth rates are 0.6-1.0 mm/d (Inter- American Tropical Tuna Commis- sion 1972, 1974). CONCLUSIONS Daily growth information provides much greater insight into the growth patterns of teleost 158 UCHIYAMA and STRUHSAKER: AGE AND GROWTH OF SKIPJACK AND YELLOWFIN TUNAS 90 E u o z o: o Figure 6. — Age determinations (points) of skipjack tuna from Papua New Guinea and comparison with the von Bertalanffy growth curve of central Pacific skipjack tuna derived in this paper. fishes than can be gleaned using traditional an- nual techniques. Data presented here suggest three stanzas of linear growth for central Pacific skipjack tuna ranging in size from 3 to 80 cm FL, and that central Pacific yellowfin tuna from 7 to 93 cm FL have at least one stanza of linear growth. Our assumption that the growth increments on the sagittae of skipjack and yellowfin tunas are deposited daily was supported by the deposition of experimentally induced increments on the sagit- tae of captive fishes and the relatively good agree- ment of our skipjack tuna and yellowfin tuna growth curves with those of previous studies utilizing other growth estimating techniques such as progression of modes in length-frequency dis- tributions and interpretation of other hard parts. Growth studies on tunas based on tagging experi- ments have usually slower growth rates. Otolith readings on specimens from three dif- ferent areas suggest that there are geographical variations. Estimation of growth rates from daily growth increments on sagittae is subject to at least two possible sources of error. One is that increments may not be deposited due to variables such as an inadequate ration, diet, temperature, age of fish, or during some physiologically stressful activity, such as reproduction. This is apparently the case for three species of boreal gadoids investigated by Pannella (1971). Another source is differential error during increment counting. If fewer rings are counted than actually exist, this, in addition to nondeposition of daily increments, would result in overestimation of growth rate. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We thank Edward B. Brothers, Gary T. Sakagawa, Robert A. Skillman, Richard N. Uchida, and Jerry A. Wetherall for reviewing this manuscript and for their suggestions for improv- ing it. We also wish to thank Wilvan G. Van Cam- 159 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 15 18 21 AGE (MONTHS) Figure 7. — Growth curve of yellowfin tuna in the central Pacific as determined by otolith examination and compared with growth curves of previous studies from that area and the eastern Pacific. Linear growth stanzas determined by LE^FIT (see text). For parameters of growth stanzas, see Table 3. pen and Howard O. Yoshida for their editorial help. We are especially indebted to Gary L. Kamer and Jeffrey J. Polovina for assisting with the statistical problems encountered. Marian Y. Y Yong assisted with the data processing and Glen H. Sugiyama verified some of the age determina- tions. We are grateful to Sherry Steffel for sharing her data on feeding records and otoliths of skipjack and yellowfin tunas from her experiment. LITERATURE CITED ABRAMSON, N. J. (compiler). 1971. Computer programs for fish stock assessment. FAO Fish. Tech. Pap. 101 [149 p.]. AIKAWA, H., AND M. KATO. 1938. Age determinations of fish. I. [In Jpn., Engl, synop.] Bull. Jpn. Soc. Sci. Fish. 7:79-88. (Engl, transl. by W. G. Van Campen, 1950. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv, Spec. Sci. Rep. Fish. 21, 22 p.) ALVERSON, F G. 1963. The food of yellowfin and skipjack tunas in the east- ern tropical Pacific Ocean. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter- Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 7:295-396. BARKLEY, R. a., W. H. NEILL, AND R. M. GOODING. 1978. Skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, habitat based on temperature and oxygen requirements. Fish. Bull., U.S. 76:653-662. BARKMAN, R. C. 1978. The use of otolith growrth rings to age young Atlantic silversides, Menidia menidia. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 107:790-792. BATTS, B. S. 1972. Age and growth of the skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis (Linnaeus), in North Carolina waters. Chesa- peake Sci. 13:237-244. BLUNT, C. E., JR., AND J. D. MESSERSMITH. 1960. Tuna tagging in the eastern tropical Pacific, 1952- 1959. Calif. Fish Game 36:301-369. BROCK, V. E. 1954. Some aspects of the biology of the aku, Katsuwonus pelamis, in the Hawaiian Islands. Pac. Sci. 8:94-104. BROTHERS, E. B., C. R MATHEWS, AND R. LASKER. 1976. Daily growth increments in otoliths from larval and adult fishes. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:1-8. 160 UCHIYAMA and STRUHSAKER: AGE AND GROWTH OF SKIPJACK AND YELLOWFIN TUNAS VON BERTALANFFY CURVE LINEAR STANZAS YEARS Figure 8. — Plots of residuals from von Bertalanffy growth curve and linear stanzas of central Pacific yellowfin tuna shovm in Figure 7. CHI, K.-S., AND R.-T. Yang. 1973. Age and growth of skipjack tuna in the waters around the southern part of Taiwan. [In Engl., Chin, abstr.] Acta Oceanogr. Taiwan. 3:199-221. Clemens, H. B., and p. M. Roedel. 1964. Tagging experiments on tuna and mackerel in the eastern Pacific. Proc. Symp. Scombroid Fish., Part II. Mar. Biol. Assoc. India, Symp. Ser. 1:769-784. DAVIDOFF, E. B. 1963. Size and year class composition of catch, age and growth of yellowfin tuna in the Eastern Tropical Pacific Ocean, 1951-1961. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 8:201-251. Diaz, E. L. 1963. An increment technique for estimating growth parameters of tropical tunas, as applied to yellowfin tuna (Thunnus alhacares). [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 8:383-416. GIBBS, R. H., Jr., and B. B. COLLETTE. 1967. Comparative anatomy and systematics of the tunas, genus Thunnus. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Fish. Bull. 66:65-130. GODSIL, H. C, AND R. D. BYERS. 1944. A systematic study of the Pacific tunas. Calif Fish Game, Fish Bull. 60, 131 p. hennemuth, R. C. 1961. Size and year class composition of catch, age and growth of yellowfin tuna in the Eastern Tropical Pacific Ocean for the years 1954-1958. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 5:5-112. INTER-AMERICAN TROPICAL TUNA COMMISSION. 1972. Annual report of the Inter- American Tropical Tuna Commission, 1971. [In Engl, and Span.] La Jolla, Calif., 129 p. 1974. Annual report of the Inter- American Tropical Tuna Commission, 1973. [In Engl, and Span.] La Jolla, Calif, 150 p. JOSEPH, J., AND T. P CALKINS. 1969. Population dynamics of the skipjack tuna iKat- suwonus pelamis) of the eastern Pacific Ocean. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 13, 273 p. KAWASAKI, T. 1965. Ecology and dynamics of the skipjack population I. Resources and fishing conditions. [In Jpn.] Jpn. Fish. Resour. Prot. Assoc. 8-1:1-48, (Translated by M. P. Miyake, 1967, 54 p., Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm., La Jolla, Calif) LE GUEN, J. C, F BAUDIN-LAURENCIN, AND C. CHAMPAGNAT. 1969. Croissance de I'albacore (Thunnus albacares) dans les regions de Pointe- Noire et de Dakar. [In Fr, Engl. summ.] Cah. O.R.S.TO.M. ser. Oceanogr. 7:19-40. LE GUEN, J. C, AND G. T. SAKAGAWA. 1973. Apparent growth of yellow^n tuna from the eastern Atlantic Ocean. Fish. Bull., U.S. 71:175-187. MARCILLE, J., AND B. STEQUERT. 1976a. Etude pr e'liminaire de la croissance du listao (Kat- suwonus pelamis) dans I'ouest de I'Oce'an Indien tropi- cal. Cah. O.R.S.TO.M. ser. Oceanogr. 14:139-151. 1976b. Croissance des jeunes albacores Thunnus alba- cares et patudos, Thunnus obesus de la cote nord-ouest de Madagascar. Cah. O.R.S.TO.M. ser. Oceanogr. 14:153- 162. matsumoto, w. m., e. h. ahlstrom, s. Jones, w. l. klawe, W. J. RICHARDS, and S. UEYANAGI. 1972. On the clarification of larval tuna identification particularly in the genus Thunnus. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:1-12. (Also Tr. Atl. Nauchno-Issled. Inst. Rybn. Khoz. Okeanogr. 53:12-33, 1973 [In Russ.].) MESSIEH,S.N. 1972. Use of otoliths in identifying herring stocks in the southern Gulf of St. Lavsrence and adjacent waters. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 29:1113-1118. Methot, R. d., Jr., and D. Kramer. 1979. Growth of northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, larvae in the sea. Fish. Bull., U.S. 77:413-423. Moore, H. L. 1951. Estimation of age and growth of yellowfin tuna (Neothunnus macropterus) in Hawaiian waters by size frequencies. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Fish. Bull. 52:133- 149. Nose, Y, H. Kawatsu, and Y Hiyama. 1957. Age and growth of Pacific tunas by scale read- ing. [In Jpn., Engl, summ.] In Suisan Gaku Shusei, Tokyo Univ Press, p. 701-716. PANNELLA, G. 1971. Fish otoliths: daiily growth layers and periodical patterns. Science (Wash., D.C.) 173:1124-1127. 1974. Otolith grow1;h patterns: an aid in age determina- tion in temperate and tropical fishes. In T B. Bagenal (editor). Proceedings of an international sjonposium on the ageingoffish, p. 28-39. Unwin Brothers, Surrey, Engl. ROTHSCHILD, B. J. 1967. Estimates of the growth of skipjack tuna {Kat- suwonus pelamis) in the Hawaiian Islands. Indo-Pac. Fish. Counc, Proc. 12th Sess., Sect. 2:100-111. SCHAEFER, M. B. 1961. Appendix A. Report on the investigations of the Inter-American Tropical Tuna Commission for the year 1960. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm., Annu. Rep. 1960:40-183. SCHAEFER, M. B., B. M. CHATWIN, AND G. C. BROADHEAD. 1961. Tagging and recovery of tropical tunas, 1955- 161 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 1 1959. [In EngL and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 5:341-455. SHABOTINIETS, E. I. 1968. Opredelenie vozrasta tuntsov Indiiskogo okeana (Age determination of Indian Ocean tunas). [In Russ.] Tr. VNIRO 64, Tr. AzcherNIRO 28:374-376. (Translated by W. L. Klawe, 1968, 5 p., Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm., La Jolla, Calif.) STRUHASKER, p., and J. H. UCHIYAMA. 1976. Age and growth of the nehu, Stolephorus purpureas (Pisces: Engraulidae) from the Hawaiian Islands as indi- cated by daily growth increments of sagittae. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:9-17. Tan, H.-C, Y. Nose, and Y. Hiyama. 1965. Age determination and growth of yellowfin tuna, Thunnus albacares Bonnaterre by vertebrae. Bull. Jpn. Soc. Sci. Fish. 31:414-422. Taubert, B. D., and D. W. Coble. 1977. Daily rings in otoliths of three species ofLepomis and Tilapia mossambica. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 34:332- 340. Wild, a., and T. J. Foreman. 1980. The relationship between otolith increments and time for yellowfin and skipjack tuna marked with tet- racycline. [In Engl, and Span.] Inter-Am. Trop. Tuna Comm. Bull. 17:509-560. Yabuta, Y, and M. YUKINAWA. 1957. Age and growth of yellowfin tuna {Neothunnus mac- ropterus) in Japanese waters by size frequencies. [In Jpn., Engl, summ.] Rep. Nankai Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 5:127-133. Yabuta, y, m. Yukinawa, and Y Warashina. 1960. Growth and age of yellowfin tuna. II. Age determi- nation (Scale method). [In Jpn., Engl, summ.] Rep. Nankai Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 12:63-74. Yamashita, d. T, and K. D. WALDRON. 1959. Tagging of skipjack in Hawaiian waters. Pac. Sci. 13:342-348. YANG, R.-T, Y. Nose, and Y Hiyama. 1969. A comparative study on the age and growth of yel- lowfin tunas from the Pacific and Atlantic Oceans. Bull. Far Seas Fish. Res. Lab. (Shimizu) 2:1-21. YOKOTA, T, M. TORIYAMA, R KANAI, AND S. NOMURA. 1961. Studies on the feeding habit of fishes. [In Jpn., Engl, summ.] Rep. Nankai Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 14, 234 p. YOSfflDA, H. O. 1971. The early life history of skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis, in the Pacific Ocean. Fish. Bull., U.S. 69:545- 554. 162 PELAGIC EGGS AND LARVAE OF THE DEEPSEA SOLE, EMBASSICHTHYS BATHYBIUS (PISCES: PLEURONECTIDAE), WITH COMMENTS ON GENERIC AFFINITIES Sally L. Richardson^ ABSTRACT Two eggs o{ Embassichthys bathybius are 3.0 mm in diameter, pelagic, spherical, transparent, with a homogeneous yolk, narrow perivitelline space, and no oil globule. Embryos in late stage eggs have pigmentation characteristic of larvae, including pigment over the hindgut and three prominent postanal pigment bands. This pigment pattern and the high number of myomeres (>60) serve as distinguishing characters for larvae in the size series described from recently hatched specimens 9.8 mm standard length to a specimen beginning eye migration at 16.2 mm standard length. Eggs and larvae of E. bathybius are extremely rare in extensive plankton and midwater trawl collections from the northeast Pacific with only eight specimens recorded to date. Occurrences were between March and June in the upper 185 m or less of the water column over bottom depths of 59-2,850 m. Within the tribe Pleuronectini of the subfamily Pleuronectinae, larvae of Glyptocephalus, Tanakius. Embassichthys, and Microstomas form a distinct and logical group sharing similarities of a banded pigment pattern; angular, oblique jaw; elongate, slender form; and tendency toward a leptocephalus- like shape. If intense pigment banding and pronounced leptocephaluslike shape are derived characters, then the group is probably a naturally related one, with Microstomus the least and Glyptocephalus the most specialized. The deepsea sole, Embassichthys bathybius (Gil- bert), occurs in the northeast Pacific Ocean from Santa Catalina Island, southern California, to Pratt Seamount, Gulf of Alaska, in depths from 320 to 1,432 m but mostly >730 m (Miller and Lea 1972; Hart 1973). It grows to 47 cm and is report- edly uncommon (Miller and Lea 1972; Hart 1973). Life history data are minimal and nothing is known about its reproduction or early life. Pelagic eggs and larvae of this species are de- scribed here for the first time based on collections taken off the Oregon coast. Knowledge of these early stages provides some insight into reproduc- tive strategy as well as information on larval mor- phology which may be useful for examining sys- tematic relationships. METHODS The pelagic specimens were collected (Table 1) with 70 cm bongos having 0.571 mm mesh nets and a 3.1 m Isaacs-Kidd midwater trawl with a 5 mm mesh liner and a 0.5 m diameter cod end of 0.571 mm mesh. The bongos were towed obliquely through the water column. The midwater trawl was towed near the surface in the upper 10 m. All material was preserved in 10% Formalin^ and stored in 5% Formalin except the 16.2 mm larva which was transferred to 36% isopropyl alcohol. Measurements made on larvae included: Standard length (SL) = snout tip to notochord tip until notochord is fully flexed and the posterior margin of the forming hypural elements is verti- cal, then to posterior margin of hypurals. Head length = snout tip to cleithrum. Snout to anus length = distance along body midline from snout tip to vertical through posteri- or margin of anus. Eye diameter = horizontal diameter of pig- mented portion of left eyeball. Depth at cleithrum = vertical distance from dorsal body margin, excluding finfold or fin, to ventral tip of cleithrum. 'School of Oceanography, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oreg.; present address: Gulf Coast Research Laboratory, East Beach Drive, Ocean Springs, MS 39564. ^ Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. Manuscript accepted June 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1. 198L 163 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table l. — Collection data for eggs and larvae of Embassichthys bathybius. SL Distance from Bottom Depth of Item (mm) Date Gear Lat. N, Long. W coast (km) depth (m) tow (m) Eggs 22 May 1972 70 cm bongo 44°39.1' 124°45.7' 56 220 185-0 — 20 March 1974 70 cm bongo 43°40.0' 124''33.0' 28 190 180-0 Larvae 9,8 27 March 1973 70 cm bongo 43°00.0' 125°01.7' 46 > 1,000 102-0 9.8 13 June 1972 70 cm bongo 44°39.1' 125°27.7' 111 2,850 120-0 10.2 23 May 1 972 70 cm bongo 44°39.1' 125°13.7' 93 1,300 165-0 10.4 11 April 1972 70 cm bongo 44''39.1' 124°10.7' 9 59 48-0 15.4 12 June 1972 70 cm bongo 44°39.1' 1 24°38.7' 46 330 115-0 16.2 26 April 1 965 3 m IKMT 44°39.r 125°27.7' 93 1.300 = 10 Depth at anus = vertical distance from dorsal body margin, excluding finfold or fin, to anus. Depth behind anus - vertical distance from dorsal body margin to ventral body margin, excluding finfold or fin, at point immediately be- hind anus where body depth decreases greatly compared with depth at anus. Body lengths refer to standard length. Illustra- tions were made with the aid of a camera lucida. IDENTIFICATION The largest larva in the series, obviously a pleuronectid based on general body form and asymmetrical position of the left eye, had 60 myo- meres (equivalent to vertebrae), 112 dorsal fin rays, and 97 anal fin rays. Embassichthys bathybius is the only pleuronectid occurring in the northeast Pacific which has these counts (Norman 1934; Miller and Lea 1972; Hart 1973). The larval series was linked together by the high number of myomeres and by pigment pattern, most notably three postanal pigment bands. Advanced embryos in the eggs had the same pigment pattern as the smallest larvae and the same high number of myomeres, providing positive identification. DESCRIPTION Eggs (Figure 1) Two eggs identified as E. bathybius are spheri- cal and transparent, 3.0 mm in diameter, with a homogeneous yolk, a relatively narrow peri vitel- line space, and no oil globule. The egg membrane is smooth and has a slight pinkish tinge in pre- served material. Both eggs have well-developed embryos with three distinctive postanal pigment bands, including one at the tail tip. In the more advanced embryo (illustrated), the eyes are pig- mented and the postanal bands are more intense. Pigment also occurs near the hindgut and extends out onto the yolk. Figure l. — Egg of Embassichthys bathybius, 3.0 mm in diameter. Larvae (Figure 2; Table 2) Six larvae identified as E. bathybius range from 9.8 to 16.2 mm SL. The two smallest specimens appear to be recently hatched, based on state of development compared with the most advanced embryo. A hatching size of about 9 mm (excluding shrinkage due to Formalin preservation) may be reasonable, based on the diameter-circumference relationship for a 3.0 mm diameter egg and the extent to which the advanced embryo encircles the yolk mass (Figure 1). The largest specimen, 16.2 mm, is beginning to undergo transformation as evidenced by the slight asymmetrical position of the left eye. The size at which the transformation process is complete is unknown. Pigmentation on the smallest larvae is similar to that on the embryos, with melanophores pres- ent over the hindgut and in three bands postanally. Pigment in the anterior two of these three bands is generally more concentrated along the dorsal and 164 RICHARDSON: PELAGIC EGGS AND LARVAE OF DEEPSEA SOLE 165 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 Table 2. — Measurements (millimeters) of selected body parts of larvae o{ Embassichthys bathybius. Snout Depth Depth Depth Head to anus Eye at at behind SL length length diameter cleithrum anus anus 9.8 1.2 3.2 0.4 0.8 0.7 0.3 9.8 1.9 — .5 1.3 — .7 10.2 1.8 — .5 1.2 — .5 10.4 1.2 3.2 .4 .8 1.0 .5 15.4 2.0 5.3 .5 1.7 2.0 .8 16.2 3.7 6.4 .7 5.1 5.7 4.3 ventral body margins than laterally. Pigment also occurs on the finfold in the region of the bands, particularly at the finfold margins near the an- terior two bands. During development, the most distinctive pigment additions occur along the fin fold (fin) margins, vi^ith seven patches forming along the dorsal fin and five along the ventral fin of the largest specimen. Pigment patches are also added to the dorsal and ventral body margins, generally in the vicinity of the fin fold (fin) patches, initially between the anterior two tail bands. With grovd;h the original pigment bands become discontinuous laterally except for the one at the tail tip which eventually appears as a patch on the caudal peduncle. Some pigment is also added ventrally in the abdominal region. Initially the larvae are relatively long and slen- der with body depth at the anus 7% SL in the smallest larvae and 13% SL by 15.4 mm. Body depth increases considerably by 16.2 mm when it is 35% SL at the anus. Snout to anus distance is 31-34% SL until 16.2 mm when it increases to 40% SL. Between 15.4 and 16.2 mm a number of events occur including notochord flexion; dorsal, anal, and caudal fin development; and formation of pel- vic fin buds. By 16.2 mm, the adult complement of dorsal (109-117) and anal (94-98) fin rays (Miller and Lea 1972) is attained but the caudal fin rays are not fully developed, based on the incomplete count of 8 + 8, and pectoral fin rays are not yet formed. No head or body spines are apparent on any of the larvae. COMPARISON The only other pleuronectids occurring in the northeast Pacific with >60 vertebrae are Reinhardtius hippoglossoides and Glyptocephalus zachirus (Norman 1934; Miller and Lea 1972; Hart 1973). Eggs of i?. hippoglossoides are 4.0-4.5 mm in diameter (Pertseva-Ostroumova 1961) and those of G. zachirus are 1.98-2.34 mm (Pearcy et al. 1977) compared with about 3.0 mm for E. bathybius. Larvae of R. hippoglossoides are lightly pigmented with melanophores lining the myosepta but never appearing as pronounced pigment bands on the body (Pertseva-Ostroumova 1961; Nichols 1971) as in E. bathybius. Small (< 11 mm) larvae of G. zachirus have four postanal pig- ment bands (Ahlstrom and Moser 1975) compared with three in E. bathybius. The bands in G. zachirus extend with uniform intensity from dor- sal to ventral body margins whereas those in E. bathybius are concentrated along the dorsal and ventral margins and are less intense laterally. With development these bands persist laterally in G. zachirus while the anterior two bands persist only near the body margins in E. bathybius. Small (<11 mm) larvae of G. zachirus also have a relatively shorter snout to anus distance (range = 25.3-27.2% SL; mean = 26.2% SL based on four specimens) than E. bathybius (range = 30.8-32.7% SL; mean = 31.8% SL based on two specimens). Freshly preserved larvae of E. bathybius possess scattered orange chromatophores on the body whereas larvae of G. zachirus have none. Eye migration begins at a smaller size in E. bathybius (at least by 16.2 mm) than in G. zachirus [34-35 mm (Pearcy et al. 1977)] indicating that final transformation to juvenile may take place at a smaller size in E. bathybius compared with 45 mm or larger (Pearcy et al. 1977) for G. zachirus. OCCURRENCE Because of the paucity of specimens of E. bathybius little can be said about temporal and spatial distribution. All were collected between March and June (Table 1) which may indicate a winter-spring spawning period similar to that of many species off Oregon (Pearcy et al. 1977; Richardson and Pearcy 1977). Additional docu- mentation is needed to determine whether such spawning periodicity actually exists in the deep habitat (generally >730 m) of the adults. Specimens were collected in the upper 185 m or less of the water column over bottom depths of 59 to 2,850 m, with the largest larva taken in a sur- face (upper 10 m) tow (Table 1). The wide ranging occurrences of the pelagic eggs and larvae between 9 and 111 km from the coast probably reflects drift and dispersal by currents. The larvae appear to be rare, at least off Oregon, based on over 3,000 midwater trawl and plankton collections that have been taken in that region 166 RICHARDSON: PELAGIC EGGS AND LARVAE OF DEEPSEA SOLE (table 1 in Pearcy et al. 1977). Such rarity could reflect the reported rarity of adults, or may indi- cate that the principal spawning occurs outside our sampling area, or that the primary occurrence of eggs and larvae may be at depths (>200 m) below those commonly sampled. The reproductive strategy of E. bathybius in- volves production of a large egg, probably with an associated reduced fecundity compared with an equivalent sized pleuronectid producing smaller eggs. The egg likely has a moderate pelagic life span lasting at least a few weeks, based on time to hatching for eggs of the related northeast Pacific species Microstomas pacifkus [38 d at 7.5° C; 27 d at 10° C; 18 d at 12.5° C ( Williams =')] which has eggs of 2.04-2.57 mm diameter (Pearcy et al. 1977). The larva of £". bathybius is well developed by the time it hatches and probably has an extended pelagic life lasting at least a few months, although size at which transformation is com- pleted and growth rates are unknown. Pearcy et al. (1977) estimated that the related species M. pacificus and G. zachirus may have a pelagic phase lasting about 1 yr. DISCUSSION The most recent, broad based review of the fam- ily Pleuronectidae that implied relationships was by Norman (1934) who recognized five subfamilies. Within the subfamily Pleuronectinae the genera fall into two main groups: one in which the mouth is moderate to large and the jaws and dentition are well developed on both sides [tribe Hippoglossini of Nelson (1976), with ca. 10 genera, 18 species]; the other in which the mouth is small and asymmetri- cal, with the jaws and dentition more developed on the blind side [tribe Pleuronectini of Nelson (1976) with ca. 16 genera, 42 species]. Norman (1934) stated "The group of Pleuronectine genera includ- ing Microstomas , Embassichthys , Tanakias and Glyptocephalas have generally been marked off from the remainder of the small-mouthed mem- bers [tribe Pleuronectini] of the subfamily as a primary division [within the tribe], distinguished by a generally more elongate body and by an in- creased number of vertebrae, fin-rays and of scales in a longitudinal series. Such an arrangement is clearly an artificial one, and it is doubtful whether these [four] genera really form a natural group." He further said that Embassichthys is apparently closely related to Microstomas and Glyp- tocephalas is close to Tanakias whereas Micros- tomas is related to Pseadoplearonectes and Tanakias is apparently related to Dexistes. Norman's (1934) discussion of intergeneric rela- tionships was based mainly on external mor- phological features and therefore the phylogeny of the group was not really well defined. Additional evidence is needed to elucidate relationships. One source of additional information is the larval form of fishes which has been used to demonstrate or clarify systematic relationships in other groups of fishes, e.g., scoplarchids (Johnson 1974), gonos- tomatids ( Ahlstrom 1974), myctophids (Moser and Ahlstrom 1974), myctophiforms (Okiyama 1974) marine teleosts in general (Ahlstrom and Moser 1976), bothids (Futch 1977), scombroids (Okiyama and Ueyanagi 1978), and serranids (Kendall 1979). Although larval characters that have been used are usually external morphological features such as body shape and form, spination, and melanistic pigmentation, character similarities have been consistently in agreement with intergeneric rela- tionships. With this paper, larvae of all species in the four pleuronectine genera mentioned by Norman (1934) are knowoi (Table 3). Larvae are also known for 53 of the 60 pleuronectine species that occur in the North Pacific and North Atlantic (Ahlstrom and Moser 1979). With this knowledge it is possi- ble to point out the similarity and distinctiveness of the larvae in the four-genus complex of Micros- tomas, Embassichthys, Tanakias, and Glyp- tocephalas which appear to form a logical group within the tribe Pleuronectini. Determination of whether this phonetically derived group is a Tables. — Selected references containing illustrations of larvae of species in the pleuronectid genera Embassichthys, Glypto- cephalus, Microstomus, and Tanakius. ^S. Williams, Graduate student. Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State University, Corvallis, OR 97331, unpubl. data, June 1976. Species References Embassichthys bathybius This paper Glyptocephalus cynoglossus Petersen 1904; Ehrenbaum 1905-09; Nichols 1971; Evseenko and Nevinsky 1975; Russell 1976. G.stelleh Dekhnik 1959; Pertseva-Ostroumova 1961; Okiyama 1963; Okiyama and Takahashi 1976. G. zachirus Ahlstrom and Moser 1975 Microstomus achne Okiyama and Takahashi 1976 M. kitt Nichols 1971; RusselM 976 M. pacificus Hagerman 1952; Ahlstrom and Moser 1975 Tanakius kitaharae Fujita 1965; Okiyama and Takahashi 1976 167 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 natural group comprised of related genera, in con- trast with Norman's (1934) speculation, will de- pend on a detailed analysis of derived character states which is beyond the scope of this paper. However, based on other larval studies mentioned above, it seems probable that the larval similarities wdthin the group may provide evi- dence to support the idea of intergeneric relation- ship. In an earlier study of larvae of M. kitt, G. stelleri, and G. cynoglossus, Pertseva- Ostroumova (1961) preliminarily concluded that larval evidence indicated a close relationship be- tween Microstomus and Glyptocephalus . Characters shared by larvae of members of this four-genus complex and not found in other mem- bers of the Pleuronectini include pigment pattern (preflexion larvae) consisting of three or four post- anal pigment bands which may be continuous (from dorsal to ventral body margin) or discon- tinuous (concentrated only near the dorsal and ventral body margins); elongate, slender form of preflexion larvae; angular jaw with strongly oblique appearance; and tendency toward a leptocephaluslike shape with development. Among genera, similarities are greatest between Glyptocephalus and Tanakius which share the characters of continuous postanal pigment bands that, later in development, become concentrated mediolaterally; pigment addition as ventral patches between bands; preopercular spines; and pronounced leptocephaluslike shape. Embas- sichthys most closely resembles Glyptocephalus and Tanakius, having continuous postanal pig- ment bands initially which later become discon- tinuous, persisting only at the body margins; pigment addition as dorsal and ventral patches between bands; no head spination; a moderate leptocephaluslike shape. Microstomus is most distinct with postanal pigment bands discontin- uous and not prominent; occipital spines in two of three species; much less tendency toward long leptocephaluslike shape with dorsoventral deep- ening of body instead. If strong pigment banding and pronounced leptocephaluslike shape can be shown to be derived character states, which they appear to be considering the rest of the Pleuronec- tini, this group of genera may indeed be related, with Microstomus being least specialized and Glyptocephalus most specialized. Additional observations on head spine patterns, extremes in larval form, and eye position in rela- tion to caudal fin development may prove to be useful in future studies assessing relationships within this group of genera. Evseenko (1979) theorized that the presence of head spines in flatfish larvae was indicative of their percoid an- cestors and that a reduction in head spines within a genus was a derived character state. Both M. achne and M. pacificus of the North Pacific have prominent occipital spines (Hagerman 1952; Okiyama andTakahashi 1976) while M. kitt of the northeast Atlantic reportedly has none (Russell 1976; Evseenko 1979). This tends to offer support for the concept of a North Pacific origin of the genus Microstomus with M. kitt being a more specialized, derived form. All three species of Glyptocephalus reportedly have preopercular spines (Ahlstrom and Moser 1975; Russell 1976; Okiyama^) although total number and relative size have not been well documented for each species. It would be interesting to see if a reduction in preopercular spination occurs in G. cynoglossus of the North Atlantic, following a pattern similar to M. kitt. Both egg size and size at transformation reach maxima in species of this generic complex in the northeast Pacific. Eggs of E. bathybius are about 3.0 mm in diameter and those of M. pacificus and G. zachirus are >2.0 mm (Pearcy et al. 1977). Larval lengths of up to 89 mm in G. zachirus and 65 mm in M. pacificus prior to transformation have been reported (Pearcy et al. 1977). The latter species develops an extremely deep bodied, highly compressed specialized larval form. The large egg size and size at transformation may possibly re- flect an environmentally induced, specialized adaptation to the upwelling system (or deep habitat in the case of E. bathybius) and asso- ciated circulation patterns of the region. Patterns of eye migration in relation to caudal fin development vary among genera. In G. zachirus the caudal fin forms entirely before the left eye begins to migrate whereas in M. pacificus, the eye begins to migrate as notochord flexion be- gins (Pearcy et al. 1977). Relatively few specimens of G. zachirus have been collected with the left eye on the middorsal ridge suggesting that once eye movement is initiated it proceeds rapidly, with transformation completed shortly thereafter. This is in contrast to M. pacificus where a large number of specimens in a wide size range (10-63 mm SL) have been collected with the eye on the middorsal ■"M. Okiyama. Professor, Ocean Research Institute, University of Tokyo, 1-15-1, Minamidai, Nakano-ku, Tokyo 164, Japan, pers. commun. April 1979. 168 RICHARDSON: PELAGIC EGGS AND LARVAE OF DEEPSEA SOLE ridge (Pearcy et al. 1977). These patterns have not been investigated fully in the other species and genera in the group although our limited E. bathybius series indicates eye migration may begin with notochord flexion. Larvae of G. zachirus appear to maintain symmetry until they are ready to settle and then transform rapidly, w^hile asymmetry begins earlier and persists longer in the pelagic phase in M. pacificus and possibly the other genera. Perhaps the delay in eye migration in Glyptocephalus is a specialization associated with the prolonged pelagic period of all species in this genus. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The 16.2 mm larva was made available from W. G. Pearcy's midwater trawl collections. Unpub- lished data on incubation time of M. pacificus eggs were compiled from experiments by Stephen Wil- liams (formerly Oregon State University) and pro- vided by Michael Hosie (Oregon Department of Fish and Wildlife). Betsy B. Washington illus- trated the egg and larvae. This work is a result of research sponsored by the Oregon State University Sea Grant College Program, supported by NOAA Office of Sea Grant, Department of Commerce, under Grant No. 04-6- 158-44094. LITERATURE CITED AHLSTROM, E. H. 1974. The diverse patterns of metamorphosis in gonos- tomatid fishes- an aid to classification. In J. H. S. Blax- ter (editor), The early life history of fish, p. 659-674, Springer- Verlag, N.Y. AHLSTROM, E. H., AND H. G. MOSER. 1975. Distributional atlas offish larvae in the California Current region: Flatfishes, 1955 through 1960. Calif Coop. Fish. Invest., Atlas 23, 207 p. 1976. Eggs and larvae of fishes and their role in systematic investigations and in fisheries. Rev. Trav. Inst. Peches Marit. 40:379-398. 1979. Systematics and development of early life history stages of marine fishes: achievements during the past century, present status and suggestions for the fu- ture. ICES Symposium on the Early Life History of Fish, Woods Hole, Mass., 2-5 April 1979, ICES/ELH Symp./ SD:12, 33 p. DEKHNIK,T. V. 1959. Material on spavming and development of certain far eastern flatfishes. [In Russ.] Akad. Nauk SSSR, Zool. Inst., Issled. Dal'nevost. Morei SSSR 6:109-131. EHRENBAUM, E. 1905-09. Eier und Larven von Fischen des Nordischen Planktons, Teil I. Verlag von Lipsius und Tischer, Kiel und Leipzig, 216 p. EVSEENKO, S. A. 1979. Sinistral flounder larvae of the west Atlantic (Scophthalmidae, Bothidae, Pisces). ICES Symposium on the Early Life History of Fish, Woods Hole, Mass., 2-5 April 1979, ICES/ELH Symp./SD:1, 27 p. EVSEENKO, S. A., AND M. M. NEVINSKY. 1975. Spawning and development of witch flounder, Glyp- tocephalus cynoglossus L., in the Northwest Atlan- tic. Int. Comm. Northwest Atl. Fish. Res. Bull. 11:111- 123. FUGITA, S. 1965. Early development and rearing of two common flatfishes, Eopsetta grigorjewi (Herzenstein) and Tanakius kitaharai (Jordan et Starks). [In Jpn., Engl, abstr.] Bull. Jpn. Soc. Sci. Fish. 31:258-262. FUTCH, C. R. 1977. Larvae of Trichopsetta ventralis (Pisces: Bothidae), with comments on intergeneric relationships within the Bothidae. Bull. Mar Sci. 27:740-757. HAGERMAN, F. B. 1952. The biology of the Dover sole, Microstomas pacificus ( Lockington). Calif. Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 85, 48 p. Hart, J, L. 1973. Pacific fishes of Canada. Fish. Res. Board Can., Bull. 180, 740 p. JOHNSON, R. K. 1974. A revision of the alepisauroid family Scopelarchidae (Pisces: Myctophiformes). Fieldiana: Zool. 66, 249 p. Kendall, A. W, JR. 1979. Morphological comparisons of North American sea bass larvae (Pisces: Serranidae). U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS CIRC-428, 50 p. Miller, d. J., and r. N. lea. 1972. Guide to the coastal marine fishes of California. Calif Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 157, 235 p. MOSER, H. G., and E. H. AHLSTROM. 1974. Role of larval stages in systematic investigations of marine teleosts: the Myctophidae, a case study. Fish. Bull., U.S. 72:391-413. Nelson, J. S. 1976. Fishes of the world. Wiley, N.Y, 416 p. Nichols, J. H. 1971. Pleuronectidae. Fiches Ident. Oeufs Larves Pois- sons 4-6, 18 p. Norman, j. r. 1934. A systematic monograph of the flatfishes (Heterosomata). Vol. 1. Psettodidae, Bothidae, Pleuronec- tidae. Br Mus. (Nat. Hist.) Lond., 459 p. OKIYAMA, M. 1963. Larvae and young of the witch flounder, Glyp- tocephalus stelleri (Schmidt). Bull. Jpn. Sea Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 11:101-108. 1974. The larval taxonomy of the primitive myctophiform fishes. In J. H. S. Blaxter (editor). The early life history offish, p. 609-621. Springer- Verlag, N.Y OKIYAMA, M., AND K. TAKAHASHI. 1976. Larval stages of the right eye flounders (subfamily Pleuronectinae) occurring in the Japan Sea. [In Jpn., Engl, abstr.] Bull. Jpn. Sea Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 27:11-34. OKIYAMA, M., AND S. UEYANAGI. 1978. Interrelationships of scombroid fishes: an aspect from larval morphology. Bull. Far Seas Fish. Res. Lab. (Shimizu) 16:103-113. 169 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1 PEARCY, W. G., M. J. HOSIE, AND S. L. RICHARDSON. 1977. Distribution and duration of pelagic life of larvae of Dover sole, Microstomas pacificus; rex sole, Glyp- tocephalus zachirus; and petrale sole, Eopsetta jordani , in waters off Oregon. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:173-183. PERTSEVA-OSTROUMOVA, T. A. 1961. The reproduction and development of far-eastern flounders. Razmnozhenie i razvitie dal'nevostochnykh kambal. Izd. Akad. Nauk SSSR, Mosk., 484 p. (Trans- lated from Russ., Fish. Res. Board Can. Transl. 856, 1003 p.) PETERSEN, C. G. J. 1904. On the larval and post-larval stages of the long roughdab and the Genus Pleuronectes. Meddr. Kamm. Havunders., Ser. Fish. 2(1), 10 p. RICHARDSON, S. L., AND W. G. PEARCY. 1977. Coastal and oceanic fish larvae in an area of up- welling off Yaquina Bay, Oregon. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:125-145. RUSSELL, F S. 1976. The eggs and planktonic stages of British marine fishes. Acad. Press, Lond., 524 p. 170 NOTES EFFECTS OF SWIMMING PATH CURVATURE ON THE ENERGETICS OF FISH MOTION Many respiration and other behavioral and physiological studies of larger pelagic fish species are carried out in round tanks (Fry 1957; Bain- bridge 1958; Magnuson 1970; Neill et al. 1976). These tanks have structural and space advan- tages, since round tanks have the largest volume to surface area of any flat-sided enclosure. However, circular tanks introduce an additional stress factor not usually encountered by wild fish. This is the centripetal force required for continued motion in a curved path. This force is proportional to the fish mass, and inversely proportional to the path radius. The tank radii are limited by the fact that respiration and heat transfer data are ob- tained from the medium, resulting in a require- ment of relatively small volumes so that changes in the measured parameters (oxygen concentra- tion, temperature, etc.) are enhanced. As will be shown here, this constraint on tank size causes the centripetal contribution to the force balance to become dominant in certain ex- perimental situations. I therefore developed a cor- rection factor to be applied to data collected in round or annular tanks so as to make the data representative of fish swimming freely in a straight line, in open waters. Analysis For a neutrally buoyant fish swimming hori- zontally in a straight line at a constant speed the force balance in that plane (excluding forces due to buoyancy and its compensation) is, in absolute values,
Um for all 174 finite values of R and that the minimum swim- ming speed grows as the radius decreases. The increase in minimum speed also is reflected in the total effort required for swimming in the round tank, as the rate of working goes up as the cube of the velocity. The induced drag changes [Equation (11)] are included since the fins are producing maximum lift coefficients both in straight-line swimming and in turning V, Ojf V, minimum speed = U, OjS/ U„ (26) Results and Discussion To estimate the actual significance of the vari- ous corrections developed in the previous section, numerical values of the parameters are now sub- stituted for a negatively buoyant species, the skip- jack tuna. Most of the quantities appearing in the oxygen consvunption ratios [Equations (10), (18), and (26)] are easily measurable. The added mass and drag coefficients (A. and Cot) are more difficult to ob- tain, as both may also be dependent on the turning radius (due to higher drag when turning and addi- tional added mass effects due to the fish body cur- vature). However, no such information is presently available, so both these quantities have to be esti- mated from data on rigid engineering structures. The most complete set of data for estimation of D appears in Magnuson (1978, table 6) for skipjack tuna. These data will now be used to obtain a typical value of the correction factor Equation (4). The total drag for a 44 cm skipjack tuna swimming at 66 cm/s was estimated to be 19,780 dyn. The mass of the fish is approximately 1.67 kg (Naka- mura and Uchiyama 1966), and with an average density of 1.09 (Magnuson 1978, table 3) the vol- ume of the fish is 1,530 cm^. The drag coefficient Cot (which is different from Magnuson's drag co- efficient because of the different reference area) is found, from Equation (3), to be 2 • 19,780 'Dt 1.025 • (1,530) 2/3 66' 0.067 . (27) Magnuson's (1978) data are partially based on the study of ram ventilation by Brown and Muir (1970) which was carried out in the holding tanks of the National Marine Fisheries Service Kewalo Re- search Facility in Honolulu, which are of 7.3 m in diameter. These allow a maximum path radius of about 300 cm. Recalling that the longitudinal added mass for a streamlined fish shape is A ~ 0.2 (Webb 1975) and substituting the above values first into Equation (4), we obtain D = 2 (1,530)^'^ (1.06 + 0.2) 300 • 0.067 = 1.44. (28) This means that the centripetal force is actually larger than the total drag force under these cir- cumstances. The total force exerted by the fish swimming in a circular path of 300 cm radius is thus, from Equation (6), Tt/T = 1.76, i.e., 76% greater than that required for straight swimming at the same speed. This is also, from Equation (9), the ratio of oxygen consimiption. The ratio F/D grows essentially proportionally to fish length, so that larger fish expend an even greater proportion of energy in swimming in a curvilinear path. We now look at the ratio of oxygen consumption obtained for fish swimming under the same cir- cumstances while banking their fins. This is calcu- lated from Equation (18), assuming that at this low (close to minimum) speed the pectoral fins are fully stretched so that bs/bt = 1. The ratio Dis/Ds is found from Magnuson's (1978) table 6, to be approximately 0.3; El V, ©2^ v; = 1 + 0.3 OjS 1.09 + 0.2 • 1.025 1.09 - 1.025 i.e., the increase in energy requirements is only 2.6%, much less than for the asymmetric thrust, nonbanked type of swimming. We can conclude therefore that skipjack tuna moving at low speeds in circular paths will use the banked swimming technique once they are adjusted. The banking angle can be obtained by banking the body and keeping symmetrical fin angles (as in Figure IB), or by asymmetric deployment of the pectorals. An experimental program to study these angles by photography is underway at present, as this is the most obvious and easily measured prediction of the present theory. The predicted value of the banking angle (from the vertical) is obtained from Equation (20) as m I 1 -i I C7^ tan a = — a = tan W -1 RW , (30) which for the skipjack tuna example above is 12.0°. We see above that the banking technique is much more efficient at a relatively low swimming speed. However, the ratio of energy consumption [Equation (18)] is proportional to the speed to the fourth power, so it is important to check on its values at higher swimming speeds. There is no complete set of data available for such speeds, so we have to make some assumptions about the be- havior of the various parameters. The ratio Dis/Ds is most probably not speed-dependent, as the total and induced drag are both proportional to the speed squared. Thus, we can use the value 0.3 found above. Next, we assume that fin extension is the same (at each speed) for straight-line swim- ming and turning (the extension can change as a function of speed, but the ratio remains constant). This assumption will also be checked in the ex- perimental program mentioned before, as it is eas- ily corrected in Equation (18). Skipjack tuna can move at up to 10 body lengths/s, i.e., over 400 cm/s in the present case. Applying Equation (18) at different speeds (still for a turning radius of 300 cm), we obtain Vcmis 66 100 120 150 175 200 300 400 Q-,t 11 1.026 1.137 1.285 1.696 2.289 3.199 12.13 36.18 66^ 981 • 300 + 1 (1) = 1.026, (29) i.e., at speeds of about 160 cm/s ( ~ 4 body lengths/ s) the asymmetric thrust method, which is inde- pendent of speed, becomes the better way of com- pensating for circular swimming. One can there- fore establish a general upper limit for the centrifugal increase in oxygen consumption fi"om Equation (10), with the proviso that at lower speeds the banking method is more efficient. Next, we calculate the increase in the minimum swimming speed of the tuna mentioned above, for which m = 1,670 g, CLmax = 1.0, Af = 36 cm^ (Magnuson 1973), pw = 1.025, k = 0.2, and it! = 300 cm. From Equation (25) we obtain Ut/Um — 1.093. The measured minimum speed in the round tank is thus 10% higher than for the same fish moving in a straight line. Using the allometric data of Magnuson (1973), we can obtain Ut/Um as a function offish size for various species. This appears in Figure 2 for the 175 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 I.I 1-0. \ \ <■ 83 cm L« 24 cm ^ \v ^ ^^ 4 5 R/L Figure 2. — Ratio of minimum speed when moving in a circular path, to the minimum speed in straight-line swimming versus the ratio of turning radius to fish length, for skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis. skipjack tuna, for which m = 0.00490L^^^ and A/- = 0.00749L^^^, so that a slight dependence on fish length is retained, even after normalizing by the length. These curves can now be used to establish the increase in minimum energy consumption, with the aid of Equation (26). In conclusion, it is seen that running fish in circular tanks can cause very significant addi- tional stresses. These have to be taken into ac- count when applying data collected under such circumstances to naturally occurring situations. Literature Cited Bainbridge, R. 1958. The speed of swimming offish as related to size and to the frequency and amplitude of the tail beat. J. Exp. Biol. 35:109-133. BROWN, C. E., AND B. S. MUIR. 1970. Analysis of ram ventilation offish gills with applica- tion to skipjack tuna (Katsuwonus pelamis) . J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 27:1637-1652. Fry, F E. J. 1957. The aquatic respiration of fish. In M. E. Brown (editor). The physiology of fishes. Vol. I, p. 1-63. Acad. Press, N.Y. hoerner, S. F 1965. Fluid-dynamic drag. Practical information on aerodynamic drag and hydrodynamic resistance. Pub- lished by the author, Midland Park, N.J. MAGNUSON, J. J. 1970. Hydrostatic equilibrium of Euthynnus affinis, a pelagic teleost without a gas bladder. Copeia 1970: 56-85. 1973. Comparative study of adaptations for continuous swimming and hydrostatic equilibrium of scombroid and .xiphoid fishes. Fish. Bull., U.S. 71:337-356. 1978. Locomotion by scombrid fishes: hydromechanics, morphology, and behavior In W H. Hoar and D. J. Ran- dall (editors). Fish physiology Vol. 7, p. 239-313. Acad. Press, N.Y NAKAMURA, E. L., and J. H. UCHIYAMA. 1966. Length-weight relations of Pacific tunas. In T. A. Manar (editor). Proceedings of the Governor's Conference on Central Pacific Fishery Resources, Honolulu — Hilo, February 28-March 12, 1966, p. 197-201. State of Hawaii, Honolulu. neill, w. h., r. k. c. Chang, and a. e. dizon. 1976. Magnitude and ecological implications of thermal inertia in skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pelamis (Lin- naeus). Environ. Biol. Fishes 1:61-80. WEBB, P W. 1975. Hydrodynamics and energetics of fish propul- sion. Fish. Res. Board Can., Bull. 190, 158 p. DANIEL WEIHS Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA Honolulu, Hawaii Present address: Department of Aeronautical Engineering Technion — Israel Institute of Technology Haifa, Israel Acknowledgments This study was done while I was a Visiting Sci- entist at the Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Honolulu, Hawaii. I would like to thank Andrew E. Dizon and Randolph K. C. Chang for their hospitality and helpful comments, and P W. Webb for critically reading a previous version of the manuscript. 176 DESCRIPTION OF STAGE II ZOEAE OF SNOW CRAB, CHIONOECETES BAIRDI, (OXYRHYNCHA, MAJIDAE) FROM PLANKTON OF LOWER COOK INLET, ALASKA Chionoecetes bairdi Rathbun 1924 (subfamily Oregoniinae) is the only species of snow crab (genus Chionoecetes) that occurs in Cook Inlet, Alaska, and contributes about 2Qf?c of the total value of the commercial fisheries harvest of the area (Trasky et al. 1977). The larval stages of C. bairdi consist of one prezoeal, two zoeal, and one megalopal stage. The zoeae are readily distin- guished from known zoeae of other genera of the subfamily Oregoniinae (Hyas and Oregonia) by size (the zoeae of C bairdi are nearly twice as large as zoeae of Hyas and Oregonia) and by slight differences in morphology, especially seta- tion of the antennule and length of the posterior lateral spines (Haynes 1973). The prezoeae. Stage I zoeae, and megalopa of C. bairdi have been de- scribed from known parentage (Haynes 1973; Jewett and Haight 1977). In this report, I describe the Stage II zoeae from plankton and compare them with other known Oregoniinae zoeae from the North Pacific Ocean. Methods Stage II zoeae of C. bairdi were collected in lower Cook Inlet in 1976 during a joint survey by the National Marine Fisheries Service and the Alaska Department of Fish and Game. The C bairdi zoeae were collected near the southwestern tip of the Kenai Peninsula (Figure 1) in water 37-141 m deep. Collections were made with two 61 cm bongo nets fished side by side from near bot- tom to surface. The nets had 0.333 mm mesh, and cod end jars 0.571 mm mesh. The zoeae were cap- tured by lowering the nets to about 1 m from the bottom and then retrieving them vertically at a velocity of slightly <1 m/s. After retrieval, zoeae were washed from the nets and preserved in a 5% solution of formaldehyde and seawater. Drawings of the Stage II zoeae (Figure 2) were made from preserved specimens. The terminology, methods of measurement, techniques of illustra- tion, and nomenclature of appendages are Haynes' (1973). Total body length includes tel- sonic furcations. Setation formulae refer to setae numbered from the distal to the proximal portion of the appendage. Comparison of morphological features was aided by first clearing the zoeae in 10% KOH. For clarity, setules on setae are usually omitted but spinulose setae are shown. Any vari- ation in setal counts is noted in text. Description of Stage II Zoeae General shape characteristic of Stage II zoeae oi Chionoecetes is shown in Figure 2 A, B. Dorsal and rostral spines long, tapering, essentially Figure l. — Sampling locations in Cook Inlet, Alaska, where Stage II zoeae of Chionoecetes bairdi were captured in 1976. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 177 straight; dorsal spine slightly longer than rostral; lateral spines long, at right angles to carapace, curving downward slightly. Distinct protuberance on carapace posterior to dorsal spine; minute hair on each side of carapace between lateral spine and base of dorsal spine; supraorbital spines present, 11 or 12 setae along posterior edge; lat- eral margin of carapace strongly indented just posterior to eye. Eyestalks short, articulated, each bears minute protuberance about midway between eye and carapace. Average measurements: carapace length 1.04 0.25 mm 1 mm 178 Figure 2. — Stage II zoea oi Chionoecetes bairdi: (A) whole animal, right side; (B^ whole animal, frontal; (C) antennule, dorsal; (D) antenna, dorsal; (Ei left mandible, posterior; (F) maxillule, ventral; (G) maxilla, dorsal; (H) first maxilliped, lateral; (I) second maxilliped, lateral; (J) third maxilliped, lateral; (Kl first pereopod, lateral; (L) abdomen, dorsal. mm (range 0.98-1.12 mm, 10 specimens); dorsal- rostral length 6.15 mm (range 5.95-6.37 mm, 5 specimens); width between tips of lateral spines of carapace 2.89 mm (range 2.66-3.22 mm, 3 specimens); total body length 5.20 mm (range 4.55-5.95 mm, 9 specimens); rostral spine length 2.24 mm (all 4 specimens); dorsal spine length 2.45 mm (all 4 specimens). 179 ANTENNULE (Figure 2C). — First antenna, or antennule, conical and uniramous; bears eight terminal aesthetascs (six long and two of inter- mediate length); small budlike projection and single aesthetasc subterminally. ANTENNA (Figure 2D). — Protopodite (spi- nous process) of antenna elongate, about two- thirds length of rostral spine, armed with numer- ous sharp spinules that increase in size distally; exopodite slender, less than one-half length of protopodite, two setae near sharp tip, each seta with two rows of many fine setules; endopodite naked, about two-thirds length of exopodite. MANDIBLES (Figure 2E). — Right and left mandibles nearly identical; palps unjointed and naked; incisor composed of two large, rounded processes. MAXILLULE (Figure 2F). — First maxilla, or maxillule, bears coxal and basial endites and an endopodite. Proximal lobe (coxopodite) bears nine spinulose spines, eight terminally and one sub- terminally. Median lobe (basipodite) bears nine spines distally: two setose spines, three simple spines, four spinous spines (especially stout) plus a large setose seta proximally Endopodite two- segmented, originates from lateral margin of basipodite, bears seven setae (six on distal seg- ment, one on distal margin of proximal segment). MAXILLA (Figure 2G). — Bears platelike exopodite (scaphognathite) with 21-23 plumose setae along outer margin; no long, thick seta at proximal end. Endopodite unsegmented, bears six setae distally and fine hairs along outer margin. Basipodite bilobed; each lobe bears six setae. Bilobed coxopodite bears eight setae, four on each lobe. FIRST MAXILLIPED (Figure 2H). — Exopo- dite completely segmented; bears six heavily plumose (natatory) setae on distal end. Endopo- dite five -segmented; setation formula 4, 3, 1, 2, 3. Basipodite bears 10 setae along posterior edge, all setae except natatory setae sparsely plumose. SECOND MAXILLIPED (Figure 21). — Exopo- dite completely segmented, bears six long, heav- ily plumose (natatory) setae terminally. Endopo- dite three-segmented, setation formula 5, 1, 1. Basipodite bears four setae along posterior mar- gin, all except natatory setae, sparsely plumose. THIRD MAXILLIPED (Figure 2J). — Not fully developed, unsegmented, bilobed. FIRST PEREOPOD (Figure 2K). — Chela segmented from carpopodite, bilobed but not functional. SECOND TO FIFTH PEREOPODS. — Small, uniramous, not segmented or bilobed. ABDOMEN AND TELSON (Figure 2A, L). — Abdomen consists of six somites and telson. So- mites 1-5 bear pair of simple setae middorsally; somites 2-5 also bear pair of simple setae near dorsal posterior margin. Second and third somites both bear pair of curved lateral processes; length of pair on second somite about half the height (Figure 2 A) of second somite; pair on third somite about half the length of pair on second somite. Pair of long well-developed spines on posterior lateral margins of third, fourth, and fifth somites; those on third and fourth somites extend beyond posterior margin of adjacent somites to about midpoint of fifth and sixth somites, respectively. Spines on fifth somite extend to level of anus; lat- eral spines usually bear a few minute spinules. Undeveloped pleopods (Figure 2A) present on ab- dominal somites 2-5; length of pleopods about three-fourths height of abdominal somites. Telson bifurcate; furcations long, slender, finely spinu- late, tips upcurved. Each furcation bears three articulated telsonic setae and one simple seta on mesial margin, a prominent spine laterally on outer margin, a smaller dorsal spine posterior to telsonic setae, and minute spinule about midway between the lateral and dorsal spines; lateral and dorsal spines on furcations minutely spinulate. Each telsonic seta, except pair of simple setae, bears two rows of spinules. Uropods (Figure 2A) on somite 6 undeveloped, length about four- tenths height of sixth somite. Comparison of North Pacific Zoeae of the Subfamily Oregoniinae The subfamily Oregoniinae comprises three genera, Chionoecetes, Hyas, and Oregonia (Garth 1958). Zoeae of the subfamily have been de- scribed, at least in part, for C. opilio, C.japonicus, H. coarctatus alutaceus, H. lyratus, and Oregonia gracilis (Hart 1960; Kurata 1963; Yamauro 1968; Haynes 1973; Motoh 1973). Based on these de- scriptions. Stage I and II zoeae of the Oregoniinae are readily separable from each other (Table 1). Stage I zoeae are characterized by sessile eyes, four natatory setae on the first and second maxil- lipeds, absence of pleopods, and three pair of setae on the inner margin of the telsonic furcations. Stage II zoeae bear stalked eyes, six natatory setae on the first and second maxillipeds, pleopods, and four pair of setae on the inner mar- 180 Table l. — Morphological characteristics for distinguishing between Stage I and II zoeae of the subfamily Oregoniinae. Stage Characteristic 1 II Supraorbital spines absent present Eyes sessile stalked Natatory setae: First maxllliped 4 6 Second maxilliped 4 6 Pleopods absent present Pairs of setae on inner margin of teisonic furcations 3 4 gin of the teisonic furcations. In addition, the Stage II zoeae bear supraorbital spines which are lacking in the Stage I zoeae. Hart (1960) reared and described the larvae of H. lyratus and O. gracilis from ovigerous females collected in British Columbia waters. Based on Hart's brief description, Stage II zoeae H. lyratus and O. gracilis are similar morphologically to Stage II zoeae of C. bairdi, but markedly smaller. Dorsal-rostral length of Stage II H. lyratus andO. gracilis averages 4.0 mm and 4.5 mm, respec- tively, compared with 6.5 mm for Stage II zoeae of C bairdi. Kurata (1963) described larvae collected off Hokkaido that he provisionally identified as H. coarctatus alutaceus. They can be distinguished from Stage II zoeae of C. bairdi by their smaller size (dorsal-rostral length averages 4.4 mm) and the lack of a distinct protuberance posterior to the dorsal spine. Stephensen (1935) described zoeae from the col- lection of the Zoological Museum of Copenhagen previously identified by C.N. Rudolph and sub- sequently believed by Stephensen to be zoeae of C opilio. Because of the numerous (14) natatory setae on the exopodites of the maxillipeds, Stephensen's zoeae are obviously not zoeae of the genus Chionoecetes nor even of the Oxyrhyncha. Stephensen's zoeae undoubtably belong to the Brachyrhyncha and likely the families Atelecyc- lidae or Cancridae. Kurata (1963) described Stage I zoeae of C. opilio elongatus (=C. opilio^) reared in the laboratory from known parentage and the re- maining larval stages from plankton of the Hok- iRathbun ( 1924) designated C. opilio in the Sea of Japan as C. opilio elongatus based on the length/width relation of the second merus. According to Tohshi Kon, Fukui Prefecture Fishery Ex- perimental Station, Tsuroga-shi.Fukui-Prefecture, Japan (pers. commun. November 1978), Kamita's (1941) findings invalidate Rathbun's subspecific designation. kaido area. Motoh (1973) described the zoeal and megalopal stages of C. opilio reared in the laboratory from an ovigerous female caught in the Sea of Japan. I confirmed Kurata's and Motoh's brief descriptions of Stage I and II zoeae by comparing their descriptions with specimens from the Sea of Japan sent to me by Tohshi Kon (see footnote 1). For both stages, zoeae of C bairdi are morphologically identical with zoeae of C. opilio from Hokkaido and the Sea of Japan, except for length of the curved lateral processes on the third abdominal somite. In Stage I and II zoeae of C. opilio from Hokkaido and the Sea of Japan, the curved lateral processes reach the posterior margin of the third abdominal somite, but, in Stage I and II zoeae of C. bairdi, they are mark- edly shorter (Figure 2A, L). Apparently larvae of C. japonicus are known; but, except for a brief comparison of their mor- phology with larvae of C. opilio by Yamauro (1968), I am unaware of their description in the literature. Based on Yamauro's comparison. Stage I and II zoeae of C. japonicus are distinguished from Stage I and II zoeae of C. bairdi by length of the posterior lateral spines on the third, fourth, and fifth abdominal somites. In C japonicus zoeae the posterior lateral spines barely reach the posterior margin of the somite, but in C. bairdi zoeae they extend beyond the margin. The following key is provided for distinguish- ing Stage II zoeae of C. bairdi from Stage II zoeae of C. opilio, C. japonicus, and the genera Hyas and Oregonia. In the key, length of the lateral processes on the third abdominal somite of C. opilio zoeae is based on specimens from the west- ern Pacific Ocean. Stage II zoeae of C. opilio from the eastern Pacific Ocean have not been iden- tified, and it is not known whether they can be distinguished from Stage II zoeae of C. bairdi by length of their lateral processes. Key for Distinguishing Stage II Zoeae C. bairdi la. Dorsal-rostral length 4.0-4.6 mm Hyas, Oregonia lb. Dorsal-rostral length 6.0-6.9 mm 2 2a. Lateral processes on third abdominal somite reach posterior margin of somite C. opilio 2b. Lateral processes on third abdominal somite do not reach posterior margin of somite 3 3a. Posterior lateral spines on abdominal 181 somites 3, 4, and 5 barely reach mar- gin of somite C.japonicus 3b. Posterior lateral spines on abdominal somites 3, 4, and 5 extend beyond margin of somite C. bairdi Literature Cited Garth, J. S. 1958. Brachyura of the Pacific coast of America. Oxyrhyncha. Allan Hancock Pac. Exped. 21, 854 p. HART, J. F. L. 1960, The larval development of British Columbia Brachyura. II. Majidae, subfamily Oregoniinae. Can. J. Zool. 38:539-546. HAYNfES, E. 1973. Descriptions of prezoeae and stage I zoeae of Chionoecetes bairdi and C. opilio (Oxyrhyncha, Oregoniinae). Fish. Bull., U.S. 71:769-775. JEWETT, S. C, AND R. E. HAIGHT. 1977. Description of megalopa of snow crab, Chionoecetes bairdi (Majidae, subfamily Oregoniinae). Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:459-463. KAMITA, T. 1941. Studies on the decapod crustaceans of Chosen. Part I. Crabs. Fish. Soc. Chosen, Keijo, Jpn., 289 p. KURATA.H. 1963. Larvae of Decapoda Crustacea of Hokkaido. 2. Majidae (Pisinae). [In Jpn., Engl, summ.] Bull. Hok- kaido Reg. Fish. Res. Lab. 27:25-31. (Fish. Res. Board Can., Transl. Ser 1124.) MOTOH, H. 1973. Laboratory-reared zoeae and megalopae of Zuwai crab from the Sea of Japan. Bull. Jpn. Soc. Sci. Fish. 39:1223-1230. RATHBUN, M. J. 1924. New species and subspecies of spider crabs. Proc. U.S. Natl. Mus. 64(2504), 5 p. STEPHENSEN.K. 1935. Crustacea Decapoda. The Godhaab Expedition, 1928. Medd. Gr0nl. 80(1), 94 p. TRASKY, L. L., L. B. FLAGG, AND D. C. BURBANK. 1977. Impact of oil on the Kachemak Bay environment. In L. L. Trasky L. B. Flagg, and D. C. Burbank (editors). Environmental studies of Kachemak Bay and lower Cook Inlet, Vol. 1, 123 p. Alaska Dep. Fish Game, Anchorage. YAMAURO, A. 1968. On distinguishing the young stages of tanner crab and red tanner crab. Renraku News 210:2-3. Jpn. Sea Reg. Fish. Res. Lab., Niigata City, Japan. (Transl. Bur Commer Fish., 1970, 5 p. (Natl. Mar. Fish. Serv.) Off. For Fish. [Transl.], Wash., D.C.) EVANHAYNES Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center Auke Bay Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA P.O. Box 155 Auke Bay, AK 99821 FEEDING RATE OF CAPTIVE ADULT FEMALE NORTHERN FUR SEALS, CALLORHINUS URSINUS^ Overexploitation of fishery stocks in the North Pacific and Bering Sea is thought by some to be contributing to a small but perceptible decline in the northern fiir seal population (Gentry et al.^). To manage both fishery and fiir seal resources intelligently it is necessary to know how much a northern fiir seal eats and to identify the factors that affect its food intake. Our data show that feeding rate of captive adult females is variable and influenced by season of the year and body mass of the individual. Methods Ten adult northern fur seals (two males and eight females) were captured on St. Paul Island, Pribilof Islands, Alaska, in mid-October 1977.^ The ages of the females were estimated at 5+ yr, based on the color of the vibrissae, which were complete- ly white (Scheffer 1962). After a short observation period all seals were shipped by air freight to Mystic Marinelife Aquarium in Mystic, Conn. On arrival, the females were tagged with monel metal cattle ear tags^ identical to those used in the National Marine Fisheries Service's Pribilof Fur Seal Program. One tag was placed on each seal's left foreflipper above the fur line. Numbers assigned were XCuOl through XCu08. Once accli- mated, all seals were kept together in a large outdoor exhibit. Husbandry requirements, includ- ing feeding rate, were studied for the next 2 yr. This report deals only with the females. Feeding rate was recorded daily for 356 days of 1978 (5 January through 27 December). Data are summarized in Table 1. The year was divided arbitrarily into three periods, each starting the day after the animals were weighed. Weights were taken 4 January (Period 1 = 5 January through 7 March), 7 March (Period 2 = 8 March through 25 September), and 25 September (Period 3 = 'Contribution No. 16, Sea Research Foundation, Inc. ^Gentry, R. L., J. H. Johnson, and J. Holt. 1977. Behavior and biology, Pribilof Islands. In Marine Mammals Division, Fur seal investigations, 1976, p. 26-39. Northwest Fish. Cent. Processed Rep. ^Permit No. 178, applied for under the Fur Seal Act of 1966 and issued 2 May 1977 by the National Marine Fisheries Service. "NASCO, 901 Janesville Avenue, Fort Atkinson, WI 53538. Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. 182 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. Table l. — Feeding rate and body mass data for eight adult female northern fur seals from the Pribilof Islands, Alaska, 1977-78. Acclimation Period 1 Period 2 Period 3 (9 Oct. -4 Jan.) (5 Jan. -7 Mar.) (8 Mar.-25 Sept.) 26 Sept.-27 Dec.) Feeding Mass Feeding Mass Feeding Mass Feeding Mass Final Tag Mass' rate (% change Mass rate (% change Mass rate (% change Mass rate (% change mass no. (kg) body mass/d) (%/d) (kg) body mass/d) (%/d) (kg) body mass/d) (%/d) (kg) body mass/d) (%/d) 28 Dec. XCuOl 388 7.3 + 0.17 44.6 9.4 -0.062 43.8 5.1 {') {') {') {') 42.8 XCu02 304 8.4 + .57 45.5 12.2 + .31 50.0 4.5 -0.07 42.9 5.6 + 0.07 45.5 XCu03 36.6 5.8 + .08 39.3 11.6 + .25 42.4 5.5 - 026 40.2 6.1 + .037 41.5 XCu04 397 6.6 + .23 47.8 10.4 + .15 50.0 4.3 -.13 37.5 7.4 + .36 49.6 XCu05 31 3 7.1 + 18 36.2 12.5 36.2 6.3 + 031 38.4 5.4 + .01 38.8 XCu06 348 9.2 + .059 36.6 13.1 + .19 38.8 7.1 -.092 37.1 7.0 -.01 36.6 XCu07 362 7.1 + .53 52.7 6.7 -.18 49.6 4.1 -.56 35.7 7.2 + .52 52.2 XCu08 44.2 5.3 + .15 50.0 7.9 -.28 45.5 4.9 + .31 52.7 4.7 + .057 55.4 ' Initial mass recorded within 3 h of capture. ^Nursing a pup — no data collected. 26 September through 27 December). A final weight was recorded on 28 December, making a total of four weighing sessions in 1978. Air and water temperatures for the three periods are summarized in Table 2. Data collected during acclimation (9 October 1977 through 3 January 1978) were omitted from the calculations because the seals either were not feeding consistently, or were consuming abnormally large quantities of food. According to our experience, such behavior is not unusual. Seals were fed individually. The food for each seal was weighed and the amount left over after a feeding was subtracted. All animals were fed to satiation and none ate to obesity. Feedings were at 0900, 1330, and 1530 h daily Food fishes used primarily were Atlantic herring, Clupea h. harengus, and Atlantic mackerel. Scomber scom- brus, purchased frozen and thawed shortly before feeding. The animals were not fed on the morning they were weighed. Weighing sessions started at about 1000 h, after the pool was drained, and were finished shortly before noon. Seals were herded into individual cages and weighed on a hanging scale (±0.4 kg). Little food was present in the intestines at that point. Miller^ showed that digestion in northern fiir seals takes about 8 h. Results Multiple linear regression was performed using water temperature and animal mass as indepen- dent variables, and feeding rate as the dependent variable (Tables 1, 2), for all three periods com- bined. The equation obtained was Table 2 . — Mean monthly values for air and water temperatures during the feeding observations on captive northern fur seals. Temperature (° C) Temperat ure (° C) Period Month Air Water Period Month Air Water 1 Jan. -1.9 9.6 2 Aug. 22.7 19.4 Feb. -2.4 8.3 Sept. 17.6 18.1 Mar. 2.7 9.8 Mean 17.0 15.8 Mean -1.9 8.8 3 Oct. 12.3 15.8 2 Apr. 9.4 11.5 Nov. 7.7 13.1 May 15.7 14.5 Dec. 3.2 11.1 June 20.7 16.8 Mean 8.3 13.8 July 22.5 19.1 F = -0.782 Tu 0.096 M + 25.77 ^Miller, L. K. 1978. Energetics of the northern fur seal in relation to climate and food resources of the Bering Sea. Rep. MMC-75/08, U.S. Mar. Mam. Comm., Wash., D.C., 27 p. Avail- able Natl. Tech. Inf. Serv., Springfield, Va., as PB-275 296. where F is feeding rate (as percentage of body mass per day), Tw is water temperature (degrees Celsius), and M is body mass (kilograms). The coefficient of multiple correlation (r) was 0.927 and the standard error of estimate 1.05. An at- tempt to relate the same data with air tempera- ture resulted in poorer correlation (r = 0.879, Sy,x = 1.34). Feeding rate and initial body mass are strongly related, as is the feeding rate for all seals com- bined when considered seasonally. This is evident from data in Table 1 and the linear regressions of Figure 1. Large seals required a smaller percent- age of body mass per day in all three periods. The steepest slope is in Period 1, in which differences between body and ambient temperature were greatest. Analysis of covariance demonstrated that Periods 1, 2, and 3 cannot be pooled for purposes of regression. Taken separately, regres- sion produced correlation coefficients indicating high significance (P ^ 0.01 for Periods 1 and 2, and P^0.05 for Period 3). Discussion Bigg et al. (1978) and Bigg^ showed that the fluctuation in body mass of adult females in 183 15 r- 10 5 - 10 \ Period 1 (05 Jan 78 -07 Mar 78) - "A<-> \ - \ y=-0.327(x)+24.9 /-=-0875 s(y.x)= 1,2 "A>x \ 1 i 1 o c 5 - 10 30 Period 2 (08 Mar 78 -25 Sep 78) y=-0.18(x)+13.i /■=-0.92 s(y.x)=0.43 I Period 3 (26 Sep 78 -28 Dec 78) y=-0.1ii(x)+1205 r =-0,81 sfy.x) = 0.65 40 50 Body moss (kg I 60 70 Figure l. — Feeding rate versus individual body mass for eight adult female northern fur seals for Periods 1-3. Standard error of estimate isy.x) is indicated by the broken lines. In Period 1, when water temperature averaged 8.8° C, the smaller seals required a greater percentage ration than the larger animals, as shown by the slope of the line in Figure 1 ( - 0.327). In Periods 2 and 3, when water temperatures were similar, the variation in feeding rate versus body mass was less, and the slopes of the lines also were similar, as shown in Figure 1 ( - 0.18 and - 0.144, respectively). The above equation allows the feeding rate of captive adult females to be predicted with reason- able accuracy, given water temperature and body mass. The artifact introduced by captivity was to allow the seals to enter and leave the water at will. Future studies should be made using adult females that are confined to the water and not allowed to haul out for a length of time (and at a water temperature) that simulates the pelagic phase of the life cycle. Acknowledgments Michael A. Bigg, Department of Fisheries and Oceans, Pacific Biological Station, Nanaimo, B.C., Canada, reviewed the manuscript. Figures and tables were prepared by Paul Gaj and Laurelyn Schmidt, Sea Research Foundation, Inc., Mystic Marinelife Aquarium, Mystic, Conn. Literature Cited BIGG, M. A., I. B. MACASKIE, AND G. ELLIS. 1978. Studies on captive fur seals. Progress report no. 2. Can. Fish. Mar Serv. Manuscr. Rep. 1471, 21 p. SCHEFFER, V. B. 1962. Pelage and surface topography of the northern fur seal. N. Am. Fauna 64, 206 p. captivity follows a predictable pattern, implying a precise mechanism for weight control that is seasonally synchronized. Our findings are further confirmation of this. Food intake (and therefore body mass) was greatest from late autumn to late spring. Changes in mass reflected variations in blubber thickness, because all animals were fully mature. Changes in water temperature probably account for the seasonal variation in food consumption shown by our seals, although individual differ- ences in metabolism probably were important. Stephen Spotte Sea Research Foundation, Inc. Mystic Marinelife Aquarium Mystic, CT 06355 Department of Mathematics and Physics Thames Valley State Technical College Norwich, CT 06360 Gary Adams *Bigg, M. A. 1979. Studies on captive fur seals. Progress report no. 3. Submitted to Standing Scientific Comm., 22d Annu. Meet., North Pac. Fur Seal Comm., 35 p. 184 INDUCED SPAWNING OF A TUNA, EUTHYNNUS AFFINIS Investigations into the biology of young tuna have been hampered by the difficulty of capturing and maintaining live larvae or early juveniles from the wild. The production of young in captivity would provide an obvious solution; however, the inherent difficulties of maintaining and working with such powerful, fast-swimming, pelagic fishes under conditions of close confinement have discouraged attempts to artificially stimulate their spawning. The following describes what we believe to be the first induced spawning of any tuna, accomplished with specimens of Euthynnus affinis, one of the smaller sized of the true tunas (taxonomic rela- tions of tunas were recently reviewed by Collette (1978)). These were held captive in tanks at the Kewalo Research Facility of the Southwest Fisheries Center, Honolulu Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. The specimens used in these spawning trials were three females in captivity for 2-4 wk and three males in captivity for about 4 mo. All were captured by hook and line and transported to the laboratory in the baitwells of either a commercial fishing vessel or the NOAA Ship Townsend Cromwell. They were maintained outdoors in cir- cular, 7.3 m in diameter by 1.1 m deep tanks with water flow of about 3.0-3.5 1/s and temperatures ranging from 23.3° to 26.2° C. They were fed thawed surf smelt, Hypomesus pretiosus, and squid Loligo opalescens at a rate of about 15-20% of their body weight per day. Sex and gonadal maturation of each specimen were determined by biopsy, with samples obtained by catheterization through the urogenital aper- ture (Shehadeh et al. 1973). While the fish were physically restrained for the biopsies, each was marked with an identifying numeral or letter with silver nitrate (Thomas 1975). Males in advanced stages of maturation could be recognized by the presence of milt in the catheter, while females in any stage of maturation could be identified from the biopsied ovarian tissue. The diameters of 25 ova of the largest size class present in the catheterized sample were measured with an ocu- lar micrometer and the average diameter calcu- lated as an index of ovarian maturation. Gonadal maturation of captive specimens was monitored by monthly biopsies, starting in March 1979 with 37 specimens maintained since the pre- ceding January and February. After March, newly captured specimens were also biopsied on the day of delivery to the laboratory. The most advanced ovaries in our captive fish between March and August 1979 were in three females delivered to the laboratory on 6 June. Their largest ova averaged 0.54, 0.48, and 0.44 mm on arrival and 0.55, 0.53, and 0.50 mm, respectively, when biopsied again 2 wk later on 19 June. The first two (females A and B, Table 1) were used in the first spawning trial, which started that same day, on 19 June. The third female (female C, Table 1) was biopsied again after an additional 2 wk, and its largest ova had in- creased to an average diameter of 0.56 mm. It was used in the second spawning trial, which started that same day, on 2 July. Males from groups cap- tured earlier in January and February were also biopsied on the starting dates of the spawning Table l. — Spawning responses oiEuthynnus affinis to treatment with salmon pituitaries (SP), human chorionic gonadotropin (HCG), and pregnant mare serum (PMS). Ova sizes represent mean diameters of 25 spawned ova after preservation in 3-5'^ Formalin, 'or the largest size class in fresh biopsied samples. Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Ova (mm) Treatment Ova (mm) Treatment Ova (mm) Specimen Mean SD Mean SD Mean SD Response Trial 1 : Female A 53 Female B 0.55 Male A MaleB Trial 2: FemaJe C 0.56 MaleC 0.03 0.05 0.03 SP 5mg HCG 100 lU SP 10mg HCG 500 lU HCG 100 lU HCG 500 lU SP lOmg HCG 500 lU HCG 1 ,000 lU 054 0.57 0.70 0.04 0.04 0.04 SP 5 mg HCG 100 lU PMS 1,000 lU SP 10 mg HCG 500 lU PMS 2,000 lU HCG 100 lU HCG 500 lU SP 10 mg HCG 1 ,000 lU PMS 2,000 lU HCG 1,000 lU PMS 1 ,000 lU 0.55 0.04 Did not spawn. 0.77 0.02 Spawned ( >35, 000 released spontaneously; 0.98 0.02 <10,000 stripped and fertilized). No hydration of milt. Hydration of milt. 0.78 0.03 Spawned (>185,000 released spontaneously; 1,02 0.03 >40,000 stripped and fertilized). Hydration of milt. 'Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. 185 trials, and specimens yielding milt in the catheter were selected. The selected males and females were transferred to a spawning tank identical in dimensions to the holding tanks but with water depth reduced to 0.61 m. Two females and two males were used in the first trial, and one female and one male in the second. Their sizes ranged from 47.0 to 52.9 cm fork length and 2.25 to 3.04 kg. Hormone treatments administered were mod- ified after those used by Leong (1977) to spawn Pacific mackerel. Scomber japonicus. Combina- tions of triturated, acetone-dried salmon pituitary glands (SP), human chorionic gonadotropin (HCG), and pregnant mare serum gonadotropin (PMS) were injected into the dorsal musculature with tuberculin syringes and 24-gage needles. The hormone preparations were suspended or dis- solved in physiological saline and administered in injection volumes of 0.10-0.50 ml (Table 1). Each treatment consisted of two series of injections 24 h apart, starting at 2 p.m. in the first trial and 6 p.m. in the second. Responses of females were moni- tored by ovarian biopsies taken immediately pre- ceding each series of injections, and spawning was detected by the appearance of the buoyant, pelagic ova in plankton nets (egg strainers) placed in the outflow from the treatment tank. Responses of males were based on subjective evaluation of hy- dration of milt, on the basis of whether milt could be expressed by moderate stripping pressure, and the fluid consistency of the milt obtained. In the first trial, neither female showed any significant increases in sizes of largest ova within 24 h after the first injections (Table 1). However, ova were found in the strainers the next morning at about 8:15, about 19 h after the second injections. Biopsy of both females indicated that ovulation had been induced only in the one treated with higher dosages; similarly, examination of both males indicated that milt could be expressed only from the individual treated with the higher dos- ages. Eggs and milt were stripped from the re- sponsive pair to effect fertilization. Most of the ova from this spawning were not viable and sank when placed in seawater, and of those that remained buoyant none progressed beyond early cleavage stages. This poor viability was probably caused by our failure to detect or respond to this induced ovulation early enough, with a consequent de- terioration of the ovulated eggs within the ovarian lumen (Stevens 1966). In the second trial, biopsy of the female indi- cated that its largest ova had increased in mean diameter from the original 0.56 to 0.70 mm within 24 h after the first injections. Ova were found in the strainer at 5:30 the next morning, 12.5 h fol- lowing the second injections. Milt could be easily expressed from the male at this time, and the pair were stripped to effect fertilization. At incubation temperatures which ranged between 21° and 26° C, the first cleavage divisions were observed about 1 h after fertilization and the first hatching at about 31 h. With limited facilities for maintaining the developing embryos, we were able to sustain only a small fraction of the fertilized eggs ob- tained. About 300 larvae were hatched and they developed and absorbed their yolk sacs over 2 d. It was not our intent or purpose at this stage of these investigations to attempt to feed or rear these lar- vae, and they all died by the end of the third day. Previous attempts to produce young tuna in cap- tivity have been concentrated in Japan, and along two lines of effort. One is the fertilization at sea of ova obtained by stripping freshly captured, running-ripe fish (Yasutake et al. 1973; Harada 1978; Ueyanagi 1978). Since running-ripe females are only infrequently taken in current commercial fishing operations, these efforts have produced only occasional successes. The other approach is to maintain adult-sized specimens in large, netted enclosvu-es in coastal waters with the hope that they will eventually start spavming naturally. (By coincidence, the first known spawning of a species of tuna in such a situation was reported to have occurred with bluefin tuna, Thunnus thynnus, on 20 June 1979 (Sogo 1979) at the same time that our first induced spawning of E. affinis was taking place.) Whether either of these two approaches can be developed into reliable spawning operations for tunas remains to be determined. The two consecu- tive hormone-induced spawnings that we achieved with E. affinis suggest that this technique can be developed into a routine procedure, at least for this species. Work is expected to continue at the Honolulu Laboratory on refinement of effective treatments and to be initiated on rearing of the resultant larvae. Acknowledgments We thank Roderick Leong of the Southwest Fisheries Center La Jolla Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, for providing salmon pituitaries and for his words of encour- agement. 186 Literature Cited COLLETTE, B. B. 1978. II. Adaptations and systematics of the mackerels and tunas. In G. D. Sharp and A. E. Dizon (editors), The physiological ecology of tunas, p. 7-39. Acad. Press, N.Y. HARADA, T. 1978. Recent tuna culture research in Japan. 5th Inter- national Ocean Development Conference, Keidanren Kaikan, Tokyo, September 25-29, 1978. Preprints (I), Ses- sion C-1, p. C1-55-C1-64. LEONG, R. 1977. Maturation and induced spawning of captive Pacific mackerel. Scomber japonicus. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:205- 211. shehadeh, z. h., c.-m. kuo, and K. K. MILISEN. 1973. Validation of an in vivo method for monitoring ovarian development in the grey mullet (Mugil cephalus L.). J. Fish Biol. 5:489-496. SOGO. 1979. Bluefin tuna spawn in captivity — World's first rec- ord of artificial fertilization and hatching of bluefin tuna. [In Jpn.] Sogo, June 27, 1979. (Engl, transl. by T Otsu, 1979, 2 p., Transl. No. 37; available Southwest Fish. Cent., Natl. Mar Fish. Serv., NOAA, Honolulu, HI 96812.) Stevens, r. e. 1966. Hormone-induced spawning of striped bass for res- ervoir stocking. Prog. Fish-Cult. 28:19-28. Thomas, a. e. 1975. Marking channel catfish with silver nitrate. Prog. Fish-Cult. 37:250-252. UEYANAGI, S. 1978. Recent tuna culture research in Japan. 5th Inter- national Ocean Development Conference, Keidanren Kaikan, Tokyo, September 25-29, 1978. Preprints (I), Ses- sion C-1, p. C1-23-C1-30. YASUTAKE, H., G. NISHI, AND K. MORI. 1973. Artificial fertilization and rearing of bigeye tuna iThunnus obesus) on board, with morphological observa- tions on embryonic through to early post-larval stage. [In Jpn., Engl, abstr] Bull. Far Seas Fish. Res. Lab. (Shimizu) 8:71-78. CALVIN M. KAYA Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA Honolulu, Hawaii Present address: Department of Biology Montana State University Bozeman,MT 59717 ANDREW E. DiZON Sharon D. Hendrix Southwest Fisheries Center Honolulu Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA Honolulu, HI 96812 TROPHIC IMPORTANCE OF SOME MARINE GADIDS IN NORTHERN ALASKA AND THEIR BODY-OTOLITH SIZE RELATIONSHIPS Natural marine ecosystems are being subjected to ever increasing human-induced stresses, includ- ing expanding commercial fisheries and activities associated with the exploration and development of offshore petroleum resources. Numerous studies of the food habits and trophic interactions of marine vertebrate consumers have been un- dertaken in Alaska during the last 5 yr in re- sponse to increased demand for multispecies ap- proaches in fishery management plans and the legal requirement for environmental assessments prior to petroleum development. Through these and other studies the importance of three species — walleye pollock, Theragra chalco- gramma, saffron cod, Eleginus gracilis , and Arctic cod, Boreogadus saida — in Arctic and subarctic ecosystems has become increasingly appgirent (Klumov 1937; Andriyashev 1954; Lowry and Frost in press; Pereyra et al.^). These species are widespread and locally abundant, are major sec- ondary consumers, and are important prey of other species (Table 1). Walleye pollock are found throughout the North Pacific and in greatest abundance along the conti- nental shelf break of the Bering Sea. Abundance decreases rapidly north of St. Matthew Island, and they are caught only rarely north of Bering Strait (Pereyra et al. footnote 1). The species supports a commercial fishery of almost 1 million t annually, one of the largest in the world. Walleye pollock form a major portion of the diet of all pinnipeds in the southern Bering Sea, except bearded seals and walruses, and are eaten by at least 4 species of cetaceans, 13 species of seabirds, and 10 species of fishes in that area. Saffron cod occur in the eastern Bering and Chukchi Seas and throughout the western Arctic Ocean (Andriyashev 1954). They are also present, but less abundant, in the Beaufort Sea. Saffron cod are utilized for food by coastal Eskimos. They make up a major portion of the diet of ringed and spotted seals and white whales in the northern Bering and southerr Chukchi Seas. They are also 'Pereyra,WT, J. E.Reeves, and R.G.Bakkala. 1976. De- mersal fish and shellfish resources of the eastern Bering Sea in the baseline year 1975. Processed rep., 619 p. Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard E.. Seattle, WA 98112. fishery BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 1, 1981. 187 o < -a c ca -d o c o CO o o. T3 C CB 13 03 S Ol C < E < ■8 CM eg c\i CO CO CO 0) ■fc « CO ^ 9 ^ I ^ ; Q W ' 3 CO a. en E e ™ C3) O CO s & CO h— cn CO Q- s (11 ca. "S 9. c o o C3 S 01 -^ i2 Q. CO 01 -£ ■o . ^ o O CO CO CO CO 01 .Q.-C . 1 CD CM CN CM CM CO CO CO Q. a. CO CO 3 m •c CJ o o 01 c 0) JO -p ^ 01 01 C/3 CL CC 15 '^ P lo- i 5 ^ y >- o -D € f "^ E^'gEI (0 :» ■C (0 (fl ^ o 0) -9 CO CD ^ CD CO Q. C5 CO i> S - CO to h LL < 01 ci Ol O. U) s (O Ci CO CO « 3 E ~: O CL CO Q-3 C CJ CO UJ CO CO y s.^ 2 ™ o 01 CO t — as a c TO c TO 5 ■^ -■ ■§ CO o o 01 y CO < 5 CD CO CM CM CO in CM cm" CO CM CO CM ^ ^ en in en en CM CM CM CM CO cm" C\J "- ■^ "- "- O O O CD CO CO CO CM CNj CM in r^ h- cm" t- od cm cvj r-T-^^,-T- CMCMt-i- T-" K h-" -r-' E CD CO CM CO CO CO en in in in in CO CM CM CM CM CM o o CO CO CO CO CO CO oio-^tcococM^inininin >- CM CM CM CO CO CM CM CM CM O O" O CD CO" O CM CM CM 1- r- CM I™ CD (^ ■Q := .3 3 10 S a TO Q. O O O 2l a ^ TO ■C CO C?) o 01 Q. CO E 5 01 •- 9 o - 5 •=• _■ 01 CO lO Si li|§ O 3 C 01 TO to Q. & TO ^ "" - - c: o _ S ■^ 01 (J td ? Q o g 6,& II o ■c Ci TO (0 c- 3 01 o CI ,fc o 01 Q. e C5 ■Q 01 ^ (0 _- CO -D > C^ 01 11 01 (0 in x: &? (0 CO X Z 2 is ■e TO CD o I Q. io iS ■p CD CD a C TO ^ -Q 5 iP TO ^ c « a 01 TO « TO o ~J _-cc }=" 3 — 3 C3)-= ■^ CO O) g' 01 10 ^ 9 01 »_ JD CO 01 10 o X CO en TO -C "D CO C g TO TO ^ 01 CO 01 c: CO >=; 01 01 TO 01 ^ TO 01 TO iS re CT) rj 01 C3lE ^ Ol C31 C 01 O) O ■-"i ^ E -I V E o JD 35 o > m oc o ■9 "5, TO 3 = a o &o _- — - o ? E E 01 01 = = 3 5 en t C31 c ^ o i u 01 TO 0> CD CL 01 CC CO c^ CD c S3 co=:" ~ ^ 01 ■D in ^ 3 TO CO in < 5 2 O LL O ' ^ °° P CJ) CC 0) > o c c- LU o w h- M '-i O en , 2 c ° t 01 CO "o c ^ "o ■S E >■ 01 Ol O c 2 3 CD Q X re O ■!= -J CL I CO d 00 , Q. C , (0 TO o ^ ^ "1 Ol -o TO IcS ^- ^ TO "O >• o CD ^ OC 3 S ""^ I If E o in o __ O ^ c o Q. in ^ LL "3 Ol Ol ^ ;^ CM C31 CO . ■^ r^ CO CD CM a> . C Q. sec t j: 3 — CD CD C o I- E O 9- in TO in Q O I— I to C C= -1 TO CD CO Ol "" ID in CO Ol C T- ra ^ CD TO (p ■O c TO if CM re t^ >,oi — ■^ CO -5 >.r- ^ J£ Ol TO o u CI U c ^- Q.-D ., n O o ^ cu co o -£ a. O m u m r Ol Q.CO CO O U. n > TO -I (T) r f^ c Ol TO '— E o -^ B - « O TO §^ ra-o g oi5-g S in < CL ^ ■Kg S -i £ 35 >, o o ^- § 2 ^ <■ .re C d in — 5 E "TO ^ — 1 o in LL BSg ^- fO TO O N -I 3 CO in r^ t- 01 c ^ - <" CD S >■ O CO CO -g "S 5 5> > LL § OQ -S re OT-cMco^incoh- "o re "' >,-c • *- in . _ ■c re c c — c c re o 3 o re in re w< t: £ re O) CI ■n (5 r n TO 3 III £: n ^ y — to t: — o a. >■(? 01 LL O 9 ^ \a o re £ c 0.5 ■2'S o c re < TO (TJ ■° I) ^, 0W^ £ 01 "" Eire °- in ^ c « Q.CD in CM in C31 3 ^ CT" TO o "U — S CD c O c o 6 CC TO c g'o in ^ ? o fc; c — CJl CO 2 TO ° -^ -a B ^ "? c c go " 8 is m ™ CO is -^ C C 10 TO cn< « o -E 2 f IE °* 2 0-0 £ - 3 £ •^ "R O - o o in CO C — CO TO CO 9- CO Q in s;;;oi s , CJ) ?^ TO ^ - ? g " " Sc CO ^ LL TO |_ OJ o c too £ E 5 dJ Q) C CL CD LU C O Q. CO -J "5 £ c O ul o E to to >. QJ 0) ^ 00 ^ I/} *- r^ to u5 O O) ;^ n3 XC§ CQ o E E ■-CMco-'tincDr^cocn o q: _i CO TO CC O - o E c Q. CO re O) CM I 188 prey of other cetaceans and numerous birds and fishes. Arctic cod are circumpolar in Arctic waters ex- tending south to at least lat. 60° N on the Alaska coast, typically in association with sea ice (An- driyashev 1954). They are a species of key trophic importance upon which many other far northern marine consumers depend entirely for a major portion of their yearly nutritional requirements. They are eaten by at least 12 species of marine mammals, 20 species of birds, and 5 species of fishes. Arctic cod are especially important because in the areas and at the times when they are abun- dant they are the only forage fishes present. Investigations of food habits of marine animals almost invariably involve analysis of stomach con- tents. Morrow (1979) published preliminary keys to otoliths of 16 families of fishes found in Alaskan waters including the Gadidae, whereby fishes eaten by predators can be identified from otoliths even after soft parts and bones have been digested. In most instances the size of the fish or meal can also be determined from otoliths through back cal- culation offish length and/or weight from various measurements of otolith size (Morrow 1951; Tem- pleman and Squires 1956; Southward 1962; Gjosaeter 1973). In this paper we present relationships of otolith length to fish length and weight for pollock, saf- fron cod, and Arctic cod of the Bering, Chukchi, and Beaufort Seas. Methods Samples of fishes were obtained by otter trawl- ing in the Bering, Chukchi, and Beaufort Seas (Table 2). Soon after capture all fishes were iden- tified, weighed to the nearest 0.1 g, and fork length measured to the nearest millimeter. The sagittal otoliths were removed and length and width mea- sured to the nearest 0.1 mm with vernier calipers. When otolith lengths and widths were plotted against fish lengths as scatter diagrams, the rela- tionship between otolith length and fish length was found to be less variable than that of otolith width and fish length. For this reason otolith length was taken as the criterion for otolith size and used in subsequent calculations. Casteel (1976) discussed in detail the reasons for using length as the best measure of otolith size. We chose a double regression method for relat- ing otolith size to fish size (Fitch and Brownell 1968; Casteel 1976). For each species the relation- ships of otolith length to fish length and fish length to fish weight were calculated. In cases where two equations were required to fit a single relation- ship, the inflection point was determined by itera- tion. The specified inflection point was varied by increments of 0.1 and the pair of equations which minimized the combined deviation was selected. Results and Discussion Regressions offish fork length on otolith length differed markedly among the three species. Those of walleye pollock and saffron cod formed two dis- tinct straight-line sections each, with inflection points at otolith lengths of 10 mm in walleye pol- lock (fish length 22 cm) and 8.5 mm in saffron cod (fish length 15 cm) (Figures 1, 2). The regression for Arctic cod was rectilinear over the range of samples (Figure 3). Several sources of error are possible when es- timating the size of a fish from its otoliths, among which are normal variability in the ratio of fish length to otolith length and differences in lengths of left and right otoliths of the same fish. The calculated regression coefficients show that such variability is quite small. Deviation between ac- tual measured and calculated fish lengths was usually <5%. Since food habits studies deal with Table 2. — Sources of Alaskan marine gadids measured to determine otolith length-fish size relationships. T = Theragra chalcogramma; E = Eleginus gracilis; B = Boreogadus saida. Vessel and cruise no. Date Area Depth range (m) Trawls (no.) Species NOAA' Ship Surveyor (RP-4-SU-76AI&II) NOAA Ship Discoverer (RP-4-DI-76BIII) USCGC2 Glacier (AWS76) NOAA Ship Miller Freeman (RD-4-MF-76BII NOAA Ship Surveyor (RD-4-SU-77AII, III) NOAA Ship Discoverer {RD-4-DI-77AVI) NOAA Ship Surveyor (RD-4-SU-77BII) USCGC Glacier (AWS77III) ADF&G3 skiff (Shishmaref 78) NOAA Ship Surveyor (RP-4-SU-78AV VI) Mar-Apr, 1976 Bering 79-173 39 T Aug, 1976 Bering/Chukchi 18-55 18 B, E Aug. 1976 Beaufort 40-123 2 B Oct 1976 Bering 15-55 75 B,E Mar-Apr. 1977 Bering 28-150 45 TE May- June 1977 Bering 30-150 36 B.T June- July 1977 Bering/ Chukchi 13-57 17 B, E Aug.-Sept 1977 Chukchi/Beaufort 31-400 33 B Mar, 1978 Chukchi 5-10 5 E May- June 1978 Bering 17-210 78 TE 'National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration. ^United States Coast Guard Cutter, ^Alaska Department of Fish and Game. 189 g m 7 00 Oto liths > 10 . mm "'/ IS Y = 3. 175X-9. 770 / C\J N = 98 /" CO E m o R = 0.968 .;:•/■• 12 _i • "/• / ** • s -_^?- CX> _yZ Otoliths 1 10.0 mm c\i / /' Y = 2.246X-0.510 N = 158 R = 0.981 CO / s 1 1 — — 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 0^1 iih Length - mm Figure l. — Scatter diagram and regression lines and equations of otolith length against fish fork length for Theragra chalcogramma . mixed collections of otoliths, the cumulative im- portance of these differences should be minimal. The relationships between fish lengths and weights of the three species were best fit by expo- nential equations of the form: weight = a (length)" (Table 3). These relationships may vary somewhat with time of year, geographic location, sex, repro- ductive status, or fullness of stomach. Variation is probably most pronounced in sexually mature in- dividuals with mature reproductive products, a condition which persists for only a few months of the year. Since small (juvenile) fishes are eaten by most marine mammals (Frost and Lowry 1980), birds (Hunt et al. in press), and other fishes IS m f>CD Otoliths > 8. 5 mm Y = 2.323X-4.839 N = 110 R = 0. 963 Otoliths 5. 8. 5 mm Y = 1.740X-0.090 N = 36 R = 0.932 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 Otolith Length - i 12.0 14.0 16.0 Figure 2. — Scatter diagram and regression lines and equations of otolith length against fish fork length (or Eleginus gracilis. (Frost and Lowry unpubl. data), this is probably a small source of error. Significant differences in weight-at-length by sex and geographic area were found for Arctic and saffron cods by Wolotira et al.^ but they justified use of a single regression equa- tion since the differences were small (3-7%). Simi- lar differences have been noted for walleye pollock (BakkalaandSmith^). Otoliths are valuable indicators of the diet of piscivorous marine consumers. Published keys such as Morrow (1979) allow determination of the species and numbers of fishes represented by otoliths in stomachs, intestines, or scats. By using the relationships between otolith size and body Table 3. — Length-weight relationships observed for walleye pollock, saffron cod, smd Arctic cod in the Bering, Chukchi, and Beaufort Seas (weight = = a( length)" ). Number Species sampled Range in fork length (cm) a b Regression coefficient (r) Walleye pollock 109 Saffron cod 1 04 Arctic cod 118 6-57 6-29 7-21 0.0077 .0050 .0018 2.906 3.095 3.500 0.998 .991 .987 ^Wolotira, R. J., Jr. 1977. Demersal fish and shellfish re- sources of Norton Sound, the southeastern Chukchi Sea and adjacent waters in the baseline year 1976. Processed rep., 292 p. Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard E., Seattle, WA 98112. ^Bakkala, R. G., and G. B. Smith. 1978. Demersal fish re- sources of the eastern Bering Sea: Spring 1976. Processed rep., 233 p. Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard E., Seattle, WA 98112. 190 s Ri • CB Y = 2. 198X+1.588 •• (V N = 202 ••/ R = 0.981 ""7y s • / • • • • s • / 8 <= '/"' ' 2 1 - Ll- / • • a / v*' s '•'[/•'•'• ' oa •iril" s m r' 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 Otolith L«ngth - mm Figure 3. — Scatter diagram and regression lines and equations of otolith length against fish fork length for Boreogadus saida. size it is possible to obtain additional information such as sizes and quantities of fishes eaten by consumers (Frost and Lowry 1980). Acknowledgments Many people assisted us in the collection of samples, especially Larry M. Shults who spent many long hours sorting through trawls and measuring fish with us, and the officers and crew of the NOAA Ship Surveyor who gave unstint- ingly of their time and energy to make our project a success. Lawrence R. Miller provided invaluable assistance in the computer analysis of our data. We thank J. E. Morrow and anonymous reviewers for their careful review of the manuscript. We are especially indebted to John Fitch for his many helpful suggestions and the moral support he lent throughout preparation of this manuscript. Fi- nancial support was provided by the U.S. Bureau of Land Management Outer Continental Shelf Environmental Assessment Program and Federal Aid in Wildlife Restoration Project W-17-9. Literature Cited ANDRIYASHEV, A. P 1954. Ryby sevemykh morei SSSR (Fishes of the northern seas of the USSR). Izd. Akad. Nauk SSSR, Keys to the fauna of the USSR 53. (Translated from Russ. by Isr. Program Sci. Transl., 1964, 617 p.; available Natl. Tech. Inf Serv., Springfield, Va., as OTS 63-11160.) BERGMAN, R. D., AND D. V DERKSEN. 1977. Observations on arctic and red-throated loons at Storkersen Point, Alaska. Arctic 30:41-51. CASTEEL, R. W 1976. Fish remains in archaeology and paleo- environmental studies. Acad. Press, Lond., 180 p. DIVOKY, G. J. 1976. The pelagic feeding habits of Ivory and Ross' Gulls. Condor 78:85-90. In press. Birds and ice relations. In D. W Hood (editor). The Eastern Bering Sea Shelf: Oceanography and re- sources, Sect. 13. Fedoseev, G. a., and Yu. a. BUKHTIYAROV. 1972. Pitanie tulenei okotskogo more (The diet of seals of the Okhotsk Sea). [Abstr.] In V. A. Arsen'ev, V. Bel'kovich, V A. Zemskii, B. A. Zenkovich, V E. Sokolov, and K. K. Chapskii (editors). Theses of Works Fifth All- Union Conference on Studies of Marine Mammals, Makhachkala, USSR, Part 1, p. 110-112. FISCUS, C. H., AND G. A. BAINES. 1966. Food and feeding behavior of Steller and California sea hons. J. Mammal. 47:195-200. FiSCUS, C. H., G. A. baines, and F WDLKE. 1964. Pelagic fur seal investigations Alaska Waters, 1962. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Spec. Sci. Rep. Fish. 475, 59 p. FITCH, J. E., AND R. L. BROWNELL, JR. 1968. Fish otoliths in cetacean stomachs and their impor- tance in interpreting feeding habits. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 25:2561-2574. Frost, K. J., and L. F Lowry. 1980. Feeding of ribbon seals (Phoca fasciata) in the Bering Sea in spring. Can. J. Zool. 58:1601-1607. In press. Foods and trophic relationships of cetaceans in the Bering Sea. In D. W. Hood (editor). The Eastern Be- ring Sea Shelf Oceanography and resources, Sect. 10. GJ0SAETER,J. 1973. Preliminary results of Norwegian polar cod investi- gations 1970-1972. Int. Counc. Explor. Sea Rep., 23 p. HUNT, G. L., JR., B. BURGESON, AND G. SANGER. In press. Feeding ecology of seabirds of the eastern Bering Sea. In D. W Hood (editor). The Eastern Bering Sea Shelf Oceanography and resources. Sect. 11. johnson, m. l., c. h. fiscus, b. t ostenson, and m. l. Barbour. 1966. Marine mammals. In N. J. Wilimovsky and J. N. Wolfe (editors). Environment of the Cape Thompson re- gion, Alaska, p. 897-924. U.S. At. Energy Comm., Wash.,D.C. kenyon, K. w 1962. Notes on the phocid seals at Little Diomede Island, Alaska. J. Wildl. Manage. 26:380-387. KLUMOV, S. K. 1937. Saika (Boreogadus saida (Lepech.)) i ee znachenie dlja nekotorik zhiznennik protzesov arktiki (Morue polaire (Boreogadus saida) et son importance pour cer- 191 tains proces vitaux de I'Arctique.) [In Russ., Fr. ab- str.] Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR No. 1, p. 175-181. LOWRY, L. F, AND K. J. FROST. In press. Feeding and trophic relationships of phocid seals and walruses in the eastern Bering Sea. In D. W. Hood (editor), The Eastern Bering Sea Shelf: Oceanography and resources, Sect. 10. MANSFIELD, A. W, T. G. SMITH, AND B. BECK. 1975. The narwhal, Monodon monoceros, in eastern Cana- dian waters. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 32:1041-1046. McLaren, I. A. 1958. The biology of the ringed seal iPhoca hispida Schreber) in the eastern Canadian arctic. Fish. Res. Board Can., Bull. 118, 97 p. MORROW, J. E., JR. 1951. Studies on the marine resources of southern New England. VIII. The biology of the longhorn sculpin, Myoxocephalus octodecimspinosus Mitchill, with a discus- sion of the southern New England "trash" fishery. Bull. Bingham Oceanogr. Collect., Yale Univ. 13(2), 89 p. 1979. Preliminary keys to otoliths of some adult fishes of the Gulf of Alaska, Bering Sea, and Beaufort Sea. U.S. Dep. Commer, NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS CIRC-420, 32 p. NEMOTO, T 1970. Feeding pattern ofbaleen whales in the ocean. In J. H. Steele (editor). Marine food chains, p. 241-252. Univ. Calif. Press, Berkeley. OGI, H., AND T. TSUJITA. 1973. Preliminary examination of stomach contents of murres (t/ria spp.) from the eastern Bering Sea and Bris- tol Bay June-August, 1970 and 1971. Jpn. J. Ecol. 23:201-209. PITCHER, K.W. 1980. Food of the harbor seal, Phoca vitulina richardsi, in the Gulf of Alaska. Fish. Bull., U.S. 78:544-549. SOUTHWARD, G. M. 1962. Photographing halibut otoliths for measuring growth zones. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 19:335-338. SWARTZ, L. G. 1966. Sea-cliff birds, /n N. J. Wilimovsky and J. N. Wolfe (editors), Environment of the Cape Thompson region, Alaska, p. 611-678. U.S. At. Energy Comm., Wash., D.C. TEMPLEMAN, W, and H. J. SQUIRES. 1956. Relationship of otolith lengths and weights in the haddock, Melanogrammus aeglefinus (L.) to the rate of growth of the fish. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 13:467-487. TOMILIN, A. G. 1957. Kitoobraznye (Cetacea). In V G. Heptner (editor), Zveri vostochnoi Evropy i sevemoi Azii (Mammals of the USSR and adjacent countries), Vol. IX. (Translated by Isr. Program Sci. TransL, 1967, 717 p.; available Natl. Tech. Inf Serv., Springfield, Va., as TT-65-50086.) TUCK, L. M. 1960. The murres; their distribution, populations and biol- ogy; a study of the genus Uria. Can. Wildl. Serv. Rep., Ser 1, 260 p. VIBE, C. 1950. The marine mammals and the marine fauna in the Thule district (northwest Greenland) with observations on ice conditions in 1939-41. Medd. Gr0nl. 150(6), 115 p. Watson, G. e., and G. J. Divoky. 1972. Pelagic bird and mammal observations in the east- ern Chukchi Sea, early fall 1970. U.S. Coast Guard Oceanogr. Rep. 50:111-172. WILKE, F, AND K. W. KENYON. 1952. Notes on the food of the fur seal, sea-lion and harbor porpoise. J. Wildl. Manage. 16:396-397. KATHRYN J. FROST LLOYD F LOWRY Alaska Department of Fish and Game 1300 College Road Fairbanks, AK 99701 CAROLINIAN RECORDS FOR AMERICAN LOBSTER, HOMARUS AMERICANUS, AND TROPICAL SWIMMING CRAB, CALLINECTES BOCOURTI. POSTULATED MEANS OF DISPERSAL Recent reports of distributional extension for decapod crustaceans occurring along the east coast of the United States include two poor- ly substantiated records of American lobster, Homarus americanus H. Milne Edwards, and none of the tropical swimming crab, Callinectes bocourti A. Milne Edwards, from the Carolinas south of Cape Hatteras, N.C. (Williams 1965, 1974 [Carolinas]; Cerame-Vivas and Gray 1966 [Cape Hatteras]; Williams et al. 1968 [North Carolina]; Musick and McEachren 1972 [North Carolina- Virginia]; Milstein et al. 1977 [New Jersey]; Bo wen et al. 1979 [Middle Atlantic area]; Herbst, Weston, and Lorman 1979 [Cape Hatteras]; Herbst, Williams, and Boothe 1979 [Capes Hatteras and Lookout]; Wenner and Boesch 1979 [Norfolk Canyon area]; Perschbacher and Schwartz 1979 [North Carolina]). Occurrences of both species in the Carolinas south of Cape Hatteras are documented here along with discus- sion of their postulated means of dispersal. Specimens are deposited in the U.S. National Museum of Natural History (USNM), or are living in aquaria at the North Carolina Marine Re- sources Center, Bogue Banks (NCMRC), and the Hampton Mariners Museum, Beaufort (HMM). Occurrence of Species Homarus americanus. — Distribution of the American lobster has been given as, "East coast of America from the Strait of Belle Isle, Newfound- land (Canada) to Cape Hatteras, North Carolina (U.S.A.)," at depths of 0-480 m, usually 4-50 m (Holthuis 1974). Reported occurrences of this spe- cies south of Cape Hatteras are: one caught in a 192 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. crab pot near Cedar Island, Carteret County, N.C., in December 1958 (Williams 1965), and one doubt- ful occurrence near Beaufort, N.C. (Hay and Shore 1918). New substantiated records are given in Table 1. Callinectes bocourti. — The distribution of C. bocourti has been given as, "Jamaica and British Honduras to Estado de Santa Catarina, Brazil," with "extraterritorial occurrences in southern Florida and Mississippi..." (Williams 1974). Gore and Grizzle (1974) confirmed Florida occurrences with a note on a mature male from the Indian River, Vero Beach, Fla., slightly larger than our specimens (Table 1). At the time our female was caught, it had a dorsal coloration much as that pictured for the female in color photo 5 by Taissoun (1972), i.e., carapace very dark olive green, but chelipeds moderate "brick" red, much as the male described by Gore and Grizzle (1974), and underparts white. By December, the dorsal greenish coloration of the carapace had faded somewhat, yielding an underlying reddish tone somewhat resembling the color of the male in color photo 5 by Taissoun (1972). Discussion What are the explanations for these marginal occurrences? Available evidence comes from known life histories (rates of development and growth, and movements deduced from seasonal and areal sampling), current regimes of waters in which the animals may have lived, and indication of migrations from tagged individuals that have been recaptured. Lobsters. — There are no known breeding popu- lations of American lobsters south of Cape Hatteras which is generally regarded as the southernmost extent of the cool temperate Vir- ginian Province (Wells 1961; Cerame-Vivas and Gray 1966). Scott (1973), in a general review of lobster life history, pointed out that: 2 yr elapse between mating and hatching of eggs; hatched larvae drift from 2 wk to 2 mo before becoming permanent bottom dwellers; lobsters can be reared experimentally in waters of 22.2° C (72° F) to 0.37 kg (1 lb) weight in 2 yr, but require bVz yr to reach this size in waters around Martha's Vine- yard, Mass., and 8 yr to reach it in Canada. Movements of tagged lobsters in the region of southern New England analyzed by Uzmann et al. (1977) showed that although courses from point of release to point of recapture cannot be interpreted as straight lines, "...maximum movement of any recapture was 186 nautical miles (345 km) in 71 days (2.6 miles/day)," and other tracks in excess of 100 mi (185 km) in from 29 to 86 days were recorded. Shorter "...apparently directed tracks of 50-87 miles (93-161 km)..." were traversed "...within 22-41 days," the calculated ground speeds of all these ranging from 1 to 5.5 mi (1.8-10.2 km)/day, indicating "...that directional movements in excess of 1 mile (1.8 km) per day are not uncommon " Moreover, these authors showed that offshore lobsters tend to aggregate along the outer edge and slope of the continental shelf during January-April, but become widely dispersed by migration or random movement in the shoaler, warmer water off southern New England during May through December. The approximate distance by water from Cape Table L — Records of Homarus americanus and Callinectes bocourti from the Carolinas south of Cape Hatteras. Measure- ments (millimeters): CL = carapace length in midline, including rostrum of Homarus; TL = total length in midline; CW = carapace width including lateral spines, Callinectes. Species Sex Measurements Collection Data Depository North Carolina H. americanus 6 120 CL 257 TL Jarratt Bay, Core Sound, 25 Oct. 1978, crab pot, R. R. Seely S 100 CL 230 TL Bogue Sound ofl Salterpath, 12 Nov, 1978, crab pot, R. O'Neal NCMRC living 9' 95 CL Nelson Bay, Core Sound, 21 Nov. 1978. crab pot, R. R. Seely USNM 172262 5== 95 CL Near Davis. Core Sound. 29 Mar. 1979, crab pot, P. Apperson USNM 173231 53 110CL 247 TL Off Atlantic, Core Sound, 13 Nov 1979, crab pot. L. Hill. Jr. NCMRC living 9* 98 CL 222 TL Drum Inlet, Core Banks. 28 Nov 1979, D. Cavett HMM living 6^ 254 TL 0.8 mi off Rich Inlet, 15 May 1978, trawl, L. Holden on MV Capt. Jason USNM photos C. bocourti 9 63 CL 130 CW Sound behind Carolina Beach, mid-Oct. 1977, crab pot, by fisherman USNM 170863 South Carolina 6 67 CL 128CW Wando R., Charleston, 4 Oct. 1977 crab pot, G, Steele, P. Eldridge, USNM V. A. Burrell, Jr. Rostrum tip broken, length approximate; abdomen damaged. ^Maintained in aquarium in NCMRC until 4-5 October 1979 when killed at night by tank mate; abdomen damaged. ^Carapace encrusted with two species of barnacles, singly and in patches. Largest of these removed and measured at greatest diameter 24 December 1979; Chelonibia patula (Ranzani), 7.6 x 9.0; Balanus venustus Darwin, 6.4 x 6.8. "Few small B. venustus on carapace. ^Measurement given to us. 193 Hatteras to Rich Inlet, around Cape Lookout, is 130 nmi (240 km). A narrow, southerly longshore current of Virginian water continues past Cape Hatteras (Bumpus 1973), reaching well beyond Cape Lookout in some winters (Wells 1961), which conceivably could aid southward movement of lobsters. The current contributes to what Watling (1979) and others have considered as part of a shallow nearshore and estuarine "transhatteran" zone. While the lobster larval phase might be dispersed southward from breeding populations living in cooler water by this means, survivors of such movement must be rare and would have to exist for at least two seasons in warm temperate Carolinian waters that are heavily trawled for penaeid shrimps in order to attain the sizes recorded in Table 1 (from growth rates calculated by Hughes and Mathiessen 1962, and accelerated growth rates indicated by Scott 1973). The dis- persed phase of older lobsters (Uzmann et al. 1977), however, might utilize this nearshore southerly drift, and migrate southward in one season when they had reached essentially the size at which they were caught. Crabs. — The northernmost occurrences of trop- ical crabs such as C. bocourti, C. danae Smith, and C. marginatus A. Milne Edwards in the western Atlantic have been attributed to drift of larvae entrained in currents associated with the Gulf Stream, or to drift of postlarval crabs (juveniles or subadults) with debris, or transport on boats (Williams 1974). Zoeae spawned in southern Flor- ida, or perhaps Cuban waters, conceivably could be swept northward in favorable warm seasons to be introduced to shores of the Carolinian Province (Williams 1965). Later growth stages of crabs might be transported with the aid of swimming or in association with flotsam. Evidence of drift from the tropics deposited along the Carolina shores is provided by strandings of 22 species of sea-beans (Mucuna spp.), red mangrove (Rhizophora mangle Linnaeus) seedlings, and mango fruits (Mangifera indica Linnaeus) (Gunn and Dennis 1976), palm trunks and coconuts, bamboo, Portuguese man-of-war (Physalia), gulf- weed iSargassum), etc. observed along Bogue Banks, Core Banks, and Cape Lookout, especially following southerly storms. Perschbacher and Schwartz (1979) reported C. danae, C. marginatus, and C. ornatus in the Intracoastal Waterway south of Carolina Beach Inlet, New Hanover County, in mid-September 1977, and in the nearby Cape Fear River in mid- October 1977; C ornatus was already known from the Carolinas and C. marginatus recorded once near Beaufort (Williams 1974). Milstein et al. (1977) reported another tropical species, Cronius ruber Lamarck, collected off Little Egg Inlet, N.J., on 27 September 1974 (size unrecorded), from an engine block. Callinectes specimens of the sizes reported here and by Perschbacher and Schwartz (1979) are mature (Williams 1974). The growth rates of C. bocourti, C. marginatus , C. danae, and C. ornatus are unknown, but if they are similar to that of C. sapidus these crabs were at the end of their second summer of life when caught. Their presence in the Carolinas at this size in late summer-early fall would have to result from: 1) transport of zoeae or megalopae into Carolinian waters during the previous summer or fall, and overwintering as juveniles to mature during the second summer of residence; 2) transport to Carolinian waters as juveniles in spring to mature during their second summer; or 3) transport to the Carolinas as subadults or adults sometime during the summer preceding capture. Presence of four tropical spe- cies together, two in considerable numbers, far beyond their normal range (Perschbacher and Schwartz 1979), suggests something other than casual transport, perhaps an unusually mild win- ter preceding the season of capture, a major eddy(ies) in the Gulf Stream, or major southern storm(s). Callinectes sapidus requires temperatures >20° C for hatching, development, and survival of larvae (Costlow and Bookhout 1959; Costlow 1965, 1967). During larval development, the zoeal stages of C. sapidus are found at sea seasonally (see Williams 1974 for review), but megalopae return to estuaries for development into adults. Estuarine water temperatures in the Beaufort area commonly fall below 10° C in v/inter (Williams et al. 1967); in South Carolina such temperatures are normally higher, 9.4° C and above in 1973-74 (Mathews and Shealy 1978), for example. The winter of 1976-77 was abnormally cold in the eastern United States, the subnormal trend continuing into summer at sea (Ingham 1979). January water temperatures as low as 2° C were recorded in the bight of Cape Lookout (R. S. FoxM. 'R. S. Fox, Department of Biology, Lander College, Green- wood, SC 29646, pars, commun. May 1979. 194 Presumably the above tropical species have development similar to that of C. sapidus. If they could survive winter temperatures such as those given above, their normal ranges would extend to Cape Hatteras; therefore, overwintering as juveniles in Carolinian waters during 1967-77 seems unlikely. Spin-off eddies along the western boundary of the Gulf Stream are regular features (Lee 1975). These cyclonic current reversals are not wind or Figure l. — Gulf Stream off eastern United States between Florida and Cape Cod; isopleths represent maximum thermal gradients at edges of spin-off eddies near shore and Gulf Stream meanders seaward as viewed by National Environmental Service Satellite and analyzed by Miami Satellite Field Services Station for weekly loop periods. Example plots: A , 26 April-2 May 1977; B , 10-16 May 1977. 195 tide induced. Figure 1 shows reproductions of Gulf Stream surface features taken from National Environmental Satellite Service charts analyzed by the Miami Satellite Services Station for two weekly periods in April and May 1977. The warm season is judged to be roughly the time during which surviving juvenile or adult crabs might be carried into the Carolinian Province by such eddies, hence accounting for the tropical Callinectes spp. collected in 1977. During late April to mid- June of this period, prominent spin- off eddies were developed along the coast (least evident at the surface when summer gradients are minimal). There is nothing to suggest that spin- offs during summer 1977 were unusual, but they appear to have been more prominent than such features indicated by surface isotherms in 1976 (Deaver 1979). These currents augment inshore and southerly drift indicated by drift-bottle returns in shelf waters along the Carolinas in May-June (indeterminate in July), August and September (Bumpus 1973; Barans and Roumillat 1978), and seabed drifter returns during the same period (Bumpus 1973). A mechanism to aid shore- ward movement of tropical crabs seems to be present. There is no record of unusual southerly storms during spring-summer of 1977 (Anonymous 1977a, b). Are juvenile or adult Callinectes spp. ever found at sea? Admittedly, there is little evidence at hand. Most records of distribution for members of the genus are nearshore or estuarine, but Franks et al. (1972) recorded both C. sapidus and C. similis in trawl samples taken at depths of 9-90 m off Mississippi and on 29 May 1968 ob- served hundreds of nocturnally swimming small C. similis (40 mm carapace width) at the surface in 9 m water in an apparent inshore migration. Callinectes sapidus has been observed to move 90 mi (144.8 km) in 10 d in Chesapeake Bay (R. E. Miller^). Gunter (1950) reported mature female C. danae {— similis) at the surface several miles from the Texas shore in the Gulf of Mexico. All species of Callinectes have broad salinity toler- ances. Although Norse (1978) regarded C hocourti as occurring mainly in low salinities, he ordered C danae, C. marginatus, and C. ornatus at the high end of the salinity tolerance scale for the genus, indicating ability to exist in full seawater. Data on geographic ranges of species result from the amount of field work expended in finding them, coupled with study and identification. The marine species list for the Carolinas has expanded greatly in this century with the growth of labora- tories in the area. So-called rare occurrences may result from simple lack of collecting, but in this case we feel that rarity is genuine because of the intense sampling effort expended in the area during the time considered. The South Carolina Marine Resources Center maintained an inten- sive estuarine benthic survey along the state's coast for 2 yr, 1973-74 (Bishop and Shealy 1977; Mathews and Shealy 1978); F. J. Schwartz^ main- tained an intensive gill net and trawl survey of the lower Cape Fear River, N.C., and adjacent waters in all seasons of the year from 1973 to 1978, consisting of 10,646 units of effort (6,828 20-min river trawls, 3,818 24-h river gill net sets, 1,531 30-min ocean trawls). The above crab records, with one exception, come from the latter effort or from personnel associated with the former, and are the only such occurrences recorded during this period. Acknowledgments Some records of capture were obtained from J. Tyler, North Carolina Department of Natural Resources and Community Development, Divi- sion of Marine Fisheries, and C. A. Johnson III and T. Handsel, North Carolina Marine Resources Center, Bogue Banks; other collectors are men- tioned in Table 1. The South Carolina record was communicated by Elizabeth L. Wenner, South Carolina Marine Resources Research Institute, Charleston. We thank Stephen R. Baig, NCAA National Environmental Satellite Service, Miami Satellite Field Service Station, for charted Gulf Stream data and other information, and Andrew J. Kemmerer, Atlantic Environmental Group, NMFS, NOAA, for other environmental informa- tion. T E. Bowman, B. B. Collette, M. C. Ingham, and N. A. Smith, as well as anonymous readers, critically reviewed the manuscript, and Maria Dieguez prepared the figure. J. J. Kohlmeyer, University of North Carolina Institute of Marine Sciences gave the reference to tropical drift. ^R. E. Miller, Horn Point Environmental Laboratories, Uni- versity of Maryland, Cambridge, MD 21613, pers. commun. October 1979. ^F. J. Schwartz, University of North Carolina Institute of Marine Sciences, Morehead City, NO 28557, pers. commun. August 1979. 196 Literature Cited ANONYMOUS. 1977a. Climatological data North Carolina. 82(1-12), var. pag. NOAA Environ. Data Serv., Asheville, N.C. 1977b. Climatological data South Carolina. 80(1-12), var. pag. NOAA Environ. Data Serv., Asheville, N.C. BAHANS, C. A., AND W. A. ROUNQLLAT. 1978. Surface water drift south of Cape Lookout, North Carolina. In J. R. Gioulet, Jr. and E. D. Haynes (editors), Ocean variability: Effects on U.S. marine fishery re- sources - 1975, p. 299-308. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS Circ. 416. BISHOP, J. M., AND M. H. SHEALY, JR. 1977. Biological observations on commercial penaeid shrimps caught by bottom trawl in South Carolina estuaries - February 1973-January 1975. S.C. Mar. Resour Cent. Tech. Rep. 25, 97 p. BowEN, M. A., R O. Smyth, D. F. Boesch, and J. van MONTFRANS. 1979. Comparative biogeography of benthic macrocrus- taceans of the Middle Atlantic (U.S.A.) continental shelf. Bull. Biol. Soc. Wash. 3:214-255. BUMPUS, D. F 1973. A description of the circulation on the continental shelf off the east coast of the United States. Progr. Oceanogr. 6:111-157. CERAME-VIVAS, M. J., AND I. E. GRAY. 1966. The distributional pattern of benthic invertebrates of the continental shelf off North Carolina. Ecology 47:260-270. COSTLOW, J. D., JR. 1965. Variability in larval stages of the blue crab, Cal- linectes sapidus. Biol. Bull. (Woods Hole) 128:58-66. 1967. The effect of salinity and temperature on survival and metamorphosis of megalops of the blue crab Cal- linectes sapidus. Helgol. v^dss. Meeresunters. 15:84-97. COSTLOW, J. D., JR., AND C. G. BOOKHOUT. 1959. The larval development of Callinectes sapidus Rath- bun reared in the laboratory. Biol. Bull. (Woods Hole) 116:373-396. DEAVER, J. W III. 1979. Sea surface temperature distribution fi-om Cape Cod, Massachusetts, to Miami, Florida - 1976. In J. R. Goulet, Jr and E. D. Haynes (editors). Ocean variability in the U.S. Fishery Conservation Zone, 1976, p. 209-229. U.S. Dep. Commer, NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS Circ. 427. FRANKS, J. S., J. Y. Christmas, W. l. siler, R. Combs, R. Waller, and C. Burns. 1972. A study of nektonic and benthic faunas of the shallow Gulf of Mexico off the state of Mississippi as related to some physical, chemical and geological factors. GulfRes. Rep. 4, 148p. Gore, r. h., and r. e. grizzle. 1974. Studies on decapod Crustacea from the Indian River region of Florida. III. Callinectes bocourti A. Milne Edwards, 1879 (Decapoda, Portunidae) from the central east coast of Florida. Crustaceana (Leiden) 27:306-308. gunn, c. r., and J. V. Dennis. 1976. World guide to tropical drift seeds and fruits. Quadrangle/The New York Times Book Co., N.Y., 240 p. GUNTER, G. 1950. Seasonal population changes and distributions as related to salinity, of certain invertebrates of the Texas coast, including the commercial shrimp. Publ. Inst. Mar Sci., Univ Tex. 1(2):7-51. Hay, W. p., AND C. A. SHORE. 1918. The decapod crustaceans of Beaufort, N.C, and the surrounding region. Bull. U.S. Bur Fish. 35:369-475. Herbst, G. n., d. R Weston, and J. G. Lorman. 1979. The distributional response of amphipod and deca- pod crustaceans to a sharp thermal front north of Cape Hatteras, North Carolina. Bull. Biol. Soc. Wash. 3: 188-213. Herbst, G. N., A. B. Williams, and B. b. Boothe, Jr. 1979. Reassessment of northern geographic limits for decapod crustacean species in the Carolinian Province, USA; some major range extensions itemized. Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 91:989-998. HOLTHUIS, L. B. 1974. The lobsters of the superfamily Nephropidea of the Atlantic Ocean (Crustacea: Decapoda). Bull. Mar Sci. 24:723-884. HUGHES, J. T, AND G. E. MATTHIESSEN. 1962 . Observations on the biology of the American lobster, Homarus americanus. Limnol. Oceanogr. 7:414-421. INGHAM, M. C. 1979. Marine environmental conditions off the Atlantic and Gulf coasts of the United States, January 1977-March 1978. Mar. Fish. Rev 41(5-6):35-47. LEE, T N. 1975. Florida Current spin-off eddies. Deep-Sea Res. Oceanogr. Abstr 22:753-765. Mathews, T. D., and M. H. Shealy, Jr. 1978. Hydrography of South Carolina estuaries, with emphasis on the North and South Edisto and Cooper Rivers. S.C. Mar Resour Cent. Tech. Rep. 30, 148 p. MiLSTEiN, C. B., D. L. Thomas, and associates. 1977. Summary of ecological studies for 1972-1975 in the bays and other waterways near Little Egg Inlet and in the ocean in the vicinity of the proposed site for the Atlantic Generating Station, New Jersey. Ichthyol. Assoc. Bull. 18, 757 p. MUSICK, J. A., AND J. D. MCEACHRAN. 1972. Autumn and winter occurrence of decapod crus- taceans in Chesapeake Bight, U.S.A. Crustaceana (Leiden) 22:190-200. Norse, E. a. 1978. An experimental gradient analysis: hj^josalinity as an "upstress" distributional determinant for Caribbean portunid crabs. Biol. Bull. (Woods Hole) 155:586-598. PERSCHBACHER, P W, and F J. SCHWARTZ. 1979. Recent records of Callinectes danae and Callinectes marginatus (Decapoda: Portunidae) from North Carolina with environmental notes. Fish. Bull., U.S. 76:879-880. SCOTT, J. D. 1973. America's love affair with the lobster. Natl. Wildl. 11(5):27-3L taissounn.,e. 1972. Estudio comparativo, taxonomico y ecologico entre los cangrejos (Dec. Brachyura. Portunidae), Callinectes maracaiboensis (neuva especie), C bocourti (A. Milne Edwards) y C. rathbunae (Contreras) en el Golfo de Venezuela, Lago de Maracaibo y Golfo de Mexico. Bol. Cent. Invest. Biol. 6, 44 p. Uzmann, J. R., R. A. Cooper, and K. J. Pecci. 1977. Migration and dispersion of tagged American lob- sters, Homarus americanus, on the southern New En- 197 gland continental shelf. U.S. Dep. Commer., NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSRF-705, 92 p. Watling, L. 1979. Zoogeographic affinities of northeastern North American gammaridean Amphipoda. Bull. Biol. Soc. Wash. 3:256-282. WELLS, H. W 196L The fauna of oyster beds, with special reference to the salinity factor. Ecol. Monogr. 31:239-266. WENNER, E. L., AND D. F. BOESCH. 1979. Distribution patterns of epibenthic decapod Crus- tacea along the shelf-slope coenocline. Middle Atlantic Bight, U.S.A. Bull. Biol. Soc. Wash. 3:106-133. WILLIAMS, A. B. 1965. Marine decapod crustaceans of the Carolinas. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Fish. Bull. 65, 298 p. 1974. The swimming crabs of the genus Callinectes (Deca- poda: Portunidae). Fish. Bull., U.S. 72:685-798. WILLIAMS, A. B., L. R. MCCLOSKEY, AND I. E. GRAY. 1968. New records of brachyuran decapod crustaceans from the continental shelf off North Carolina, U.S.A. Crustaceana (Leiden) 15:41-66. WILLIAMS, A. B., G. S. POSNER, W. J. WOODS, AND E. E. DEUBLER, Jr. 1967. A hydrographic atlas of larger North Carolina sounds. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Data Rep. 20, 130 p. Reprinted 1973 as Sea Grant Publ. UNC-SG-73-02, 129 p. AUSTIN B. WILLIAMS National Marine Fisheries Service Systematics Laboratory National Museum of Natural History Washington, DC 20560 David McN. Williams North Carolina Marine Resources Center Bogue Banks Atlantic Beach, NC 28512 MORTALITIES OF ATLANTIC HERRING, CLUPEA H. HARENGUS, SMOOTH FLOUNDER, LIOPSETTA PUTNAMI, AND RAINBOW SMELT, OSMERUS MORDAX, LARVAE EXPOSED TO ACUTE THERMAL SHOCK Entrainment of larval fishes through condenser cooling systems of electric generating stations often results in acute physical, chemical, and thermal stresses. These stresses are often lethal and the resulting mortalities could have adverse effects on populations proximal to the cooling v^rater intake site. This is particularly true for fishes which have planktonic larvae (Schubel et al. 1978). The rapid increase in temperature associated with passage through condenser cooling systems is seldom if ever experienced by organisms in the natural environment. Little is known of the abil- ity of the larvae of most species offish to withstand this kind of thermal stress. In assessing thermal stresses it is important not only to investigate the effect of different increases in temperature from some base temperature (AT), but also to investi- gate the effect of the duration of the exposure. The simplest simulation experiment, then, is one in which larvae are exposed to a rapid increase in temperature, are held at the elevated temperature for a period of time, and are then returned rapidly to the original base temperature. Our experiments were designed to evaluate the thermal tolerances of three species of larval fish occurring in the Gulf of Maine and its estuaries: Atlantic herring, Clupea h. harengus, smooth flounder, Liopsetta putnami, and rainbow smelt, Osmerus mordax. These fish, although differing somewhat in their life histories, are all common in inshore areas during some part of their larval life, and are therefore subject to power plant entrain- ment. This paper presents the results of thermal tolerance experiments which encompassed the range of temperatures planktonic organisms en- counter in condenser cooling systems. Methods All larvae used in the experiments were reared in the laboratory. Atlantic herring eggs and milt were stripped from ripe adults captured off Gloucester, Mass. The eggs were fertilized and held in 2 1 shallow glass bowls of filtered seawater (31.8 L) at approximately the ambient tempera- ture where the adults were collected (8°±1° C). Most of the larvae hatched after 13 d. Ripe adult smooth flounder were collected from Montsweag Bay, part of the Sheepscot River estuary, Maine. Eggs and milt were stripped from the adults, the eggs fertilized, and also kept in 2 1 shallow glass bowls of filtered seawater (25.51.) at the ambient temperature (4°±1° C). The larvae began to hatch after 21 d but the majority hatched after 27 and 28 d. Fertilized rainbow smelt eggs were collected directly from a spawTiing site in Wiley Brook, a tributary of the Damariscotta River estuary, Maine. The eggs were kept in 40 1 aquaria with filtered brook water at the ambient temperature (13°±1° C). The brook water was treated with streptomycin and penicillin according to methods described in Shelbourne (1964) and malachite green hydrochloride was added to control fungal growth. Some of the rainbow smelt larvae began to 198 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 1981. hatch immediately upon collection but most hatched 2 and 3 d later. Thermal tolerance experiments were performed using a thermal gradient apparatus. Details of the design and the operating characteristics are given in Barker and Stewart (1978). In each experiment groups of 10-15 larvae were transferred from the ambient temperature water to test tubes contain- ing 25 ml of water at the test temperatures in the thermal gradient apparatus and were exposed for 5-60 min. After exposure the larvae were returned to the ambient water. The addition of the larvae to the apparatus also involved the addition of about 5 ml of ambient temperature water which resulted in a slight lowering of the test temperatures. About 10-15 min were needed for the test tempera- tures to be reached again, so the temperatures given in the results section for the 5 min exposures were those reached after 5 min. A control was maintained outside of the thermal gradient apparatus for all experiments. These lar- vae were held at ambient temperatures and were subjected to the same handling procedures as those larvae which received the exposures to ele- vated temperatures. All larvae were observed for mortality 2 h after testing, at which time any dead larvae were re- moved. The remaining larvae were observed again after 24 h. Dead larvae could usually be recognized by their opaque appearance and any larvae that showed no movement when prodded were also con- sidered dead. Each experiment was replicated once for the smooth flounder larvae and the Atlantic herring larvae. The replicate experiments were performed for the rainbow smelt larvae in brook water and also in seawater (28.8 "L , after acclimation for 1 d at 13°±1° C). All larvae tested were <5 d old and had yolk sacs. Results The results of all experiments are presented in Table 1. The Atlantic herring larvae were exposed to AT"s ranging from 16° to 25 ° C for exposures of 5 , 15, 30, and 60 min. It appears that the larvae acclimated to 8° C survived AT's up to 17° C for up to 60 min. The larvae survived higher tempera- tures at shorter exposure times. In all cases, ex- cept the 5 min exposures, the mortalities in- creased from approximately to 100% over a range of2°C. The smooth flounder larvae were exposed to Table l. — Percentage mortalities of larvae of Atlantic herring, Clupea h. harengus, smooth flounder, Liopsetta putnami, and rainbow smelt, Osmerus mordax, in fresh and saltwater, under different time-temperature combinations. Values for each of the replicate experiments are listed. The temperature values in parentheses indicate the adjusted temperatures for the 5 min exposures as explained in the text. Time Temperature (° C) 25.0 27.0 29.1 31.0 33.0 Species (min) '8.0 (24.0) (26.0) (27.9) (29.8) (32.7) Clupea h. 5 76.5 100 harengus 67 18.8 100 N = 704 15 — 6,7 100 100 12.5 100 100 30 6.7 100 100 100 100 100 100 60 7.1 6.7 81.2 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 '4.0 25.4 27.6 29.8 32.0 34.2 (24.0) (25.2) (28.4) (30.5) (33.9) Liopsetta 5 6.7 26.7 46.7 100 putnami 6.7 20.0 100 100 N = 525 30 67 20.0 90.9 100 100 6.7 6.7 18.8 68.8 100 100 60 80.0 100 100 100 6.2 7.7 26.7 100 100 100 24.9 26.8 28.8 30.8 32.6 '13.2 (24.5) (26.6) (28.6) (30,6) (32,4) Osmerus 5 6.7 7.1 100 mordax 6.7 7.1 7.1 100 (fresh- 30 100 100 water) 40.0 100 100 N =525 60 6.7 57.1 100 100 62.5 100 100 24.9 26.9 28.8 30.8 32.6 '13.0 (24.5) (26.7) (28.6) (30.6) (32.4) Osmerus 5 14.3 11.1 11.1 100 mordax 20.0 22.2 27.3 40.0 100 (salt- 30 10.0 60.0 50.0 100 100 100 water) 10.0 40.0 50.0 100 100 100 N = 346 60 20.0 50.0 90.9 100 100 100 50.0 40.0 88.9 100 100 100 'Control (ambient temperatures). AT's ranging from 20.0° C to 30.2° C for exposures of 5, 30, and 60 min. The larvae acclimated to 4° C survived AT's up to 21.4° C for 60 min with negli- gible mortality. The mortalities increased from ap- proximately to 100% over a range of about 5° C in the 30-60 min exposures. At the 5 min exposure mortality increased from 6.7% (considered background mortality) to 100% over a 8.7° C range (25.2°-33.9°C). The rainbow smelt larvae held in freshwater were exposed to AT's ranging from 11.3° to 19.4° C for exposure times of 5, 30, and 60 min. The larvae survived a AT of 13.6° C for up to 60 min, and at exposures of shorter duration the larvae survived higher exposure temperatures. For exposures of 30-60 min the mortalities increased from to 100% over a range of 4.0° C (26.8°-30.8° C). This range was 1.8° C for the 5 min duration exposure. The rainbow smelt larvae which had been ac- climated in seawater at 13 ° ± 1 ° C , after hatching in freshwater, were exposed to AT's ranging from 199 11.9° to 20.9° C for exposure times of 5, 30, and 60 min. The lowest AT at which 100% mortality was observed was 15.8° C. This occurred in larvae exposed 30 and 60 min. In the case of the 5 min exposure, some larvae survived up to a 19.4° C AT before experiencing 100% mortality. There was a high background mortality in these experiments which was probably due to stress resulting from the immediate transfer of larvae to seawater 1 d prior to treatment. This was not an unnatural stress, however, since in nature the larvae are immediately washed from the brook into the es- tuary, <50 m away, once they hatch from the adhe- sive eggs. Discussion The larvae of all three species appear to be able to survive AT's of short duration which are near the upper limits of cooling systems in most nor- mally operating nuclear power plants (18.6° C, Schubel et al. 1978). Our results show that the Atlantic herring larvae are much more tolerant to brief (< 60 min) increased temperature exposures than to the longer term exposure (24 h) reported by Blaxter (1960). It should be noted that Atlantic herring larvae are usually older and developed beyond the yolk-sac stage when they arrive at the inshore nursery areas from the spawning grounds and the results of these experiments should be considered in light of that fact. Smooth flounders, on the other hand, spawn in the estuaries and inshore areas of the Gulf of Maine and the larvae are susceptible to entrainment by power plants at an early age.^ These larvae have a greater thermal tolerance than Atlantic herring and appear to be able to survive AT's in excess of those normally encountered during entrainment. Rainbow smelt larvae differ from both the Atlantic herring and smooth flounder. Rainbow smelt normally spawn in freshwater brooks during April and May in coastal Maine and almost immediately upon hatching the larvae are swept downstream into saltwater where they experience a sudden in- crease in salinity. The rainbow smelt larvae which we tested in brook water showed thermal toler- ances very similar to smooth flounder larvae but those tested in seawater showed the lowest tem- perature tolerance of all the experiments. It appears, then, that if rainbow smelt larvae are entrained at this time the effects of increased sa- linity might act synergistically with the tempera- ture increase to produce a lethal stress. Acknowledgments This work was supported by a grant from the Maine Yankee Atomic Power Company. Literature Cited BARKER, S. L., AND J. R. STEWART. 1978. Mortalities of the larvae of two species of bivalves after acute exposure to elevated temperature. In L. D. Jensen (editor), Proceedings of the Fourth National Work- shop on Entrainment and Impingement, p. 203-210. E. A. Communications, Melville, N.Y. BLAXTER, J. H. S. 1960. The effect of extremes of temperature on herring larvae. J. Mar. Biol. Assoc. U.K. 39:605-608. SCHUBEL, J. R., C. C. COUTANT, AND P M. J. WOODHEAD. 1978. Thermal effects of entrainment. In J. R. Schubel and B. C. Marcy, Jr. (editors). Power plant entrainment, a biological assessment, p. 19-93. Acad. Press, N.Y. SHELBOURNE, J. E. 1964. The artificial propagation of marine fish. Adv Mar. Biol. 2:1-83. SETH L. BARKER DAVID W. TOWNSEND JOHN S. HACUNDA Department of Oceanography Ira C. Darling Center University of Maine at Orono Walpole, ME 04573 ■Lindsay, P,S.L. Barker, and J. R.Stewart. 1978. Section 4. Monitoring of the effects of the condenser cooling water system on plankton and larval organisms. In Final report, environ- mental surveillance and studies at the Maine Yankee Nuclear Generating Station, 1969-1977, p. 4.1-4.1.135. Maine Yankee Atomic Power Company, Augusta, Maine. FOOD OF 10 SPECIES OF NORTHWEST ATLANTIC JUVENILE GROUNDFISH The food of fishes in the northwest Atlantic has been studied over many years. Verrill (1871) was one of the first investigators to document the food of marine fish. Recent investigations have identi- fied the food of commercially important fish or fish currently composing a large portion of the fish biomass in the northwest Atlantic (Edwards and Bowman 1979; Langton and Bowman 1980), but still little is known about the diet of juvenile groundfish. Most groundfish larvae are wholly planktonic until they either become demersal or grow large 200 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 198L enough and active enough to live independently of the currents (Graham 1956). This change in life style usually occurs during their first year of life and is reflected in their diet because they change from feeding mainly on plankton to benthic organ- isms (Nikolsky 1963). This paper identifies the types of food eaten by several species of juvenile groundfish, and further examines their change in diet with fish length. Methods Stomachs were collected from juvenile fish caught during annual spring and fall groundfish surveys conducted by the National Marine Fish- eries Service (NMFS). A scheme of stratified random sampling was conducted within the five geographic areas of the northwest Atlantic (Fig- ure 1). All bottom trawl tows were 30 min in duration and fishing continued over 24 h/d. (Fur- ther details of the bottom trawl survey techniques may be obtained from the Resource Surveys Inves- tigation, Northeast Fisheries Center Woods Hole Laboratory, NMFS, NOAA, Woods Hole, MA 02543.) The feeding data for all species except haddock are based on collections made from 1969 through 1972; juvenile haddock were collected from 1953 to 1976, inclusive. The species collected were: Atlantic cod, Gadus morhua; haddock, Mel- anogrammus aeglefinus; silver hake, Merluccius bilinearis; pollock, Pollachius uirens; red hake, Urophycis chuss; white hake, U. tenuis; spotted hake, U. regius; fourbeard rockling, Enchelyopus cimbrius; American plaice, Hippoglossoides pla- tessoides; and yellowtail flounder, Limanda fer- ruginea. All of these species reach maturity when 2 or 3 yr old. This paper deals only with fish approximately 1 yr old or younger. The length, fork length (FL) when applicable, otherwise total length (TL), attained by each species when ap- proximately 1 yr old is given at the bottom of Table 1 as the maximum length in each length range. Fish were either saved whole or their stomachs were excised aboard ship, labeled, and indi- vidually wrapped in gauze. All samples were pre- served in 3.7% formaldehyde. The stomach con- tents of 3,065 fish, from 10 species, were analyzed. In the laboratory the individual stomachs were opened and their contents emptied onto a screen sieve with mesh openings of 0.18 mm. The con- tents were washed and then transferred into a dish from which the various prey items were manually sorted and counted. Prey were identi- Figure l. — Geographic areas of the northwest Atlantic, where the feeding habits of juvenile fish were studied. Fish were caught during bottom trawl surveys conducted from 1953 through 1976. fied to the lowest taxonomic grouping possible, damp dried on absorbent paper, and immediately weighed to the nearest 0.001 g. Well-digested prey which were only identified within major prey categories (i.e., Crustacea and Pisces) or species within a major prey category which amounted to <0.1% of the diet of all predators are listed as "Other" in Table 1. Organisms of little apparent dietary significance and not belonging to any of the major prey categories listed make up the values calculated for the "Miscellaneous" category. 201 Table l. — Summary of the stomach contents of juvenile groundfish from the northwestern Atlantic, expressed as a percentage of total food weight, for fish collected between the years of 1953 through 1976. Subtotals are italicized and a " + " indicates present in the diet but <0.1%. Dietary differences related to predator length are given in the text Atlantic Silver Red White Spotted Fourbeard American Yellowtail Stomach contents cod Haddock hake Pollock hake hake hake rockling plaice flounder Polychaeta 0.4 13.6 0.3 0.7 2.4 2.9 — — 72 1 3.0 Crustacea 81.6 62.3 89.0 68.2 90.1 94.9 85.9 33.3 21.1 94 4 Amphlpoda 22.5 27.6 6.6 1.5 19.4 15.4 77.1 33.3 17.3 38.8 Decapoda 11.2 11.5 30.4 0.3 41.6 58.2 -1- — + 3.7 Isopoda — 0.7 -1- 1.2 0.1 — — — — 1.0 Cumacea 0.2 0.7 0.1 — 0.5 — — — + 10.2 Euphauslacea 18.0 13.0 44.4 55.8 6.4 — — — — — Mysidacea 12.9 1.5 2.6 — 3.6 — — — 3.8 33.4 Copepoda 4.8 0.6 0.1 0.2 1.3 — 7.0 — + -t- Other Crustacea 12.0 6.7 4.8 9.2 17.2 21.3 1.8 -t- + 7.3 Mollusca 0.1 0.1 + — 0.2 — — — + — Chaetognatha + 0.2 0.8 — 0.3 — + — — — Echlnodermata — 1.2 — — + — — — — — Echinoidea — 0.1 — — — — — — — — Ophiuroldea — 1.1 — — + — — — — — Pisces 76.0 5.0 8.5 -1- 1.9 — — — — — Ammodytes americanus — — 3.0 — — — — — — — Merluccius bilinearis — 2.2 — — — — — — — — Gadidae — — 2.1 — — — — — — — Cottidae — — 2.3 — — — — — — — Other Pisces 16.0 2.8 1.1 + 1.9 — — — — — Miscellaneous 0.1 0.6 0.7 5.8 0.2 0.1 + — -1- 0.2 Unidentified 1.6 15.5 0.7 24.9 4.9 1.3 14.1 66.7 3.9 2.0 Sand 0.2 1.5 + 0.4 + 0.8 — — 2.9 0.4 Number examined 107 2,159 440 22 229 23 16 3 10 56 Number empty 21 144 74 1 6 1 6 2 5 3 Mean weight per stomach (g) 0.064 0.107 0.086 0.271 0.061 0.085 0.038 0.020 0.010 0.043 Mean fish length (cm) 7FL 13 FL 9FL 17FL 7TL 9TL 6TL STL 5TL 7TL Length range (cm) 3-19 FL 2-20 FL 3-20 FL 4-20 FL 2-20 TL 5-20 TL 4-10 TL 6-9 TL 4-7 TL 4-9 TL The stomach content data are summarized on a weight basis as the percentage weight each prey category made up of the total stomach contents weight for each of the 10 predators. Empty stom- achs were included in the calculation of the mean weight per stomach for each species. In the text, the percentage weight is included in parentheses after the first mention of a particular prey to quantify the importance of that prey in the diet. Also included in the text, for each species offish, is a two-part evaluation of the food based on fish length (given only for predators for which suffi- cient food data were available). This evaluation was made to determine the smallest fish collected of each species, which exhibited signs of feeding on the bottom, and also to discern, based on the available data, at what fish length the food was made up predominantly of prey usually associated with the bottom. The nomenclatural distinctions categorizing prey species as either planktonic or benthic were taken from Gosner (1971). Planktonic organisms include the euphausiids and calanoid copepods. Benthic forms are typically noted as including most of the polychaetes, amphipods, and decapods. The distinction of these two generalized prey groupings, and what percentage they make up of the diet with fish length, indicates the fish's degree of association with the bottom when feed- ing. For the purpose of this paper it is assumed that when a fish's diet changes from primarily planktonic organisms to 50% or more benthic organisms (occurring when the fish has grown to within some specified length range), the fish can appropriately be referred to as "demersal." Before this change in diet occurs the fish are only loosely associated with the bottom and are therefore more likely to move off bottom in search of food. Results Table 1 summarizes the stomach contents of 10 species of juvenile groundfish collected during the years from 1953 through 1976. Only small num- bers of such species as fourbeard rockling and spotted hake were available for stomach content analyses. Since little is known about their diets the data were included. Atlantic Cod Crustacea represented the largest portion of the diet of juvenile Atlantic cod (81.6%). Amphipods were the largest contributor to the crustacean prey (22.5%) and those identified were Gammar- idae (6.5%) and Caprellidae (12.9%). Euphau- 202 siacea (mostly Meganyctiphanes norvegica) made up 18.0% of the stomach contents. The Mysidacea (12.9%) were primarily Neomysis americana (3.7%), and the Decapoda (11.2%) consisted mainly of Crangon septemspinosa (2.8%). Cope- poda (4.8%) and Cumacea (0.2%) made up the rest of the crustacean portion of the Atlantic cod diet. None of the species offish were identified (16.0%). The remaining prey were the Polychaeta (0.4%), Mollusca (0.1%), and Chaetognatha ( +). The predominant food of Atlantic cod 9 cm FL and longer was benthic organisms such as Gam- maridae, Caprellidae, and Cumacea, which made up more than 50% of the diet. Plankton (i.e., copepods and euphausiids), the main food found in the stomachs of cod <9 cm FL, made up a progres- sively smaller percentage of the diet as the size of the fish increased. Small quantities of sand and gammarid amphipods were found in the stomachs of the smallest fish collected (3 cm FL). Haddock Small crustaceans accounted for 62.3% of the haddock diet. Amphipod crustaceans were the single most important food (27.6%). Corophiidae (primarily Unciola sp.) were by far the most common amphipod identified in the stomach con- tents (5.0%). Other amphipod groups frequently found as prey were, in order of dietary importance, Caprellidae (mainly Aeginina longicornis), Am- peliscidae, Aoridae, Hyperiidae, Gammaridae, and Pontogeneiidae. The Euphausiacea (chiefly Meganyctiphanes norvegica) accounted for 13.0% of the juvenile haddock diet. Crangon septemspin- osa (2.6%) made up the largest part of the decapod prey. Crustaceans of lesser dietary importance to haddock were the Mysidacea (1.5%), Isopoda (0.7%), Cumacea (0.7%), and Copepoda (0.6%). The largest contributor to the identified poly- chaete prey (13.6%) was nereidiform worms (al- most 5%), with Eunice sp. being the most common nereidiform found in the stomach contents (1.0%). Other polychaete groups identified in the stomach contents included the suborders Spioniformia, Scoleciformia, Capitelliformia, Terebelliformia, and Sabelliformia. Fish made up 5.0% of the diet, with silver hake composing almost half (2.2%) of this prey group. Small quantities {+) of Atlantic herring, Clupea h. harengus, and Bothidae were the only other fish identified. Echinodermata (1.2%), Chaetognatha (0.2%), and Mollusca (0.1%) were of little impor- tance in the diet of juvenile haddock. Haddock approximately 8 cm FL and longer fed heavily on the benthos (i.e., amphipods, decapods, and polychaetes). Pelagic organisms such as cope- pods and euphausiids were the predominant food of fish <8 cm FL. Benthic amphipods and cuma- ceans were found in the diet of haddock 2 cm FL. Silver Hake Silver hake preyed heavily on Crustacea (89.0%). Euphausiids were the single most impor- tant food (44.4%). Meganyctiphanes norvegica (22.8%) and Thysanoessa sp. (2.0%) were the common euphausiids identified in the stomach contents. Decapods (30.4%) included Crangon sep- temspinosa (21.5%) and pandalid shrimp (7.9%). Most of the pandalid shrimp were identified as Dichelopandalus leptocerus (3.8%). Amphipod prey (6.6%) came mostly from the families Am- peliscidae (1.9%) such as Ampelisca sp. (0.4%), or Tironidae (0.6%) which were identified as Syrrhoe crenulata (0.6%). Mysids (2.6%) taken by silver hake were all identified as Neomysis americana (2.0%). Cumaceans (0.1%), copepods (0.1%), and isopods (-I-) contributed little to the silver hake diet. Small fish and fish larvae composed 8.5% of the silver hake food. The American sand lance, Am- modytes americanus (3.0%); sculpins (2.3%); and hakes (2.1%) were the only fish identified in the diet. Chaetognatha (0.8%), Polychaeta (0.3%), and Mollusca (-I-) were not important contributors to the food of juvenile silver hake. Crangon septemspinosa and bottom living am- phipods were found in the stomachs of the smallest (3 cm FL) silver hake collected. However, the benthos did not increase in importance in the diet of the larger silver hake. The primairy prey of all silver hake collected (3-20 cm FL) was the euphausiid, Meganyctiphanes norvegica. Pollock Crustaceans (68.2%) were the most important food of pollock. Euphausiacea, primarily Meganyctiphanes norvegica (40.9%) and small quantities of Thysanoessa inermis (2.3%), made up 55.8% of the crustaceans found in the stomachs. Byblis serrata (1.3%), along with small amounts of Caprellidae and Haustoriidae, accounted for the majority of the amphipod prey (1.5%). Decapod 203 larvae (0.3%), isopods (1.2%), and calanoid cope- pods (0.2%) made up the remainder of the crusta- cean prey. Items of little dietary importance to pollock were polychaetes (0.7%) and fish ( +). Only one small pollock (4 cm FL) was collected for stomach content analysis. The remainder of the fish ranged from 15 to 20 cm FL. Since only unidentified crustaceans were found in the stom- ach of the 4 cm fish, no data are available to discern at what length they first feed on the benthos. Red Hake Crustaceans (90.1%) accounted for most of the diet of red hake. The single most important crustacean prey was the decapod shrimp Crangon septemspinosa (40.6%). Pagurus sp. (0.4%) and Hyas sp. (0.1%) were the only other decapods identified in the stomach contents. Amphipod prey (19.4%) included Oedicerotidae (5.9%), Coro- phiidae (2.3%) [mainly Unciola sp. (1.9%)], and a large percentage of unidentified Gammaridea (7.1%). Euphausiids (6.4%), primarily Meganyctiphanes norvegica (1.6%), and mysids (3.6%) were the only other crustacean prey of importance to red hake. Only small quantities of copepods (1.3%), cumaceans (0.5%), and isopods (0.1%) were found in the stomach contents. Poly- chaeta (2.4%), Pisces (1.9%), Chaetognatha (0.3%), Mollusca (0.2%), and Echinodermata (+) contributed little to the food of red hake. Red hake 6 cm TL fed predominantly on benthic foods such as Gammaridae, C. septemspinosa, and Cumacea. The food of fish <6 cm TL was mostly copepods and chaetognaths. Crangon septem- spinosa, amphipods, and sand were found in the stomachs of red hake 3 cm TL. White Hake White hake preyed almost exclusively on crus- taceans (94.9%). Crangon septemspinosa (57.9%) was of major dietary importance. Hermit crabs (0.3%) were the only other decapod eaten. Amphi- pods (15.4%) included Corphiidae {Leptocheirus pinguis) (4.6%), Aoridae (2.0%), Hyperiidae (0.5%), Pontogeneiidae (0.4%), Ampeliscidae (0.3%), and Caprellidae (0.2%). Polychaete worms made up 2.9% of the diet. The stomachs of the smallest white hake col- lected (5 cm TL) contained sand and bottom living animals such as gammarid amphipods. Plank- tonic organisms were not found in any of the stomachs. Spotted Hake The most important prey of spotted hake were Crustacea (85.9%). Amphipods (all identified as Gammaridea) composed 77.1% of this juvenile fish's diet. Other crustacean groups were calanoid copepods (7.0%), small amounts of Crangon sep- temspinosa ( + ), and hermit crabs ( + ). The only other prey identified as part of the spotted hake diet was the Chaetognatha (-H). Although only 16 spotted hake were collected, the stomach content data showed that small quantities of hermit crabs ( + ) were eaten by a fish of only 4 cm TL (1 of 3 fish). Calanoid copepods made up the rest of the stomach contents of the 4 cm fish and were found in all three stomachs. At 5 cm TL (seven fish) spotted hake were eating bottom living organisms such as gammarid am- phipods and Crangon septemspinosa (ap- proximately 50% of their diet). Fourbeard Reckling Only one fourbeard rockling stomach contained food (two of the three stomachs collected were empty). Gammarid amphipods (33.3%) and small quantities of hermit crabs ( + ) were the only dietary items identified. The fish whose stomach contained food was 9 cm TL. American Plaice Polychaeta (72.1%) was the primary prey of the five specimens of American plaice which con- tained food (10 fish were collected in total). Only two families of polychaetes were identified, Cap- itellidae (10.6%) and Sabellidae (2.9%). Crustacea (21.1%) and Mollusca { + ) made up the remainder of the prey identified in American plaice stomachs. The crustacean dietary components were gammarid amphipods (17.3%), mysids (3.8%), small amounts of copepods [iden- tified as Centropages sp. ( + ) ] , cumaceans ( + ), and hermit crabs ( + ). The molluscan ( + ) portion of the diet was identified as Dentalidae. Worms (Sabellidae) and other benthic organ- isms, such as cumaceans and dentalids, made up most of the diet of the smallest American plaice collected (4 cm TL). 204 Yellowtail Flounder Crustacea was the predominant prey of juvenile yellowtail flounder (94.4%). Amphipods (38.8%) were represented by the families Gammaridae (5.2%), Caprellidae (0.5%), Aoridae ( +), Ampelis- cidae (+), and Oedicerotidae (+). The Mysidacea (33.4%) were mostly Erythrops sp. (9.9%). Cuma- ceans (10.2%), decapods (composed of Crangon septemspinosa, 3.4%, and hermit crabs, 0.3%), isopods (1.0%), and copepods ( + ) made up the rest of the crustacean prey. Polychaeta (3.0%) was the only other dietary item noted in yellowtail flounder stomachs. They consisted mainly of Nerediformia (2.1%); most of which were iden- tified as Phyllodoce sp. (0.9%). The smallest yellowtail flounder collected (3 cm TL) ate organisms such as gammarid amphipods, cumaceans, and hermit crabs. Discussion A number of investigators have described the foods of juvenile groundfish. Although many of their studies were not conducted on the same species of fish or in the same geographic area as the present research, they provide evidence that the food of many juvenile fish species is similar. Arntz (1974), for example, studied the feeding of juvenile cod >11 cm FL in the western Baltic. His work showed that juvenile cod feed mostly on small bottom living crustaceans. Daan's (1973) results from studies on cod >8 cm FL in the North Sea also indicate that juvenile cod feed predom- inantly on small benthic organisms. Homans and Needier (1944) and Wigley (1956) included data on the food of juvenile haddock in their investiga- tions. They found that small haddock generally eat crustaceans associated wdth the bottom, and polychaete worms. The diet of several juvenile flatfish species found in the North Sea consists mainly of small benthic crustaceans and poly- chaete worms (Braber and DeGroot 1973). The food of 33 juvenile demersal fish species collected in Long Island Sound, N.Y., was identified by Richards (1963); her data showed that when most inshore fishes are 1 yr old, they feed predom- inantly on the benthos. Studies conducted on larval fish indicate that most groundfish species undergo several pelagic stages, and during these stages they feed predom- inantly on planktonic organisms (Rae 1953; Marak 1960, 1974; Laurence 1974, 1977; Last 1978). During their first year of life the majority of groundfish take up a bottom living habit and feed primarily on the benthos (Graham 1956). Assum- ing that the type of food found in a fish's stomach is indicative of its life stage, then the diet can give some approximation of a fish's age (length) when it makes the transition from pelagic to demersal living. Fish such as cod, for example, have been described as "seeking the bottom" when just over 2 cm FL (Hardy 1959) and stomachs from Atlantic cod 3 cm FL examined during this study contained small amounts of sand and benthic gammarid amphipods. Most of their food, however, was identified as copepods and euphausiids, indicating that the transition from feeding on principally plankton to other foods is a gradual change rather than an abrupt one. The transition from pelagic to demersal habits of other gadoid fishes is apparently similar to that of cod. Haddock >8 cm FL tend to eat fewer pelagic organisms and prey more heavily on the benthos, but the stomachs of the smallest haddock collected (2 cm FL) contained some benthic animals, sug- gesting a slow change from a pelagic to demersal life. The same trend was noted for red hake, white hake, and spotted hake. The smallest fish col- lected had eaten small quantities of benthic or- ganisms, but their primary food was copepods, euphausiids, and chaetognaths. The larger fish ( >5 cm TL) fed mostly on bottom living organisms. Silver hake and pollock were rather unusual in that all the fish collected had consumed large quantities of euphausiids. They are less depen- dent on the benthos as a food even as adults than most other gadoids (Langton and Bowman 1980). Because of this it is difficult to distinguish, based on their diet, when they become demersal. Only the two flatfish, American plaice and yellowtail flounder, where dependent on the ben- thos as a food source at the smallest fish lengths collected (3-4 cm TL). Since plaice and other flatfish metamorphose early in life (most have completed metamorphosis by 11 wk of age when they are between 1 and 2 cm TL) they take up life on the bottom at very small sizes (Hardy 1959). Winter flounder, Pseudopleuronectes americanus, was studied by Pearcy (1962), and it serves as a typical example of how the feeding habits of the flatfish change with age. He noted that the pre- dominant food of metamorphosing larvae and juvenile winter flounder up to 1 cm TL is copepods; when the juveniles range in length from 1 to 2.5 cm TL, amphipods and polychaetes are their most 205 important food. Polychaetes become increasingly important in the diet of older winter flounder, thus indicating a strong association with the bottom. Overall, the analysis of the stomach contents reported on here indicates that relatively few prey species make up a large portion of the food of juvenile fish. Before groundfish begin to depend on the benthos as a food source, calanoid copepods and euphausiids (mostly Meganyctiphanes norvegica) are extremely important foods. The diet of most species of larger juvenile fish, which depend primarily on benthic animals as food, includes gammarid amphipods such as Unciola sp. and Byblis serrata, along with the caprellid amphipod Aeginina longicornis . Decapods found in the diet were represented by Crangon septemspinosa more than any other species. The only other prey which stands out as important in the diet of the juvenile fish reported on here was the mysid Neomysis americana. Acknowledgme nts I thank Roland Wigley and Richard Langton for their guidance in the preparation of the manu- script. I am also indebted to the many members of the staff at the Northeast Fisheries Center who helped to collect the fish and especially to J. Towns, D. Couture, and J. Murray who assisted in the stomach content analyses. Literature Cited ARNTZ, W. E. 1974. A contribution to the feeding ecology of juvenile cod (Gadus morhua L.) in the western Baltic. Rapp. P-V Reun. Cons. Int. Explor. Mer 166:13-19. Braber, L., and S. J. DeGroot. 1973. The food of five flatfish species (Pleuronectiformes) in the southern North Sea. Neth. J. Sea Res. 6:163-172. Daan, N. 1973. A quantitative analysis of the food intake of North Sea cod, Gadus morhua. Neth. J. Sea Res. 6:479-517. EDWARDS, R. L., AND R. E. BOWMAN. 1979. Food consumed by continental shelf fishes. In H. Clepper (editor). Predator-prey systems in fisheries man- agement, p. 387-406. Sport Fish, hist., Wash., D.C. GOSNER, K. L. 1971. Guide to identification of marine and estuarine invertebrates, Cape Hatteras to the Bay of Fundy. Wiley-Interscience, N.Y., 693 p. GRAHAM, M. (editor). 1956. Sea fisheries, their investigation in the United Kingdom. Edward Arnold, Lond., 487 p. 206 Hardy, A. C. 1959. The open sea: its natural history. Part II. Fish & fisheries. Collins, Lond., 322 p. HOMANS, R. E. S., AND A. W. H. NEEDLER. 1944. Food of the haddock {Melanogrammus aeglifinus Linnaeus). Proc. N.S. Inst. Sci. 21:15-49. Langton, r. W., and R. E. Bowman. 1980. Food of fifteen northwest Atlantic gadiform fishes. U.S. Dep. Commer, NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS SSFR-740, 23 p. Last, J. M. 1978. The food of three species of gadoid larvae in the eastern English Channel and southern North Sea. Mar Biol. (Berl.) 48:377-386. LAURENCE, G. C. 1974. Growth and survival of haddock (Melanogrammus aeglefinus) larvae in relation to planktonic prey concen- tration. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 31:1415-1419. 1977. A bioenergetic model for the analysis of feeding and survival potential of winter flounder, Pseudopleuronectes americanus, larvae during the period from hatching to metamorphosis. Fish. Bull., U.S. 75:529-546. MARAK, R. R. 1960. Food habits of larval cod, haddock, and coalfish in the Gulf of Maine and Georges Bank area. J. Cons. 25:147-157. 1974. Food and feeding of larval redfish in the Gulf of Maine. In J. H. S. Blaxter (editor). The early life history offish, p. 267-275. Springer- Verlag, N.Y. NIKOLSKY, G. V 1963. The ecology of fishes. Acad. Press, N.Y, 352 p. PEARCY, W. G. 1962. Ecology of an estuarine population of winter flounder, Pseudopleuronectes americanus ( Walbaum). IV. Food habits of larvae and juveniles. Bull. Bingham Oceanogr Collect., Yale Univ 18(l):65-78. RAE, B. B. 1953. The occurrence of lemon sole larvae in the Scottish plankton collections of 1929, 1930 and 1931. Scotl. Home Dep. Mar Res. 1953(1), 36 p. Richards, S. W. 1963. The demersal fish population of Long Island Sound. Bull. Bingham Oceanogr. Collect., Yale Univ. 18(2), 101 p. Verrill, a. E. 1871. On the food habits of some of our marine fishes. Am. Nat. 5:397-400. WIGLEY, R. L. 1956. Food habits of Georges Bank haddock. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Spec. Sci. Rep. Fish. 165, 26 p. Ray E. BOWMAN Northeast Fisheries Center Woods Hole Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA Woods Hole, MA 02543 I DIFFERENCE IN SEX RATIOS OF THE ANADROMOUS ALEWIFE, ALOSA PSEUDOHARENGUS, BETWEEN THE TOP AND BOTTOM OF A FISHWAY AT DAMARISCOTTA LAKE, MAINE' The Damariscotta River alewife, Alosa pseu- doharengus, fishery has been monitored by the Maine Department of Marine Resources every year since 1971 for abundance offish, length and weight frequencies, age distribution, and sex ratios. From 1977 through 1979, sampling plans were also devised to estimate numbers, size, and sex composition of ripe alewives escaping the fishery and entering the lake to spawn. (Through- out this paper they will be collectively referred to as escapements.) While sampling the 1977 escapement rim it be- came evident that a greater number of males than females were entering the lake to spawn. This male dominance was not unusual as it was re- ported in other alewife runs, as well. Bigelow and Schroeder (1953) stated that as a rule males greatly outnumber females on the spawning grounds. What prompted this investigation was the fact that while the escapement runs had sig- nificantly more males than females, the samples from the commercial catch revealed a consistent sex ratio of 1:1. Similar disproportionate ratios were observed in the 1978 and 1979 escapement runs, while the commercial catch ratios were 1:1 each year. In this paper I will examine these vary- ing sex ratios and offer considerations for further investigation. Study Area The Damariscotta River fishery is located in the adjoining towns of Nobleboro and Newcastle and is one of the largest alewife fisheries in the state, composing about 30% of the annual total landings (Gating 1958). This area was selected for study because of the easy access to sampling both the commercial catch and the escapement run. The objectives of the study were: 1) to estimate the abundance of spawning adults, 2) to determine the escapement level which will maximize subsequent recruitment, and 3) to determine population 'This study was conducted in cooperation with the U.S. De- partment of Commerce, National Marine Fisheries Service, under Public Law 89-304, as amended, Commercial Fisheries Research and Development Act, Projects AFC-18-(2,3) and AFC-21-L characteristics of the Damariscotta River alewife stock such as stock size, age, distribution, and growth rates. Damariscotta Lake, in Lincoln County, Maine, is a narrow, north-south oriented body of water 17 km long and 1,806 ha in area. There are three major outlets in a dam at the southeastern end of the lake: the first supplies water to a hydroelectric power station, the second is the main outflow con- trolled by two spillways, and the third is a man- made fishway. In 1803, the start of a commercial run was created (Atkins 1887), and a fishway made of stones set to form a series of irregular pools and raceways was constructed beside the main outflow. The fishway is about 150 m long with a 16 m verti- cal rise. The spawning migration of this fishery's ale- wives consists of a 29 km swim up the Damaris- cotta River to head of tide at Great Salt Bay The fish then enter the outflow of Damariscotta Lake via a tidal stream about 50 m long. The stream divides in two and the right branch becomes the entrance to the fishway. The left branch leads past two dipping bins used by the commercial fishery and then to the spillways. The spillways are opened to allow a sufficient amount of water into the stream to attract alewives into the bins. The alewives in this stream have a choice of swimming either into the left branch and the dipping bins or into the right branch and into Damariscotta Lake via the fishway. Due to the type of construction and the lay of the embankment, the fishway is not consistent in its rise from pool to pool. The bottom and top sections are steepest, while the middle levels out, moderat- ing the waterflow The resting pools are of varying sizes and some of them appear to be too small, causing overcrowding of the alewives. Some of the connecting raceways are long and narrow, allow- ing for a faster current than is present in other raceways. The combination of a small pool and a difficult raceway lowers the efficiency of this fish- way. From the appearance of alewives passing through the fishway, it is a difficult and exhaust- ing run. Methods From 1977 to 1979, when escapement counts were made, a wood and wire mesh trap, 3 m long by 1.2 m wide by 0.8 m deep, was placed in the lake side of the dam at the top of the fishway The trap's entrance covered the dam opening, where the es- FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1. 1981. 207 capement fish passed from the fishway into the lake. During 1977 and 1978, a stratified random sampling plan was used to estimate total numbers entering the lake. The total duration of the run was divided into successive 5-d strata with 2 d randomly selected out of each stratum. All fish entering the trap during a 24-h period were visu- ally counted and released. During each day sam- pled, approximately 25 alewives were measured for total length and sex was determined by strip- ping. In 1979 a Smith-Root^ 602A electronic fish counter was installed in the trap. Saila et al. ( 1972) used the system 602 counter with two separate tunnels for counting direction movement, whereas the 602A has one tunnel for counting upstream and downstream passage. The tunnel was 20 cm in diameter and 35 cm long. During most of the run, alewives that passed through the tunnel were held in the trap and later counted to discover any errors and to make necessary adjustments to the instru- ment. A separate sampling plan was used at the bot- tom of the fishway for the commercial catch. On randomly selected days during the run, 9 d in 1977 and 15 d in 1978, 50-100 fish were taken from the catch. In 1979 the number of days sampled was 31, with 50 fish taken each day. Total length, weight, sex, and scales were taken from these alewives. In 1979, otoliths were also removed for aging. Mean lengths and weights were computed for each day sampled and for each sex. Length mea- surements were taken from the total length of the fish. Each mean length and weight was weighted ^Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the Maine Department of Marine Resources or by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. by the number of fish caught or counted on that day for total mean length and weight results. The number offish harvested each year was estimated by dividing total weight by the mean weight per fish. Results Each year the alewife run began in early May and ended in early June. The commercial har- vest contained 1,277,642 fish in 1977, 999,484 in 1978, and 777,941 in 1979. The respective escape- ments into Damariscotta Lake (±SE) were 26,813 ±2,624, 53,180 ±9,147, and 20,313 ±4,145 ripe alewives. The resulting escapement was 2.0% , 5.0%, and 2.6% of the commercial catches for 1977, 1978,and 1979, respectively Sex ratios in the commercial catch samples showed no significant differences from the begin- ning of the run to the end in all but a few samples each season. The overall combined samples for each year showed no significant difference on x^ tests (P&0.05) between numbers of males to females (Table 1). Early immigrants into Damariscotta Lake had significantly different sex ratios in which males always outnumbered females and as the run pro- gressed these ratios had a tendency toward a nonsignificant ratio of 1:1 (Figure 1). This persis- tency in male dominance was evidenced by sig- nificant (x^ P<0.05) totals in the ratios of 2.1:1 for 1977, 1.9:1 for 1978, and 2.6:1 for 1979 (Table 1). Age distribution of commercial and escapement runs ranged from 3 to 9 jrr old. The age distribu- tion for each sex in the commercial catch displayed greater percentages of younger males than younger females; conversely, there were greater percentages of females at older ages than males in Table l. — Sex ratios (M:F) and number of alewives sampled in 5-d consecutive periods for the commercial and escapement runs at the Damariscotta Lake fishway, Maine, 1977-79. The samples columns refer to the number of combined samples in the 5-d consecutive periods. 1977 1978 1979 Commercial Escapement Commercial Escapement Commercial Escapement Samples Ratio n Samples Ratio n Samples Ratio n Samples Ratio n Samples Ratio n Samples Ratio n 1 2.7 1' 37 2 3.1:1* 111 3 1.1:1 300 2 3.4:1- 131 5 1.3 r 247 3 3.0 1- 92 1 1.1 19 2 3.3:1- 525 3 0.8 1 ' 300 2 2.1 1 * 203 5 1.1 228 2 3.3 ■j ' 113 1 0.5 19 2 2.8:1- 569 3 0.7 300 2 19 1' 280 5 1.0 252 1 4.1 56 3 1.2 128 3 1.2:1- 380 2 1.1 179 2 1.6 1 * 118 5 0.9 251 1 3.2 1 • 54 1 0.8 54 — 2 1.2 223 2 1.3 155 5 1.1 243 1 1.7 30 2 1.1 33 2 1.0:1 115 2 1.0 175 1 1.2 20 4 0.9 195 3 1.6 72 1 1.1:1 66 2 1.1 100 2 1.1 44 2 1.3:1 101 1 1.4:1 40 Pooled samples 1.1:1 2.1:1- 1.1:1 1.9:1- 1.0:1 2.6:1- 'x significance atP«0.05. 208 IMMIGRANT RUN MALES 1977 1978 — I 1979 1 1 1 1 1 r— 10 15 20 25 30 35 DAYS INTO THE RUN 40 Figure l. — Percentage of males from samples taken during the escapement run atDamariscotta Lakefishway, Maine, compared with the consistent (1:1) sex ratio of the commercial run, 1977-79. each year. The greater proportion of ages III and IV were males, while ages V and VI were domi- nated by females in 1977 and 1979. In 1978 males dominated ages III through V There is no evident trend in ages VII and older for either sex, probably due to the small sample sizes at these ages. The percentage at age of sexes in the escapement runs showed about the same distribution as was found in the commercial runs (Table 2). The trend in size and age at the Damariscotta Lake alewife run was larger and older fish arriving early and regressing to smaller and younger fish through time (Table 3). Discussion There have been other observations of early male alewife predominance in fishways and on spawning grounds. Dominy^ showed a male pre- dominance ratio of 2.4:1 at the start and a 0.7:1 ratio by the end of the run in the Gaspereau River, White Rock, Nova Scotia. Kissil (1974) at Bride Lake, Conn., observed more males during the early part of the run declining to an equal number with females for the remainder. Cooper (1961) re- ported that males gradually declined from 65% at the beginning to 35% at the end of the run at Pausacaco Pond, R. I. Rideout (1974) found a high percentage of males in most samples from the Parker River, Mass. Havey (1961) observed a 1.28:1 ^Dominy, C.L. 1971. Evaluation of a pool and weir fishway for passage of alewives (Alosa pseudoharengus) at White Rock, Gaspereau River, Nova Scotia. Dep. Fish. For. Can. Resour. Dev. Branch, Halifax, Progr. Rep. 3:22. Table 2. — Percentage of male and female alewives at age from the commercial and escapement runs at the Damariscotta Lake fishway, Maine, 1977-79. Sex Commercial fishery Escapement runs Year III IV V VI VII VIII IX Total III IV V VI VII VIII IX Total 1977 Males 0.3 34.6 13.8 1.6 0.7 51.1 0.5 37.4 26.0 1.8 0.9 0.1 — 66.6 Females .1 20.2 24.8 2.7 .7 .2 0.2 48.9 .2 14.4 15.5 2.9 0.3 .1 33.4 1978 Males .1 14.1 28.1 66 2.0 .4 — 51.2 10.6 33.8 12.8 3.8 .8 — 61.9 Females .1 10.3 26.9 9.2 2.1 .2 — 48.8 .3 8.1 19.5 8.1 1.7 .4 38.1 1979 Males .3 22.5 22.5 3.3 1.7 .2 — 50.4 .3 31.0 32.1 5.6 3.6 .1 — 72.7 Females .1 15.7 28.0 4.6 1.0 — 0.2 49.6 — 8.1 16.5 2.1 0.3 — — 27.3 Table 3. — Age distribution (percent) and mean total length (millimeters) of alewives for three equal periods during the Damariscotta Lake, Maine, commercial run, 1977-79. Date Sex III IV V VI VII VIII IX Total Mean length 4-13 May 1977 Males — 22.0 28.1 5.4 3.1 0.9 — 59.6 304.0±2.0 Females — 10.3 25.3 4.9 — — — 40.4 309.4 ±2.0 14-23 May Males 0.4 37,0 13.1 1.7 .9 — — 53.1 292.6 ±1.4 Females .1 19.3 24.0 2.1 .9 .2 0.2 46.9 304.9 ±1.5 24May-3 June Males .2 28.2 15.4 1.1 — — — 45.0 295.6 ±1.7 Females — 23.2 27.2 4.5 — — — 55.0 300.7 ±1.2 6-15 May 1978 Males — 1.7 24.6 14.4 4.5 1.5 — 46.7 310.0±0.7 Females — 3.4 29.0 15.8 4.5 .6 — 53.3 317.5±0.7 16-25 May Males .1 11.2 29.3 6.9 2.5 .1 — 50.2 302.3 ±0.8 Females — 7.7 28.8 10.8 2.3 .3 — 49.8 313.7±0.8 26 May-3 June Males .3 22.5 27.3 3.7 .2 .4 — 54.4 295.7 ±0.8 Females .3 16.7 23.0 4.5 1.2 — — 45.6 306.7 ±1.0 7-17 May 1979 Males — 15.8 27.1 55 4.0 .5 — 52.9 299.6 ±1.0 Females — 9.3 294 6.6 1.3 — .5 47.1 309.6 ±1.3 18-28 May Males .2 22.7 22 1 2.8 1.4 .1 — 49.2 292.1 ±0.8 Females — 16.4 28.9 4.0 1.2 — .1 50.2 302.9 ±1.0 29May-8 June Males .7 28.6 19.4 2.3 .4 — — 51.3 288.3 ±1.0 Females .3 200 24.5 3.5 .4 — — 48.7 299.5 ±1.2 209 (M:F) ratio at Long Pond, Maine, although this was not statistically significant. Sex dominance in a species of fish that is as- sumed to have an equal sex ratio may be attrib- uted to sampling and catch methods. For exam- ple, Casselman (1975) noted that the sex ratio of northern pike, Esox lucius, caught by anglers fa- vored females because of their greater activity in foraging for food at the time of fishing. Early male alewife predominance is attributed to males maturing a year earlier than females (Havey 1961; Kissil 1974) and males ripening earlier in the sea- son, thus beginning the spawning run sooner (Cooper 1961). Marcy (1969) at Bride Lake found that 68% of males were age IV and 68% of females were age V. The alewives in Damariscotta Lake have shown this same attribute of male dominance as in these other investigations. As fish begin entering the lake there were many more males present than females. The presence of signif- icant heterogeneity revealed that this male dom- inance of early escapements into the lake is not consistent throughout the run. A comparison of percentage of males per sample in the fishway run to the hypothetical 1:1 ratio in the commer- cial catch showed a trend of diminishing male dominance. The reasons cited earlier for male dominance in alewife runs do not explain the disproportionate ratio in these other runs or at Damariscotta Lake. The theory that earlier maturing or earlier ripen- ing males in an alewife stock contribute to the greater male to female ratio does not correspond to the size and age trend of the Damariscotta spawn- ing runs. As was shown, these runs had the largest fish arriving first. Other investigators have shown this to be the case in other alewife spawning mi- grations: Havey (1961) reported older fish running early; a decreasing trend in mean fork length for each sex during the spawning run was shown by Cooper (1961), Kissil (1974), and Rideout (1974). If larger alewives are the earliest to arrive, the greater proportion of males to females would not occur at the first of the run. The larger proportion of males would occur later or at the end of the run when the younger fish begin arriving. The main reason in searching for other explanations is the fact that the sex ratios in the commercial catch (located near the bottom of the fishway) had gen- erally nonsignificant ratios throughout the run in each of the 3 yr. Age distribution of the commercial catches does show more younger males (III-IV), but the older ages contain more females (V-VII). The greatest proportion of the commercial catch (85-90%) is made up of 4- and 5-yr-old fish and they are always present throughout the run. This mix- ing of 4-yr-old males and 5-yr-old females caused the 1:1 sex ratio in the commercial catch. The explanation for this abrupt change in the sex ratio from the tidal area to the lake appears to be an effect of the fishway. The greatest dispropor- tionate ratio of male to female alewives occurred at the first part of the escapement run when the largest fish were in the fishway. It seemed that the construction of the fishway was selective against the largest or heaviest fish which were the females at that time. As the size of females tended to de- crease, the male to female ratio became more equal. Future investigations that deal with the sex ratio of alewives on the spawning grounds would do well to examine the alewife stock before it made any arduous runs through a difficult section of water or fishway. The reasons for a significantly different sex ratio on the spawning grounds could be from the physical aspects of the migration route rather than any biological factors of the alewife. Acknowledgments I thank Sherry Collins for her help in the collect- ing and compiling of data, and David Sampson for providing me with his field data. I also thank Jay S. Krouse and Phyllis Carnahan for their review of the text and James Rollins for drafting the figure. Literature Cited Atkins, C. G. 1887. The river fisheries of Maine. In G. B. Goode (editor). The fisheries and fishery industries of the United States. Vol. 1, Sec. 5, p. 673-728. Gov. Print. Off, Wash., D.C. BIGELOW, H. B., AND W. C. SCHROEDER. 1953. Fishes of the Gulf of Maine. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Fish. Bull. 53, 577 p. Casselman, J. M. 1975. Sex ratios of northern pike, Esox lucius Lin- naeus. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 104:60-63. Gating, J. P. 1958. Damariscotta (Maine) alewife fishery. Commer Fish. Rev 20(6):l-5. Cooper, r. a. 1961. Early life history and spawning migration of the alewife (Alosa pseudoharengus). M.S. Thesis, Univ. Rhode Island, Kingston, 58 p. Havey, K. A. 1961. Restoration of anadromous alewives at Long Pond, Maine. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 90:281-286. 210 KISSIL, G. W. 1974. Spawning of the anadromous alewife, Alosa pseudoharengus, in Bride Lake, Connecticut. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 103:312-317. MARCY, B. C, JR. 1969. Age determinations from scales of Alosa pseudoharengus (Wilson) and Alosa aestivalis (Mitchill) in Connecticut waters. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 98:622- 630. RIDEOUT, 8. G. 1974. Population estimate, movement, and biological characteristics of anadromous alewives (Alosa pseudoharengus Wilson) utilizing the Parker River, Mas- sachusetts in 1971-1972. M.S. Thesis, Univ. Mas- sachusetts, Amherst, 183 p. SAILA, S. B., T. T. POLGAR, D. J. SHEEHY, and J. M. FLOWERS. 1972. Correlations between alewife activity and environ- mental variables at a fishway. Trans. Am. Fish. Soc. 101:583-594. David a. LmBV Maine Department of Marine Resources West Boothbay Harbor, ME 04575 (Kuronuma and Abe 1972). The total quantity of fish sold in Kuwait market in 1976 was 4,452 t as estimated by the Kuwait Ministry of Planning (Anonymous 1977). In a recent survey of the fish consumption of local populations in Kuwait, Afzal and Hay at (1977) reported that the consumption of fish in Kuwait is fairly high and that a majority of respondents had no clear idea about the nutritive value of fish. It was emphasized that a program was necessary to disseminate such information. With the exception of the work of Das et al. (1976) on a few fishes from Shatt Al-Arab and the Arabian Gulf, nothing seems to have appeared on nutritional values of Arabian Gulf fishes. Here we report on the proximate composition and nutritive value of some of the important food fishes from Kuwait for use of consumers, dieticians, and the fishing industry. Methods PROXIMATE COMPOSITION AND NUTRITIVE VALUE OF SOME IMPORTANT FOOD FISHES FROM THE ARABIAN GULF The unique value of fish for supplementing the nutritional qualities of man's diet, as also for ani- mal feeding, is well recognized. Literature on the composition and calorie value offish reported from various parts of the world is exhaustive. Love (1970), Sidwell et al. (1973, 1974), Bonnet et al. (1974), Stansby (1976), Sidwell, Loomis, Loomis, Foncannon, and Buzzell (1978), and Sidwell, Loomis, Foncannon, and Buzzell (1978) have pro- vided good reviews on the subject. The Arabian Gulf countries, including Kuwait, have rich fish faunas and Kuwait with a coastline of about 140 km, has at least 131 fish species in 64 families which are taken in commercial trawls The study was based on fish samples obtained from the local fish market. These are caught by shrimp trawlers and dhow boats operating in the Arabian Gulf. For each species, fresh specimens representing the common marketable size were selected (Table 1). Analysis used minced muscle from the trunk portion of each individual from which skin and all bony elements had been re- moved. Standard methods of chemical analysis were used (Horwitz 1975). Gross energy content was calculated from the mean values of fat, pro- tein, and carbohydrate following equivalents as used by Jafri et al. (1964). All samples were taken during November and December 1978. Results Most of the fishes were found to be fairly high in protein content. The maximum value (22.6%) was observed in the barred Spanish mackerel whereas Table l. — Average proximate composition ( ± standard error of the mean) and energy content of some important food fishes sampled in November and December 1978 from the Arabian Gulf. Species No. Total length (cm) Protein (%) Fat (%) Moisture (%) Ash (%) Energy (cal/100g) Spotted Spanish mackerel. Scomberomorus guttatus Barred Spanish mackerel. S commersoni Silvery croakef, Otolithus argenteus Four-thread threadfin, Eleuttieronema tetradactylum Silvery grunt, Pomadasys argenteus Silvery pomfret, Pampas argenteus Mullet, Liza macrolepis Yellow finned black porgy, Acanthopagrus latus Crimson snapper, Lutjanus coccineus Brovi^n-spotted grouper, Epinephelus tauvina 7 47.1 ±0.6 20.5 ±0.0 3.4±0.4 73.9±0.3 1.4±0.0 119.0 5 103.5 ±7.2 22.6±0.6 1.8±0.2 73.5±0.1 1.5±0.0 111.7 5 33.4 ±1.1 21.8±0.3 1.1 ±0.3 74.5 ±0.4 1.3 ±0.0 104.8 5 53.0 ±0.6 20.7±0.2 5.3 ±1.1 72.1 ±0.7 1.3±0.0 136.6 7 55.4±2.0 20.5±0.2 .5±0.1 77.6 + 0.3 1.2±0.0 89.4 5 30.4 ±6.4 18.5±0.3 1.4±0.3 78.3 ±0.3 1.3±0.0 91.0 12 17.5±0.2 17.2±0.2 1.1 ±0.0 79.6 ±0.2 1.3 ±0.0 83.9 5 31 .2 ±0.8 19.7±0.3 .3±0.1 77.9±0.5 1.2±0.1 87.6 5 64.0±1.4 19.1 ±0.3 .2±0.1 77.6±0.2 1.2±0.0 87.7 5 84.3 ±1.5 19.5±0.3 .5±0.0 74.1 ±0.1 1.2±0.0 104.1 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 1, 198L 211 the minimum value (17.2%) was noted in the mul- let. Other fishes with high protein content were silvery croaker, four-thread threadfin, silvery grunt, and spotted Spanish mackerel. The value of protein observed for the silvery pomfret was found to be higher than the value reported by Das et al. (1976) for this species from Shatt Al-Arab. The fat content ranged from 0.2% in crimson snapper to 5.3% in four-thread threadfin. Except for the four-thread threadfin and mackerels, fishes were generally low in fat content. The magnitude of variation in fat values for individual species was higher in comparison to that observed for protein. Of the various constituents of the fish body, fat is perhaps the most variable component varying with factors like age, sex spawning cycle, feeding, season, etc. Generally low fat values observed dur- ing the present investigation could possibly be the result of relatively poor winter condition of these fishes. Moisture content varied from 72.1% in four- thread threadfin to 79.6% in mullet. Ash content varied little. Except for the mack- erels which showed slightly higher values, ash content varied between 1.2 and 1.3%. Gross energy content was highest (136.6 cal/100 g) in the muscle of the four-thread threadfin, fol- lowed by mackerels and silvery croaker. Lowest value (83.9 cal/100 g) was noted for the mullet. The energy content for the silvery pomfret and silvery grunt resemble closely the values reported by Sidwell et al. (1974). The energy content for the various species of mullet quoted by Sidwell et al. (1974) was, however, higher than that obtained for Liza macrolepis. canned finfish, crustaceans, and mollusks. Part II. Fatty acid composition. Mar. Fish. Rev. 36(2):8-14. Das, k., s. K. al-Nasiri, n. a. Shukri, and K. p. sharma. 1976. Biochemical studies on some commercially impor- tant fish of Shatt Al-Arab and the Gulf. Arab Gulf 6:157-161. HORWITZ,W. (editor). 1975. Official methods of analysis of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists. 12th ed. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem., Wash., D.C., 1094 p. jafri, a. k., D. K. khawaja, and S. Z. QASIM. 1964. Studies on the biochemical composition of some freshwater fishes. I — Muscle. Fish. Technol. 1:148-157. KURONUMA, K., AND Y. ABE. 1972. Fishes of Kuwait. Kuwait Inst. Sci. Res., Kuwait City, 123 p. LOVE, R. M. 1970. The chemical biology of fishes with a key to the chemical literature. Acad. Press, Lond., 547 p. Sidwell, V. D., J. C. Bonnet, and E. G. Zook. 1973. Chemical and nutritive values of several fresh and canned finfish, crustaceans, and mollusks. Part I: Proxi- mate composition, calcium, and phosphorus. Mar Fish. Rev 35(12):16-19. Sidwell, v. d., R R. Foncannon, N. S. Moore, and J. C. Bonnet. 1974. Composition of the edible portion of raw (fresh or frozen) crustaceans, finfish, and mollusks. I. Protein, fat, moisture, ash, carbohydrate, energy value, and choles- terol. Mar. Fish. Rev 36(3):21-35. SIDWELL, V. D., A. L. LOOMIS, K. J. LOOMIS, P R. foncannon, AND D. H. BUZZELL. 1978. Composition of the edible portion of raw (fresh or frozen) crustaceans, finfish, and mollusks. III. Microele- ments. Mar. Fish. Rev 40(9):l-20. SIDWELL, V. D., A. L. LOOMIS, R R. FONCANNON, AND D. H. BUZZELL. 1978. Composition of the edible portion of raw (fresh or frozen) crustaceans, finfish, and mollusks. IV. Vitamins. Mar Fish. Rev 40(12):1-16. STANSBY, M. E. 1976. Chemical characteristics offish caught in the north- east Pacific Ocean. Mar Fish. Rev 38(9):1-11. Acknowledgment Thanks are due to Nazar Hussain, Head, Mariculture and Fisheries Department, Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research, for his keen interest in the program. Literature Cited AFZAL, M., AND F. J. HAYAT. 1977. A study of fish consumption habits in Kuwait. Kuwait Inst. Sci. Res., Kuwait City, 134 p. ANONYMOUS. 1977. Annual statistical abstract 1977 14th ed. [In Engl, and Arabic] State of Kuwait, Central Statistical Office, Ministry of Planning, 421 p. Bonnet, J. C, V. D. Sidwell, and e. G. Zook. 1974. Chemical and nutritive values of several fresh and Manal M. AL-JUDAIMI Mariculture and Fisheries Department Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research Kuwait A. K. JAFRI Mariculture and Fisheries Department Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research Present address: Fisheries Laboratory, Department of Zoology Aligarh Muslim University Aligarh 202001, India K. A. George Mariculture and Fisheries Department Kuwait Institute for Scientific Research Kuwait 212 NOTICES NOAA Technical Reports NMFS published during last 6 months of 1980 Circular 434. Osteology, phylogeny, and higher classification of the fishes of the Order Plectognathi (Tetraodontiformes). By James C. Tyler October 1980, xi + 422 p., 326 fig., 3 tables. Special Scientific Report — Fisheries 741. Distribution of gammaridean Amphipoda (Crustacea) in the Middle Atlantic Bight region. By John J. Dickinson, Roland L. Wigley, Richard D. Brodeur, and Susan Brown-Leger. October 1980, vi + 46 p., 26 fig., 52 tables. 742. Water structure at Ocean Weather Station V, northwestern Pacific Ocean, 1966-71. By D. M. Husby and G. R. Seckel. October 1980, iv + 56 p., 18 fig., 4 tables, 2 append. 743. Average density index for walleye pollock, Theragra chal- cogramma, in the Bering Sea. By Loh-Lee Low and Ikuo Ikeda. November 1980, iii + 11 p., 3 fig., 9 tables. Some NOAA publications are available by purchase from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Print- ing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Individual copies of NOAA Technical Reports (in limited numbers) are available fi-ee to Federal and State government agencies and may be obtained by writing to User Services Branch (D822), Environmental Science Information Center, NOAA, Rockville, MD 20852. 213 INFORMATION FOR CONTRIBUTORS TO THE FISHERY BULLETIN Manuscripts submitted to the Fishery Bulletin will reach print faster if they conform to the following instructions. These are not absolute requirements, of course, but desiderata. CONTENT OF MANUSCRIPT The title page should give only the title of the paper, the author's name, his affiliation, and mailing address, including ZIP code. The abstract should not exceed one double- spaced page. In the text, Fishery Bulletin style, for the most part, follows that of the U.S. Government Printing Office Style Manual. Fish names follow the style of the American Fisheries Society Special Publi- cation No. 6, A List of Common and Scientific Names of Fishes from the United States and Canada. Third Edition, 1970. Text footnotes should be typed separately from the text. Figures and tables, with their legends and headings, should be self-explanatory, not requir- ing reference to the text. Their placement should be indicated in the right-hand margin of the manuscript. Preferably figures should be reduced by photog- raphy to 5% inches (for single-column figures, allowing for 50% reduction in printing), or to 12 inches (for double-column figures). The maximum height, for either width, is 14 inches. Photo- graphs should be printed on glossy paper. Do not send original drawings to the Scientific Editor; if they, rather than the photographic re- ductions, are needed by the printer, the Scientific Publications Office will request them. Each table should start on a separate page. Consistency in headings and format is desirable. Vertical rules should be avoided, as they make the tables more expensive to print. Footnotes in tables should be numbered sequentially in arable numerals. To avoid confusion with powers, they should be placed to the left of numerals. Acknowledgments, if included, are placed at the end of the text. Literature is cited in the text as: Lynn and Reid (1968) or (Lynn and Reid 1968). All papers re- ferred to in the text should be listed alphabetically by the senior author's surname under the heading "Literature Cited." Only the author's surname and initials are required in the literature cited. The accuracy of the literature cited is the re- sponsibility of the author. Abbreviations of names of periodicals and serials should conform to Bio- logical Abstracts List of Serials with Title Abbrevi- ations. (Chemical Abstracts also uses this system, which was developed by the American Standards Association.) Common abbreviations and symbols, such as mm, m, g, ml, mg,° C (for Celsius), %, %o and so forth, should be used. Abbreviate units of mea- sure only when used with numerals. Periods are only rarely used with abbreviations. We prefer that measurements be given in metric units; other equivalent units may be given in parentheses. FORM OF THE MANUSCRIPT The original of the manuscript should be typed, double-spaced, on white bond paper. Please triple space above headings. We would rather receive good duplicated copies of manuscripts than car- bon copies. The sequence of the material should be: TITLE PAGE ABSTRACT TEXT LITERATURE CITED APPENDIX TEXT FOOTNOTES TABLES (Each table should be numbered with an arable numeral and heading provided) LIST OF FIGURES (Entire figure legends) FIGURES (Each figure should be numbered with an arable numeral; legends are desired) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Send the ribbon copy and two duplicated or carbon copies of the manuscript to: Dr. CarlJ. Sindermann, Scientific Editor Fishery Bulletin Northeast Fisheries Center Sandy Hook Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA Highlands, NJ 07732 Fifty separates will be supplied to an author free of charge and 100 supplied to his organiza- tion. No covers will be supplied. ; ''.. ■r • -jr. HAYNES, EVAN. Description of Stage II zoeae of snow crab, Chionoecetes bairdi, (Oxyrhyncha, Majidae) from plankton of lower Cook Inlet, Alaska 177 SPOTTE, STEPHEN, and GARY ADAMS. Feeding rate of captive adult female northern fur seals, Callorhinus ursinus 182 KAYA, CALVIN M., ANDREW E. DIZON, and SHARON D. HENDRIX. Induced spawning of a tuna, Euthynnus affinus 185 FROST, KATHRYN J., and LLOYD F. LOWRY Trophic importance of some ma- rine gadids in northern Alaska and their body-otolith size relationships 187 WILLIAMS, AUSTIN B., and DAVID McN. WILLIAMS. Carolinian records for American lobster, Homarus americanus, and tropical swimming crab, Callinectes bocourti. Postulated means of dispersal 192 BARKER, SETH L., DAVID W. TOWNSEND, and JOHN S. HACUNDA. Mortal- ities of Atlantic herring, Clupea h. harengus, smooth flounder, Liopsetta putnami, and rainbow smelt, Osmerus mordax, larvae exposed to acute thermal shock .... 198 BOWMAN, RAY E. Food of 10 species of northwest Atlantic juvenile groundfish .. 200 LIBBY, DAVID A. Difference in sex ratios of the anadromous alewife, Alosa pseudoharengus , between the top and bottom of a fishway at Damariscotta Lake, Maine 207 AL-JUDAIMI, MANAL M., A. K. JAFRI, and K. A. GEORGE. Proximate compo- sition and nutritive value of some important food fishes from the Arabian Gulf . . 211 Notices NOAA Technical Reports NMFS published during the last 6 months of 1980 213 * GPO 796-086 Kt^^^'^Co, >0 ^^ATES O^ ^ r FisheixBuJIetin NOV 8 1981 Woods Hole. Ma<.Q Vol. 79, No. 2 "^ " April 1981 HUNTER, J. ROE, and RODERICK LEONG. The spawning energetics of female northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax 215 LAROCHE, WAYNE A., and SALLY L. RICHARDSON. Development of larvae and juveniles of the rockfishes Sebastes entomelas and S. zacentrus (family Scor- paenidae) and occurrence off Oregon, with notes on head spines of S. mystinus, S. flavidus, and S. melanops 231 SOMERTON, DAVID A. Contribution to the life history of the deep-sea king crab, Lithodes couesi, in the Gulf of Alaska 259 WEBB, R W. The effect of the bottom on the fast start of a flatfish Citharichthys stigmaeus 271 CAREY, FRANCIS G., and BRUCE H. ROBISON. Daily patterns in the activities of swordfish, Ziphias gladius, observed by acoustic telemetry 277 LAURS, R. MICHAEL, and JERRY A. WETHERALL. Growth rates of North Pacific albacore, Thunnus alalunga, based on tag returns 293 LYNDE, C. M. Economic feasibility of domestic groundfish harvest from western Alaska waters: a comparison of vessel types, fishing strategies, and processor locations 303 ANDERSON, JAMES JAY A stochastic model for the size offish schools 315 AHRENHOLZ, DEAN W Recruitment and exploitation of Gulf menhaden, Brevoor- tia patronus 325 FRY, BRIAN. Natural stable carbon isotope tag traces Texas shrimp migrations . . 337 Notes LOUGHLIN, THOMAS R., JACK A. AMES, and JUDSON E. VANDERVERE. An- nual reproduction, dependency period, and apparent gestation period in two Cali- fornian sea otters, Enhydra lutris 347 STEVENS, BRADLEY G., and DAVID A. ARMSTRONG. Mass mortality of female Dungeness crab. Cancer magister, on the southern Washington coast 349 YABE, MAMORU, DANIEL M. COHEN, KIYOSHI WAKABAYASHI, and TOMIO IWAMOTO. Fishes new to the eastern Bering Sea 353 KLIMLEY, A. PETER, and DONALD R. NELSON. Schooling of the scalloped hammerhead shark, Sphyrna lewini, in the Gulf of California 356 (Continued on back cover) Seattle, Washington U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Malcolm Baldrige, Secretary NATIONAL OCEANIC AND ATMOSPHERIC ADMINISTRATION John V. Byrne, Administrator NATIONAL MARINE FISHERIES SERVICE Fishery Bulletin The Fishery Bulletin carries original research reports and technical notes on investigations in fishery science, engineering, and economics. The Bulletin of the United States Fish Commission was begun in 1881; it became the Bulletin of the Bureau of Fisheries in 1904 and the Fishery Bulletin of the Fish and Wildlife Service in 1941 . Separates were issued as documents through volume 46; the last document was No. 1103. Beginning with volume 47 in 1931 and continuing through volume 62 in 1963, each separate appeared as a numbered bulletin. A new system began in 1963 with volume 63 in which papers are bound together in a single issue of the bulletin instead of being issued individually. Beginning with volume 70, number 1, January 1972, the Fishery Bulletin became a periodical, issued quarterly. In this form, it is available by subscription from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. It is also available free in limited numbers to libraries, research institutions. State and Federal agencies, and in exchange for other scientific publications. EDITOR Dr. Jay C. Quast Scientific Editor, Fishery Bulletin Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center • Auke Bay Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA P.O. Box 155, Auke Bay, AK 99821 Editorial Committee Dr. Bruce B. Collette Dr. Reuben Lasker National Marine Fisheries Service National Marine Fisheries Service Dr. Edward D. Houde Dr. Jerome J. Pella Chesapeake Biological Laboratory National Marine Fisheries Service Dr. Merton C. Ingham Dr. Sally L. Richardson National Marine Fisheries Service Gulf Coast Research Laboratory Kiyoshi G. Fukano, Managing Editor The Fishery Bulletin (USPS 090-870) is published quarterly by Scientific Publications Office, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. 7600 Sand Point Way NE, Bin C15700, Seattle, WA 981 15. Second class postage paid to Finance Department, USPS, Washington, DC 20260. Although the contents have not been copyrighted and may be reprinted entirely, reference to source is appreciated. The Secretary of Commerce has determined that the publication of this periodical is necessary in the transaction of the public business required by law of this Department. Use of funds for printing of this periodical has been approved by the Director of the Office of Management and Budget through 31 March 1982. Fishery Bulletin CONTENTS Vol. 79, No. 2 April 1981 HUNTER, J. ROE, and RODERICK LEONG. The spawning energetics of female northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax 215 LAROCHE, WAYNE A., and SALLY L. RICHARDSON. Development of larvae and juveniles of the rockfishes Sebastes entomelas and S. zacentrus (family Scor- paenidae) and occurrence off Oregon, with notes on head spines of S. mystinus, S. flauidus, and S. melanops 231 SOMERTON, DAVID A. Contribution to the life history of the deep-sea king crab, Lithodes couesi, in the Gulf of Alaska 259 WEBB, P. W The effect of the bottom on the fast start of a flatfish Citharichthys stigmaeus 271 CAREY, FRANCIS G., and BRUCE H. ROBISON. Daily patterns in the activities of swordfish, Ziphias gladius, observed by acoustic telemetry 277 LAURS, R. MICHAEL, and JERRY A. WETHERALL. Growth rates of North Pacific albacore, Thunnus alalunga, based on tag returns 293 LYNDE, C. M. Economic feasibility of domestic groundfish harvest from western Alaska waters: a comparison of vessel types, fishing strategies, and processor locations 303 ANDERSON, JAMES JAY. A stochastic model for the size offish schools 315 AHRENHOLZ, DEAN W Recruitment and exploitation of Gulf menhaden, Brevoor- tia patronus 325 FRY, BRIAN. Natural stable carbon isotope tag traces Texas shrimp migrations . . 337 Notes LOUGHLIN, THOMAS R., JACK A. AMES, and JUDSON E. VANDERVERE. An- nual reproduction, dependency period, and apparent gestation period in two Cali- fornian sea otters, Enhydra lutris 347 STEVENS, BRADLEY G., and DAVID A. ARMSTRONG. Mass mortahty of female Dungeness crab. Cancer magister, on the southern Washington coast 349 YABE, MAMORU, DANIEL M. COHEN, KIYOSHI WAKABAYASHI, and TOMIO IWAMOTO. Fishes new to the eastern Bering Sea 353 KLIMLEY, A. PETER, and DONALD R. NELSON. Schooling of the scalloped hammerhead shark, Sphyrna lewini, in the Gulf of California 356 (Continued on next page) Seattle, Washington 1981 For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402 — Subscription price per year: $14.00 domestic and $17.50 foreign. Cost per single issue: $4.00 domestic and $5.00 foreign. Contents-continued SWARTZ, STEVEN L. Cleaning symbiosis between topsmelt, Atherinops affinis, and gray whale, Eschrichtius robustus, in Laguna San Ignacio, Baja California Sur, Mexico 360 RADTKE, RICHARD L., and J. M. DEAN. Morphological features of the otoliths of the sailfish, Istiophorus platypterus , useful in age determination 360 HAYNES, JAMES M., and ROBERT H. GRAY. Diel and seasonal movements of white sturgeon, Acipenser transmontanus , in the mid-Columbia River 367 JOHNSON, JAMES H., and EMILY Z. JOHNSON. Feeding periodicity and diel variation in diet composition of subyearling coho salmon, Oncorhynchus kisutch , and steelhead, Salmo gairdneri, in a small stream during summer 370 BIRD, PATRICIA M. The occurrence of Cirolana borealis (Isopoda) in the hearts of sharks from Atlantic coastal waters of Florida 376 GRUSSENDORF, MARK JAMES. A flushing-coring device for collecting deep- burrowing infaunal bivalves in intertidal sand 383 Vol. 79, No. 1 was published on 8 July 1981. The National Marine Fisheries Service (NMFS) does not approve, rec- ommend or endorse any proprietary product or proprietary material mentioned in this publication. No reference shall be made to NMFS, or to this publication furnished by NMFS, in any advertising or sales pro- motion which would indicate or imply that NMFS approves, recommends or endorses any proprietary product or proprietary material mentioned herein, or which has as its purpose an intent to cause directly or indirectly the advertised product to be used or purchased because of this NMFS publication. THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF FEMALE NORTHERN ANCHOVY, ENGRAVLIS MORDAX J. Roe Hunter and Roderick Leong^ ABSTRACT The seasonal pattern in incidence of postovulatory follicles in northern anchovy females indicated that they spawn about 20 times per year. The maturation rates of females in the laboratory indicated that they were capable of maturing a spawning batch of eggs at weekly intervals. Examination of the egg size frequency distributions in sea-caught specimens indicated that vitellogenesis and egg maturation continued until the last spawning. We evaluated for northern anchovy the fat-water balance, caloric values of tissues, annual fat cycle, seasonal changes in egg weight, total calories present in a mature ovary, batch fecundity; and determined in the laboratory the gross caloric conversion efficiency (12.8*7^). These measurements indicated that the caloric equivalent of only two spawning batches are present in a mature ovary at any time and that two-thirds of the annual cost of 20 spawTiings could be supplied by fat stores. Estimates of ainnual reproductive effort (egg calories/ration calories x 100) ranged from 8% for 1 year to 11% for 3-year-old females. A daily ration of copepods equivalent to 4-5'^ of female wet weight per day is required to support the annual cost of growth and reproduction. Histological evidence indicated that female north- ern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, spawned about once a week in February 1978 (Hunter and Gold- berg 1980) and at 7-10 d intervals from late January through the middle of April 1979 ( Hunter and Macewicz 1980). Egg and larva survey data indicate that some spawning occurs throughout the year, although about 50% of the annual production of northern anchovy larvae occurs during the peak months of spawning (February to April) (Lasker and Smith 1977). These findings indicate that northern anchovy females spawn many times per year. Thus, the annual fecundity of northern anchovy is higher than originally suspected by MacGregor (1968) and may be regu- lated by availability of food. Energy regulation of fecundity has been suggested for other marine fish stocks and could be important as a density- dependent population regulation mechanism (Bagenal 1973). The objectives of this study were: to validate recent work on northern anchovy spawning by determining if such a high frequency of spawning is developmentally and energetically possible; to estimate the annual energy cost of reproduction; and to discuss the sources of variation. We esti- mated the average number of spawnings by north- ern anchovy females in a year and tested the 'Southwest Fisheries Center La Jolia Laboratory, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, La Jolla, CA 92038. Meinuscript accepted October 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79, NO. 2, 1981. hypothesis that they are capable of maturing eggs at the required rate. We considered the energy cost of reproduction, factors that affected varia- tion in costs, and related reproductive costs to fat stores. Finally we estimated the annual repro- ductive effort (egg cal /ration cal). In addition to data collected specifically for this study, we used data available at the Southwest Fisheries Center (SWFC), La Jolla, Calif., including many unpub- lished sources. METHODS Field Data To estimate the annual number of spawnings by northern anchovy, we used the data of Hunter and Goldberg (1980) and Hunter and Macewicz (1980) on the incidence of 24-h-old postovulatory follicles. The proportion of mature females with 24-h-old postovulatory follicles was considered equivalent to the fraction of females spawning per day during a cruise (Hunter and Goldberg 1980). All samples were taken in the Southern California Bight in 1977-79; the number of females analyzed per cruise was 148 from March 1977; 14 from September 1977; 295 from February 1978; 395 from January-February 1979; 557 from March- April 1979; and 33 from June 1979. Data were plotted at the mid-date for the cruises which were 10-22 d long. 215 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 2 To estimate the rate of egg maturation required for weekly spawning, we used the frequency distributions of egg size in mature northern an- chovy ovaries of females taken at sea. We mea- sured distributions in 10 females taken in the Southern California Bight in February 1979, and in 6 taken in Monterey Bay in March 1979 by Hunter and Macewicz (1980). Five of the females from the Southern California Bight had 24-h-old postovulatory follicles indicating spawning had occurred on the day before they were captured, and the other five were mature without evidence of recent spawning. The ovaries of the six females from Monterey were highly atretic and in post- spawning condition, but had yolked eggs (Hunter and Macewicz 1980). This latter group was used to illustrate the condition of ovaries at the cessation of spawning. Our method of measuring the egg size-frequency distributions was similar to that of MacGregor (1968). We counted and measured to the nearest 0.05 mm all eggs >0.05 mm (major axis) in a weighed sample of the ovary. Seasonal changes in fat content of female north- ern anchovy were calculated using the original data summarized by Lasker and Smith (1977). Their samples were taken at roughly monthly intervals from February 1965 to June 1967 ( n = 593). Their data, supplemented by additional data (n = 338) taken in the summer and fall of 1979, were used to estimate the relation between wet weight without gonad ( W) and fat content (F) and dry weight (without fat) (D). The multiple regres- sion equation for this relation was W = -0.018 + 0.320 F + 5.469 D (1) where all variables are in grams, r^ = 0.969, and n = 981. This equation permitted calculation of wet weight of northern anchovy females after fat gain or loss. Wet weight changes only slightly with fat loss because water content increases as fat decreases (lies and Wood 1965) (Table 1). The same data were used to establish the relation between dry weight (without fat) (D) and stan- dard length (L) where logio L = 0.313 logio D + 1.930, (2) r^ = 0.974. Thus, wet weight can be estimated for northern anchovy of any standard length given the fat content. Ahlstrom^ measured the major and minor axes of 50-150 northern anchovy eggs taken in each of 58 standard ichthyoplankton tows (Smith and Richardson 1977) along the coast of California and Baja California in 1955, 1956, 1957, and 1965. These data, combined with an additional 30 tows (100 eggs measured/tow) taken in the same region in 1969, were used to estimate seasonal changes in the size of northern anchovy eggs. We calculated monthly mean egg dimensions for the combined data; number of tows per month varied from 9 to 16 (February- July) and from 1 to 4 in the period of low egg abundance (August-December). We calcu- lated the mean volume of the eggs per month from average egg dimensions using the equation for a prolate spheroid. The volume (V) in cubic milli- meters was converted to dry weight (£■) in milli- grams with the relation established in the lab- oratory using freshly spawned eggs E = 0.0012 + 0.0930 V (3) where r^ = 0.646 and n = 32. Laboratory Data Three groups of northern anchovy of 1,200-1,300 fish each were matured in the laboratory to measure the rate of ovarian maturation and to estimate gross growth efficiency. The fish were ^E. H. Ahlstrom, Southwest Fisheries Center, NMFS, NOAA, La Jolla, CA 92038, unpubl. data, 1979. Table l.— Relationship between fat-free dry weight or length and wet weight for northern anchovy at the average season- al minimum and maximum fat content. Relationships calculated from regressions; all body weights are without gonads. Standard length' (mm) Fat -free dry weight (g) Wet weight and water content at minimum (15%)^ fat content Wet weight and water content at maximum (41%)^ fat content Fat (g) Wetweight3±95%C.I. Water" (%) Fat (g) 1.390 2.009 2.780 Wetweight3±95%C.I. 11.36±0.11 16.44±0.18 22.75 ±0.35 Wafer" (%) 106 118 131 2.000 2.891 4.000 0.353 0.510 0.706 11.03±0.19 15.96±0.13 22.08 + 0.12 79 79 79 70 70 70 'From Equation (2) in text. ^Percentage of the dry weight including fat. ^From Equation (1) in text; 95% confidence Intervals calculated using Gauss multipliers (Snedecor and Cochran 1967). "[IV - (D + F)IW] X 100, where W = wet weight without ovary, D = fat-free dry weight, and F = weight of fat. 216 HUNTER and ROE: THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY purchased from bait dealers from September to October in 1977 and 1978 and held in circular tanks 4.6 m in diameter x 1 m deep (volume 16.6 m'*) v^ith a fresh seawater inflow of 20 1/min. The fish were exposed to the natural photoperiod but were shielded from direct sunlight. They were fed a ration of Oregon Moist Trout Pellets^ 6 d/wk. The pellets were dispensed with an automatic feeder over a 4-5 h feeding period beginning at 0800 h(Leong 1971). To estimate the rate of egg maturation ( group 1), 8-12 females were sampled twice weekly for 6 wk. The ovaries of nearly all females were immature (no yolked oocytes) when sampling began; the mean standard length (SL) of females was 112.4 mm increasing to 116.4 mm in 6 wk. The fish were held at ambient temperatures which ranged from 17.9° to 22.0° C and averaged 19.7° C; daily temperatures closely followed those taken at the Scripps Institution of Oceanography pier. We measured standard length, wet weight, and de- termined the frequency distribution of egg sizes within the ovary for each female sampled. We used as a measure of the state of sexual maturity, the mean size of eggs (major axis) within the most advanced spawning batch. The number of eggs within a batch was calculated from the wet weight of the female using the batch fecundity equation of Hunter and Macewdcz (1980) loge T = 4.248 + 1.620 \oge W. (4) (Equation corrected for bias in taking the antilog; Beauchamp and Olson 1973), where T = total number of eggs in a spawning batch and W = female wet weight (without ovary) in grams. To measure growth efficiency, two groups (groups 2 and 3) were held under similar tank conditions, but were sampled at 2-wk intervals beginning at the end of November and ending in mid-February. Group 2 was in captivity for about 1 mo and group 3 for 2 wk prior to sampling. Group 2 was held at 15.6° C while group 3 was held at ambient temperatures which ranged from 15.2° to 17.0° C and averaged 16.0° C. Mean standard length of fish in groups 2 and 3 was 107.2 mm at the beginning and 121.4 mm at the end of the experiment. The stomach contents of each fish sampled from groups 2 and 3 were weighed and used to deter- mine the mean ration for the experiment. The ration was calculated from the equation R = r s t + S. (5) where R = ration, expressed as wet weight food consumed/wet weight fish (in grams); r = rate of gastric evacuation (dashed line. Figure 1); s = average weight of food in stomach/fish weight during the period of gut filling (solid line. Figure 1); t = duration of feeding (4 h, group 2; 5 h, group 3); and Se - weight of food in stomach/fish weight GROUP 2 .030 X LlI >- Q o OD X I- .010 - UJ 5 Q O O 0.3024 X .025 - .020 - .015 - .005 - I C5 >- Q O CD X UJ UJ Q O O 1 2 3 12 3 FILLING EVACUATION 030 GROUP 3 .025 - • 020 - y = .0006 1. 0040 X — a1 ^--y= 02276" .015 \ • \ \ \ .010 • / \ \ .005 " / • / • 1 1 1 1300 h 1 1 1 1 J . . J 0,4442 X 12 3 4 FILLING 12 3 EVACUATION ^Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. ELAPSED TIME (h) FIGURE 1. — Rate of stomach filling and gastric evacuation in two groups of northern anchovy fed Oregon Moist Trout Pellets. Weight of stomach contents expressed as a proportion of fish weight; each point is mean for 8-12 fish; feeding began at h (filling) and ended at Oh (evacuation) (arrow); time of day when feeding ended is above arrow. Daily ration calculated from these data was 4.4'7f body weight/d, group 2; and 4.69c body weight/d, group 3. 217 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 at end of feeding period. Similar functions have been used by Tyler (1970), discussed and used by Eggers (1977), and discussed by Elliot and Persson (1978). The daily pattern of feeding and evacua- tion and the data used to calculate the parameters for the ration equation are given in Figure 1. We use an exponential equation to estimate rate of gastric evacuation (r) because it is required by theory and the above model and use a linear regression equation for gut filling because the equation is used only to provide an empirical estimate of the mean stomach contents ( s ) during feeding. The mean ration for a feeding day was 0.0437 g/g body wet weight (group 2) and 0.0462 g/g body wet weight (group 3); these values were multiplied by the mean wet weight of fish sampled (18.6 g, group 2; 17.6 g, group 3) to express the ration in terms of the average fish weight in each experi- ment. This value was adjusted by the ratio, total number of feeding periods/duration of the experi- ment (days) (ratio = 59/69, group 2; 67/78, group 3), to adjust the ration for days when no feeding occurred. This daily ration for the experiment was converted to calories by multiplying by 0.656 (average ratio of dry to wet weight for stomach contents of northern anchovy fed Oregon Moist Trout Pellets) and by 4,912, the caloric value per gram for this food (Table 2). The daily ration for fish in group 2 was 2,238 cal/d and was 2,245 cal/d for fish in group 3. standard techniques (Table 2). Laboratory fish were used for all measurements except for the caloric value of northern anchovy oil where sea- caught specimens were used. SPAWNING FREQUENCY AND RATE OF EGG MATURATION Number of Spawnings per "Vfear We plotted the fraction of females spawniing per day ( females with 24-h-old postovulatory follicles ) as a function of sampling date to estimate the number of spawnings produced by female north- ern anchovy in 1 yr. The seasonal change in the fraction of females spawning followed the sea- sonal change in the average relative larval abun- dance for 1953-60 (Lasker and Smith 1977) (Figure 2). The fraction of females spawning was the highest during peak spawning months and de- clined to zero by September. In peak spawning months the percentage of mature females spawn- ing per day was 16-14% , indicating that individual females spawned every 6-7 d. The seasonal decline in the fraction of females spawning per day could be caused by an increase in the interval between spawnings in individual females, or by a complete cessation of spawTiing by an increasingly larger proportion of the population, or by a combination of these events. Table 2. — Mean calories per gram dry weight of various northern anchovy tissues and food. Mean Tissues or food n calories SD Anchovy fat 4 9,227 40 Ancfiovy eggs (including fat) 4 5,450 90 Whole female anchovy, less ovary (fat free) 11 4,129 176 Anchovy ovary (fat free) 29 4,960 79 Anchovy ovary with 18%' fat — 5,710 — Oregon Moist Trout Pellets 4 4,912 214 ' 1 8% IS the mean fat content of northern anchovy ovaries: caloric value was calculated from the values for fat and fat- free ovary. Dry weight and fat content of northern anchovy were determined for the first and last samples of groups 2 and 3. Fish were dried in an oven at 60° C until constant weight and fat extracted using Soxhlet extraction with chloroform-methanol (Krvaric and Muzinic 1950). Caloric values of northern anchovy oil, newly spawned eggs, ovaries and whole females ( without ovaries), and Oregon Moist Trout Pellets were estimated using a Parr bomb calorimeter and 000 Month Figure 2. — Fraction of mature northern anchovy females from the Southern California Bight spawning per day during various months (dots). Fraction calculated from incidence of females with 24-h-old postovulatory follicles (Hunter and Goldberg 1980; Hunter and Macewicz 19801. Triangles indicate relative larval abundance per month from 1953 to 1960 I Lasker and Smith 1977). Shaded areas indicate months where spawning fraction was not estimated; total spawnings per year by northern anchovy females was estimated from areas under the two curves (see text). 218 HUNTEK and ROE: THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY The area under the curve for fraction of females spawning per day is an estimate of the number of spawnings produced per female from February to September. This calculation indicated that each mature female northern anchovy spawned on the average 15 times between February and Septem- ber. The number of spawnings that occurred in October- January ( shaded area, Figure 2 ) had to be estimated indirectly because no ovary samples existed. We assumed that the number of spawn- ings was proportional to the relative larval abun- dance in October-January, adjusted by the ratio of the areas under the spawning fraction and larval abundance curves for Feburary to September. This calculation indicated that about five spawn- ings would have had to occur in October-January to account for the abundance of larvae in that period; this brings the total number of spawnings for female to 20 for the ye£ir. 1 00, 000 1 ^ I \ o • Nonspawninq Spowned 24H Before Capture > < > o z CO o LlI 10,000 ' \ ' ' \ ' ' \ 6 i^ ■o- 7 -Q ^ \ 1 . _l \/ \ b ( < 1- o 1- 1000 • 1 1,1 b 0-1 0-2 0-3 04 0-5 0-6 0-7 08 0-9 MAJOR AXIS OF EGGS (mm) Form of Frequency Distribution of Egg Size The form of the egg size distribution in mature northern anchovy ovaries is illustrated for a female taken 24 h after spawning and a mature female without evidence of recent spawning ( non- spawning) (Figure 3). Ovarian egg size distribu- tions typically resemble these except for females with hydrated eggs, where the hydrated eggs stand out as a discontinuous group of large eggs. In mature females (without hydrated eggs) the egg size distributions are continuous and typically have one or two modes as illustrated. In the nonspawning female a major mode of large yolked eggs existed between 0.6 and 0.8 mm (major egg axis) and in the spawned female the first modal group occurred at about 0.5 mm. Eggs <0.2 mm are the most abundant size class in both ovaries. These small eggs, also abundant in immature ovaries, form part of the reservoir of immature unyolked eggs which are matured during each spawning season. Yolk appears in the egg when the major axis of the egg reaches about 0.4 mm. The ovary of the spawned female (20.2 g) in Figure 3 contained 9,384 yolked eggs, whereas that of the nonspawn- ing female (25.3 g) contained 26,761 yolked eggs. The batch fecundity equation (Equation (4) ) pre- dicts a batch size of 9,110 eggs for the spawned female and 13,120 eggs for the nonspawning fe- male. Hence, about one spawning batch of yolked eggs existed in the spawned female and about two Figure 3. — Total eggs in ovary i logm scale) as a function of the major egg axis for a 20.2 g female northern anchovy i ovary-free weight) captured 24 h after spawning and for a 25.3 g female, showing no evidence of recent spawTiing i nonspawning). Small- est eggs measured were 0.05 mm; measurements were made in increments of 0.05 mm. Females were captured in January to February 1979 in the Southern California Bight. in the nonspawning female. If a female were to spawn more than a few times in one season, it would have to mature and yolk many of the small unyolked eggs in the ovary. If spawning were to occur at weekly intervals for months, this would be a continuous process. Rate of Egg Maturation Required for Continuous Production of Eggs Compared With Laboratory Maturation Rate For northern anchovy to continually mature and add yolk to a series of egg batches, the abundance of egg sizes in the ovary must vary inversely with the rate of egg maturation. Thus, a hypothetical curve for the rate of maturation of anchovy eggs can be constructed from the average size of eggs in each potential spawning batch within an ovary, if the time between batches or spawning frequency is known. This hypothetical rate can then be compared with the rate of egg maturation in the laboratory to determine if the predicted rate is possible. To conduct this test for northern anchovy, we partitioned the total number of eggs in the ovary of 10 sea-caught fish into successive spawning 219 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 batches (starting with the largest eggs) and calcu- lated the mean major axis of eggs in each succes- sive batch. The number of eggs per batch was estimated from the wet weight of the females using the batch fecundity Equation (4). As might be expected, the mean major axis of eggs in each of the potential spawning batches for the five females taken 24 h after spawning was about one spawning batch out of phase from the five nonspawning fish (Figure 4, upper). When the most advanced spawning batch of the recently spawned group was lagged by one spawning inter- val, the function was the same for both groups (Figure 4, lower) and similar to data on "non- spa woiing females" in Hunter and Goldberg (1980). The lower curves indicate that about four spawn- ing batches of eggs >0.15 mm exist in the ovary of females near spawning condition. Hunter and E E I o I- < m o < CO O UJ li. o CO X < O < z < UJ 0.7 0-6 05 0.4 0-3 0.2 0-1 0.0 - 9 O Nonspawning \ • Spawned 24H •\ Before Capture - v\ X Highly Atretic Ovaries - ^^^ [>Otr#— •-^ 1 1 1 1 1 if^^)P^®--^^=©--®-®-C>-C>-C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 ORDER OF SPAWNING BATCHES Figure 4. — Mean major axis of eggs in successive spawning batches within the ovary of northern anchovy. Number of eggs per batch estimated for each female from Equation (4). Numbers on abscissa indicate order of spawning batch with 1 = the most advanced batch. Circles are means of five nonspawning females (no evidence of recent spawning!, and dots are means for five females having spawned within 24 h (females taken in the Southern California Bight); the X's are means for six females with highly atretic ovaries taken in Monterey Bay in 1979. The lower panel illustrates the correspondence between average egg size in successive batches in nonatretic ovaries when recently spawned females are lagged by one spawning batch interval. Only the 15 batches containing the largest eggs are shown. Goldberg (1980) determined for 38 mature non- spawning females that the mean size of eggs in the most mature batch was 0.59 mm; and in the 5 females in the present analysis, the mean size was 0.71 mm. Thus a batch of eggs of 0.15 mm mean size major axis would have to reach about 0.6-0.7 mm in about 4 wk (28 d) if females were to spawn five or more times at weekly intervals. The ovaries of all laboratory females were immature when the maturation experiment began (elapsed time = 0, Figure 5) although the mean size of eggs in the most advanced spawning batch was quite variable among females (mean egg size ranged from 0.13 to 0.48 mm). To illustrate the rate of ovarian maturation we used the average of the mean egg size in the spawning batch of individual females (Figure 5). The rate of maturation of ovaries in the laboratory group was similar to that predicted from egg size frequency distributions of wild fish, if one assumes spawning in the sea occurs weekly (line. Figure 5). The average of the mean size of eggs in the most advanced spawning batch was 0.15 mm after the first week of the experiment and was 0.62 mm 4 wk later. Thus maturation of eggs from 0.15 to 0.62 mm occurred in four wk and is about the same as the theoretical estimate based on egg size distributions in sea-caught specimens. This demonstrates that the rate of egg maturation required for continuous production of egg batches •a s q: O Q S ^ 0.2 ^ , r _ / /\ . r/' . ( / O I I 1 y\ / < ■'■ y '^ J ' I V^ ' - ( j^r - - 1 l-^ 1 1 1 1 7 14 2 1 2 8 5 5 42 ELAPSED TIME (days) Figure 5. — Maturation of eggs in the most advanced spawning batch of laboratory-held northern anchovy as a function of elapsed time. Maturity is achieved when average egg size in batch attains 0.6-0.7 mm. Circles are averages of the mean size of eggs in the most advanced spawning batch of females sampled on a particular day, dots the median, and bars are ± 2 SE. Number of eggs used to calculate the mean for each female was deter- mined using Equation (4). The solid line is hypothetical matura- tion rate of egg batches from 0.15 mm (major egg axis), assuming females spawn at weekly intervals; the line is derived from data in Figure 4. 220 HUNTER and ROE: THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY at 7-10 d intervals occurs in the laboratory and could occur in the sea. In addition, the forms of the theoretical and the laboratory maturation curves were similar, with maturation of small unyolked eggs being much slower than that of larger yolked eggs. Cessation of Spawning An assumption of some fecundity studies of multiple spawning fishes is that all eggs to be spawned in a season are yolked at the beginning of the season and spawning ends when these yolked eggs are depleted. The preceding analysis indi- cated that yolking of eggs from the reservoir of small unyolked eggs is a continuous process in northern anchovy. In this section we determined whether spawning ceases because of a lack of eggs of an appropriate size for maturation. We com- pared egg size-frequency distributions from six females with highly atretic ovaries with those of reproductively active females. Although the ovaries of the six females contained yolked eggs, they were highly atretic and judged to be in post- spawning condition, using histological criteria presented by Hunter and Macewicz (1980). The form of the line relating the mean major axis of eggs to successive spawning batches (dashed line, Figure 4, upper) was similar in form to those of the other groups. The eggs in the most advanced spawning batch were smaller (0.45 mm) in atretic ovaries than in those of females that had spawned 24 h before capture (0.55 mm). Hunter and Goldberg (1980) showed that the mean major axis of the most advanced eggs (excluding hydrated eggs) was 0.46 mm in females captured on the night of spawning. This value is very close to the mean for highly atretic ovaries. Thus, oocyte maturation, at least in these six females, probably continued up to the time of the last spawTiing, whereupon maturation ceased and the remaining oocytes became atretic. Spawning did not cease because of lack of yolked eggs; the atretic ovaries of these six females had the same dis- tribution of egg sizes as any female ovary imme- diately after spawning. ENERGY COST OF SPAWNING We consider here three variables affecting the cost of reproduction: Number of eggs in a spawning batch, size of eggs, and the energy existing in a mature ovary. Factors not considered include the metabolic costs of egg maturation and reproduc- tive behavior and variation in the caloric content of eggs. Number of Eggs The spawning batch fecundity (number of hy- drated eggs) of northern anchovy varies exponen- tially with female weight (Equation (4) ). Similar to many other fishes (Bagenal 1973), fecundity among females of the same size or weight is highly variable. Variability may be caused by variations in egg size, food availability, and number of previous spawnings within the season. Feeding conditions may not greatly affect batch fecundity in northern anchovy. Females matured in the laboratory (groups 2 and 3) were fed a high ration and grew about four times faster than those in the sea, yet the batch fecundity was about the same as field-caught specimens, which con- sume a lower ration (Table 3). Although the laboratory females had not begun spawning, their batch fecundity was similar to that offish taken in the sea between January and April. This indicates that the average batch fecundity may not change over the first months of spawning. The fact that fecundity of females captured in March- April 1979 was about the same as that for January-February 1979 (Hunter and Macewicz 1980) also supports Table 3. — Comparison of the batch fecundity of northern anchovy females matured in laboratory and in the sea within two weight classes. Locality n Mean weight (without ovary) (g) Batch fecundity (total eggs) Weight class (g) Mean±2SE Estimated for mean weight from fecundity equation for sea-caught female' 15-19.9 20-24.9 Laboratory^ Sea3 Laboratory^ Sea3 38 17 12 21 17.9 16.7 22.8 22.6 8,910± 1,210 6,800 ±1,1 50 11,900± 950 10,400 ±1,540 7,420 6,690 11,100 10,900 'From Equation (4) (Hunter and Macewicz 1980); intercept increased by 0.0647 ('/js^) to adjust for bias in taking antilog (Beau- champ and Olson 1973). ^Batch fecundity = number eggs in most advanced mode in ovary where mean egg size 5=0.65 mm (major axis; eggs not hydrated). ^Batch fecundity = number of hydrated eggs In females without new postovulatory follicles (Hunter and Goldberg 1980; Hunter and Macewicz 1980). 221 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 this view. We conclude that, at least over the first few months of spawning, the mean number of eggs per spawning batch may be independent of past spawning history. Size of Eggs The size of spawned northern anchovy eggs varies seasonally as do those of other clupeoid fishes (Blaxter 1969; Ciechomski 1973; Le Clus 1979). Smith and Richardson (1977) demonstrated that the major axes of northern anchovy eggs spawned in February 1972 were larger than those of eggs spawned in August 1972 (P = 0.05). The seasonal trend in dimensions of northern anchovy eggs is illustrated in Figure 6 (upper). The dry weight of eggs (calculated from their volume (Equation (3)) varies by about 209^ over the spawning season; thus, females could produce about five more spawnings/yr at the minimum egg size than at the maximum with no increase in energy demand. The seasonal trend in egg dry weight is similar to the relative larval abundance (shaded area of Figure 6), with the largest eggs produced in February to April when most of the spawning occurs and the smallest eggs late in the summer when the least spawning occurs. Several possible explanations exist for the seasonal trend in egg size. Females may produce smaller eggs as the spawning season progresses or, alternatively, large females which begin spav^ming earlier may produce larger eggs than small females. Regard- less of the mechanism, it probably is adaptive Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Month Figure 6. — Mean size of northern anchovy eggs taken in routine plankton tows by month. Upper, mean major and minor axes of eggs; lower, mean weight of eggs calculated from average dimensions of eggs given in upper figure using Equation (3); shaded area is the relative larval abundance for years 1953-60, from Lasker and Smith ( 19771. to produce larger eggs early in the spawning season when water temperatures are cooler since the advantage falls to larger eggs as water tem- perature declines, because incubation periods are longer (Ware 1975). Maturation of Eggs Northern anchovy eggs <0.1 mm are spherical; they become oblate spheroids between 0.1 and 0.25 mm (major axis) and thereafter retain the same proportionality between axes through hydration and spawning (Figure 7, upper). Hydration of the spawning batch of eggs (rapid uptake of fluid) begins about 12 h before spawning (Hunter and in < fc E 0.8 0.6 0.4 02 QO 90 .-.N' ^v -rr^'- Y = 0.009 + 0.463 M r^= 0.950 ■■i*!-: I I I IT V t < 3 > S o (5 O < UJ UJ O I- CK Z UJ O Q- O >■ i- O UJ O 2 is UJ — ^ o SO- TO Y = 60.39- 13.92 LnM r' = 0.78 60 r i L. I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.0 1.0 0.0, Ln y=l.539M- 1.249 I I I 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 MEAN MAJOR AXIS OF EGG (mm) 1.4 ^ Hydration Spawn UNYOLKED 1 TOLKED 1 III 1 1 7 14 21 28 ELAPSED TIME (d) Figure 7. — The mean length of the mmor egg axis lupperi, water content of the ovary (middle), and ovary wet weight of a 16 g northern anchovy female calculated from Equation (6) (bottom), as functions of the mean major egg axis of eggs in the most advanced spawning batch (natural logarithms were usedt. Original data for Equation (6) (solid line, bottom) given in Hunter and Goldberg (1980); dashed lines indicate the range of egg sizes that may hydrate; and they converge at the average weight of a hydrated ovary in a 16 g female. Time scale on abscissa is based on hypothetical rate of egg maturation required for weekly spawning (see Figure 4). 222 HUNTER and ROE: THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY Macewicz 1980), resulting in a rapid increase in ovary wet weight (Figure 7, lower) but no change in dry weight (Le Clus 1979). The mean size of eggs in a spawning batch, just before hydration, ranges from 0.6 to 0.8 mm; eggs >0.8 mm nearly always show histological signs of hydration. The average size of eggs that are hydrated would be expected to vary since the size of spawned eggs is variable. The wet weight of the ovary (G) increases during maturation and is a function of the mean major axis of the eggs in the most mature spawn- ing batch (M) and female wet weight without ovary (W); in northern anchovy this function is expressed as \ogc G = -4.213 + 1.069 logc W + 0.555 M log, W (6) 1980). The spawning batch of a 16.4 g female contains 6,500 eggs or 1,066 cal (from Equation (4)1. Thus, just before spawning the ovary con- tains about 2,059 cal and the most advanced spawning batch constitutes about 52% of the calories in the ovary (documentation given in Table 4). Similar calculations can be made using the volume of eggs in the ovary and egg dimen- sions given in Figure 7 (upper) or by calculating the wet weight of the ovary at 0.46 mm egg major axis (after spawning) and at 0.81 mm egg major axis (at onset of hydration) using Equation (6). All calculations yield similar results when converted to dry weight or calories, i.e., about one-half of the calories in the ovary are lost in one spawning. We conclude that the calories invested in a mature ovary are small relative to the total reproductive cost of 20 spawnings. (Hunter and Goldberg 1980) (Figure 7, lower). The water content of the ovary of laboratory females (group 1) declined during maturation from 80 to 659c just before hydration (Figure 7, center). The fat content did not change significantly over the maturation period; mean ovarian fat content of laboratory-matured northern anchovy was 18.6 ±1.2% (±2 SE of mean, n = 41) of ovary dry weight. As the fat content did not change, the caloric value of ovarian tissue can be considered to be constant at 5,710 cal/g dry weight (Table 2). Using Equation (6), caloric values (Table 2), and water content of ovary (Figure 7), we estimate the ovary of a 16.4 g female contains 933 cal just after spawning when the mean major axis of most advanced eggs = 0.46 mm (Hunter and Goldberg ANNUAL FAT CYCLE AND SPAWNING As the caloric equivalent of only two spawnings exists in the ovary at one time, northern anchovy must use energy stored in other tissues and food income to support reproduction. Lasker and Smith (1977) showed that the fat content of northern anchovy, like many other clupeoids (Blaxter and HoUiday 1963; Shul'man 1974) varies seasonally. The fat accumulates in the body rapidly between April and July, matching the annual spring bloom of zooplankton (Lasker and Smith 1977). It usually remains high through December and then de- clines to a minimum between February and May (Figure 8). The decline in fat occurs during the months of maximum spawning. Thus, fat stored Table 4. — Reproductive characteristics for the average female northern anchovy. Item Value Explanation and data source Weight and fecundity: Mean female wet weight, less ovary 16.4g Ovary wet weight after spawning ' 601 g Ovary dry weight after spawning' ,174 g Number of eggs in one spawning batch 6,500 eggs Number of eggs spawned/yr 130,000 eggs Dry weight one spawned egg .0301 mg Caloric content of ovaries and spawn; Calories in one spawning batch 1,066 cal Calories in ovary after spawning 993 cal Calories in ovary just before spawning 2,059 cal Percentage of calories In ovary lost in one spawning batch 52°/o Daily spawning cost during peak spawning months 152 cal /d Spawning related to fat stores: Maximum fat in body 2.009 g Minimum fat in body ■510g Total fat stores 13,831 cal Fat stores in spawning batch equivalents 13 batches For 1978 and 1979 (Hunter and Macewicz 1980) Equation (6) where M = 0.46 mm Percentage water in ovary from Figure 7 (center) Equation (4) Assume 20 spawnings (Figure 2) Mean of monthly dry weight: (Figure 6) weighted by relative monthly larval abundance (Lasker and Smith 1977) Caloric value of eggs = 5,450 cal/g (Table 2) Caloric value of ovary = 5,710 cal/g (Table 2) Assume spawning interval = 7 d Equation (1) where 41% of dry weight = fat Equation (1) where 15°o of dry weight = fat Caloric value of fat = 9,227 cal/g (Table 2) ' Females with postovulatory follicles < 24 h old. 223 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 50 gi 40 T3 »•- O 30 - 9> 20 o - 1967, .^ -- — °^ . . A » /^ ^ V \ ^^2-^ \ / ^ \ / \^s ■■•■ / ^ V •"'^ \0^s / '' 1966 -o- ■■o\ ^\^^^_/ ^d 1965 -J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 - JAN FMAMJ JASON DEC MONTHS Figure 8. — Annual fat cycle of northern anchovy. Fat content expressed as a percentage of dry weight for various months in 1965, 1966, and 1967. Data from Lasker and Smith (1977). from the previous spring and summer may be used the following year to support reproduction. Fat stores may not be used directly to promote egg production, which are largely protein, but rather to provide energy needed for metabolism, per- mitting energy from food to be used for egg maturation. We calculated the number of spawnings that could be financed by the annual decline in fat stores, assuming that this energy or its equivalent is used for reproduction. We used the average minimum and maximum fat level for the 3 50- (Table 5) to estimate the grams of fat annually available for reproduction. Using the dry weight, fat, and wet weight relation (Equation (1)), we calculate that a 16.4 g female would store annu- ally 13,831 cal of fat (Table 4) which is equivalent to 13 spawning batches. Thus, about two-thirds of the annual cost of egg production can be accounted for by the annual decline in fat stores. The rate of increase in fat in the spring was similar in the 3 yr (1965-67) although the timing of the onset varied by 2-3 mo. The maximum rate occurred in the late spring or summer over a period of about 63 d (Table 5). Nearly all fat stores were accumulated over this period; on the average fat increased from 16.5 to 40.5% of the dry weight Table 5. — Maximum and minimum fat content of female northern anchovy from Southern California Bight in 1965-67.' Fat content (' /o dry weight) Period of max of Increase in Minimum Maximum fat stores Year Mo. % Mo. % Mo. Total days 1965 1966 1967 Mean Apr. Mar. Apr. 13.0 15.0 18.2 15.4 Nov. July June 39.8 40.0 43.5 41.1 June-Aug. May-June Mar- May 59 60 69 63 over the 63 d. Thus, calories would accumulate in a 16.4 g fish at a rate of about 200 cal/d or the caloric equivalent of one spav^ming batch would be stored about every 5 d. This analysis indicates that the annual spring bloom might regulate the reproductive potential of the northern anchovy population. This effect may have a 1-yr lag because fat accumulated in the late spring and summer would presumably be used to support reproduction the following year because most spawning occurs in February through April. On the other hand, if 20 spawnings occur, about one-third of them would have to be supported from energy gained during the current year. Thus, production of plankton might have an effect on egg production late in the spawning season, but the major effect of the spring bloom on reproduction may occur the following year. ENERGY BUDGET FOR FEMALE GROWTH AND REPRODUCTION In this section we calculate an annual energy budget for reproduction and grovid;h in female northern anchovy based on relationships estab- lished in past sections and in the laboratory ration study outlined below. Food ration (R) may be partitioned into energy losses of metabolism (Q), excretion (X), digestive losses (/), reproductive costs (S), gains in growth {N) and fat stores (F) where i? = Q+X + / + S + iV + F. (7) We do not estimate Q, X,or I, but rather calcu- late for laboratory females the gross conversion efficiency (C) where C = S + N + F R (8) Variables A^^ and F were calculated by subtracting weight and fat content of females determined at the beginning of the experiment from that deter- mined at the end (Table 6); reproductive cost S was simply the increase in weight of the ovary since the fish did not spawn during the experi- ment; and R was calculated using Equation (5). The coefficient C was used to estimate ration for natural populations using R S + N 'Data illustrated in Figure 8; from Lasker and Smitti (1977). (9) 224 HUNTER and ROE; THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY Table 6. — Calories gained per day and daily ration of two groups of northern anchovy fed Oregon Moist Trout Pellets. Group Standard length (mm) Fat-free dry weight (without ovary) (g) Fat in body (without ovary) (g) Ovary dry (Including weight fat) (g) Item Beginning End Beginning End Beginning End Beginning End Group 2 Mean 108 120 238 3.27 1.17 2.66 0.14 0.38 SE of mean .86 1.04 09 .12 .30 .18 .02 .02 Number of fish 21 19 21 Group 3 19 21 19 21 21 Mean 106 122 2.16 3.30 .70 2.54 .04 .38 SE of mean 1.51 1.31 10 08 03 .11 .02 .03 Number of fish 24 18 24 18 24 18 24 18 Calories gained per day' Duration of experiment (d) Daily ration 2 (cal) Body (less ovary) (fat free) Fat Ovary (including fat) 2 69 3 78 Mean 73.5 Percentage of ration 2,238 2,245 2.241 53 60 56 2.5 199 218 208 9.2 19.8 24.9 22.4 1.0 ' Caloric values in Table 2. ^Method of calculation of ration outlined in methods. Total 271 303 287 12.8 Fat stores (F) are included in calculation of C in the laboratory work (Equation (8)) but not in the ration for natural populations (Equation (9)) be- cause on an annual basis it is assumed to be subsumed in the annual cost of reproduction. The caloric value used for growth was set at the minimum fat content of the year (15.4% of the dry weight) using values in Table 2 and Equation (1). Laboratory Growth Efficiency most advanced batch in the ovary increased from 0.55 to 0.63 mm in group 2 and from < 0.25 to 0.63 mm for group 3. Most of the caloric gain was in fat; the percentage of the dry weight that contained fat increased from 32.6 to 44.2% in group 2 and from 24.5 to 43.2% in group 3 and accounted for about 9.2% of the daily ration. The caloric conversion efficiency for the total gain of calories in the body (including ovary and fat) was 12.8%. We calcu- lated from data of Takahashi and Hatanaka ( 1960) Northern anchovy (groups 2 and 3) maintained in the laboratory grew much faster than those in the sea. The growth in length was about four times that estimated for wild northern anchovy by Spratt (1975) but was seven times faster when Spratt's data were converted to wet weight using the length-weight conversion for females of Collins (1969) (solid line, Figure 9). Thus, the average ration consumed by northern anchovy in the laboratory, 2,241 cal/d (about 124 cal/g fish wet weight per d) is probably much larger than the one consumed in the sea. On a wet weight basis, the laboratory ration (4.5% of fish wet weight/d) is deceptively low because the pelleted food had a much lower water content (35%) than natural foods (85%). A caloric equivalent ration of natural foods (copepods) would be about 16% of the wet weight/d. Spawning did not begin during the experiment, hence the proportion of the daily ration incor- porated into the ovaries (0.8%) was a function of only maturation of the ovary (Table 6). The median of the mean major axis of the eggs in the 24 r 22 CT K 20 I o UJ 3 18 t- LJ > o X o 14 - < 12 - 10- 1.5 DAYS IN LAB O GROUP 2 • GROUP 3 — Years in sea (Sprott 1975) O ELAPSED TIME IN LABORATORY (days) J I I I I 1 1 1 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 J I I I I I I I L 2.0 2.5 YEARS IN SEA 3.0 J I 3.5 Figure 9. — Growth in days of two groups of northern anchovy in the laboratory (dots and circles) compared with the growth over years of northern anchovy in the sea (solid line). Growth in the laboratory is plotted using upper scale (elapsed time days), and growth in sea (solid line, from Spratt 1975; Collins 1969) is plotted on lower scale (years); and ratio between scales is about 1:7. Each point is mean weight for 8-12 fish. Laboratory fish were fed a pelleted trout ration which was the caloric equivalent in natural foods of about 16% of the fish wet weight per day. 225 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 2 that the Japanese anchovy, Engraulis japonicus, fed Euphausia pacifica in the laboratory, had a gross growth efficiency (in calories) of 11.9'7f, which is similar to our estimate of 12.8% for E. mordax. Energy Budget Growth of northern anchovy in the sea from age 1 to 2 yr is equivalent to a gain of 6.2 x 10^ cal, and the energy cost of 20 spawnings for a 1-yr-old female is about 10 x 10^ cal (documentation given in Table 7). Assuming that the caloric conversion efficiency for northern anchovy in the sea is the same as in the laboratory ( 12.8%), 1-yr-old females (mean weight 10.3 g) consume annually about 127 X 10^ cal of which 8% would be used for reproduc- tion and 5% for growth. This implies a daily rate of consumption in the sea of 348 cal/d, or, on a wet weight basis, about 4% body wet weight/d in copepods (copepods = 5,252 cal/g dry weight, Laurence (1976); water content of Calanus = 84.7%, Lovegrove (1966) ). Sirotenko and Danilev- skiy (1977) estimated from stomach content analy- sis that the Black Sea anchovy, E. encrasicholus, consumed 1.5-3.7% of their body weight/d; Mikh- man and Tomanovich (1977) estimated from field captured specimens that E. encrasicholus con- sumed 1.4-3.0% of their body weight/d when they fed upon phytoplankton, 3.4% when they ate zooplankton, and 9.3% when they ate benthic animals. Our estimate of 4-5% body weight/d for females 1-3 yr old is within the range of these values. DISCUSSION Spawning Frequency Northern anchovy females matured eggs in the laboratory at the rate required for weekly spawn- ing, thus supporting the conclusions of Hunter and Goldberg (1980) and Hunter and Macewicz (1980). Our estimates of reproductive effort (egg calories/ration calories) of 8-11% (Table 7) seem reasonable, thereby supporting our estimate of 20 spawnings/female per year. Our calculations in- dicate that this effort could be sustained by a daily ration of natural foods of 4-5% of the fish wet weight/d which is similar to the natural ration of E. encrasicholus ( Sirotenko and Danilevskiy 1977; Mikhman and Tomanovich 1977). Few estimates of reproductive effort exist for fishes. Lasker (1970) estimated that the cost of reproduction in Pacific sardine, Sardinops sagax, was about 1% of the total annual caloric requirement. He assumed the caloric equivalent of the ovary is spawned per year, which now seems an underestimate. Con- stantz (1976) estimated that reproductive effort ranged from 4 to 15% in two populations of Poeciliopsis occidentalis. Hirshfield (1977) found in laboratory studies that reproductive effort was related in a complex fashion to temperature and ration in medaka, Oryzias latipes; he estimated reproductive effort ranged from 10 to 18% in two natural Japanese populations. We conclude that 20 spawnings/3rr is a reasonable estimate of the number of spawnings produced by females in the northern anchovy central subpopulation. The fact that two-thirds of the cost could be supported by the average annual decline in fat stores supports this conclusion. An implication of this study is that egg matura- tion and vitellogenesis are continuous during peak spawTiing months. Evidence for this includes: the large fraction of the females in the population spawning per day during peak spawning months (10-16% ); the presence of the caloric equivalent of only one or two spawning batches in the ovary at any time; the inverse relation between the abun- dance of egg sizes in the ovary and oocyte matura- tion rate; and the continuation of egg maturation until the last batch of eggs is spawned. Although maturation and vitellogenesis probably continue for extended periods, the rates probably vary. The seasonal decline in the fraction of females in the Table 7. — Annual energy budget for female northern anchovy. Age (yr) Beglnning-end SU (mm) Beginning-end Wet weight^ (g) Beginning-end Annual en Growth- ergy budget (thousands of calories) ' Reproduction" Ration^ Percentage of ration Growth Reproduction 733-13.25 13.25-19.33 19.33-24.69 6.24 6.38 5.60 10.00 21.0 343 127 214 312 5 3 2 8 10 11 1-2 2-3 3-4 93-112 112-126 126-136 'From Spratt (1975). ^From Equations (1) and (2) where 15.4% of dry weight = tat. ^Gain in calories assuming 15.4''o of dry weight = fat; caloric values in Table 2. "Caloric content of 20 spawning batches; batch size calculated for mean female wet weight over the year (method illustrated in Table 4). ^Reproduction calories -i- growth calories/0. 128. where 0.1 28 is growth conversion efficiency determined in laboratory (Table 6). 226 HUNTER and ROE THE SPAWNINC, ENERGETICS OK NORTHERN ANCHOVY population spawning per day indicates that either the interval between spawnings in individual females increases in the latter part of the spawn- ing season, or that an increasing number of females cease spawning as the season progresses, or a combination of both events. Rates of egg maturation and vitellogenesis probably also vary within a single maturation-spawning cycle. The caloric content of a northern anchovy ovary about doubles over the interval between spawnings (7-10 d in peak spawning months), indicating a rapid rate of vitellogenesis after spawning. In Brachydanio rerio, which spawns at 5-d intervals, a marked increase in gonadotropic activity occurs in the pituitary immediately after spawning (Lambert and van Oordt 1974), followed 1-2 d later by histological signs of an increase in lipo- protein production in the liver correlated with an increase in vitellogenesis (Peute et al. 1978). Similar processes may occur in northern anchovy, causing cyclic changes in the rates of vitello- genesis and egg maturation within the interval between spawnings. Our estimate of 20 spawnings/yr is much higher than the number of spawnings estimated for many other pelagic spawning clupeoid fishes or for pelagic spawners in general. Multiple spawning fishes such as pilchards, sardines, anchovies, jack mackerels, and mackerels are often believed to produce one to three and possibly more spawning batches per year. These conclusions are based on the fact that frequently two modes of yolked eggs and sometimes three (in females with hydrated eggs) are observed in frequency distributions of ovarian egg sizes. Eggs are distributed in the same way in the northern anchovy (MacGregor 1968; Hunter and Goldberg 1980), but as present studies indicate, estimates of one to three spawnings would be in error by a factor of about 10. Thus, comparisons of annual fecundity among pelagic spawning clupeoids are meaningless at present, and spawning biomass estimated from egg and larval surveys may be in error because the total fecundity is inaccurate. Because of this it is essential that spawning frequency be estimated for additional species. The best approach, at present, is the histological technique of Hunter and Goldberg (1980), but counts of the number of females with hydrated eggs could be used if histological techniques are impractical. Females with hydrated eggs are often rare in collections of clupeoid females taken dur- ing the spawning season (Higham and Nicholson 1964; Leary et al. 1975). Females with hydrated eggs may be available for sampling for only a short period of each day because hydration is rapid and spawning soon follows hydration. In northern anchovy, hydration is completed in about 12 h, but the earliest stage may not be evident with- out histological examination. In tropical species the time available for sampling females with hydrated eggs may be even less because of ele- vated temperature. The daily pattern of hydration and spawning must be known to use hydrated eggs as a measure of spawning frequency. It may also require sampling offish in the day, because many pelagic spawners such as the northern anchovy begin spawning at sunset (Blaxter and Holliday 1963; Leary et al. 1975; Hunter and Macewicz 1980). Variation in Egg Production and Reproductive Effort Annual egg production and/or reproductive effort in northern anchovy populations can be modulated by changes in batch fecundity, annual number of spawnings, female size at first ma- turity, egg size, and egg cannibalism. Some evi- dence exists for each of these mechanisms in northern anchovy populations; we consider the evidence below. Batch fecundity was relatively constant over 1978-79 (Hunter and Macewicz 1980) and was similar to that of laboratory specimens fed a large food ration. On the other hand, MacGregor (1968) estimated a somewhat higher fecundity for the central stock in the 1950's than Hunter and Macewicz (1980) did for the 1970's, and Laroche and Richardson (1981) found that batch fecundity of the northern subpopulation (Oregon coast) was much higher than all estimates for the central stock. Batch fecundity certainly differs between central and northern subpopulations, and it seems possible that it may have varied within the central stock over the last decades. Nevertheless, batch fecundity within a subpopulation may be a rela- tively more stable reproductive characteristic than other reproductive traits. Weight at first maturity and age structure of the spav^Tiing population have a major effect on egg production, since batch size in northern an- chovy increases exponentially with weight. Clark and Phillips (1952) concluded for females taken in 1946-52 from the central subpopulation that 50% of northern anchovy reach maturity at 130 mm SL 227 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 whereas Hunter and Macewicz (1980) estimated for 1979 that 50% of females of 96 mm SL were mature. Laroche and Richardson (1981) reported that only 31% of females 85-100 mm SL from the northern stock were mature. Thus, size at sexual maturity varies between subpopulations and may have varied within the central subpopulation over the last decade. The relatively short 2-mo spawning season of the northern subpopulation of northern anchovy (perhaps 4 to 8 spawnings, Hunter and Macewicz 1980) compared with the central subpopulation (20 spawnings) is evidence of the great plasticity in the annual number of spawnings. Plasticity in the number of spawnings of the central stock is also indicated by the dynamics of the central population over the last decades. Smith (1972) pointed out that the decline of the Pacific sar- dine population was accompanied by an increase in the duration of the northern anchovy spawning period. Before the Pacific sardine decline, most northern anchovy spawning occurred in the win- ter quarter, whereas now larval production in both quarters is about equal. This increase in the duration of the peak period of spawning indicates that the annual number of spawning batches produced by northern anchovy has changed sig- nificantly since the demise of the Pacific sardine population. Food made available by the collapse of the Pacific sardine population may have been used by the northern anchovy population to increase the number of spawning batches produced annual- ly. The fact that these additional spawnings occurred during the period Pacific sardine nor- mally spawned may have had an important effect on the Pacific sardine population. The annual seasonal decline in egg size in northern anchovy population (central stock) re- sembles that reported for other clupeoid fishes (Blaxter 1969; Ciechomski 1973; Le Clus 1979). Production of smaller eggs late in the season may be an energy-sparing mechanism whereby fecun- dity is maintained constant but at a lower reproductive effort. This could represent a 20% savings in reproductive costs in northern anchovy. Bagenal (1973) concluded in his review of the literature that it seems likely a negative correla- tion exists between fecundity and egg size. Several other mechanisms are possible; egg size may increase with female age (Hirshfield 1977), and the seasonal change could be caused by seasonal changes in the age structure of the spawners. In this case smaller eggs may compensate for the energy cost of faster growth in young fish. Alter- natively, egg size may decline in females as ration increases during the spring and summer. Bagenal (1969) found that higher ration in brown trout resulted in more and smaller eggs. On the other hand, Hislop et al. (1978) found that the dry weight of eggs produced by haddock in the labora- tory declined with successive spawnings and that the dry weight of eggs tended to be lower in females fed a lower ration. In northern anchovy, there may be a change in the partitioning of energy between growth and reproduction during late spring and summer when the potential for growth is higher, and this could result in the production of smaller eggs. As egg size alters the survival potential of the larva (Blaxter and Hempel 1963), any of these mechanisms could have important consequences because it could alter the relative contribution to recruitment of spawn produced in the latter part of the spawning season. Egg cannibalism may also be an important factor regulating the effective egg production, as intensity of cannibalism could change with popu- lation size. Hunter and Kimbrell (1981) concluded that ingestion of eggs by northern anchovy could account for 17% of the daily egg production during peak spawning months. This discussion indicates that egg production and reproductive effort of northern anchovy popu- lations probably changes in a complex manner in relation to food, growth, temperature, population size, and age structure. All the reproductive parameters we have discussed may vary to some degree over years, between subpopulations, or within a season. Studies of the reproductive energetics of north- ern anchovy populations will eventually require consideration of males as well as females. We know little about males at present. Our laboratory data indicated that males consume slightly less food than females, but no difference existed when consumption was expressed on a unit weight basis. Growth curves for male and female north- ern anchovy (Collins 1969) indicate that females are slightly longer than males of the same age, but the difference is small (about a 2% difference in length) and probably not statistically significant. Other than this small difference in size, no obvious sexual dimorphic characters exist. Schools have highly biased sex ratios (Klingbeil 1978), and males predominate in actively spawning schools (Hunter and Goldberg 1980). This suggests that 228 HUNTER and ROE THE SPAWNING ENERGETICS OF NORTHERN ANCHOVY males may remain reproductively active for long- er periods within the spawning season and may not have as well defined spawning cycles as do females. These differences are small relative to the overall great similarity between the sexes. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Gary Stauffer (SWFC), who developed one of the original versions of the ration equation, provided guidance in its application in the present study. Carol Kimbrell (SWFC) carried out much of the statistical analysis, collected some of the data, and provided editorial assistance. The estimates of spawning frequency are based primarily on the careful histological analysis of Beverly Macewicz (University of California, San Diego), and Thomas Mickel (University of California, Santa Barbara) assisted in laboratory work. LITERATURE CITED bagenal, t. b. 1969. The relationship between food isupply and fecundity in brown trout Salmo tnitta L. J. Fi.sh Biol. 1:167-182. 1973. Fish fecundity and its relations with stock and recruitment. Rapp. P.-V. Reun. Cons. Int. Explor. Mer 164:186-198. BEAUCHAMP, J. J., AND J. S. OLSON. 197.3. Corrections for bias in regression estimates after logarithmic transformation. Ecology 54:1403-1407. BLAXTER, J. H.S. 1969. Development: eggs and larvae. In W. S. Hoar and D.J. Randall (editors). Fish physiology, Vol. 3, p. 177-252. Acad. Press, N.Y. BLAXTER, J. H. S.. AND G. HEMPEL. 1963. The influence of egg size on herring larvae ( Clupea harengusL.). J. Cons. 28:211-240. BLAXTER, J. H. S., AND E G. T. HOLLIDAY. 1963. The behaviour and physiology of herring and other clupeids. Adv. Mar. Biol. 1:261-393. CIECHOMSKI, J. D. DE. 1973. The size of the eggs of the Argentine anchovy, Engraulis anchoita (Hubbs & Marini) in relation to the season of the year and to the area of spawning. J. Fish Biol. 5:393-398. CLARK, F. N., AND J. B. PHILLIPS. 1952. The northern anchovy t Engraulis mordax mordax) in the California fishery. Calif Fish Game 38:189-207. Collins. R. a. 1969. Size and age composition of northern anchovies iEngraulis mordax) in the California anchovy reduc- tion fishery for the 1965-66, 1966-67, and 1967-68 sea- sons. In J. D. Messersmith and staff (editors), The northern anchovy {Engraulis mordax) and its fishery 1965-1968, p. 56-74. Calif. Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 147. CONSTANTZ, G. D. 1976. Life history strategy of the gila topminnow, Poeci- liopsis occidentalis: a field evaluation of theory on the evolution of life histories. Ph.D. Thesis. Arizona State Univ., Tempe, 103 p. EGGERS, D. M. 1977. Factors in interpreting data obtained by diel sam- pling of fish stomachs. J. P^ish. Res. Board Can. 34: 290-294. Elliott, J. M., and L. Persson. 1978. The estimation of daily rates of food con.sumption for fish. J. Anim. Ecol. 47:977-991. HIGHAM, J. R., AND W. R. NICHOLSON. 1964. Sexual maturation and spawning of Atlantic men- haden. U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv., Fish. Bull. 63:255-271. HIRSHFIELD, M. F 1977. The reproductive ecology and energetics of the Japanese medaka, Oryzias latipes. Ph.D. Thesis, Univ. Michigan. .Ann Arbor, 177 p. HISLOP, J. R. G., A. R ROBB, AND J. A. GAULD. 1978. Observations on effects of feeding level on growth and reproduction in haddock, Melanogrammus aeglefinus (L.) in captivity J. Fish Biol. 13:85-98. HUNTER. J. R., AND S. R. GOLDBERG. 1980. Spawning incidence and batch fecundity in north- ern anchovy, Engraulis mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 77: 641-652. Hunter, J. R., and C. A. Kimbrell. 1981. Egg cannibalism in the northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 78:811-816. Hunter, J. R., and B. J. Macewicz. 1980. Sexual maturity, batch fecundity, spawning fre- quency, and temporal pattern of spawning for the northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax, during the 1979 spawning season. Calif Coop. Oceanic FLsh. Invest. Rep. 21:139-149. ILES, T. D., AND R. J. WOOD. 1965. The fat water relation.ship in North Sea herring ( Clupea harengus), and its possible significance. J. Mar Biol. Assoc. U.K. 45:353-366. Klingbeil, r. a. 1978. Sex ratios of the northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax. off southern California. Calif Fish Game 64: 200-209. krvaric, M., and R. MUZINIC. 1950. Investigation into the fat content in the sardine tissues (Clupea pilchardus Walb.i. .Acta .\driat. 4: 289-314. Lambert, J. G. D., and P G. W. J. van Oordt. 1974. Ovarium hoiTnones in teleosts. Fortschr Zool. 22: ,340-349. L.^yiOCHE, J. L., AND S. L. RICHARDSON. 1981. Reproduction of northern anchovy, Engraulis mor- dcux. off Oregon and Washington. Fish. Bull., U.S. 78: 603-618. LASKER, R. 1970. Utilization of zooplankton energy by a Pacific sar- dine population in the California current. In J. H. Steele (editor). Marine food chains, p. 265-284. Oliver and Boyd, Edinb. LASKER, R., AND P E. SMITH. 1977. Estimation of the effectsof environmental variations on the eggs and larvae of the northern anchovy. Calif Coop. Oceanic Fish. Invest. Rep. 19:128-137. LAURENCE, G. C. 1976. Caloric values of some North Atlantic calanoid copepods. Fish. Bull., U.S. 74:218-220. 229 LEARY, D. R, G. I. MURPHY, AND M. MILLER, 1975. Fecundity and length at first spawning of the Hawaiian anchovy, or nehu iStolephorus purpureus Fowler) in Kaneohe Bay, Oahu. Pac. Sci. 29:171-180. LeCLUS, F 1979. Dry mass of yolked oocytes of the southwest African pilchard, Sardinops ocellata, in relation to maturity stages and spawning cycles, 1972-1974. Invest. Rep. 119, Ondersoekverslag, p. 1-29. LEONG, R. 1971. Induced spawning of the northern anchovy, En- graulis mordax Girard. Fish. Bull., U.S. 69:357-360. LOVEGROVE, T. 1966. The determination of the dry weight of plank- ton and the effect of various factors on the values obtained. In H. Barnes (editor). Some contemporary studies in marine science, p. 429-467. Hafner Publ. Co., N.Y. MACGREGOR, J. S. 1968. Fecundity of the northern anchovy, Engraulis mor- dax Girard. Calif. Fish Game 54:281-288. MIKHMAN, A. S., AND L. V. TOMANOVICH. 1977. The feeding of the Azov anchovy, Engraulis en- crasicholus maeoticus. J. Ichthyol. 17:240-244. PEUTE, J., M. A. VAN DER GAAG, AND J. G. D. LAMBERT. 1978. Ultrastructure and lipid content of the liver of the zebrafish, Brachydanio rerio, related to vitellogenin syn- thesis. Cell Tissue Res. 186:297-308. SHUL'MAN, G. E. 1974. Life cycles of fish. Physiology and biochemistry. Wiley, N.Y.,258p. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO 2 SIROTENKO, M. D., AND N. N. DANILEVSKIY. 1977. Quantitative indices of the feeding of the Black Sea anchovy, Engraulis encrasicholus ponticus. J. Ichthyol. 17:610-617. Smith, p e. 1972. The increa.se in spawning biomass of northern an- chovy, Engraulis mordax. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:849-874. Smith, p E., and S. L. Richardson. 1977. Standard techniques for pelagic fish egg and larva surveys. FAO Fish. Tech. Pap. 175, 100 p. SNEDECOR, G. W., AND W. G. COCHRAN. 1967. Statistical methods. 6th ed. Iowa State Univ. Press, Ames, 593 p. SPRATT, J. D. 1975. Growth rate of the northern anchovy, Engraulis mordax. in southern California waters, calculated from otoliths. Calif Fish Game 61:116-126. TAKAHASHI, M., AND M. A. HATANAKA. 1960. Experimental study on utilization of food by young anchovy, Engraulis japonicus Temminck et Schlegel. Tohoku J. Agric. Res. 11:161-170. TYLER, A. V. 1970. Rates of gastric emptying in young cod. Res. Board Can. 27:1177-1189. J. Fish. Ware, d. m. 1975. Relation between egg size, growth, and natural mortality of larval fish, J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 32: 2503-2512. 230 DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF THE ROCKFISHES SEBASTES ENTOMELAS AND 5, ZACENTRUS (FAMILY SCORPAENIDAE) AND OCCURRENCE OFF OREGON, WITH NOTES ON HEAD SPINES OF S. MYSTINUS, S. FLAVIDUS, AND 5. MELANOPS^ Wayne A. Laroche and Sally L. Richardson^ ABSTRACT Developmental series of larvae and juveniles of two species of northeast Pacific rockfishes (Scor- paenidae: Sebastes^ are described and illustrated: S. entomelas (9.9-74.5 mm standard length) and S. zacentrus ( 7.4-74.8 mm standard length). Descriptions include literature review, identification criteria, distinguishing features, general development, morphology, fin development, spination, scale forma- tion, and pigmentation. Ontogeny of S. entomelas is very similar to that of S. flavidus and S. melanops among species for which development is known. All have moderately slender bodies and moderately developed head spines. Pigment patterns develop similarly but pigmentation is less intense inS. entomelas. Larval and juvenile S. entomelas within the size range described are distinguished by presence of preocular and supraocular spines, pectoral fin rays usually 18, dorsal fin rays usually =s8, lateral line pores 52-56, and lack of melanophores at the articulation of dorsal and anal fin rays. Ontogeny of S. zacentrus is rather distinctive among species for which development is known. Larvae and juveniles are relatively deep bodied with large head spines. They are distinguished by presence of preocular and absence of supraocular spines, pectoral fin rays usually 17, dorsal fin rays usually 14, anal fin rays usually 7, lateral line pores 38-48, gill rakers 32-37, and relative lack of pigment. Young of S. entomelas were taken March -July and S. zacentrus August- December off Oregon. Larvae of S. zacentrus seemed to have a more restricted offshore distribution than reported for most other species, possibly a function of seasonal wind and current regimes. Additional new information concerning variation in supraocular spine patterns is presented as supplemental data to aid in identification and separation of four similar species, S. entomelas, S. flavidus, S. melanops, and S. mystinus. The rockfish, Sebastes spp., resources of the north- east Pacific Ocean are being subjected to increas- ing fishing pressure. In 1978, trawl landings of rockfishes (all species) by the United States and Canada were 26,000 metric tons (t) or 38% of total Pacific landings (Pacific Marine Fisheries Com- mission 1964-78). This represents a sizable in- crease in the catch of "other rockfish" from previ- ous years, e.g., 20,100 t in 1978 compared with 15,700 1 in 1977 and 9,900 1 in 1976 (Pacific Marine Fisheries Commission 1964-78). Since many rock- fish species are long lived, living over 20 yr (Phil- lips 1964; Westrheim and Harling 1975), overfish- ing could have serious consequences. Rational 'From a final report for NOAA-NMFS Contract No. 79-ABC- 00087 submitted to Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard East, Seattle, WA 98112, on 31 July 1979. School of Oceanography, Oregon State University, Corvallis, Oreg.; present address: Gulf Coast Research Laboratory, East Beach, Ocean Springs, MS 39564. utilization of these important resources requires an understanding of the life history and biology of each species involved. Yet, such information is still lacking for most of the rockfishes. This paper provides some of the first informa- tion on the early life history of S. entomelas, widow rockfish, and S. zacentrus, sharpchin rock- fish. Sebastes entomelas was one of five principal species in Oregon bottom trawl landings of "other rockfish," composing 13% of the catch during the years 1963-71, although annual catches fluctuated from 168 to 1,074 t (Niska 1976). Introduction of midwater trawl fishing for rockfish has recently focused attention on S. entomelas since large catches have been landed, e.g., during a 4-mo period in 1979 >90% of the 909 1 of rockfish landed in Oregon were S. entomelas (Barss^). Sebastes ^William Barss, Fishery Biologist, Oregon Department of Fish and Wildlife, Marine Science Drive, Newport, OR 97365, pers. commun. July 1979. Manuscnpt accepted December 1980. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79. NO. 2, 1981. 231 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL 79, NO. 2 zacentrus was landed in Oregon from 1963 to 1971 but never in large quantities (Niska 1976), possi- bly due to its reported preference for a rough bot- tom (Gunderson^). Development of larvae and juveniles of S. en- tomelas and S. zacentrus is described and com- pared with other species of Sebastes for which young stages are known. Occurrence of young off Oregon is discussed. Additional new information is presented on head spine patterns and variabil- ity among the group of four similar species, S. entomelas, S. flavidus, S. melanops, and S. mys- tinus, which cooccur off Oregon. This information will aid in identification and separation of these species, particularly of specimens with variant head spine patterns. METHODS Specimens described in this paper came from collections in the School of Oceanography, Oregon State University. Most collections were obtained with 70 cm bongo nets, neuston nets, meter nets, purse seines, Isaacs-Kidd midwater trawls, beam trawls, otter trawls, and commercial midwater trawls off the Oregon coast since 1961. Samples were taken during all months of the year and along the entire Oregon coast but were concen- trated along an east-west transect off Newport, Oreg. (lat. 44°39.1' N). Ben thic juveniles of S. en- tomelas were taken from adjacent California waters (lat. 40°12.2' N, long. 124°23.4' W). All specimens were preserved in 5 or 10% Formalin^ and transferred to 40% isopropyl alcohol. Our approach to identification, methods of mak- ing counts and measurements, and terminology for development and spination follow Richardson and Laroche (1979) and Laroche and Richardson (1980). Body parts measured include: Standard length (SL) = snout tip to notochord tip preceding development of caudal fin, then to posterior margin of hypural plate. Snout to anus length = distance along body mid- line from snout tip to vertical through posterior margin of hindgut at anus. •■Gunderson, D. 1976. Proceedings of the Ist rockfish survey workshop. Processed rep., 14 p. Northwest Fisheries Center, Nationtil Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Seattle, WA 98112. ■■^Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. Head length (HL) = snout tip to cleithrum until no longer visible, then to posteriormost margin of opercle. Snout length = snout tip to anterior margin of orbit of left eye. Upper jaw length = snout tip to posterior mar- gin of maxillary. Eye diameter = greatest diameter of left orbit. Interorbital distance = distance between dorsal margins of orbits. Body depth at pectoral fin base = vertical dis- tance from dorsal to ventral body margin at base of pectoral fin. Body depth at anus = vertical distance from dorsal to ventral body margin immediately pos- terior to anus. Caudal peduncle depth = shortest vertical dis- tance between dorsal and ventral margins of caudal peduncle. Caudal peduncle length = horizontal distance from base of posteriormost dorsal ray to posterior margin of hypural elements. Pectoral fin length = distance from base to tip of longest ray. Pectoral fin base depth = width of base of pec- toral fin. Pelvic spine length = distance from base to tip of pelvic spine. Pelvic fin length = distance from base to tip of longest ray. Snout to origin of pelvic fin = distance along body midline to vertical through insertion of pel- vic fin. Parietal spine length = distance along posterior margin of parietal spine from insertion to tip. Nuchal spine length = distance along posterior margin of nuchal spine from insertion to tip. Preopercular spine length (third spine; pos- terior series) = distance from tip to basal insertion if visible, or to a line connecting the points of deepest indentation between preopercular spines 2 and 3 and spines 3 and 4 (posterior series). Longest dorsal fin spine = distance from base to tip. Longest dorsal fin ray = distance from base to tip. Longest anal fin spine = distance from base to tip. All body lengths given refer to standard length unless noted otherwise. When the two posterior- most dorsal and anal fin rays arise from the same pterygiophore, they are counted as one. 232 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES SEBASTES ENTOMELAS (JORDAN AND GILBERT) Literature (Figures 1-3). — The pigment pattern of preextrusionS. entomelas larvae was described by Harling et al.,® including a figure, and Westrheim (1975). Preextrusion larvae, mean 4.8, 5.0 mm TL, have a row of usually <16 melano- phores along the ventral body midline which stops short of the anus by at least four myomeres. The gut is pigmented in the vicinity of «Harling. W. R., M. S. Smith, and N. A. Webb, 1971. Pre- liminary report on maturity, spawning season, and larval iden- tification of rockfishes (Se6astodes I collected during 1970. Res. Board Can., Manuscr. Rep. Ser. 1137, 26 p. Fish. the anus. Pigment is absent from the dorsum, head, and hypural region. In reared larvae, the number of ventral midline melanophores in- creases to >16 (Westrheim 1975). Identification (Tables 1-3; Appendix Table 1). — Fifty-three specimens of S. entomelas (9.9-74.5 mm) were selected for the development series from 444 larval and juvenile specimens identified. Juveniles were identified using the following com- bination of characters observed in juvenile and adult specimens examined: Gill rakers = 34-39 Lateral line pores = 52-56 9.9 mm 6.2mm Figure l. — Pelagic larvae ofSebastes entomelas. 233 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 9.4 mm 25.3 mm FIGURE 2. — Pelagic larvae (19.4, 25.3 mm) and pelagic juvenile (32.0 mm) of Sebastes entomelas. Pectoral fin rays = 17-19, usually 18 Anal fin soft rays = 7-9, usually 8 Dorsal fin soft rays = 14-16, usually 15 Vertebrae = 26 Preocular spine = present (specimens <343 mm) Supraocular spine — present (specimens <343 mm) Interorbital space = flat to convex Black blotch at base of spinous dorsal fin = pres- ent as fringe along distal margin of fin mem- brane. Of the 36 Sebastes species off Oregon (Richardson and Laroche 1979), S. entomelas has the best fit to the above characters. Larvae and juveniles of S. entomelas are similar to those of S. flavidus, S. melanops, andS. mystinus. Large lar- vae and juveniles of S. flavidus and S. melanops lack preocular and usually lack supraocular spines (Laroche and Richardson 1980) which are present in both S. entomelas and S. mystinus. Dorsal and anal fin ray counts separate nearly all specimens of S. entomelas and S. mystinus based on count frequency statistics given by 234 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES 40.1 mm Figure 3. — Pelagic juvenile (40.1 mm) and benthic juvenile (74.5 mm) of Sebastes entomelas. Laroche and Richardson (1980). Of 79 S. en- tomelas examined 94% had dorsal fin rays ^15 and 96% had anal rays ^8. Of 62 S. mystinus examined 92% had dorsal fin rays 2^16 and 90% had & 9 anal fin rays. Only one specimen of S. entomelas had >15 dorsal fin rays and >8 anal fin rays. No S. mystinus had <16 dorsal fin rays and <9 anal fin rays. In specimens with outlyer dorsal or anal fin ray counts, the numbers of lateral line pores and diagonal scale rows below the lateral line resolved any questions in all cases (see Laroche and Richardson 1980, appendix table 1). To insure that no S. mystinus were accidentally included in the developmental series of S. en- tomelas, specimens with either >15 dorsal fin rays or >8 anal fin rays were intentionally excluded. Pigment pattern and body morphology were also useful in linking smaller specimens to the developmental series. Distinguishing Features. — Characters useful to distinguish S. entomelas larvae (9.9-18 mm) from those of other Sebastes species are fin element counts, gill raker counts, moderate pigmentation on pectoral and pelvic fins, presence of pigment along the dorsal body surface beneath the dorsal fin, internal and/or external melanophores above the notochord near the point of flexion, and melanophores along the dorsal and ventral mar- gins of the caudal peduncle. The lack of melanophores at the articulation of anal fin rays helps distinguish S. entomelas from .S. flavidus and S. melanops larvae within this size range. The smaller caudal peduncle depth/caudal peduncle length ratio and presence of 18 pectoral fin rays also help to distinguish S. entomelas from S. melanops. For larvae and juveniles >18 mm, meristic characters, presence of preocular (speci- mens >22 mm) and supraocular (specimens >18 mm) spines, flat to convex interorbital space, body and fin pigmentation, and body morphometry to- gether serve to distinguish S. entomelas from other Oregon species. General Development. — Notochord flexion is com- pleted by —14 mm in S. entomelas. Transformation 235 FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79. NO. 2 Table L— Meristics from larvae and juveniles ofSehastes entomelas based on unstained specimens. Counts of left and right pelvic fin rays(I,5;I,5l, superior and inferior principal caudal rays (8,7). and left and right branchiostegal rays (7,7 1 were constant throughout the series. Specimens above dashed line are undergoing notochord flexion. Standard Dorsal '^nal Pectoral fin r ays Gill rakers (first arch) Lateral li ne pores Diagonal scale rows length! (mm) fin spines and rays fin cninoc and rays Left R ght Left Right Left Right Left Right 9.9 IV + IM5 II' ,8 1 8 8 21 f 8 = 29 — — — — — 10.0 n (2) 1 8 1 8 20+ 7=27 20+ 6=26 — — — — 10.9 XIIIM4 III'. 7 1 8 1 8 22+ 9=31 22+ 8 = 30 — — — — 11.0 XIIIM5 III' 8 1 8 1 8 22+ 8=30 21+ 8 = 29 — — — — 11.9 XIIIM5 III' 8 1 8 1 8 22+ 8=30 23+ 8=31 — — — — 12.0 XIIIM4 III' 8 1 8 8 22+ 7=29 22+ 8=30 — — — — 12.9 XIII'. 15 III' 8 1 8 1 8 23+ 8 = 31 22+ 8=30 ^ — — — 13.7 XIIIM5 III' 8 1 8 1 8 24+ 8=32 24+ 8=32 — — — — 14.0 XIIIM5 III' 8 1 8 8 23+ 8=31 23+ 8 = 31 — — — — 14.9 XIIIM5 III' 8 1 8 1 8 25+ 9=34 24+ 9=33 — — — — 15.2 Xlir,15 III' 8 1 8 8 24+ 9=33 23+ 9=32 — — — — 16.2 X1IIM5 III' 8 1 8 8 24+10=34 23+ 9=32 — — — — 16.8 XIIIM5 III' 8 8 8 25+10=35 25+10=35 — — — — 17.2 XIIIM5 III' 8 1 8 1 8 25+10=35 25+10=35 — — — — 18.4 XIII', 15 III' 8 1 8 8 25+10=35 25+10=35 — — — — 18.5 XIII', 15 III' 8 8 8 24+ 9=33 25+ 9=34 — — — — 19.4 XIII'. 15 III' 8 8 8 24+10=34 24+10=34 — — — — 20.4 XIII'. 15 III' 8 1 8 8 26+10=36 25-10=35 — — — — 20.8 Xlll',14 III' 8 8 8 25+10=35 25+10=35 — — — — 21.0 XIII', 15 III' 8 8 8 26+10=36 26+10=36 — — — — 321.7 Xlll',15 III' 8 1 8 8 25+ 9=34 24+ 9=33 — — — — ^22.3 XIII', 15 III' 8 1 8 8 26+ 9=35 25+ 9=34 — — — — 322.9 Xlll',15 III' 8 8 8 25+10=35 26+10=36 — — — — 323.9 Xlll',15 III' 8 1 8 8 26+10=36 26 + 10 = 36 — — — — 324.5 Xlll',15 III' 8 1 8 8 26^10=36 26* 9=35 — — — — 324.5 Xlll',15 III' 8 8 8 25+10=35 25+10=35 — — — — 325.3 Xlll',15 III' 8 8 18 26+10=36 26+10=36 — — — — 325.9 Xlll',15 III' 8 8 8 24+ 9=33 25+ 9=34 — — — — 326.5 Xlll',15 III' 8 8 8 27+10=37 26+ 9=35 — — — — 326.7 Xlll',15 III' 8 8 8 25+10=35 25+ 9=34 — — — — 327.2 XIII, 15 IIP 8 8 8 26+10=36 26+10=36 — — — — 327.9 XIII, 15 III' 8 8 8 26+10=36 25+10=35 — — — — 328.5 XIII, 15 III' 8 8 8 26+10=36 25+10=35 — — — — 329.1 XIII, 15 III' 8 8 8 26+10=36 26+10=36 — — — — 329.7 XIII, 15 III' 8 8 8 25+10=35 26+10=36 — — — — 330.6 XIII, 15 III' 8 8 18 26+ 9=35 25+10=35 — — — — "30.8 XIII, 15 III.8 8 8 26+11=37 26+11=37 — 54 — — "31.6 XIII, 15 III. 8 8 18 27+10=37 26+10=36 — 53 — — "32.0 XIII, 15 III. 8 8 18 26+10=36 26+10=36 — 52 — — "33.4 XIII, 14 III.8 8 8 25+10=35 25+10=35 — 51 — — "35.7 XIII, 15 III. 8 8 18 26+10=36 26+10=36 — 53 — — "368 XIII, 15 111,8 8 17 24+10=34 26+10=36 — — — — "40.1 XIII, 15 111,8 t8 18 26+10=36 26+11=37 — 52 — — 545.0 XIII, 14 III.8 18 18 24+11=35 24+11=35 56 54 — — 547.7 XIII. 14 111,7 18 18 27+11=38 28+11=39 52 54 — — 555.5 XIII, 14 III.8 18 18 26+11=37 27+11=38 55 54 — — 555.7 XIII, 15 111,8 18 18 26+11=37 26 + 10 = 36 56 55 — — 5644 XIII. 15 III.8 18 18 26+10=36 26 + 10 = 36 53 52 — — 565.0 XIII, 15 111,8 18 18 27+11=38 27+11=38 53 53 64 63 566.1 XIII. 15 III.8 18 18 26+11=37 27+10=37 54 56 61 65 -571.2 XIII, 15 111,8 8 18 26+11=37 26+11=37 54 54 62 66 574.1 XIII. 15 III.8 18 18 26+10=36 26+11=37 54 52 66 62 574.5 XIII.15 III. 3 19 19 27+11=38 27+10=37 53 56 64 68 'Posteriormost dorsal or anal spine appears as a soft ray ^Forming, 3Transforming. "Pelagic juvenile. 5Benthic juvenile. from postflexion larvae to pelagic juveniles occurs between =22 and 31 mm as indicated by structural change of the dorsal and anal fin "prespines" to sharp, hard spines. Melanistic pigmentation gradually increases over the body through the lar- val and transformation periods and does not change markedly during transformation. Transi- tion from pelagic to benthic habitat, based on all specimens examined, probably occurs chiefly be- tween 55 and 75 mm. The largest pelagic juvenile was 40.1 mm, and the smallest juvenile taken in a beam trawl was 42 mm long. Morphology (Tables 2, 3). — Various body parts were measured on 53 selected specimens of S. en- tomelas ( 9.9-74.5 mm). Relative growth trends are summarized in Table 2. Perhaps the most distinctive morphometric as- pect of larval and small juvenile S. entomelas is the relatively slender body. Body depth decreases 236 I.AROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES Table 2. — Body proportions oC larvae and juveniles ofSehastes entomcUis and 8. zacentriis. 'Va\ues given are percent ofstandard length (SL> and head length (Hl>) including mean, standard deviation, and range in parentheses. Number of specimens measured may be derived from number of measurements li.sted by stage, indicated in footnotes, in Tables .3 and 6. Item Sedasfes entomelas Sebastes zacentrus Item Sebastes entomelas Sebastes zacentrus Body depth at pectoral fin ba -,e SL: Longest anal spine length/HL: Flexion 29.0 = 87(27 9-30.0) 35 2 = 1.36(33.8-36 5) Flexion 10.2=2.25(7.4-12 9) 13.6 = 0.92(12.9-14.2) Postflexion 27.5-1.56(24.5-29.9) 34.4-1.07(33.1-35.9) Postflexion 21.4 = 4,76(13.8-26.8) 22.4=4,79(16.7-31.5) Transforming 25.2 = 80(23 9-26 3) 32.5 = 1.49(30.4-35.0) Transforming 25.5=3.52(18,8-31.4) 35.3 = 3.44(30.5-41.6) Pelagic juvenile 23.9 = 0.48(23.1-24.4) 30 0-1.02(27.7-32.0) Pelagic juvenile 31.9=1 25(30 8-34 2) 41.1=1.96(37.9-44.8) Benthic juvenile 27.8 = 2.44(24 1-31 3) 32.0-1.08(31.1-33.8) Benthic juvenile 35.1=3.73(28.2-39.7) 50 7 = 4.29(46 1-54 9) Body depth at anus SL: Pectoral fin length/ SL Flexion 22.3 = 1.01(20.9-23 9) 24.7 = 1.53(23.0-25.9) Flexion 17.1 = 1.34(15.0-18.6) 15.3 = 2.30(13.0-17.6) Postflexion 22.4 = 1.48(20 2-24.8) 25.8 = 1.33(23.3-27 4) Postflexion 21.9=1.45(19.3-24.0) 21.5 = 1 18(20.2-23.6) Transforming 20.6 = 0.56(19.3-21.8) 26.1 =1.07(25.0-28.4) Transforming 23.1=1.11(21,5-25.3) 25.2 = 1.88(21 4-28.1) Pelagic luvenile 19.7 = 0.55(18.6-20.2) 24 3=0.82(22 8-25 8) Pelagic juvenile 24.2 = 0.33(23.7-24.6) 26.7 = 1.27(24.9-29 0) Benthic)uvenile 23.1=1.31(21 1-24.6) 25.8=1.04(24.3-26.7) Benthic juvenile 25.6 = 1.23(23,4-26,8) 26.4 = 0.68(25.4-26.9) Snout to anus length SL: Pectoral fin basedepth/SL: Flexion 56.5 = 2.09(53.0-58.8) 52.5 = 1.78(50.6-54.1) Flexion 10.0 = 0.77(9.2-11.0) 130 = 1.07(11.8-13.9) Postflexion 58.5 = 2 10(54.8-61.2) 57.0 = 2.34(53.8-62.4) Postflexion 8.8 = 0.58(8.2-10.2) 10.6 = 0.69(9.8-12.0) Transforming 59.4 = 1.72(55.3-62.3) 60,4 = 1,84(57.0-62.4) Transforming 8.0=0.22(7.6-8.4) 9.3=0.39(8.7-10.0) Pelagic juvenile 61.0 = 1.24(59.8-62.7) 60,9 = 1,76(57.4-64.1) Pelagic juvenile 7.6 = 0.16(7.3-7.8) 8.8 = 0.44(7.9-9.8) Benthic juvenile 61 5 = 2 18(59 4-65 1) 58.7-1.62(56.9-61.3) Benthic juvenile 8.4=0.63(7.3-9.1) 9.8=0.25(9.6-10.2) Snout to pelvic fin origin SL: Pelvic fin length/SL: Flexion 39.4 = 1.55(37.0-41.2) 38.7=0.61(38.0-39.2) Flexion 10.3 = 1.34(8.6-11.8) 13.7 = 1.68(11.9-15.2) Postflexion 37.7 = 2.12(35.1-40.9) 40.6 = 1,48(37.8-42,4) Postflexion 13.8 = 1.19(11.4-15.7) 17.5 = 1.75(15.2-21.0) Transforming 36 8 = 1.49(33.3-39.5) 40.8 = 1.85(38.1-44.8) Transforming 14.5 = 0.89(12.7-16.0) 20.1=1.27(17.9-21.7) Pelagic juvenile 36.3=3.19(33.2-41.9) 39.4 = 1.43(36.2-42.3) Pelagic juvenile 16.1=0.34(15.7-16.6) 19.5=0.93(17.3-21.0) Benthic juvenile 37.0=1.83(34.8-40.3) 40.9 = 1.01(40.2-42.5) Benthic juvenile 17.5 = 1 03(16.4-20.0) 21.3 = 1.04(20.3-22.6) Head length SL: Pelvic spine length;SL: Flexion 39.7=2.09(37.2-43.1) 41.9 = 2.75(39.2-44.7) Flexion 6.0 = 1.82(3.7-8.4) 9.0 = 3.46(6.5-11.4) Postflexion 36.3 = 1.82(34.1-39.4) 42.6=2.08(40.2-45.6) Postflexion 12.0 = 1.30(10.0-13.6) 15.9 = 1.80(13.9-19.4) Transforming 35.0 = 1-75(32.4-38.4) 40.4 = 1.53(37.6-43.1) Transforming 12.2 = 1.60(9.9-14.4) 19.7 = 0.80(18.4-20.7) Pelagic juvenile 32.5 = 1.40(31.2-35.0) 37.5 = 1.70(34.4-40.4) Pelagic juvenile 13.7=0.51(13.0-14.6) 17.7 = 1.52(15.3-20.0) Benthic juvenile 32 2 = 1.90(29.5-35.6) 36.9=0.98(35.8-37.7) Benthic juvenile 12.7 = 0.56(11.7-13.4) 15.5=0.92(14.7-16.9) Eye diameter HL Parietal spine length/HL: Flexion 31.2 = 1.90(28.0-33.3) 33.1=2.08(31.6-35.5) Flexion 10.2 = 1.80(8.4-13.3) 22.6 = 5.12(16.8-26.5) Postflexion 30.1 = 1.38(28.4-32.7) 32.0=2.13(28.3-34.8) Postflexion 8.7 = 2.56(6.4-11.6) 14.3=2.24(11.9-17.3) Transforming 26.8 = 1.28(25.0-29.1) 29.4 = 1.74(26.2-32.4) Transforming 3.8 = 1.30(2.8-5.6) 10.4 = 1.83(7.7-14.1) Pelagic juvenile 26.7 = 0.92(25.2-28.2) 29.1=1.40(26.7-32.6) Pelagic juvenile — 6.9 = 2.42(3.8-10.7) Benthic juvenile 25.8 = 0.92(24.3-27.3) 31.1=1.96(29.1-33.2) Benthic juvenile 0.9 = 0.47(0.35-1.9) 2 6=0.98(1.6-4.0) Upper javi/ length: HL: Nuchal spine length/HL: Flexion 35.3 = 4.30(31.2-41.0) 45.9=1.27(45.2-47.4) Flexion 1.4 = 1.70(0.0-4.4) 1.5 = 1.61(0.0-3.2) Postflexion 41.5 = 2.61(38.4-45.9) 43.7=2.31(38.6-45.7) Postflexion 3.4-=0.65(2.2-4.1) 5.1=1.36(2.3-7.4) Transforming 39.5 = 1.90(36 5-43.1) 41.3 = 2.68(36.4-46.3) Transforming 2.0 = 0.47(1.4-3.0) 4.6 = 1.74(0.0-6.2) Pelagic juvenile 42 1=1.59(40.2-43.8) 41.0 = 2.54(35.6-45.3) Pelagic juvenile 1.7=0.33(1.5-2.1) 3.3 = 1.30(1.2-5.6) Benthic juvenile 39.2 = 2.57(35.7-43.2) 42.2=2.48(39.7-46.1) Benthic juvenile 0.0=0,00(0.0-0.0) 0.0=0.00(0.0-0.0) Snout length HL: Preopercular spine length/HL: Flexion 28.3=3.27(22.6-32.0) 26 2 = 3.27(23.2-29.7) Flexion 20.3=0.69(19 6-21.3) 32.9=8.20(27.1-38.7) Postflexion 27.4 = 1.79(23 9-29 6) 27.9=1.23(26.2-29 6) Postflexion 20.1=2.79(15.5-24.1) 25.3=2.35(22.2-29.5) Transforming 27.7 = 1.77(24.4-31.7) 26.4 = 1.72(24.2-28.8) Transforming 10.8 = 1.31(8.8-12.3) 22.3 = 2.96(16.0-25.9) Pelagic juvenile 27.2 = 1.53(26.1-29.8) 26.2 = 2.12(22.0-31.4) Pelagic juvenile 5.3 = 1.60(3.8-7.0) 12.7=4.37(6.7-19.5) Benthic juvenile 25.4 = 2.68(21.1-28.2) 21.8 = 3.13(18.4-25.2) Benthic juvenile 4.2 = 0.95(3.4-6.5) 4.0 = 0.87(3.1-5.1) Interorbital distance HL: Caudal peduncle depth/SL: Flexion 30.9 = 2.04(28.0-33 3) 29.4 = 2.00(27.7-31.6) Flexion 12.4=0.83(10.9-13.6) 11.8 = 1.06(10.8-12.9) Postflexion 28.8=1,18(25.7-30 1) 28.0 = 1.76(24,5-31.0) Postflexion 11.1=0.71(10.1-12.4) 11.0 = 0.50(9.9-11.6) Transforming 25.1 = 1.30(23.0-26.7) 25,5 = 1.85(23.0-29.6) Transforming 9.6=0.37(8.9-10.1) 10.6 = 0.49(9.8-11.5) Pelagic juvenile 23.4=0.79(22.7-24.7) 21.5=1.48(19.1-23.8) Pelagic juvenile 8.7=0.53(7.8-9.2) 9.6=0.41(8.6-10.3) Benthic juvenile 22.6=1.22(20.6-25.0) 16,6=0.81(16.2-17.7) Benthic juvenile 9.1=0.34(8.8-9.9) 9.3=0.24(9.0-9.6) Angle gill raker length HL: Caudal peduncle length/SL Flexion 10.5 = 1.52(9.0-12.8) 9.4=1.48(8.4-10.5) Flexion 15.6=0.78(14.5-16.7) 16.0=0.62(15.3-16.5) Postflexion 13.4 = 0.92(11.9-15.1) 13.3 = 1.16(10.9-14.8) Postflexion 15.3 = 58(14.3-16.2) 14.5=0.86(12.9-15.2) Transforming 13 2 = 0.94(11.7-14.7) 15.1=0.95(13.5-16.9) Transforming 15.4 = 0.70(14.1-16.7) 14.7 = 0.68(14.0-15.7) Pelagic juvenile 14.4 = 0.75(13.1-15.5) 15.6=1.07(13.3-17.5) Pelagic juvenile 15.5=0.98(14.2-16.6) 14.0=0.99(12.4-16.5) Benthic juvenile 15.9 = 1.53(13.5-18.0) 16.0 = 0.32(15.6-16.4) Benthic juvenile 14.6 = 0.68(13.7-15.7) 13.9=0.33(13.5-14.4) Longest dorsal spine length; HL: Caudal peduncle depth/caudal peduncle length: Flexion 12.2 = 3.00(7.7-15.8) 12.4 = 5.58(6.1-16.8) Flexion 0.80 = 0.085(0,70-0.94) 0.74=0.095(0.67-0 85) Postflexion 24.8 = 5.64(17.4-32.4) 25.6=3.83(20 9-31.5) Postflexion 0.73 = 0.051(0.67-0.81) 0.76 = 0.061(0 67-0.88) Transforming 28.5 = 2.64(25.0-31.0) 36.6 = 3.21(28.8-39 4) Transforming 0.63 = 0.030(0.58-0.67) 0.72 = 0.040(0 68-0.83) Pelagic juvenile 34.8 = 2.09(32 8-36 8) 38.0=2.57(33.9-42.9) Pelagic juvenile 0.57 = 0.055(0.47-0.63) 69=0.048(0.59-0.79) Benthic juvenile 32.9=2.20(30.0-36.5) 37.7 = 2.54(34.2-40 2) Benthic juvenile 0.63=0.028(0.58-0.66) 0.67 = 0.022(0.65-0.70) Longest dorsal ray length HL: Flexion 25.5 = 7.58(10.8-35.7) 24.9 = 6.54(20 0-32.3) Postflexion 33.6=4.45(25.5-42 5) 31.1=3.40(27.3-37.0) Transforming 35.8 = 2 93(29.8-39.6) 38.4=3.22(33.9-42.9) Pelagic juvenile 39.8 = 2.26(36.4-43,3) 40.8=2.56(37.0-45.2) Benthic juvenile 39.2 = 2.46(35.7-42.8) 44.6=2.38(40.9-47.0) 237 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 Table 3. — Measurements imillimetersi of larvae and juveniles o( Sehastes entomclas. Specimens above dashed line are undergoing notochord flexion. Co" _ 01 ffl c £ c 5" Bra c 5 "£ Q. Q) B 4 j5 Body depth at pectoral fin base CD c =3 ^^ Q.Q. =! (a 0" ra ,c _:. c 03 CD 8^ c 01 Q. (D C Q. y 01 > c c — sz y 01 > c a. ,0 > 05, ■5 0) c Q. S £ Q- — 0) c Q. to <-> 9 3 0) =J c U 0) 11 QJ Q- CO Q> Q) cn. 5^ CD- " a) (/) (-1 If c a. cn 9.9 12.5 5-4 39 1.0 1,2 1-2 28 2-1 1,2 1,6 1-8 10 0-50 0,90 3,8 0,52 0-04 — 0-36 0-30 0-92 0,24 10.0 12-5 53 39 0.88 1-6 1.3 1-3 3-0 22 12 — 15 11 0-39 086 3,7 0,36 r) 0-80 0-36 — 0-42 — 10.9 137 6-3 4.7 1.3 1-9 1-5 1-4 3.2 2-6 14 1.7 18 1 098 12 44 0-45 04 10 0-47 0-58 1-4 0,50 11.0 140 6-4 4-2 1.3 1-4 1,4 1-4 33 2-5 1,5 1.6 18 1-2 072 1-0 4-2 0-48 0-10 084 0-38 0-50 1-5 0,32 11.9 15.2 7-0 5-0 1-6 1-7 1.4 1-4 3.5 2-7 1,5 1,8 22 1-2 10 14 49 042 022 098 0-60 0-76 13 0-54 12.0 15.3 6.8 4-7 1-4 1-5 1.4 1-5 3.4 2.7 1,5 2-0 2-0 1,1 76 1-4 4-9 0-44 C) 0-92 0-60 0,50 1,2 0-56 12.9 162 7.3 4-8 1-4 1.5 1.5 1-4 36 2.7 1,4 2-0 2-4 1-2 10 1-4 5-1 — — 1-0 0-54 0,76 1.3 0-62 13.7 17.5 8.1 5.4 1-4 2-1 1.6 1-6 4 1 3-4 1-7 2-1 2-9 1 4 1-4 1 8 56 66 0-22 1-3 0-64 0-94 1.5 081 14.0 17,3 8.5 5.5 1.6 22 1.7 1,5 3,9 29 1-6 20 27 1-2 1-4 1-6 5-7 0-62 0-22 12 0-75 — 1,4 076 14.9 19-2 9,1 5.4 1.6 2.3 1,7 1-6 4.2 3-6 1-8 23 3 1 1-3 1-7 1-8 57 0-36 0-22 11 0-76 1-3 1,8 1-2 15.2 19.0 9.3 5.5 1.6 2.3 1.8 1-6 4,5 3-7 18 2-4 3-0 1-4 — 2-0 6-1 0.64 0-12 1-2 0-72 0-96 1,7 0-82 16.2 20.7 9.4 6.1 1.8 2.7 1.9 1-8 4-7 3-8 1-8 2-5 3-4 1-5 — 2-2 6-3 — 0-22 — 0-74 — 1,9 — 16,8 21.0 9.9 6.2 1.7 2.8 1.8 1-8 4-6 3-7 19 26 3-6 1-5 — 2.3 6,6 — — — 0-88 — — — 17,2 22.1 10.3 6.1 1.7 28 19 1-8 4-7 39 19 2-5 4-0 1-6 2-2 2,6 6,3 0,50 0-22 1-3 0-86 1-7 23 1 5 18,4 23.4 10.6 7.0 1.8 2.8 2.0 1-8 5-2 4-2 20 29 4,2 1-5 2,5 2,7 6,8 0,45 0-18 1-2 0-92 1-8 2-4 1-4 18.5 23.6 10.2 6.3 1.8 2.5 1-8 18 4-7 3-9 2-0 3-0 4,2 1.6 2,3 2-5 6,5 0-42 0-24 1-2 0-84 18 2-2 1,5 19.4 24.7 10.9 6.7 1.8 2.6 1-9 19 5.2 4-2 20 3-0 4-4 1-6 2-5 2-7 6,8 — 0,26 — 0-84 — 2-3 1,6 20.4 25.6 12-0 7.3 1.9 2.9 2-2 2-1 54 4-3 21 3 1 4-9 1-7 — 3-0 7,6 — 0,20 — 0-94 — 26 18 20.3 26.5 11-4 7.1 1.7 3.1 22 2-1 5,1 4-2 2-1 3,0 4,8 17 — 3-0 7-3 0-46 0,22 1,1 1-0 2-3 2-5 1,9 21.0 26 4 12.3 7.3 1-9 2.8 2 1 22 5.6 4-6 2-2 3,3 4,8 1-6 2-6 3-3 7-6 — 022 — 1-1 — 3 1 1.9 521.7 27.0 13-1 8.0 2-2 3.1 2-1 2 1 5-6 4-5 2-2 3,5 4,9 1-8 2-5 3-2 8.4 0-45 0,24 — 1-0 — 2-7 1,5 5223 — 13-9 8.4 2-2 3.2 2-4 2-1 57 4-7 22 3,4 4,8 1-8 — 3-3 8.8 0,24 0,16 1,0 1-1 2.1 25 1,9 522.9 29-1 13.6 8.1 2-1 3-1 2-2 2 1 60 48 23 3-5 5,2 1-8 25 3-1 85 0,32 022 1,0 0-96 — 2-7 1,9 523.9 300 14.3 8.3 2,2 3-5 2-4 2.0 6-0 4-8 2-4 3-7 58 1-9 3-2 3,6 8.6 — 0,16 0,90 1-2 2-5 29 — 524 5 30.8 14.5 8.7 2,5 3.5 22 2.3 6.3 5-1 2-4 4-1 5,7 20 2-5 3,5 9.2 — — — 1-2 — 30 2,0 524.5 30.8 14.5 9.4 2.6 3.7 2-4 2.2 6.4 5-1 2-4 3-7 5,6 1 9 3-0 3,4 9,2 — 0,16 — 1-2 27 — 26 525.3 32.0 14.9 8.6 2-1 3.2 2-3 2.3 6.4 5-1 2-5 4-1 5-9 2-0 2-5 3,7 9,3 — — — 1-2 — 3-4 2-5 525.9 339 15.1 9.3 2,8 — 2.4 24 6.4 5-3 2-3 40 5-9 2-1 — 38 9,6 — — — 1-3 — 3-1 2-1 526.5 33.2 16.2 8.6 2,4 — 2.5 2.3 6-5 5-4 2-5 4-2 — 2,1 3-2 3,6 10,1 — — — 12 — — — 526.7 33.0 15.1 9.4 2,6 3.8 2-5 2.4 6-5 5-5 25 4 1 5-8 2-2 — 3,4 9,8 0,26 0,18 1,1 11 2,4 3-2 2-4 527.2 — 16.6 8.8 2,3 3.6 2-4 2,3 6.5 5-4 26 4-0 — 2,2 — 3,8 96 — 0,20 — 1-1 27 3-4 24 527.9 33.4 16.7 10.0 2.9 — 2-5 2,3 7.2 5-8 2-8 42 6,6 22 4-0 4,3 10,4 — 0,14 0-94 1-2 3-1 36 2-8 528,5 35.8 16.9 9.6 2.8 3.5 2-5 2.4 7,5 62 28 4-5 7,2 24 — 4-5 10,2 — — — 1-3 — 3-8 — 529.1 358 16.1 9.7 2.7 39 2-7 2.4 7,2 5-9 2-6 4 1 6-5 2-2 38 4-1 9,7 — 18 — 1-3 — 3-7 — 529,7 — 17.5 10,4 3.3 4-0 2-7 2-5 7.3 6-1 28 42 6-6 2-3 — — 10,5 — 0-22 1-1 1-3 — 3,8 2-8 530.6 369 18.7 10,2 28 4.4 2-8 2-4 73 5-9 2-9 4-8 7-6 2-5 4-4 4-9 11.0 — 16 0-90 1-5 — 4-0 3-2 630.8 38.5 18.5 9,7 — — 2-6 2-4 7.4 6-1 28 5-1 7-3 2-3 4-2 5-1 11,3 — 0-18 — 1-4 — 4-2 3-0 531,6 39.1 19.8 10,7 2.8 4.3 2-7 25 7-3 6-1 2-7 4-5 7-6 2-4 4.6 5-0 11,4 — 0-19 — 14 — 39 3,3 632,0 39.7 19.4 10,3 28 4.2 2-7 2.4 76 6-3 2-7 5-1 7-7 2-4 4.4 5.2 10,9 — 0-22 — 1-6 — 4-2 3,2 6334 41.9 20.9 11,7 — — 3.3 26 8-1 6-2 2,6 5-5 8-2 26 4.4 5.5 14,0 — 18 — 17 3-9 4-6 37 535.7 44.0 21,9 11.4 3.4 4.8 3.1 2.7 8-7 7-1 3,3 5-2 — 2-6 4.9 5.6 13,9 — 0-18 0-80 1-6 4-2 — 39 536.8 45.7 220 11,5 3.0 5.0 3.1 2.7 8-7 7-4 3,3 5-4 90 2-8 4.8 5.9 12,2 — 0-24 0,60 1-7 4,2 4-6 3,8 540.1 — 24.0 12.8 3,4 5.6 3-4 2.9 9-8 8.1 3.7 6,4 9,8 3-1 5.5 6.4 13,4 — 0-16 48 1-9 4,2 5-0 4,1 M5.0 54.2 28.2 15,0 4,2 5.8 4.1 3.3 11.0 9-5 4.2 6,7 110 3-3 — 7.6 16-3 0-06 — 0,98 2,2 53 5-4 4,6 M7.7 58,2 309 17,0 4,7 6.5 4.3 3.5 12.4 10-9 4.7 7 1 11,7 3-8 6.1 8.0 18-9 0.06 — 0,84 2,3 5,3 6-5 4,8 '55.5 66,7 33.2 17,0 4,8 6.5 4.3 3.8 13.4 12-0 4.9 8,5 13,0 4-3 6.5 9.1 20-2 0-16 — 0,80 2,8 5,5 7,0 5,5 '55.7 67,2 34.9 18,5 5,0 6.6 4.6 4.1 14.0 12-0 5,0 8,4 13,7 4-5 6.8 9.3 21-4 0-18 — 0,78 2,5 5-7 66 6,8- '64.4 78.9 38.5 19,4 4,1 8.3 5.1 4.6 17.3 15-0 5.7 8,8 16,9 5-7 8.0 11.0 23-6 0-24 — 0-66 3,5 6-4 8,3 7-7- '65.0 79.2 42.3 22,0 5.4 8.3 5.6 5.0 19.7 16-0 6.1 9,6 17,2 5-9 8.5 13.0 262 0-16 — 0-80 3-7 6-6 8,1 7,5- '66,1 81.1 39.4 21,7 5.0 8.7 5.8 5-0 19.3 16-2 6.1 10,4 17,7 5,8 8.6 11-9 23-0 0-20 — 0,88 3-4 7,1 8-9 7-7 '71,2 86.1 42,3 22,0 5.6 9.5 5.8 5.0 20.5 16-7 6.3 9,9 18,9 6-1 9-6 12,7 25-4 0-24 — 0-80 38 7-8 9 1 8-4 '74,1 89.1 45,6 23,9 6,6 8.6 58 5-1 204 17-6 6.6 10,4 19-4 6,6 9 1 12,9 26-2 0-10 — 0-92 3,9 7-5 9-5 88 '74,5 90.5 44,7 22,0 4.8 9.0 5-8 5-5 21-9 18-2 6.8 10,4 20-0 68 9.8 13-1 27-2 0-24 — 0-78 3,8 8-4 9-1 8-9- 'Usually fourth or fifth spine. ^Usually in anterior one-fourth of fin. ^Where indicated by (') second and third spines equal or the third, otherwise the second measured. ■'Bump. 5Transforming. 5Pelagic juvenile. 'Benthic juvenile. from 29 to 24^f through the pelagic juvenile period after which it deepens to 28% SL. Fin Development (Tables 1-3). — The adult com- plement of 17-19 (usually 18) pectoral fin rays is present in the smallest larva (9.9 mm). Pectoral fin length increases from 17 to 26% SL between flexion and benthic juvenile stages. The smallest larvae (—10 mm) have the adult pelvic fin com- plement (1,5). Pelvic fin length is moderate, in- creasing from 10 to 18% SL between flexion and benthic juvenile stages. Pelvic spine length in- creases from 6 to 12-14% SL. The adult complement of 8 + 7 principal caudal fin rays can be counted on the smallest (9.9 mm) flexion larva. Seven benthic juvenile S. entomelas, 238 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES 59-73 mm, had superior and inferior secondary rays: 12/13 (two specimens), 13/13 (three speci- mens), and 13/14 (two specimens), as determined from radiographs. Adults' complements of dorsal and anal fin spines and rays can be counted by =11 mm, al- though ray bases can be counted in the smallest specimen. The dorsal and anal fin prespines be- come spines by ==27 and 31 mm, respectively. Spination ( Tables 2, 4). — Spines on the left side of the head of the smallest S. entomelas include the parietal; nuchal; first and third anterior preoper- cular spines; first (as a bump), second, third, and fourth posterior preopercular spines; superior opercular spine (as a bump); postocular; first in- ferior infraorbital spine; first and fourth superior infraorbital spines; pterotic; and the inferior post- temporal spine. The parietal spine and ridge are finely serrated on all specimens <33 mm long. Parietal spine length decreases with development becoming overgrown in large juveniles and adults. The nu- chal spine, always shorter than the parietal, is usually present in larvae and pelagic juveniles. It begins to fuse with the parietal spine at =26 mm and is fused and not recognizable in benthic juveniles ( &45.0 mm). All five spines of the posterior preopercular series are present on larvae by =11 mm and persist through adults. The third spine is always longest but decreases from 20% HL in flexion larvae to 4% HL in benthic juveniles. The second, third, and fourth posterior preopercular spines and the an- terior edge of the first spine of the anterior preopercular series are weakly serrated in speci- mens <30 mm long. Serrations persist on the third posterior preopercular spine to =33 mm. The second anterior preopercular spine was present on the left side only in one flexion larva (12.0 mm). The first and third anterior preopercular spines are present on all flexion and postflexion larvae, are reduced to blunt bumps in =25 mm transform- ing larvae, and are no longer recognizable by =30 mm. The superior opercular spine appears well de- veloped and sharp tipped between 10 and 14 mm. The inferior opercular spine appears as a blunt bump at 15 mm, and as a sharp spine in specimens >21 mm. The interopercular spine appears as a blunt bump at =11 mm, as a small sharp spine by 22 mm, and is usually reduced to a blunt bump in benthic juveniles >44 mm. The ridge anterior to the postocular spine is finely serrated on specimens <28 mm. The su- praocular spine appears as a bump at = 18 mm and as a sharp spine by =19 mm. The preocular spine appears as a blunt bump at =22 mm and as a sharp spine in all specimens >31.6 mm. The first inferior infraorbital spine is present in all specimens <55 mm, and is absent in specimens >56 mm. The second inferior infraorbital spine appears between 10 and 12 mm, is present in all specimens to =35 mm, appears only as a blunt bump between =33 and 55 mm, and is no longer visible in specimens >55 mm. The third inferior infraorbital spine ap- pears at =15 mm, is present between 35 and =55 mm, and is usually absent in specimens >55 mm. The first superior infraorbital spine is present in all specimens <26 mm, is present as a blunt bump between 25 and 32 mm, and is absent in specimens >32 mm long. The second superior infraorbital spine is occasionally present between 16 and =30 mm and is absent in larger and smaller specimens. The third superior infraorbital spine is usually present in specimens =13-31 mm and usually ab- sent in other sized specimens. The fourth superior infraorbital spine is usually present as a sharp spine in specimens <32 mm, as a sharp spine or blunt bump between 32 and 41 mm, and is usually absent in specimens >41 mm. The nasal spine appears as a bump between 11 and 12 mm and as a sharp spine in all specimens >12 mm. The tympanic spine appears as a blunt bump between =28 and 35 mm and usually as a small sharp spine in specimens >35 mm. The pterotic spine is present as a sharp spine in all specimens <25 mm, as a blunt bump in specimens 25-37 mm, and is absent in specimens >37 mm. The inferior posttemporal spine is present in all specimens of the series. The supracleithral spine appears at =12 mm and is present in all larger specimens. The superior posttemporal spine appears as a blunt bump at =16 mm and as a sharp spine in all specimens >17 mm. The cleithral spine is present in most specimens >40 mm as a weak, flexible spine. Scale formation. — Lateral line organs, indicated by a row of light colored spots on the flesh, are visible on the smallest larva and on most larger larvae which lack scales. Developing scales are first visible on unstained specimens at = 22 mm in the region above the pectoral fin, near the post- temporal and supracleithral spines. The body is scale covered by =26 mm. 239 FISHERY BULLETIN; VOL. 79. NO. 2 Table 4. — Development of spines in the head region of Sebastes entomelas larvae and juveniles. Specimens Parietal Nuchal Preopercular Opercular Inter- oper- cular Sub- oper- cular Pre- ocular Supra- ocular Standard length (mm) Anterior Posterior Post- 1st 2d 3d 1st 2d 3d 4th 5th Superior Inferior ocular 9.9 + + + - + (') + + + - (') - - - - - 4- 10.0 + D + - + (') + + + - (') - - - - - ■¥ 10.9 + + + - + + -t- + + - + - - - - + 11.0 + + + - + + + + + C) + - (') - - - + 11.9 + + + - + + + + + + + - - - - + 12.0 + D + +2 + (') + + + (') D - D - - - + 12.9 + + + - + + + + + + (') ~ D ~ ~ ~ -f 13.7 + + + _ + + + + + + + - (') - - - -(- 14.0 + + + - + + + + + + + - (') - - - + 14.9 + + + - + + + + + + + - V) - - - + 15.2 + + + - + + + + + + + (') - - - + 16.2 + + + - + + + + + + + (') - - - + 16.8 + + + - + + + + + + + D - - - + 17.7 + + + - + + + + + + + D - - - + 18.4 + + + - + + + + + + + (') - - D + 18.5 + + + - + + + + + + + (') - - + + 19.4 + + + - + + + + + + + D - - V) + 20.4 + + + - + + + + + + + V) - - + + 20.8 + + + - + + + + + + + D - - + + 21.0 + + + - + + + + + + + D - - (') + 321.7 + + + - + + + + + + + V) - - + + 322.3 + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + + 322.9 + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + + 323.9 + + + - (') + + + + + + + + - + + 324.5 + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + + 324.5 + + + - + + + + + + + + + - + + 325.3 + - (') - - + + + + + + + + - + + 325.9 + + + - - + + + + + + + + - + + 326.5 + + (') - - + + + + + + + + - -1- + 326.7 + + (') - (') + + + + + + + + - -1- + 327.2 + + + - (') + + + + + + + + - + + 327.9 + + (') - (') + + + + + + + + - + + 328.5 + + - - + + + + + + + + - + + 329,1 + + (') - - + + + + + + + + - + + 329.7 + + D - - + + + + + + + + - + + 330.6 + + - - + + + + + + + + - + + 530.8 + + - - - + + + + + + + + - -1- + 531.6 + + - - - + + + + + + + + - + -t- + 532.0 + + - - - + + + + + + + + - + + + 533.4 + + - - - + + + + + + + + - + + -(- 535.7 + + - - - + + + + + + + + - + + + 536.8 + + - - - + + + + + + + + - + -1- + 540.1 + + - - - + 8 + + + + + + + - + + + '45.0 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + + + + (') - + -1- + M7.7 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + + + + (') - + _9 + '55.5 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + + + + 0) - + + + '55.7 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + + + + (') - + + + '64.4 + 8 + 8 - - - + 6 + + + + + + D - + + -1- '65.0 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + +- + + + V) + + -1- '66.1 + 8 + 8 - - - {') + + + + + + + + + + -h '71.2 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + + + + + D + + -f '74.1 + 8 + 8 - — - + 8 + + + + + + + + + -1- -1- '74.5 + 8 + 8 - - - + 8 + + + + + + (') D + -1- -(- 'Bump, indicating beginning of spine formation or last stage before spine is overgrown. 2- on the right side. 3Transforming, "Spine IS bifid. 5Pelagic luvenile. 8Spine tip directed posteriorly. 'Benthic|uvenile- Panetal and nuchal spines fused, only one tip visible, on the right side. Pigmentation. — The smallest larval S. entomelas has melanistic pigment on the head over the brain. Melanophores are present on the inside tip of the lower jaw, along the anterior margin of the maxil- lary, around the pterotic and posttemporal spines, and on the operculum. An internal melanistic shield covers the gut appearing darkest on the dorsal surface. Melanophores are present dorsally on the nape, beneath the posterior one-third of the spinous dorsal fin, beneath the soft dorsal fin, and along the dorsal surface of the caudal peduncle. Internal and external melanophores are present on the lateral midline of the caudal peduncle in the vicinity of notochord flexure, above the posterior portion of the anal fin, and along the ventral mar- gin of the caudal peduncle. Melanophores line the margin of the hypural elements. The pectoral and pelvic fin blades are moderately pigmented with expanded, somewhat elongated melanophores. External and a few internal melanophores are 240 I.AROCHE and RirHARDSON; DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND -Jl'VENILES OF ROCKFIRHES above dashed line are undergoing notochoid flexion. + denotes spine present and - denotes spine absent. Infraorbital Postlemporal Supra- clelthral Standard , , _ . length Inferior Superior (mm) 1st 2d 3d 1st 2d 3d 4tfi Nasal Coronal Tympanic Pterotic Superior Inferior Cleithral 99 10.0 10.9 11.0 11.9 12.0 12.9 D + + (') (') (') (') (') + + + + + + 13.7 14.0 14.9 15.2 16.2 16.8 17.7 18.4 18.5 19.4 20.4 20.8 21.0 321.7 ^22.3 322.9 ^23.9 324.5 324.5 325.3 325.9 326.5 326.7 327.2 327.9 328.5 329.1 329.7 330.6 530.8 531.6 532.0 533.4 535.7 536.8 540.1 '45.0 M7.7 '55.5 '55.7 '64.4 '65.0 '66.1 '71.1 '74.1 '74.5 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') (') + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') + + V) V) V) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') (') (') V) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + D + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + n + + (') (') (') + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') + + + D (') + + D V) (') V) n (') D (') V) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') + + + + + + + + present on the underside of the pectoral fin base. A discrete melanophore is present at the articula- tion of each of several dorsal fin rays near the center of the soft dorsal fin. As larvae develop, pigment increases over the brain. Melanophores are added on the snout, in- terorbital region, tips of the upper and lower lips, along the maxillary, and on the cheek and oper- culum. Pigment increases around the orbit and around the posttemporal spine, extending an- teriorly over the head. Melanophores line the an- terior margin of the cleithrum beneath the oper- culum. Pigment on the gut becomes less obvious as body musculature increases. The dorsal body sur- face is pigmented from nape to caudal peduncle by —11 mm. Large stellate melanophores beneath the soft dorsal fin increase in number and are aligned along the muscles surrounding the dorsal pterygiophores. This is the densest pigmentation on larvae. Internal and external melanophores are added along the body midline anteriorly from the caudal peduncle forming a line along the notochord which extends to the head by =16.5 mm. Melanophores extend ventrolaterally from the 241 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 nape to the lateral midline by —16.5 mm and are added posteriorly along the dorsolateral body sur- face with development. The melanophores located above the posterior portion of the anal fin disap- pear by —18 mm. Discrete melanophores are added at the articulation of dorsal fin rays and spines until most soft rays have an associated melanophore by ~14 mm and most spines have one by =19 mm. Melanophores are added along the caudal fin base, sometimes appearing as a line of pigment, and onto the fin membrane. Pigment de- creases and then disappears on the pelvic fin and underside of the pectoral fin base by -18 mm and on the pectoral fin by =20 mm. During transformation, =22-31 mm, pigment gradually continues to increase over the head and body. External melanophores are added on the lips, lower jaw, snout, and dorsolateral areas of the head. Pigment becomes continuous around the orbit by =30 mm. Melanophores over the dorsolat- eral surfaces of the body often appear aligned along the myosepta, but this pattern becomes obscured as melanophores are added between the myosepta, particularly along the dorsal one-third of the body. Pelagic juveniles, 31-40 mm, undergo a general increase in pigment with development. The upper head, snout, lips, lower jaw, maxillary, cheek, and gular region become increasingly pigmented with small melanophores. Melanophores are added ventrolaterally on the body until all but the ven- tral one-eighth is pigmented. Pigment distinctly lines the caudal fin base. Benthic juveniles, >44 mm, become increas- ingly pigmented as small melanophores are added on the head and appear on the scales and fins. Pigmentation at the anterior tips of the lips and along the maxillary intensifies. By =55.5 mm a dark bar of pigment extends the length of the maxillary, and two other bars extend from the posteroventral margin of the eye across the cheek. The most dorsal cheek bar extends completely across the opercle. Dark blotches appear on the dorsal surfaces of the body as scale-borne melano- phores overlie the body pigment which developed during the transformation and pelagic juvenile stages. In small benthic juveniles these blotches appear as indistinct bands as melanophores are added ventrolaterally to them. However, a mottled pattern appears over the dorsal half of the body by = 66 mm. Melanophores are added anteriorly and proximally on the first dorsal fin and are eventually scattered over the entire fin. A dark blotch devel- ops in the posterior portion of the spinous dorsal fin by =45 mm and persists in the largest juveniles observed; however, as development proceeds the blotch becomes less intensely pigmented and more of a pigment fringe, rather than a blotch. The membranes of the spinous and soft dorsal fins and caudal fin become lightly covered with small melanophores by =56 mm. Also by =56 mm, a small patch of melanophores appears on the dorsal half of the pectoral fin ray bases and adjacent fin base. Occurrence (Figures 4, 5). — Adult S. entomelas occur from Todos Santos Bay, Baja California, to Kodiak Island, Alaska (Miller and Lea 1972). Off Oregon they are reported to be most common on the continental shelf between 100 and 200 m depth • 65 ■^• • 8 • 3 30 103 9 42 • • • • •• 52 5 37 Larvae / 9 N' / 2 2 I N Pelagic Juveniles ^....^1 — I — r ^^^" — \ r- ILJ"" «€° J »SIO«U ; 5J ; 3 ^ 111! 1 : 6 di,«"'"" ; ,si : 1 > _4J" ' 1 ( i " ' I! - \ W4UTIC4L MiLtS ; Be nth IC J uveniles y :«.• i. ti «i ?i \ 8noo»i».CS ^^ Figure 4. — Number of specimens and location of capture of larvae and juveniles o{Sebastes entomelas off Oregon ( 1961-78) described in this paper. 242 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES lOr 20 MAR -■ — h iLkiL APR MAY lU peared to range as extensively as larvae. Benthic juveniles were taken close to the coast at depths of 9-37 m. Reported parturition times for S. entomelas are January through March off central California (Phillips 1958). Larvae <15 mm long were taken March through June, although most were taken in April and May. Larvae and pelagic juveniles >15 mm were taken April through June. Benthic juveniles were taken only in June. Lack of benthic juveniles in our collections from other months is probably due to inadequate sampling. en JUN lOr ■■n.n r^A JUL 20 40 60 Standard Length (mm) Figure 5. — Seasonal occuirence of larvae and juveniles of Sehastes entomelas off Oregon. Data from 1961 through 1978 combined. Solid bars indicate pelagic stages, open bars indicate benthic stages. (Snytko and Fadeev^). Data from Niska (1976) show that =917f of the total Oregon trawl catch of S. entomelas landed from 1963 through 1971 was taken from depths of 110-218 m. Highest concen- trations of S. entomelas found during the 1977 rock- fish survey between Pt. Hueneme, Calif., lat. 34°00 ' N, and Cape Flattery, Wash., lat. 48°29' N, were at depths of 91-181 m between Cape Blanco, Oreg., lat. 43°00' N, and Cape Flattery (Gunder- son and Sample^). Larval and transforming S. entomelas, in our collections were captured at sta- tions — 9-306 km offshore. Pelagic juveniles ap- ■Snytko, V A.,andN.S. Fadeev 1974. Data on distribution of some species of sea perches along the Pacific coast of North America during the summer-autumn seasons. Document sub- mitted at the Canada-USSR meeting on fisheries in Moscow- Batumi, USSR- November 1974, 14 p. (Transl. .3436, Can. Tran.sl. Ser.). •^Gunderson, D. R., and T. M, Sample. 1978. Distribution and abundance of rockfish off Washington, Oregon and Califor- nia during 1977. Unpubl. rep.. 45 p. Northwest and Alaska Fisheries Center, National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA, Seattle, WA 98112. SEBASTES ZACENTRVS (GILBERT) Literature (Figures 6-8). — The pigment pattern of S. zacentrus preextrusion larvae was described by Efremenko and Lisovenko (1970), including a figure; Westrheim (1975); Westrheim et al.^; and Harling et al. (footnote 6), including figures. De- scriptions by Efremenko and Lisovenko (1970), Westrheim (1975), and Westrheim et al. (footnote 9) agree that preextrusion larvae (mean 4.2, 4.3, and 4.5 mm TL, respectively) have a postanal ven- tral row of melanophores (15-21, usually >16, and 15-20, respectively) which usually stops short of the anus by at least four myomeres with usually at least one melanophore in the hypural region. Melanophores also appear over the gut. No dorsal row of pigment is present. Harling et al. (footnote 6) described and illustrated two forms of S. zacen- trus preextrusion larvae, both with mean 5.0 mm TL. One form had 15-18 ventral midline melanophores which stopped short of the anus by four myomeres, a hypural spot, and gut pigment. The second form had 18-21 ventral midline melanophores which did not stop short of the anus by four myomeres, 9-12 dorsal midline melanophores, considerable pigment encircling the yolk, a large lateral melanophore midway be- tween the anus and tail tip, and several melanophores in the hypural region. It seems quite unlikely that the latter form is the same as the former and merely a result of within species variation as suggested by Hai'ling et al. (footnote 6). Possibly it may reflect misidentification of the adult from which the larvae were taken. Since the two forms described by Harling et al. were consid- ■'Westrheim, S. J., W, R. Harling. D. Davenport, and M. S. Smith. 1968. Preliminary report on maturity, .spawning season and larval identification of rockfishes \.Sehastodes) collected off British Columbia in 1968. Fish. Res. Board Can., Manuscr. Rep. Ser. 1005, 28 p. 243 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 12.7 mm Figure 6. — Pelagic larvae ofSebastes zacentrus. erably larger than those described by other work- ers (see above), there is some question about the identification of both. Identification (Tables 5-7; Appendix Table 1). — Fifty-one specimens of S. zacentrus (7.4-74.8 mm) were selected for the developmental series from 244 181 larval and juvenile specimens identified. Juveniles were identified using the following com- bination of characters observed in juvenile and adult specimens examined: Gill rakers = 32-37, usually 34-37 Lateral line pores = 38-48, usually 38-44 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES 15.6mm 24.0 mm Figure 7. — Transforming larvae (15.6, 19.3 mm) and pelagic juvenile (24.0 mm) o{ Sebastes zacentrus. Pectoral fin rays = 16-18, usually 17 Anal fin soft rays = 6 or 7, usually 7 Dorsal fin soft rays = 13-16, usually 14 Vertebrae = 27 Preocular spine = present (strong) Supraocular spine = usually absent 245 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 30.1 mm 65.3mm Figure 8. — Pelagic juvenile (30.1 mm) and benthic juvenile (65.3 mm) ofSebastes zacentrus. Interorbital space = flat-convex Black blotch at base of spinous dorsal fin = absent. Of the 36 Sebastes species off Oregon (Richardson and Laroche 1979), S. zacentrus has the best fit to the above characters. Other species occurring off Oregon w^hich agree with many of these characters are S. brevispinis, S. emphaeus , S. proriger, and S. wilsoni. Sebastes emphaeus and S. wilsoni are elimi- nated since they have 39-43 and 38-42 gill rakers, respectively (see Appendix Table 1). Sebastes wil- soni also differs from S. zacentrus in soft anal fin ray count, usually 6 vs. usually 7, respectively (see Appendix Table 1). Sebastes proriger can be elimi- nated based on count frequency distributions (see Appendix Table 1): number of gill rakers on the first archx = 38.3 ±0.35 (95% confidence intervals, C. I.) vs. 35.3±0.32 (95% C. I.) for S. zacentrus; diagonal scale rows below the lateral line x = 56.0±0.82 (95% C. I.) vs. 50.2 + 0.56 (95% C. I.) for S. zacentrus; lateral line poresx = 47.9±0.93 (95% C.I.) vs. 41.8±0.70 (95% C.I.) for S.zace/i^rMs. Fre- quency distributions for dorsal fin soft rays also differ between S. proriger, 50% ^15 rays, and S. zacentrus, 88% <14 rays. Although S. brevispinis differs considerably from S. zacentrus in body morphology, pigmentation, and relative strength and length of head and fin spines, the fin, scale, and lateral line pore count ranges are reported to overlap (Phillips 1957; Miller and Lea 1972; Hart 1973). Since count-frequency data have not been published for S. brevispinis and since we had only four large juvenile and adult specimens available for examination, it was necessary to rely on a 246 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON; DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES Table 5. — Meristics from larvae and juveniles of Sebastes zacentrus based on unstained specimens. Counts of left and right pelvic fin rays (1,5; 1,5 1, superior and inferior principal caudal rays (8,7), and left and right branchiostegal rays (7,7) were constant throughout the series. Specimens above dashed line are undergoing notochord flexion. Standard length (mm) Dorsal fin spines and rays Anal fin spines and rays Pectoral fi Left n rays Right Gill rakers (first arch) Lateral line pores Left Right Diagonal scale rows Left Right Left Right 7.4 7.9 8.5 V + IM4 XIIIM3 XIIIM4 III', 7 WVJ III' .7 17 17 17 17 17 17 18+ 7=25 18+ 8=26 17+ 7=24 19+ 8=27 — — — — 9.2 XIII', 14 9.9 XIII', 14 10.1 Xlll',14 10.6 XIII'. 14 11.2 Xlll',14 11.7 Xlll',14 12.4 XIII'. 13 12.7 Xlll',14 13.3 Xlll',14 213.7 XIII, 15 214.0 Xlll',14 214.8 Xlll',14 215.0 Xlir,14 215.6 XIII, 13 216.3 XIII, 14 216.8 XIII, 14 217.3 XIII, 14 217.9 XIII, 14 218.0 XIII, 14 218.9 XIII, 14 219.3 XIII, 14 219.6 XIII, 14 320.3 XIII, 14 320.6 XIII, 14 321.0 XIII, 14 321.5 XIII, 14 322.0 XIII, 14 322.6 XIII, 14 323.3 XIII, 13 323.5 XIII, 14 324.0 XIII, 14 324.4 XIII, 14 325.6 XIII, 14 325.9 XIII, 14 326.3 XIII, 14 326.6 XIII, 14 327.6 XIII, 14 328.3 XIII, 14 330 1 XIII, 14 330.7 XIII, 14 331.2 Xlll,14 333.7 XIII, 14 335.3 XIII, 14 "65.0 XIII, 14 "65.3 XIII, 13 "70,8 XII, 14 "73,7 XIII, 13 "74.8 XIII, 14 III' ,7 III', 7 lll'.7 III' .7 III' ,7 IIP,7 III' .7 III' ,7 III' ,7 III' .7 III', 6 III' ,7 III' ,7 III' ,7 III' .7 IIP ,7 IIP,7 iin,7 lll',7 III', 7 III' ,7 III' ,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 III.7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 111,7 17 17 17 17 16 17 17 17 17 17 18 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 18 17 18 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 20+ 8=28 20+ 9=29 21+ 9=30 22+ 8=30 21+ 9 = 30 21+ 9 = 30 22+ 9 = 31 24+ 9=33 23+ 9=32 23+ 9 = 32 24+ 9=33 23+ 9=32 24+10=34 23+ 9=32 24+10=34 23+10=33 24+10=34 24+10=34 24 + 10 = 34 25+10=35 25+10=35 26+10=36 26+10=36 24 + 10 = 34 25+10=35 24+10=34 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 26+10=36 25+11=36 24 + 10=34 25+10=35 24+10=34 24+10=34 25+10=35 26+10=36 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 24 + 10 = 34 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 24+10=34 26+11=37 24+10=34 19+ 8=28 21+ 9=30 21+ 8=29 21+ 9 = 30 21+ 9 = 30 23+ 9 = 32 22+10=32 23+ 9=32 22+ 9=31 24+ 9=33 24+ 9 = 33 23+10=33 24+10=34 23+ 9=32 23+10=33 23+10=33 24+10=34 24 + 10 = 34 24+10=34 24+10=34 24 + 10 = 34 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 24+10=34 24+11=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+11=36 25+10=35 25+10=35 25+10=35 26+10=36 25+10=35 25+10=35 24+10=34 26+10=36 25+10=35 25+10=35 24+10=34 25+10=35 25+10=35 26+10=36 26+10=36 26+10=36 25+11=36 24+10=34 — 41 — 43 — 43 — 42 42 — 43 41 40 — 40 40 42 41 — 41 40 — 40 40 44 43 44 45 41 43 44 43 43 47 43 42 52 — 48 50 — 52 ' Posteriormost dorsal or anal spine appears as a soft ray ^Transforming, 3Pelagic juvenile. "Benthic juvenile. number of characters for elimination of S. breuis- pinis. Characters useful for separating S. brevis- pinis from S. zacentrus are: weak or absent vs. strong supraorbital spines; 58-70 vs. 43-54 diagonal scale rows below the lateral line; 44-53 vs. 38-48, usually 38-44, lateral line pores; 26 vs. 27 vertebrae and myomeres; second anal spine about equal in strength and length to the third anal spine vs. second anal spine stouter and longer than the third anal spine. Larvae and small juveniles of 16 specimens, 14.9-28.1 mm, identified as S. brevispinis were found to have denser melanistic pigment over the head and body than S. zacentrus of similar length and more slender bodies at the pectoral fin base, averaging 26.1, 24.6, and 26.89^ SL for larvae, transforming lar- vae, and pelagic juveniles vs. 35.2, 34.4, and 32.5% SL for comparable stages of S. zacentrus. Distinguishing Features. — Characters useful to distinguish the smallest identified S. zacentrus larva, 7.4 mm, are fin counts; the moderately pig- mented pectoral and pelvic fins; the general lack of body pigment; melanophores inside the tip of the 247 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 Table 6. — Measurement.s (millimetersl of larvae and juveniles of Sehastes zacentrus. Specimens above dashed line are undergoing notochord flexion. T3 <5£ ™ (D c O 0) i 5 x: X o == 5 oj en 0.0 CD E >.T3 LU 2 CD o ^ 1"° Body depth at pectoral fin base O ffl c (0 8^ c O Ol E o. 15 "D as o ra Q. a> c Q. v> r. y ai > c Q. c ,y o) > c Q. > 0) Oct 3 o 8-E w c Q. in 0) c Q. ™^ 3 C 11 ro ifi ^ ■OB 1-1 "B O {/i 7.4 9.1 4.0 3.1 0,92 1.4 1.0 086 2.5 1.7 80 1,2 0.96 0.98 0.48 0.88 2.9 0.82 0.04 0-84 — 019 0.69 {') 7.9 10.0 4.0 3,1 0,72 1,4 1.1 0.98 2.8 2.0 0.92 1,3 12 1.1 0,90 1,2 3.0 0.76 {') 1-2 0-26 0.52 1,0 0,40 8.5 10.9 4.5 3.8 0.98 1,8 1.2 1.1 3.1 2.2 1.1 1-3 1-5 1.0 — 1,2 3.3 0.64 0.12 — 040 0.54 0,76 0,54 9.2 11.8 5.2 4.2 1.1 1.8 1.3 1.2 3.3 2.5 10 1,4 1-9 1.1 1.3 1.5 3.8 — 0.22 — 0.55 0.90 1,2 0.70 9.9 12.8 5.6 4,4 1,2 1,7 1.4 1.2 3,5 2.6 1,1 1,5 2-0 1.1 1.4 1.5 4-2 076 0.20 0-98 0.58 0.92 1,2 078 10.1 13.0 5.6 4,2 1,1 18 1.4 1,3 3,4 2.6 10 1,5 2 1 1-1 1,4 1.6 4-1 0-68 024 1-1 0.52 1-0 1,4 088 10.6 13.3 5.7 4,4 1,3 2,0 1.5 12 3,6 2-7 1,2 16 22 1-1 1,6 19 4-2 0-75 10 13 0.48 1 1 1,2 092 11.2 14.4 6.4 4,6 1,3 2,1 1,6 1.3 4,0 3,0 1,3 1,7 2-4 1-1 1,8 1,9 4-7 0-66 0,21 1-2 0.68 1-3 17 1.2 11.7 14.9 6.8 5,3 1,5 — 1,5 1,3 40 3.0 1,3 1,6 24 1-2 1,9 20 4.9 0.66 0,30 1-3 0-72 1-3 1,5 1.1 12.4 15.9 70 5,4 1,5 2,4 1,7 1,5 4.3 3,4 1,4 1,6 28 1-3 2,4 2.6 4.9 0.64 028 1,2 0-73 1-7 18 1.7 12,7 16.2 7.2 5.1 1,4 2,3 1.7 1,5 4.2 3,1 1.4 1,8 3-0 1-3 2.2 2.4 4.8 0.64 0,29 1,3 0-72 — 1,6 — 13.3 16.9 8.3 5.4 1.6 2,4 1.6 1,5 4.4 3,1 1,4 1,9 3-0 1-3 2.2 2.4 54 68 0,40 1,4 0-78 1-6 18 1.3 613.7 17.0 8.5 59 1,7 2,3 1.7 1,5 4.6 3.5 1,5 1,8 3-2 1-3 2.6 2.6 5.5 062 030 — 0.90 1,7 20 1,8 ^14.0 17.9 80 5.4 1,5 2,5 1,6 1,6 4,9 3.9 1,5 2.2 3-4 1-4 2.9 3.0 5.7 0-76 0,32 14 0.87 1,9 — 1.8 ^14.8 18.9 8.9 6,1 1,6 26 1,6 1,7 5,1 4.2 1,7 23 3-6 1,4 2.9 3.0 5-7 0-70 038 1,4 091 — — 2.0 ^15.0 18.0 8.8 6,1 1.5 2,6 1,7 1,6 5,1 4.0 1,6 2.2 3-7 1,4 3.0 3.1 5-9 0-70 0,37 1,5 0.88 — — 2.1 M5.6 19.7 9.3 6.6 1.9 2,4 1,8 1,7 5,2 4,1 1.7 2,4 3-7 1,5 — — 6-7 — 0.30 — 0.89 — 23 — M6.3 20.8 10.0 66 1.6 28 2,1 1,7 5 1 4,3 1,7 24 4-1 16 3.0 3.0 7-3 62 — 1,5 0.96 2,4 26 2.3 6168 21 10.2 6,6 1.9 — 1.9 1,7 5,1 4,2 1.7 2,5 36 15 — 3.0 68 0-78 — — 0.94 2,4 2,6 2.3 617.3 — 10.8 6,9 17 2,7 2,0 1.7 5,4 44 1.9 25 4-4 1,5 — — 7-4 0-64 0,22 16 11 — 2,5 2.3 617.9 22.7 11.0 7,4 1,9 3,1 2,2 17 5,8 4,7 1,9 2,6 49 1,7 3.6 3.7 7-4 0-70 0,34 16 1-2 2-8 3,1 2.8 618.0 22.8 11.1 7,5 1.9 3,2 2.3 1,8 5,7 4,5 2,0 2,7 49 1,7 3.7 3.9 7-4 — — 1,2 1-1 29 29 3.0 618.9 — 11.8 7,1 1.8 3.1 23 1 7 6.1 4,8 19 28 5-0 1,7 3,7 3.8 7-2 — 0,36 1,5 1-1 2-8 — — 619.3 24.4 11.0 7.5 1,9 3.0 2.3 20 6.0 4.9 1,9 2,7 5 1 17 3,6 — 7.7 0.58 0.32 — 1 1 29 — — 619.6 25.2 11.9 7.7 2.1 3.0 2.3 1,8 6,1 5.0 2,0 2,8 5,5 1,8 4,0 4.1 7.9 0.70 0.39 — 1-3 2-9 3,3 3.2 '20.3 25.6 12.0 8,1 2 1 3.4 2.3 1,9 6,3 5,1 2 1 3,0 54 1,8 — 42 8-1 66 0.37 1,4 1-3 3-1 3.0 — '20.6 256 12.1 7,7 1,9 3.4 2.4 1,8 6,3 5.2 2,0 3.4 52 1,9 4 1 4.1 8 1 0.70 042 1,5 1-2 32 — 3.2 '21.0 25.7 13,2 8,4 2,1 3.6 2.4 2.0 6.3 5.0 2.0 2.8 6,1 1,9 — — 8-4 0.62 0.34 1,2 1.4 3,6 — 3.3 '21.5 26.9 12,6 86 2,7 — 2.3 2.0 6.5 5.2 2.1 2.8 54 2,0 4,2 4.2 87 0.92 048 — 1-3 — — 3.4 '22.0 — 13.5 8,5 2,5 3.2 2.5 1.8 68 5.3 2.1 2.9 — 1,9 — — 93 0,57 0.30 — 1-2 32 — 3.3 '22.6 28.4 13.6 8.6 2.1 3.9 2.6 2.0 6.9 5.7 2.3 3.4 — 2,1 4,2 4.1 86 — — 14 14 3,6 — 3.7 '23.3 29.6 13.9 9.0 2.4 3.6 2.6 1.9 6.7 5.5 2.2 3.2 63 2,1 4,2 4.7 92 — — 1,5 1-2 3,6 36 3.7 '23.5 — 14,3 8,7 2,1 3.5 2.5 2.0 7.1 6.0 2,4 3.3 63 2,1 4,7 4.7 92 — 0.44 1,5 1-4 — — 3.6 '24.0 30.5 14,8 9,7 2,7 4.0 2.9 2.0 7.2 5.9 2,4 3.6 66 2,2 4.2 4.7 9-7 — 032 — 1-4 3.5 36 — '24.4 — 14,0 95 2.5 4.0 2.8 2.1 7.8 6.3 2,1 3.5 6-1 2,4 — — 9-4 0,52 030 — 1-4 — 3.6 3,6 '25.6 32.0 16,4 9,4 2,5 4.0 2.8 2.1 7,7 6.0 2.4 39 6.8 2,2 4.3 4.9 10-4 0-36 024 1,0 1-6 36 4.0 3.9 '25.9 32.1 15,7 10,1 2,7 3.6 2.8 2.1 7,7 6.1 2.5 3.5 6,7 2,3 4.6 4.9 10-3 — 0,42 1,1 1-5 3.6 42 3.8 '26.3 327 156 9,6 2,7 4.0 2.8 2,1 8.3 6.6 2.5 3.6 — 23 4.6 5.1 10-4 0-38 0.24 — 16 3.6 4.0 4.3 '26.6 — 16.3 9,5 2,7 3.6 2.8 2,1 8.1 6.5 2.6 3.3 7.2 2,3 43 — 10-4 — 0,15 — 1-4 3.4 — 4.0 '27.6 34.7 16.3 10.0 2.2 4,2 3,1 2,1 7.8 6.6 2.7 3.9 7.5 2,4 — 5,8 10-0 — 0,16 — 1-5 38 — 4.3 '28.3 34.9 17.5 10.4 2.8 — 2,8 2.1 8.5 7.0 2.6 3.6 — 2,4 4.9 5.4 11-3 — 0,32 1.1 1-6 3.8 — 4.4 '30.1 37.4 18.6 10 9 2,7 4,6 3.1 2.2 9.2 7.1 3,0 4.4 8.6 2.7 4.6 6.1 11-9 — 0.36 — 1-7 4.2 4,5 4,7 '30.7 37,7 19.4 11,4 3,1 4.7 3.4 2.2 8.5 7,0 28 40 8.2 2.7 4.8 59 120 — 0,32 12 2-0 4.0 48 4.5 '31.2 39,1 19,2 11.5 2,7 5,0 3.5 2.2 9,4 7.3 29 4,6 8.8 26 — 6.2 12-0 — 0,30 0.82 1-9 3.9 5.2 4.8 '33.7 41.3 20.8 11.6 3.0 4.5 3.3 2.4 9.8 7.9 3,1 4,7 87 2.7 — — 12.2 — 0,14 0-88 19 — — 4.9 '35.3 42.6 22.3 12.3 3.1 4.6 3.4 2.4 10.3 8.5 3,4 4,8 8.8 28 — 6 1 14.6 — 0,24 0-82 18 — 5.2 — 865.0 80.5 37.0 23.2 4.5 10.7 7.7 4.1 22.0 17.0 6,1 8,8 17,5 63 11.0 14.7 26.1 092 C) 1-1 3-8 — 10.9 12.7 665.3 79.7 40.0 23.4 4.3 10.0 7.5 4.0 20.7 16,4 63 9,0 17,2 6.3 10.4 14.5 27.0 0-60 n 1-2 3-8 9.4 10.8 12.0 670.8 863 41,1 26.9 6.7 10,9 8.3 4.2 22.0 17.2 6.4 9.8 19.2 68 10,4 15,0 30.1 0.44 (') 0-92 4.2 9.2 11.0 12.4 673.7 89.7 43.5 278 7.0 11,7 8.1 4.6 23.5 19.6 7.0 10.6 18.7 7.5 11,4 15.0 29.7 0.46 n 1-0 4.4 10.5 12.2 12.9 674.8 91.3 43.7 27,7 5.8 11.0 8.1 4.5 23.4 20.0 6.9 10.4 19.5 7.4 11.0 15.2 30-1 80 (') 0-86 4.4 10.7 12.5 15.2 'Usually fourth or fifth, ^Usually midfin, •'The second spine. ''Forming. ^Bump. 6Transformlng. 'Pelagic juvenile, 6Benthic juvenile, ^Nuchal spine overgrown. lower jaw; narrow interorbital distance (27.7'yJ^ HL); and long, deeply serrated, parietal spine (26.5% HL). Later stage larvae change little in overall appearance from the smallest larva, except for addition of melanophores along the dorsal body surface beneath the spinous and soft dorsal fins, along the dorsal surface of the caudal peduncle, and at the articulation of some dorsal soft fin rays of specimens >12.5 mm. A row of melanophores along the lateral midline and a 248 strong, sharp preocular spine develop during the transformation period. Meristic characters, pres- ence of a preocular and lack of a supraocular spine, the flat-convex shape and narrow width of the interorbital space, and stout, relatively long, sec- ond anal spine serve to distinguish pelagic and benthic juveniles. General Development. — The smallest specimens (7.4-8.5 mm) of S. zacentrus are undergoing the LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES final stage of notochord flexion, which is completed by ~9 mm. Transformation from postflexion larva to pelagic juvenile occurs between -13.5 and 20 mm as indicated by structural change of the dorsal and anal fin prespines to sharp, hard spines. Melanistic pigmentation gradually increases along the dorsal body surface under the dorsal fins and along the lateral midline of the caudal pedun- cle through the larval and transformation periods. A more rapid increase in pigment over the body, progressing anterior to posterior, is initiated at the beginning of the pelagic juvenile stage ( —20 mm). Transition from pelagic to benthic habitat takes place at lengths somewhere between 35 and 65 mm. The largest pelagic juvenile was 65.0 mm. Because of the long-term pelagic sampling effort off Oregon and the lack of specimens in the 35-65 mm length range, it seems likely that this species transforms at a relatively small size (=35-40 mm). Small benthic juveniles would not be re- tained in the large mesh bottom trawls. The small- est benthic juvenile observed was 65.0 mm long. Morphology (Tables 2, 6). — Various body parts were measured on 51 selected specimens of S. zacentrus (7.4-74.8 mm). Relative grovd:h trends are summarized in Table 2. This is a relatively deep-bodied form with body depth 359f SL in flexion larvae, decreasing to 30% in pelagic juveniles. It also has a rather large head, averaging 40-43% SL during the larval and trans- forming periods. Fin Development (Tables 2, 5, 6).— The adult complement of 16-18, usually 17, pectoral fin rays is present in the smallest larva (7.4 mm). The pectoral fin is of moderate length, increasing from 15.3% SL in flexion larvae to 26.7 and 26.4% SL in pelagic and benthic juveniles, respectively. The adult complement of pelvic fin spine and rays (1,5) is present on the smallest larva. The pelvic fin is moderately long increasing from 13.7 to 21.3% SL between flexion and benthic juvenile stages. The pelvic spine is also of mod- erate length, reaching 20% SL in transforming larvae. The adult complement of 8 + 7 principal caudal fin rays can be counted on the smallest larva. Five benthic juveniles, =65-75 mm, had superior and inferior secondary caudal fin rays, respectively: 10/11 (three specimens) and 11/10 (two specimens), as determined from radiographs. Dorsal fin spines and rays, including prespines, are completely formed by =8 mm but developing elements are countable in the smallest larva (7.4 mm). The dorsal and anal fin prespines become spines by =15.5 and 20 mm, respectively, marking the beginning of the pelagic juvenile stage. Spination (Tables 2, 7). — Spines on the left side of the head of the smallest S. zacentrus include the parietal; nuchal; first and third anterior preoper- cular spines; first, second, third, fourth, and fifth (as a bump) posterior preopercular spines; superior opercular spine (as a bump); postocular; first inferior infraorbital; first superior infraorbit- al; pterotic; and the inferior posttemporal spine. The parietal spine and ridge are serrated on all specimens <36 mm long. The relatively long (23% HL) parietal spine decreases in prominence to = 3% HL by the benthic juvenile stage. The nuchal spine is always smaller than the parietal and is completely fused to it in benthic juveniles. All five posterior preopercular spines are pres- ent as sharp spines by 8.5 mm and persist in adults. The third spine is relatively long (33% HL in flexion larvae) and decreases in length with development to 4% HL in benthic juveniles. Serra- tions are present on the first anterior preopercular spine of specimens <22 mm long, on the first and second posterior preopercular spines on specimens <26.5 mm, and on the third posterior preopercular spine to =34 mm. The first and third anterior preopercular spines are reduced to blunt bumps by = 25 mm and are absent on all specimens >26.3 mm. The superior opercular spine is sharp tipped by = 8 mm. The inferior opercular spine appears as a blunt bump at =8 mm and becomes a sharp tipped spine by =13 mm. The interopercular spine ap- pears as a blunt bump by =8 mm and as a small, sharp spine in all specimens >12 mm. The sub- opercular spine appears as a blunt bump by = 13 mm, is usually present as a short, sharp spine between 13 and 23 mm, is reduced to a blunt bump on specimens 23-26 mm, and is usually absent on specimens >26 mm. The ridge anterior to the postocular spine is serrated on specimens <27 mm. The preocular spine appears as a blunt bump at 14 mm and usu- ally as a moderately strong, sharp spine on most specimens >15 mm. The first inferior infraorbital spine is present as a sharp spine on all specimens to 35 mm and as a blunt bump in the benthic juveniles examined (65.0-74.8 mm). The second 249 nSHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO 2 Table 7. — Development of spines in the head region of Sebastes zacentrus larvae and juveniles. Specimens Parietal Nuchal Preopercular Opercular Inter- oper- cular Sub- oper- cular Pre- ocular Supra- ocular Standard length (mm) Anterior Posterior Post- 1st 2d 3d 1st 2d 3d 4th 5th Superior Inferior ocular 7.4 7.9 8.5 + + + + (') + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') (') + (') + - + (') - - - + + 9.2 -)- + -1- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') - - - 4- 99 + + -1- - -t- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') - - - 4- 10.1 + + -1- - (') 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') - - - 4- 10.6 -1- + -t- - ■¥ 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') - - - 4- 11.2 -1- + + - ■\- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - - - - 4- 11.7 + + -1- - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - - - 4- 12.4 + + + - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') - - - 4- 12.7 + + -1- - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- D {') - - 4- 13.3 + + + - + 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - - 4- 213.7 + + + - -(- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - - 4- 214.0 + + -1- - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - - 4- 214.8 + + -t- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (M - 4- 215.0 + + -(- - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') - 4- 215.6 + + + - -1- 4- 4- 4- -r 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 216.3 + + -1- - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 216.8 + (') + - -1- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- .4- 4- 4- (') - 4- 217.3 + -t- + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 217.9 + + + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 218.0 + + -t- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- 218.9 + + -1- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 219.3 + + + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 219.6 + -1- -1- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - ■4- 320.3 + + -1- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 320.6 -f + + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 321.0 -1- + -1- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 321.5 -t- + + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 322.0 + + + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 322.6 -1- + + - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 323.3 -t- + -1- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 323.5 -1- + 4- - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 324.0 -1- -1- -f - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- D 4- - 4- 324.4 + + + - (M 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- -)- 4- 4- - 4- 325.6 + + (') - (') 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 325.9 + + (M - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 326.3 + + n - (') 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 326.6 + + - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- 327.6 + + - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- 328.3 + + - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- 330.1 + + - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- 330.7 + -1- - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- 331.2 + + - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- (') 4- - 4- 333.7 + -1- - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- 335.3 + -1- - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- "65.0 +^ -1-5 - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- "65.3 -1-5 -t-5 - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- _ 4- - 4- "70.8 -1-5 -(-5 - - - 4- 4- 4- -r 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- "73.7 -1-5 -1-5 - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - 4- "74.8 -1-5 -^5 - - - 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- 4- - 4- - {') 'Bump, indicating beginning of spine formation or last stage before spine is overgrown. "Benthic juvenile. 2Transforming. 5 Parietal and nuchal spines fused only one tip visible. 3Pelagic luvenile. inferior infraorbital spine appears as a blunt bump at ~8 mm and as a sharp spine in larger specimens. The first superior infraorbital spine is present as a sharp spine on all specimens <23 mm, as either a sharp spine or a blunt bump between 23 and 35 mm, and was absent in the benthic juveniles examined (65.0-74.8 mm). The second superior infraorbital spine is occasionally present between 15 and 30 mm. The third superior in- fraorbital spine is usually present as a sharp spine in larvae and pelagic juveniles 14 to 35 mm. Small- er larvae and benthic juveniles examined lacked this spine. The fourth superior infraorbital spine usually appears as a blunt bump in larvae 8-10 mm long and as a sharp spine in all larvae and pelagic juveniles >10 mm. This spine was absent in benthic juveniles. The nasal spine appears as a blunt bump in larvae =10-11 mm long and as a sharp spine in all larger specimens. The tympanic spine appears as a blunt bump between 17 and 18 mm and as a sharp spine in all larger specimens. The pterotic spine is reduced to a blunt bump by 30 mm and is absent on benthic juveniles. The inferior posttemporal spine is pres- 250 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES above da ^h( 'd lines are unde I'fjoinK nutochoi d 11 ex ion. + denotes spine present and - denotes spine absent. Infraorbital Nasal Coronal Tympanic Pterotic Posttemporal Supra- cleithral Standard length (mm) interior Superior 1st 2d 3d 1st 2d 3d 4 th Superior Inferior Cleithral 7.4 79 8.5 + {') _ + + - (') _ _ _ + + + + + + + — 9.2 + + - + - - + - 9.9 + + - + - - (') (') 10 1 + + - + - - D {') 10,6 + + - + - - + (') 11.2 + + - + - - + + 11.7 + + - + - - + + 12.4 + + - + - - + + 12.7 + + - + - - + + 13.3 + + - + - - + + 213.7 + + - + - - + + M4.0 + + - + - + + + ^14.8 + + - + + + + + ^15.0 + + - + + + + + ^15. 6 + + - + + + + + 216.3 + + - + + + + + 216.8 + + - + + + + + 217.3 + + - + + + -f + 217.9 + + - + + + + + 218.0 + + - + (') + + + 218.9 + + - + (') + + + 219.3 + + - + + + + + 219.6 + + - + (') + + + ^20.3 + + — H- (') + + + 320.6 + + - + - + + + 321.0 + + - + - + + + 321.5 + + - + - + + + 322.0 + + - + - + + + 322.6 + + - + - + + + 323.3 + + — n + + + + 323.5 + + - (') - i- + + 324.0 + + - D - + + + 324.4 + + - + + + + + 325.6 + + - + - + + + 325.9 + + - + + + + + 326.3 + + - + + + + + 3266 + + - + + + + + 327.6 + + - + - + + + 328.3 + + — (') - + + + 330.1 + + - + V) + + + 330.7 + + - (') - + + + 331.2 + + - (') - - + + 333.7 + + - D - (') + + 335.3 + + — (') - + + + "65.0 + - - - - + "65.3 + - - - - - + "70.8 + - - - - - + "73.7 + - - - - — + "74.8 + — - - - - + - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - - + - + + - (') + - + + - V) + (') + + - V) + - + + - (') + + + + - + + (') + + - + + + + + - + + + + + (') + + + + + (') + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') + + + + + - + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (M + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + (') + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + - + + + + + - + + + + + - + + + + + — + + + + ent in all specimens examined. The supracleithral spine appears by ~8 mm and is present as a sharp spine on all larger specimens. The superior post- temporal spine appears as a blunt bump at =17 mm and is present as a sharp spine on all speci- mens >19 mm long. The cleithral spine appears as a blunt bump at =20 mm and is usually present as a sharp spine in specimens >23 mm. Scale Formation . — Lateral line organs, indicated by a row of light colored spots on the flesh, are visible on the smallest larva and most larger lar- vae before scales form. Developing scales are visi- ble on unstained specimens at 19.6 mm in the region above the pectoral fin, near the posttem- poral and supracleithral spines. The body is scale covered by =30 mm. Pigmentation. — The smallest S. zacentrus larva has melanistic pigmentation on the head over the brain, inside the tip of the lower jaw, and along the anteroventral margin of the maxillary. Melanophores are densely concentrated on the dorsal surfaces of the gut and are present in lesser concentrations on the body wall over the gut cav- ity. Four small melanophores are present along the ventral midline of the caudal peduncle. The pec- toral and pelvic fin membranes are covered with 251 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL 79, NO. 2 moderately large and elongate melanophores. Melanophores are also present along the ventral margin and underside of the pectoral fin base. As larvae develop, pigment increases on the head over the brain, and a few small melanophores may appear on the snout in larvae >12 mm. Melanophores appear on the opercle by =8 mm and increase in number with development. By ~12 mm, melanophores appear just above the opercle near the pterotic and inferior posttemporal spines. About one-half of larvae observed have at least one melanophore along the anterior margin of the cleithrum beneath the opercle. Gut pigmentation remains intense through the larval period. Melanophores begin to appear on the nape and along the dorsal surface of the body beneath the spinous and soft dorsal fins by =12 mm. This pig- mentation beneath the soft dorsal fin is composed of large, expanded melanophores and always ap- pears as the most densely pigmented area on lar- vae. The small melanophores along the ventral midline of the caudal peduncle usually disappear by =^10 mm; two specimens, 12.4 and 13.3 mm, had one and two melanophores in this region, respec- tively. A single larva (11.7 mm) had one melanophore on the margin of the hypural plate. The pectoral and pelvic fin membranes are usually pigmented in larvae although the intensity and number of melanophores decreases with develop- ment. By 12 mm, melanophores entirely disappear from the pectoral fin base. Early in the transformation period ( =14-20 mm), melanistic pigmentation rapidly appears over the dorsal surfaces of the snout, head, nape, body, and caudal peduncle and then continues to increase gradually ventrolaterally with develop- ment. Melanophores appear on the cheek, pos- teroventral to the eye by 14 mm, and begin to ex- tend around the posteroventral portion of the orbit by =16 mm. Melanophores extend from the nape anteriorly joining the head pigment and laterally toward the body midline at the same time that pigment extends ventrolaterally from beneath the spinous dorsal fin. By =16 mm, some me- lanophores appear aligned along the myosepta over the anterior one-fourth of the body but never appear very distinct. By =15.5 mm, internal and external melanophores appear along the lateral midline anterior to the point of notochord flexion and just posterior to the head on specimens greater than =16 mm. Melanophores appear along the margin of the hypural elements in most specimens >16 mm. A melanophore appears at the point of articulation of most dorsal fin rays on specimens >15 mm, occasionally of some anal rays on speci- mens 13.5-19 mm, and of most anal fin rays on all specimens >19 mm. Melanophores are usually ab- sent on the pelvic fin membrane on transforming larvae. Specimens >14 mm usually lack melanophores on the pectoral fin membrane. A single larva (19.3 mm) had a few small melanophores near the anterior base of the spi- nous dorsal fin membrane. Melanistic pigmentation continues to intensify and increase gradually on pelagic juveniles, 20-35 mm. Melanophores cover the dorsal surface of the head and appear at the tips of the upper and lower lips by =24 mm. By =28 mm, melanophores ex- tend over the cheek and around the posterior half of the orbit which becomes completely encircled by pigment at =30 mm. Melanophores appear on the gular region by =30 mm. Internal and external melanophores form a continuous irregular row along the lateral body midline by =20 mm. Melanophores also cover the ventrolateral area anterior to the soft dorsal fin between the dorsal margin and the lateral midline. At =21 mm, the large, expanded melanophores under the soft dor- sal become concentrated along muscles surround- ing the dorsal pterygiophores giving the appear- ance of vertical lines of pigment. Pigmentation on the body and caudal peduncle extends nearly to the ventral surface on specimens >28 mm. Areas of somewhat intensified pigmentation extend posteroventrally from the nape and spinous and soft dorsal fin bases appearing as faint saddles. A few small melanophores are occasionally present along the anterior portion of the spinous dorsal fin membrane near its base on pelagic juveniles <35 mm. The largest pelagic juvenile (35.3 mm) has melanophores scattered over the proximal two- thirds of the spinous dorsal membrane. Small melanophores appear on the caudal fin near its base by =25 mm. Benthic juveniles, 65.0-74.8 mm, have about the same pigment pattern as that of the largest pelagic juvenile. However, they are more darkly pigmented due to the addition of numerous small melanophores over most surfaces of the head, body, and fins. The added pigmentation over the upper areas of the head and opercle, and on the body results from development of melanophores borne on the scales and skin tissue surrounding the scale pockets. This pigmentation overlies the larval and pelagic juvenile pigment which persists on ben- thic juveniles most obviously beneath the soft 252 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES dorsal fin where large melanophores remain. Melanophores on the dorsal portion of the opercle increase in number and intensify appearing as a patch of darker pigment. A single bar of pigment extends from the posteroventral margin of the eye across the cheek and opercle. Five faint saddles extend, one from the nape, two under the spinous dorsal fin, one under the soft dorsal fin, and one across the caudal peduncle, ventrolaterally from the dorsal surface of the body to just beneath the lateral midline. Spinous and soft dorsal fin mem- branes are covered by small melanophores with bands of more intense pigmentation extending across the fins as extensions of the body saddles. The largest benthic juvenile (74.8 mm) also has moderately intense pigmentation along the distal edge of the spinous dorsal fin membrane, concen- trated immediately posterior to each dorsal spine. The caudal fin of benthic juveniles is lightly cov- ered by small melanophores with sometimes a slightly darker bar of pigment apparent in the proximal third of the fin. A few small melanophores are present on the proximal half of the anal fin membrane, and small melanophores lightly cover the proximal half of the dorsalmost pectoral fin rays and the adjacent pectoral fin base. Occurrence (Figures 9, 10). — Adult S. zacentrus occur from San Diego, Calif., to the Sanak Islands, Alaska, lat. 54.13° N, long. 161.37° W (Miller and Lea 1972; Hart 1973). Data from Niska (1976) show that 957^ of the total Oregon trawl catch of S. zacentrus landed from 1963 through 1971 was taken from depths of 181-416 m. Highest concen- trations of S. zacentrus found during a rockfish survey in 1977 between Pt. Hueneme and Cape Flattery were at depths of 183-272 m between Cape Blanco and the Columbia River, lat. 43°00 - 47°30' N (Harling et al. footnote 7). Larval S. zacentrus , including transforming specimens, in our collections were captured at stations ranging from 46 to 148 km offshore, -270-2,800 m depth. The data seem to indicate a more restricted offshore distribution for S. zacentrus larvae than for some other rockfish species: i.e., S. entomelas, 9-306 km; S. pinniger. 13-306 km; S. flavidus, 24-266 km; and S. melanops, 5-266 km (Richardson and Laroche 1979; Laroche and Richardson 1980). This is of interest as presum- ably the morphology of S. zacentrus, i.e., large head spines, stubby and deep body, would tend to enhance larval transport as suggested for S. pin- niger (Richardson and Laroche 1979). The more restricted offshore occurrence of larvae may re- flect the season of occurrence and associated wind regimes which are from the south and towards the coast in fall and winter. This would tend to minimize offshore dispersal. Pelagic juveniles oc- curred in about the same offshore area, 9-148 km offshore, as larvae. All demersal juveniles were taken from a single otter trawl haul made =40 km offshore, 91 m depth. Reported parturition time for S. zacentrus is July off Oregon (Westrheim 1975). Larvae <10 mm were taken in August only, and larger pelagic specimens were taken August through December. Demersal juveniles were taken from a single Oc- tober collection. Larvae enooiiiNGs 1 — r ^^^ — \ r- y> waSM : • 5 i^J;;::^^ 46' ] »srot"ift : 1 • • • \ • / 6 \ -as* j 41 3 1 • •• •• ^UeOPOBT / / T L**' n^ \ f ^ i - •' { ■^oos e»t . 2 s : Pelag IC J uveniles ^ 1 -— ~l « . \ SWOOmWGS 1 -1 n r y> mt.%f 46° ] •STOOt* •«9' 1 . : l"""" 44° 5* [. : i "f 1 - \ 2t NAUTIC4L MllfS Be nth IC Juveniles \ / ^ s I «i ?i \'"°!!'_"'J..2'J Figure 9. — Number of specimens and location of capture of larvae and juveniles of St?6as^es2ac('/i/n/s off Oregon ( 1961-78 » described in this paper. 253 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 20 AUG 20 in c „ 30'7f SL) forms includes, crameri, S. melanostomus, andS. pinniger. Among these species, head spines are pronounced in all but S. crameri. The early lack of pigmentation and later development of five pig- ment saddles in S. zacentrus is shared with S. crameri, S. helvomaculatus, S. levis, S. melano- stomus, S. paucispinis, and S. pinniger, although the saddles of S. zacentrus are less distinct than in the other species. The presence of pigment along the dorsal body surface beneath the dorsal fins of postflexion larvae and pelagic juveniles of S. zacentrus is also seen in S. flavidus, S. jordani, and S. melanops. These three species develop a dense dorsolateral covering of melanophores that is not restricted to saddles. Larvae and juveniles of S. zacentrus are distinguishable from all of these species on the basis of meristic characters. HEAD SPINE NOTES A group of four similar species, S. entomelas, S. flavidus, S. melanops, and S. mystinus occur off Oregon and are difficult to identify and sepa- rate as larvae and juveniles. We have discovered that literature describing head spine patterns among this group of species is inaccurate and con- tradictory. After completion of our work on S. flavidus and S. melanops i Laroche and Richardson 1980) and during the course of our present work on S. entomelas, we found undescribed variation in head spine patterns among the species of this group. To insure accurate identification of variant specimens, we quantified and compiled data on spine pattern variation among this group of species. This new information is summarized here. It will aid in identification and separation of the species within the group, particularly of variant specimens. The original description of Sebastes entomelas (Jordan and Gilbert 1880) described the preocular, supraocular, and postocular spines as minute, sharp, and concealed by scales. Phillips (1957) re- ported the above spines plus the tympanic spine were present on specimens "under about eight inches ..." (203 mm) long and become "nearly all obsolete" in large specimens with occasionally the 254 LAROCHE and MCHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES tips of the preocular spine weakly present. Hitz (1965) indicated that only the preocular spine is present. Hart (1973) stated that head spines are absent or weakly present, represented by the tip of the preocular spine. The original description of S. mystinus i Jordan and Gilbert 1881) stated that the "top of head" is without spines, with the exception of a very small nasal spine and sometimes a preocular spine present. Phillips (1957) and Hitz (1965) also reported this spine pattern. Miller and Lea's (1972) key to the rockfishes of California placed S. mystinus in the category of having head spines "weak or obsolete." Hart (1973) reported nasal and "... occasionally minute preopercular [sic = preocular] spines present" with other spines usually obsolete. Supraorbital spines are small even in juveniles and have often been overlooked on S. entomelas and S. mystinus. We found that preocular, su- praocular, postocular, and tympanic spines are usually present in both S. entomelas and S. mystinus, although the first two spines may be absent on one side of the head. The only excep- tion observed was one juvenile S. mystinus which lacked both preocular spines. These spines even- tually become overgrown by scales, tissue, and bone but using a dissecting microscope they are visible on all specimens examined including adults to 342 mm. However, scales and tissue must first be probed away before observation in S. mystinus >150 mm. In S. entomelas (115 pelagic juveniles, 49-78 mm) from Oregon, 4% lacked one preocular spine and 47c lacked one supraocular spine. In S. mystinus (135 pelagic juveniles, 51-71 mm) from Oregon, 6% lacked one preocular spine, and no specimen lacked a supraocular spine. During our previous study of S. flavidus and S. melanops (Laroche and Richardson 1980) some variation in supraorbital head spine patterns (i.e., occasional presence of preocular and supraocular spines) was observed which could potentially cause confusion with S. entomelas. Although simi- lar, S. mystinus has distinctive fin and scale counts (Laroche and Richardson 1980). Because we lacked material to quantify the spine variations, we excluded any variants (i.e., any specimens hav- ing preocular or supraocular spines) from the S. flavidus and S. melanops selected for the devel- opmental series to insure positive identification. New data quantifying spine pattern variation in juveniles of these two species are presented here (Table 8). Presence of a preocular spine is quite rare but occurrence of a supraocular spine is more variable particularly in specimens from Oregon. Separation of S. entomelas from these two species is still possible for most specimens based on pres- ence or absence of the preocular spine since >96% of S. entomelas and <2% of S. flavidus and S. melanops have one. Scale and fin ray counts further distinguish these species as described by Laroche and Richardson (1980). ACKNOWLEDGMENTS We wish to thank the followdng people for pro- viding specimens for examination: William Barss, Carl Bond, Tina Eschevera, William Eschmeyer, Wendy Gabriel, Gary Hettman, Michael Hosie, Howard Jones, Earl Krygier, Robert Lea, Jerry Lucas, Lawrence Moulton, William Pearcy, and Jose Sepulveda-Vidal. Special thanks are ex- tended to William G. Pearcy for allowing us to use his extensive midwater trawl collections from waters off Oregon and to Joan Newman for typing the tables and somehow maintaining good humor. LITERATURE CITED EFREMENKO, V N., AND L. A. LISOVENKO. 1970. Morphological features of intraovarian and pelagic larvae of some Sebastodes species inhabiting the Gulf of Alaska. In P A. Moiseev (editor), Soviet fisheries inves- tigations in the northeast Pacific. Part V, p. 267-286. Table 8. — Percentage occurrence of preocular Eind supraocular spines in juvenile Sebastes flavidus and S. melanops. Species Preocular spines Su| praocular spines Absent Absent Present Absent Absent Present both sides one SI ide both sides both sides one side both sides 100 95 5 98 2 64 28 8 100 96 4 98 1 1 51 30 18 100 69 23 8 80 70 9 1 flavidus: 'Bntish Columbia (W = 37;42-56 mm) ^Oregon (offshore) (N = 72;47-59 mm) . melanops 'British Columbia (N = 98:45-66 mm) ^Oregon (offshore) (W = 105;43-60 mm) 'Oregon (tidepools) (/V = 101;43-60mm) 'California (tidepools) (W = 80:41-53 mm) 'Benthic juveniles. ^Pelagic juveniles. 255 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 (Transl. Isr. Program Sci. Transl.; available Clearing- house Fed. Sci. Tech. Inf., Springfield, Va., as TT71- 50127.) Hart, J. L. 1973. Pacific fishes of Canada. Fish. Res. Board Can., Bull. 180, 740 p. HITZ, C. R. 1965. Field identification of the northeastern Pacific rock- fish (Sebastodes). U.S. Fish Wildl. Serv. Circ. 203, 58 p. JORDAN, D. S., AND C. H. GILBERT. 1880. Descriptions of two new species of Sebastichthys (Sebastichthys entomelas and Sebastichthys rhodochloris) from Monterey Bay, California. Proc. U.S. Natl. Mus. 3:142-146. 1881. Description of Sebastichthys mystinus. Proc. U.S. Natl. Mus. 4:70-72. LAROCHE, W. A., AND S. L. RICHARDSON. 1980. Development and occurrence of larvae and juveniles of the rockfishes Sebastes flavidus and Sebastes melanops (Scorpaenidae) off Oregon. Fish. Bull., U.S. 77:901-924. MILLER, D. J., AND R. N. LEA. 1972. Guide to the coastal marine fishes of California. Calif. Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 157, 235 p. MOSER, H. G. 1967. Reproduction and development of Sebastodes paucispinis and comparison with other rockfishes off southern California. Copeia 1967:773-797. 1972. Development and geographic distribution of the rock- fish, Sebastes macdonaldi (Eigenmann and Beeson, 1893), family Scorpaenidae, off southern California and Baja California. Fish. Bull., U.S. 70:941-958. MOSER, H. G., AND E. H. AHLSTROM. 1978. Larvae and pelagic juveniles of blackgill rockfish, Sebastes melanostomus, taken in midwater trawls off southern California and Baja California. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 35:981-996. MOSER, H. G., E. H. AHLSTROM, AND E. M. SANDKNOP. 1977. Guide to the identification of scorpionfish larvae (family Scorpaenidae) in the eastern Pacific with com- parative notes on species of Sebastes and Helicolenus from other oceans. U.S. Dep. Commer, NOAA Tech. Rep. NMFS Circ. 402, 71 p. NISKA, E. L. 1976. Species composition of rockfish in catches by Oregon trawlers 1963-71. Oreg. Dep. Fish. Wildl., Inf. Rep. 76-7, 80 p. Pacific Marine Fisheries Commission. 1964-78. Data series: Groundfish section (formerly bottom or trawl fish section). Pac. Mar. Fish. Comm., Portland, Oreg., 561 p. Phillips, J. B. 1957. A review of the rockfishes of California (family Scor- paenidae). Calif. Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 104, 158 p. 1958. Rockfish review. In The marine fish catch of California for the years 1955 and 1956 with rockfish re- view, p. 7-25. Calif Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 105. 1964. Life history studies on ten species of rockfish (genus Sebastodes). Calif. Dep. Fish Game, Fish Bull. 126, 70 p. Richardson, S. L., and W. a. Laroche. 1979. Development and occurrence of larvae and juveniles of the rockfishes Sebastes crameri , Sebastes pin niger, and Sebastes helvomaculatus (family Scorpaenidae) off Ore- gon. Fish. Bull., U.S. 77:1-46. WESTRHEIM, S. J. 1975. Reproduction, maturation, and identification of lar- vae of some Sebastes (Scorpaenidae) species in the north- east Pacific Ocean. J. Fish. Res. Board Can. 32:2399- 2411. WESTRHEIM, S. J., AND W R. HARLING. 1975. Age-length relationships for 26 scorpaenids in the northeast Pacific Ocean. Environ. Can. Fish. Mar. Serv. Tech. Rep. 565, 12 p. 256 LAROCHE and RICHARDSON: DEVELOPMENT OF LARVAE AND JUVENILES OF ROCKFISHES -c CO 3 -O c n tJ3 c CO c 0) :c -«-> •^ _o 1 0) ^ x: N 7: S cri p -a -2 c CO C8 u m c ,—, o W ^ C a § .2 ^ ■5 C X ^ s; o & s (1) c £1. — cc CO CO ^ 3 S CiJ _ffl c: ■^ U3 >5 CO Si s- C CC .«^ cz o CO Cm o T. c o T3 >■. o C O) 3 o- a J CO < X S z a. o Q. CD C in 2 ro _j CO c (0 m c ir < o CO c en >. "CD CO to «r O O □ w CO en >s o CD t) ID C D. C7>COO)CJ>'-OC\JtI- T- ^ >- .- c\i c\i cvj c\j CO'»C>JCDOCDcnc\l C\1C\10CT>C\J^.-C\J CO C\J O CO CD O CO CT> cj) in CD in CO o r-- in f^ r^ IT) I I I I - I - C\J n n r^ -^ n r) to LD CD CO ■^ '- CO CO CO 1^ CO CO -- I I I I I I CM CM CM I >- I I CM CO inin-^cDco% ^-^ -n'% ^ _ia:_j(r_icc_icc 3 t>j OJ k- CD (U CO ■C .a> a> CI c o 6 5 a> Q) CJ. Q. w CO CO CO Q tp r^'«fcO'«-r^to-^io ^ CO CO CM C\J C\J CNJ s 0) I - CM I - I ■- >- in in -- CM ■^ CM •- I CM CO »- I ^ •sr r- ,- ^ TT ^CM I ^ -II- I I I I I II I o ^-o ^o -^^ -^ _ia:_ia:_/Q:_j[r CD (3) S Q. CO c — O C7) CO O = CO (5-° en CM k~ OJO CJ CO 2 CO CM c ^ o OT CO r^ w CM 2C — CO o CD :^ CO CM o- CNJ O) •r^i-CMCJ>C0OOO i-c\jcopLr)h-cO'- CM I I O CO I I I I 2S I I I I CD^ I I I I I I I I I I -- CNICO I I I I i I 1^ CD CO CM I I I I r^oocMincM'^inco >- ■- CO c^ T- .- CO CO I I I I I I -" ^ CO I I I I I I inCM I ^^CM I I CO r^ -^ CM GO r^ i i in in CO CM CJ) o j i C^ CO CM •- ■- ■- >- C\J ■^ CO I I ^ 00 I I I I ^t I I I I I- CO I I I I -- _ia:_j[r_i(r_iir 3 CD CO CO c a> a o E ID CD a. CO CO CD CD c CD O c o O CM' in; — -^ cdo ^Cn-55-o CO-D 2- ^ . ^co CMO^CM ""^ COCO 2>co £■* ;2" ™1o C= °-° ° 5 CD >r 3=^ S = -p ° O O S-D co:^8o 3 0)" ID o >- 0) S O CO o ^ J- ID CO •V Q-tjN l-co^co ^ = 0) = (- Quinn 1732-812 ml Pratt |796-799m| Patton 1384-673m| Surveyor 1602-705 ml (J Durgin |705m| Welker |778-796m] Dickjns |476m| 9 Figure l. — Location of the eight seamounts which were surveyed on a 1979 NMFS cruise to the Gulf of Alaska. The range of sampling depths on each seamount is indicated. with intervening sediments. This physiography limited sampling to the seamount tops. Sampling depths ranged from 384 m on the Patton Sea- mount to 850 m on the Quinn Seamount. The carapace lengths of all crabs and the right chela heights of males were measured to the nearest 0.1 mm using vernier calipers (see Wallace et al. (1949) for a description of these two measure- ments). The reproductive condition of females was scored according to the following six-point scale: 1) Immature — white undeveloped ovaries and no egg remnants on the pleopod bristles. 2) Virgin — orange developed ovaries and no egg remnants on the pleopod bristles. 3) New eggs — orange external eggs with no evidence of embryonic eyes. 4) Developing eggs — tan external eggs with obvious dark embryonic eyes. 5) Hatching eggs — partial clutch of well- developed eggs, with remnants of hatched eggs attached to pleopod bristles and occa- sionally with prezoea on the egg mass. 6) Completely hatched — no external eggs, but remnants of eggs, especially the egg funiculi, attached to the pleopod bristles. Abdomens, complete with attached eggs, were removed from a selected number of females and preserved in buffered lO^r Formalin. In the labo- ratory, the pleopods from females with new and developing eggs were removed and dried. After freeing the eggs from the pleopods, the total clutch was weighed and a subsample was weighed and counted. Total egg number was calculated by dividing total clutch weight by the average egg weight of the subsample. Maximum egg length was measured to 0.1 mm using an ocular microm- eter. Measured eggs were well developed and Reference to trade names does not imply endorsement by the National Marine Fisheries Service, NOAA. 260 SOMERTON: LIFE HISTUKY OF DEEP-SEA KING CKAH apparently close to hatching, and had been stored in SS*"/ isopropyl alcohol after being fixed in Formalin. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION Depth Distribution Specimens of L. couesi were collected in every trap set from the shallowest in 384 m to the deepest in 850 m. Four sets on two seamounts were at depths less than the depth range (542-1,125 m) previously recorded for this species (Sakai 1971). Lithodes couesi occurs shallower on seamounts than on the continental slope. This hypothesis is supported by the results of a concurrent NMFS survey of the southeast Alaska continental slope that sampled roughly the same latitudes (54°-58° N) and depths ( 237-711 m) and used the same types of traps as the seamount study. Although depths <550 m were thoroughly sampled, specimens of L. couesi were not taken in <592 m (H. Zenger ). The shallow distribution of L. couesi on sea- mounts may be due to the absence of a predator or competitor which is able to exclude it from similar depths along the continental slope. Because sea- mounts are isolated from the ocean surface and from coastal areas, they are essentially submarine islands inhabited only by species that are able to tolerate the available depth range and that possess sufficient dispersal capabilities to reach seamounts from the continental slope. If a pred- ator or competitor were unable to colonize the seamounts, L. couesi may respond by expanding its range into shallower water. A similar pattern of competitive release and altitudinal expansion has been reported for birds on South Pacific islands (Diamond 1975). Size Distribution The size distribution of each sex was nearly unimodal with a mode at about 108 mm for males and 92 mm for females (Figure 2). The lack of an appreciable number of crabs <70 mm is probably due to size selectivity of the sampling gear, rather than a lack of small crabs on the seamount tops, because three of the four smallest specimens were caught with a bottom trawl in an area of the CO m < DC O LU m 50 40 30 20 10 ""H. Zenger, Fishery Biologist. Northwest and Alaska Fish- eries Center, National Marine Fisheries Sei-v'ice. NOAA, 2725 Montlake Boulevard East, Seattle, \VA 98112, pers. commun. June 1980. 60 80 100 120 CARAPACE LENGTH (mm) Figure 2. — Size distribution of male (solid linei and female I dotted line) Lithodes coueni by 2 mm .size intervals from trap samples from Gulf of Alaska seamounts. Patton Seamount where only larger crabs were obtained with traps. Other species of king crabs, especially P. cam- tschatica and P. platypus, display size stratifica- tion with depth; adults generally occur deeper than juveniles (pers. obs.). To determine if L. couesi also stratify, crab size was regressed against depth. Only the sizes of crabs from sable- fish traps were used in the regression because king crab traps caught significantly larger crabs than sablefish traps when both types were fished together ( ^-test, P < 0.001) and because king crab traps were not used on every seamount. For males, the slope of the regression line was not significant (P = 0.289). For females, the slope was signifi- cant (P = 0.030) and negative, indicating that larger females occur in shallow water. However, there was little variation in sampling depth on each seamount; thus, size variation with depth cannot be separated from size variation between seamounts. Sex Ratio In total, 880 females and 577 males were cap- tured in 24 trap sets. The large preponderance of females suggested that the sex ratio may not be 1:1. If the sex of each specimen were independent of the sex of other specimens in the same set, then the observed proportion male, 0.40, is signifi- 261 cantly different than 0.50 (Z = 7.8, P^s 0.001). Sex ratio, however, was not homogenous between trap sets (x^ = 137.5, P^ 0.0001), indicating that the sex of each specimen was not independent of other specimens but highly correlated. Thus, females tended to be caught with other females and males tended to be caught with other males. Segregation by sex is also commonly observed for P. camtschatica (pers. obs.). Although the sexes of crabs within each set are correlated, the hypothesis of a 0.50 proportion male in the population can still be tested if each set is assumed to be an independent random sample. The test is made by calculating a t- statistic from the mean and variance of the pro- portion male within individual trap sets. Because the number of crabs within each set varied con- siderably, the mean proportion was calculated as a weighted average, with the weighting factors equal to the number of crabs in each set (Cochran 1943). The ^test was not significant (t = 0.396, P = 0.86); thus, a 1:1 sex ratio is not rejected. Female Reproductive Condition The number of female L. couesi in each of the six categories of reproductive condition is shown as a function of size in Figure 3. Eighty-six percent of the females examined were mature ( categories 3-6). Virgin females had partially developed ovaries and appeared to have never spawned previously. Assuming virgin female L. couesi require the same length of time to complete maturity as "pubescent" female P camtschatica (Powell et al. 1973), their first spawning will occur soon after their next molt in the following spring. Mature female L. couesi display more hetero- geneity in their reproductive condition than fe- male P. camtschatica. This is exemplified in the following table, where the percentage of mature female L. couesi in each of the four mature reproductive categories is compared with the equivalent reproductive categories of female P. camtschatica collected in the eastern Bering Sea at the same time as the seamount survey. FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 25r completely hatched eggs Devel- Completely New oping Hatching hatched Species eggs eggs eggs eggs L. couesi 50 35 6 9 P. camtschatica 97 .2 1 ^\ hatching eggs CO OQ < CE O OC LU m 25r virgin 25r immature 60 80 100 CARAPACE LENGTH (mm) 120 Although no distinction was made between devel- 262 Figure 3. — Number of female Lithodes couesi by 2 mm size intervals in each of the six categories of reproductive condition described in the text. oping and hatching eggs for P camtschatica, it is evident that P. camtschatica had nearly com- pleted spawning and were carrying new eggs, whereas L. couesi had not completed spawning and were carrying eggs in a variety of develop- mental stages. If L. couesi are similar to P camtschatica in spawning soon after hatching the previous clutch, then the heterogeneity in their reproductive con- dition can be interpreted in either of two ways. First, L. couesi were sampled midway in their spawning season; therefore, the maturing eggs hatch later in the season. Second, L. couesi were sampled at the end of the spawning season; therefore, the maturing eggs are from spawning in the current season and hatch in the succeed- ing year. The difference in these interpretations SOMERTON: LIFE HISTORY OF DEEP-SEA KING CRAB reflects the degree of reproductive synchrony in the population. If the first interpretation were correct, L. couesi could be as synchronized as P. camtschatica and the heterogeneity in reproduc- tive condition could merely be due to fortuitous timing of the survey. But if the second interpreta- tion were correct, L. couesi would be quite asyn- chronous compared with P. camtschatica because, at least in P. camtschatica, the eyed (developing) eyes would have been spawned at least 4 mo previous to sampling (G. C. Powell ). Although the embryological development of L. couesi eggs was not studied — this would be necessary to completely resolve the question — I believe that the second interpretation, that L. couesi has an asynchronous spawning, is correct because the eggs classified as developing were clearly in a much earlier stage of development than were the hatching eggs. The asynchronous spawning of L. couesi is probably related to the great depths which it in- habits. Temperate species having planktotrophic larvae typically have synchronous breeding cycles because of the rather brief periods which are optimum for larval survival. Since seasonal fluc- tuations are damped with depth, L. couesi may be unable to detect seasonal cues with precision, or more likely, may have larvae which do not rise to the euphotic zone and do not need to be synchro- nized with the surface production cycle. Asynchro- nous spawning was also observed for another deepwater crab, Geryon quinquedens (Haefner 1978). Crustaceans living at depths greater than L. couesi have such asynchrony in spawning that seasonal peaks in spawning activity are absent (Rokop 1977). Size of Maturity Maturity of females was determined by the presence of eggs or egg remnants on the pleopods. Thus, reproductive categories 1 and 2 were con- sidered immature and categories 3 to 6 were considered mature. Maturity of males was deter- mined from the size of the chela relative to the size of the carapace using a method discussed in Somerton (1980). This method assumes that when chela and carapace measurements are plotted against each other on a double logarithmic scale. the points lie along two straight lines, one describ- ing the relative growth for juveniles, the other describing the relative growth for adults. A com- puter technique was used to iteratively fit two lines to the data until the best fit (minimal residual sum of squares) was achieved (Figure 4). Maturity was then based on the final assignment to one of the two categories. 50 60 70 80 90100 150 CARAPACE LENGTH (mm) 200 ^G. C. Powell, Fishery Biologist, Alaska Department of Fish and Game, Division of Commercial Fisheries, P.O. Box 686, Kodiak, AK 99615, pers. commun. June 1980. Figure 4. — Classification of male Lithodes couesi chela height and carapace length measurements into juvenile (dots) and adult (pluses) categories. The relative growth of the chela is described for juveniles by the lower line (CH = 1.52 CL — 4.17; SD for intercept and slope are 0.19 and 0.04) and for adults by the upper line (CH = 1.70 CL - 4.83; SD for intercept and slope are 0.13 and 0.03). Regression methods of Somerton (1980), see text. The size of 50% maturity was estimated by fitting a logistic equation to the percentage ma- ture by size using the methods discussed in Somer- ton (1980), then evaluating the fitted equation to determine the size corresponding to 50% mature. Percentage mature and the fitted logistic equation are shown for both sexes in Figure 5. Estimated sizes of 50% maturity were 91.4 mm for males and 80.2 mm for females. Fecundity Fecundity of L. couesi increases up to a size of 95 mm and remains fairly constant thereafter (Fig- ure 6). The apparent curvilinear relationship between fecundity and size is similar to that reported for P. platypus (Sasakawa 1975) but unlike the strict linear relationships reported for 263 FISHERY BULLETIN: VOL. 79, NO. 2 6 no — 0)0) I I I ~^ ""80 100 120 140 CARAPACE LENGTH (mm) 100 Gjjgia nPioiiiigiagKDgigiiDgig i 80 100 CARAPACE LENGTH (mm) 120 Figure 5. — Percentage of male (upper) and female (lower) Lithodes couesi classified adult as a function of size. The size of 50% maturity was estimated by first fitting a logistic equation to the data, then determining the size (shown by dotted lines) corresponding to 50% mature. P. camtschatica (Haynes 1968), L. aequispina (Hiramoto and Sato 1970), and L. antarctica (Guz- man and Campodonico 1972). An attempt was made to develop an appropriate functional relationship to describe the fecundity and size of L. couesi. To determine whether or not this relationship should be curvilinear, the fit of a second degree polynomial was statistically com- pared with that of a straight line. The coefficient of o o o CO O O LLI DC LU 00 2 80 90 100 110 CARAPACE LENGTH (mm) 120 Figure 6. — Fecundity o^ Lithodes couesi as a function of size. An asymptotic curve was fit to the data using methods described in the text. Three specimens ( shown by circles) had conspicuously fewer eggs. Although these females did not appear to be damaged, their fecundities were excluded from the analysis. the squared term of the polynomial was highly significant (F = 12.23, P< 0.001), indicating that the polynomial fit the data better than a straight line; however, a second degree polynomial was not a good relationship because the predicted fecun- dity did not increase monotonically with size. Since it is unlikely that fecundity reaches some maximum and then diminishes with size, an asymptotic curvilinear relationship was consid- ered. The chosen equation is E = E^ - Ae~ , where E is egg number, L is carapace length, E^ is a parameter representing the theoretical maxi- mum number of eggs that can be carried, and A and B are parameters controlling the rate at which the maximum egg number is achieved. Using nonlinear regression, the best fit was ob- tained when E = 4,329 - 3.19 x 10^ ^-0172^ (Figure 6). If the number of eggs a female could carry were limited either by the length of the pleopods or by the volume of the brood chamber enclosed between the abdomen and the sternum, then fecundity should increase in proportion to the carapace length raised to a power of one or greater, that is, fecundity should be an upwards concave func- tion of size. The best fitting equation is concave downwards, which indicates that some other mechanism limits fecundity in L. couesi. One possible explanation is that the low oxygen con- 264 SOMERTON: LIFE HISTORY OF DEEP-SEA KING CRAB centrations at the depth inhabited by L. couesi reduce the ability of females to aerate clutches larger than some fixed size. One consequence of an asymptotic form to the fecundity and size relationship is that the repro- ductive effort, or the proportion of the total energy intake devoted to reproduction, must decrease over some part of the reproductive lifespan of L. couesi. Theory predicts and many animals display an increase in reproductive effort with age (Pianka and Parker 1975). Since fecundity ap- pears to be fairly constant over approximately one-half of the mature size range of L. couesi, reproductive effort could increase only if either egg size increased with age or growth ceased. Individual dried egg weight, however, does not increase with crab size (P = 0.15), and the lack of wear and accumulation of epifauna on the exo- skeleton suggests that molting, and presumably growth, continues throughout the life of females. Egg Size Lithodes couesi eggs in a late stage of develop- ment have a mean length of 2.3 mm (SD = 0.076, N — 33). This size is quite similar to previous estimates of mean or median egg size reported for other species in the genus Lithodes — L. antarc- tica, 2.2 mm (Guzman and Campodonico 1972); L. aequispina, 2.1 mm (Hiramot